JP6927168B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some such gaming machine, for example, there are a plurality kinds types per having different number of rounds are provided, by varying the game value that can be acquired, there is what is sought on Xing taste.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, that a further interest towards the top has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the fact that a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied, and a specific discriminating result in which the discriminating result of the discriminating means is predetermined. Based on the fact that the determination means is executed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, and the discrimination means are executed. and a demonstration execution unit capable of executing a predetermined effect, including at least a representation embodiment dynamically displayed in the identification information display means for indicating the result of judgment means, the first set condition is satisfied set the game state of the Jo Tokoro based on, with a predetermined gaming state setting means for setting a game state before Symbol plants constant based on the different second set condition is established from the first setting condition the gaming machine in the said plant constant gaming state in which the first set condition is set based on the satisfied, the second setting the plant constant a condition is set based on the established It is possible to execute a specific effect including a specific effect mode that is not included in the predetermined effect executed in the gaming state , and during the execution of the specific effect, the degree of advantage of the determination by the determination means is dynamically displayed. Ru suggested that der using the identification information that is.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, prior Symbol second setting condition is a condition satisfied if the privilege game is finished, the first setting condition, the This is a condition that is satisfied when the settings of the gaming machine are initialized.

Gaming machine of claim 3, wherein, in claim 1 or 2 gaming machine wherein the gaming machine, since the set playing state of the plant constant is continuously over a discrimination of the specific number of predetermined the specific determination result based on the fact that a different off determination result and, Ru der configuration capable of executing the specific effect Te.

Gaming machine of claim 4, wherein, in the third aspect gaming machine wherein the gaming machine, the number of successive said out discrimination result in after the game state of the plant constant is set a multiple of the specific number based on the, Ru configuration der capable of executing the specific effect.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein a specific element corresponding to the degree of advantage of discrimination by the discriminating means is a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage. A specific element setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a second state corresponding to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree, and the specific effect of the specific effect. As a type, the first specific effect in which the first state is executed higher than the second state, and the second state in which the second state is executed is higher than the first state. 2 includes specific effect and a class determining means for determining a type of the plurality of 1 comprising at least a.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the fact that a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are predetermined specific discriminant results. Based on the determination of the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, and the discrimination of the discrimination means, the discrimination result of the discrimination means is determined. wherein and a demonstration execution unit capable of executing a predetermined effect including at least a representation embodiment dynamically displayed in the identification information display means, the constant Tokoro based on the first set condition is satisfied for indicating set the game state, said having a predetermined gaming state setting means for setting a game state before Symbol plants constant based on the different second set condition is established from the first setting condition, the gaming machine in the game state of the first set the plants constant a condition is set based on the established, the second set condition is executed in the game state of the plant constant which is set based on the established It is possible to execute a specific effect including a specific effect mode that is not included in the predetermined effect , and during the execution of the specific effect, the degree of advantage of the determination by the determination means is dynamically displayed. Ru suggested that der using the information.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to claim 2 gaming machine described in the claim 1 in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the prior SL second setting condition is a condition satisfied if the privilege game is finished, the first The setting condition of is a condition that is satisfied when the setting of the gaming machine is initialized.

Thus, it is possible to suppress the it is possible to vary the execution easiness of specific effect in the constant game state where it is set when it is initialized, is a game in the gaming state of Jo Tokoro becomes monotonous There is an effect.

According to claim 3 gaming machine described, in addition to the effects of claim 1 or 2 gaming machine wherein the gaming machine, since the set playing state of the plant constant is a particular number of a predetermined based on the fact that a different off determination result from said specific discrimination result in succession over a judgment is executable constituting the specific effect. As a result , there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the deviation determination results will be continuous.

According to claim 4 gaming machine described in the addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine, the number of successive said out discrimination result in after the game state of the plant constant is set the Based on the fact that the number of times is a multiple of the specific number of times, the specific effect can be executed. As a result , the specific effect is executed every time the continuous number of times of the deviation determination result becomes a multiple of the specific number of times, so that it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued until the number of consecutive times is a multiple of the specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, a specific element corresponding to the degree of advantage of discrimination by the discriminating means is a first degree of advantage. A specific element setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the above and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. As the type of the specific effect, the first specific effect in which the first state is executed at a higher rate than the second state and the second state are executed more than the first state. that provided the ratio is a second specific effect to be higher, and type determination means for determining at least including the type of the plurality of 1 and a.

As a result, the state of the specific element can be suggested by the type of the specific effect, so that the player who wants to infer the state of the specific element is expected to execute the specific effect in the specific game state. Can be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which schematically showed the structure of the Fuden prize apparatus. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed the flow which the winning ball flows into the out opening in the Fuden winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the winning ball flow into the special electric operation port in the general electric prize winning apparatus. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which schematically showed the structure of the V winning apparatus. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which shows the ball flow in the V winning apparatus when the storage valve is a storage state in the game per accessory. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the 1st embodiment, and is the ball flow in the game per accessory when the storage valve shifts from the storage state to the release state, and the 1st movable valve is located in the induction position. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the 1st embodiment, and is the ball flow in the game per accessory when the storage valve shifts from the storage state to the release state, and the 1st movable valve is located at the passing position. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the start of V rush displayed in 81, (c) showed the hold state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram showing a holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of hitting a normal symbol in V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of hitting a normal symbol. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of hitting an accessory during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 13C displays the display screen shown in FIG. 13A. It is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol in the case of this, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of V winning per V rush middle accessory displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of the V rush middle accessory hit loss displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the form, (c) is the figure which showed the display screen shown in FIG. 14 (a). It is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol in the case of being done, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14 (b) is displayed. .. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a jackpot ending during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of the jackpot ending in the V rush. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the timer addition in V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and (c) is each when the display screen shown in FIG. 15 (a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of a symbol, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of V rush, and (b) is the third symbol display in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of V rush extension displayed on the apparatus 81, (c) shows the hold state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16 (a) is displayed. FIG. 6D is a schematic diagram showing a holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a special screen at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a special screen at the time of a jackpot ending, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the heaven mode which is displayed on the symbol display device 81, (c) is a hold of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17 (a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the situation, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a middle chance effect per accessory displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a middle chance effect per accessory, and (b) is a third embodiment in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of the normal drawing stop during V rush displayed on the symbol display device 81, and (c) is the case where the display screen shown in FIG. 18A is displayed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of stopping a special figure during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of stopping a special figure. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a lucky time effect during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 19C is a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 19A is displayed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol in FIG. 19 (d), and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the operation scenario table per accessory in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the operation scenario table per normal diagram in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario per normal use diagram in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the scenario per time-saving general drawing in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the game per normal figure is executed in the normal state in the first embodiment. (A) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the game per normal figure is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram of the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surfaces B to D. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric start port winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory per object control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure variation start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the general drawing-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the notification command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which schematically showed the structure of the Fuden prize apparatus. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed the state which the ball which won a prize in a general electric winning apparatus can flow down to the 2nd special electric operation opening. (A) is a state in which the normal figure long hit game and the accessory hit game are executed in duplicate in the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the above, in which (b) is a long variation of the normal figure and a game per character in the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the state which is executed in duplicate, and (c) shows the hold state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram shown, and FIG. 90 (d) is a schematic diagram showing a holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90 (b) is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than a predetermined period. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is longer than a predetermined period, and (c). ) Is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b). It is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol in the case of. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the end conditions of the game per character executed during the long hit of the normal figure in the second embodiment are different. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the end conditions of the game per accessory executed during the long fluctuation of the normal figure in the second embodiment are different. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the type selection table per drawing in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the operation scenario table per second accessory in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the operation scenario table per normal figure in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two scenarios per normal figure for time saving in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the contents of 3 scenarios per time saving general drawing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric start opening winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing-related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory-per-purpose related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory hit start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure residual variation suggestion processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure-related time update process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the Danger time during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment is entered, and (b) and (c) are shown. d) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the jackpot is discarded at the Danger time during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is interrupted at the Danger time during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the Danger time selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric start opening winning process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the Danger time setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically about the counter and the like provided in the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the small hit random number table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the modified example, and is the schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the Fukuden prize apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation stop process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure variation start processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop-related process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the end condition selection screen displayed in 81, (c) showed the hold state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after selection of the end condition displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode after selection of the end condition, and (b) is the third symbol display in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the V rush start screen displayed on the apparatus 81, (c) shows the hold state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 146 (b) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special electric start opening winning process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the switching process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the end condition setting process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the end condition-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the display mode in the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification. It is a front view which shows typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 7th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial perspective views schematically showing the structure of the right electric accessory according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 5 is a plan view schematically showing an opening / closing lid of a right electric accessory according to a seventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views schematically showing a part of the right side region in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the probabilistic state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of transitioning from the probable change state to the latent probable state displayed in 81. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the time when the second special symbol change is not started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a RUSH game executed during a latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the special figure holding ball is changed during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a specific number of special figure holding balls is reached during a RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which suggests the end of the super RUSH game which is displayed on the apparatus 81. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which suggests the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 7th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram which shows typically the flow of the game in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the random number 7 table per first in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the small hit random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, and (d) is the second hit random number 7 in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table included in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of 7 tables for normal use which the ROM of the main control apparatus has in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic 7 tables included in the ROM of the main control device in the 7th embodiment, and (b) is the ROM of the main control device in the 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of 7 tables for latent accuracy. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table included in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the general drawing variation pattern selection table which a ROM has. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol variation stop processing 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 detachment stop process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop-related process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure discard setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect mode setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ceiling effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 7 for special figure 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the probabilistic change setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the setting process 7 in RUSH executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which showed the structure of the V winning apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the V winning apparatus in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the V winning apparatus in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the V winning apparatus of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram which shows typically the flow of the game in the modified example of 7th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit random number table 202ga executed by the main control device 110 in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table which the ROM of the main control apparatus has in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of 8 tables for probability change which the ROM of the main control apparatus has in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 8 tables for latent accuracy included in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit type selection 8 table which the ROM of the main control apparatus has in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol variation stop processing 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 detachment stop process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table which the ROM of the main control apparatus has in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table included in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection 9 table which a ROM has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the icon display number selection table included in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the continuous production selection table which ROM has. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting processing 9 in RUSH executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing 10 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when reach is established in the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the tenth embodiment. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which is displayed on the symbol display device 81, and is changing per normal figure in a normal time. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the normal time of normal drawing displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the tenth embodiment. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a chance zone for executing a second special symbol lottery (variation) is set, which is displayed on the symbol display device 81 at normal times. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is restarted during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is restarted in a special variation effect executed in a state where the special figure 2 hold displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment is not acquired. Is. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol variation is executed in a state where the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. , (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol variation is executed in a state where the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period, and (b) is the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the probability variation jackpot game, and (c) is the latter half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode displayed in the period, and (d) is an example of the display mode displayed in the latter half period of the ending period of the probabilistic jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case of the non-reach variation pattern in the tenth embodiment, and (b) shows the flow of the game in the case of the reach variation pattern in the tenth embodiment. It is a timing chart. (A) to (c) are timing charts showing the flow of the effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control unit according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit according to the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table possessed by the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table, and (b) is the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the ordinary random number 10 table which a ROM has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 10 table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 10 table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the ten tables for normal use in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation / time saving 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a normal medium special drawing 2 effect selection table included in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the probabilistic effect selection table included in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a transition diagram which shows typically the flow of the game in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the update process 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing 10 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the general drawing-related process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing 10 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process 10 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 10 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in eleventh embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic views schematically showing a procedure for changing the setting in the eleventh embodiment, and (e) to (g) confirm the setting in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the procedure for this. It is a timing chart which showed the transition of the effect mode at the time of ending the setting change state in the eleventh embodiment and shifting to the state where a normal game is possible. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the jackpot type selection 11 table in eleventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability 11 table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM clearing table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in eleventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram which shows typically the flow of the game in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the set value control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command reception process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous disengagement effect displayed on a third symbol display device when the first special symbol is deviated by a lottery during the latent state in the twelfth embodiment. (B) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth embodiment when the continuous disengagement effect is executed and the disengagement cannot be continued until the chance zone is set. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the lottery of the 1st special symbol was missed three times in a row in a latent state. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the latent accuracy 12 table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing at the time of disconnection executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the thirteenth embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which shows typically the internal structure of the lottery apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device in a state where both the ball discharge door and the ball stop portion are closed in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a schematic view schematically showing a case where the ball discharge door is opened while the game ball is parked inside the lottery device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a top view of the distribution rotating body in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the time-dependent change of the state of each part at the time of a small hit winning in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the time-dependent change of the arrangement (rotation position) of the distribution rotating body immediately after the end of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the transition of the game after the end. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the charge time effect displayed on the third symbol display device when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery in the time saving state in the thirteenth embodiment. , (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a game ball enters the second entrance and the number of reserved balls increases during execution of the charge time effect in the thirteenth embodiment. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control unit according to the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number 13 table per second in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the direct hit table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V-per table according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving 13 table in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage detection processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 13 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process 13 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in 14th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state which the standing accessory is operated to the overhang position in 14th Embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state which the tilting accessory operates in the overhanging position in 14th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the winning rate suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the winning rate in which the setting 6 is determined is notified by the winning rate suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the 14th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the variation type of a high setting confirmation super reach is executed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the main control unit in the 14th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the RAM configuration of the main control unit in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 14 table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special 1 hit table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special 2 hit table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the left-handed state table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the distribution of the hit random number in the 14th Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the right-handed state table in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving giving table in 14th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram which shows typically the flow of the game in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a low probability state and a probability variation state of the special symbol in the 14th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between the jackpot probability and the winning rate within 100 games for each set value. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the effect type selection table in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the power supply return operation table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the accessory operation setting table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 14 executed by MPU in the main control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 14 executed by MPU in the main control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the set value control process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 14 executed by MPU in the main control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 14 executed by MPU in the main control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 14 executed by MPU in the main control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 14 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the origin return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 14 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initial operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command reception process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal state setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related processing 14 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process 14 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 15 table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the random number range setting table in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 15 executed by MPU in the main control device in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the set value control process 15 executed by MPU in the main control device in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the reach symbol selection effect is executed in the modified example of the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the 14th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device when the reach symbol look-ahead effect is executed in the modified example of.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. FIG. 6 to FIG. 9 are schematic views schematically showing the structure of the Fuden winning device 640 provided in the lower region, and FIGS. 6 to 9 show a special variable winning device provided in the upper left region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic view schematically showing the structure of 65, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that launches a ball into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the vehicle to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. It is configured by assembling a ball opening 63, a special drawing ball opening 64, 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back surface side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entry port 63, the special drawing ball entry port 64, the general electric winning device 640, the V winning device 65, the variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is installed and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a first symbol display device 37 including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the special figure entry port 64. That is, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure lottery) executed when the ball enters the special figure entry port 64. In this embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 having one type of special symbol is used, the result of one type of special symbol lottery is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. For example, the special symbol is displayed. If the pachinko machine 10 has two types (first special symbol and second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to each special symbol type.

Further, the first symbol display device 37 indicates which of the gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the game state (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) by the LED, and the special symbol (first symbol) fluctuates. Whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player or is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the symbol is off is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lit state that the fluctuation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, the various gaming states are notified by the combination of the emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify the various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of special symbols) is performed when a ball is entered (winning) in the special drawing entrance 64. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, a winning or not judgment (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game in which the player is in a privileged gaming state is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the special winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state where the ball can be easily won, and by making the specific winning opening 650a win the ball, many winning balls are awarded for a short period of time. The game that can be acquired at is executed. This jackpot game is executed (when) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and is executed for an opening period (for example, 1 second) of a predetermined time (for example, a specific winning opening of the variable winning device 650). A predetermined period (a period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the 650a), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. From the period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the interval period in which the closed state is set, and the ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The jackpot game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the ball is set at the timing when the specific winning opening 650a is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the jackpot game is completed. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Regarding the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the game status at the time of winning the jackpot and the type of jackpot won A different length may be set according to the above. For example, when a jackpot is won in which a game content different from the game content at the time of winning the jackpot is set as the game content executed after the jackpot game is completed, the game content is set. The ending period of the jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period of other jackpot games (for example, 2 seconds), and the jackpot game ends for the player during the ending period. It is preferable to configure the effect of guiding the content of the game to be executed later in advance so that it can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in which the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game is the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot is set to that of another jackpot game. It is preferable to set it so that it is shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). As a result, the player can be made to play the game efficiently.

Further, without using a configuration for actually discriminating between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game is completed, for example, based on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game is completed may be defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance according to the defined contents.

Although a specific description will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game to be executed by a player when the game state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), and It is configured to be different from the game to be executed by the player in the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), and is in the time saving state than the game to be executed in the normal state. It is configured so that the game to be executed is more advantageous to the player (the jackpot game is easier to be executed).

In other words, the ending period of the jackpot game, in which the jackpot is won with the normal state set and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning, the time saving state is already set. The content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is specified so that it will be longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the jackpot is won in the state of being present and the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. You should keep it. As a result, the ending period of the period suitable for the player can be set only by executing the jackpot game according to the predetermined contents.

In addition, it may be specified in advance that the period other than the ending period is different depending on the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the opening period and the interval period may be different. Further, even if the types of jackpots won are the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in which jackpot type the jackpot was won (the lottery result of the special symbol) but also the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is also determined. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game is completed. As a 4R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot type with a different duration of the time-saving state (after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving jackpot continues until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning the jackpot (time-saving jackpot). (4 times) and a time-saving jackpot (15 times) in which the time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 15 times without winning the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, if the big hit is not won in the special symbol lottery, it is determined that the player is out of the game, and the player is not given a privilege. However, the lottery is not limited to this, for example, the big hit lottery. In some cases where it is determined that the lottery result is not the above-mentioned jackpot, the player is given less privilege than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the privilege of opening the V winning device 65 only for one round). It may be configured so that the winning game is executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the big hit type. The design corresponding to is shown.

In the present embodiment, either the "normal state" or the "time saving state" is set as the game state. In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/100), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (1/1000). It is called the low probability state of the normal symbol), and in the time saving state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to the low probability (1/100), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to the high probability (300/1000). It is a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a low-probability state of a special symbol and a high-probability state of a normal symbol).

Here, "4R jackpot (4 times of time reduction)" is a jackpot game in which the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), followed by a time reduction state (low probability state of a special symbol). , A big hit that can be shifted to a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 4 times is set after the big hit game is completed.

"4R jackpot (15 times of time reduction)" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the variable winning device 650 for 4 rounds), followed by a time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, normal symbol). It is a big hit that can be shifted to the high probability state of), and a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 15 times is set after the big hit game is completed.

In the present embodiment, after the time saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state, and the time saving described above is performed. The number of times indicates a time saving end condition. In other words, the number of time reductions of 4 times is a condition for ending the time reduction when the special symbol lottery is executed 4 times (the 4th special symbol change is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set. Is established, and the number of time reductions of 15 times means that the time reduction is performed when the special symbol lottery is executed 15 times (the 15th special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set. It is stipulated that the termination condition is satisfied.

That is, since "4R jackpot (4 times of time reduction)" is a jackpot type in which the time reduction end condition that is easier to be established is specified than "4R jackpot (15 times of time reduction)", "4R jackpot (4 times of time reduction)" ) ”,“ 4R jackpot (15 times in a short time) ”is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is easy to continue, and is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a condition regarding the number of special symbol lottery during the time saving state (time saving number of times) is defined, but other configurations are provided as the time saving ending condition. It may be used, for example, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than a big hit and the number of times that is a specific lottery result (specific deviation) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). Or, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time saving state is set, or a specific ball entry port (for example, a general ball entry port) during the time saving state. The end condition that is satisfied when the number of balls entered in 63a) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5) may be set.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general entry openings 63a are provided, in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that displays the variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display of the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of a ball into the special symbol entry port 64 (starting prize). The normal symbol (second symbol) is variably displayed triggered by the passage of a sphere through the third symbol display device 81 composed of (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21), for example, the left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (moving) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electric winning device 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured so that a hit game (a game per hit in a normal figure) that is in an operating state (open state) is executed.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is always constant (3 seconds) regardless of the result of the normal symbol lottery and the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the normal symbol. .. With this configuration, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute the game per normal symbol during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is reduced. In the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time is longer in the normal state than in the time saving state, the normal symbol hit game (normal symbol hit game) is difficult to be executed from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) to the normal symbol. When the game state shifts to the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which the winning game is easily executed, the long-time normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state). It shifts to the time saving state during the execution of the game), and even though the time saving state is set, the period during which the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state is not executed is set for a long time. It can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the game content (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the game per normal figure to be executed is different between the normal state and the time saving state without changing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. ing. Specifically, the game per game performed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the game per game performed during the normal state, that is, the ball is activated by special electric power. It is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the mouth 643. Specifically, when the normal state is set, after the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a), the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set. When a normal game per game is executed and a time saving state is set, a 3 second opening period is set after an opening period of 0.1 seconds (a closing period of the electric accessory 640a). A winning game (a game per hit in a time-saving normal map) is executed.

In this way, by executing the game per normal symbol in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is open is different according to the probability state of the normal symbol, the time is shorter than that in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). The state (high probability state of the normal symbol) can make it easier for the ball to be won in the normal electric winning device 640 during the game per normal figure.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the balls that have won the general electric winning device 640 during the game per game in the normal state and the time saving state is entered into the special electric operating port 643. It is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball that won the Fuden winning device 640 during the time-saving Fuzu game is better than the ball that won the Fuden winning device 640 during the normal game per game that is executed during the normal state. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the special electric actuating port 643. With this configuration, when the normal state is set, it is difficult to make the ball win the general electric winning device 640, and even if the general electric winning device 640 wins, the special electric operating port 643 When it is difficult to enter the ball and the time saving state is set, it is easy to make the ball win the general electric winning device 640, and when the general electric winning device 640 wins, the ball is moved to the special electric operating port 643. It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball.

That is, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of processes until the launched ball enters the special electric actuating port 643, a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the special electric actuating port 643 and a state in which the ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 are set. Since it is variable according to the game state to be played, the ease of entering the ball into the special electric actuating port 643 can be surely changed according to the game state to be set.

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the game method that is advantageous to the player is the same regardless of whether the game state is set to the normal state or the time saving state is set (the game method is the same). It is configured to be a left-handed game). In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the lottery opportunity for the normal symbol is established even in the normal state (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery, if a winner is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball launched by the left-handed game can reach is open-controlled, so that the time-saving game per figure However, it is difficult to win a ball in the Fuden winning device 640. During a normal game per game, there is a risk that the ball will win the Fuden winning device 640.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a ball wins the general electric winning device 640 during the game per game executed in the normal state, the winning ball goes to the special electric operating port 643. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the ball. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the game is executed by the same game method in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol). Even if a ball enters the general electric winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operating port 643.

In the present embodiment, the same fluctuation time (3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol). However, the game state is not limited to this, for example, there are a case where the game state is a low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol and a case where the normal symbol is a high probability state (time saving state). In the high probability state (time saving state) of, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be shorter. In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (during the high probability of the normal symbol), other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit are used to increase the hit probability of the normal symbol. If the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set to a state in which the ball is easier to enter the general electric winning device 640 than the low-probability state of the normal symbol, the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set regardless of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state during the high accuracy of the normal figure, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left side area (left side area) of the variable display device unit 80, and flows down the left side area of the game board 13 among the balls fired on the game board. Most of the spheres (about 100%) are configured to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second symbol, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result is incorrect, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is held up to once in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided at one-third of the maximum number of holding lamps, and is symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left side region of the game board 13 by the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only some of the balls flow down. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.

Next, the configuration of the Fuden winning device 640, which is in an open state when a winner is won in a normal symbol lottery, will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the Fuden winning device 640 is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and has an open state that allows a ball to win a prize inside the variable display device unit 80 and a closure that makes it harder to win a prize than the open state. The electric accessory 640a, which can be changed according to the state, is electrically driven to the place where the ball flowing down the left side area (the area on the left side of the front view from the variable display device unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 reaches. An accessory 640a is attached. In the present embodiment, the balls launched by the left-handed game reach the general electric winning device 640 at a rate of one ball of about three balls (if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball reaches the general electric winning device 640). It is configured to reach a winning position).

The electric accessory 640a is normally maintained in a closed state, and when a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a is variably operated to an open state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. A game is executed per game. That is, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be able to provide the player with a state in which the ball can easily win the prize in the Fuden winning device 640 by winning the winning by the ordinary symbol lottery and executing the game per game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, the lottery opportunity of the normal symbol can be established (the ball can pass through the through gate 67), and the normal symbol can be passed. It is configured so that a ball can be won in the Fuden winning device 640, which is opened when the player wins the lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be established by a left-handed game. In addition, the variable winning device 650, which is variably operated by the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, is also arranged at a position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can win.

With this configuration, the player can always play the game with the same game method (left-handed game) regardless of the game state, so that it is troublesome for the player to change the game method. The game can be played smoothly without giving.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, the configuration of the Fuden winning device 640 and the flow of the winning balls in the Fuden winning device 640 will be described in detail. FIG. 3 is a schematic view schematically showing the internal configuration of the Fuden winning device 640, and FIG. 4 is a schematic showing the flow of the winning balls in the Fuden winning device 640 flowing into the out port 644. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing a flow in which a winning ball enters the special electric operating port 643 in the general electric winning device 640.

In the present embodiment, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and when the winning is won in the lottery of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. A game is executed per game. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the open state in this game per game, the ball is in a state where it can win a prize in the normal electric winning device 640.

As shown in FIG. 3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the Fuden winning device 640. The second movable valve 642 is a second flow path that communicates a ball that flows into the normal power winning device 640 and flows down the first flow path 641a to the special electric operation port 643 when the game is executed. The first state that can be guided to 641b and the second state that can be guided to the third flow path 641c that communicates with the out port 644 are configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern. Further, the balls that have won the Fuden winning device 640 are detected by the ball detection sensor 640s, and the number of winning balls to the Fuden winning device 640 in one game per game can be measured. Although detailed description will be omitted, in the present embodiment, when the number of balls that have won the Fuden winning device 640 in one game per game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), that time point It is configured so that the game is completed per game. In the present embodiment, the prize balls (4 pieces) are paid out when the ball wins the special electric operation port 643, and the prize balls are not paid out when the ball enters the out port 644. ing.

The cover body of the Fuden winning device 640 is formed of a transparent acrylic resin so that the player can visually recognize the ball flow in the Fuden winning device 640, and the cover body is attached to the game board 13. ing. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the flow of the ball in the Fuden winning device 640, the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball winning the Fuden winning device 640.

The electric accessory 640a provided in the Fuden winning device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition wall 640k2 as the base of rotation, and is in a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to win the Fuden winning device 640 (FIG. 3) and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the ball is more likely to win a prize in the general electric winning device 640 than in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is configured to be housed in the general electric winning device 640, specifically, on the left side (specifically, on the vertical line of the second partition wall 640k2). The tip of the first partition wall 640k1 is configured to protrude from the left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and the closed electric accessory 640a is configured to fit below the tip of the first partition wall 640k1. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the closed electric accessory 640a to come into contact with the ball fired by the left-handed game, so that it is difficult to cause a situation in which the electric accessory 640a is damaged. can.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, a ball that has won a prize in the I Ching winning device 640 wins a prize in the special electric operating port 643 according to the game state set at the time when the game per game is executed. It is configured so that the probability of winning (easiness of winning) is different. Specifically, it is executed in the normal state by changing the period from the execution of the game per normal figure to the opening control of the electric accessory 640a in a predetermined opening pattern (opening period per normal figure). The ball that won the prize in the Fuden winning device 640 in the game per Fuzu is closer to the special electric operating port 643 than the ball that won the prize in the Fuden winning device 640 in the game per Fuzu that is executed during the time saving state. It is structured so that it is difficult to win a prize.

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the game is played by the same game method (left-handed game) in both the normal state and the time-saving state, the ball is moved to the special electric operating port 643 during the normal state. It is possible to suppress winning a prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the game per game performed in the normal state is more difficult for the ball to win in the game winning device 640 than the game per game executed in the time saving state. Is configured to be executed. With this configuration as well, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning a prize in the special electric actuating port 643 during the normal state. That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the measure that makes it more difficult for the ball to win in the Fuden winning device 640 during the normal state than in the time saving state, when the ball wins in the Fuden winning device 640 during the normal state. Has a measure to make it more difficult for the ball to win the special electric operating port 643 than when the ball wins in the general electric winning device 640 during the time saving state. As described above, by providing the configuration for suppressing the winning of the ball to the special electric actuating port 643 in the normal state in a plurality of stages, the suppression can be performed more reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the flow of the ball when the ball wins in the normal electric winning device 640 in the game per game executed when the normal state is set will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a ball that has won a prize in the general electric winning device 640 in a game per normal drawing in a normal state. In the present embodiment, in order not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method, the game can always be executed in the left-handed game. Therefore, even in the normal state, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, when the lottery opportunity of the normal symbol is established (the ball passes through the through gate 67) and the game per normal symbol is executed, the general electric winning device There was a risk that the ball would win within 640.

That is, in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol), the ball is won in the general electric winning device 640 as compared with the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which the ball is easily won in the general electric winning device 640. Although it is difficult to make the game state, in the present embodiment, since the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the time saving state, the probability is low, but the general electric winning device 640 is in the normal state. There was a possibility that the ball would win a prize inside.

As described above, the Fuden winning device 640 is provided with a special electric operating port 643 that triggers the execution of the winning game (game per character) that opens the V winning device 65, and the ball can be played during the normal state. When the ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 and the game per character is executed, there is a problem that the player who is playing the game in the normal state is provided with an excessively advantageous game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 enters the special electric operating port 643 during the normal state and the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 during the time saving state are the special electric. It is configured so that the rate of entering the ball into the operating port 643 is different from that of the ball. Specifically, when the game per game is executed in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state after the game per game is started, as compared with the case where the game per game is executed in the time saving state. The second movable valve 642, which moves based on the start of the game per game, is set to a long period until it becomes (the first open state), and the ball that has won the prize in the normal electric winning device 640 is out. It is configured so that the ball can win the general electric winning device 640 only at the timing of maintaining the state in which it can be guided to the mouth 644).

That is, as shown in FIG. 4, when the ball wins the prize-winning device 640 during the game per game executed in the normal state, the flow period of the ball is designed to be about 0.5 seconds. A ball flows down the flow path 641a, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 located in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (reaches the second movable valve 642). The period from when the ball enters the out port 644 is designed to be about 0.3 seconds). With this configuration, even if a ball wins in the general electric winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operating port 643, so that the game in the normal state can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the player who is performing the game from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

Further, in order to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operating port 643 during the normal state, the ball is prevented from winning the general electric winning device 640 by the game per figure executed during the normal state. Since it is not necessary to use a special configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the game per game executed in the normal state, the timing of changing the second movable valve 642 to the second state (at the start of the game per game) is the electric accessory. The game per normal figure was started earlier than the timing when the 640a was opened (4.1 seconds after the start of the game per normal figure), for example, the second movable valve 642 was located in the first state. Even so, the ball does not reach the second movable valve 642 while the second movable valve 642 is variably operating. With this configuration, the second movable valve 642 during variable operation and the ball that has won the prize-winning device 640 come into contact with each other, causing a ball jam in the prize-winning device 640. , It is possible to prevent the situation where the second movable valve 642 breaks down.

In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643 provided in the general electric prize winning device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls and the ball enters the out port 644. The prize ball is not paid out when the ball is thrown, but the prize ball is not limited to this. For example, when the ball enters the out port 644, the ball enters the special electric operation port 643. It may be configured so that a larger number of prize balls (for example, 10 pieces) are paid out than in the case of the above. With this configuration, it is possible to change the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of ordinary symbols according to the game state. Specifically, in the state where the normal state is set, more prize balls are given to the player as a privilege than in the time saving state, and in the state where the time saving state is set, the player is given more prize balls. In addition to less prize balls than in the normal state, it is possible to give as a privilege a game per character that is not (difficult to be) given in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the lottery result of the normal symbol.

Further, the same number of prize balls (4 pieces) may be paid out depending on whether the ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 or the ball enters the out port 644. , It is preferable to configure it so that it is difficult to tell whether the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 has entered the special electric operating port 643 or the out port 644. As a result, the player cannot know which entry port (special electric operation port 643, out port 644) the ball has entered depending on the number of prize balls paid out, so that the player can win the general prize. After making the device 640 win the ball, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it seem that the winning game (game per character) for opening the V winning device 65 is executed or not is determined by lottery. It can be done, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the ball detection sensor 640s to pay out the prize balls (4 pieces) when the ball is detected. The prize ball given to the player can be paid out as soon as possible based on.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the open state, the tip side of the first partition wall 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel to each other, and a spherical flow path is formed between them. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a located in the open state receives the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing out of the general electric winning device 640 due to the impact.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the ball when the ball wins in the normal electric winning device 640 in the game per game executed when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a ball that has won a prize in the Fuden winning device 640 in a game per Fuzu in a time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the game per game is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is performed after the game per game is started, rather than the game per game executed during the normal state. Since the period until the open state (first open state) is set to be short, the second movable valve 642 can guide the ball that has won the prize in the general electric winning device 640 to the special electric actuating port 643. The electric accessory 640a is opened at the timing when the state) is maintained.

Therefore, when the ball that has won the Fuden winning device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball wins the Fuden winning device 640). Since the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a flows down (the flow-down period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds), and a special electric current is provided. Enter the operation port 643. Then, a game per accessory that opens the V winning device 65 is started based on the detection of the ball entering the special electric actuating port 643 by a detecting means (proximity sensor) (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing down vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is the second movable valve 642. The second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable to a position where it is difficult to make contact with the valve. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into frequent contact with the second movable valve 642 and causing the second movable valve 642 to fail. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, when the game per game is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is opened 0.1 seconds after the game per game is started. The ball is ready to win a prize in the electric winning device 640. Therefore, the shortest period from the execution of the game per game to the arrival of the ball at the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (the electric accessory 640a is open after the game per game is started). It is a total value of 0.1 seconds until it becomes, and 0.5 seconds until the ball that has won the prize in the Fuden winning device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642).

The second movable 642 operates variably at the same time as the game per game is started, and the variable operation period (the period required to change from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state)). Is configured to be 0.1 seconds. In addition, since the second movable valve 642 is variably operated 1 second after the electric accessory 640a is closed in the game per game, the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. The second movable valve 642 is changed when a period (1 second) that is twice the period (0.5 seconds) until the ball that has won the prize in the Fuden winning device 640 reaches the second movable valve 642 has elapsed. It is configured to work. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the second movable valve 642, which is in the variable operation, to come into contact with the ball even in the game for hitting a normal figure, which is executed in the time saving state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. On the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2), a V winning device 65 is provided so that a ball launched by a left-handed game and flowing down the left side region can win a prize. Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and the flow of the winning balls in the V winning device 65 will be described. In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643 provided in the general electric winning device 640, a game per character that opens the V winning device 65 is executed. ing. Then, the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning a ball in the V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65.

That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the execution opportunity of the big hit game (special figure big hit game) that is established when the big hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol, when the ball wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening 165). It has an opportunity to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is established. In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired of.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. The V-winning device 65 is provided with an opening / closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which the ball is easy to win and a closed state in which the ball is harder to win than the open state. The opening / closing door 65a is provided at a position (see FIG. 2) where a ball flowing down the left side region of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a game per accessory is executed.

In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b through which a ball passing through the open / close door 65a in the open state flows down is formed in a space between the first partition wall 65k1 and the second partition wall 65k2, and the first flow thereof. A storage valve 66a is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the road 65b (flowing period 0.5 seconds) reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a so that the ball that first wins the V winning device 65 during the game per accessory is temporarily stored in the storage portion. It is configured. Further, a storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a so that it can detect that the ball is stored in the storage portion. Further, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a winning ball in the V winning device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b, and the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects the ball. The number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 during the winning game is measured, and the prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at a position where the balls that have won the V winning device 65 flow down immediately afterwards, it is possible to suppress the situation where a specified number or more of the balls are won in the V winning device 65. At the same time, it is possible to immediately give the player a prize ball during the game per character.

Further, a second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first out port 163a is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, in the second flow path 65c, the spheres that have flowed down the first flow path 65b do not directly flow into the first flow path, but the spheres are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. Subsequent spheres that have flowed down the path 65b come into contact with the spheres stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a and are guided to the second flow path 65c. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is an entry port for discharging the ball that has entered the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and flows down the second flow path 65c ( After a flow period of 0.1 seconds), the ball that has entered the first out port 163a flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed description will be described later, the storage valve 66a has a storage state in which balls can be stored according to the progress of the game per character (corresponding to an operation scenario in which the game per character is executed), and a storage state thereof. It is configured to be variably operated to the release state where it is more difficult to store the ball than the state. When the storage valve 66a is located in the released state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other and are stored in a ball flowing down the first flow path 65b or in a storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The existing sphere flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a flow path formed in a space between the lower end side of the first partition wall 65k1 and the third partition wall 65k3 and having a width of about 15 mm in a straight line in the vertical direction.

A first movable valve 66b is arranged at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b has a movable pattern predetermined when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and has a guide position (protruding position) capable of receiving a ball flowing down the third flow path 65d. It is configured to be movable at a passing position (buried position) where the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d cannot be received. Specifically, it is configured to be movable according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d which is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and is driven and controlled by the main control device 110, and is the first movable. When the valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 66b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) for retracting from the V winning device 65, and the first When the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b moves to an induction position (a position protruding from the game board 13) protruding into the V winning device 65. It is configured as follows.

The first movable valve 66b located at the induction position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down the upper surface thereof, and as shown in FIG. 6, the downstream end side of the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b is the fourth flow. It is configured to incline downward toward the road 65e. Therefore, the sphere (flowing period 0.2 seconds) that has flowed down the third flow path 65d while the first movable valve 66b is located at the induction position (protruding position) has a fourth flow path on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b. It will flow down toward 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and a ball flowing down the fourth flow path 65e (flowing period 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. Similar to the first out port 163a described above, the second out port 163b is an entry port for discharging the ball that has entered the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and enters the second out port 163b. The ball flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the state where the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other and flow down the third flow path 65d (flow period 0.2). Seconds) flow into the fifth flow path 65f (flow period 0.1 seconds). A V winning opening 165 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning opening 165 is a winning opening that can be an opportunity to execute the jackpot game, and when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 in a state where the jackpot game is not executed, the jackpot game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6, a first out port 163a and a second out port 163b are provided in the V winning device 65. With this configuration, the ball that has won the V winning device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state can pass through the flow path (third flow) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 66a is in the release state. It is possible to reliably prevent the inflow into the road 65d, the fourth flow path 65e, and the fifth flow path 65f). Not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the first out port 163a is eliminated, the second flow path 65c and the fourth flow path 65e are communicated with each other, and the storage valve 66a is in the storage state. , The ball flowing down the second flow path 65c may be configured to enter the second out port 163b. In this case, in FIG. 6, the third partition wall 65k3 provided linearly in the vertical direction is tilted from the upper end side to the lower end side in the lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 6, that is, the lower end side of the partition wall 65k3. It is preferable to provide the fourth partition wall 65k4 so that the extension line in the direction is on the right side (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 6). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 65c flows into the fifth flow path 65f.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are two triggers for executing the jackpot game, that is, the case where the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol, and the case where the ball is V during the bonus game. A jackpot game may be executed when a prize is won in the winning opening 165. Hereinafter, when the jackpot game is explained by dividing the execution opportunity, the jackpot game executed when the player wins the V winning opening 165 is also referred to as a V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 65 of the present embodiment is in an open state in which balls can be won by executing the game per accessory, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a is in the third flow path. The ball is configured to flow down the 65d, and the ball wins the V winning opening 165 according to the operating status of the first movable valve 66b when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b. It is configured to determine whether or not.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, the time at which the first movable valve 66b is located at the induction position (the time during which the ball cannot win the V winning opening 165) is 5 seconds, whereas the time at which the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position (time). Since the ball is constantly moving in a movable pattern in which the time during which the ball can win the V winning opening 165) is 0.5 seconds, the rate at which the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d wins the V winning opening 165 is , Approximately 1/11.

Further, even if a plurality of balls are won by the V winning device 65 in one game per accessory, the operation of the storage valve 66a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one. Therefore, when the game per character is executed 11 times, the ratio is such that one big hit game is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the contents of the ball flow that has won the V winning device 65 during the execution of the game per accessory will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 7, the ball flow in the first half period (the period in which the storage valve 66a is in the storage state) of the game per accessory will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing a ball flow in the V winning device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state in the game per accessory. Although detailed description will be described later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be operated and controlled so as to be in the storage state from the time when the game per accessory is executed until the V winning device 65 is closed. ing. Then, when a plurality of balls win the V winning device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a, and the next prize is won. The ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

As described above, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, all the winning balls (for example, the balls P2) other than the balls P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a are configured to enter the out port 163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls do not stay in the V winning device 65. Further, the storage valve 66a is released once after the V opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after the operation control for closing the door 65a is executed). It is possible to reliably reduce the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d to one in the game per door.

With this configuration, the ease of winning the ball to the V winning opening 165 can be changed according to the timing of winning the ball to the V winning device 65 during the game per character and the number of winnings. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to provide a fair game to all the players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the contents of the ball flow (the latter half period of the game per accessory) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V opening / closing door 65a is closed and a new ball cannot win the V winning device 65, the storage valve 66a is released (indicated by the dotted line in the figure). When the transition occurs, the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, since the first movable valve 66b is located at the induction position, the ball P1 rolls the downward inclination formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b and passes through the fourth flow path 65e. It flows down and enters the second out port 163b.

On the other hand, when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the first movable valve 66b passes through the passage position. The ball flow when the ball is located in the above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic view showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 9, when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b and the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position, the fifth flow path 66f is used. It flows down and wins a prize at the V winning opening 165.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Below the variable display device unit 80, a special figure entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the special drawing entrance 64, the special drawing entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the special drawing entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. In addition, when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a privilege. In the present embodiment, out of the balls launched by the left-handed game, about 1 in 15 balls can enter the special drawing entry port 64.

As shown in FIG. 10, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, and the second symbol hold lamp are connected to the input / output port 205. Further, when the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening / closing door for changing the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 between the open state and the closed state, and the V winning device 65 The V winning port solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening / closing door, the storage solenoid 209c for variably driving the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and the first movable unit provided in the V winning device 65. The first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the valve 66b, the second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the general electric winning device 640, and various other devices are driven. A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid 209z or the like is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various types of switches (switches for detecting that a ball has entered each entry port, switches for detecting that the ball is located at a specific position, etc.), which are not shown. The switch 208 and the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 is variously based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Execute the process.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character for production (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command to make the lamp display device 227 emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 10). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power outage, power outage) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 19. 11A and 11B are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11B). The decorative symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variable display of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) has identification information that imitates the numbers “0” to “9”. It is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed by using different types of display modes according to the identification information imitating a number. In this way, by using the display mode corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in the vertical direction to perform variable display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11A, the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction, and the first symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. If the three symbols are aligned and stopped on the effective line L1 with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating by making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may try to do so. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol is configured to be variablely displayed (dynamically displayed), but the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is not limited to this. May be configured to be variable display (dynamic display). In this case, the player determines whether the variation display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special symbol or the variation of the normal symbol. It may be configured to notify incomprehensible. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of privilege is given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to execute both the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol and the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol, the game content to be executed ( The target of the third symbol may be switched according to the game state). For example, in the normal state, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is executed, and the time saving state is executed. The inside may be configured to execute the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol. In this case, it is preferable to display the third symbol in a variable manner according to the symbol type in which the lottery advantageous to the player (the lottery on the side where the player pays more attention to the lottery result) is executed. On the other hand, the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of the fluctuating symbol. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot is confirmed, the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot movie (opening effect). ) Is displayed.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display (confirmed display) for 1 second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball Is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. .. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new game ball enters the special figure entry port 64. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the special figure entry port 64 even though the player has continuously fired the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the third symbol is stopped. In many cases where the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is due to the fact that the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all because the player has quit the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the special figure entry port 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Will be executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls entered in the special figure entry port 64 and the through gate 67. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be produced by appearing.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the special symbol entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times the ball can be entered is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Further, when the ball enters the through gate 67, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to once, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. .. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In the small area Ds1, the left half displays a reserved ball number symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the special figure entry port 64, and the right half of the small area Ds1 is through. It is configured to display a reserved ball number symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the gate 67. In the example of FIG. 11B, four reserved ball number symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, while no reserved ball number symbols are displayed in the right half, so that the special symbol is displayed. There are four reserved balls, but the number of reserved balls with a normal symbol is zero.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the special figure entry port 64 is held up to 4 times, and the ball entering the through gate 67 is held up to 1 time. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Further, in the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm, but the display area may be formed in other modes, for example, the main display. Sub-display regions Ds may be formed below the region Dm. Further, in this case, it is preferable to variably form the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the set gaming state. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the game has changed to a different game state only by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a state in which the player is made to pay attention to the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which the variable display of the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the expectation is high is executed. Then, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be reduced, or the sub-display area Ds may be hidden.

<Regarding the content of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the contents of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed. This time saving state is continued until the lottery of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (until the end condition of the predetermined time saving state is satisfied), and when the lottery of the special symbol is executed the specified number of times, the ending condition of the time saving state is executed. Is established and the normal state is set.

The time saving state is a state in which a high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and compared to the case where the game state is the normal state, the open state in which the ball can enter the normal electric winning device 640 by the game per game is open. It is configured to be easy to set.

Then, when the ball is won by hitting the normal symbol and the ball enters the special electric operating port 643 in the general electric winning device 640, the game per character is executed, and the ball is inserted into the V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65. A game is executed to win a prize.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched aiming at the left side region of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a probability of 100%. Then, in the lottery of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the time saving state is set, it is designed to win with a probability of 3/10, and the normal symbol is designed to win. If the player wins the lottery, the game per game in which the electric accessory 640a is open is executed.

Most of the games per game that are executed during the time saving state (about 100%) by continuously executing the left-handed game, the period (3 seconds) in which the ball can be won by the general electric winning device 640. ) A game per game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened.

Further, in the game per game performed during the time saving state, most of the balls winning the Fuden winning device 640 are configured to enter the special electric actuating port 643, and the balls enter the special electric actuating port 643. A game per character is executed when the ball is hit. Then, when the game per character is executed, the V winning device 65 is opened, and the balls that have won the V winning device 65 win the V winning opening 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the V winning opening 165. The jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when the ball wins a prize.

In other words, during the time saving state, rather than executing a game aiming for a big hit by lottery of a special symbol (special figure game), a game aiming for a big hit by making a game ball win (V prize) in the V winning opening 165 (special electric train). Since the game) can be made easier to execute the jackpot game, the player executes the game while hoping for a V prize (V jackpot game) by the character-per-feature game in the special electric game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to make the general electric winning device 640 win the ball as a special electric game (to allow the ball to pass through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery), the left area of the game board 13 It is necessary to shoot a ball aiming at. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the ball also enters the special figure entry port 64, so that the special figure can be achieved during the time saving state. Both the figure game (a game in which a special symbol is drawn) and the special electric game (a game in which a normal symbol is drawn) are executed.

The time saving state in which the special electric game is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game is the time until the special symbol lottery executed by the special figure game reaches the specified number of times (that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol for the specified number of times). Since it is configured to continue until the time) elapses, when the game state shifts to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol that triggers the end of the time saving state and the transition to the normal state elapses. , The game is executed while expecting the V prize by the special electric game, which is the basic game method in the time saving state in the present embodiment.

In order to convey the state of the time-saving game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the third symbol display device 81 executes various effects. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, but when the jackpot game is executed and the jackpot ends, the V rush mode for indicating that the game state is a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is entered. And notifies that the time saving state has been set. Then, various effects during the V rush will be described. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the time saving state is referred to as "V rush".

First, the jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 12A. FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (game). When the final round of the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 12A, the characters "V rush will start after the jackpot ends !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. , It is shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player shifts to the V rush mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment is displayed that the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating the period for which the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot game continues is "40 seconds" and "V rush period 40 seconds get". Will be done.

Here, the display contents of the remaining time short-term mode 801 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the end condition of the time saving state, the end condition that is satisfied when the number of lottery of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (for example, 4 times) is set. Therefore, the time saving state is continued until the time until the lottery of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (that is, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the specified number of times) elapses. In the remaining time reduction period mode 801, a display mode indicating the total time obtained by totaling the fluctuation times of the special symbols until the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied is displayed.

Next, the holding status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (c). FIG. 12 (c) is a schematic diagram showing a holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (a) is displayed. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four reserved symbols for special symbols and a maximum of one reserved memory for ordinary symbols can be stored. In FIG. 12 (c), the running special figure th0 for explaining the status of the special symbol change during execution and the special figure 1st hold th1 to special for explaining the winning information of the special symbol stored in hold. FIG. 4 hold th4, running normal symbol fh0 for explaining the status of execution normal symbol fluctuation, and normal figure 1 hold fh1 for explaining the winning information of the normal symbol stored in hold. The situation of each symbol is explained using.

FIG. 12 (c) shows a state in which four special symbol reservations in which a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds is set are stored in the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 4th hold th4. That is, the period of the time saving state this time is set to 40 seconds, which is the total value of the fluctuation times for four special symbol lottery times. Therefore, the character "40 seconds" is displayed in the remaining time short period display mode 801 for indicating the duration of the gaming state which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner how long the V rush period lasts. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed in a specific number of seconds as shown in the remaining time reduction period display mode 801. As long as the remaining period of the game can be known, the player may be notified by using an indicator or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game with a feeling of excitement to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining time short period mode 801 is displayed in a display mode showing all of "40 seconds" calculated as the duration of the V rush. Not limited to, at the time of notifying that the V rush is entered, only a part (for example, 30 seconds) of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush (for example, 40 seconds) is notified. However, the value corresponding to the unreported portion (for example, 10 seconds) may be additionally notified during the execution of the V rush.

In this case, for example, when the number of time reductions is set to 4, the fluctuation time of the special symbols corresponding to the three special symbol reservations among the four acquired special symbol reservations (special symbol reservation) is added up. In the case of FIG. 12C, the value obtained, that is, “30 seconds”, which is the total value of the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 3rd hold th3, may be displayed at the time of entering the V rush. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the process for notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

As shown in FIG. 12A, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush is displayed by adding up the fluctuation times of a plurality of special symbol lottery executed until the time saving state ends. ing. Further, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current number of reserved special figures, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to display the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand how many values of the remaining time short period mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush are the total value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the number of special figure reservations. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the fluctuation time of each special symbol lottery.

Therefore, for example, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which different fluctuation time fluctuation patterns are set depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or not, depending on the display mode of the remaining time short period mode 801. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result in the special figure hold (whether or not the winning information corresponding to the big hit winning is included in the special figure hold) in advance.

Further, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is selected, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, 20 seconds. A pachinko machine 10 configured to select either a second or 30 second fluctuation pattern, the special figure 1st hold th1 is "10 seconds", the special figure 2nd hold th2 is "30 seconds", and special When the third hold th3 in FIG. 3 is "20 seconds" and the fourth hold th4 in the special figure is "10 seconds", "50 seconds" is set as the display mode of the remaining time shortening period mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. It is good to configure it to be displayed. With this configuration, it is executed in a period shorter than the duration of V rush "90 seconds" (total value of fluctuation time for 4 special figure reservations) and in a time saving state. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery in a short time is the big hit and the fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds).

That is, when displaying only a part of the period instead of the entire period in which the V rush continues, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time (50 seconds) set when the jackpot is won as described above is displayed. In addition to the configuration, for example, in a display mode of "60 seconds" that makes the player think that the first time reduction is a deviation fluctuation (variation time 10 seconds) and the second time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation (variation time 50 seconds). It may be configured to display the remaining time short period mode 801. That is, a value that is smaller than the value indicating the duration of the actual V rush and is calculated when at least the fluctuation time that can be selected by the jackpot fluctuation and the fluctuation time that can be selected by the deviation fluctuation are combined is displayed. Just do it.

In the present embodiment, the acquired number of special figure reservations is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, but the display is not limited to this and is used to indicate the number of special figure reservations. The aspect may be displayed. Even in this case, the number of special figure reservations currently acquired for the player can be known by displaying the display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations in a display mode in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the contents. It can be difficult.

Next, the V rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. FIG. 12 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the ending period of the jackpot ends and V rush is started, and FIG. 12 (d) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (b). It is a figure which showed the state of each symbol in the case where it is displayed. That is, FIG. 12B shows a display screen at the time when the special figure hold shown in the special figure first hold th1 starts to fluctuate at the ending of the big hit, and the special figure is shown at the ending of the big hit. The special figure hold, which was the first hold th1, is shifted to the running special figure th0, the special figure 2 hold th2 is the special figure 1 hold th1, and the special figure 3 hold th3 is the special figure 2 hold. On th2, the special figure 4th hold th4 is a display screen in a state of being shifted to the special figure 3rd hold th3, respectively. Further, since the V rush is started, there is no new ball entering the special figure entry port 64, and the special figure 4th hold th4 is in an empty state. Then, as shown in the running normal figure fh0, the lottery of the normal symbol has also started to fluctuate, and the hold is accumulated in the first hold fh1 of the normal figure (see FIG. 12 (d)).

When the V rush is started, the characters "V rush in progress" are displayed in the main display area Dm as a game status notification mode indicating that the current period is the V rush period. Then, next to the main display area Dm, a character 810 imitating a rabbit is dynamically displayed as if it is trying to take something out of the bag 810a. This indicates that the normal symbol is changing.

Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush period, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed. The timer 812 displays a value obtained by adding up the fluctuation times for the specified number of times of the special symbol until the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12B, the number of lottery of special symbols in the time saving state is defined as 4 times, and the fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is 10 seconds, and the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 3 The timer 812 shows "40.0 seconds", which is the total value of the fluctuation times up to the hold th3. The timer 812 is displayed so that the value is subtracted each time the fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is subtracted, so that the player can easily understand that the period of V rush is in progress. can.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V rush ends when the timer reaches 0 !!" are displayed, and when the value of the subtracted timer 812 becomes 0, the V rush ends. This is informed to the player. As described above, during the V rush period, the player executes the game for the purpose of inserting the ball into the V winning opening 165. Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (remaining period) until the advantageous period ends by visually recognizing the displacement state of the value displayed on the timer 812.

Then, the character "1st station" is shown in the upper left display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the jackpot is won from the normal state (so-called first hit), and after the V rush is started, the game state is changed. It shows how many V rush periods it is without shifting to the normal state. Further, "0pt" is displayed in the display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1, and the number of prize balls won by the jackpot won during the V rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of times the V rush continues in the display area HR1 and the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot during the V rush in the display area HR2, the player can display the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot during the V rush at the player's own timing. The game history can be confirmed, and the convenience of the game can be improved.

Further, the V rush fluctuation region 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the symbols fluctuate (dynamically display) in the left region 811a, the middle region 811b, and the right region 811c of the V rush fluctuation region 811, respectively. The display mode is displayed. In the V rush fluctuation region 811, information for suggesting the gaming situation during the V rush to the player is displayed. FIG. 12B shows that the special figure and the normal figure are currently changing, and the V rush period has passed by the V rush fluctuation region 811.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13A, a display screen when a normal figure is won during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a normal figure is won during V rush, and FIG. 13 (c) is a diagram showing the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (a). It is a figure which showed the state of each symbol in the case of. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electric winning device 640 is opened so that the game ball can enter.

As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the running normal figure hold fh0 is indicated by “◯” indicating that the player has won the lottery of the normal symbol. Then, in the upper right of the main display area Dm, the character 810 who was looking for something from the bag 810a at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12B) won the lottery of the normal symbol and got the privilege. An animation for taking out the ticket 810b on which the characters "lucky", which is a notification mode for showing, is written, is displayed. Then, in the display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general electric winning device 640 is displayed, and a lottery of ordinary symbols is won, and the electric accessory 640a is open. It is displayed in. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V acquisition chance if you enter the electric chew !!" are displayed. From these display contents, the player can understand that the game is executed aiming at the electric chew, so that the correct game method can be guided to the player. That is, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds described above are guidance notification modes for guiding the content of the game to be executed to the player.

Further, the timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm displays 30.9 seconds as its value. In the game situation of FIG. 13A, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution shown in the special figure th0 during execution is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 3rd hold th3. The special drawing lottery up to is the period of V rush. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812. In addition, in FIG. 13A, the special figure 4th hold th4 which was not stored at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12B) is held, but this is the specified number of times of the V rush. Since the special drawing lottery is executed after the period has elapsed, the fluctuation time of the special drawing 4th hold th4 is not added up. Therefore, "-" is shown in the fourth reserved th4 of the special figure (see FIG. 13 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 13B, a display screen when an accessory is hit during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game per character is executed during V rush, and FIG. 13 (d) is a diagram showing the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (b). It is a figure which showed each symbol situation at the time of being displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball wins the special electric operating port 643 in the general electric winning device 640, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened. The game is executed.

FIG. 13 (b) is a display screen when a game ball wins a prize in the special electric operating port 643 in the general electric winning device 640 according to the normal drawing shown in FIG. 13 (a). In FIG. 13A, the holding ball held in the special drawing 1st holding th1 is shifted to the running special drawing th0 in FIG. 13B. Then, the remaining fluctuation time is 9.9 seconds, and a question mark indicating that the fluctuation is temporarily stopped is shown (see FIG. 13 (d)). In the present embodiment, when a character-per-character game or a jackpot game is executed, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution is interrupted (temporarily stopped) until each per-game is completed. doing.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which has decreased with the fluctuation time of the special figure up to FIG. 13A, is changed (subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol change). Is interrupted and displayed at the time when is interrupted (that is, the time when the special electric operation port 643 is won). Further, the characters "STOP !!" are displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of the timer 812 is interrupted. From these display contents, the player can grasp that the lapse of the V rush period is interrupted. Then, in the display area HR3, the V winning device 65 in a state where the V opening / closing door 65a is opened is schematically displayed, and is displayed together with the characters "Aim !!".

As a result, the player can understand by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 that the V opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is open (the game per character is being executed). can. That is, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. 13B are the function of the game status notification mode for notifying the player of the game status during the V rush, and the accessory. It has a function of a guidance notification mode for guiding a player to a game to be performed during a hit game.

Further, in the V rush fluctuation region 811, the character "V" is stopped and displayed in the left region 811a and the right region 811c, and is displayed in a so-called reach display mode. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Big hit if you enter V !!" are displayed, and according to these display contents, the player can make the V winning opening 165 win the game ball soon. You can play the game with the expectation that you can do it.

That is, as shown in FIG. 11B, a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a game in which a lottery of a special symbol is executed and the lottery result is expected to be a big hit (special). In the figure game), a plurality of identification information (each symbol dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol)) for showing the lottery result is variablely displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns) (for example, three columns). A reach display mode (for example, a combination of the same identification information) that is dynamically displayed and in which the other symbol strings other than one symbol sequence are a combination of identification information for indicating a jackpot winning among the plurality of symbol sequences. ) Is stopped and displayed, the reach effect that raises the expectation of winning a big hit is executed.

The game (special electric game) executed in the time saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is not a special symbol lottery, but a V prize is finally obtained through various processes based on the normal symbol lottery. Since the game is a game in which a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning a ball in the mouth 165, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the specific game content of the special electric game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left region 811a of the V rush fluctuation region 811, the middle The variable display mode of the symbol (character) that is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) in each area of the area 811b and the right area 811c is such that the effect mode is executed as if the special figure game is being executed. It is configured. With this configuration, the player can grasp each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without grasping the specific game content in the special electric game. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14A, a V winning screen during the game per accessory during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening 165 and a big hit is given during the game per character during the V rush, and FIG. 14 (c) is shown. ) Is a diagram showing each symbol state when the display screen shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the game per character is executed during the V rush and the ball is won in the V winning opening 165 during the game per character (when the V is won), the jackpot game ( V jackpot game) is given.

FIG. 14 (a) is a display screen when a ball wins a prize in the V winning opening 165 during the game per character shown in FIG. 13 (b). As described above, since the fluctuation of the special symbol is interrupted during the game per character, the running special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped with the fluctuation time remaining at 9.9 seconds. The special figure 1st hold th1 and the special figure 2nd hold th2 are held within the specified number of times of the V rush this time, and the fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds each. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period is "29.9 seconds" unchanged from the time point shown in FIG. 13 (b) (see FIG. 14 (c)).

Then, when it is confirmed that the ball wins a V prize and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the subtraction of the V rush period is not subtracted during the predetermined period (big hit game period). The display mode of "29.9 seconds" displayed by the timer 812 shown in 13 (b) is displayed in the display area HR4 which is less conspicuous than the timer 812. "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

In the present embodiment, when a V prize (V jackpot game) occurs during the temporary stop of the special figure, the special symbol lottery executed after the temporary stop of the special figure change is completed is executed this time. It is configured so that the time saving state continues until the time saving number of times set according to the jackpot type of the jackpot game is executed. That is, the information (number of time reductions) for satisfying the time reduction end condition is not updated (subtracted) due to the interrupted special symbol variation (restart special symbol variation) executed after the jackpot game ends.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 14 (c), when the number of time reductions of 4 is set after the jackpot game is completed, the special figure is held during the remaining period (9.9 seconds) of the special symbol change during the interruption 4 The value obtained by adding up the special figure fluctuation times for each piece is the duration of the next V rush. With this configuration, the special figure game is performed in the normal state, and the big hit game (V big hit game) is performed during the V rush as opposed to the time saving state (at the time of the first V rush entry) set by winning the big hit. In the time saving state (when V rush continues) that is executed and set again after the jackpot game ends, the V rush duration can be set longer by the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the restart special figure fluctuation. It is possible to make it easier to provide a V rush that is advantageous to the player when the V rush is continued than when the V rush is first entered. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the V rush to continue.

It should be noted that other methods may be used to set a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the V rush is continued than when the V rush is first entered. For example, the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied during the normal state. (A big hit is won in a special drawing lottery), and a time saving state is set after the big hit game ends, and a big hit game execution condition is satisfied in the time saving state (V prize in the special electric game), and the time saving after the big hit game ends. It may be configured so that a different fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol depending on the case where the state is set. Specifically, the execution condition of the jackpot game is established during the normal state (special figure lottery). (Winning a big hit) and the time saving state is set after the big hit game ends, the execution condition of the big hit game is established in the time saving state (V prize in the special electric game), and the time saving state is set after the big hit game ends It is preferable to configure it so that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to lengthen the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state when the V rush is continued than when the V rush is first entered. As a result, the V rush is performed. Can be extended in duration. Therefore, since it is possible to add value to the player who has continued the V rush, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to that of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the information (number of time reductions) for satisfying the time reduction end condition is updated (subtracted) by executing the restart special figure change. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the special symbol fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be executed when the V rush first enters than when the V rush continues. By configuring in this way, while suppressing the excessive continuation of the V rush, the V rush is performed without executing the jackpot game (V jackpot game) even once in the special electric game executed during the V rush. Can be suppressed from the end of the game and the decrease in motivation to play.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when the interruption timing of the special figure change during execution has a great influence on the length of the duration of the V rush after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is used. In a state where it is possible to interrupt the special figure change (for example, a state in which a normal hit game is won), it is configured to notify the player of information for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure change during execution. , The player may be configured to be able to choose whether or not to interrupt the special figure variation. That is, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game for interrupting the special figure fluctuation (special electric operation port 643 during the game per normal figure). (A game in which a ball is won and a game per character is executed) is executed, a game aiming for a V prize is selected, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In some cases, it may be configured so that it is possible to select a game that does not interrupt the fluctuation of the special figure.

In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is given by V winning, the fluctuation time of the special symbol that was temporarily stopped and the special symbol within the specified number of times of the V rush that was held at that time The fluctuation time is configured to be displayed as a preset period of the next V rush. Then, the time is configured to be displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can confirm the period stocked in the next V rush by confirming the display area HR4.

Then, in the V rush fluctuation region 811 for indicating the gaming state during the V rush of the main display region Dm, “V” is stopped and displayed in the middle region 811b that was fluctuating in FIG. 13 (b). Then, since the character "V" is stopped and displayed in the left region 811a and the right region 811c when the accessory hit is executed, the left region 811a, the middle region 811b, and the right region 811c are combined to form "VVV". A notification mode suggesting that the jackpot was won is displayed. In addition, the characters "Congratulations on the big hit !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game ball is won in the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the character and the big hit is given.

In the present embodiment, the V rush fluctuation region 811 stops and displays the left region 811a and the right region 811c when the accessory hit is executed, and the middle region 811b is displayed when the V prize is won during the bonus hit. It is configured to stop and display, but it is not limited to this, the left area 811a when winning a normal figure, the right area 811c when a character hit is executed, and the middle area when V is won. 811b may be configured to be stopped and displayed. In this way, by configuring the stepwise effect to be executed when the game condition is satisfied, the player can instantly determine which stage the game stage is when he / she visually recognizes the V fluctuation region 811. can. Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. Further, the characters to be stopped may be displayed as "hits" or "V winning" as long as they are intended to indicate that a big hit is given and the player can acquire the privilege. By configuring the characters indicating the jackpot to be displayed in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a more varied effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14B, an off-screen during the accessory hit during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the game ball does not win the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the accessory during the V rush. In the present embodiment, the change of the special symbol that has been executed is temporarily stopped when it is executed per character, but if the V prize cannot be won during the character hit, the temporary stop is performed. The change of the special symbol that had been there is resumed.

FIG. 14 (b) is a display screen when the game ball does not win the V winning opening 165 after the winning of the accessory is executed in FIG. 13 (b). In the V fluctuation region 811 indicating the game status during the V rush in the main display region Dm, the character "x" indicating that the V prize was not won is displayed in the middle region 811b. Therefore, in the V rush fluctuation region 811, an out-of-order display mode of "V x V" is displayed. As a result, the player can understand that the game ball could not be won in the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the character this time.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the characters "Resume !!" are displayed to indicate that the fluctuation of the special figure that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush shown by the timer 812 starts to decrease again with the resumption of fluctuation of the special figure shown in the running special figure th0 (see FIG. 14D). This makes it easy for the player to understand that the game must be executed with the aim of winning the V prize within the time indicated by the timer 812.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15A, the jackpot ending screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the jackpot ending during V rush, and FIG. 15 (c) is a diagram showing each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15 (a) is displayed. It is a figure which showed the situation. In the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won or a V prize is won during the V rush period, the V rush period (time reduction state) is set again.

FIG. 15 (a) is a diagram showing the ending screen of the jackpot given from the V prize shown in FIG. 14 (a). As described above, when a big hit is given during the V rush, the fluctuation time between the temporarily stopped running special figure th0 and the special figure 2nd hold th2 which was the specified number of times in the previous V rush period. The total value of is displayed as the time stock, and the characters "time stock 29.9 seconds" are displayed in the display area HR4. Then, in the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 3rd hold th3 in FIG. 15 (c), that is, in the V rush before the jackpot game is executed, the special figure is not added as the V rush period (time reduction period). Figure Hold fluctuation time is calculated.

As described above, when a jackpot is given during the V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the jackpot game. During the V rush period, a value is set that is the sum of the remaining time of the change of the special figure that was temporarily stopped during the big hit and the change time of the number of lottery of the special figure given by the big hit type. In FIG. 15A, as shown in the display area HR4, the time stock is 29.9 seconds, that is, the remaining period of the interrupted special figure fluctuation (9.9 seconds) and the previous V rush. The total number of seconds of the special figure hold fluctuation time (20 seconds in total) corresponding to the special figure 1st hold th1 and the special figure 2nd hold th2 that have already been additionally displayed on the timer 812 is already displayed as the time stock. With respect to the number of seconds stocked in this time, the fluctuation time of the special figure hold (15 seconds) corresponding to the special figure 3rd hold th3 as a value that can be newly added to the V rush period at the end of the jackpot game. Is added.

In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the time reduction of 4 times is given after the end of the jackpot game is shown, and the special figure hold held as the time stock is the special figure No. 2. Since it is up to hold th2 (for two special figure hold), the fluctuation time of two more special figure hold can be additionally displayed on the timer 812 as the current V rush period, but in FIG. 15 (a). , Since there is only one special figure hold that can be additionally displayed on the timer 812 (because the special figure hold is not stored in the special figure 4 hold th4), the variation of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 3 hold th3. Only the time is added and displayed.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is given during the V rush and the number of special figures held at that time is not enough for the specified number of time reductions (V rush) given this time (the number of time reductions), It is configured to execute an effect of adding the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure hold stored by the end of the jackpot game to the value of the time stock. In FIG. 15A, the special figure 3rd hold is performed. The characters "+15 seconds GET" are displayed in the additional period display mode 802 in correspondence with the special figure hold in which the 15-second deviation variation pattern shown in th3 is executed. This gives the player the joy of further extending the period of benefit to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect of adding the V rush period is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, it is expected that the advantageous period will be extended at the ending period of the jackpot game. Since the game can be executed while holding the game, it is possible to draw more attention to the production during the big hit.

In addition, the character "second station" indicating that the V rush was continued twice was displayed in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, and the display area HR2 was obtained by a big hit during the V rush. The number of prize balls "670P" is displayed. In this way, the game result is displayed at a position that is easy for the player to see, and the value is increased each time the jackpot is executed and the privilege is obtained, so that the player can be more satisfied. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V rush continuation" indicating that the V rush has been set again are displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the V-rush, which is advantageous to the player, continues.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15B, the timer addition screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during V rush. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol hold that is newly won at the jackpot ending executed during the V rush, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol that was outside the specified number of times of the V rush before the jackpot Perform additional production. Then, if the number of reserved balls for the specified number of V rushes is not held at the end of the jackpot, the number of balls held for the specified number of V rushes is newly increased during the V rush period until the special figure hold for the specified number of times is accumulated. Performs an additional effect for the number of reserved balls.

FIG. 15 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the game progresses from the ending of the jackpot shown in FIG. 15 (a) and the game ball newly wins in the special figure entrance 64. FIG. 15 (d) is a diagram showing each symbol state when the display screen shown in FIG. 15 (b) is displayed. In the main display area Dm, a variation display mode indicating that the period of V rush has elapsed in the V rush variation area is displayed. In FIG. 15B, as shown in FIG. 15D, the running special figure th0 resumes the fluctuation, the remaining fluctuation time becomes 3.2 seconds, and the special figure 1st hold th1 and the special figure 2nd hold. Holds in which 10 seconds are set as fluctuation times are stored in th2. Then, the special figure third hold th3 is a state in which a hold ball having a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds, which is the sum of these values.

As described above, the state of FIG. 15A is a state in which the fluctuation time for two new special figure reservations can be added as the V rush period, but only one new special figure reservation has been acquired. It is a state (only the special figure 3rd hold th3). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15B, the next time a new special figure hold is acquired, the fluctuation time of the acquired special figure hold is additionally displayed.

Specifically, it is shown that there was an additional prize in the special figure 4th hold th4, and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is set for this new special figure hold. Therefore, an effect in which 20 seconds are added to the current V rush period is executed. Then, the character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm throws the ticket 810b for indicating the extension of the advantageous period to the player to the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush after the period of the V rush is added. The state of being displayed is displayed. After this effect is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure added this time is added to the remaining period of the V rush to the remaining period displayed on the timer 812, and the value "58.2 seconds" is added to the timer 812. Is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Add timer !!" are displayed to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period has been extended (added).

Next, the V rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the end of V rush, and FIG. 16C is a state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16A is displayed. It is a figure which showed. In the present embodiment, if the game ball is not won in the V winning opening 165 during the V rush period, or if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, the V rush period ends. The game state shifts to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 16 (c), the display of “x” indicating that the execution special figure th0f, which is the final fluctuation of the V rush this time, has stopped due to the deviation is shown. The reserved balls are accumulated from the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 3rd hold th3, but these hold balls are the hold balls outside the specified number of times of V rush. It should be noted that the running normal figure fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the normal figure first hold fh1 normal figure hold ball is accumulated.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a character "VGET x 2" indicating how many times the V rush has been continued is displayed, and further, a prize ball (PGET x 1500) is a big hit during this V rush. Characters are displayed to indicate how much you have earned (privilege). As a result, the player informs the game result of this V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V rush end" for notifying that the advantageous period has ended are displayed. With these display modes, it is possible to inform the player that the V rush period has ended in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the V rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the period of V rush has been extended, and FIG. 16D is a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed. It is a figure which showed each symbol situation in.

In the present embodiment, the V rush effect is executed when the time saving state is set. Then, the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol change of a predetermined number of times is completed. Specifically, when the time reduction number of times is set to 4, when the fourth special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) after the time reduction state is set, the time reduction state is terminated and the normal state is restored. It is configured to migrate to. Here, since the lottery (variation) of the special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol are executed independently, the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the short time state is stopped just before the end of the V rush period. If the game per game is executed immediately before the display), it may be possible to execute the game per character after the time saving state ends (after the transition to the normal state).

In this case, if the V rush effect is ended at the timing when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, a situation occurs in which the game per character is started even though the V rush effect is finished. There was a risk that the player would be confused. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game per normal figure is executed at the end timing of the V rush period (the final fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol in the time saving state), until the game per normal figure ends. Alternatively, the V rush effect is extended until the game per character, which is executed by the game per game, is completed. As a result, the V rush effect can be executed in accordance with the special electric game period aiming at the V jackpot game, so that the player can easily understand the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), the state in which the character "○" indicating that the player has won the running normal figure tf0 is shown, that is, the final change in the time saving state during the game per normal figure. When the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (stopped by "x" indicating that the running special symbol th0 is stopped due to deviation), the third symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 16 (b). In the main display area Dm of the device 81, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush fluctuation area 811 for showing the gaming situation during the V rush are displayed in a fluctuating state. That is, it suggests to the player that the V rush is continuing.

Then, the timer 812 displays "00.0 seconds" indicating that all the fluctuations of the special figure for the specified number of times in the time saving state have been completed. However, the characters "V rush is being extended" are displayed above the main display area. By displaying in this way, the player can get an unexpected joy by knowing that the V rush that he thought has ended has been extended. Then, the characters "Last chance !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and if the special electric operating port 643 is not allowed to win the game ball and the V winning opening 165 is not won the game ball, the character "Last chance !!" is displayed. The player can easily understand that the V rush ends.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 16B, that is, when the ball is inserted into the special electric operation port 643 during the extension display of the V rush, the game per character is the same as during the normal V rush period. Is executed. In this case, the display screen during the game per character shown in FIG. 13B is displayed, and the characters "Last chance !!" are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period will end if the ball does not win the V winning opening 165 in this game per character. Then, when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 in the character hit game displayed as "Last chance !!", the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, when the ball does not win the V winning opening 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG. 16A is displayed after the game per accessory is completed.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 16A and 16B, in the present embodiment, the period during which the special electric game can be executed is set as the V rush period, not the transition state of the game state. It is configured to perform a V-rush effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect. The display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. 16A is not limited to after the final change of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, for example, the final change of the special symbol. The display is started when the remaining period of is reached a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display of the end screen is terminated at the timing when the next special symbol fluctuation is started. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as the period until the end screen of the V rush is displayed.

With this configuration, after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, the end screen can be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), so that the player can see the game result during the V rush period. Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when such a configuration is used, for example, at the time of displaying the end screen of V rush, the lottery status of the normal symbol is determined in advance, and the normal figure is within the period during which the end screen of V rush can be displayed. If it is determined in advance that the winning game will be executed, the extension screen shown in FIG. 16B may be displayed at the timing of displaying the end screen of the V rush, or the game may be terminated once. After displaying the screen, the end screen may be switched to the extension screen when the game per game is executed. In this way, by using the configuration so that the end screen is switched to the extension screen, it is possible to leave the possibility of aiming for the V jackpot game even after the end screen is displayed, so the player is expected to the end. It is possible to play the game with a feeling. In this embodiment, in the state where the extension screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed, the normal state is set as the game state. When such a configuration is used, for example, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state is executed than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state. It is good to configure it so that it is done. As a result, the period in which the extension screen is displayed is a period indicating that the V rush period is about to end, and also indicates a period in which an advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is playing the game during the V rush period play the game with a sense of expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is divided into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and a normal normal state, and is configured to be manageable. Is set so that a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is given only when is set, and if the V jackpot game is executed during the normal normal state, a prize ball can be almost obtained as a penalty. Instead, it is preferable to configure the disadvantageous jackpot game in which the normal state is set to be executed after the jackpot game is completed. Further, not limited to this, for example, if the display condition of the extension screen is satisfied at the time when the final fluctuation of the special symbol during the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is not terminated and the extension screen is displayed. It may be configured to end the time saving state when the end condition of is satisfied. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be changed, so that it is difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17A, a special screen at the end of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a special screen at the end of a jackpot game, and FIG. 17C is a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 17A is displayed. It is a figure which showed each symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot game is executed during the V rush, the period of the V rush is set again based on the number of reserved balls and the fluctuation time of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. However, if there is a reserved ball in the reserved ball that has a fluctuation time of 200 seconds at the end of the jackpot game, a heaven mode effect indicating that the jackpot will always be won after a predetermined period of time is executed is executed. ..

FIG. 17A is a display screen when the hit fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 200 seconds is suspended at the ending of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the holding status of each symbol at the ending of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 17 (a) is being executed. Since the special symbol th0 is in the jackpot game, the special symbol is changed. Not. In addition, "↓" indicating that the running normal figure fh0 is changing is shown, and it is shown that the normal figure 1st hold fh1 is stored. Then, it is shown that the reserved ball in which the deviation variation pattern of 10 seconds is executed is stored in each of the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2.

Then, in the third reserved th3 of the special figure, a reserved ball on which the hit fluctuation pattern for 200 seconds is executed is shown. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, as a variation pattern of the special symbol during the time-saving game (during V rush), when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the variation time is a long variation per 200 seconds (hereinafter, special). (Called a hit) may be executed. Further, in the jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B) won in the special symbol lottery, a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, until the fluctuation of this special hit stops (during heaven mode), even if the player cannot win the V winning opening 165 in the special electric game, the big hit game that is won by the special hit always wins the big hit. Since the V rush period is set again after the game is completed, the special electric game can be executed with peace of mind. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the special figure 4th hold th4 indicates that there is a hold ball, but since the jackpot game is executed in the special figure 3 hold th3, the special figure 3 hold Since it is set as the period of V rush set after the end of the jackpot game executed by the reserved ball of th3, the fluctuation time is indicated by "-".

Then, as shown in FIG. 17A, when there is a special hit in the hold at the ending of the big hit game, it is indicated that there is a special hit in the hold in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The characters "Enter heaven mode" are displayed. In addition, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed when the game state is the normal state or during the V rush where there is no special hit in the hold, are displayed. In addition, the characters "super lucky !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed in the normal state or during the V rush where there is no special hit in the hold, are displayed, so that the player can play a special situation. You can have a sense of expectation that it may be, and you can continue the game with excitement. That is, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b are special game situation suggestion modes for suggesting that the current game situation is a special game situation for the player.

Further, in the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 written as "220 seconds" is displayed. As the value displayed in the special period display mode 803, the time until the fluctuation of winning the special hit in the special symbol lottery stops, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode is displayed. That is, it is a special game period notification mode for indicating the special game period to be executed from now on. Therefore, the value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is the sum of the fluctuation time of 200 seconds for the special hit and the fluctuation time for the number of reserved balls until the special hit is won. In FIG. 17C, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set for each of the special figure 1st hold th1 and the special figure 2nd hold th2. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time per special figure shown in the special figure 3rd hold th3 is 200 seconds, "220 seconds" is the sum of the fluctuation time values from the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 3rd hold th3. , The period during which the heaven mode is set.

The period of the time saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to notify the player on the third symbol display device 81 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the variation time of the special symbol in the time saving game state. Is configured to execute a fluctuation pattern in which a maximum fluctuation time of 50 seconds is set as the longest fluctuation time excluding 200 seconds, which is a special hit fluctuation (see FIG. 25 (c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, the player understands that when an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the time saving state is always set again. You can play special electric games with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether there is a special hit fluctuation in the reserved ball at the ending of the jackpot game, and if there is a special hit, the player is notified at the ending of the jackpot game. However, the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, if there is a special hit in the hold, at the ending of the big hit, it is configured to notify the time until the special hit fluctuation is executed, and when the special hit fluctuation starts, it is "200 seconds". The player may be notified that the period has been extended. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the unexpected joy that the period of V rush, which seems to have ended, is suddenly extended for a long period of time.

Next, the screen in the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the heaven mode, and FIG. 17 (d) shows each symbol state when the display screen shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed. It is a figure. In the present embodiment, when there is a special hit in the reserved ball at the ending of the big hit, the time until the fluctuation of the special hit stops is called heaven mode, and the player can execute the special electric game with peace of mind. It is configured so that it can be done for a period of time. FIG. 17B is an example of a display screen when the game situation progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17A.

As shown in FIG. 17B, the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm indicates that the game state is the 10th V rush period after the transition from the normal state to the time saving state (V rush). The characters "10th station" are displayed. Then, in the display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, the characters "6000 pt" indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game executed after the transition to the V rush are displayed. The characters "in heaven mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm, indicating that the player can instantly determine the current gaming state. Further, as in the case of V rush, the V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed in each area of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c, and the special electric game progresses. A variable display mode indicating that the display is performed is shown. Further, as in the case of V rush, an animation in which the character 810 is searching for something in the bag 810a is displayed in the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that the lottery of ordinary symbols is being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17D, in the executing special figure th0, the change of the special symbol with the remaining fluctuation time of 30 seconds is executed. In the running special figure th0, in the game situation shown in FIG. 17 (c), the holding ball on which the special hit shown in the special drawing 3 holding th3 is executed has started to fluctuate. Therefore, the remaining period of the heaven mode executed in FIG. 17B is 30 seconds, which is the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure th0 during execution. Further, although it is shown that the reserved balls exist in the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 3rd hold th3, since it is a special figure lottery executed outside the period of the heaven mode in which it is executed. , The fluctuation time is indicated by "-". Further, in the running normal figure fh0, "↓" indicating that the normal figure lottery is being executed is shown, and the reserved ball is also stored in the normal figure first hold fh1.

The timer 812 of the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be subtracted according to the remaining period of the fluctuation of the special figure th0 during execution. As shown in FIG. 17 (d), since the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is th0, the character “30.0 seconds” is displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17 (b)). .. In addition, the characters "Timer 0 may be good" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player is informed that the jackpot is won when the value of the remaining period displayed on the timer 812 becomes 0. Suggests. That is, in the sub-display area Ds, a suggestion effect notification mode for suggesting the future game situation to the player is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the display mode in the heaven mode, which is the period until the special hit is won and the winning symbol is stopped, is configured to be the same as the V rush mode. With this configuration, it is a basic game method that is advantageous for the player to execute the special electric game during the heaven mode as well as during the V rush and to make the V winning opening 165 win the game ball. It is possible to inform the player of something. Therefore, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

The display mode is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute an effect dedicated to the heaven mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a wide range of types of production, and it is possible to further enhance the production effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18A, the chance effect screen during the winning combination displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a chance effect during hitting a character, and FIG. 18 (c) is a diagram when the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed. It is a figure which showed the symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a player wins a hit of a normal symbol and a game ball wins a prize in the special electric actuating port 643, a prize hit is executed, and a V prize in the V prize device 65 is executed during the execution of the prize hit. A big hit is given when a game ball wins in the mouth 165. In FIG. 18 (a), from the game situation shown in FIG. 13 (b), the timing at which the game ball is likely to win in the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the character is set as a chance effect and the player is notified.

As shown in FIG. 18 (c), the holding status of each symbol in FIG. 18 (a) indicates that the fluctuation is temporarily stopped because the execution special figure th0 is hitting the accessory. It is shown. Then, each of the reserved balls from the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 2nd hold th2 shows a deviation variation of 10 seconds. Further, since the special figure third hold th3 is a special figure fluctuation executed outside the period of the currently executed V rush, the fluctuation time indicates “-”. Further, the special figure No. 4 hold th4 indicates that it is not held. Then, the running Fuzu fh0 is indicated by "○" indicating that the Fuzu lottery was won.

Then, FIG. 18A is a notification screen for notifying the player that the game ball is likely to win the V winning opening 165 during the winning of the accessory shown in FIG. 13B. In the present embodiment, as described above, the game balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 65 during the winning of the winning game are stored in the storage valve 66a. The storage valve 66a is configured to be in an open state so that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7) for 1.5 seconds out of the period of 3 seconds. Then, in the first movable valve 66b arranged above the V winning opening 165, the game ball is sent to the V winning opening 165 for 0.5 seconds out of 5.5 seconds regardless of the gaming state. It is configured to be in an open state so that it can flow down the road (see FIG. 27 (a)).

That is, in order to win a game ball in the V winning opening 165, after the storage valve 66a is opened, the game ball flowing down the third flow path 65d is set to the open state while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state. It is necessary to enter the ball into the V winning opening 165. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is in the open state within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set in the open state, and the first movable valve 66b is in the open state within 2 seconds. When it is determined that this is the case, as shown in FIG. 18A, the emphasis mode 811z is displayed around the V rush fluctuation region 811 displayed in the main display region Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V prize-winning great chance !!" are displayed. That is, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of the timing at which the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state. With this configuration, the player can understand the timing at which the V prize is likely to be won, and the game can be easily executed.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the V prize is likely to be won is notified by the highlighting mode 811z or the comment of the sub-display area Ds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the V prize is difficult to be won is also notified. You may. With such a configuration, a more kind game can be provided to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, a normal drawing stop screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the lottery of ordinary symbols is stopped during the period of V rush, and FIG. 18 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (b). It is a figure which showed the state of each symbol when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), the lottery of the normal symbol is won, the special electric operation port 643 is made to win the game ball, and the special electric game aiming at the V prize is executed. , It will be the most advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, if the lottery of the normal symbols is not executed during this V rush, the special electric game cannot be executed, so that the third symbol display device 81 executes the effect of urging the launch of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 18 (d), the holding status of each symbol during the V rush of FIG. 18 (a) indicates that the running special figure th0 is changing and the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds. ing. Further, each of the special figure 1st hold th1 and the special figure 2nd hold th2 stores a hold ball on which the deviation fluctuation for 10 seconds is executed. Then, the special figure 3rd hold th3 and the special figure 4th hold th4 are states in which the hold ball is not stored. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. 18B is 22.2 seconds, which is the sum of the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure th0 being executed and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1st hold th1 and the special figure 2nd hold th2. Is. Then, in the running normal figure fh0, "-" indicating that the normal figure lottery is not executed is shown. Further, normally, the reserved ball is not stored in the first reserved fh1.

As shown in FIG. 18D, when the lottery of the normal symbol is stopped without being executed during the V rush, the electric accessory 640a attached to the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state. , It is impossible to put a game ball into the special electric actuating port 643. In other words, the special electric game, which is the basic game method during the V rush, cannot be executed, and the special figure lottery is executed. Therefore, when the special figure lottery for the specified number of times is hunted, the V rush is performed as it is. Will end. Further, in the present embodiment, in order to insert the game ball into the special figure entry slot 64 or the normal winning device 640, a left-handed game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. It is necessary, and when the left-handed game is executed, the game ball is 100% passed through the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of the normal symbol. That is, the game situation in which the special figure lottery shown in FIG. 18B is executed but the normal drawing lottery is not executed is a situation in which the game ball is not fired. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect of urging the player to launch the game ball is executed.

The characters "V rushing" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "22.2 seconds" indicating the remaining period of V rush is displayed on the timer 812 so as to be subtracted according to the passage of time. doing. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V rush game is being executed and the remaining period thereof is decreasing. Further, in the V fluctuation area 811 in which the fluctuation display was executed when the lottery of the normal symbol was executed, the left area 811a was "hit", the middle area 811b was "tsu", and the right area was "tsu". The characters "hit" together with "te" are shown to the player by the animation guided by the character 810. That is, the V fluctuation region 811 is a warning display mode for indicating to the player that the lottery for the normal symbol has not been executed and that the V rush has ended.

In addition, the characters "Please start the game" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to notify the player that the lottery of the normal symbol has not been executed and the special electric game cannot be executed, and since the special figure lottery has been executed, the player can keep it as it is. It is possible to warn that the V rush period, which is a favorable period, will end. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from unexpectedly ending the advantageous period.

The effect of promoting the launch of the game ball described above is not limited to this display mode. That is, it suffices as long as it conveys to the player that the lottery of ordinary symbols has not been executed, and characters indicating danger such as "WARNING" may be displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to warn the player that there is a risk of loss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, the special figure stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the lottery of special symbols is not executed during the V rush, and FIG. 19 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen shown in FIG. 19 (a). It is a figure which showed the state of each symbol when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the time saving state (V rush) continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed for the specified number of times, and the value obtained by adding up the fluctuation times for the specified number of times is defined as the V rush. It is configured to notify the player as a period. Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is not executed, since the specified period is not determined, the player is expected to expect how long the V rush will last.

As shown in FIG. 19 (c), the hold status of each hold symbol of the game status shown in FIG. 19 (a) is that the special figure th0 during execution has a "-" indicating that the lottery of the special symbol is not executed. It is shown. Further, the special figure 1st hold th1 to the special figure 4th hold th4 indicate that the hold ball is not stored. On the other hand, the running Fuzu fh0 is indicated by "↓" indicating that the Fuzu lottery is being executed, and the Fuzu 1st hold fh1 is also stored.

In this way, when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special electric game can be executed until the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times is executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, the timer 812 displays the characters "??? seconds" indicating that the lottery for the special symbol has not been executed and the specified period has not been reached. Further, in the V fluctuation area 811, a fluctuation display of "↓↓↓" indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is being executed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode for suggesting that the specified period of V rush, which is "how long it lasts, is throbbing", has not been reached is displayed. According to these display contents, the player is in a state where the remaining period of the V rush is not reduced because the lottery of the special symbol is not executed, but the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, so that the special electric game can be executed. I can understand that. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while being excited about how long the advantageous game situation for the player, that is, the special electric game can be executed without the V rush period elapses. That is, the display content shown in FIG. 19A is a suggestion notification content for indicating to the player that the state is advantageous.

In addition, as described above, when the reserved ball of the special symbol disappears during the V rush period, it is notified once that the V rush period has ended, and then the game ball is sent to the special figure entrance 64. You may perform a revival effect as if the period of V rush was revived when the ball entered. With this configuration, the player feels that the V rush period, which seems to have ended, has been revived, and can obtain unexpected joy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, the lucky time screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a lucky time screen during V rush, and FIG. 19 (d) shows each symbol status when the display screen shown in FIG. 19 (b) is displayed. It is the figure shown. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the special symbol change during interruption and the time saving number (4) set after the end of the V jackpot game. The special symbol fluctuation time for (times) is set as a time saving period (V rush period) after the end of the V jackpot game.

Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the special symbol change that is interrupted at the time when the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the V rush period is displayed (subtracted display) using the display mode of the timer 812, but the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution is not displayed. Each time the special symbol change is interrupted, the player needs to play the game while expecting that the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is long.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the fluctuation time of the next executed special symbol change. It is configured so that a lucky time effect can be executed when is long. With this configuration, if a game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. Can be done.

When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters "lucky time rush" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851. On the display screen shown in FIG. 19B, a lucky time effect indicating that the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next is executed. As shown in FIG. 19 (d), when the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution is 20 seconds and the fluctuation time of the special symbol change to be executed next is 10 seconds, the difference is 10 Seconds are displayed in period display mode 851. The number of seconds displayed in this period display mode 851 is subtracted and displayed in correspondence with the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation, and when 0 seconds is displayed, the lucky time effect ends.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "A chance to win a character during the lucky time" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the privilege during the lucky time to the player. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), an effect capable of notifying the player to that effect. Unlucky production is also feasible. That is, if the V jackpot game is executed when this unlucky effect is executed, the player can be made aware that the V rush period set next is likely to be shortened. ..

By executing the unlucky effect in this way, in order for the player to execute the V jackpot game for the time being during the V rush period, the special electric game is actively executed even during the unlucky effect, or the V rush period. Will be subtracted, but it will be possible to select whether to aim for a longer V rush period after the end of the V jackpot game without performing the special electric game until the unlucky production is completed, and the interest of the game will be improved. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned lucky time effect and unlucky effect are executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol satisfies the predetermined condition, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In that case, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the effect by lottery, or whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. It may be configured to do so. Further, the execution frequency of the effect may be changed according to the length of the period that can be displayed as a lucky time effect or an unlucky effect, and if the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution exceeds 50 seconds, it is high. It may be configured so that the lucky time effect is executed with a probability.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19B, during the period in which the lucky time effect is being executed, the period that is advantageous to the player is notified to the player by using the period display mode 851. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period display mode 851 may not be displayed and only the display mode indicating that the lucky time is displayed may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the length of the V rush period set after the end of the V jackpot game.

Further, as an execution condition of the lucky time effect or the unlucky effect, the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of the special symbol fluctuation until the end of the time saving state is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more. It may be provided as an execution condition, or may be configured so that the lucky time effect or the unlucky effect is not executed during the final change of the special symbol during the V rush period.

<About the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the transition content of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), and 2 Two game states can be set, and regardless of the game state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time saving end condition (for example, the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot during the time saving state). It is configured so that the normal state is set when the condition (condition that is satisfied when the execution is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times)) is satisfied.

First, a case where a normal state is set as a game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a process is executed when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated in the initial state (the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54)). ), The normal state is set as the game state. Since this normal state is a low-probability state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to win a ball in the general electric winning device 640 (it is more difficult to win a prize than the high-probability state of the normal symbol). A left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the mouth 64.

In this normal state, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol (special figure) lottery (special figure lottery), either jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, and the jackpot game is executed. NS. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. ) ”Is set, and“ jackpot B (4R (round), time saving 15 times) ”is set as the jackpot type at a rate of 1%.

That is, if a jackpot is won during the normal state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the ending condition of the time saving state differs depending on the set jackpot type. ing. Specifically, the jackpot type (big hit A) that is easy to set is configured to set the time saving end condition that is easier to be established than the jackpot type (big hit B) that is difficult to set. With this configuration, in addition to the game aiming to win a big hit in a special drawing lottery for a player who is playing a game in a normal state, the set big hit type is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player (big hit B). ) Can be played while expecting to be.

Although detailed description is omitted, while the normal state is set, dynamic display (effect display) for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By grasping the dynamic display mode (effect mode) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can predict the result of the special figure lottery being executed. .. Further, as described above, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set in the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to win the general electric winning device 640 by the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery). , The effect display for suggesting the result of the normal drawing lottery to the player is not executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the dynamic display mode for suggesting the result of the special drawing lottery is more than It is configured to be executed in an inconspicuous display mode.

With this configuration, during the period when the normal state is set, the player is given an effect that is executed based on the result of the special figure lottery rather than an effect that is executed based on the result of the special figure lottery. Since it is possible to gaze at it, it is possible to visually grasp that a game (special figure game) mainly composed of a special figure lottery is executed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Then, when the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed, the general electric winning device 640 is likely to be opened based on the general symbol lottery, and the general symbol is easily opened. The game (special electric game) aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) in the character hit game executed by inserting the ball into the special electric operation port 643 based on the lottery is the big hit game based on the special figure lottery. It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the game aiming at (special figure jackpot game) (special figure game).

In this way, by making the execution trigger of the jackpot that the player should aim at differ according to the set game state, it is possible to cause the player to execute a different game according to the set game state. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In this embodiment, the special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special electric game aiming at the normal figure lottery during the normal state, and the special electric machine aiming at the special figure lottery during the time saving state. By configuring the game to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery, the content of the game to be executed by the player differs depending on the game state, but it is limited to this. There are no special symbol types (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), and the type of special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player is different according to the set game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the first special symbol is the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol. When a game state different from the normal state (for example, a time saving state) is set so as to be more advantageous to the player, the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol is the first. It may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board is such that the same game method (left-handed game) is executed regardless of whether the special figure game is executed or the special electric game is executed. By configuring 13, it is configured so as not to give the player the trouble of changing the game method every time the game state changes, but the game is not limited to this, and the game is played according to the set game state. The method may be configured to be different. For example, in the normal state, a left-handed game (a game aiming at a game area (left side area) formed on the left side of the variable display device unit 80) is executed, and the time is shortened. May be configured to execute a right-handed game (a game aimed at a game area (right area) formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). In this case, as a configuration for executing the special figure game in the left side area, a special figure entry port 64 is provided, and as a configuration for executing the special electric game in the right side area, a through gate 67, a general electric winning device 640, V It is preferable to provide the winning device 65, and to provide the variable winning device 650 which is opened as a big hit game in the game area (lower area) where the ball flowing down the left side area or the right side area can reach.

With this configuration, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) can be different depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) that the player mainly executes. Therefore, it is possible to provide the fun of changing the game method.

Further, in this way, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is different depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) to be mainly executed by the player, the player is executed. It is configured to execute a guidance notification (for example, a "right-handed" display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) for guiding a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) to be played. Then it is good.

Furthermore, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is different depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) that the player mainly executes, the ball that has flowed down the left side area or the right side area arrives. By providing a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a big hit game in a possible game area (lower area), even if the big hit game is executed based on the special figure game, the big hit game is executed based on the special electric game. Even in the case where the game is performed, it is not necessary to change the game method when the jackpot game is executed, and the game can be smoothly performed.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of the special symbol lottery). In addition, the lottery for ordinary symbols (general symbol lottery) is configured to be independently feasible without being involved in the lottery for special symbols (special symbol lottery). That is, the execution opportunity of the general drawing lottery is configured to be established regardless of the situation of the special drawing lottery.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a ball wins a prize in the special electric operating port 643 provided in the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) general electric winning device 640 and the game per character is executed, the special during execution is executed. It is configured to suspend the symbol fluctuation, and when the game per character is completed, the suspended special symbol fluctuation is restarted. In addition, when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 and the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed during the character hit game, the interrupted special symbol change is resumed when the big hit game is completed. It is configured to let you.

In the present embodiment configured in this way, when the time saving state is set, until the ending condition of the time saving state (time saving ending condition) that can be satisfied based on the special drawing lottery is satisfied, that is, a predetermined number of times. By the time the special drawing lottery (for example, four times) is executed, a special electric game aiming at a large number of V jackpot games is executed. To give a specific example, when four special figure fluctuations are set as the time saving end condition, the period until the fourth special figure lottery ends, that is, for each of the four special figure lottery. When the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, the time saving state set this time will continue until 40 seconds later (the timing when the fourth special drawing lottery ends).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, when there are four special figure reservations at the end of the big hit game, "40 seconds" is set as the period until the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game ends. Is displayed.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution is not subtracted while the character hit game or the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the time saving state is being executed. Therefore, the period in which the time reduction state is actually set is the total period of the special figure fluctuation time until the time reduction end condition is satisfied and the interruption time in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted. Become. As described above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted corresponds to the period during which the winning game (game per character, game per jackpot) is executed, and the execution period of the winning game is the game of the player. Since the length of the period varies depending on the content, it is not possible to accurately notify the player of the interruption time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the end of the time saving state is displayed (see FIG. 13A), and when the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted, the subtraction is performed. Is configured to display a display mode (see FIG. 13B) for indicating that the subtraction display of the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the end of the time saving state is interrupted until is restarted. doing.

With this configuration, the display content of the display mode (remaining time saving period display mode 801 of FIG. 12A) indicating the period until the time saving state displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 ends. It is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game without any difference between the period until the time saving state is actually completed.

The normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) executed during the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is configured so that the probability of winning is about 33%, and the normal state (low probability of the normal symbol). Compared to the winning probability (1%) of the ordinary symbol lottery (general drawing lottery) executed during the state), it is configured to be easier to win per ordinary symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol regardless of the set gaming state. Therefore, by continuously executing the left-handed game during the time saving state, the game per game is executed about once every 10 seconds, and the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be in the open state.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, when the game per game is executed during the time saving state, the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 can easily enter the special electric operating port 643 ( It is configured so that it is easier to enter the ball than the game per game that is executed in the normal state), and it is possible to execute the game per character that is approximately the same number of times that the game per game is executed. .. Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165 in one character game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed is about 1/11. It is configured to be.

That is, in the first embodiment, the game per character that gives a chance to win the ball in the V winning opening 165 is executed at a rate of about once every 10 seconds in the time saving state. .. If the result of the game per character is that the ball can be won in the V winning opening 165 (if it is a V prize), after the game per character, the jackpot game (the jackpot type is the jackpot C jackpot game (10R (10R) Round), time reduction 4 times)) are executed, and the time reduction state is set again after the jackpot game is completed. That is, when the V jackpot game (the jackpot game executed by making the ball win the V winning opening 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game is completed. doing. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, the time saving state does not end as long as the jackpot game is continuously executed in the special electric game, so that the player can be made to execute the special electric game with a sense of expectation. can.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the jackpot game is executed by the special electric game, the interrupted special figure fluctuation will be resumed after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured so that the number of special figure lottery (special figure change) for satisfying the time saving end condition is not updated due to the figure change. That is, after the special figure change after resumption is completed, the time saving state continues until the special figure change is executed four times.

That is, when the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is a long time (for example, 30 seconds), the game per character is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the game per character, it is set after the jackpot game. When the period of the time saving state is "30 seconds + 4 special figure fluctuations", while the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the game per character Is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the bonus game, the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is "0.5 seconds + 4 special figure fluctuations".

With this configuration, when the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state in which the end condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time, it is advantageous for the player to execute the V jackpot game earlier. Instead, it is possible for the player to take advantage of the V jackpot game being executed in a state where the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation during execution is long. Therefore, even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period has passed since the time saving state was set, it is possible to make the player continue to play the game with a sense of expectation. It will be possible.

In this embodiment, the number of time reductions (the number of special map fluctuations updated to satisfy the time reduction end condition) is not updated (subtracted) based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the jackpot ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time reductions (the number of special map fluctuations updated to satisfy the time reduction end condition) may be updated based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the jackpot ends. .. Even in this configuration, the longer the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after resumption, the more advantageous the player can be. Therefore, a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set. Even when the V jackpot game is not executed in the state, it is possible to continuously play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. If the result of the game per character executed during the time saving state is that the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 165 (in the case of non-V winning), the special electric game is repeated until the time saving state ends. Is executed.

In addition, when the special symbol change (special figure change) ends in the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, whether the special figure change for the number of times set as the time saving end condition is completed. , When the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to the normal state, and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, if the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the following special figure change is executed. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 (c), but in the present embodiment, as a variation pattern of the special figure lottery executed in the time saving state, the result of the special figure lottery is won (1/100). In the case of, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 50 seconds or 200 seconds is set is selected, and if the result of the special drawing lottery is incorrect (99/100), a fluctuation time of 10 seconds to 50 seconds is set. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern to be performed is selected. That is, the big hit is won by the special figure lottery executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the time saving 4 times is set as the time saving end condition, the special figure lottery executed after the big hit game ends). In this case, it is configured so that it is easier to continue the time saving state for a long period of time. Further, if a big hit is won by a special drawing lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is set again after the big hit game is completed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the added value when the big hit is won by the special drawing lottery within the limited period in which the time saving state is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is jackpot information in which the fluctuation time of 200 seconds is set in the hold storage of the special symbol acquired at the end of the jackpot game, a special for notifying that fact. It is configured to execute the effect (see FIG. 17 (a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a time reduction end condition (time reduction 4 times) that is easy to be established and a time reduction end condition (time reduction 15 times) that is difficult to be established. It is configured in. Here, if the time reduction of 15 times is set, the time reduction state will continue until the 15th special figure lottery executed during the time reduction state is completed. The time saving period can be lengthened, the probability of winning a big hit during the time saving state can be increased, and the time saving period can be further lengthened by the long-term fluctuation pattern set at the time of winning the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is allowed to play the game by the same game method (left-handed game) during the normal state, the time saving state, and the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special drawing lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be selected regardless of the number of reserved special symbols (the number of reserved special symbols). If it is set, it is preferable to configure it so that the larger the number of reserved special figures, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which a longer fluctuation time is set.

With this configuration, in the stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during a big hit game), it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to reach the upper limit (4) of the number of special figure reservations. .. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the special figure change is not executed (a state in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied) during the time saving state.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the time saving state is set, that is, in the period until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (special symbol fluctuations) are completed, the normal symbol It is configured to execute a lottery and finally execute a special electric game in which the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 wins a ball. The V winning device 65 is configured so that the ball can be easily won during the game per character, and the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is not subtracted (interrupted) during the game per character. Further, the game per character has a plurality of end conditions, and specifically, it is established when the number of balls won in the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (3) during the game per character. The first end condition (ball winning end condition) and the second end condition (time elapsed end condition) that are satisfied when the elapsed period from the execution of the game per character reaches a predetermined period (3 seconds). , And is configured to end the game per character when either the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied. In addition, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol and during the execution period of the game per normal symbol, the lottery of the new normal symbol (the lottery of the normal symbol) is not executed, but the ball goes to the special electric activation port 643 during the game per normal symbol. Is winning, and during the period when the game per character is being executed, a new general drawing lottery can be executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by executing the game per character during the time saving state, the special electric game aims to execute more games per character while interrupting the fluctuation of the special figure. Will be done. However, the period during which the normal symbol is changed until the lottery result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, or the period during which the ball cannot be won by the general electric winning device 640 during the execution period of the game per normal symbol (electric accessory 640a). The period during which the game per character cannot be executed, such as (the period during which is closed), is a period during which the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the time-saving state is unnecessarily subtracted, which is disadvantageous to the player during the time-saving state. It will be a disadvantageous time period.

Therefore, for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol set in the time saving state, the normal chart short fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (variation time 3 seconds) and the normal chart length fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (variation time 15 seconds) When is configured to be selectable, the game is played while expecting that the normal figure short fluctuation pattern is selected so that the above-mentioned disadvantageous time saving period is shortened. Further, when a configuration in which the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted) is used during the execution period of the game per character as in the present embodiment, the disadvantageous time is shortened. By lengthening the period in which the period and the suspension period of the special symbol fluctuation overlap, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the special symbol from being subtracted during the disadvantageous time saving period.

Therefore, in order to shorten the disadvantageous time saving period in the time saving state, when the game per character is executed in the time saving state, the remaining time of the fluctuation of the normal map during execution is determined, and the remaining time is a predetermined time (for example). If it is longer than 10 seconds), it is preferable to execute an effect that encourages the game to be ended by the passage of time, instead of ending the game per character by winning a ball. With this configuration, the period of execution of the game per character can be lengthened, and the period of disadvantageous time can be shortened.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first random number counter C1 used for setting the initial value. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering the special symbol entry port 64 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the special symbol holding ball is provided. In the storage area 203a, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entry port 64. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Special symbol variation based on the value is started.

In the present embodiment, a configuration in which one type of special symbol is used is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of special symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish the lottery condition of one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the ball entering the special symbol entry port 64 (first entry slot), the first 1 Each value described above is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and the ball enters a ball entrance (for example, a second entry) different from the special symbol entry 64 (first entry). In order to establish the lottery conditions for other special symbol types (for example, the second special symbol) based on the above, each value described above is set in the second special symbol holding ball storage area different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area. It may be configured to be stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type is satisfied. The various values stored in may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values may be started. With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel). It may be configured to be possible, and in this case, if each special symbol holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area, second special symbol holding ball storage area) is configured to have a special symbol execution area. good. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a miss, but the lottery result is not limited to this, for example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss. It may be configured so that a player can win a small hit that can be given less privilege (a privilege different from that when the jackpot is won) than when the jackpot is won. With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to give the player a privilege, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and the special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured to be referred to.

In addition, when it is configured so that a small hit can be won by a special symbol lottery, for example, the transition content of the gaming state based on the big hit winning and the transition content of the gaming state based on the small hit winning are configured to be different. For example, when a big hit is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big hit game, and a new game state can be set after the big hit game is completed based on the set big hit type. When the small hit is won, the small hit game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of the small hit winning, and the game state may not be changed even after the small hit game is completed.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a wide variety of games because it is possible to make the transition of the game state and the content of the transition different depending on the winning type (big hit, small hit). can.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to entry (passing of a ball) into the through gate 67 composed of one holding area (holding first area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol variation based on the value is started.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b). FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit is defined in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is defined within a predetermined range, and the determination value in the predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23 (b), among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 3" is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values ("4 to 399") are determined to be out of order. It is specified as a value.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the gaming state, but the probability is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability is configured to differ depending on the gaming state. You may. Further, in that case, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be set to two types, a high probability state and a low probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is configured so that the "small hit" can be won, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small hit" is specified in the first random number table 202a. It should be configured. With this configuration, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery of the special symbol can be executed by the same process, so that the main control is compared with the case where the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are executed by different processes. The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. Further, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of a big hit and a small hit in duplicate.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is special at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entry port 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection table 202c to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

FIG. 24A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24A, the first hit type selection table 202c includes the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 and the V winning opening 165, which are referred to when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. It has a V jackpot type selection table 202c2, which is referred to when a ball wins a prize (V prize).

First, the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (b). FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is set to the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Different jackpot types are specified accordingly.

Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 98", and "big hit B" is defined in the value of "99". There is.

Here, the contents of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the contents of the gaming state set after the jackpot game is completed will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) of the jackpot game executed according to each jackpot type, that is, the operation content (opening timing,) for the movable member (variable winning device 650) executed during the jackpot game. The opening operation scenario in which the number of times of opening) is specified in time series is stored in advance in various operation scenario tables 202e included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Then, the open operation scenarios corresponding to the jackpot types set when the jackpot is won are read from the various operation scenario tables 202e and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Will be done. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). , In the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) that executes the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is discriminated and the process based on the discriminant result is executed.

With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of movable members are moved by one open operation control, a plurality of movable members can be moved by using an open operation scenario in which the operation contents of each movable member are defined in chronological order. It is possible to centrally manage the operation control for. Therefore, as compared with the case where the operation control is executed separately for each movable member, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and the other movable member can be moved when a defect occurs in one movable member. The operation process for the member can be smoothly executed.

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4 rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds is executed. This round game is a game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until the ball wins 10 balls in the variable winning device 650 or the opening period elapses 30 seconds. That is, in the "big hit A" in which the round game of four rounds is executed, it is a big hit game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be won by the variable winning device 650.

Further, "Big hit A" is defined so that a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game, and "time saving 4" is defined as a period during which the time saving state continues. "Times", that is, the time saving period until it is executed 4 times without winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery during the time saving state (until the result of the 4th special symbol lottery is stopped (confirmed display)) is specified. Has been done.

"Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4 rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds is executed. Then, it is stipulated that the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time saving state is "15 times of time saving", that is, the time saving. A short period of time is specified until the game is executed 15 times without winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery during the state (until the result of the 15th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)).

That is, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, a big hit game of 4 rounds is always executed, and a time saving state is set after the big hit game is completed. Then, when the set jackpot type is "big hit A" (99% when the jackpot is won), the number of time reductions is "4 times", and when it is "big hit B" (1% when the jackpot is won). It is configured so that the number of time reductions "15 times" is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot is higher than the special figure game (a game in which a ball is inserted into the special figure entry port 64 and a big hit is aimed at by a special symbol lottery) in the normal state during the time saving state. It is configured so that a special electric game (a game aiming for a big hit by making a ball win (V prize) in the V winning opening 165 based on a lottery of a normal symbol) is executed so that the game can be easily executed. It is configured so that the time saving state is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, "big hit B", which is a game state that is advantageous to the player and is difficult to end (it is difficult to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state), is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than "big hit A". ..

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a lottery of a special symbol, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed in all the jackpots, but the selection is not limited to this. A different number of round games may be playable depending on the type of jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, the time saving state is set after the big hit game is completed for all the big hits, and the number of time saving (time saving end condition) is set according to the big hit type. Although it is configured to be different, it is not limited to this, and a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set are provided according to the selected jackpot type. You may.

Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (c). FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. The V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table in which the game content of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 (V winning) is defined. Specifically, "big hit C" is defined in the entire range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99".

This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 10 rounds is executed. .. Then, it is stipulated that the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time saving state is "4 times of time saving", that is, the time saving. A short period of time is specified until the game is executed four times without winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery during the state (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)).

That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game executed based on the V prize (the jackpot executed in the special electric game) is rather than the jackpot game executed based on the special figure lottery (the jackpot game executed in the special figure game). The game) is configured so that a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds is executed. That is, in terms of the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the game state in which the time is shortened is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to acquire the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the ball winning the special electric operation port 643, and is executed based on the V winning during the game per character. In the jackpot game (V jackpot game), the V jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of winning the ball to the special electric operating port 643 that triggered the execution of the V prize-winning bonus game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference to Table 202c2.

In this embodiment, since there is only one type of jackpot (big hit C) defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, the same content is used regardless of which winning game is played. The jackpot game is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpot types may be specified in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 according to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. Further, a plurality of special electric actuating ports may be provided in the general electric winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set corresponding to the special electric actuating port in which the ball has won a prize among the plurality of special electric actuating ports. Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball wins the V winning opening 165 while the game per character is being executed, and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used. It may be configured to select the jackpot type based on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit game is selected regardless of the game state set at the time when the big hit is won or when the ball wins the V winning opening 165. However, the game state is not limited to this, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be changed according to the game state set at the time when the jackpot is won or when the ball wins the V winning opening 165. In this case, for example, the game per normal figure is executed just before the end of the time saving state (immediately before the stop of the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time saving state), and the normal after the time saving state ends. It is difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition after the end of the big hit game only when the V prize is won during the winning game that is executed in the state where the state is set, that is, when the V prize is won in the special electric game during the normal state. A time saving state (for example, a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 20 times) may be set.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number of types is not limited to two, or two or less, or four or more types may be provided. Further, the same jackpot type may be set depending on whether the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery or the V prize is won in the special electric game. Further, the selection ratio and type of the jackpot type selected this time may be different based on the information regarding the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the jackpot game content and the transition content of the game state). .. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the past game history (big hit history). Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestion effect that can suggest the jackpot type that is likely to be set at the next jackpot based on the past jackpot history to the player. This makes it easier for the player to play the game continuously.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode (variation time) such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and a time reduction used in the state where the time saving state is set. The table 202d2 is specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different according to the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c). FIG. 25B is a schematic view showing the contents specified in the normal table 202d1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and the fluctuation time is longer when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit than when it is out. It is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern of is easy to select.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the lottery result of the special symbol (special figure) is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50". Various types of normal reach per 20 seconds of fluctuation time are defined in association with each other, and super reach per 20 seconds of fluctuation time is defined in the range of "51 to 198". In FIG. 25 (b), in order to simplify the explanation of the fluctuation pattern of the hit superreach, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198". Actually, predetermined fluctuation times (for example, fluctuation time 60 seconds, fluctuation time 100 seconds, fluctuation time 120 seconds) are defined in the range of the values of the corresponding fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit (hit)" and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "51 to 198", "60 seconds to" corresponding to the acquired value. A fluctuation pattern in which any fluctuation time of "120 seconds" is set is set.

If the lottery result is "out of", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 179" with a short deviation of 8 seconds in the variation time, and is in the range of "180 to 194". The fluctuation time is defined in association with the deviation normal reach of 20 seconds, and the deviation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds is associated with the deviation super reach in the range of "195 to 198". The contents shown in the range of "195 to 198" when the lottery result is "out of order" and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "195 to 198" have the same purpose as the case where the above-mentioned lottery result is "big hit (hit)". Yes, it is a simplification of the explanation.

That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the types of variable times that can be selected are the same, and only the ratio at which each variable time is selected is different. ing. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (hit), the ratio of selecting a longer fluctuation time is higher than when it is a miss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol fluctuation during execution is, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased. Therefore, when the special symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, the player can wait until the fluctuation time elapses. Can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

In the present embodiment, that is, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time set for the lottery of the special symbol executed in the normal state, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the longer the fluctuation time is set. It is configured to be done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress the situation where the ball is thrown.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the variable time to be set is set by configuring the type of the variable time that can be selected to be the same regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. By grasping it, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the special symbol from being revealed to the player in advance, but it is not limited to this, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (hit). The fluctuation time selected only in the case or the fluctuation time selected only in the case of deviation may be partially settable.

As shown in FIG. 25B, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected based on the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variation pattern may be selected based on the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won.

Next, the contents of the time saving table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (c). FIG. 25 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the time saving table 202d2, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) is "hit (big hit)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates in the range of "0 to 99". A "hit short" with a time of 50 seconds is specified, and a "hit long" with a fluctuation time of 200 seconds is specified in the range of "100 to 198". Further, in the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined as "short deviation A", and the value is in the range of "150 to 169". A "short out B" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified, a "short out C" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "170 to 189", and a fluctuation time is specified in the range of "190 to 196". "Long deviation A" of 30 seconds is specified, and "long deviation B" with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is specified in the value of "197,198".

As described above, in the time saving state, unlike the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected differs depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit or a miss. , The fluctuation time that can be selected when the jackpot is won is longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected when the jackpot is missed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes the gaming state advantageous to the player, and in the time saving period, the special electric game is executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbol. Further, as the end condition (time reduction end condition) of the time reduction state, an end condition (time reduction number of times) based on the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol is set.

Therefore, if a long fluctuation time is selected as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, the period in which the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set can be lengthened. Then, in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, for example, when the time saving four times is set, the big hit (1 /) is obtained in the four special symbol lottery executed after the time saving state is set. In the case of 100), a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected as the added value. With this configuration, if a jackpot of a special symbol is won within a limited period of time saving, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game to the player, so that the player can play enthusiastically. Can be done.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a difference of up to 5 times is provided in the fluctuation time selected as "10 seconds to 50 seconds", so that the deviation fluctuation of the longer fluctuation time is selected. The game can be played while expecting the player to be played.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining time saving period mode 801 for showing the length of the time saving state period (V rush period) is displayed on the end screen of the jackpot game. The remaining time reduction period mode 801 is within the range until the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and the variation time determined in advance based on the winning information included in the special symbol hold that has already been acquired. It is configured to display the total value of.

With this configuration, whether the number of seconds displayed as the remaining time short-term mode 801 is a display mode in which the fluctuation times of a plurality of deviation fluctuations are totaled, or a display corresponding to the fluctuation time of one jackpot fluctuation. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict whether or not it is a mode.

Returning to FIG. 22, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 999, the maximum value (that is, 999) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202b. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the hit set by, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202b is divided into two types, one is for a low probability of a normal symbol and the other is for a high probability of being a hit of a normal symbol than the low probability, and is included in each of them. The number of random numbers that will be big hits is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (c). FIG. 23 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the case of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is "0", and the normal symbol hit is defined, and the normal symbol is in the high probability state. In some cases, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 299".

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (1/1000) is set to the low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the time-saving state, which is the high-probability state of the normal symbol, during the normal state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to win a prize per game, it is possible to make it difficult for a ball to win a prize in the game winning device 640 when the game per game is executed during the normal state. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (300/1000) is set to the high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the normal symbol winning game based on the winning of the normal symbol in the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the game per game performed in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to win the game per game performed in the time saving state in the game winning device 640. Further, even if a ball wins the general electric winning device 640 in the normal state, it is difficult for the winning ball to enter the special electric actuating port 643. That is, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win the winning game in the normal state, and even if the player wins the game in the normal state, the ball wins the winning device 640 during the game per game. Further, even if the ball wins the general electric winning device 640, it is difficult for the winning ball to win the special electric actuating port 643.

In this way, in a plurality of processes (three processes) from the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol to the winning of the ball to the special electric operating port 643, it is difficult to advance the game in the normal state than in the time saving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning a prize in the special electric actuating port 643 and the game per character being executed, triggered by the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed in the normal state.

Further, in the present embodiment, instead of restricting the winning of the ball to the special electric actuating port 643 based on the fact that the lottery of the normal symbol is executed during the normal state in the above-mentioned three processes, the normal state Even in the middle, a short fluctuation time (3 seconds, which is the same as in the time reduction state) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In other words, even if it is configured so that the lottery of ordinary symbols can be easily executed in a short period of time, the ball is restricted from winning the special electric actuating port 643 by the regulation in the above three processes, so that it is in the normal state. It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the special electric operation port 643 in the wake of the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed in 1 and the game per character.

In this way, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal state to be short, the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is set at the timing when the game state is switched, for example, when the time reduction state is set after the jackpot game is completed. ) The normal symbol variation of the long fluctuation time executed during is executed across the transition timing of the game state, and even though the special symbol variation in the time saving state is started, the normal symbol in the time saving state is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery cannot be executed. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the time saving state is managed for a period of time, it is possible to provide the player with a game (special electric game) that effectively uses the limited time saving period.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned three processes (the probability of hitting a normal symbol, the winning rate of a ball to the general electric winning device 640 in the game per normal symbol, and the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 are the special electric actuating port 643. In the winning rate), it is configured to regulate the winning of the ball to the special electric operating port 643 in the normal state, but it is not limited to this, and it is configured to regulate in the process of two or less. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, if the ball that has won the prize in the general electric winning device 640 does not win in the special electric operating port 643, the ball is entered in the out opening 644 so that the player is not given a privilege (for example, a prize ball). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a ball enters the out port 644, more prize balls are paid out than when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643. You may.

With this configuration, while suppressing the ball from winning the special electric operating port 643 during the normal state, a different privilege (privilege to execute a game per character) when winning the general electric winning device 640 Since it is possible to give the player a privilege different from that of the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. In addition, in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, it is possible to provide the player with added value when a normal symbol is won.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by using the acquired value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. 22. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202b, a jackpot type selection table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table. It has at least 202d and various operation scenario tables 202e. The first random number table 202a, the second random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d have been described above when the various counters shown in FIG. 22 are described, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. ..

The various operation scenario tables 202e are data tables having operation scenarios in which the operation contents of various movable members whose operation control is managed by the main control device 110 are defined in advance in time series, and are used in the control process of the main control device 110. , It is read out when the operation of the movable member is controlled. In the present embodiment, when controlling the operation of the movable member, an operation scenario that matches the current operation control condition is read from the various operation scenario tables 202e, and the read operation scenario is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. Remember. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the storage area are periodically updated (in units of 4 milliseconds) to correspond to the updated values. When there is an operation scenario in which the movable member is variably operated in the area, the operation control based on the operation scenario is executed. Further, each operation scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set for each event (big hit game, game per normal figure, game per accessory) that controls the operation of the movable member. Therefore, in the operation scenario table corresponding to an event (for example, a game per normal figure) in which it is necessary to control the operation of a plurality of movable members in one event, the operation control contents to be executed for the plurality of movable members are defined. Has been done.

Here, the contents of various operation scenario tables 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various operation scenario tables 202e. As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the various operation scenario tables 202e include a jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, an accessory per accessory operation scenario table 202e2, a normal figure per operation scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4. ing.

First, the contents of the operation scenario table 202e2 per accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). FIG. 26B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various contents defined in the operation scenario table 202e2 per accessory. The bonus-per-feature motion scenario table 202e2 is a data table in which the bonus-per-feature scenario in which the operation content during the bonus-per-feature game is set is defined, and the opening period of the bonus-per-feature game (the bonus-per-feature game is started). The period from then until the V winning device 65 is opened (until the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON), the round period (the maximum period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), and the ending period (V winning device 65). The grace period from the end of the opening period of the game to the end of the storage solenoid 209c and the setting of the storage solenoid 209c to off) is specified, and is set when the game per accessory is started, and is periodic (main processing of the main control device 110). The operation control corresponding to the value of the scenario counter (not shown) in which the value is incremented by 1 is executed.

Specifically, when the game per character is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to "1". Since the scenario counter "1" defines an operation scenario in which the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON as a corresponding operation scenario, the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON at the same time as the start of the game per accessory, and the storage valve is set to ON. The storage valve 66a is moved so that the ball can be stored in the storage portion formed on the upper surface of the 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is added every 4 milliseconds, and the scenario counter "25", that is, the opening period is ended 0.1 seconds after the game per character is started, and then the scenario counter of the scenario counter. When the value becomes "26", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker) is opened. That is, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 66a is configured to be changed to the storage state by using the period from the start of the game per accessory to the opening state of the V winning device 65. With this configuration, even if the ball vigorously wins the V winning device 65 immediately after the V winning device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a is already at the timing when the V winning device 65 is opened. Is changed to the storage state, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from passing through the storage valve 66a and winning the V winning opening 165.

Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "375", that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have passed from the start of the game per character, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to off, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V). A scenario for closing the attacker) is specified. Then, after executing the closing control of the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker), that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "376", the ending period of the game per accessory is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to off. It is stipulated to be. Then, the closed state (ending period) of the game per accessory is set until the value of the scenario counter reaches "750".

That is, in the game per accessory executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning device 65 is configured to open after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. Then, the scenario is defined so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to off after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter “375”). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring at the start or end of the character-per-character game, and to prevent the character-per-character game from being executed at an unintended timing.

Next, the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The operation of the first movable valve 66b of the present embodiment is controlled so as to move in a predetermined operation pattern while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the operation of the first movable valve 66b is set by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54) (see S1715 in FIG. 54). Then, the value of the scenario counter is updated (1 addition) by the processing executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the first movable valve 66b in the present embodiment has a V winning possible state in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 165 and a ball in the V winning opening 165. It is configured to be located in any of the states where it is difficult to win a V prize. In the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on for the value of the scenario counter in the range of "1" to "1500" (the ball wins the V winning opening 165 of the first movable valve 66b). An operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which the ball is difficult to win the V winning opening 165 in the first movable valve 66b) is defined.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1250", that is, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is off until 5 seconds have passed since the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 was set. , The value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1251" to "1500", that is, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on for 5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. The operation scenario is specified so that it is set. Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit value "1500", the value of the scenario counter is switched from "1500" to "1" when the next main process (see FIG. 55) is executed. After that, the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for allowing or prohibiting the winning of a ball into the V winning opening 165, is used for 5.5 seconds for only 0.5 seconds. It is configured to variably operate so as to switch to a state in which the ball can be won in the V winning opening 165. As a result, when a ball arrives at the first movable valve 66b at a random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and wins the V winning opening 165 is 1/11. It is configured. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which game per character the ball wins in the V winning opening 165, and it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in all the games per character.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls win the V winning device 65 during one game per accessory, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is large. It is configured to be one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165) in the game per character is about 1/11, so that the player is prevented from being provided with the jackpot game excessively. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the operation content of the first movable valve 66b is configured so that the same operation content is always set during the period when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, but the operation content is limited to this. It does not have to be a predetermined operation pattern. For example, a first operation pattern defined as an off period (5.5 seconds) and an on period (0.5 seconds) of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, and Set the operation scenario to set the second operation pattern defined as the off period (3 seconds), the on period (0.2 seconds), the off period (2 seconds), and the on period (0.3 seconds) in order. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is also possible to provide a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time from the beginning and to switch to a different operation scenario based on the measurement result by the measuring means. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within 1 hour after the power is turned on, 3 hours to 3 hours and 10 minutes after the power is turned on, etc.), the first operation scenario is higher than the normal operation scenario. The ratio of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be on may be higher than the ratio of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be off. With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) during the time-saving game for a specific period, and it becomes possible for the player to play the game aiming at that period. Can improve the operation of.

Further, the control content of the operation scenario may be different depending on the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set to the initial state (scenario counter) at the timing when a specific jackpot game is executed and the timing when the game ends. It may be configured to start from the value "1"), or the result of the special symbol lottery may be continuously deviated over a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times which is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, a special operation scenario is set in which the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be on is higher than the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be off, as compared with the normal operation scenario. It may be configured as. Then, once this special operation scenario is set, the time saving state is set after that, and it is preferable to configure the setting so that the time saving state is continuously set for a period until the time saving state ends. As a result, the player can be made to continue playing the game by setting the special motion scenario. In this case, it is advisable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the special operation scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that a special motion scenario is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the contents of the operation scenario table 202e3 per normal figure will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the operation scenario table 202e3 per normal diagram. The operation scenario table 202e3 per normal figure is a data table in which the operation pattern of the game per normal figure executed when the winner is won in the ordinary symbol lottery is stored, and at the time when the game per normal figure is started. An operation scenario corresponding to the set gaming state is set.

Specifically, in the normal-figure-per-figure operation scenario table 202e3, the normal-use per-figure scenario 202e31, which defines the motion scenario of the per-figure game to be executed in the normal state, and the normal-use per-figure scenario 202e31, which are executed in the time-saving state, are executed. The scenario 202e32 for shortening the working hours, in which the operation scenario of the game per normal figure is specified, is specified.

Here, the contents of the scenario 202e31 per normal drawing will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (c). FIG. 27 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e31 per normal drawing. In this normal symbol hit scenario 202e31, when it is determined in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 of FIG. 48) that the gaming state at the time when the winning normal symbol variation is stopped (determined) is the normal state ( S1118: No) of FIG. 48 is an operation scenario to be set.

The scenario 202e31 for normal use is a solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the utility prize device 640 with respect to the value of the scenario counter in the range of "1" to "1050", and the utility prize device. An operation scenario for setting the second movable valve solenoid 209e, which controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the flow destination of the ball that has won the prize to 640, to on and off, respectively, is defined.

Specifically, after the value of the scenario counter is set in the range of "1" to "1025", that is, after the scenario 202e31 per solenoid is set (after the game per solenoid in the normal state is executed) 4 Until 1 second elapses, the normal electric solenoid is off (the electric accessory 640a is closed), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is off (the ball is allowed to flow down to the out port 644), and then. The value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1026" to "1050", that is, for 0.1 seconds between 4.1 seconds and 4.2 seconds after the scenario 202e31 per normal drawing is executed, the solenoid solenoid is operated. The operation scenario is defined so that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is open) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on (a state in which the ball flows down to the special electric actuating port 643).

That is, when the game per game is executed in the normal state, the game per game in the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 seconds) is executed. Further, even if the ball wins the prize-winning device 640 in the open state for 0.1 seconds, the position where the second movable valve 643 causes the winning ball to flow down to the out port 644 at that time (see FIG. 4). Since it is variable to, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the special electric actuating port 643.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the contents of the time-saving general map per scenario 202e32 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the scenario 202e32 for time saving. In this time-saving normal symbol hit scenario 202e32, when it is determined in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 of FIG. 48) that the gaming state at the time when the winning normal symbol variation is stopped (determined) is the normal state ( S1118: Yes) of FIG. 48 is an operation scenario to be set.

Scenario 202e32 for time saving, scenario counter value is in the range of "1" to "1025", the electric solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the electric prize device 640, and the general electric prize device 640. An operation scenario for setting the second movable valve solenoid 209e, which controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the flow destination of the winning ball, to on and off, respectively, is defined.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "25", that is, after the scenario 202e31 per solenoid is set (after the game per solenoid in the normal state is executed), it is 0. .Until 1 second elapses, the normal electric solenoid is set to off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to on (the state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643). After that, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "26" to "775", that is, for 3 seconds between 0.1 second and 3.1 seconds after the scenario 202e32 per solenoid for time saving is set. The normal electric solenoid is set to on (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is continuously set to on, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "776" to "1024", that is, The solenoid is off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is on until 3.1 to 4.1 seconds have passed since the scenario 202e32 for time saving was set. When the setting is set to (a state in which the ball flows down to the solenoid actuating port 643) and the value of the scenario counter reaches "1025", that is, the upper limit value specified in the scenario 202e32 per time-saving solenoid, the second movable is possible. The operation scenario is defined so that the valve solenoid 209e is turned off (a state in which the ball flows down to the out port 644).

That is, when the game per game is executed in the short time state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the game per game is immediately executed for 3 seconds after a short closing state (0.1 seconds). Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the prize in the prize-winning device 640 than in the game per game in the normal state.

Further, in the time-saving general drawing per scenario 202e32, the position where the second movable valve 643 can be made to win the special electric actuating port 643 during the period when the ball can win the general electric winning device 640 (FIG. 5). Since it is possible to set (see), it is possible to easily make the ball win the special electric operating port 643 during the game per game.

In addition, the above-mentioned normal-use normal-drawing scenario 202e31 and time-saving normal-use per-figure scenario 202e32 are based on the operation scenario because the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d is defined to be the same. The operation control contents can be unified, and the process of controlling the variable member can be simplified.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the game per game includes a time end condition (a condition in which the scenario per game is updated to the upper limit) that is satisfied based on the passage of time, and a winning device for the game. The winning end condition that is established when the number of winning balls to 640 reaches the upper limit value (for example, 5) is set. When playing a normal game, the winning end condition is set so that the time end condition is satisfied first. As a result, for example, in a game per game, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally winning a large number of balls into the Fuden winning device 640.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 55) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a winning number counter 203e, and an operation. Counter group 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, time saving end flag 203j, accessory hit flag 203k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, other memory area It has 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a stores various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the special symbol entry port 64 (starting prize) up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for doing.

The special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the special symbol stops fluctuating, the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a This is a storage area in which various counter values are shifted and stored when various counter values are stored in.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) when the start winning prize is detected. The values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entry port 64 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), each counter C1 to C2, CS1 is detected from the counter buffer. Is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a described above, the data corresponding to one start winning prize is used as the special symbol holding ball. Shift to the execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one holding area so that the data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to once. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of being digested earlier. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol is held in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the ball storage area 203b (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is usually used. Shift to the symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, based on the winning of the special symbol entry port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. 1 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the symbol display device 37 up to four times. The special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c (that is, the number of reserved balls) is set in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the special symbol entry port 64 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol hold ball number command output from the main control device 110. The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1.

When each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 has a special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The data stored in (1) is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time based on the above. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 and the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the game per character. Specifically, it is added and updated one by one based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning V winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203e) and the number of discharged balls (the number of passing balls provided in each winning opening) can be detected. It is reset to the initial value "0" after it is determined whether or not it matches with the cumulative number of detection results of. The value of the winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of various set operation scenarios, and is composed of scenario counters corresponding to each of the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. When any of the operation scenarios in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, the counter value update process is performed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110. Is executed.

In the present embodiment, the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed in duplicate. For example, a scenario related to a game per game and a scenario related to a game per character are configured to be executable at the same time. Therefore, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e, but the scenario counters are not limited to this, and scenario counters for the maximum number of scenarios that can be executed at the same time may be provided. In this case, when a type is provided for the scenario counter and a new operation scenario is set, an unused scenario counter type is determined, a scenario counter is set based on the determination result, and the set scenario counter is used. The usage information for indicating which operation scenario to use may be set, and the usage information set in the storage means of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 may be set. Further, it is preferable that the storage means in which the usage information is set has a backup function capable of holding the stored information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as in the case of various configurations of the other RAM 203. .. With this configuration, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after the power is restored can be continued from the state before the power failure. Is possible.

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state corresponding to the game state (setting state of the time reduction counter 203h) set after the jackpot game ends. Is remembered. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, and the time saving state is stored when the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0.

Further, in the state where the jackpot game or the game per character is executed, the hit game state (big hit state, the game state per character) indicating that each hit game is being executed is executed. The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game is also stored. In addition, it is configured to store information during the game per game, which indicates that the game per game is being executed.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the subordinate state setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 54), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is set.

As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the current gaming state.

The time saving counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is set. After the jackpot game is completed, the time reduction counter 203j is set with a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type (S1914, 1915 in FIG. 56). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege during the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time saving counter 203j is set, the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation), and the time saving counter 203j is added. When the value of is 0, the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state, but it is not limited to this, for example, until the next jackpot game is executed, it is normal. It may be configured so that the high probability state of the symbol continues. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time reduction counter 203j.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) is the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j. However, the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied. You may. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special out-of-order winning), or when the ordinary symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special drawing), the value of the time saving counter 203j may be subtracted, or when the ball wins the special electric operation port 643. May be configured to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203j.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted by 1, but a plurality of values of the time saving counter 203j are grouped together according to the type of the satisfied end condition (for example, 2). It may be configured to be subtracted, or it may be configured to subtract so that the value of the time saving counter 203j becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203j. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Further, the condition for ending the time saving state may be different depending on the content of the condition for setting the time saving state (big hit type). As a result, not only the player can be made to execute the jackpot game, but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interested, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The jackpot flag 203i is set to on when the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a jackpot at the start of fluctuation based on the ball entering the special figure entry port 64. It is a flag to be set. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed.

The time saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, and is set to be on when the time saving end condition is satisfied. The time saving end flag 203h has a value of 1 in the time saving counter 203h in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, that is, the special symbol fluctuation this time is in the time saving state. It is set to ON when it is determined that it is the final fluctuation of (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, when it is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45) and is determined to be ON, the value of the time saving counter 203j is reset to "0" and the time saving state is changed. The process for terminating is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45), and the process is set to off (see S804 in FIG. 45).

In addition, when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 and the V jackpot game is executed during the special symbol change (during the final change in the time saving state) executed while the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON. Is also set to off (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and the end processing for determining the time saving end is executed at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. There is. Then, when the special symbol change is interrupted by the character-hit game during the special symbol change and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed triggered by the character-hit game, the time saving end flag 203h is turned off. It is configured to be set.

Therefore, for example, even if the V jackpot game is executed with the time saving end flag 203h set to ON and the special symbol variation that was interrupted after the jackpot game ends is resumed, the restarted special symbol variation It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending at the fluctuation stop timing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the subtraction process of the time saving end flag 203h may be executed when the special symbol variation is restarted. There is no. Therefore, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j is executed from the time when the next special symbol change after the restarting special symbol change ends. ..

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play a game for a longer time in a set time saving state, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. In the present embodiment, the process of updating the time saving state only for the final fluctuation of the time saving state is defined as the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. However, the value of the time saving counter 203j is, for example, a predetermined value (for example, 2). ), The process of updating the time saving state may be set when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

The bonus-per-feature flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the bonus-per-feature game is executed, and is set to be turned on when the bonus-per-feature game is executed. This character-per-character flag 203k is turned on when the ball that has won the general electric prize-winning device 640 during the game per character has won the special electric operating port 643 and the game per character has not been executed at that time. (See S1307 in FIG. 50). Then, in various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is referred to when determining whether or not the game per character is in progress, and is set to off when the game per character ends. In this embodiment, when the accessory per item flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol variation is interrupted.

The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure, and when it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped and turned on. When it is set to off from the set state, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol fluctuation is temporarily stopped (suspended), and is set to ON when the special symbol fluctuation is temporarily stopped (suspended). It is a thing. In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball is won in the special electric actuating port 643, the game per character can be executed, and when the game per character is executed, the change of the special symbol being executed stops. It is configured to be done.

The special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in S6 of FIG. 43). Is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the special symbol variation executing process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. Whether or not the value is 0 is determined by the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 40) (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203a is 0 (S204: No in FIG. 40), the special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing special symbol (see S287 in FIG. 45). ) Is executed.

Further, the special figure variation time counter 203n is configured so that when a bonus game or a jackpot game is executed, the process for subtracting the value is interrupted. Therefore, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not subtracted during the game per accessory or during the big hit game.

The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that the ball has won the V winning opening during the game per character, and is set to be turned on when the ball wins the V winning opening during the game per character. Is to be done. The setting status of the V flag 203p is referred to in the accessory hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and when it is set to ON, the jackpot game (V jackpot game) starts. It is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). After that, it is set to off (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate 650b of the specific winning opening 650a. The specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing the front side, the V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65. The storage solenoid 209c for driving, the first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, and the second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the Fuden winning device 640. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 is connected to a switch group or a sensor group (for example, a storage sensor 65s for detecting a ball stored in a storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a in the V winning device 65), etc., which is not shown. The various switches 208 and the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the signal output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Perform various processes based on this.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 30A, at least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the operation scenario table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, a variation effect in which the third symbol is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed in response to the special symbol variation to be executed. .. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. By visually recognizing the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation this time is a big hit.

On the other hand, when the time saving state is set, the variable effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is not executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the special electric game aiming at the game per V triggered by the lottery of the normal symbol. It is configured so that an effect (V rush effect) for guiding the game content of the game is executed. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, various variation patterns are defined as the variation patterns to be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the variation patterns to be referred to when the time saving state is defined. No. When the third symbol is displayed smaller on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the time saving state, the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is used. It is sufficient to configure so as to specify only the variation display mode corresponding to (variation time).

The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for grasping the status of operation control for various devices executed on the main control device 110 side on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is various types of ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is formed from the same data table as the operation scenario table 202e. This operation scenario table 222b is used when setting an operation scenario corresponding to the received command when a command indicating the start of operation control (for example, a command indicating the start of a winning game) is received from the main control device 110 side. Referenced. The operation scenario set here is updated and controlled so as to be synchronized with the update operation on the main control device 110 side.

With this configuration, only the command indicating the start of operation control is output from the main control device 110 side, and the operation status and future operation development of various devices can be easily grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It becomes possible. In the present embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110 side, but the main control device 110 is not limited to this. The progress status of various operation scenarios of the various operation scenario table 202e may be set as a command and output to the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (b). As shown in FIG. 30B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, effect counter 223f, slave state setting area 223g, look-ahead counter 223h, time saving period counter 223i, unreported period storage area 223j, unreported hold number storage area 223k, interruption flag 223m, special hit flag 223n, extension flag 223p, V A rush flag 223q, a fluctuation time counter 223r, a notified pending number storage area 223s, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and each of these areas stores prize information. NS. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the special figure entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 11B) of the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing of the image is controlled. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. .. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure stop type selection flag 223e is set to on when a stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 98. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223g. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of special figure reservations for which the fluctuation time is pre-read among the number of time reductions set as the time reduction state, and is the number of time reductions set when the time reduction state is set. The value corresponding to is set, and is subtracted according to the number of special figure reservations for which the look-ahead of the fluctuation time is executed. Then, it is referred to when the value of the time saving period counter 223i, which will be described later, becomes 0, and when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, the special symbol change is executed even in the time saving state. , A process for displaying a dedicated effect (see FIG. 19A) is executed.

The time saving period counter 223i is a counter indicating the time (special symbol fluctuation time) of the special symbol change until the time saving state ends, and a plurality of counters until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. The value obtained by accumulating the special figure fluctuation time is set. The value of the time saving period counter 223i is referenced and subtracted in the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control process 113 (FIG. 60). See S5303 and S5304 of 72).

The value indicated by the time reduction period counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining period of the V rush in the V rush effect executed during the time reduction state (see FIG. 12 (c)). .. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the game is configured to be played by the same game method (left-handed game) as in the normal state, the jackpot game, and the time saving state, and is set after the jackpot game is completed. At the timing when the time saving state is started, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is configured to easily reach the upper limit (4).

Therefore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 12A) in which the number of time reductions is set to 4 times, the special symbol holding information acquired at that time (the special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b) is displayed. Based on the winning information), the fluctuation time until the end of the time saving state (cumulative value of the fluctuation time for four special figure fluctuations) is displayed.

Even if the number of time reductions is larger than the upper limit (4) of the special symbol reservation number counter 223c, or even if the time reduction number of times is set to 4, the number of special symbol reservations at the end of the jackpot game ( If the number of special symbol reservations) has not reached 4, the value of the time reduction counter 223i is set according to the special symbol reservation information acquired at that time, and the time reduction period is determined from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of special symbol reservations added to the counter 223i is subtracted. Then, when new special symbol reservation information is acquired, the special symbol fluctuation time is added to the time saving period counter 223i based on the acquired special symbol reservation information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

The unreported period storage area 223j is in a state where the fluctuation time can be added to the time saving period counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, the winning command is received even though the winning command is received. When the value of the special symbol fluctuation time according to the included special symbol hold information cannot be added to the time saving period counter 223i (for example, during a jackpot game or a character-per-feature game), the special symbol hold information included in the received winning command This is an area that temporarily stores the special map fluctuation time according to the above.

The value (special figure fluctuation time) stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read out when the time saving period can be added, and is referred to when adding to the time saving period counter 223i. With this configuration, regardless of whether or not the time saving period can be added, when a winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute the process of reading the special figure fluctuation time included in the winning command. The processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The unannounced hold number storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands in which the special figure fluctuation time is stored in the above-mentioned unannounced period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol hold balls. Therefore, it is read when the time saving period can be added, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted according to the read value.

The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the time saving period counter 223h is not subtracted, and the state in which the value of the time saving period counter 223h is not subtracted, that is, the character hit game and the jackpot game are executed. If this is the case, it will be set to on.

The special hit flag 223n is a flag set to be turned on when the winning information indicating the special hit (“big hit B”) is included in the special symbol stored on hold. This special hit flag 223n is set to on when it is determined in the jackpot end processing (see S4914 in FIG. 69) that the winning information indicating the special hit is included in the hold storage (see S5013 in FIG. 69). ).

In the present embodiment, if there is a special hit in the special symbol hold acquired at the end of the jackpot game, only the period until the special symbol change corresponding to the special hit ends is shortened during the V rush. It is configured to be displayed as a period, and further, an effect (heaven mode) for notifying the player that a special hit exists in the special figure hold is executed (Fig.). 17 (a)).

With this configuration, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (after a short period of time when it is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), the jackpot game (the jackpot won by the special figure lottery) is given to the player. Since it is possible to notify in advance that the game) will be executed, the player can be made to play the game with peace of mind. Further, in the present embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special hit is notified as a short time period, so that the jackpot is hit. The remaining period for a short period of time at the time of the game (special hit) can be set to 0 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many seconds the jackpot game will be executed, the V jackpot will be performed during the short time period of the heaven mode (during the period until the jackpot game of special hit is executed). The game can be played while entertaining how many times the game can be played.

Furthermore, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special hit is notified as a shortened time period, so that the special hit is supported. It is possible to prevent the player from determining in advance the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired after the figure hold. As a result, for example, when the jackpot game corresponding to the special hit is executed at the stage where the time saving period is 10 seconds remaining, the player knows in advance that the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next is 10 seconds. It is possible to prevent the player from being grasped and the motivation to play is reduced.

The extension flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the game per normal figure is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the game per normal figure is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. If so, it is set to on. In the present embodiment, as the operation scenario of the game per normal figure, the scenario 202e31 for the normal game corresponding to the game per game in the normal state and the time-saving normal game corresponding to the game per game in the time saving state It has scenarios 202e32, and is configured to variably set the game content of the game per game based on the game state set at the execution timing of the game per game.

Therefore, for example, when the game per game is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the game per game in the time saving state may be executed even after the game state shifts to the normal state. When such a state occurs, it is configured to execute an effect in which the end timing of the V rush effect indicating the game mode in the time saving state is extended to the end timing of the game per normal drawing (FIG. 16). (C). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the period in which the V prize should be aimed (V rush period) in an easy-to-understand manner.

The V rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating that it is a V rush period, and is set to on when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) in a normal state, and is an end condition of a time saving state. Is set to off when is satisfied. The V rush flag 223q is configured to be continuously turned on even when a jackpot game is executed during a short time period (during V rush). As a result, it is possible to easily set the period for which various cumulative information (information for indicating the number of acquired V jackpot games and the number of acquired balls during the V rush period) to be calculated in the V rush period is to be calculated.

The fluctuation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and when the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set, and the voice lamp control is performed. It is referenced and subtracted in the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the process 113 (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72). The value of the fluctuation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution at the timing when the special symbol change can be interrupted, and is used to set a different effect mode according to the remaining period. Be done.

The notified pending number storage area 223s is an area for storing the special figure reserved number corresponding to the fluctuation time already added to the value of the time saving period counter 223i, and the value of the unannounced pending number storage area 223k is updated. At that time, the updated value is stored, and the value is subtracted when the special symbol change is completed. Then, at the end of the jackpot game in which a new time reduction number is set, a new time reduction state is set by subtracting the value stored in the notified pending number storage area 223s from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h. In this case, the number of special symbol holding balls already notified as the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted, and the number of special symbol holding balls that can be newly added and displayed in the time saving period is made to correspond to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. Used for.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the present embodiment, the effect of suggesting the variation time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired in the normal state to the player is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state is not limited to this. The effect mode may be changed according to the contents of the special drawing reservation.

For example, the stop type of the special symbol (combination of the third symbol indicating the jackpot) may be variably set based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the acquired special symbol hold, and the total fluctuation time of the special symbol hold may be set. When a big hit is won in a state where it exceeds 100 seconds, a combination of third symbols in which odd numbers are stopped and displayed in doublets may be displayed.

Further, the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal state is variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning by the special symbol lottery. You may.

In the present embodiment, when the V rush is entered, all the fluctuation times based on the acquired special figure hold are notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the acquired special figure is used. It may be configured to notify the player of only a part of the fluctuation time based on the hold, or the duration of the V rush (the period until the end of the time saving state) by the player operating the operation means. The game playability in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol for indicating the above is not notified may be selectably configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to add up and notify the fluctuation time corresponding to a plurality of special figure fluctuations executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to each. It may be configured so that the operator can identify the variable time corresponding to the special figure hold of. In this case, for example, the display mode of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure change executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is displayed in a display mode imitating a character, and according to the type of the displayed character. It may be configured so that the player can roughly grasp the length of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure hold.

In the present embodiment, since the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is always set after the jackpot game is executed, the V rush flag is set when the jackpot game is executed. However, for example, when the time saving state and the normal state are set at a specific ratio after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game is executed. Even so, there is a risk that the time saving state will not be set after the jackpot game is completed. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), whether or not the time reduction state is set after the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the set jackpot type, and the time reduction state is set. If it is determined that, it can be changed after holding the special figure acquired at that time.

Next, the content of the game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the game per normal figure is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 32 is a timing chart of the game when the game per normal figure is executed in the time saving state. It is a timing chart showing the flow.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of the game when the game per normal figure is executed in the normal state will be described. In the present embodiment, when a winning game is won in a lottery of ordinary symbols, a game (special electric game) that can proceed in the order of a game per game, a game per character, and a big hit game (V big hit game) can be executed. It is configured. That is, the jackpot game can be executed without drawing a special symbol.

First, in the normal state, if a winner is won by a normal symbol lottery, a game per normal figure is executed based on the scenario 202e31 per normal figure (see FIG. 27 (c)), and the general electric winning device 640 is open-controlled. Will be done. In the game per game executed in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), it takes 4 seconds (t1) from the start of the game per game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a. Then, after an open state of 0.1 seconds (t2) and a closed state of 1 second (t3), the game per game is completed. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per normal figure, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to turn on so that the ball can win a prize in the special electric operation port 643. After that, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

Therefore, in the game per game executed in the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to win in the Fuden winning device 640, and even if the ball wins, the winning ball is guided to the out opening 644. It will be. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning a prize in the special electric actuating port 643 during the normal state and executing the game per accessory. With this configuration, the time saving state in which the special figure game aiming at the execution of the jackpot game is executed by the lottery of the special symbol and the special electric game aiming at the execution of the jackpot game by the lottery of the normal symbol are executed. Even if it is configured to execute the same game method in the middle and the middle, it is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot game by the special electric game during the normal state and to provide the player with the jackpot game excessively. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 15 times) in the time saving state, so that the time saving state ends. Therefore, the special symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state. Need to be prevented from not being executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the same game method is executed in the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time saving state, the game in which only the lottery of the normal symbol is executed during the time saving state is performed. It can be suppressed from being done.

In the present embodiment, the operation content of the game per normal figure is set so as to prohibit the execution of the special electric game during the normal state, but the operation content is not limited to this, and for example, the game is executed during the normal state. A part of the game per game to be played may be configured so that the same operation scenario as the game per game executed during the time saving state is selected. As a result, it is possible to make the player play an unexpected game.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. As described above, when the game per game is executed in the normal state, the ball that has won the special electric winning device 640 does not win the special electric operating port 643, so that the ball to the special electric operating port 643 The winning game is not executed, and the winning game in which the V winning device 65 is opened and the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened are not executed. , A new normal symbol change (normal figure change) is executed based on the end of the game per normal figure. Since the operation scenario in which the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31 (h)) is constantly driven during the period when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is set, the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31 (h)) is set regardless of whether or not the game per accessory is executed. , The operation pattern is based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27A).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, among the flow of the game when the game per normal figure is executed in the time saving state, the flow of the game when the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed will be described. ..

First, in the time saving state, when the winning is won by the ordinary symbol lottery, the game per drawing based on the scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) for saving time is executed, and the ordinary electric winning device 640 is open-controlled. In the game per game executed during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 28, it takes 0.1 seconds (t1) from the start of the game per game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a. After that, after an open state for 3 seconds (t2) and a closed state for 1 second (t3), the game per game is completed. Then, for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per normal figure, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to turn on so that the ball can win a prize in the special electric operation port 643. After that, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

Therefore, in the game per game executed in the short time state, the ball is easy to win in the normal electric winning device 640 (it is easier to win the game than the game per game in the normal state), and the winning ball is operated by special electric power. It is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the mouth 643 (it is easier to win a prize than a game per game in a normal state). As a result, in the game per game that is executed during the time saving state, it is possible to facilitate the winning of the ball to the special electric actuating port 643 and to facilitate the game per character.

The ball that has won the special electric operating port 643 and the passing (winning) of the ball are detected by the special electric operating port winning switch (FIG. 32 (e)) (not shown), and the function of opening the V winning device 65 with the detection result as a trigger. A hit game is executed. When the game per accessory is started, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) in order to open the V opening / closing door 65a after the waiting period of 0.1 seconds (t5) has elapsed. After that, a per-feature game in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to off is executed for 1.4 seconds (t7). Further, with the start of the game per accessory, the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON in order to position the storage valve 66a in the storage state for 1.6 seconds (t8). That is, during the period in which the ball can win the V winning device 65 by the game per character, the storage valve 66a is maintained in the stored state (see FIG. 7). It is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning opening 165.

Then, when the storage solenoid 209c is set to off after the lapse of the period t8, one ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down toward the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 so as to alternately switch between a closed state for 5 seconds (t10) and an open state for 0.5 seconds (t9), and is stored. When the ball stored in the valve 66a reaches the first movable valve 66a, if the first movable valve 66b is in the closed state, the ball flows down toward the second out port 163b, and the first movable valve 66b If is open, the ball flows down toward the V winning opening 165. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 165, the passage of the ball is detected by a V winning switch (FIG. 32 (i)) (not shown), and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is started based on the detection result.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game per game is executed during the time saving state, it is easier for the ball to be won by the game winning device 640 (compared to the game per game in the normal state). (Easy to win), and when the winning ball executes a game per game that is easy to win in the special electric operating port 643, and the game per game is executed during the normal state, the normal electric winning device 640 is used. It is difficult to win a ball (it is harder to win a prize than a game per game in a short time state), and even if the ball wins the Fuden winning device 640, the winning ball goes to the special electric operation port 643. It is configured to perform a game per game that is difficult to win.

With this configuration, in order to continuously execute the special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state, a game method aiming at the special entrance 64 which is a lottery trigger for the special symbol and a through which is a lottery trigger for the normal symbol. Even when the game method aiming at the gate 67 is the same, the probability that the game per character is executed can be greatly different depending on the game state. In addition, in the game per game in the normal state, the act of illegally making the ball win the prize in the normal electric winning device 640 (for example, the ball is stopped by a magnet in the vicinity of the electric accessory 640a, and the ball is adjusted to the opening timing. Even if the winning ball is executed, it is possible to prevent the winning ball from winning the special electric actuating port 643, so that the player can be provided with a fair game.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the game for establishing the lottery opportunity for the special symbol or the lottery opportunity for the normal symbol, but also the game for hitting the normal figure, the game for hitting the character, and the game for hitting the jackpot are all executed by the left-handed game. Therefore, the game can be smoothly performed without causing the player to feel the hassle of changing the game method.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 10). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power outage, power outage) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 38) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the special figure entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 34 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 34 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 34 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 34 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the special figure entry port 64, the fluctuating image at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the special figure entry port 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory view illustrating the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 35 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 35 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "city stage" and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 28 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 35, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on the back surface E is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... With the passage of time. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to "island stage", an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed as the initial rear image of the back surface E. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time elapses, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the repeated back image returning to the back image showing the morning glow is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 35A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 35 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is stored and resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after the power is turned on.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the fluctuation starts even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. When the stage change is decided by the lottery at the time, the initial position of the back side B to D is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the image data of the remaining images is displayed while the image data is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range of image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 33) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the backs B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated and stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the special symbol entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning that is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 37).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 37, in the example of FIG. 37). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 75 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 38) described later, which describes the instruction contents for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 38) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 38, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 75 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 86 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. See S6905 of 79). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 39 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (399, 99, respectively in the present embodiment, respectively). When it reaches 999), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed according to the entry of the ball into the special figure entry port 64 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the general electric winning device 640 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After executing the through gate passing process, the special electric start port winning process is executed (S108), and then the V inlet passing process (S109) and the V passing process (S110) are executed. The details of the special electric start port winning process, the V inlet passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. After executing the V-passing process, the firing control process is then executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 40, S104) performs various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations on the special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the determined variation display mode is performed by predetermined control. 1 The symbol display device 37 can be controlled to enable variable display, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol. Control is executed to display the stop display in the display mode indicating the determination result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 40, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether the game is during the big hit game (during the big hit) or during the game per character (during the character hit) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a game per character (during a character hit).

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is being hit or the accessory is being hit (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S202), and then ON. When it is determined that the setting is set to (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to be on when the game per character is executed. In the present embodiment, while the game per character is being executed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed on the first symbol display device 83.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the special symbol that was being executed with the start of the game per character is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted when the special symbol fluctuation of is extinguished. As a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which the lights are repeatedly turned off, or the display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, the lights are turned on and off repeatedly at 0.5 second intervals). Flashing display mode) may be used. Further, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during a temporary stop is used. Is also good.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not in the big hit or in the accessory hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, the special symbol. Is in the variable display (S204). When it is determined that the variation of the special symbol is being displayed (the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is larger than 0) (S204: Yes), the processing during execution of the special symbol variation is executed (S206).

In this special symbol variation executing process (S206), a process for changing (updating) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating is executed. Will be done. This special symbol variation execution processing (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

Then, when the processing of S206 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol fluctuation execution processing (S206) is 0 (S207), and the processing of S207 is performed. If it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is 0 (S207: Yes), the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S208), and then this processing is terminated.

In the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), when the fluctuation time specified for the special symbol being displayed in variation has elapsed, a process of stopping the variation display with a symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. The details of this special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. If it is determined in the process of S207 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 (S207: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S204: No), that is, when it is determined that the current is not in the special figure fluctuation, it is determined. Next, the special symbol change start process is executed (S205). In this special symbol change start processing (S205), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new lottery (variation) can be executed. , When a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This special symbol change start processing (S205) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. After executing the special symbol change start process (S205), this process ends.

As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed, the variation processing related to the special symbol (S204 to S208) within one special symbol variation processing. Is configured to run. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for the special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (S205), which is one of the special symbol variation processes (FIGS. 40 and S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change start processing (S205).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is acquired (S301), and the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S303).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the hold areas 1 to the hold area 4 of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a are sequentially transferred to the execution area side. The process of shifting is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The details of this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. , Executes a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but the variation pattern is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting based on each counter value.

After executing the process of S307, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S308). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S308: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S310), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and then this process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the process for updating the number of time reductions at the change start timing of the special symbol is executed in the time reduction state, and when the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time reduction state, the number of hours Is configured to execute the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j on without updating. The details will be described later, but the setting status of the time reduction end flag 203j is referred to when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the time reduction end flag 203j is set to on when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the time reduction counter 203h The value is set to 0 and the time saving state is terminated. Then, when the special electric game executes the game per character during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the V jackpot game is started, the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j to off is executed.

With this configuration, for example, if the special symbol change is interrupted based on the execution of the V jackpot game during the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state, the interruption is performed after the jackpot game is completed. The special symbol change corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol change that has been performed is restarted, but when the special symbol change after the restart is displayed as stopped, the time saving end flag 203j is set to off. The time saving state never ends. Further, when the special symbol change is restarted, the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted.

As a result, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, the special symbol change during the interruption during the time saving number of times (4 times) corresponding to the jackpot type (big hit C) corresponding to the jackpot game. The period obtained by adding the remaining period of is set as the time saving period in which the time saving state is set. Therefore, the special figure game is executed in the normal state, and the special electric game is executed in the time saving state rather than the duration of the time saving state set when the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and the ball goes to the V winning opening 165. When the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning the prize, it is easier to lengthen the duration of the time saving state which is advantageous to the player because the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change is added. Can be done.

That is, the duration of the set time saving state is longer when the time saving state is set again based on the game in the time saving state than when the time saving state is set based on the game in the normal state. Since it can be facilitated, the player can be enthusiastically played the game while expecting that a more advantageous gaming state is set.

Further, when a configuration for executing the process for updating the time reduction number and the process for ending the time reduction state is used at the start timing of the change of the special symbol, the special symbol change occurs when the special symbol change is restarted. Since the start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted, but the gaming state during the fluctuation period of the last special symbol change in the time saving state becomes the normal state. There was a problem that the game in the time saving state could not be provided to the player as much as possible.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the process for updating the time reduction number and the process for ending the time reduction state are configured to be executable at different timings. Specifically, it is configured to execute a process for updating the time reduction number at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and to execute a process for ending the time reduction state at the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol. .. With this configuration, the time reduction number is not updated when the special symbol change is restarted, and the time reduction state can be set as the game state during the change period of the last special symbol change in the time reduction state. , It is possible to provide the player with the maximum amount of games in a short time state.

In the present embodiment, the process for ending the time saving state is executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the start condition of the next special symbol variation is not limited to this. Is established, and the process of S305 is executed and the process of S306 is executed in the period until the next special symbol change lottery is executed, for example, in the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41). It may be configured to execute the process for terminating the time saving state at the timing before it is executed.

Further, although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to manage the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state. That is, the time reduction set this time is set based on the reception of information indicating the game state (information indicating that the time reduction state is set, information indicating the number of time reductions) included in the state command set at the end of the jackpot game. By storing the state information and updating the remaining time reduction number based on the reception of the special symbol fluctuation pattern command indicating that the special symbol fluctuation is started, the voice lamp control device 113 side of the game in the time reduction state. It is configured to manage the situation.

With this configuration, in the control process of the main control device 110, a command for indicating the number of remaining time reductions and a command for indicating the final fluctuation of the time reduction state (the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON). The voice lamp control device 113 can manage the game situation in the time saving state and set the effect mode corresponding to the current game situation without setting. Therefore, the control process in the main control device 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery is performed. The result (determination result) is acquired (S402).

After finishing the processing of S402, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S403), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S403: Yes), a big hit is shown to indicate a big hit of a special symbol. Flag 203i is set to on (S404). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won.

Then, the lottery result of the special symbol is set as a jackpot (S405), and the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S406). End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S403: No), a special symbol off symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and this process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one of the special symbol variation start processes (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the jackpot of the special symbol is set. It is determined whether or not it is done (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is turned on for the special symbol. The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S404 in the above-mentioned special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 42).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the acquired first hit type counter C2 The jackpot type is determined based on the value (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability change) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is acquired. The variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the state) is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern command is set (S506). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and is an external output process (FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. It is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in (see S1801 in FIG. 55).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S507), the fluctuation start of the special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shown. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n (S509), and this process is terminated. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S507 includes information indicating the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of the special symbol change this time, that is, the rough type such as the out-of-reach or the out-of-reach. It is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped and S503 is skipped. Move to the processing of.

Next, the special symbol variation executing process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation execution processing (S206). In this special symbol variation executing process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is executed.

In the special symbol change execution processing (S206), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to on (S701: Yes), the special figure fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is turned off. It is set (S703), the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 40) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 44). (Refer to S206 of FIG. There is. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n, and the value is decremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured as follows.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON in the processing of S701 (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S704.

Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208). This special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) is executed when it is determined that the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is "0" at present, that is, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special symbol) has elapsed. Processing.

When the special symbol fluctuation stop process (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), then the jackpot scenario won by this special symbol variation is set (S806), and the jackpot flag 202i and the time saving counter 203h are set. The value is reset (S807), information indicating that the current game state is in the big hit (during the big hit game) is stored in the game state storage area 203 g (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. The game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to store the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state related to the winning game, and by executing the process of S808, a big hit is won. The game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of the game and the game state indicating that the jackpot is being hit are stored.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to off, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery this time is out of order (S801: No), then the time saving end flag It is determined whether or not 203j is set to ON (S802). When it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation stopped this time is the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the time saving counter 203h Is reset to 0 (S803), the time saving end flag 203j is set to off (S804), and information indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S805). The process proceeds to S809. If it is determined in the process of S802 that the time saving end flag 203j is set to off (S802: No), the processes of S803 to S805 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S809.

In the process of S809, a special symbol confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the special symbol is set (S809), and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The process of stopping the variable display of (S810) is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the special symbol variation stop process (S208), the process (S809, S810) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the lottery (lottery game) of the special symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, when a ball wins a prize in the special electric operation port 643 and the game per character is executed, the special symbol change during execution is interrupted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the result of a predetermined determination executed when a ball wins a prize in the special electric actuating port 643, the special symbol fluctuation during execution may be discarded instead of being interrupted. With this configuration, it is possible to show the case where the special symbol fluctuation indicating the duration of the time saving state is interrupted and the case where it is discarded, so that the duration of the time saving state is suddenly subtracted ( It is possible to end), and it is possible to perform a tense effect on the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) determines whether or not a ball has entered the special figure entry port 64 (starting prize), and if the start winning is won, the maximum number of reserved balls (at the special drawing entry port 64). This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (up to 4).

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved sphere is stored in the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, the counter value is stored in each of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a. A process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special drawing entry port 64 (starting winning), which is the starting opening (S901). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entry port 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the special symbol entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the special figure entry port 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added by 1 (904) to the voice lamp control device 113. The number of reserved balls command for notifying the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved lottery rights of special symbols) of the starting port is set (S905).

Then, each value of various counter values (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first, variable type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is supported. Each is held (stored) in the storage area of the number of reserved balls to be held (S906).

Next, the look-ahead process is executed (S907), and then the main process is terminated. This look-ahead process (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but the hit / fail judgment result, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. are newly stored from each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of determining a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without, for example, when there is a new start prize, the hit / fail judgment result, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, and the stop type are all stored (stored) in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It may be configured to execute the process of discriminating such as.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the special symbol lottery right (winning information) is obtained. ) Is determined in advance, but is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the lottery right of the special symbol (winning information). It may be configured so that the content of is determined in advance.

Further, when it is determined in the process of S901 that the ball has not entered the special figure entry port 64 (S901: No), or in the process of S903, the number of reserved balls for the special figure entry port 64 is the upper limit at present. When it is determined that the value is (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is skipped, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the look-ahead process (S907) based on the added winning information (winning information) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when it is determined in the processing of S903 that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the upper limit number (4) (S903: No), that is, The look-ahead process (S907) may be executed when a ball is inserted into the special symbol entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since it is possible to add value when a ball is put into the special symbol entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is the upper limit. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced when the ball enters the special figure entry port 64 while reaching.

Next, a look-ahead process (S907), which is a process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S907).

In the look-ahead processing (S907 of FIG. 47), first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 203a, that is, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variable type counter. Each value of CS1 is read out (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the look-ahead hold storage area (S1002).

Next, the hit / fail determination result is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the look-ahead hold storage area. Here, both the winning / failing determination when the special symbol is in the low probability state and the winning / failing determination when the special symbol is in the high probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot judgment is executed based on the timing when a new hold storage occurs (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the special symbol hold storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since there is a time lag with the timing, it is difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing when the jackpot judgment based on the newly held winning information is executed. Is.

Next, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1003). If it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a winning command indicating the conditions for winning the jackpot (game state set at the time of lottery) and the jackpot type when winning is set (S1004). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the process of S1003 is not a big hit (S1003: No), a winning command indicating a loss is set (S1005), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S1004 or S1005 is, in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result), as common information of S1001. It is set including information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the process. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

When the winning command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed from the usual color). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which the player is displayed (variably) or a notice symbol or the like is displayed before the start of the change to suggest the winning / failing judgment result to the player.

In this embodiment, since there is only one probability state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol), the information to be set in the winning command (win / fail judgment result) can be set regardless of the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a special symbol), a hit / fail judgment result in the case of a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability of the special symbol. It may be configured to discriminate from the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each judgment, or even if the special symbol is in the high probability state, it is in the low probability state. Also, a determination value (value of the random number counter C1 per first hit) determined to be a jackpot may be defined, and a winning command indicating a jackpot of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and the winning / failing determination is made based on the game state. May be configured to execute. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by configuring so that a constant fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to fluctuate based on the information stored in the reservation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol hold storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the prize-winning information is executed, and whether or not the result is correct in the look-ahead process. A configuration in which the determination is predicted in advance is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110, the winning information (holding storage) newly stored (stored) in the special symbol holding storage area 203a is used. Information indicating the content (each counter value) may be set as a winning command, and the winning / failing determination result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not executed, the specific pre-reading process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player illegally obtains the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 of FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit. (S1101). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1101: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1101: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1102). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), then the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is used. The value (M) is acquired (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S1104).

If it is determined in the process of S1104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S1105). That is, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information for use in the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol hold 1 → execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current state is in the high probability state of the normal symbol (S1108), and it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to on. (S1108: Yes) acquires a hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 23C) for high probability, and proceeds to the process of S1111. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S1108: No), the hit / fail judgment result is based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 23C) for the low probability time. Is acquired (S1110), and the process proceeds to the process of S1111.

In the processing of S1111, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S1111), and if it is determined to be a hit (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S1112), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern using the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter (S1114). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S1111: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. Then (S1113), the process proceeds to the process of S1114 described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is always set to 3 seconds regardless of the set gaming state. With this configuration, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) in which a long fluctuation time is generally easy to be set, the time reduction in which a short fluctuation time is easy to be set. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game in which the game state is switched to the state (high probability state of the normal symbol), the normal symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, and even though the time reduction state is set, the time reduction state is in progress. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special electric game (V rush) aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed in the time saving state (V rush). ) Is configured so that the effect based on the ordinary symbol lottery is also displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this way, when performing an effect based on the ordinary symbol lottery (variation), the amount of effect data can be reduced by unifying the variation time.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the game per game is executed in the normal state and the ball wins the prize device 640, the special electric actuating port 643 that triggers the game per character is reached. It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win a prize. Therefore, even if it is configured so that only the same fluctuation time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the merit of playing the game by measuring the execution timing of the game per normal figure.

The method of setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the fluctuation time may be different depending on the game state, or the fluctuation time may be different depending on the number of reserved balls. The fluctuation time may be different according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the set normal symbol. ) And the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (normal symbol reserved number), it may be configured to be variably set based on. Further, the ease of entering the ball into the general electric winning device 640 may be different depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the Fuden winning device 640 according to the length of the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the ball entering the Fuden winning device 640 can be changed. Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display (S1102: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. If it is determined whether or not the process has been performed (S1115) and it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1115: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1115 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1115: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is missed, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S1112 or S1113 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1117). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1117: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol of child crying is not a hit (it is a mistake) (S1117: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol (timing of processing S1108 to S1111) is used. Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S1115). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the normal symbol (lottery process) and the variation process related to the special symbol (lottery process) are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process related to the special symbol (lottery process). Based on the result of the lottery process), the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol that is executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the normal symbol is being executed, the normal symbol is at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high-probability state of the electric accessory 640a is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (the opening pattern is executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. As a result, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the process of S1117, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol is a hit (S1117: Yes), then, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol. When it is determined whether the time saving counter 203h is on (S1118) and the time saving counter 203h is not on (off), that is, it is determined that the current state is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S1118: No), set the scenario operation per normal map (S1119).

On the other hand, in the process of S1118, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), the scenario operation per time saving normal figure is set (S1120).

Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the scenario set in the processing of S1119 or S1120 (S1121), and this processing is completed.

In this embodiment, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high-probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is opened, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, various information (results of the ordinary symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol fluctuation, the scenario per ordinary symbol, etc.) determined in the ordinary symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) are shown. , Commands indicating the contents of various information are set, and are output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the through gate passing process (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1202), and then , It is determined whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not larger than 1 (whether the reserved ball number of the normal symbol has not reached the upper limit value) (S1203).

If it is determined in the process of S1203 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (it is 1 of the upper limit value) (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not larger than 1 (0) (S1203: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 1. (S1204), set the normal symbol hold ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d) (S1205), and set the value of the second random number counter C4 to the normal symbol. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special electric start port winning process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a special electric start port winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special electric operating port 643 in the general electric winning device 640, and by causing the ball to win the special electric operating port 643, the V winning device 65 can be obtained. It is configured to execute a game per character that is released by a predetermined variable pattern. In this special electric start port winning process (S108), various processes are executed when a ball wins a special electric operating port 643.

When the special electric start opening winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special electric start winning, that is, whether the game ball has won the special electric operating port 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that the ball has been detected is output (whether or not) from the detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the winning ball in the special electric actuating port 643. In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the game ball has not won a prize in the special electric operation port 643 (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the special electric operation port 643 (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game is currently hit by a normal symbol (S1302). If it is determined that the current symbol is not in the hit game (S1302: No), the ball cannot win the special electric operation port 643, so an error command is set (S1309), and then this process is performed. To finish. By performing the process of S1309, a state in which the game ball wins the special electric operating port 643 outside the normal game period, that is, a game in which the game ball is illegally won the special electric operating port 643 is performed, or It is possible to quickly notify the outside when a defect has occurred in the member (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642) attached to the special electric actuating port 643.

In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the current symbol is in the hit game (S1302: Yes), then it is determined whether the special electric power is in operation (the character is in the game) (S1303). If it is determined that the special electric power is currently being operated (during the game per character) (S1303: Yes), the new game per character cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current is not in the special electric operation (during the game per accessory) (S1303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is in the change of the special symbol (S1304). When it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S1304: Yes), the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), the special symbol temporary stop command is set (S1306), and the accessory. The hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

That is, when it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is currently changing, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed in order to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution. As a result, when the game per character is executed, the special symbol change during execution is interrupted. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 of FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S1304: No), the process of S1305 and S1306 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1307. In the process of S1308, a special electric operation command is set (S1308), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, the special electric start opening winning process (S108) is based on the special electric starting port winning process (S108), when the ball wins the special electric operating port 643, the determination processing means for determining whether the winning is a normal winning, and the winning. A means for determining whether or not a new game per character can be executed, and a process for a special symbol change (a process for interrupting the special symbol change during execution, and a new special symbol change is not executed during the game per character It has a means for executing the process of performing the game, and a means for executing the game per character.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V inlet passage process (S109), it is first determined whether the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401), and if the storage sensor 65s is not on (storage sensor 65s01: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is on (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening is open, that is, the game is being played per accessory (S1402). In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the V winning opening is open (during a game per winning combination) (S1402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1403), and this process is terminated. If the V winning opening is not open (S1402: No), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 65 even though the game is not being played per character, so an error command is set (S1404). ), End this process.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of S1403 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect during the game per accessory based on the ball entering the V winning device 65.

Next, the V-passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a V-passing process (S110) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

When the V-passing process (S110) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V-passing has occurred, that is, whether the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501), and the game ball has won the V winning opening 165. If it is determined that there is no such case (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current V valid period is in effect (S1502). In the process of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the operation scenario related to the game per character is set is in the V valid period, and in other cases, it is determined that the operation scenario is not in the V valid period.

In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the V valid period is in progress (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current game is being played per character (S1503), and if it is being played per character. (S1503: Yes), the jackpot type value at the time of passing V corresponding to the game per character this time is acquired (S1504), the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON (S1505), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. It is set to 0 (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

That is, in the processes of S1504 to S1506, the process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the game per character. On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, when it is determined that the game is not in the winning game (S1503: No), it is not necessary to perform a new processing for executing the big hit game, so the processing of S1504 to S1506 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1507.

In the process of S1507, a V-pass command is set (S1507), and this process is terminated. The V-pass command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V-pass command, for example, when the V-pass command is received during the game per character, the effect during the V rush executed during the game per character is successful, and the combination Following the hit-and-miss game, an effect is performed to indicate that the big-hit game is executed. Further, when the V-passing command is received during the jackpot game, the same effect as when the V-passing command is received during the winning game is executed.

On the other hand, if the V-passing command is not received at the predetermined timing during the game per character, a disappointing effect is executed to indicate that the V-challenge has failed, and the V-passing command is issued at the predetermined timing during the jackpot game. If it is not received, the revival effect from the unfortunate effect is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

In the present embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the game ball has won a prize is set in the V winning opening 165, but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening 165. It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating that. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, since the only game balls that can be entered in the V winning opening 165 are the game balls (for example, one) that are retained by the storage valve 66a, they are stored in the storage valve 66a. A number determination means for determining the presence / absence (number) of existing game balls and a detection means for detecting the passage of the game balls to the hemorrhoid 2 out height 163b are provided, and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is provided. Is detected by the detection means, the above-mentioned V non-passing command may be set. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the current period is not in the V valid period (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this process is terminated. By performing the processing of S1508, a state in which the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game in which the game ball is illegally won into the V winning opening 165 is performed, or the V winning When a defect of a member (for example, V opening / closing door 65a, storage valve 66a, first movable valve 66b) attached to the port 165 has occurred, it can be quickly notified to the outside.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26B, the operation scenario is defined so that the timing at which the ball can win the V winning opening 165 in the game per character is the ending period of the game per character. Therefore, the processing of S1506 to S1508 is executed by the V passing processing (S110), that is, the processing is executed at the timing when the ball wins the V winning opening 165. Without limitation, for example, if the operation scenario of the game per character is specified so that the ball can always win the V winning opening 165 during the game per character, the V passing process (S110) , Only the process of S1505 is executed, and the processes of S1506 to S1508 are executed as the processes to be executed when the V flag is set in the accessory per control process (see S1805 of FIG. 58). Good to configure. As a result, even if the ball wins the V winning opening 165 immediately after the character hit game is executed, the time saving state can be continued until the big hit game is started, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. You can play the game without any problems.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1601) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1702). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process shifts to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1712 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1712 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1712). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1713, S1714) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1713, S1714) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1704: No). S1707: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 40) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various types displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. The command for executing the jackpot effect is set, and the jackpot control process for opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 650a of the variable winning device 650 is executed (S1804).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57. In this jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning opening 650a (hereinafter, winning opening) is used for each round of the jackpot state. Etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a) has elapsed, or whether the specified number of balls have won in the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 650a) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the bonus hit control process related to the bonus hit game executed when the ball wins the special electric operation port 643 is executed (S1805). In this accessory hit control process (S1805), a predetermined scenario is set between the period for opening the V opening / closing door 65a and the period for closing the V opening / closing door 65a for the V winning device 65 which is opened during the accessory hit game. The process for setting based on (operation scenario per accessory) is executed. note that. The detailed contents of the accessory hit control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the Fuden winning device 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1121 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. .. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) ends, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute the process. After ending the variation display, the stop symbol is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set in S507 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) by the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the devices 37A and 37B.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (disengaged symbol) indicating a miss. It is configured, and a stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1116 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48). (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process is shifted to S1801, and each process after S1801 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1810: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1811 (S1812). In the process of S1812, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 are also updated randomly. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and the illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired is executed. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the processing of S1809, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1813 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1814). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1815), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1701) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, information (command) for executing various effects according to the jackpot. ), And the process for opening or closing the winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening) 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, when the processing of S806 of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, or the accessory hit control processing (S1805 of FIG. 58). When the process of S2010 (see) is executed and the start of the jackpot is set, the operation counter is set corresponding to the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 of the various operation scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the operation counter matches the jackpot start timing defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot starts. In the process of S1901, when it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S1901: Yes), the opening command is set (S1902), and this process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the jackpot or accessory hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 2500 for jackpot C). When it becomes 5000), the opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, in the case of a left-handed game and a big hit in the special drawing lottery, the time until the big hit starts (the specific winning opening 650a is opened) is shortened, and the left-handed hit is made. In the case of a game, if a big hit is achieved in the game per character as a result of the special electric game, the time until the start of the big hit (the specific winning opening 650a is opened) can be lengthened. With this configuration, it is possible to secure a period for the player who has been watching the ball flow situation during the game per character to prepare for the big hit game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S1903). In the process of S1903, the game information about the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out and the determination is performed.

The jackpot is determined during the display indicating the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and after the jackpot game is completed. Includes in the middle of time. In addition, the V winning opening 165 includes a display indicating that the ball has won a prize. If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the jackpot is not in progress (S1903: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S1903: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1904).

When it is determined in the process of S1904 that it is the start timing of a new round, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired operation counter is the start timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1904). : Yes), the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1905), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1906), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, when it is determined that the value of the acquired operation counter is the end timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), The specific winning opening solenoid 209a is set to off (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1910). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the final round in the jackpot game (fourth round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the specific winning opening 650a is closed, and the waiting time, which is the ball ejection time (the present embodiment). Then, when 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1910: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1912). The jackpot end timing is specifically the end timing of the jackpot game in which the acquired operation counter value is defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot is the jackpot B (S1913). If it is determined that the jackpot is B (S1913: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 15 (S1914), and the process proceeds to S1916. If it is determined in the process of S1913 that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B (big hit A or jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1915.

In the process of S1915, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), then the state command corresponding to the game state after the big hit is set (S1916), and the big hit end for setting the end of the big hit is set. After setting (S1917), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and then this process is terminated. Here, the winning process (S1918) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1918).

In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S2001). The round validity period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period in which the specific winning opening 650a is open. If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S2001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: Yes), the value of the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set (S). S2004). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: No), this process is terminated as it is.

After executing the process of S2004, it is then determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one value before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and then this process is terminated. do. If it is determined in the process of S2005 that the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

With this configuration, as the end condition of the round game, the end condition that is established when the passage of time (30 seconds elapse) and the end condition that is established when the ball is won (10 prizes) are set. In the case of the provision, the operation control of the jackpot game can be executed based on the same operation scenario regardless of which end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the control process of the main control device 110 can be simplified.

Next, the accessory per object control process (S1805) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this accessory per object control process (S1805). This accessory hit control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and the accessory hit flag 203k is turned on in the special electric start opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). Various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired operation counter value) of the operation scenario (operation scenario specified in the operation scenario table 202e2 per accessory) that is set when the setting is made.

In the accessory hit control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the accessory hit is started (S2101). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation scenario table 202e per accessory (see FIG. 26B) is 1. When it is determined that it is the start timing for hitting a bonus (S2101: Yes), the opening command for hitting a bonus is set (S2102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that it is not the accessory hit start timing (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the present is in the accessory hit (S2103). If it is determined that the character is not hit (S2103: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is being hit (S2103: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation scenario table 202e per accessory is 26. When it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and then this process is terminated. Although not shown, a process of closing (setting off) the open solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) according to the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation scenario table 202e per accessory of the V winning device 65. , The process of setting the storage solenoid 209c to ON is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end per accessory (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation scenario table 202e per accessory is 750. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the accessory hit (S2106: Yes), the accessory hit flag 203k is set to off (S2107), and then it is determined whether or not the V flag 203p is on. (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set to off (S2111), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of hitting the accessory (S2106: No), the V passage detection process is executed (S2112), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 60) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 of FIG. 60), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S4117 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data shifts to S4008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S4117, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 60). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S4011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of S4008 is performed via the processing of S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4111 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variation display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). Details of this effect update process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to the process of S4112. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4111, a command determination process (S4112) that performs processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed, and the first command from the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not the movable valve operation command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), an update of the operation scenario is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202), and then this process is performed. finish.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a command related to operation control to the first movable valve 66b (first movable valve operation command) executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received, the operation scenario is updated without delay. In the highest priority determination order of the command determination process, a process for determining the reception of the first movable valve command is provided. With this configuration, the operation control content on the main control device 110 side and the situation grasp content on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be easily synchronized.

In the present embodiment, the operation scenario (first movable valve 66b) is performed only when the pachinko machine 10 receives a command related to operation control to the first movable valve 66b (first movable valve operation command) executed when the power is turned on. (Operation scenario for grasping the operation status of the voice lamp control device 113) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the main control device 110 is set every predetermined period (every hour). Even if it is configured to output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b from the side, or output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b each time a jackpot game is executed. good. Then, the content of the received command may be compared with the content of the updated operation scenario, and a process of correcting the updated content of the operation scenario may be executed. As a result, the accuracy of grasping the operation control content of the main control device 110 side by the voice lamp control device 113 side can be further improved. Further, the operation scenario update process on the voice lamp control device 113 side may be executed in consideration of the time lag required for receiving the command output from the main control device 110 side in advance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). Here, the special symbol fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has been received in the process of S4203 (S4203: Yes), the special figure variation start process is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of this special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205). When it is determined that the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to on (S4206), and the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). Here, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) of the received hold ball number command is analyzed, and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is used. The value of the corresponding counter provided is updated (S4209). Specifically, when the hold ball number command of the special symbol is received, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold of the variation display of the special symbol). The number of balls) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Further, when the reserved ball number command of the normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol). Is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the hold ball number command is used when a ball enters various entry ports (special figure entry port 64, through gate 67) (starting prize) and the values of various hold ball number counters are added, or Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the values of the various reserved ball counters are subtracted when executing various fluctuation start processes, S4209 By the processing, the values of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol holding ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the values of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c and the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Can be matched.

Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counters 223c possessed by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball counters 203c and 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. When the start winning is won, when the variable display is set, that is, when the hold ball number command is notified based on the change of various hold ball numbers, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. , Various hold ball number counters of the main control device 110 The values of the various hold ball number counters 203c and 203d can be adjusted.

Further, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4210). If it is determined that the winning command has been received in the processing of S4210 (S4210: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4211), and this processing is terminated. This winning command processing (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and the storage area (voice lamp control device 113) corresponding to the analysis result. The process of storing (storing) in the prize information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and the process of executing the effect (look-ahead effect) based on the received prize information are performed. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

If it is determined in the process of S4210 that the winning command has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4212). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4212: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4213), and this process ends. The details of this state command reception process (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the pachinko machine 10 is in a gaming state (normal state, time saving state). , The process of setting the hit game state (during big hit, during hitting the accessory) to the slave state setting area 223 g is executed.

Next, in the process of S4212, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether or not the stop-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4214). If it is determined that the stop-related command has been received in the process of S4214 (S4214: Yes), the stop-related process is executed (S4215), and this process is terminated. A detailed description of this stop-related process (S4215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110. And the process for setting the display mode of the variation effect using the fourth symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when the special symbol variation is executed as the period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even while the special symbol change is being executed based on the above, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, it is possible to execute the stop-related process (S4215) on the voice lamp control device 113 side to stop the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in accordance with the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation status of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect status displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S4214, when it is determined that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether or not the normal figure-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216), and the normal figure-related command is determined. When it is determined that the above is received (S4216: Yes), the general map-related processing is executed (S4217), and this processing is terminated. The details of the normal drawing-related processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In the process of S4216, when it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the command related to the hit has been received from the main controller 110 (S4218), and the command related to the hit is received. If it is determined that the command has been performed (S4218: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4219), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the production corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

If it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received in the process of S4218 (S4218: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4220), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4112), the order of determining the presence / absence of reception of various commands , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received is more than the process of determining whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received. The discriminant order may be specified so that it is executed first.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main control device 110 at the same time, that is, in the special symbol fluctuation start processing of the main control device 110 (see S205 in FIG. 41), Even when the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, the special symbol variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state is changed is set, the voice lamp control is performed. The game state currently set on the device 113 side can be determined before the special figure variation pattern command.

Next, the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set gaming state. The process of setting the display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure fluctuation start processing is set, first. The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to on (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S4303). ..

Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223g is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304). If it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S4304: No), the display command in the normal state is set (S4305), and this process is terminated. When a display command is set in the process of S4305, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 (FIG. 60). An effect mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is set in the main display area Dm as shown in b).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), the display command during the time saving state is set (S4306), and the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s. Is subtracted by 1 (S4307), the value (variation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern received this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 223r (S4308), and this process is terminated.

Next, the winning command process (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4211). This winning command process (S4211) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the type of the received winning command (special symbol, normal). The process for setting the effect (so-called look-ahead effect) to be executed when the winning command is received is executed according to the symbol) and the current game state.

When the winning command processing (S4211) is executed, first, it analyzes which symbol type corresponds to based on the information included in the received winning command, and sets (stores) it in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4401). Then, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4402), and if it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is not set to ON (S4402: No), the process proceeds to S4412, and then this process ends. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4402: Yes), the fluctuation time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (0) (S4404: No), the fluctuation time (variation time of the special symbol) included in the winning information received this time is used as the remaining period of the V rush. Since the additional notification cannot be performed, the extracted fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is added by 1 (S4411), and the processing of S4412. Move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), the fluctuation time (variation time of the special symbol) included in the winning command received this time is set to the V rush. Since it is possible to additionally notify as the remaining period, it is then determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is on (S4405). In the process of S44405, it is determined whether or not the current time is the timing at which the additional notification can be executed. In the present embodiment, during the V rush, during the game period per accessory and during the big hit game period, the remaining period of the V rush is added so as not to be notified. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to concentrate on various hit games and play the game.

In the process of S4405, when it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406). When it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), since the additional notification can be executed at present, the value of the time saving period counter 223i corresponds to the fluctuation time extracted by the processing of S4403. (S4407), the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is added by 1, and the process proceeds to S4409.

Although not shown, when the fluctuation time is added in the process of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set and an additional notification effect is produced on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 15 (FIG. 15). a) See) is executed. In the present embodiment, as an additional notification effect, all the values added in the process of S4407 are notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the added values are divided into a plurality of times up to the upper limit. It may be configured to execute the additional notification effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the addition of the remaining period of the V rush (remaining time shortening period), so that the player does not get bored early. Can be executed.

In addition to that, the value added in the processing of S4407 is notified until the value added in the processing of S4407 reaches a predetermined value or the value of the time saving period counter 223i is subtracted to the predetermined value. It may be configured not to be used, and the fluctuation time (variation time of the special symbol) included in the plurality of winning commands may be added up and notified. As a result, it is possible to give surprise to the length of the remaining time short period that is added by one additional notification effect. Further, in this case, for example, when the fluctuation time of the length (for example, 50 seconds) set at the time of winning the jackpot of the special symbol is added to the time reduction period counter 223i for the same fluctuation time, the additional notification effect is used. It is preferable to configure it to execute the additional notification effect for 50 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that he / she has won the jackpot of the special symbol, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4405, when it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is on (S4405: Yes), and in the processing of S4406, when it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406: Yes), extraction is performed. The changed fluctuation time is stored in the non-notification period storage area 223j (S4410), and the process proceeds to the above-described S4411 process.

When the processing of S4411 is completed, the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted by 1 (S4409), then other processing is executed (S4412), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the state command reception process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command reception process (S4212). This state command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set gaming state. A process for setting different display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The details of the state command reception process (S4213) will be described below.

When the state command reception process (S4213) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set game state is changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223g and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that there is no change in the gaming state (S4501: No), the process of S4502 to S4508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4509. When it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4502).

In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then the present is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a hit (S4503). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S4503: No), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), and the information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the slave status setting area 223g. ) (S4509), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the command set in the process of S4504 is notified to the display control device 114, the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received fluctuation pattern can be displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discrimination means for determining the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discrimination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are set. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then the changed gaming state is If it is determined whether the time is shortened (S4507) and the game state is determined to be the time shortened state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the time shortened state) (S4507: Yes), the V rush mode is indicated. A display command is set (S4508), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4509 process. If it is determined that there is no time saving state in the game state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the current symbol is hit (S4503: Yes), a display command indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), and the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4503: Yes). S4506), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4509 process. When a display command is set in the process of S4505, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 (FIG. 60). The display mode showing the extension screen shown in b) is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a stop-related process (S4215), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related processing (S4215). This stop-related process (S4215) sets a display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when the stop is displayed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main control device 110. Is executed.

When the stop-related process (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure confirmation command (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a special figure confirmation command (S4601: Yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation is set (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4603.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure temporary stop command (S4603). When it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has been received (S4603: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set (S4605), and S4606 Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the processing of S4604 and S4605 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4606.

When a display command indicating a temporary stop mode of a special symbol is set in the process of S4605, a display mode (character of "STOP") indicating that the temporary stop is in progress is displayed as shown in FIG. 13 (b). At the same time, the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol variation is interrupted.

In the process of S4606, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is the special figure fluctuation restart command (S4606). This special symbol fluctuation restart command is a command that is set when the special symbol fluctuation is resumed in the special symbol fluctuation executing process (see S206 of FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 (see S702 of FIG. 44). .. When it is determined that the special symbol variation resumption command has been received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to off (S4607), and the display command indicating the special symbol variation resumption is set (S4608).

Then, it is determined whether or not the unreported information has been updated during the period when the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the new fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported hold number storage area 223k. If it is determined that there is no update in the process of S4609 (S4609: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the time saving period counter 223i is added according to the update content (S4610), the unreported period storage area 223j, the unreported hold number storage area 223k, The information in the notified pending number storage area 223s is updated, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation restart command has not been received (S4606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

The value added by the processing of S4610 is the timing at which the interruption flag 223 is set to off, that is, the numerical value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the special figure fluctuation is restarted. Is added and notified at the timing when the subtraction is started. With this configuration, when the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped, the various hit games are closely watched, and after the end of each hit game, the additional notification effect is executed collectively, so that various hits are performed. Even after the end of the game, the player can be expected to add a large amount of the remaining period of the V rush.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a general drawing-related process (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this general map-related processing (S4217). This general diagram-related process (S4217) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the general drawing-related processing (S4217) will be described.

When the normal map-related process (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal map-related command received this time is a normal map variation pattern command (S4701). If it is determined that the received command is a normal figure fluctuation pattern command (S4701: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal map related command received this time is a normal map hit start command. (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is a normal hit start command (S4703: Yes), a small hit winning command for display is set (S4704), and then this process ends.

In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the received command is not the start command per normal figure (S4703: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the normal figure received this time is a special electric operation command (S4705). ). If it is determined that the received command is a special electric operation command (S4705: Yes), a winning command per display V is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4707). ), When it is determined that it is set to ON, that is, in the game per character executed by the ball winning the special electric operation port 643 in the game per game being executed at the end timing of the time saving state. If it is determined to be present (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4708), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4707 that the extension flag 223p is not on (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special electric operation command (S4705: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the normal map received this time is the end command per normal figure (S4709). ). If it is determined that the received command is not a normal end command (S4709: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the received command is a normal end command (S4709: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the extension flag 223p is on (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of V rush is set (S4712), and the V rush flag 223q is set. It is set to off (S4713), and then this process ends.

In the process of S4710, it is determined that the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end per normal figure is set (S4714), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game per normal figure is executed in the state where the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time saving state is stopped, the extension flag 223p is set in order to extend the V rush effect. Set to on. Then, the end timing of the V rush effect is changed according to the progress of the special electric game executed based on the game per normal figure. Specifically, if the ball does not win the special electric activation port 643 in the game per normal figure, the V rush effect is ended at the end timing of the game per normal figure, and the ball moves to the special electric operation port 643. If a prize is won and a game per character is executed, the V rush effect is ended at the end timing of the game per character. When the ball wins the V winning opening 165 in the character-per-character game, the effect based on the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is preferentially executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the V jackpot game can be aimed regardless of the game state, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a hit-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4219). In this hit-related process (S4219), as a result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 executes the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the bonus game that is executed when the jackpot or the character hit is won. This is a process for making the player win, and a process corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a winning prize is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game, game per character) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated. The process of setting the display prize ball number command based on the cumulative result is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4219), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is a jackpot-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related processing (S4802). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4802), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4801 in FIG. 67) is the jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the jackpot start command is used (S4901: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). When it was determined that the V rush flag 223q was on (S4903: Yes), it was determined whether the current jackpot was a special hit (big hit B) (S4911), and it was determined that the jackpot was a special hit (big hit B). In the case (S4911: Yes), the special hit flag 223n is set to off (S4912), and the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4911 that the current jackpot is not a special hit (big hit B) (S4911: No), the processing of S4912 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off in the processing of S4903 (S4903: No), the number of time reductions given by the jackpot executed this time is extracted (S4904) and stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The special figure winning information is read out (S4905), the target is selected up to the number of time reductions extracted from the read special figure winning information (S4906), and the number of selected special figure winning information is stored in the unannounced pending number storage area 223k. (S4907), the fluctuation time included in the selected special figure winning information is calculated (S4908), the calculated fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4909), and the V rush flag 223q is turned on. It is set (S4910), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4913). When the number of rounds command is received (S4913: Yes), the number of display rounds command is set based on the number of rounds (S4914), and this process ends. In the present embodiment, since the main control unit 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, the voice lamp control device is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp controller 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4913, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S4915). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end process is executed (S4916), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot end process (S4919), which is one of the jackpot related processes (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S4919).

In the jackpot end processing (S4919), the number of time reductions given by the jackpot executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), and the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001). S5002), and then the value stored in the unannounced hold number storage area 223k is read (S5003). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unannounced hold number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). If it is determined that the value of the unannounced hold number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (0) (S5004: No), an additional notification effect is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15A). Since it is in a state where it cannot be added (because there is no variable time information to be added), a command without addition for display is set (S5014), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5004, when it is determined that the value of the unannounced hold number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, information indicating the fluctuation time that can be additionally notified (used for additional notification). If there is no special symbol fluctuation time information), the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted according to the read value (S5005), and among the values stored in the unreported hold number storage area 223k, S5005 The value corresponding to the value subtracted in the process is cleared (S5006), and the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read out (S5007).

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning information (special figure reservation information) included in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) (S5008), and the winning information is included. If it is determined that there is no such information (S5008: No), an additional display command corresponding to the read variable time is set (S5009), and among the variable times stored in the unreported period storage area 223j, this time. The period corresponding to the fluctuation time used for the additional effect is cleared (S5010), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5008, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223b contains the winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) (S5008: Yes), until the special hit fluctuation is completed. A display command corresponding to the fluctuation time is set (S5011). In other words, if the special symbol fluctuations that are executed one after another are special symbol fluctuations that correspond to the special winning, even if the fluctuation time for four special symbol reservations is added up as an additional notification effect, it can be notified. Even if it is, only the fluctuation time that is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special hit fluctuation) corresponding to the special winning. Is used in the additional notification effect.

Further, a display command indicating the special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special hit flag 223n is set to on (S5013), and the process proceeds to the above-described S5010 process.

As a result, if there is winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) in the hold of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot game, the special mode (heaven mode) is entered as shown in FIG. 17 (a). The effect of notifying the transition of the above and the fluctuation time "220 seconds" until the end of the special hit fluctuation will be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the special hit game (the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set) is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, after the special hit game is completed, the time saving state is set again, so that the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the player is not notified of the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is held and stored after the special hit fluctuation, the period of the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game ends is until the jackpot game ends. It can be difficult for the player to understand.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. In the process of S4801 when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a character-per-feature-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is a character-per-character-related command (S4803: Yes), the character-per-character-related process (S4804) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the accessory hit-related process (S4804), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory per-related process (S4804). In the character hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the character hit game that is executed when the character hit is executed, and the character hit is performed. Is executed, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the accessory-hit-related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) is the accessory-hit start command (S5101).

If it is determined that the bonus hit start command has been received in the process of S5101 (S5101: Yes), the display bonus hit start command is set (S5102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the received command is not the bonus hit start command (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V entrance passage command (S5103). ..

In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5103: Yes), a winning command per display accessory is set (S5104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the received command is not the V entrance passing command (S5103: No), then it is determined whether the received command is the V passing command (S5105).

When it is determined that the V passage command has been received in the process of S5105 (S5105: Yes), a command per V for display is set (S5106), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the received command is not a V-passing command (S5105: No), then it is determined whether the received command is an ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S5107: Yes), the display ending command is set (S5108), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not a per-feature related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806). The display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition is set (S4807), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period (advantageous continuation period) in which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON. Is configured to be accumulated by the prize ball counter. Then, during the hit game (big hit game, game per character) or during the V rush production, information indicating the number of prize balls according to the cumulative value of the prize ball counter is displayed (FIG. 12). (C) Display area HR2).

With this configuration, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the cumulative number of balls acquired during the period from the time saving state (V rush) to the end of the V rush (advantageous continuation period). Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game and the number of prize balls won in the game per character may be displayed separately during the advantageous continuation period. .. In this case, the winning game state (during big hit, during winning the accessory) at the time when the prize ball command is received is determined based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223 g, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is advisable to provide a means to do so. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (the period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means in the history.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of V jackpot games executed based on the special electric game during the V rush period is cumulatively displayed (see the display area HR1 in FIG. 12C). Not limited to, as described above, when the configuration of cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit) which is advantageous to the player. , Or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and the game is enthusiastically played. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S4113). This variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit C), a process of setting a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5201: No), the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5205. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5202).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 61), the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Based on the fluctuation pattern with respect to, the fluctuation pattern command for displaying the special symbol is set (S5203), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113. NS. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205), and if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not set to ON (S5205: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as it is (S5207), and the special figure for display is stopped. Set the type command (S5208) and end this process.

Next, the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period. , The process for setting the effect mode based on the updated counter value is executed.

In the effect update process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300), and if the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309. Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, when the special symbol variation is not interrupted (S5300: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter 223r is larger than 0. (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is not larger than 0 (0) (S5301: No), the process proceeds to S5309. When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter is larger than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving period counter 223i is larger than 0. (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the time saving period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the time saving period counter 223i is larger than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the time saving period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then the updated time saving period counter 223i is updated. It is determined whether or not the value of is 0 (S5305). When it is determined that the value of the time saving period counter 223i after the update is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the time saving period counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other display commands. Is output. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13A).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter is a value indicating the remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is a value indicating the remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short is set (S5308). The process proceeds to S5309. When a display command is set in the process of S5308, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the player. On the other hand, an effect mode (for example, an unlucky effect) for showing that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is small is set. As a result, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution is 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining change time is short is set. However, not limited to this, for example, before executing the process of S5308, a lottery process for determining whether or not to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small is executed, and the lottery process is executed. It may be configured to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small only when the result of is determined to set a display command. With this configuration, the effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is small is not set (unlucky effect on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution is long or short.

Further, in the processing of S5307, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r indicates the remaining period of 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation (executed next) from the winning information storage area 223b. (Fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation) is read out (S5313), and the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of seconds remaining for the special symbol fluctuation during execution) is the processing of S5313. It is determined whether it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read out (S5314).

In the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation during execution) indicates the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the processing of S5313. When it is determined that the number of seconds is larger (longer) than the number of seconds (S5314: Yes), the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, when the V jackpot game is executed, the V set after the V jackpot game ends. A display command indicating a lucky time for notifying the player that the rush period is likely to be long is set (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309. On the other hand, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation during execution) is the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation read in the processing of S5313. If it is determined that the number of seconds is not larger (shorter) than the number of seconds indicating (S5314: No), the process of S5315 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5309.

When a display command is set in the process of S5315, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 (FIG. 60). The display mode of the lucky time effect shown in b) is set. With this configuration, the player can grasp the period that is more advantageous to the player during the V rush period, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the V rush period. In the present embodiment, as a trigger for executing the lucky time effect, a case where the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution is 10 seconds or more longer than the fluctuation time of the next special symbol change is set. Without limitation, it suffices if the player can be notified of the period during which the remaining fluctuation time becomes longer when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted by the lucky time production. For example, the execution is performed regardless of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation. The determination that the remaining period of the special symbol variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 50 seconds) may be used as an opportunity to execute the lucky time effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation during execution) was read out in the processing of S5313. It is configured to always execute the processing of S5315 when it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation, but the processing is not limited to this, for example, before executing the processing of S5315. The remaining variation time is long only when the lottery process for deciding whether or not to set the display command indicating that the remaining variation time is long is executed and the result of the lottery process determines that the display command is set. It may be configured to set a display command indicating that. With this configuration, the effect mode (for example, lucky time effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is long is not set (lucky time effect on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution is long or short.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the time saving period counter 223i after the update is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is larger than 0 (S5310). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is larger than 0 (S5310: Yes), the special symbol change is not executed even though the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. A display command indicating "???" for continuation is set (S5311), and the process proceeds to S5309. The display command set in the process of S5311 is the display control device in the command output process (see S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, like the other display commands. It is output to 114. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19A) indicating that the time saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5310, when it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of V rush is set (S5312), and the V rush flag 223q is set to off. Then, the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, another effect update process is executed (S5309), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the present boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S6102 and S6102, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the special figure entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 38 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbol is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S6414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80A. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the variable stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, jackpot), the other special symbol that is changing is terminated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to stop and display with a symbol indicating the forcible disconnection.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , A display command (forced) for variable display of the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed). It is configured to set the stop command).

In the present embodiment, even when the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute the stop display based on the forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display variable stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4217 in FIG. 70), and the display command indicating this temporary stop is also included. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped and displayed fluctuates is set is determined as the variable stop display data.

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is displayed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the display notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received the command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to read the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the present embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, the processing of the display control device 114 is not limited to this, and the command for light emission other than the command for display, the command for audio output, the command for driving an accessory, and other related commands are once received. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device in a state where the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in is added.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type of is set to off (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, from the back side image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (RAM type) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discriminations set to be turned on are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 82 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all the resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S7702), and if it is the transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 107. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the game board 13, a part of the configuration of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. doing.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 3, a special electric actuating port 643 and an out port 644 are provided as entry ports for balls that have won a prize in the general electric winning device 640. Was there. Then, when the ball wins a prize in the special electric actuating port 643, the game per character is executed. However, in the above-described first embodiment, there is only one operating port for executing the game per character, and it is not possible to give variation to the game per character, so that the game becomes monotonous. In addition to getting tired of the game early, since the game per character is executed with the same movement pattern each time, the character game is executed at a timing that makes it easy for the ball to win the V winning opening 165 (special electric train). There is a problem that the game (to make the operating port 643 win a ball) is easily executed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the second special electric operating port 1643 is newly provided in the general electric winning device 640, and the balls winning the general electric winning device 640 are the special electric operating port 643 and the second special electric operating port. It differs in that it is configured so that it can win a prize in either 1643 or 644 out.

Further, it is configured so that a game per character having a different opening pattern is executed depending on whether the ball wins the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643, and the special electric operating port 643 has a different opening pattern. The game per character, which is executed when the ball wins in the second special electric operating port 1643, is more than the game per character, which is executed when the ball wins. It is configured to facilitate winning a prize in 165 (see FIG. 6).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the flow situation of the ball that has won the prize in the Fuden winning device 640 during the game per game. Further, since the game per character with different operation patterns is executed depending on whether the ball wins the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643, the ball is made to win the V winning opening 165. It is possible to make it difficult for the game to execute the accessory game (make the special electric actuating port 643 win the ball) at an easy timing.

Further, in the second embodiment, for the various effects executed in the first embodiment described above, when the game per character is executed during the time saving state, the remaining variation time of the normal symbol being executed is set. The first game method suggestion effect executed based on the first game method, and the second game executed based on the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) that is interrupted when the game per character is executed during the time saving state. The difference is that the two game method suggestion effects are newly configured to be feasible.

In the above-described first embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, as an effect for showing the game content of the game (special electric game) in the time-saving state, the remaining duration of the time-saving state and the normal symbol The effect for notifying the lottery result, the execution status of the game per character, and the execution status of the game per character is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the game in the time saving state is displayed. It was intended to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, in the effect content executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to inform the player of the game status during the time saving state (during V rush) in an easy-to-understand manner, but during V rush. In, it was not possible to let the player select a game method in order to make the player perform a better game. That is, when the game per character that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (the period until the special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the time saving end condition), which is the remaining period of the V rush, is executed, the current situation is However, it is better to finish the game per character as soon as possible while aiming to win the ball to the V winning opening 165 by letting the V winning device 65 win a plurality of balls, or to the V winning opening 165. It was not possible to suggest (notify) to the player whether it is better to give up the winning of the ball and continue the game per character for as long as possible.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the above-described first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect are configured to be executable, various suggestions to be executed for the player are executed. It is possible to select the game method of the game per character based on the effect content of the effect. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be different depending on the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player interested. In addition, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be changed according to the result of one's own selection, the player can be actively participated in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

First, the configuration of the general electric winning device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the general electric winning device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 89 is a general electric winning in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which the ball which won a prize in the apparatus 640 can flow down to the 2nd special electric operation port 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is different in that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. It is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, the general electric winning device 640 of the second embodiment has a lower end side (first) of the second partition wall 640k2 with respect to the general electric winning device 640 (see FIG. 3) of the first embodiment described above. 2 A notch is provided at a position (below the position separated by the movable valve 642), and a second partition wall 640k2 is formed in order to form a fourth flow path 641d through which a sphere can flow through an opening formed by the notch. The difference is that a fourth partition wall 640k4 connected to the lower end side of the is provided.

Then, in order to allow the second flow path 641b to flow down toward the special electric actuating port 643 without the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a flowing into the fourth flow path 641d, the second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path 641b and the fourth flow path 641b flow down. The normal position (see FIG. 88) that shields the road 641d and the flow path in which the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a flows down the second flow path 641b and enters the special electric actuating port 643 are blocked, and the fourth The difference is that a variable third movable valve 1643 is provided at the operating position (see FIG. 89) that guides the flow path 641d.

Although detailed description will be described later, the third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving the third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. When the operation control of the game per normal drawing by the control device 110 is started, the operation is variably operated between the above-mentioned normal position and the operation position in a predetermined variable pattern. The third movable valve 1643 is located at the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is set to on (when energized), and when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off (when not energized). ) Is configured to be located in the normal position. Therefore, it is located in the normal position when the game is not executed. In the second embodiment, the game content (operation) of the game per character executed in the case where the ball is won in the special electric operation port 643 and the case where the ball is won in the second special electric operation port 1643. The pattern) is different, and it is configured so that the ball is more easily won in the V winning opening 165 during the game per character when the ball is won in the second special electric operating port 1643. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off, the third movable valve 1642 is illegally placed in the second special electric actuating port 1643 at a normal position where the ball cannot win. 2 It is possible to suppress the act of winning a prize in the special electric actuating port 1643.

Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is located in the second state (a state in which the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88)). It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the movable valve 642. With this configuration, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642.

When the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is located in the operating position, as shown in FIG. 89, the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 is the third movable. It is received by the upper surface of the valve 1642 and guided to the second special electric actuating port 1643. Although a detailed description will be described later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern when the game is started per game, and the operating position (see FIG. 89) is set. It is configured to repeatedly execute a variable operation of maintaining the normal position (see FIG. 88) for 1.5 seconds while maintaining the position for 0.2 seconds. That is, about 85% of the balls that have passed through the second movable valve 642 located in the first state win the special electric actuating port 643, and about 15% win the special electric actuating port 1643. doing. Therefore, during the game per game, the special electric operating port 643 is an operating port in which the ball is easier to win than the second special electric operating port 1643.

Further, it is easier for the ball to win the V winning opening 165 in the game per character to be executed when the ball wins the second special electric operating port 1643 than when the ball wins the special electric operating port 643. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, in the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery, the game result during the game per normal figure (the ball is placed in any of the operating ports). Since the ease of winning a ball into the V winning opening 165 during the game per character differs depending on whether or not the player wins the prize, the player can play both the game per game and the game per character. By paying close attention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, it is the third movable whether the operating port in which the ball wins is the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643 in the game per game executed in the time saving state. Since it is determined by the variable operation of the valve 1642, the operating port where the ball is likely to win is not changed by the game per game to be executed, and it is expected that the ball will always win the second special electric operating port 1643. However, the player can enthusiastically perform the game per game, but the first type is not limited to this, and is set as, for example, when the player wins the game in the ordinary symbol lottery. Approximately 85% of the balls that have passed through the second movable valve 642 located in the state win the special electric operating port 643, and about 15% win the special electric operating port 1643. The type of normal normal figure to be played and the type of advantageous normal figure in which the game per normal figure is executed in which the ratio of the ball winning to the second special electric operating port 1643 is higher than that of the game per normal figure. It may be configured to be configurable.

With this configuration, for a player who aims for a V jackpot game by special electric game, the lottery result of the normal symbol (set type per normal figure), the game per normal figure, and the game per character The player can be watched, and the special electric game can be played more enthusiastically.

<About the production content executed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, the characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. In FIG. 90 (a), the remaining period of the game per long game is determined in the state in which the game per long game and the game per character are executed in duplicate in the time saving state (V rush). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content which is displayed when it is less than a period (less than 15 seconds), and FIG. Schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the remaining time of the game per object long is longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds or more) in the state where the game per object and the game are executed in duplicate. Is. The same display modes as those displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol variation in which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is completed, and during that time saving state (special symbol variation). When the game per character is executed in (middle), the special symbol fluctuation during execution is interrupted (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted). That is, while the game per character is being executed, the remaining period in the time saving state is not subtracted. Therefore, from the time when the game per character is executed until the ball is won in the V winning opening 165 (V winning), the game can be performed without worrying about the remaining period of the time saving state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time saving state (during V rush), a long fluctuation time is executed as a special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. By setting, the method of lengthening the period of the time saving state (the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied) and the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state are as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the game per character is executed. There is a way to interrupt it. The former method is based on the result of the special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, when a short fluctuation time is set as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, the player's game There was a risk that motivation would decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the length of the period in which the remaining period in the time saving state is subtracted depending on the skill of the player. You can enthusiastically play the game.

Here, a method of interrupting the subtraction of the remaining period in the time-saving state as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the game per character is executed will be described. The game in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. .. Then, a ball is made to win a ball in the special electric operation port 643 and the second special electric operation port 1643 in the general electric winning device 640 during the game per character, and the game per character is executed, and the V prize device is executed during the game per character. A ball is awarded (V prize) to the V winning opening 165 in 65, and a game (special electric game) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed.

Then, the lottery of the ordinary symbols that triggers the start of the special electric game is configured so that the lottery of the ordinary symbols has already been executed or is not newly executed during the game per ordinary symbol. In other words, the game per character and the lottery of ordinary symbols are configured to be executable. Further, a plurality of end conditions are set for the game per character, and when a predetermined number (3) of balls are won in the V winning device 65 during the game per character, or for a predetermined period (per character). The game is configured so that the game per character ends with the passage of time (the period during which the operation scenario of the game is updated until the end timing of the game per character).

Therefore, by lengthening the lottery period (variable period) of the normal symbol, that is, the execution period of the game per character that is executed overlapping with the period in which the game per character is not executed, the game per character is executed. It is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol change in the period when it is not done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution interval of the game per accessory from becoming long due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the lottery period (during the variation period) of the normal symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of open operation patterns can be executed as a game per game, and an open state (electric accessory) capable of winning a ball to the prize device 640 during the game per game. An advantageous per-figure game in which the open state (640a is open) is set to be relatively long, and a disadvantageous per-figure game in which the open state is set to be shorter than the advantageous per-figure game. There is. Further, in the disadvantageous game per game, after the open state is set in which the ball can be awarded to the general electric winning device 640, the closed state in which it is difficult to win the ball to the general electric winning device 640 is for a long time ( It is configured to be set (15 seconds).

Even in a long-term closed state in this disadvantageous game per character, it is virtually impossible to execute a new game per character as in the above-mentioned fluctuation period of the normal symbol. When the game and the disadvantageous game per character are executed in duplicate, by lengthening the execution period of the game per character, the execution of the special symbol change during the period when the new game per character is not executed. The period can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution interval of the game per accessory from becoming long due to the execution of the special symbol variation during the closing period during the game per game.

As described above, during the V rush, the disadvantageous period (period in which the game per game is not executed (difficult to play)) is determined, and the period of disadvantage and the period in which the game per game is closed are determined. When the subtraction is interrupted and the game per character overlaps, it is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol change during the disadvantageous period by lengthening the execution period of the game per character being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the disadvantageous period and the game per character overlap, the player can be notified to that effect.

That is, the game status of the game per character during the game per character is made visible to the player by the effect content displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the production mode is configured to be different depending on the game situation of the game per game during the game per character. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a game per character is being executed (a state in which the special figure fluctuation is interrupted), and a long time (15 seconds) in the game per disadvantageous figure. If it is during the closing period, in the display area HR10, "10 seconds until the end of the closing period" is used as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the game per disadvantageous drawing (the remaining period until the closing period ends). Comment is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "STOP continues without winning a prize per character" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of prolonging the game period of the game per character. Since the other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by letting the player grasp the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the ball is moved to the V winning device 65 for the game per character being executed by the player. A game aiming for V prize by winning a prize, that is, the end condition of the game per character based on the ball prize is likely to be satisfied, and the game period per character is likely to be shortened. The first game that can be aimed at is executed, or the big hit game (V big hit game) by V winning is given up, and the game period per character is extended by satisfying the end condition of the game per character based on the passage of time. It is possible to select whether to perform two games (a game in which a ball is not fired).

Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), even when the game per character and the long-term fluctuation of the normal symbol overlap, as in FIG. 90 (a), the player can play the game method ( Information for selecting the first game and the second game) is displayed. Specifically, when the game per character is being executed (a state in which the special figure change is interrupted) and the remaining period of the normal symbol change during execution is a predetermined period (15 seconds) or more, In the display area HR11, a comment "15 seconds until the end of the normal symbol fluctuation" is displayed as information indicating the remaining period of the normal symbol fluctuation. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "STOP continues without winning a prize per character" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of prolonging the game period of the game per character. Since the other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to have a different length of the period for interrupting the special symbol fluctuation depending on the skill (the content of the game to be executed), so that the player is in the V rush (time reduction). It is possible to actively execute the game in the state). Further, regardless of which game is selected by the player, a game result that may be advantageous to the player in different points can be generated. Therefore, depending on the game selected by the player, subsequent games can be obtained. The game results can be greatly different, and the game method can be selected more positively.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an operation pattern of the game per normal figure executed in the time saving state, at least the advantageous game per normal figure and the game per disadvantageous normal figure are configured to be executable, and the game is executed in the time saving state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol can also be set to long-term fluctuation and short-term fluctuation. Then, when the game per character is executed during the game per advantageous normal symbol and when the game per character is executed during the short-time fluctuation of the normal symbol, the ball is won a V prize during the game per character. It is configured so that the player is more advantageous when the game (first game) in which the device 65 is awarded a prize is executed.

In this way, the timing (presence or absence of the disadvantageous period) at which the disadvantageous period (the period during which the game per new character cannot be executed) in the time saving state (during the V rush) is changed according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the time-saving game (during V rush).

Further, in the present embodiment, as a game per character, a game per advantageous character in which a ball winning the V winning device 65 is likely to win a prize (V prize) in the V winning opening 165, and a game per advantageous character. It is configured to be playable with a disadvantageous game per character, and when a game per advantageous character is executed, the ball can be V-winned at a rate of approximately 100% of the game per character. It is possible, and when the game per disadvantageous object is executed, the probability of winning a V is about 1/11.

Therefore, when the game per character that is executed overlapping with the disadvantageous period described above is the game per advantageous character, the effects shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are not executed. ing. With this configuration, a game (second game) that does not aim to execute the V jackpot game is executed even though a situation has occurred in which the player can easily acquire the V jackpot game. , It is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), an effect to be executed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation time) of the special symbol variation interrupted in the game per character will be described. do. FIG. 91A schematically shows the display content of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG. 91 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the display content of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). It is a schematic diagram shown in the above.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state (during V rush), the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is set. As the period of, the period is set so that the remaining period of the special symbol change during interruption is added to the number of time reductions (for example, 4 times of time reduction) set according to the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed. doing. That is, the subtraction of the number of time reductions is started after the end of the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation that was interrupted at the time of executing the jackpot game) that is restarted after the end of the jackpot game.

Therefore, even when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, after the jackpot game ends, according to the remaining period of the special symbol change during the jackpot game (V jackpot game). The period of the new time saving state to be set will be different. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it has a game property of aiming for a big hit by a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time saving state, and an element for ending the special symbol lottery during the time saving state. In the pachinko machine 10 used as (an element for setting the duration of the time saving state), it is desirable to execute the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol variation is long. However, as in the first embodiment described above, the remaining time saving period mode 801 (see FIG. 12A) showing the duration of the time saving state does not show the remaining period of each special symbol variation, and is in the time saving state. Information corresponding to the total time until the end condition is satisfied is displayed, and the timer 812 (see FIG. 12B) waits until the special symbol change that satisfies the end condition in the time saving state is completed. The time is configured to be displayed as a countdown.

That is, in the production mode described in the first embodiment described above, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol change interrupted by the execution of the game per character. It was a thing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the effect mode of the first embodiment described above, the effect according to the remaining period of the special symbol change during interruption can be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the remaining period of the special symbol change during the interruption during the game per character is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 91 (c)), the sub In the display area Ds, the comment "VGET for the next character is a big chance" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the remaining period of the special symbol change during the interruption during the game per character is When it is 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91 (d)), the comment "VGET with this accessory is a big chance" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the special symbol change during interruption is determined, and if the determination result is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the game per character is used. When a ball is won in the V winning opening 165 and a V jackpot game is executed, an effect indicating that the time saving period (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened is produced. If the remaining period of the special symbol change that has been executed and is interrupted is longer than the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the ball is won in the V winning opening 165 in this game per character, and the V jackpot game is played. When executed, it is configured to execute an effect indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be long. Therefore, the player can select (select whether to win the ball in the V winning opening 165 or not) based on the content of the effect of executing the game method during the V jackpot game, and the player can select. It is possible to greatly differ the game results during the V rush period based on the game method arbitrarily selected by.

Although detailed description is omitted, in order to execute the effect shown in FIG. 91 (a), other effect execution conditions are provided. The first condition that is satisfied when the winning information is included in the winning information of the completed ordinary symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation that the interrupted special symbol fluctuation satisfies the time saving end condition (the time saving end condition) It has a second condition that is satisfied when it is not the final variation in time reduction). By setting the effect execution condition in this way, the time saving state ends immediately after selecting the game in which the ball is not V-winned during the game per character being executed according to the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The execution conditions of the effects of FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b) described above may be the execution conditions used in the present embodiment. For example, the remaining period of the special symbol change during interruption and the next execution. If a comparison means is provided to compare the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be performed and the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation during the interruption is longer, the V during the game per character this time. If the effect of encouraging a prize (see FIG. 91 (b)) is executed and it is determined that the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter, the effect of suppressing the V prize during the game per character this time ( FIG. 91 (see (a)) may be configured to execute, whereby the period of the special symbol change that is actually executed (the period of the special symbol change that is executed next) is suspended. Since it is possible to relatively determine the remaining period of the special symbol variation of the above, it is possible to execute (set) a highly accurate effect on the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the present embodiment, the change state of the normal symbol during the game per character during the V rush (during the interruption of the change of the special symbol), the game situation of the game per normal symbol, In addition, the player is made to select the game method by configuring to execute an effect suggesting a game method that may be advantageous to the player based on the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change. It is configured to be able to provide fun, but is not limited to this, for example, the fluctuation status of the normal symbol during the game per character, the game status of the game per normal map, and the interruption. It may be configured to execute the effect suggesting each of the remaining periods of the special symbol variation, that is, to execute only the situation suggestion effect suggesting various situations during the V rush period. With this configuration, the player who grasps the situation suggestion effect analyzes the game situation during the V rush period, predicts the most advantageous game method by himself, and provides the fun of selecting the game method. Can be done.

<About the flow of the game in the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, the flow of the game in the time saving state in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as the game per game to be executed when the game is won by the ordinary symbol lottery in the time saving state, the game per game with a short period of the game per game and the game per game with a normal figure are the periods of the game per game. It is configured to be playable with a long game per game. Then, the Fuden winning device 640 for the length of the entire game per Fuzu is opened for the game per Fuzu, which has a longer period of the game per Fuzu, than for the game per Fuzu, which has a shorter period of the game per Fuzu. It is configured so that the proportion of the length of the period of state is low. In other words, in the game per game, which has a short game per game, the ball can be won by the Fuden winning device 640 during the game per game, and the ball can be won in a short period (about 3.5 seconds). The advantage of the game per figure is that the game per game is advantageous, and the game per game has a long period of game per game. It takes a long time to finish the game per figure (about 17.5 seconds), which is a disadvantageous game per figure.

Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in the above-mentioned disadvantageous game per drawing, the normal electric winning device 640 is closed after the general electric winning device 640 is opened by the same variable operation as the advantageous playing per drawing. This is a game per game in which a period of 15 seconds is set, and the 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of the special symbol change is unnecessarily subtracted.

Therefore, the timing at which the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is set and the game content of the game per character will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the disadvantageous game per map (B per map) is executed. When a winner is won in a normal symbol lottery and a game per unfavorable figure is executed, the general electric winning device 640 opens for 1 second, closes for 0.5 seconds, closes for 1 second, closes for 15 seconds, and opens for 0.1 seconds. The game per figure is executed. Then, when the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 during the first 1-second opening period wins the special electric operating port 643, the game per character is executed with the winning as an opportunity.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), but as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the ball is not made to win the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game per accessory). If the game is terminated after a lapse of time, the game per character will end 8.1 seconds after the game per character is started, so that the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) will occur for 8.1 seconds. The subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted. Therefore, a part of the disadvantageous period set when the game per disadvantageous figure (B per ordinary figure) is executed can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, so that during the disadvantageous period It is possible to reduce the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be subtracted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), a specified number (3 pieces) of balls are made to win the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game per character), and the game per character is completed based on the ball winning. In the case of this, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted as compared with the case where the game per character is terminated after the time lapse shown in FIG. 92 (a). Since the period) is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that is subtracted during the disadvantageous period becomes long.

In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the period until the end of the game per normal figure is displayed in the display area HR10, and further, the special symbol changes in the sub-display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of is displayed as a guide, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the game method during the game per character. If the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the game per character and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the disadvantageous per-figure game (B per per-figure) are executed. Since the disadvantageous period set in this case overlaps with the disadvantageous period, there is no disadvantage to the player by setting the disadvantageous period.

Therefore, for the player, select a game method that prevents the game per character being executed from being ended with the passage of time and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation being unnecessarily subtracted, or the character being executed. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of having the ball win the V winning opening 165 in the hitting game (the winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting the game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the flow of the game when a long-term fluctuation (15 seconds), which is disadvantageous to the player, is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state will be described. do. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the game when a long-term fluctuation (15 seconds), which is disadvantageous to the player, is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state. be.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the time saving state, a short fluctuation of 1 second and a long fluctuation of 15 seconds are selected. .. Here, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol in the time saving state, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is executed, and the game per normal symbol is not executed, which is a disadvantageous period for the player. .. Therefore, as in the closed state period during the game per game described above with reference to FIG. 92, the game period of the game per character, that is, the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is suspended, is normal. It is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time saving state by overlapping the fluctuation period of the symbol fluctuation and preventing the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation from being unnecessarily subtracted during the disadvantageous period.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), but as shown in FIG. 93 (a), a specified number (3 pieces) of balls are awarded to the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game per accessory). When the game per character is terminated based on the ball winning, the period of the game per character (compared to the case where the game per character is terminated after the lapse of time shown in FIG. 92 (a) (a). Since the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is suspended) becomes shorter, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the ball is not won by the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game per character) and is completed over time, the game per character Since the game per character is completed 8.1 seconds after the start of the game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is interrupted for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, since the fluctuation period of the long-time normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period is reduced. be able to.

In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the period until the end of the fluctuation per normal figure is displayed in the display area HR11, and further, the special symbol change in the sub-display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of is displayed as a guide, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the game method during the game per character. In addition, when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the game per character and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the long-term fluctuation period of the normal symbol (15 seconds) Since the above are duplicated, there is no disadvantage to the player due to the setting of the disadvantage period.

Therefore, for the player, select a game method that prevents the game per character being executed from being ended with the passage of time and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation being unnecessarily subtracted, or the character being executed. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of having the ball win the V winning opening 165 in the hitting game (the winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting the game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 99. In the second embodiment, a part of the ROM 202 configuration of the main control device 110 and a part of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment described above. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, with respect to the electrical configuration (see FIG. 21) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113. The difference is that a new solenoid is added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the other parts are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the third movable valve 1642 is provided in the solenoid winning device 640, and the third movable valve 1642 is driven. 3 The difference is that the movable valve solenoid 209f is added. Although a detailed description will be described later, the third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to be switched between an on state and an off state at predetermined intervals when the game is executed per normal drawing. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is changed to the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the game per game. Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 operates during the game per game and the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 flows down toward the special electric operating port 643, it depends on the situation of the third movable valve 1642. , The ball will switch between winning the special electric operating port 643 and winning the second special electric operating port 1643. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow situation of the winning ball in the Fuden winning device 640.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 95A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, various operation scenario 2 tables 202aa are provided in place of the various operation scenario tables 202e for the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment described above, and a new type selection table 202ab per drawing is provided. , The difference is that the general map fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the type selection table 202ab per drawing will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (b). FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the type selection table 202ab per drawing. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, a plurality of types of games per game to be executed in a time-saving state are provided, and games per game with different operation patterns can be executed. ing. Although a specific description is omitted, in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the normal symbol variation that was won per normal symbol is stopped (S1117: Yes), the ball passes through the through gate 67. Based on the value of the second hit type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired at the time and the set game state, the normal figure hit type is selected with reference to the normal figure hit type selection table 202ab. It is configured as follows.

Explaining specifically the contents specified in the type selection table 202ab per normal symbol, the set game state is a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and is acquired. In the range where the value of the second hit type counter C9 is "0 to 89", "A per normal figure" is defined as the type per normal figure, and in the range of "90 to 99", "A per normal figure" is defined. "B per table" is stipulated. The specific operation content of the game per game will be described later, but if "A per game" is selected (selection rate 90%), multiple times (twice) over the entire game period per game. ), The electric accessory 640a is opened, and a game per game is executed, which makes it relatively easy for the ball to win the prize in the prize-winning device 640. On the other hand, when "B per Fuzu" is selected (selection rate 10%), after the same game per Fuzu as "A per Fuzu" is executed (in the latter half of the game period per Fuzu), A game per game is executed in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is closed is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

As described above, since the game per normal figure is executed without interruption of the special symbol fluctuation, the "A per normal figure" sets the ball to the special electric actuating port 643 or the special electric actuation port 643 throughout the game per game. It is possible to make a prize in the 2nd special electric operation port 1643 and execute a game aiming at a game per character, but in "B per normal figure", the ball is made to win a prize in the normal electric winning device 640 in the latter half of the game per normal figure. Since the difficult period is set for a long period of time, the remaining period of the special symbol change is unnecessarily subtracted, resulting in a disadvantageous game per game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, in the case where such a game per character that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is executing the game per character, the game per character can be continued for a long time. , Disadvantageous It is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 90 (a)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the game. There is. As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the skill of the player, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Next, the contents of the general map variation pattern selection table 202ac will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (c). FIG. 95 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac. The normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern executed when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and is a normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48). (See), which is usually referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of a symbol.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 48, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is unified to 3 seconds. Therefore, in the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (see S1114 in FIG. 48), it is 3 seconds. Only the fluctuation time (variation pattern) was set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a different variation pattern can be selected based on the set gaming state and the value of the variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation type of the normal symbol. It is configured in.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS2. .. That is, in the normal state, the normal symbol variation for 3 seconds, which is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is the time saving state, the short fluctuation is defined as the fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 179" and the fluctuation time is 1 second. Long fluctuations are defined as fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds in the range of "180 to 197".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the period in which the normal symbol is fluctuating greatly differs depending on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the fluctuation period of the normal symbol in this time-saving state, the game is not executed per normal symbol, and further, the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted. , It becomes a general figure fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, in the case where the normal symbol fluctuation is executed in such a disadvantageous normal symbol fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is executing the game per character, the game per character is played. By continuing for a long time, it is possible to execute an effect (see FIG. 90 (c)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable figure fluctuation. It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the skill of the player, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96A, the contents of each operation scenario table 202e, which are different from the above-described first embodiment, will be described. FIG. 96A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the operation scenario table 202e3 per normal figure is changed with respect to each operation scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, and the operation per second accessory. The difference is that the scenario table 202e5 has been added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the operation scenario table 202e5 per second accessory will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (b). FIG. 96B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation scenario table 202e5 per second accessory. The second character per character operation scenario table 202e5 is a data table that defines the operation scenario of the character per character game to be executed when the ball wins the second special electric actuating port 1643 in the game per game. ..

Specifically, the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "1", that is, the state where the storage solenoid 209c is set to off immediately after the game per character is executed and the storage solenoid 209c is off is the game per character. Is stipulated to continue until the end of. Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is closed) continues until 0.1 seconds after the game per accessory is started, and then the scenario counter An operating scenario is defined in which the value ranges from "26" to "400", that is, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set on (the round period is set) for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V opening / closing door 65a is opened, and the ball can win the V winning device 65. The ball that has won the V winning device 65 during this round period passes through the storage valve 66a that has moved to the ball non-storage state (evacuation state) and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, since a plurality of balls can flow into the first movable valve 66b during one game per character, the probability of winning a V during the game per character can be increased.

Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches "400", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to off, and the state in which the V opening / closing door 65a is closed is until the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650", that is, The operation scenario is specified so that it lasts for 5 seconds. After that, when the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650", the value of the scenario counter reaches "2025" until "1675", that is, after the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 0.1 seconds. During the period V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to off.

In this embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a specified in the above-mentioned operation scenario table 202e2 for the accessory and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a specified in the operation scenario table 202e5 for the second accessory. Therefore, the operation contents of the storage valve 66a are different, but the operation content is not limited to this, and in the game per character to be executed, while unifying the operation contents of the storage valve 66a, the V winning opening during the game per character It may be configured so that the winning ratio of the ball is different to 165.

Specifically, in the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c, after the storage solenoid 209c is set to off for 3 seconds after the game per character is started, the storage solenoid 209c is set to on for 2 seconds, and then the storage is stored again. It is stipulated that the solenoid 209c is set to off, and when a ball wins in the second special electric operation port 1643, the opening period (the period when the V opening / closing door 65a is closed) 0.1 seconds and the round period (V opening / closing). The operation scenario is defined so that the game per accessory is executed so that the door 65a is in the open state for 1.5 seconds and the ending period (the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) is 1.5 seconds.

On the other hand, when the ball wins the special electric operation port 643, the opening period (the period when the V opening / closing door 65a is closed) is 3.1 seconds, and the round period (the period when the V opening / closing door 65a is open) is 1.5 seconds. , The operation scenario may be specified so that the game per accessory that has an ending period (a period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is closed) of 1.5 seconds is executed. With this configuration, in the game per accessory that is executed based on the ball winning in the second special electric operating port 1643, the storage valve is used for a period during which the ball can be won by the V winning device 65. Since 66a is in a retracted state (ball non-storage state) in which balls cannot be stored, a plurality of balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 65 will flow into the first movable valve 66b, and a prize will be given to the V winning opening 165. You can increase the probability of doing so.

Further, in the game per winning combination executed based on the winning of the ball in the special electric operation port 643, the storage valve 66a protrudes so that the ball can be stored in the V winning device 65 during the period in which the ball can be won. Since the state (ball storage state) is established, only the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a among the balls that have won the V prize device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, and the V prize is won. It is possible to reduce the probability of winning the mouth 165.

With this configuration, when the ease of winning a ball (V winning rate) is changed to the V winning opening 165 during the winning game per character according to the type of the game per character to be executed. Of the opening pattern of the V opening / closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a, the V winning rate can be changed only by changing the length of the period (opening period) until the V opening / closing door 65a is first opened. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the operation control in the game per character. That is, the operation scenario is set for each type of the game per character only during the period from the start of the game per character to the end of the opening period, and after that, the operation control of various devices is performed based on the common operation scenario. Can be executed, so that the operation control can be simplified.

Further, according to the above-mentioned example, the game per character that is advantageous to the player (the game per character that is executed when the ball wins the second special electric operating port 1643) is more disadvantageous to the player. Rather than the game per character (the game per character that is executed when the ball wins the special electric operating port 643), the ball is won by the V winning device 65 at an earlier stage after the game per character is started. It is configured so that As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute a game that is advantageous to the player. Further, as the operation content of the storage valve 66a, an operation that is advantageous to the player (an operation that turns off the storage solenoid 209c) is performed, and a ball is won by the V winning device 65 by a game per accessory that is disadvantageous to the player. Since it is set before the timing when it becomes possible, the ball that has won the V prize device 65 during the game per character, which is disadvantageous to the player, is clogged in the V prize device 65, or Even if it is intentionally retained, since the operation advantageous to the player (the operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed after that, the act of illegally winning the ball to the V winning opening 165 is suppressed. Can be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario table 202e2 per accessory is different from that of the first embodiment described above. Similar to the second character-per-character operation scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96 (b), a 15-second closing period and a 0.1-second open period are defined in the latter half of the character-per-character game. It differs in that it does.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game per character is executed, the game per character is terminated based on the ball winning, and the game per character is terminated based on the passage of time. It is configured so that the game period of the hit game can be greatly different. As a result, it is possible to make the game result in the time saving state greatly different depending on the selection result of the game method during the game per character, and it is possible to enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97 (a), the points different from the above-described first embodiment in the operation scenario table 202e3 per normal figure of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario table 202e3 per normal diagram of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the operation content of the game per game executed in the time saving state is different, and is the same except for the above-mentioned first embodiment. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the second embodiment, the operation scenario of the game per normal figure executed in the time saving state is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and 2 per normal drawing for time saving. It has a scenario 202e33 and three scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general map.

First, with reference to FIG. 97 (b), the contents of the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general map will be described. FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in 2 scenarios 202e33 for time saving. In this time-saving 2 scenarios 202e33 per normal figure, the operation scenario of the game per normal figure to be executed when "A per normal figure" is selected as the type per normal figure is defined, and the entire game per normal figure is defined. The length is 3.6 seconds, and the ratio of the period during which the electric accessory 640a is open to the entire game period per normal map is the operation scenario specified in 3 scenarios 202e34 per normal map, which will be described later. A higher per-figure game is performed.

Specifically, an operation scenario in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON is defined for a scenario counter value of "1", and an operation scenario in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON is defined. It is stipulated. The second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to be on until the end of the game per normal drawing (the value of the scenario counter becomes "900"). That is, in the game per normal figure executed in response to "A per normal figure", the ball winning the electric accessory 640a always wins the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643. It is configured.

Further, the third movable valve solenoid 209f has an on period of 0.2 seconds (a period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at an operating position where a ball can win a prize in the second special electric operating port 1643) and 1.5 seconds. The off period (the period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at the normal position where the ball can win a prize in the special electric actuating port 643) is repeatedly set. That is, the ratio of the ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the second special electric operating port 1643 is about 11%, and the ratio of the ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the special electric operating port 643 is about 11%. It is configured to be 89%.

Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is closed) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the game per normal figure, and then the scenario counter The value is in the range of "26" to "274", that is, for 1 second, the normal power solenoid is set to on (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), and the range is in the range of "275" to "400". That is, the solenoid is set to off for 0.5 seconds (the electric accessory 640a is closed). Then, the solenoid solenoid is set on again in the range of "401" to "649", that is, for 1 second, and then in the range of "650" to "900", that is, for 1 second. An operating scenario in which the electric solenoid is set to off is specified. That is, when the game per game based on the operation scenario defined in the two scenarios 202e33 for shortening the time is executed, the opening operation in which the electric accessory 640a is released for 1 second is executed twice. The game is executed, and the total open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can win the prize in the prize-winning device 640 is 2 seconds with respect to the total period (3.6 seconds) of the game per screenplay. Therefore, about 40% of the game period per scenario is advantageous to the player (the special electric game can be advanced (the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643 can be used to win the ball). ) Period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general map will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in 3 scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general drawing. The three scenarios 202e34 per normal map for shortening the time are defined as the operation scenarios of the game per normal map to be executed when "B per normal map" is selected. The contents specified in 3 scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general map are the same for the above-mentioned 2 scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general map until the value of the scenario counter reaches "650". Therefore, the details thereof. Explanation is omitted.

The value of the scenario counter is in the range of "650" to "3500", that is, the solenoid is set to off for 15 seconds, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "3501" to "3524", that is, The normal power solenoid is set to on for 0.1 seconds, and then the normal power solenoid is set to off when the value of the scenario counter becomes "3525".

In other words, in the game per game specified in 3 scenarios 202e34 per game for shortening the time, the total length of the game period per game is 17.7 seconds, and the ball is awarded a prize during the game per game. The total period during which the device 640 can be awarded is configured to be 2.1 seconds. Therefore, for the entire game period (17.7 seconds) per game, the total open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can win the prize in the game winning device 640 is 2.1 seconds. , Approximately 12% of the game period per normal figure is a period that is advantageous to the player (It is possible to advance the special electric game (it is possible to make the ball win the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643) Period). Further, when the second electric accessory 640a opening operation is completed, the electric accessory 640a is closed for 15 seconds.

Therefore, if 3 scenarios 202e34 are set for the time-saving normal drawing during the time-saving state, the period during which the ball cannot win the general electric winning device 640 is set for a long time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It will be a game. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (the fourth special symbol change ends). (If this is the case), the time saving state is configured to end, and the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted during the game per game. That is, even in the closed state for 15 seconds, the remaining period of the special symbol change is subtracted, so that the game is a game per normal symbol that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223aa, the normal figure per time counter 223ab, and the firing are prohibited with respect to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. The suggestion flag 223ac and the effect setting flag 223ad are different in that they are added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal figure fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and when a normal figure fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the voice lamp control device. It is configured so that the value of the counter set in the effect update process executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process of 113 (see FIG. 60) is subtracted. It is referred to when the game per character is executed, and various effects are executed based on the counter value.

The normal figure per time counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the game period in which the normal figure per game is executed, and when the normal figure per start command is received, the normal figure per game period corresponding to the received command is received. Is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is subtracted. doing.

The firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to on when the puncture suggestion effect for puncturing the game per character (ending the game per character over time) is applied, and the function is set to on. It is set to off when the hit game is over. When the game per character is completed, the display mode of the ending screen of the game per character is changed based on the setting status of the flag and the end conditions (end of winning, end of time lapse) of the established game per character. Referenced when.

The effect-set flag 223ad has a puncture suggestion effect that suggests that the game per character is ended based on the passage of time, and an effect that suggests that the ball is won by the V winning device 65 during the game per character. This is to indicate that the setting has been made, and is set to be turned on when a dedicated effect is set during the game per character.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the game per accessory is different from that of the first embodiment described above, depending on the operation port (special electric operation port 643, second special electric operation port 1643) in which the ball wins during the game per game. There is a big difference in that it is configured to be feasible. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol lottery is set in the game state and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac (FIG. 95 (c)). The difference is that the game can be selected by referring to (see)) and the game per game with different operation contents can be executed as the game per game executed during the time saving state. The control processing executed by the main control device 110 is the same except for the above-described contents, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the special electric start opening winning process 2 (S108) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric start opening winning process 2 (S108). The special electric starting port winning process 2 (S108) is the operating port (special electric operating port 643, second) in which the ball wins the special electric starting port winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the hit type corresponding to the special electric operation port 1643) can be set, and the other points are the same. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the control executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. The control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is a command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 61) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. Instead of the normal figure-related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66) executed in (see), the normal figure-related process 2 (see S4217 in FIG. 101) is executed in the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 67). Instead of the object hit-related process (S4804 in FIG. 70), the accessory hit-related process 2 (see S4851 in FIG. 103) is replaced with the effect update process (see S4111 in FIG. 72), and the effect update process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 105) is replaced. See), which is different in that it is executed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the general drawing-related process 2 (S4217) will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general drawing-related process 2 (S4217). The normal map-related process 2 (S4217) is a process executed when a normal map variation pattern command is received with respect to the normal map-related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above, and a normal map-related process. It differs from the process executed when the start command is received, except that it is the same.

When the normal figure-related process 2 (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4701: Yes), the normal figure change start process is performed. Is executed (S4751), and then this process is terminated. The normal figure variation start process (S4751) executed in the process of S4751 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102, but a process for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation is executed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (see FIG. 95 (c)), and the advantage of the game executed in the time saving state according to the selected fluctuation pattern. It is configured to have a variable degree.

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the normal map fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is determined whether or not the normal map per start command has been received (S4703), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4703). S4703: Yes), based on the received command, set the time per normal figure (END time of the corresponding game operation scenario per normal figure) in the time counter per normal figure (S4752), and issue the start command per normal figure for display. Set (S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4703 that the start command for hitting the normal figure has not been received (S4703: No), S4705-S4714, which is the same as the normal figure-related process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 66). Execute the process and end this process.

Next, the contents of the normal map fluctuation start processing (S4751) will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation start processing (S4751). When the normal map fluctuation start process (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is in the time saving (in the time saving state) (S4771), and if it is determined that the time is not in the time saving (S4771: No), The display normal map fluctuation command is set (S4771), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4771 that the time is not shortened (S4771: Yes), the normal map fluctuation time is extracted from the received normal map fluctuation pattern command (S4772), and the extracted value is used as the normal map fluctuation time counter 223aa. (S4773), the above-mentioned process of S4774 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the contents of the accessory per related process 2 (S4851) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory per related process 2 (S4851). The bonus-per-related process 2 (S4851) describes the content of the process executed when the bonus-per-match start command is received and the ending command is received with respect to the above-mentioned bonus-per-related process (S4804). The differences are different in that they are changed, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the character hit related process 2 (S4851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the character hit start command has been received (S5101), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S5101: Yes), the character hit start is started. The process is executed (S5151), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the signal has not been received in the process of S5101 (S5101: No), the same processes of S5103 to S5107 as the above-mentioned related process per accessory (S4804) are executed, and the ending command is issued in the process of S5107. When it is determined that the command has been received (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON (S5152).

That is, in the process of S5152, it is determined whether or not the player is executing the effect for suggesting that it is advantageous to prohibit the player from firing the ball. If it is determined in the process of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not turned on (S5152: No), the same processes of S5108 to S5109 as the above-mentioned accessory hit related process (S4804) are executed, and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5152 that it is set to on (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to off (S5153), and the end condition of the game per normal figure this time is over time. It is determined whether or not there is (S5154).

If it is determined that the game per game based on the passage of time has ended (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating "success" has been set (S5155), and the game per game based on the passage of time has not ended. That is, when it is determined that the game per game based on the ball winning is completed (S5154: No), a display command indicating "sorry" is set (S5156). In this way, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to let the player shoot the ball based on the game content of the game per normal figure in the time saving state, and the player is played based on the prediction result. When an effect suggesting a method is executed, it is determined whether or not the game per game has ended based on the content of the suggestion, and the display mode of the end screen of the game per game is changed based on the determination result. By configuring the configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the current game method was the correct selection.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, for example, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to have the player shoot the ball based on the game content of the game per normal figure in the time saving state, and the prediction result. When an effect suggesting a game method is executed by the player based on When the game is configured to be feasible, it is determined in the processing of S5154 whether or not the game per game is completed in the game (time lapse, ball winning) corresponding to the actual prediction result, and the determination result is used. Based on this, the display mode of the end screen may be changed. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

Further, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned effect of suggesting the game method to the player, a situation notification effect for causing the player to predict the actual game situation (for example, an effect of suggesting the type of game per normal figure) is executed. Then it is good. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the effect suggesting the game method is the Gase effect. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game per game and the game per character are executed in duplicate, the player is configured to perform an effect suggesting a game method, but the present embodiment is limited to this. As long as the player can select the game method, the effect suggesting the game method to the player may be executed by the same method.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the contents of the accessory hit start processing (S5151) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory hit start process (S5151). In the bonus hit start process (S5151), various processes for changing the effect mode to be executed are executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the bonus per game.

When the accessory hit start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the special electric operating port that has won a prize is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the game per character is the game per character that is executed when the ball wins the special electric operation port 643 (special electric operation port 1) (S5302), and the special electric operation port 1 is reached. If it is determined that it is not based on a prize (S5302: No), a display command for indicating an advantageous winning combination is set (S5303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5301 when it is determined that the value is based on the winning of the special electric actuating port 1 (S5301: Yes), then the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter is read (S5304), and the read value is It is determined whether the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command for suggesting the end of time per character is set (S5306), and the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON. (S5307), the process proceeds to S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, as shown in the display screen shown in FIG. 90 (a), a display mode for suppressing (prohibiting) the firing of the ball (corresponding to a comment in the sub-display area Ds). ) Is displayed.

Further, when it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the processing of S5304 is a value indicating 5 seconds or less (S5305: No). S5308) If it is determined that the time is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), by ending the game per character as soon as possible, it is possible to execute the game per character again by the next game per character. Since it is in such a state, a display command for suggesting the end of winning a prize per accessory is set (S5309), and the process proceeds to S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the process of S5309, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 has a display mode for prompting the launch of a ball (for example, "Launch the ball early and hit the accessory". When you finish the game, chance ") is displayed.

If it is determined in the processing of S5308 that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, it is for display to indicate the hit of the accessory without setting a dedicated display command. A command is set (S5310), the effect setting flag 223ad is set to on (S5311), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the above-described first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect are executably configured, they are executed for the player. It is possible to select the game method of the game per character based on the production contents of various suggestion effects. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be different depending on the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player interested. In addition, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be changed according to the result of one's own selection, the player can be actively participated in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the player can select the game method of the game per character according to the change in the normal symbol and the situation of the game per character that is executed during the game per character. Although it is configured to execute the suggestion effect, it may be configured to execute the same suggestion effect when a plurality of games are executed in duplicate. For example, the jackpot game ends. When the time saving state is set later, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect that allows the player to select the end timing of the jackpot game based on the length of the remaining period of the normal symbol fluctuation during execution. You may. With this configuration, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is executed for a long time, and the time saving state is in progress. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the normal symbol change is not executed for a long period of time and the motivation for playing is reduced.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the game per accessory is executed and the game per accessory is executed based on the fact that the ball wins the special electric actuating port (special electric actuating port 643 or the second special electric actuating port 1643). It was configured to interrupt the subtraction of special symbol fluctuations during execution. In other words, it was configured so that the more the game per character was executed, the more advantageous it was to the player. Therefore, the game method in the time saving state (during V rush) becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player gets tired of the game.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are different in that the processing contents for the special symbol change during execution when the game per character is executed are different. Specifically, depending on the game type per character to be executed (set), the process of interrupting the special symbol change during execution and the process of discarding (discarding the remaining fluctuation time, It is configured to execute either the process of forcibly stopping the game regardless of the lottery result) or the process of ending the time saving state in addition to discarding.

With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly change the game situation during the time saving state based on the execution of the game per character, so that it is possible to provide the player with a timeless game.

Further, it is configured to execute an effect that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the game per character based on the effect executed during the time saving state (V rush). As a result, for example, when a game per character that ends the time saving state is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from suddenly ending the time saving state and giving a feeling of distrust. can. In addition, since the player himself / herself can select whether or not to execute the game per character based on the content of the effect to be executed, the player can enthusiastically participate in the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be made to.

<Regarding the content of the production in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the content of the characteristic effect among the effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. The effect executed in the present embodiment is different from the timed subtraction display of the value displayed on the timer 812 for the duration of the time saving state (the duration of the V rush) for each of the above-described embodiments. When the special symbol fluctuation being executed is discarded by executing the winning game, the value displayed on the timer 812 is significantly reduced, and the time is shortened by executing the winning game. The big difference is that the disappearance display that ends the state is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the special symbol change during execution is a big hit (during big hit change), a suggestion effect suggesting that the big hit change during execution is discarded by executing the game per character is provided. The big difference is that it is configured to run. Regarding the other display contents, the display contents are the same to the extent that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the above-mentioned differences. The same display contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents executed when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), and FIG. 108 (c) is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed the holding state of each symbol when the display screen shown in 108 (a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, the display mode of "Danger time entry" is displayed until the danger time ends (until the jackpot fluctuation is stopped and displayed). "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851 indicating the period. This period display mode 851 is periodically subtracted (counted down) by the effect update process of the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the value displayed on the timer 812.

Further, in the V rush fluctuation region 811, in addition to the pattern imitating the "V" corresponding to the success of the game during the V rush (execution of the V jackpot game), the "skull" showing the game result disadvantageous to the player. The pattern that imitates is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "a big pinch for the accessory during the Danger time" are displayed.

That is, when the danger time is entered, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot fluctuation may stop (execution of the jackpot game based on the special drawing lottery) after a predetermined time (10 seconds later). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, this Danger time is configured to be executed even in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order.

Therefore, when the player enters the Danger time, he / she does not execute the special electric game aiming at the game per character (does not fire the ball) until the Danger time ends, or executes the special electric game even during the Danger time. Then, you will enthusiastically choose whether to aim for the game per V.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the remaining period of the special change during execution of the entry condition of the Danger time reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol change during execution is assumed. Depending on whether the lottery result is a big hit or a miss, the conditions for entering the Danger time may be different, and during the big hit fluctuation, the remaining period is "27 seconds", "17 seconds", "10 seconds", It may be configured so that it can enter the Danger time when it becomes "7 seconds", and it may be configured so that it can enter the Danger time only when the remaining period is "10 seconds" during the deviation fluctuation. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol change during execution based on the display of the remaining period of the Danger time displayed when the Danger time is entered.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, an example in which a dedicated Danger time entry condition is provided during the jackpot fluctuation is shown, but the deviation fluctuation is not limited to this, for example, in order to suggest to the player that the deviation fluctuation is in progress. It may be configured so that the Danger time can be entered when the remaining period of is "14 seconds". As a result, it becomes possible for the player who understands that the ball is out of motion to play the game enthusiastically without firing the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (b), the display contents when the game per character is executed during the Danger time and the jackpot fluctuation is discarded will be described. FIG. 108 (b) is a schematic view showing the display contents when the game per character is executed during the Danger time and the jackpot fluctuation is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the accessory hit is executed during the danger time, the character "end" is displayed in the period display mode 851 to notify that the danger time has ended. Then, in order to indicate that the jackpot fluctuation that was being executed has been discarded, a symbol imitating a "skull" is stopped and displayed in the V rush fluctuation region 811. Further, the comment "Sorry ... Pull back" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, since the game per character is executed, the display mode for aiming for the V prize in the character game is displayed.

Further, since the special symbol fluctuation during execution is discarded, only "10 seconds", which is the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation, is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the jackpot fluctuation has been discarded.

Further, when the bonus game in which the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted is executed during the Danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, the V jackpot game is notified after the Danger time is continued. The production is executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment described above, when a ball wins a prize in the special electric actuating port 643, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired, and the acquired first hit. Based on the value of the type counter C2, the type (big hit type) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed when the V winning opening 165 is won can be selected, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. It differs from the point that the configuration of is partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (a). FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), three types of jackpot types are defined in the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3, and the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed according to the selected jackpot type, V It is configured so that the game state (time reduction number of times) set after the jackpot game is completed and the influence on the special symbol being executed at the time of executing the game per character are different.

Specifically, the jackpot C is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot D is defined in the range of "80 to 94", and "95 to 99". The jackpot E is specified in the range of ".

"Big hit C" (selection rate 80%) has the same contents as the V jackpot game executed in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a 10-round (R) jackpot game, 4 times of shortened time, and a special symbol being executed. The content to interrupt is set. "Big hit D" (selection rate 15%) is set to be a big hit game of 10 rounds (R), the number of time reductions is 4 times, and the content of discarding the special symbol fluctuation during execution is set. "Big hit E" (selection rate 5%) is set to discard the big hit game of 15 rounds (R), the number of time reductions of 15 times, the special symbol fluctuation during execution, and to end the time reduction state.

As described above, when "big hit E" is set, which is most disadvantageous to the player due to the influence on the special symbol change during execution, it is most advantageous to the player when V is won during the game per character. Since the jackpot game and the game state (time reduction number of times) after the jackpot game is completed are set, the player can be given the final chance. Also, for example, if the final fluctuation of the time saving state is out of order and the time saving state is about to end, that is, if the time saving state ends in a few seconds without doing anything, this "big hit". "E" can be the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (b). FIG. 110B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the present embodiment is different in that the Danger time selection table 222ca is added to the above-described first embodiment. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The Danger Time Selection Table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when deciding whether to actually execute the Danger Time effect when the Danger Time Entry Condition is satisfied, and is used as a lottery result of a special symbol change during execution. It is configured so that the execution probabilities are different based on the above.

Here, the contents of the Danger time selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (c). FIG. 110 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the Danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110 (c), the case where the special symbol fluctuation during execution is the jackpot fluctuation is configured so that the Danger time effect is more easily executed than the case where the special symbol fluctuation is the deviation fluctuation. As a result, when the Danger Time effect is executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the jackpot is fluctuating.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol judgment result) is a big hit, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, it is selected that the Danger time is executed, and the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) is selected. If the determination result) is out of the range, the value of the effect counter 223f is selected to not execute the Danger time effect in the range of "0 to 89", and the Danger time effect is executed in the range of "90 to 99". Is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, even if the result of the special drawing lottery during execution is out of order, the Danger time effect can be executed. Since it can be held, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding the content of control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, the content of the control process in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. The present embodiment is different in that the content of the control process executed by the main control device 110 and the content of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and other than that. Are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special electric start port winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric start opening winning process 3 (S158). The special electric start winning process 3 (S158) selects a different jackpot type when a ball wins the special electric starting port 643 with respect to the special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it can be configured and the processing corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric start opening winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processing of S1301 to S1303 and S1305 to S1309 as described above (see S108 in FIG. 50) is executed. Then, in the process of S1303, when it is determined that the special electric power is being operated (during the game per accessory) and it is determined that the special electric power is being operated, then the jackpot type selected this time is "big hit E". (S1371), if it is determined to be "big hit E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S1374). , The process proceeds to S1375. Since the content of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S1374) is the same as that of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1371, when it is determined that it is not "big hit E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is "big hit D" (S1372), and it is determined that it is "big hit D". (S1372: Yes) executes the process of S1374 and shifts to the process of S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that it is not "big hit D", that is, it is "big hit C" (S1372: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1375.

In the processing of S1375, the accessory hit flag is set to on (S1375), the command corresponding to the current hit type ("big hit C" to "big hit E") is set (S1376), and the special electric operation command is set. (S1308), this process is terminated.

Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 3 (S4171). The effect update process 3 (S4171) is a process of S5306 for the effect update process 2 (see S4151 of FIG. 105) of the second embodiment described above, in which the Danger time setting process (S5371) relating to the setting of the Danger time effect is performed. It differs in that it is configured to be executed after, and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the Danger time setting process (S5371) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the Danger time setting process (S5371). In this Danger time setting process (S5371), when the execution condition of the Danger time effect is satisfied, it is determined whether to actually execute the Danger time, and the process for setting the Danger time effect is executed based on the determination result. Will be done.

When the Danger time setting process (S5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601), and it is determined that the value is not a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds. If this is the case (S5601: No), it means that the execution condition of the Danger time is not satisfied, and the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S5601, when it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol change during execution (special figure lottery result) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f are used. With reference to the Danger Time Selection Table 222ca, it is selected whether or not to execute the Danger Time effect (S5602).

In the processing of S5603, it is determined whether to execute the Danger time effect based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602 (S5603), and if it is determined to be executed (S5603: Yes), it is for display indicating the Danger time effect. A command is set (S5604), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the Danger time effect is not executed (S5603: No), this process is terminated as it is.

The display command set in the process of S5604 executes the Danger time effect shown in FIG. 90 (a).

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 137. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main control device 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, the special figure game in which the ball is entered into the special figure entry port 64 is executed, and when the game state shifts to the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a Is easy to open, so the special electric game that aims to put the game ball into the special electric operating port 643 in the general electric winning device 640 and to put the game ball into the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 is a game. It was configured to be a game method that was advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special electric actuating port 643, a ball entry port (second ball entry port 1645) that triggers a lottery of the second special symbol is provided (see FIG. 114). The V opening / closing door 65a is configured to be opened when a specific lottery result (small hit) is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the opening trigger of the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is not the hitting of the accessory by entering the special electric operating port 643, but the entry into the second entry port 1645. This is the case when a small hit is won by a lottery of the second special symbol executed with the opportunity. This small hit is a kind of loss, and is a lottery result that enables the predetermined winning device (V winning device 65) to be operated without changing the gaming state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous fluctuation). Then, during the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to have a shorter fluctuation time than the lottery of the first special symbol, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. There is.

In addition, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when the total number of lottery times (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the number of lottery times (number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol is 100 times. The cumulative time reduction end condition that is satisfied in 1 and the special figure 1 time reduction end condition that is satisfied when the number of lottery (variation number) of the first special symbol reaches 4 times are set, and the cumulative time reduction end condition or special figure 1 is set. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when the time saving ending condition is satisfied.

In the fourth embodiment having the above-described configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set in the time-saving state is the variation of the special symbol set in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the time-saving state. It is configured to have the same contents as the pattern, and the playability in the time saving state (during V rush) is such that the ball is inserted into the special electric starting port 643 with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the ball hits the accessory. Instead of a game in which a game (a hit game in which the V winning device 65 is opened) is executed, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 1645, and a small hit game (V) is won by winning a small hit in a lottery of a second special symbol. The point of using the game of executing the game of opening the winning device 65) and the cumulative time saving end condition are satisfied before the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the first special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). It is different from the point that the game in which the time saving state ends is used even if the game is played.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol (variable period of the second special symbol) can be variably set with respect to the first embodiment described above. For example, as the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, a short fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds) and a long fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds) can be set. , The interval of the small hit game executed in the time saving state can be greatly different depending on the change period of the second special symbol to be set. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the cumulative time saving end condition can be satisfied based on the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of small hit games executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a privilege (V jackpot game) during the time saving state. Further, by making it difficult to set a short fluctuation period (for example, 0.1 second) as the fluctuation period of the second special symbol set during the time reduction state, the small hit game is frequently executed during the time reduction state. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a privilege (prize ball) in a short time.

Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration and game playability of the fourth embodiment will be mainly described. First, the update timing of the time reduction number of times and the discrimination processing timing for ending the time reduction state in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the simultaneous variation type gaming machine capable of executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol in parallel as in the fourth embodiment, the variation of the special symbol executed in the time saving state. In order so that the number of times does not exceed the specified number of times (for example, 100 times), the update process of the time reduction number and the determination process for ending the time reduction state are executed at the fluctuation start timing of each special symbol. Was there. As a result, the time saving state can be terminated at the timing when the specified number of special symbol changes are executed, so that the 101st special symbol change exceeding the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) can be reliably performed in the normal state. It was possible to execute it, and it was possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege (special symbol change in a time-saving state). However, before the final change in the time saving state (100th special symbol change) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the start of the 100th special symbol change, the time saving state ends. Depending on the timing of discrimination (fluctuation) of the special symbol, there is a problem that the period in which the time saving state is set becomes short, which causes discomfort to the player.

Specifically, for example, as the determination (variation) of the first special symbol, the determination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is, immediately after the special symbol variation of the 100th rotation (the final number of time reductions) is executed. , When the special figure change of the 101st rotation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the special figure change of the 100th rotation is executed (immediately before the special figure change of the 101st rotation is executed). Although it does not cause discomfort to the player, if the special figure change at the 101st rotation is not executed while the special figure change at the 100th rotation (the final time reduction number of times) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation. In the case where the special figure change of the 101st rotation is started after the special figure change of the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure change of the 100th rotation is executed. There was a problem that the player was uncomfortable with the state of the normal symbol during the change of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the special figure variation number (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving ending condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. The end timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure change (for example, the special figure change at the 101st rotation) that is executed first after the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured to make it possible to discriminate between and, and to end the time saving state based on the timing that is executed first among any of the timings.

With this configuration, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set to the timing when the special symbol fluctuation of the specified number of times is stopped and displayed, or the timing when the special symbol fluctuation of the number of times exceeding the specified number is executed. It can be set, it is possible to provide the player with a time saving state for the maximum period, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed, the timing at which the condition for executing the special figure change at the 101st rotation is satisfied can be determined so as to be able to determine, and the 101st rotation is executed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is discriminated. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set within the range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times, and the lottery of the special symbol being executed in the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing in which the special figure change is executed after the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied are satisfied first. It is configured to end the time saving state based on the timing, but is not limited to this, for example, the time saving is based only on the timing when the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). It is configured. Then, if a V prize (a ball wins in the V winning opening 165) occurs during the small hit game and a big hit is given, the special symbol change that was temporarily stopped is resumed after the big hit game ends. It is configured to. Then, in the fourth embodiment, the trigger for subtracting the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction game is stopped.

With this configuration, the fluctuation of the special symbol that was temporarily stopped is the fluctuation that started before the jackpot game, so if the fluctuation of the special symbol that was temporarily stopped resumes and stops, The number of time reductions is not subtracted. That is, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is given by V winning, in addition to the number of time reductions given by the big hit, the period until the temporarily stopped change of the special symbol is stopped is also shortened. Set as a game state. With this configuration, the time saving state that is most advantageous for the player can be set as long as possible.

Here, the fourth embodiment is a big hit due to the playability of the pachinko machine 10 described in the first to third embodiments described above (special symbol lottery and winning of a ball to the special electric operating port 643). It is shown as an example for realizing (gaming property aiming at a game) by another method, and each technical idea described in the first to third embodiments described above, the content of the effect to be executed, etc. are appropriately used. It may be diverted. It should be noted that detailed description of each technical idea and production content used in the same manner as in the first to third embodiments described above will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a second entrance unit 1640 for the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in place of the general electric winning device 640. The difference is that the second ball entry port 1645 is provided instead of the special electric operation port 643.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the special figure entry port 64 by executing the left-handed game, and through. By passing through the gate 67, a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed, and when the winning is won, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter the general electric winning device 640. Then, when the game ball enters the special electric actuating port 643, the accessory hit is executed, and the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is configured to be in an open state.

On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is significantly different in that the second ball entry port 1645, which serves as a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, is provided instead of the special electric operation port 643 described above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the opening trigger of the V opening / closing door 65a is not a prize in the special electric operation port 643, but a small hit is won by a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 1645. This triggers the opening of the V opening / closing door 65a.

When the game state is the normal state, the player launches the game ball toward the left side area of the game board 13 and enters the special figure entrance 64 in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above. The game is executed while hoping to win a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) at a rate of 100%.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if the game is executed aiming at the left side region of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. When the lottery of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 is won, the second electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry unit 1640 is in an open state (the game ball is open). A state in which the ball can be entered into the second ball entry unit 1640) is set.

A second ball entry port 1645 is provided in the second ball entry unit 1640, and when a game ball enters, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Then, in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. If a small hit is won, the V opening / closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to the open state, and a big hit is given when the game ball wins the V winning opening 165.

In this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, it is stipulated that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (about 9/10). The time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second entrance 1645 is the state in which the V prize is likely to occur, which is the most advantageous state for the player.

<About the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118. In the fourth embodiment, the method of special symbol lottery is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and if the partial configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are different in response to the above-mentioned differences. I'm letting you.

First, with reference to FIG. 115, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. The hit type counter C5, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da corresponding to entry into the special symbol entry port 64 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding). A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db corresponding to the entry into the second entrance 1645 consisting of the first to fourth areas) is provided, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da is provided. Is stored in each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the special figure entry port 64. ..

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, according to the timing of entering the second ball entry port 1645, Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

In this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. It may be configured.

Further, as in the present embodiment, a small hit is also made in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result. It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (special symbol entry port 64, second entry opening 1645) that triggers the special symbol lottery. It is configured to store all the counter values acquired by By configuring to execute, the same configuration can be used for multiple gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small hits), so parts and technologies can be standardized. It is possible to reduce the cost.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the special symbol described above, the normal symbol hold corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 composed of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas). A ball storage area 203dc is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is set according to the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol variation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 1645 is reserved and stored, and each counter acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It has a configuration to hold and store the value, but is not limited to this, and does not provide a function (hold storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, in order to execute the advantageous lottery in the gaming machine in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player and the lottery that is disadvantageous to the player are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state where a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment replaces the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24 (a)) with respect to the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db is provided with the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc instead of the variation pattern selection table 202e, and the small hit random number table da is newly provided. Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the small hit random number table 202da provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number table 202da. The small hit random number table 202da is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is defined in the lottery of the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202da, the judgment value determined to be a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low). Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined regardless of the probability state and high probability state). As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not specified, and the value of the first special symbol is small in the lottery. It is stipulated that you will not win a prize.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of "4 to 399". That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (not won), and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (about 9/10). ) Is specified.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the small hit are configured to be different, and a special symbol lottery is performed. In one process (process of determining the presence or absence of a hit), the hit / fail determination of the big hit and the hit / fail determination of the small hit are continuously (simultaneously) executed.

With this configuration, a lottery for a big hit or a small hit can be executed with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

Then, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened for a certain period of time (a state in which the game ball can enter the V winning device 65). It is configured to. A big hit is given by letting the game ball win the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 within the period when the V opening / closing door 65a is open. Therefore, the player executes the game while hoping that a large number of small hits will be won.

In the present embodiment, the V opening / closing door 65a is opened for a specified period when a small hit is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a type is provided for the winning small hit to win the small hit. The period during which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened may be different depending on the hit type. In such a configuration, it is advisable to provide a small hit type table and refer to the table to determine the small hit type. With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in winning the small hit but also in the winning small hit type, and the small hit in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened for a longer period of time. The game is executed while hoping to win the door. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (time saving state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, is not frequently executed. On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that a specific game state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the table (first random number table 202a) referred to when the big hit lottery is executed and the table (small hit random number table 202da) referred to when the small hit lottery is executed are displayed. Although it is configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and a large hit lottery and a small hit lottery may be executed using one table. In this case, for example, the random number table 202a for the first hit may be configured to specify the range of counter values for winning small hits for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol, and the predetermined determination value. It is configured to execute the determination of winning or small hit winning, but is not limited to this, for example, depending on the number of big hit winnings and the number of small hit winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The jackpot winning or the small hit winning may be configured so that the first hit random number counter C1 value specified as the winning is variable, or the jackpot lottery or the small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. As the data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery, a data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit and the judgment value corresponding to the small hit are not specified may be provided.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are executed. There is a restriction (so that the jackpot game is not executed) so that the jackpots are not won at the same time (in parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, during the period from winning a jackpot in a lottery of one special symbol to executing a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning, the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win the big hit, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not specified, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed by referring to the dedicated data table in which only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is specified. It may be configured.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol with respect to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above. Hold ball storage area 203dc, 1st special symbol hold ball number counter 203dd, 2nd special symbol hold ball number counter 203de, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, small hit flag 203df, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 The difference is that the fluctuation time counter 203di, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the special symbol entry port 64 (starting prize) up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry opening 1645 (starting prize) up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing various counter values.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). It is the same as (not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entry port 64 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the counters C1 to C2 and C5 are used from the counter buffer. , CS1 values are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entry port 1645 (starting prize), the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 are moved from the counter buffer as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. The value is acquired and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in the same manner.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db described above and corresponding to each start winning prize. The data corresponding to the start winning prize of is shifted to this special symbol reservation ball execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has four holding areas so that data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol is held in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the ball storage area 203dc (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the general figure variation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is usually used. Shift to the symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are special symbols detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball port 64 or the second entry port 1645. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the special symbol entry port 64 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203da, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 1645 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203db, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is incremented by 1. Is.

The MPU 201 is a value of each of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). When each is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing. (Refer to S255 in FIG. 123) or in the second special symbol change start processing (S260 in FIG. 126), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variable display, and the first special symbol is during the variable display of the second special symbol. It is set to on when the jackpot of the symbol is executed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to on in S852 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 of FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is set to off in the process of S952 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 of FIG. 126).

As a result, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol is prevented from executing the lottery again. be able to.

In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after executing the process related to the first special symbol in one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the second special symbol is related. By configuring to execute the process, it is configured to execute the variable process for each special symbol without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the jackpot control is performed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. The process (S1804 in FIG. 56) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is a variation processing for each special symbol (S254 in FIG. 119) when the current state is a big hit state or a small hit state (S251: Yes in FIG. 151). It is configured to skip ~ S263).

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. By the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. In this case, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to be turned on when the small hit is won. This small hit flag 203dg is set to on when the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and when the special symbol fluctuation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to be turned on when stopping the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit (S1652 in FIG. 133), and the special symbol change process 4 ( (See FIG. 119) (see S252 in FIG. 119). When it is set to ON in the process of S252, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the same manner as during the change (FIG. 119). S253). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 203dh of the special figure 1 is set to on. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 123) (S751: Yes in FIG. 123), it is set to off (S753 in FIG. 123).

In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the small hit can be won. Therefore, the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only the symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes in FIG. 119), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing) for stopping the first special symbol being changed (S26: Yes in FIG. 119). (See S257 in FIG. 119) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a jackpot (see S1555 in FIG. 132). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di remains and is forcibly displayed. After the stop display is displayed, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262: Yes in FIG. 119), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S262: Yes in FIG. 119) for stopping the second special symbol being changed ( (See S263 in FIG. 119) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a jackpot (see S855 in FIG. 124). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj remains and is forcibly displayed. After the stop display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set when it is determined in the first special symbol change start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120) that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358: Yes in FIG. 120). Is set to on (S359 in FIG. 120), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is turned on in the time saving update processing (see S863 in FIG. 125) of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). When it is determined (S2101: Yes in FIG. 125), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102), and then the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103).

If a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). Similarly, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is set to off in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132). In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to off when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, if the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the big hit game is completed, the fluctuation will be changed. When it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125) when the fluctuation is stopped after the restart, and when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (FIG. 125). S2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (see S2102 of FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the fluctuation is executed.

With this configuration, the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped resumes, and when the fluctuation stops, the remaining time reduction number of times is not updated (subtracted). Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game given by the V prize, in addition to the number of lottery of the special symbol specified by the jackpot, the residual variation of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped The time is also shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to set a longer time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous period for the player.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is , In the second special symbol change start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (see S960 in FIG. 126), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0. When it is determined that the value is (that is, the time is being shortened) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update process (S1661) of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1564), and when it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. .. If a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) (see S860 in FIG. 124), and the second special symbol If a big hit is won in the lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the big hit is won and the second special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped. As described above, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. , The process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The time saving end waiting flag 203 dm is a flag indicating that the special figure change in which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied has been started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is completed, the special symbol is changed 4 times or 15 times as the specified period of the time saving state, and the time saving state is terminated. It indicates that the final fluctuation of the time saving is started and the time saving state is finished in the waiting state.

The time saving end wait flag 203dm determines whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (that is, the final fluctuation of the specified number of times in the time saving state) in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120). (S360), when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Further, also in the second special symbol change start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126), when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125), which is the timing for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, is executed, or when the determination of a new special symbol is executed (first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 121)). Refer to S356)) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)), and when the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to on, the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to off. ..

With this configuration, when the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any of the time saving end timings arrives, it is surely according to each timing. Can be made to execute the time saving end processing.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 119 to 136. In the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are duplicated (in parallel) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it is configured to be feasible, and the content of the control process corresponding to the above-mentioned difference is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special symbol variation process 4 (S151), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 4 (S151). The special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) makes various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and controls the first special symbol and the second special symbol by predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 so as to enable the variable display on the determined variable display mode, and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is set, and control is executed for stopping and displaying in a display mode indicating a determination result (hit / fail determination result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (big hit in progress) or the small hit game is in progress (small hit in progress) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current state is during the big hit game (during the big hit) or during the small hit game (during the small hit).

In the process of S251, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (S251: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S252), and then ON. When it is determined that the setting is set to (S252: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (first special symbol (special figure 1 in the present embodiment)) is displayed. Update (S253) and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to be turned on when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, while the small hit game is being executed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed with the start of the small hit game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted when the first special symbol variation in the inside disappears. As a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, at intervals of 0.2 seconds). The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated, or a display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is in progress (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals). A blinking display mode in which the above is repeated) may be used. Further, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during a temporary stop is used. Is also good.

On the other hand, in the processing of S251, when it is determined that the present is not in the big hit or the small hit (S251: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0, that is, the first. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S254). When it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203di of the special figure 1 is larger than 0) (S254: Yes), the process of executing the variation of the first special symbol is executed ( S255).

In this first special symbol change execution processing (S255), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Processing is executed. Then, when the processing of S255 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first fluctuation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation execution processing (S255) is 0 (S256), and S256 If it is determined in the process that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S257), and the process proceeds to the process of S259 described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed wins the jackpot, a process for erasing the information related to the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S256 that the fluctuation time counter 203di in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S256: No), the processing of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S259.

On the other hand, in the processing of S254, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not larger than 0 (0) (S254: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol change start processing is executed (S258). In this first special symbol change start processing (S258), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is possible to execute a new lottery (variation), a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S258) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122.

After executing the first special symbol change start process (S258), after determining that the change of the special figure 1 is in progress (S256: No) in the process of S256, or after performing the first special symbol change stop process (S257). After the execution, next, the variation processing (S259 to S263) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S259 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (0) (S259: No), it means that the current special figure 2 is not changing. In addition, the second special symbol change start process (S260) for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S260), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start process (S260), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S260), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203i (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S259, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current special figure 2 is changing (S259: Yes), then the second The special symbol variation executing process is executed (S261). The content of the second special symbol variation executing process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, but the processing having the same content as the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (S255) is processed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution processing (S261) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined to be 0 (S262). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S263), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S262 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not 0 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), it is defined in the second special symbol during the fluctuation display. When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display is executed with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol change stop processing (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation. The process is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed wins the jackpot, a process for erasing the information related to the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S254 to S258) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S259 to S263) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation process. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed before (priority) the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed with priority over the variable process related to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from being extinguished (discarded) by the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S258), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S258).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S352). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is larger than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S353). ).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is executed in the execution area. A process of sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the current gaming state is in the time saving (S358). ). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S358: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S358 that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (S358: No), since the game state is the normal state, this process is terminated as it is. In this way, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, when the time reduction is in progress, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to ON, the time reduction is started during the time reduction when the fluctuation is stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not the fluctuation has occurred, and the end condition of the time reduction can be updated (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted) when the fluctuation is stopped.

After executing the process of S359 described above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation is the end condition of the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to ON (S361), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 in the processing of S360, this processing is terminated as it is because it is not the final fluctuation of the time saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S451). Then, in order to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the state is waiting, that is, whether or not the time saving final variation is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end is performed. It is determined whether the standby flag 203 dm is set to ON (S452). When it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203 dm is on (that is, the second special symbol is in the final change of the time reduction) (S452: Yes), the period of the time reduction state set this time ends. Therefore, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203 g (S453), and the time saving end standby flag 203 dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203 dl are set to off (S454). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. On the other hand, in the process of S452, when it is determined that the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is not on (S452: No), the process of S453 to S456 is skipped because the final change of the time saving state is not executed. The process proceeds to S457.

In this way, in the state of waiting for the end of the time saving state (the state in which the final fluctuation of the time saving state is started in the other special symbol), the game is played before the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired. By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, the time-saving game state with the other special symbol until the change of the special symbol in which the final change of the time-saving state is executed ends. It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

After finishing the processing of S452 or S453, it is then determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). , The lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S457). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S458), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (S458: Yes), the big hit flag 203i is set to be turned on so as to indicate the big hit winning of the first special symbol. (S459). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S459, in the jackpot flag 203i, the information indicating the jackpot is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S460), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S460). S461), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S458 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S458: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and this process is completed. do.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 of FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 of FIG. 121), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S551). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S459 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 121).

In the process of S551, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S551: Yes), the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 The jackpot type is determined based on (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S553), and the current game state (normal state, latent state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is acquired. , Probability change state), and the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc is read out (S554).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S555 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the process of S554 (S555), and the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 is used. Based on this, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S556).

Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S557), the fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S558), and the selected fluctuation pattern is set. The value indicating the fluctuation time of is set to the value of the fluctuation time counter 203di in FIG. 1 (S559), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the process of S552 is performed. It skips and shifts to the process of S553.

Next, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation execution processing (S255). In this first special symbol change execution process (S255), a process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution and a special interrupted by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

In the first special symbol change execution processing (S255), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from the small hit winning to the small hit game). (Period until the end of the game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted again.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is difficult for the player to understand because the other special symbol variation ends during one small hit game. Furthermore, based on winning the small hit game in one special symbol lottery, the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery is not discarded. Therefore, for example, by winning a small hit, a big hit is won. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery result (the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small hit winning) is discarded.

If it is determined in the processing of S751 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S751: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S752), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. Set to off (S753), subtract 1 from the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di (S754), update the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S755), and end this process. ..

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation executing process is performed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds. (See S255 in FIG. 119) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is updated (1 subtraction) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123). It is configured to do. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON in the processing of S751 (S751: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Skips the processes of S752 and S753 and shifts to the process of S754.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined. This is the process that is executed when it has passed.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S851). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to on for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to on (S852), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203df has been turned on is set (S853).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed by the off symbol (S854), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) can be displayed.

After finishing the processing of S855, next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to ON (S856), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S856: Yes), the above is described. In order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the processing of S854, the jackpot flag 203i for the second special symbol was set to off (S857). ), The stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S858), and the process proceeds to S859. On the other hand, in the process of S856, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of S857 and 808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S859.

In the processing of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won by the special symbol variation this time is set (see 809), and then the jackpot flag 203i, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag corresponding to the first special symbol are set. 203dl, the time saving end wait flag 203dm is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current gaming state is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S861). The game state storage area 203g is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, time saving state) and the game state related to the winning game (large hit medium, small hit medium) can be stored separately. By executing the process of S861, the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

When the processing of S861 is completed, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S863), and the first special symbol display device is displayed. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variable-displayed in 37 is executed (S864), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update process (S862) is executed, and the above-mentioned S863 Move to processing. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S862) will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), the process (S859 to S864) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the lottery result this time is a big hit (S851: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S854). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing is executed at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In the present embodiment, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the jackpot is executed. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) ( S458: Yes) in FIG. 121 may be configured so that the fluctuation of the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly removed and stopped to execute a special fluctuation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a big hit, the other special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a jackpot, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Not limited to, for example, it may be configured to suspend the other special symbol change until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, and restart the interrupted special symbol change after the jackpot game ends. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discarding of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (disappearance fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is out of the lottery, the lottery may be performed. During the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) by discarding the result and executing the forced stop processing to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation. In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether a new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is restarted after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play a game. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol to the player during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, one process of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S151 in FIG. 119), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132)). The time saving update process (S862 (S1661)) is described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time reduction update process (S862 (S1661)), when the game state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the end condition is satisfied, the game state is normally changed. Executes the process of transitioning to the state. In the description described later, the process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped will be described, but the same process is also executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is turned on, that is, the change of the special symbol being executed this time starts to change during the time saving game. It is determined whether or not it is the same (S2101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, the fluctuation is started during the time saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2104. On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), the processing of S2102 to S2106 is skipped because it is not a fluctuation stop that triggers the update of the time saving state. Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

As described above, when the game state is the time saving state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped by setting the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type to ON. Can be done. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be set until the final fluctuation of the time-saving game state stops. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player for the longest possible period.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the period until the small hit game is completed is changed. It is configured not to restart. Then, a V prize is generated during the small hit game, a big hit is given, and after the big hit game is completed, the change of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped resumes. Further, as will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 137, since the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off before the jackpot game is started, the special figure 1 when the temporarily stopped fluctuation resumes and stops. FIG. 1 Since the subtraction flag 203dk is off, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, the remaining time reduction number is not subtracted when the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the jackpot game due to the V prize is stopped. With this configuration, in addition to the specified time reduction period set by the jackpot type, the time reduction game is also set for the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure that was temporarily stopped, which is an advantageous period for the player. The time saving state can be set to the maximum long period. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

In the process of S2104, it is determined whether or not the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is on (S2104). When it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203 dm is on (S2104: Yes), that is, the variation of the special symbol this time is the final variation of the time reduction, and the time reduction in the second special symbol (the other special symbol). If the next change has not been started from the final change of, the game state is stored by setting the time saving end wait flag 203 dm to off (S2105) because it is the timing to shift the game state to the normal state. A normal state is set in the area 203 g (S2106). Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2104, when it is determined that the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the state in which the final variation of the time saving game is not executed, that is, the state in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, the process of S2105 to S2106 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2107. In this way, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the fluctuation that is the final fluctuation of the time-saving game is stopped, the fluctuation exceeding the specified number of times of the time-saving gaming state (the next fluctuation from the final fluctuation) is executed by the other special symbol. It is determined whether or not the game has been executed, and if it has not been executed, the game state is changed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with a comfortable game.

When any of the processes of S2101, S2104, and S2106 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S2107. In the process of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h and the game state is set (S2107), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S260), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S260).

When the second special symbol change start process (S260) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). Refer to)) to determine whether or not the jackpot was won.

In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is skipped. The fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and this process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol change after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to on in the process of S951 (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery of the first special symbol (first special) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). Only when the jackpot is won in the symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), if the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol is subsequently executed. The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the jackpot game is performed by the process of S251 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the end of.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by the off symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. In order to prevent a new change (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set and the change processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

That is, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the big hit is not won in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured. For example, when the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203df may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df set to on, the change of the second special symbol is performed. The process is skipped, that is, a new fluctuation is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed until the jackpot game is completed. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The content of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols is configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 side as appropriate. It is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 that is easy for the player to see. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to on, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S951: No in FIG. 126), The processes of S953 to S959 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S960 described later. In the processes of S953 to S959, the first special symbol reservation ball count counter 203dd and the first special symbol hold are performed for each of the processes S351 to S357 of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 of FIG. 120). The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S356), and the second special symbol holding ball number. For the counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959). Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes S960 to S963 are executed, and this process is terminated. In the processes of S960 to S963, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203 dl is changed to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203 dl for each process from S358 to S361 of the first special symbol change start process (S258 of FIG. 120) described above. Since they are the same except for the above points, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, the same processing is executed at the start of the fluctuation of both special symbols. In the other special symbol, it is possible to prevent problems such as the number of remaining time reductions not being subtracted.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) changes the type of the target special symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121). And some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1051 corresponding to the process of S451, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S452 to S461. When the target is changed from special figure 1 (first special symbol) to special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the process of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the process of, and the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. It differs in that the processing to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), if it is determined that the lottery this time is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1062), and this process ends. do.

This special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1062) is a process executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a loss. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, but if the lottery result is incorrect, the same process as the process of S462 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 of FIG. 121) described above is executed. If the lottery result is a small hit, the process corresponding to the small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 deviation processing (S1062).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S955 of FIG. 127)) is a small hit. (S1151).

If it is determined in the process of S1151 that a small hit has been won (S1151: Yes), the small hit flag 203 deg is set to ON (S1152), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1153). ), Then, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1154), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1151, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S1151: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1155), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 2 deviation change process (S1062 in FIG. 128) executed as one process of the second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), that is, the change in the special symbol (lottery). By setting the small hit flag 203dg to ON when it is determined that a small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting, the setting status of the small hit flag 203dg at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following points. In the process of S1251 corresponding to the process of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S552 to S559. In each process of S1252 to S1256 and S1258 to S1260 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. FIG. 2 is different from the point that the processing of the deviation pattern selection processing (S1257) is added. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126). The contents of the selection process (S1257 of FIG. 130) will be described.

When the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit (S1351). In the process of S1351, the determination is executed based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S959 of FIG. 127).

In the processing of S1351, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1352), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1353). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. For example, a plurality of small hit types are not set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the small hit type can be set, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined for the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1352 and S1353 are provided. It may be configured to select a different small hit type depending on the processing of.

By configuring the processing of S1352 and S1353 to be used even though there is only one type of small hit as in the present embodiment, for example, the specifications of the game can be changed during the development period of the pachinko machine 10. Even if it is changed, it is possible to easily respond to the change.

After the processing of S1353 is completed, the variation pattern selection table according to the current gaming state is read (S1354), and the read variation pattern selection table and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 are used for small hits. The fluctuation pattern (small hit fluctuation pattern) of is selected (S1355). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the lottery result is not a small hit (out of order) (S1351: No), the process (S1357 to S1359) of the case where the lottery result is out of order is executed. In the process of S1357, first, the variation pattern selection table according to the game state is read (S1357), the variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1358), and the feature is based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S1359), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S261), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution processing (S261). In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so as not to win a small hit, in the second special symbol variation executing process (S261), the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S261) (See S255 in FIG. 123), is the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when a small hit is won (execution of a small hit game) with the other special symbol set to ON? The difference is that the process of determining is omitted, and other than that, the process is the same except that the target of the process is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so the detailed description thereof is omitted. ..

If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it means that the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (the small hit game is executed). A flag for indicating (for example, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag) is provided, and in this second special symbol variation executing process, the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123). Just run.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S263), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S263). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S263), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the jackpot is changed and the process of setting the flag for stopping the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted.

That is, the point that the processing of S852 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) was deleted, and the point that the processing target of S851 and S853 to S864 was changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513). And, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S1551: No), the special figure 2 off-off stop process (S1558) is executed. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation stop process (S1564) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 132) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 detachment stop process (S1564). This special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1564) corresponds to a case where the lottery result acquired in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than a jackpot (small hit or miss). It executes the fluctuation stop processing.

When the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1564) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651), and when it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON. (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S1652), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on is set (S1651: Yes). S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been temporarily stopped is set. A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1653 is completed, next, a small hit scenario (open operation scenario for small hits) corresponding to the small hit game is set (S1654), the small hit flag 203 deg is set to off (S1655), and the game state is set. The hit information indicating that the small hit game is in progress (small hit is in progress) is stored in the storage area 203 g (S1656), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the small hit (small hit symbol). A special figure 2 confirmation command for indicating that is set (S1657), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped to fluctuate (confirmed display) with a small hit symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) that performs a process such as subtraction of the remaining time saving number is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 203dg is set to off in the processing of S1651 (S1651: No), it is shown that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed) with the symbol indicating the deviation (disengaged symbol). (S1659), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is disengaged and the fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display) at the symbol (S1660). Then, the time saving update process is executed (S1661 (S863)), and this process is terminated.

Regarding the time saving update process (S1661 (S863)), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time saving update process (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG. 2 Since the only difference is that the subtraction flag is changed to 203 dl, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and in parallel to be executed. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, the start winning process 4 (S152), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 4 (S152). The start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) determines whether a ball has entered (starting prize) in either the special drawing entry port 64 or the second entry opening 1645, and if the start winning is won, Up to the maximum number of reserved balls (up to 4 for each of the special symbol entry slot 64 and the second entry slot 1645), the acquired counter values can be stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol hold ball storage area. This is a process of storing each in 203db.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved sphere is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203da is stored. Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described.

In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special drawing entry port 64, which is the first starting opening (starting winning) (S1751). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entry port 64. It is determined that the ball has entered the special figure entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S1751: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S1752). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the special figure entry port 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added by 1 (S1754), and the voice lamp control device 113 A command for the number of reserved balls for notifying the number of reserved balls in the special figure entry port 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special symbol) is set (S1755).

Then, each value of various counter values (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first, variable type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls of 203a (S1756).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1757). The first look-ahead process (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of determining a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without, for example, when there is a new start winning, the hit / fail judgment result and the determined fluctuation pattern for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, It may be configured to execute a process for determining the stop type and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, but it is not limited to this, and when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the lottery right of the second special symbol (winning information) ) May be configured to be determined in advance.

Then, when the process of S1757 is executed, the process of S1758 is executed next. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1751 that the ball has not entered the special figure entry port 64 (S1751: No), or in the process of S1753, the number of reserved balls for the special figure entry port 64 is the upper limit at present. When it is determined that the value is (S1753: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1758.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added, the first look-ahead process (S1757) based on the added winning information (winning information) is performed. It is configured to be executed, but is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1753 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is the upper limit number (4) (S1753). : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1757) can be executed when a ball is inserted into the special symbol entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that it can be done. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since it is possible to add value when a ball is put into the special symbol entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for playing when a ball enters the special figure entry port 64 while the number of balls has reached the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1758 to S1674 is the same as the process performed for winning a ball to the first starting port (special drawing entry port 64) executed in each process from S1751 to S1757. The only difference is that the process of the above is the process executed for the second entrance 1645, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the processing of S1763.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1757), which is one process of the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this first look-ahead process (S1757).

In the first look-ahead process (S1757 of FIG. 135), first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, that is, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2. , Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the look-ahead hold storage area (S1822).

Next, the hit / fail determination result is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the look-ahead hold storage area. Here, both the winning / failing determination when the special symbol is in the low probability state and the winning / failing determination when the special symbol is in the high probability state are determined. This is a jackpot judgment based on the timing when a new hold storage occurs (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since there is a time lag with the execution timing, it is possible to predict the game state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing when the jackpot judgment based on the newly held prize information is executed. Because it is difficult.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel). In addition, since the variable time set according to the lottery result of each special symbol is set to be variable depending on the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) at the time of lottery of the special symbol, each special symbol is set. This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of the game starts.

Then, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is a big hit (big hit only in the low probability state, big hit only in the high probability state, big hit in all of the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the big hit The first winning command indicating the winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and the jackpot type when winning is set (S1824), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of order in both the high probability state and the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the omission is set. (S1825), this process is terminated.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is used as common information in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result). Information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110.

When the winning command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed from the usual color). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which the player is displayed (variably) or a notice symbol or the like is displayed before the start of the change to suggest the winning / failing judgment result to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the look-ahead process is executed, the hit / fail judgment result in the high probability state of the special symbol and the hit / fail judgment result in the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each determination is determined. It is configured to set a winning command based on, but is not limited to this, for example, a judgment value that is determined to be a big hit regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The first hit random number counter C1 value) may be specified, and a winning command indicating a big hit of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the pass / fail judgment. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by configuring so that a constant fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to fluctuate based on the information stored in the reservation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a, the look-ahead processing based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110 ( Even if the information indicating the content (each counter value) of the hold storage) is set as the winning command and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not executed, the specific pre-reading process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player illegally obtains the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled.

Next, the second look-ahead process (S1764), which is one process of the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1764). The second look-ahead process (S1764 in FIG. 134) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (S1757 in FIG. 133) in which a ball enters the first start port (special figure entry port 64) (starting prize). In contrast to the process of determining (pre-reading) the pending data (winning information) in advance and making various judgments, the second start is based on the winning information based on the start winning of the judgment target at the first starting port. The only point is that the information is changed to the winning information based on the start winning of the opening (second entry opening 1645), and the same processing is performed for the others, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the V-passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V-passing process 4 (S153). The V-passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment wins a small hit in the second special symbol lottery for the V-passing process (see S153 in FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the small hit is won. When a V prize is generated during the game, a process of turning off the time saving end waiting flag 203 dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203 dm is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V-passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and if it is determined that the V is valid (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1571). ). If it is determined that a small hit is in progress (S1571: Yes), the above-described processes S1504 to S1506 are executed, and the process proceeds to S1572. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not in the small hit (S1571: No), the processes of S1504 to S1506 and S1572 to S1575 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1509.

In the process of S1572, it is determined whether or not the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is on (S1572). When it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag 203 dm is on (S1572: Yes), a new time saving state period is set after the end of the jackpot game given from this V prize, so that the time saving end waiting flag 203 dm is set to off (S1573). In this way, when a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving game, a V prize is generated and a big hit is given, a new time saving period is given. Therefore, when a V prize is won, it is possible to prevent a problem that the normal gaming state is immediately entered after a new time saving period is set by setting the time saving end waiting flag 203 dm to off.

After executing the process of S1572 or S1573, the process proceeds to the process of S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574). That is, it is determined whether the change of the first special symbol is executed in parallel with the change of the second special symbol this time, and the change of the first special symbol is not stopped yet and is temporarily stopped. .. When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575), and the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the processing of S1575 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the present embodiment, a small hit is won by a lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed at the time of winning the small hit, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the end of the small hit game is configured to resume, but in the present embodiment, a V prize may be given during the small hit game, and a big hit may be given. The lottery of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped even during the jackpot game. Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol that was temporarily stopped after the jackpot game is completed is resumed, but in the present embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped, so even if the fluctuation is temporarily stopped, the remaining time reduction period There was a problem that the number decreased.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the V prize occurs during the small hit, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off, so that the time saving period is not subtracted when the fluctuation that has been temporarily stopped is stopped. Therefore, in addition to the specified period of time reduction, the player can also set the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped symbol as the time reduction period. With this configuration, it is possible to set a longer time saving period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to give joy for a longer period of time.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded). Further, when a small hit is won, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small hit is won, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is suspended. May be configured to discard. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege by winning the jackpot due to the fluctuation that was temporarily stopped after the jackpot game was given by the V winning.

In addition, when one special symbol wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation can be discarded by winning a small hit with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a wider variety of playability.

As described above, the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in parallel, and when a small hit is won, the other symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, when a V prize is generated during the small hit game and a big hit is given, the symbol temporarily stopped after the big hit game is completed resumes the fluctuation. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the time saving state at the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation is set by turning on the flag indicating that the value of the time saving counter is to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation. When stopped, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated.

Therefore, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted by setting the subtraction flag to off when the V prize is generated, and the time reduction counter is not subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped. That is, when the temporarily stopped symbol resumes fluctuation and stops, the time saving period is not updated. Therefore, the player can add the temporarily stopped special symbol to the preset time and short period. The variable period can also be set. Therefore, the time saving period that is advantageous for the player can be set as long as possible.

In the present embodiment, the type of jackpot given by the V prize is set to one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while being interested not only in whether the V prize is generated but also in the jackpot type to be given.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning small hit type is configured to be one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be provided. Further, the lottery of the first special symbol may be configured to win a small hit. By providing a plurality of small hit types in this way, the player can execute the game while expecting a small hit that is more likely to generate a V prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be changed in parallel, but the variation is not limited to this, and the corresponding special symbol changes in the order of entering the ball. It may be configured to be executed (so-called change in winning order). In the case of such a configuration, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that the degree of advantage of the winning jackpot type is different. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while hoping to win the jackpot when the lottery of the special figure which is more advantageous is being executed, so that there is a sense of tension. A game can be provided.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the small hit is won, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, but by providing a plurality of small hit types, the first special A small hit that discards the fluctuation of the symbol (forced stop when it comes off) and a small hit that temporarily stops may be set separately. In such a configuration, if the change of the other special symbol wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, it is preferable to perform an effect that encourages the player to discard it. .. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player.

In the present embodiment, the game states to be set are set to two types (normal state, time saving state), but may be set to three types (normal state, time saving state, probabilistic state) and four types (normal state, time saving state, Probability change state, latent state) may be used. Further, the number may be two or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game is executed aiming at the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 regardless of the game state, but the game is not limited to this, and the right side area of the game board 13 is not limited to this. You may execute the game method aiming at. Then, the switching of the game method may be set based on the game state. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute the guidance display mode for showing the player the current game method. The player can grasp not only the game method but also the current game state by this guidance display mode.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the update timing of the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the time saving number and the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied are made different. As the configuration, after updating the time saving state, the configuration for determining the establishment of the end condition of the time saving state is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, whether the ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied is first determined. It may be configured to execute the update process of the time saving state when it is determined and the end condition is not satisfied. Further, although the process of subtracting the number of time reductions is performed after executing the special drawing lottery, the special drawing lottery may be executed after subtracting the number of time reductions.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small hit is won in the final change of the special symbol in the time saving state (the special symbol change executed in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied), the special symbol change. Is configured to end the time saving state at the timing when the stop is displayed, but it is not limited to this, for example, if a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of a special symbol, the time is shortened until the small hit game ends. It may be configured so that the state does not end. That is, if the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) is satisfied at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is preferable to configure the timing to switch the timing of determining the establishment (delay at the end of the small hit game). As a result, it is possible to change the period during which the time saving state continues based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end. ..

In addition, as the above-mentioned switching condition, other than the above-mentioned contents (small hit winning) may be used. It is possible to set as a switching condition that the game is being executed or that the game is being executed per normal figure, or at the timing of determining the establishment of the time saving end condition, the special symbol hold or the normal symbol that is stored on hold may be set. It may be set as a switching condition that the winning information included in the hold includes specific information (winning information). By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Example of combination modification of Fuden winning device 640>
Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 138. In the first embodiment described above, the special electric operating port 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640, and when a ball winning the general electric winning device 640 during a game per game wins a prize in the special electric operating port 643 Configured to perform a winning game. Further, in the second embodiment described above, in order to solve the problem that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the problem that the motivation to play is reduced due to the monotonization of the game in the time saving state. , A plurality of special electric operating ports (special electric operating port 643, second special electric operating port 1643) are provided in the general electric winning device 640, and a V jackpot game is easily executed according to the special electric operating port in which the ball wins. It was configured so that the game and the game per character, which is difficult to execute the V jackpot game, can be executed.

Further, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the special symbol variation during execution is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted) when the game per character is executed. Since it was configured to lengthen the period of the time saving state, it is advantageous for the player to perform many games per character during the time saving state, and there is a problem that the game during the time saving state becomes monotonous. rice field. On the other hand, in the third embodiment described above, the V jackpot type is selected based on the ball winning the special electric actuating port 643, and the accessory hit is performed according to the selected V jackpot type. A pattern that interrupts the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed when the game is executed, a pattern that discards the pattern, and a pattern that terminates the time-saving state after discarding are configured to be executed. By providing a new game property that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the winning game, it is possible to prevent the game during the time saving state from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the first to third embodiments described above, a special electric operating port 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640, and when a ball wins a prize in the special electric operating port 643, a game per accessory is executed. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery execution trigger is provided in the general electric winning device 640, and the first to third embodiments described above are used. The same playability is realized by a so-called simultaneous variation type specification in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in parallel.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 138, the second special electric actuating port is based on the configuration of the general electric winning device 640 (see FIG. 88) included in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above. A second ball entry port 1645 is provided in place of the 1643 so that the ball winning in the general electric winning device 640 can enter the special electric operation port 643 or the second ball entry port 1645. Is different from other embodiments.

Then, the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643. The V-winning device 65 is configured to be opened with the same contents as the game per character executed based on the above.

With this configuration, when the V winning device 65 is opened by the small hit game, the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the end condition of the time saving state is the same as in the fourth embodiment described above. While the element for satisfying the cumulative time reduction end condition is updated, when the V winning device 65 is opened for the game per character, the element related to the time reduction end condition is not updated. Therefore, the number of times the V winning device 65 is opened and the number of times the element for satisfying the time saving end condition is updated do not match, so that the player is made to grasp the period until the time saving state ends. It can be difficult.

In this modified example, the same end condition as that of the fourth embodiment described above is set as the end condition of the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game per character is executed. The time saving end condition may be satisfied even when the number of times has reached a specific number of times (for example, 50 times). With this configuration, the time saving end condition is first satisfied based on the lottery of the second special symbol, or the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the game per character. Can be played while letting the player predict.

Further, in this case, as the effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the time saving end condition established based on the lottery of the second special symbol and the game per character are executed. Suggestion effect for suggesting to the player which of the time reduction end conditions that are satisfied is likely to be satisfied (for example, an effect that suggests the number of times until each time reduction end condition is satisfied). It is good to configure to execute. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the period until any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, so that it is possible to make the player feel happy about the flow destination of the ball that has won the prize in the Fuden winning device 640.

As shown in FIG. 138, in this modified example, the special electric operating port 643 and the second special electric ball opening 1645 are provided in the general electric winning device 640, but the second special electric operating port 1643 is also not limited to these. It may be configured so that the ball that has won the Fuden winning device 640 wins any of the above-mentioned three.

Further, when the configuration of this modification is used, the small hit game is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and the ball wins the special electric operation opening 643. The processing content for the special symbol change being executed may be different between the case where the game per character is executed and the game per character is executed. For example, when the small hit game is executed, the game per character is executed. It is easier to discard the special symbol fluctuation during execution than in the case, and when the character-per-character game is executed, it is easier to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation during execution than when the small-hit game is executed. It is good to configure it to.

In this modified example, the ball may win a prize in the special electric actuating port 643 while the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are being executed. In this case, both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are interrupted. Then, after the game per character is completed, the interrupted first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be restarted. Then, when the second special symbol change after resumption is a small hit winning, when the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the execution of the first special symbol change is interrupted or the execution is interrupted. , It is configured to be discarded.

In this way, in this modified example in which the first special symbol fluctuation (lottery), the second special symbol fluctuation (lottery), the ball winning to the special electric operation port 643, and three types of games can be executed at the same time, the time is shortened. Among them, the first special symbol variation, in which a fluctuation time longer than the second special symbol variation is likely to be selected, can be interrupted at a plurality of triggers. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is unexpected with respect to the timing at which the first special symbol variation is interrupted and the period during which the first special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state.

Further, in this modification, the ball that has won a prize in the general electric winning device 640 is configured to be able to win a prize in the special electric operating port 643 or the second ball winning port 1645, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play the game aiming at the second ball entry port 1645 or the special electric operation port 643. Specifically, the special electric operation is performed in the general electric winning device 640. A mouth 643 may be provided, and a second ball entrance 1645 may be provided in the right side region (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting a game method.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. The fifth embodiment provides various command setting methods for outputting the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 side with respect to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the voice lamp control device 113 is different in that a part of the control process to be executed when various commands output from the main control device 110 are received is changed, and the other points are the same. be. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the effect mode of the effect (V rush) according to the fluctuation of the special symbol in the time-saving state (low-probability state of the special symbol, high-probability state of the normal symbol) is set to the remaining period (time reduction) of the time-saving state. The voice lamp control device is based on the information (state command) output from the main control device 110 when the time saving state is set in order to make a variable setting according to the remaining period of the special symbol change executed during the state. The period until the end of the time saving state on the 113 side, that is, the number of times of time saving (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) set as the end condition of the time saving state is stored, and the information (variation pattern command) indicating the start of fluctuation of the special symbol is stored. By executing a process of updating the number of time reductions when the command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the remaining period of the time reduction state.

With this configuration, the timing for updating the number of time reductions (at the start of the special symbol fluctuation) and the timing for determining whether the time reduction condition is satisfied (at the time when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped) are different from each other in the first embodiment. In the special symbol lottery, such as a state command set when the game state is changed and a variation pattern command set when the variation of the special symbol is started without setting a dedicated command on the main control device 110 side. The remaining period of the time saving state can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side by using only the command indicating the content of the game using, and the effect can be set according to the passage of the period in the time saving state. It was a thing.

However, in the control content used in the first embodiment described above, the update status of the game state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 that does not have the backup function. Therefore, for example, if the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (a power failure occurs) during the period in which the time saving state is set, and then the power supply is restarted, the voice lamp control device is used. There was a problem that various information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the 113 side was cleared (initialized), and the voice lamp control device 113 could not determine the update status of the game state in the time saving state. ..

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the main controller 110 executes the process of starting the special symbol variation (process of setting the variation pattern command), the command indicating the update result of the time reduction number (time reduction command). ) Can be set, and when executing the process to stop the special symbol fluctuation during execution (process to set the confirmation command), set the command (time saving continuation command) to indicate the end determination result of the time saving state. It is configured as follows.

Then, the variation pattern command and the time saving frequency command are configured to be output at the same timing, and the confirmation command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the time saving number command is also received, and the current time saving situation can be determined based on the determination result, and further confirmed. When a command is received, it is determined whether or not a time saving continuation command is also received, and the current time saving situation can be determined based on the determination result.

With this configuration, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the status of the time saving state by the combination of the commands set by the main control device 110 and received by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if a power failure occurs during the display of fluctuations in the symbol, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the status of the time saving state based on the command output from the main control device 110.

In addition, since it is configured to determine the status of the time saving state by the combination of commands received at the same timing, it is more than the case where individual commands are set to indicate the status of the time saving state on the main control device 110 side. Also, the types of commands set by the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of the control processing in the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control processing content of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, the control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, which is different from the above-described first embodiment, will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the special symbol change start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) is performed instead of the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) with respect to the above-described first embodiment. The special symbol variation stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) is replaced with the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) instead of the process (see S208 in FIG. 45), and the normal symbol variation process 5 (see S136 in FIG. 141) is replaced. The difference is that (see) is provided, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the number of time saving times (value of the time saving counter 203h) is set when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. ) Is executed (see S205 in FIG. 139), and a process for determining whether the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (FIG. 45). S208) was configured to be executed.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, a state command output from the main control device 110 (a state command set in the process of S1916 in FIG. 56) is used to manage the state of the time saving state on the voice lamp control device 113 side. ) And the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command set in S506 of FIG. 43), and the remaining period of the time saving state can be discriminated.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, at the start of the change of the special symbol or the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in addition to the command indicating the start and stop of the special symbol change, the situation of the time saving state (remaining time reduction number of times). When various commands for indicating (etc.) are set and the information for managing the status of the time saving state stored on the voice lamp control device 113 side is deleted (voice lamp control device due to a power failure or the like). Even if the information stored in the RAM 223 of the 113 is erased), the time saving state on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110 side (remaining time saving number of times). It is configured so that it is possible to grasp.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235) will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235). In this special symbol change start process 5 (S235), a process for updating the time saving state at the start of the special symbol change with respect to the special symbol change start process (see S205 of FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. Are different, otherwise they are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the above-described first embodiment, information for indicating the processing content (update result) of the processing for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 is output to the voice lamp control device 113. Since there is no need to do this, processing for temporarily storing whether or not the special symbol change this time is the final change in the time saving state (memorizing until the special symbol change executed this time is stopped and displayed) (time saving). The process of updating the value of the counter 203h and the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j) were executed.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of time reductions (remaining time reduction number) of the special symbol is set so that the command can be output to the voice lamp control device 113.

The processing content of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 139. First, it is the same as the special symbol variation start process (see S205 of FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. The processing of S301 to S308 is executed. Then, in the processing of S308, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, the current state is in the time saving state (S308: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371). ), It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S372).

When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) in the processing of S372, the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction, that is, the time saving number command indicating the remaining time saving number is set (S373). , End this process. The time reduction command set in the process of S373 is the main control at the same timing as the special symbol variation pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43). It is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the device 110.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, a time saving number command is also used in addition to the case where the fluctuation pattern command (special figure fluctuation pattern command) is received during the time saving state. It is configured to determine whether or not it has been received, and to determine the number of time reductions (remaining time reductions) corresponding to the current special symbol variation based on the determination result.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S372 in FIG. 139, only when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating (after subtraction) is 1 or more (S372: No), the time saving number command is issued. Since it is configured to be set, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time reduction state and the time reduction number of times command is not received. Can be determined to be the final variation of the special symbol in the time-saving state.

Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of S372, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after the update is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, when the special symbol change executed this time is the final change in the time saving state, it is described above. Similar to the first embodiment, the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and this process is terminated.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more), even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the time saving end flag is flagged. While 203j is set to ON, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol (S308: Yes), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is always executed. It is possible to standardize the control processing.

Further, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the time saving counter 203h value after subtraction (after updating) is larger than 0 (1 or more), the time saving number command is set, and after subtraction (after updating). When the time saving counter 203h value is 0, the time saving number command is not set. In addition, the time saving command is set in the same process (special symbol variation start process) as the process for setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43). It is configured so that it is output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing in the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110. ..

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command in the state where the time saving state is set, it also executes the determination of whether or not the time saving number of times command is received. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state. In addition, when the time reduction command is also received, it is possible to determine the remaining period (remaining time reduction) of the time reduction state that is updated by executing the special symbol change this time.

Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after the update becomes 0, that is, when the special symbol change executed this time is the final change in the time saving state, the time saving number command is not set. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the state where the time saving state is set, and when the time saving number of times command is not received at the same time, it is determined that it is the final fluctuation of the time saving state. , The production mode corresponding to the final fluctuation in the time saving state will be set. In this way, when the final variation of the special symbol (time reduction final variation) in the time reduction state is executed, the time reduction command is not set as the time reduction command, instead of setting the time reduction command indicating 0 remaining time reduction. When the time saving number of times command set by the main controller 110 cannot be received, for example, when the command cannot be received normally due to noise or the like, the time saving final fluctuation occurs. Will be executed.

Therefore, it is not necessary to use the dedicated effect data when the command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 cannot be normally received, and the number of remaining time reductions actually set is less than the set number of remaining hours. Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to 0 times of the remaining time reduction, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). Only conditions are provided, but the conditions are not limited to this. For example, in addition to the end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the end condition that is established based on the lottery result of the special symbol (specified by the special symbol lottery). The lottery result (for example, small hit) may be provided with a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) as an end condition that is satisfied when the player wins.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of end conditions for terminating the time saving state, which of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied depends on the game content of the player. It is necessary to determine the update status until the end condition is satisfied with respect to the end condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the final variation of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, no matter which of the multiple time-saving end conditions that can be satisfied is satisfied, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily determine that the special symbol variation this time is the final variation in the time-saving state. Can be done.

Next, the contents of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S238) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S238) differs from the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above in the update content of the time saving state when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation stop process 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same processes of S801 and S802 as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above are executed, and the process of S802 is executed. When it is determined in the process that the time saving end flag 203j is not on (S802: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S871), and from 0. If it is determined that the special symbol variation displayed stopped this time is not the time saving final variation (S871: Yes), a time saving continuation command indicating that the time saving state continues is set (S872), and the above-mentioned is performed. The same processing of S809 and S810 as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S871, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (S871: No), that is, when the current gaming state is the normal state, the processing of S872 is skipped and S809 Move to the processing of. Further, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation displayed stopped this time is the time saving final variation (S802: Yes). The same processing of S804 and S805 as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and then the processing of S809 and S810 is executed to end this processing.

If it is determined in the process of S801 that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processes of S806 to S810 are executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol confirmation command is set in the special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for displaying (confirmed display) the special symbol fluctuation. At the same time, it is configured to set the time saving continuation command. Then, the special symbol confirmation command set in the special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) and the time saving continuation command are external outputs executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110. It is output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing in the process (see S1801 in FIG. 55). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure confirmation command in the state where the time saving state is set, it determines whether or not the time saving continuation command is also received, and based on the determination result, the stop display is displayed this time. It is necessary to grasp whether the special symbol variation is the final variation in the time saving state (time saving final variation) and set the effect mode.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command at the same timing in the state where the time saving state is set, it indicates that the time saving state continues. When only the special figure confirmation command is received, the effect mode for indicating the end of the time saving state is set. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the current status of the time saving state by combining a plurality of commands output from the main control device 110 at the same timing, whereby the main control device 110 It is possible to reduce the types of commands set by the main controller 110 as compared with the case where individual commands are set to indicate the situation of the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol confirmation command and the time saving continuation command are set in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140), but the main control device 110 is the main. It suffices if each command is output at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the process (FIG. 55), and the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). The special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command may be configured to be set within an interval of 4 milliseconds when the external output processing (S1801) is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 is executed, after the previous external output process is executed. Various commands set in the interval (4 milliseconds) are configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 at once (to be output as serial data), but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. When the special figure confirmation command is set, the output of the special figure confirmation command may be made to wait until the external output process (see S1801) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). With this configuration, it is possible to output the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command to the voice lamp control device 113 at the same timing without setting them in the same process.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S136) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (S136). The normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) determines whether the current gaming state is a high probability state of the normal symbol with respect to the normal symbol variation process (see S106 of FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing for is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, a state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (a state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and a state in which the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON are normal symbols. It is configured to be managed as information indicating a high probability state, and only a state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (a state in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) indicates a high probability state of a normal symbol. It is different from the first embodiment managed as information.

That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol variation start processing 5 (FIG. In S235) of 139, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted to 0 by simplifying the update process of the time saving counter 203h by configuring so that the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted to 0. However, the difference is that the time saving end flag 203j is set to be on in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. ..

Therefore, when the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the same processes in S1101 to S1108 as in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0) (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is set to on, that is, the time saving final of the special symbol. If it is determined whether or not it is fluctuating (S1171), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1171: Yes), it is in a high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the normal symbol variation of the first embodiment described above is described. The same process of S1109 as the process (see S106 of FIG. 48) is executed, then the processes of S1111 to S1114 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1171 when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), since the present is a low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the first execution described above is performed. The same processing of S111 to S1114 as that of the normal symbol variation processing of the form (see S106 of FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S1102: Yes), S1115-S1118 is the same as the normal symbol change process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 of FIG. 48). When the processing is executed and it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), the scenario operation per time saving is set (S1120). , The opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set (S1121), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0) (S1118: No), then it is determined whether the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S1118: No). S1172), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S1172: Yes), since the normal symbol is currently in the high probability state, the normal symbol variation processing of the first embodiment described above (see S106 of FIG. 48). ), The same processes of S1120 and S1121 are executed, and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1172, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), since the present is a low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol of the first embodiment described above is described. The same processing of S1119 and S1121 as the variation processing (see S106 of FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result of the normal symbol (the length of the dynamic display period), Alternatively, the content of the game per normal symbol (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) that is executed when the player wins the lottery of the normal symbol (the common symbol lottery) is set differently according to the probability state of the normal symbol. In order to determine the probability state of the normal symbol, it is configured to refer to the setting status of the time saving end flag 203j in addition to the value of the time saving counter 203h. With this configuration, the probability state of a normal symbol can be appropriately determined.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the control executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. In relation to the processing, the special figure variation start process 5 (see S4254 in FIG. 142) is replaced with the stop-related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65) instead of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62). Process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) is different in that it is executed, and is otherwise the same. A detailed description of the same processing content will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the types of commands output from the main control device 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and the time saving state is based on various commands output from the main control device 110. The situation inside (the number of times the remaining time is shortened) can be discriminated on the voice lamp control device 113 side. With this configuration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the time saving state, and the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased. Even in such a case, after the power supply is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate production mode according to the actual situation of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times).

First, the contents of the special figure variation start processing 5 (S4254) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure variation start process 5 (S4254). The special figure variation start process 5 (S4254) is a process executed when a special figure variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is a special feature of the first embodiment described above. Figure 6 The variation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) is different in that the processing content in the time saving state is changed, and is the same except for that. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure variation start process 5 (S4254) is executed, the same process of S4301 to S4305 as the special figure variation start process of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62) is executed, and this process is completed. do. In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, that is, when the special figure fluctuation pattern command is received while the time saving state is set (S4304: Yes), it is received this time. It is determined whether or not the time saving command is included in the executed command (S4351).

In the present embodiment, voice lamp control is performed using serial data capable of storing a plurality of commands in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the main control device 110. It is configured to output a command to the device 113. Therefore, when the special symbol variation pattern command and the time saving number command are set in the same process in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main control device 110, , At least the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the time saving number command are stored in the same serial data and output to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the processing of S4351, it is determined whether the command received this time includes a time reduction command, that is, whether the time reduction command is also included in the serial data in which the special figure fluctuation pattern command is stored (S4351), and the time reduction is performed. When it is determined that the count command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set, and the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern command received this time is the final change in the time saving state. Since this is not the case (final variation in time reduction), a display command for indicating that the time is in the shortened state is set (S4306), and the special figure variation start processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62). ), The same processes of S4306 to S4308 are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4351 that the received command does not have a time reduction command (S4351: No), the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command this time is the time reduction final variation, so the time reduction. After setting the display command indicating the final variation (S4352) and shifting to the process of S4307 described above, the process of S4308 is executed and the main process is terminated.

With this configuration, when the special figure fluctuation pattern command is received during the time saving state, the type of the command received at the same time as the received special figure fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the situation of the time saving state (remaining time saving). The number of times) can be easily determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, the contents of the stop-related process 5 (S4265) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related process 5 (S4265). In the stop-related process 5 (S4265), the process content executed when the special figure confirmation command is received is changed with respect to the stop-related process (see S4215 of FIG. 65) of the first embodiment described above. It's different. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop-related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation command has been received (S4601), and when it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), The same process of S4602 to S4611 as the stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4215 of FIG. 65) is executed to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has been received (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving continuation command has been received (S4631), and it is determined that the time saving continuation command has been received. If this is done (S4631: Yes), a display command for stopping fluctuations indicating continuation of time reduction is set (S4632), and the process proceeds to S4602.

In the process of S4631, if it is determined that the time saving continuation command has not been received, then it is determined whether or not the time saving end command has been received (S4633), and if it is determined that the time saving end command has been received (S4633: yes). ), Set a display command for fluctuating stop indicating the end of the time saving state.

In this way, when the special figure confirmation command is received, the time saving continuation command or the time saving end command can be received at the same time. Therefore, by executing the stop-related process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143). , The display mode (effect mode) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is as follows: when the time saving continuation command is received, when the time saving end command is received, or when none of the commands is received. It can be changed and set. Therefore, a process for setting a display mode for fluctuating stop to be executed when a special figure confirmation command is received, a process for setting a display mode for indicating the status of the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times), and a process for setting the display mode. Can be executed within the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. In the first embodiment described above, a game per character is aimed at by a game per game that is executed when a player wins a lottery of a normal symbol (in the normal electric winning device 640 opened by the game per game). (Aiming to win a ball in the special electric operating port 643 provided), during the game per character (within the period when the V winning device 65 is opened), to the V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65. It was configured to allow the player to execute a game (special electric game) aiming at executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) by winning a ball.

Then, the time saving state in which the special electric game is executed is until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 or 15 times) (until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed), or reaches a predetermined number of times. It is configured to continue until a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (until the special symbol to show that the lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed), and the special symbol changes during the time saving state. As the time becomes longer, the period in which the time reduction state is set (time reduction period) can be lengthened, and the number of ordinary symbol lottery to be executed during the time reduction period can be increased.

Furthermore, when the game per character is executed when the ball wins a prize in the special electric operation port 643 during the game per normal symbol, the special symbol fluctuation during execution is interrupted (the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted). The process for performing is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol variation (process for subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation) is performed after the end of the character-per-character game or the jackpot game (the process for subtracting the fluctuation time). It is configured to restart after the end of the V jackpot game), that is, when a new special symbol variation is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the length of the execution period (time reduction period) of the special electric game changes depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation and the interruption period due to the game per character. It was possible to have the players inside play the game enthusiastically so that they could select as long a variation time as possible as a special symbol variation, and also execute a large number of games per character. ..

However, during the special electric game, for example, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol or during the game per normal figure, the ball cannot be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 (it is difficult to win) (electric accessory 640a). (Closed period) is a period in which the game per accessory cannot be executed and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted. Therefore, it is possible to win a ball in the electric accessory 640a. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a during the winning game, that is, the period during which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, but the disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period during which the winning game can be executed. It becomes.

In addition, the game per winning combination in which the special symbol change is interrupted is an end condition (winning end condition) or a winning combination that is established when the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (3 pieces). It is configured to end when any of the end conditions (time end conditions) that are satisfied when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the hit game is started. Therefore, the game per character is terminated when any of the end conditions is satisfied, depending on the content of the game (whether or not the ball is fired) by the player during the game per character.

That is, in the first embodiment described above, which end condition is satisfied for the game per character being executed in consideration of the fluctuation state of the normal symbol during the special electric game and the game situation of the game per normal figure. It had playability to be selected. With this configuration, depending on the skill of the player, the disadvantageous period during the special electric game described above (the fluctuation period of the normal symbol, the closing period of the electric accessory 640a of the game per normal figure) and the execution period of the game per accessory The length of the period in which and the overlap can be changed, and the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, since a plurality of end conditions are set, for example, even though the game is played to satisfy the winning end conditions, the V winning device 65 is reached. The ball that was fired in advance moved to the V winning device 65 even though the time end condition was satisfied without winning the ball as expected, or the game was played to satisfy the time end condition. There is a problem that a prize is won and the prize ending condition is satisfied, and the player cannot satisfy the desired ending condition.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition of the game per character. That is, when the winning end condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if the period during which the time ending condition can be satisfied elapses, and when the time ending condition is selected, the V winning device 65 is reached. Even if the number of winnings reaches the number at which the winning end condition can be satisfied, the winning end condition is not satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to end the game per accessory when the end condition desired by the player is satisfied, so that the player can be made to play the game during the special electric game more positively. ..

In the sixth embodiment, when the winning end condition is selected, the game per character is not completed based on the elapsed time during the game per character, and when the time end condition is selected, the time end condition is selected. It is configured so that the game per character does not end based on the number of balls won in the V winning device 65 during the game per character, but the game is not limited to this, and for example, the winning end condition is selected. If so, the forced time end condition or the time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as the normal time end condition elapses. When is selected, the compulsory winning end condition that is established when the number of winnings (for example, 10) is larger than the number of winnings (for example, 3) set as the normal winning end condition is set. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game per character from being executed for a long time.

First, among the configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, a characteristic configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the operating means (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, first selection button 22zb, second The difference is that the 2 selection button 22zc) is newly provided, and the other points are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side of the return button 43 provided in the ball lending operation unit 40 (on the right side in the front view of FIG. 144). A first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (on the right side in the front view of FIG. 144). When the player presses the changeover button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter, also referred to as the end condition switching button group 22z), a detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing and the detection result. Is configured to be output to the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 21) of the main control device 110.

Specifically, when the changeover button 22za is pressed, the changeover button detection switch (not shown) detects the changeover button 22za, and when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, the first selection button 22za is pressed. When the 1-selection button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the 1st selection button 22zb and the 2nd selection button 22zc is pressed, the 2nd selection button detection switch (not shown) is the second. It is configured to detect the pressing of the 2 selection button 22zc, and each detection switch is configured to output the detection result to the main control device 110.

That is, the changeover button detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG. 21.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the above-mentioned end condition switching button group 22z is provided at a distance of about 10 cm from the frame button 22. With this configuration, in order to make the player interested in various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an operation effect using the frame button 22 is executed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the end condition switching button group 22z when the person is made to operate the frame button 22.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operating means for directing (frame button 22), an operating means that affects the game performance (end condition switching button group 22z), and the pachinko machine 10. Is provided so that the player can arbitrarily select the content in terms of both production and game performance. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically encourage the player to participate in the game.

<Regarding the content of the production in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, the characteristic effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment described above, a selection effect for causing the player to operate the end condition switching button group and a switching for showing the player's operation result for the end condition switching button group. The production is configured to be feasible.

First, with reference to FIG. 145 (a), the display contents of the ending screen in the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 145 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the jackpot ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is a display mode for encouraging the player to operate the switching button 22za with respect to the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 12 (a)) in the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it is added, and is the same otherwise. The same display contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145 (a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "V rush starts after the big hit ends !!" are displayed, and the time saving state is set after the big hit game ends. It is shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner to shift to the V rush mode indicating that the game is to be performed. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment is displayed that the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating the period for which the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot game continues is "40 seconds" and "V rush period 40 seconds get". Will be done. When the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the display screen of FIG. 12 (a) of the first embodiment described above is displayed as the hold storage status of the special symbol (see FIG. 145 (c)). Since it is the same as the hold storage status of the special symbol at the time of the operation (see FIG. 12C), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, a display area HR20 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (lower left side in the front view of FIG. 145), and as a display mode for prompting the operation of the switching button 22za, "select end condition with button PUSH". , And an icon imitating the switching button 22za is displayed.

In the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, so that the end condition of the game per character can be selected. .. That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the end condition of the bonus game can be selected, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game ends, the bonus game is hit. It is configured so that the end condition of the game cannot be switched.

With this configuration, the game status during the V rush, that is, the fluctuation status of the special symbol and the fluctuation status of the normal symbol, the end condition of the game per character is frequently switched, and the player is overloaded. It is possible to suppress the provision of a favorable gaming situation. Further, in the jackpot game, the end condition of the game per character can be selected at the timing when the game in which the variable winning device 650 wins the ball is completed and before the special electric game is executed. , The game of firing a ball and the act of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), the end condition of the game per character can be selected while the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is notified. Therefore, the player can be made to select the end condition of the game per character while grasping the remaining time short period mode 801 displayed on the jackpot ending screen. Specifically, when the display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time saving period mode 801, the winning end condition is set as the ending condition of the game per character. Aiming at a special electric game in which the period for interrupting the special symbol fluctuation is efficiently set by selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the game per character, the period of the time saving state is long as the display mode of the remaining time saving period mode 801. When a display mode indicating (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, a unit is obtained by selecting a time end condition and increasing the number of balls to be awarded to the V winning device 65 in one game per winning combination. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) per hour increases.

In the sixth embodiment, the player can select the end condition of the game per character during the period when the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The end condition of the game per character may be selectable at any timing during the jackpot game.

In addition, even when the standby screen (demo screen) that is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time saving state is displayed, the end condition of the game per character can be selected. Alternatively, the end condition of the game per character may be selectable during the period during which the game per character is being executed. Even in such a case, since the end condition of the game per character can be selected at the timing when the remaining time (time reduction period) in the time saving state is not subtracted, the character can be given a time margin to the player. You can select the end condition of the winning game.

On the other hand, unlike the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game per character may be selectable only during the period in which the remaining time (time reduction period) in the time reduction state is subtracted. With this configuration, during the special electric game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) in the time saving state is subtracted, the operation of concentrating only on the special electric game or selecting the end condition of the game per character. It is possible to let the player select whether to execute the game, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game content, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the player presses the switching button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the end condition of the game per accessory will be described. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents displayed as the end condition selection screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the changeover button detection switch (not shown) detects that the changeover button 22za is pressed, the detection result is output to the main control device 110. The main controller 110 sets a command (switching command) indicating that the switching button 22za is pressed, and the set command (switching command) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) as an external output process (see FIG. 55). (See S1801 in FIG. 55), the output is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) based on the reception of the switching command.

The display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the game per character will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 145 (b). Please select the end condition "comment is displayed. By visually recognizing this comment, the player can easily grasp that the screen currently displayed is a screen for selecting the end condition of the game per accessory.

In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions that can be selected by the player are formed in sections, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end condition, time end condition). (Contents for satisfying the end condition) is displayed. Specifically, the display area HR21 is displayed in association with the winning end condition as the end condition of the game per character, and the display area HR22 is displayed in association with the time end condition as the end condition of the game per character. ..

In the display area HR21, a comment "It will end when three balls enter the V attacker" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the winning end condition, and a "winning end" for indicating the target end condition is displayed. It is displayed in the display area HR21a. In addition, as a guidance display mode 871 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the winning end condition, an icon (a circle with a number 1) imitating the first selection button 22zb is provided. It is displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area HR22, a comment "It will end in 1.6 seconds from the start of hitting the accessory" is displayed as a requirement for satisfying the time end condition, and " "End of time" is displayed in the display area HR22a. Further, as a guidance display mode 872 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the time end condition, an icon (circle with a number 2) imitating the second selection button 22zc is provided. It is displayed.

Further, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the characters "time" for indicating the type of the end condition currently set as the end condition of the game per character are displayed. Has been done. That is, FIG. 145 (b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the game per accessory. When the winning end condition is set as the ending condition of the game per character, the character "winning" is set in the display area HR23. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Select with a button" and a comment "Select with a button" as a guidance display mode for guiding the operation to be performed by the player in order to select the end condition of the game per character and the first. An icon indicating that the 1-selection button 22zb or the 2nd selection button 22zc is operated (pressed) is displayed.

By displaying such a selection screen, it is possible for the player to easily select the game while grasping the content of the end condition of the game per character. In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b), when the selection screen in which the end condition of the game per character can be selected is displayed, the period of the time saving state (time saving period) set after the end of the big hit game. It is configured so that the information suggesting the length of the above (for example, the remaining time shortening period mode 801 shown in FIG. 145 (a)) is not displayed, but the selection screen is displayed without limitation. It may be configured so that the remaining time short-term mode 801 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily select the end condition of the game per accessory while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state set immediately after.

When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed, the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed). The detection switch detects it, and the detection result is output to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. Then, in the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a process based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb (a process for storing the selected end condition) is executed, and the first is performed. A command (operation command) for indicating that the selection button 22zb has been effectively operated is set.

When an operation command is set in the control process of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device is executed in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). The operation command is output to 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets the display mode after selecting the end condition based on the information included in the received operation command (information indicating the type of the operated selection button). NS. Here, an example of the display screen displayed after the end condition is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed after selecting the winning end condition as the end condition of the game per accessory.

When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning end condition is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146 (a). A display area corresponding to the selected end condition (winning end condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the character "OK" indicating that the selection of the end condition is completed is displayed above the main display area Dm. Will be done. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The winning will end from the next character hit" is displayed and displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the timing when the selection result of this time is reflected. In the area HR23, the characters "winning" indicating that the currently set end condition is the winning end condition are displayed.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the game per character can be selected a plurality of times as long as the end condition of the game per character can be selected. It is configured so that the end condition selected when the period in which the end condition of the hit game can be selected elapses is set as the end condition of the hit game. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly selects the end condition, the end condition can be selected again as long as the period during which the end condition of the game per character can be selected elapses.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state where the end condition of the game per accessory can be selected, it means that the selection button is operated. And, the operation command indicating the type of the operated selection button and the operation command are set, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, when the period in which the end condition of the game per character can be selected ends, the final It is configured to set a command (end condition command) indicating the end condition of the game per winning combination selected.

That is, since the player may select the end condition a plurality of times during the period in which the end condition of the game per character can be selected, only the fact that each selection button is operated is output to the voice lamp control device 113. , The display mode corresponding to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and only the finally selected end condition is output to the voice lamp control device 113. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary commands from being output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed and the time saving state is set, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is marked with a display mode indicating that the V rush has started. Will be done. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents displayed during the V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146 (b) is the same as the situation (see FIG. 12 (c)) in which the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (b) of the first embodiment described above is displayed (see FIG. 12 (c)). In the display screen displayed in (see 146 (c)), a display area HR23 for indicating the currently set end condition of the per-feature game is formed with respect to the above-described first embodiment. They differ in that they are the same otherwise. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b), the characters "winning" indicating that the winning end condition is set as the ending condition of the game per character are displayed on the display screen during the V rush. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the end condition of the game per character executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown, the display area HR23 is configured to be always displayed during the V rush period. For example, the player can set the end condition of the game per character even during the game per character. Is configured so that it can be easily grasped. In addition, when displaying the end condition during the game per character in this way, the element for establishing the end condition (if the winning end condition is set, the V attacker (V winning device 65)) The update status of the number of winning balls and the elapsed time from the start of the game per character if the time end condition is set) and the value that the end condition is satisfied are displayed on the display surface. It is good to configure in. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game per character is abruptly ended and the player is confused.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment adds the end condition storage area 203ea, the switchable flag 203eb, and the switching flag 203ec to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29). It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The end condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the game per winning combination selected by the player, and in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the selection button (first selection button 22zb, When it is determined that the second selection button 22zc) has been operated, the end condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, the end condition stored when the jackpot game ends is read, and is referred to when setting the end condition command corresponding to the read end condition. In addition, the game is read when the game per character is executed, and the game per character is executed based on the read end condition.

In the sixth embodiment, the end condition storage area 203ea is configured to store information indicating the winning end condition as initial data. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is being operated in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54) (S1704: Yes in FIG. 54), S1714 As part of the process, information for indicating the winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea.

In this way, by configuring so that at least one of the end conditions of the game per character is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea as the initial data, the end condition of the game per character can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 having the above, it is possible to surely prevent a situation in which the end condition of the game per accessory is not set. In the present embodiment, as the initial data of the end condition of the end of the game per character, the information corresponding to the winning end condition is stored (stored) in the end condition storage area 203ea. The present invention is not limited to, and for example, at least the winning end condition and the time end condition may be set as the initial data of the end condition of the game per character.

The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that the end condition of the game per character can be selected, and is set to be on when starting the ending period of the jackpot game, and the ending period of the jackpot game. Is set to off when is finished.

In the sixth embodiment, if the switching button 22za is operated while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the operation for the switching button 22za is invalidated. With this configuration, even if the player mistakenly operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc when the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the processing based on the operation can be performed. It can be suppressed that it is executed.

In the switching flag 203ec, the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during the period in which the end condition of the game per character can be selected (the period in which the switchable flag 20eb is set to be on), and the first selection button 22zb Alternatively, it is a flag for indicating that the end condition can be selected by operating the second selection button 22zc, and the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated. Set to on when the period during which the end condition can be selected is set with.

The switching flag 203ec is set when the switching button 22za is operated in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) with the switchable flag 203eb set to ON (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 151). That is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2203: Yes in FIG. 151), it is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 151).

Then, when it is determined whether the setting status of the switching flag 203ec is a period during which the operations for the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151). (S2202 in FIG. 151), and is set to off when the end condition is selected based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc (see S2206 in FIG. 151) (FIG. 151). (See S2209). If the player does not execute the selection operation while the switching flag 203ec is set to on, it is set to off at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, in the sixth embodiment, the end storage area 223ea is provided for the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30B) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment of the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it is added, and is the same otherwise. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected game per winning combination, and when an operation command is received in the end condition related processing (see S4272 in FIG. 156), the operation is performed. The corresponding end condition is stored based on the operation information included in the command (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb is operated or the second selection button 22zc is operated) (see S5706 and S5707 in FIG. 155). ). Then, when the end condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709: Yes in FIG. 155), the content of the received end condition command (type of set end condition) and the end storage area 223ea are displayed. The stored information (type of end condition stored in advance based on the operation command) is compared (S5710 in FIG. 155), and if the comparison result is different, the content of the end condition command is added. The corresponding termination condition is stored.

That is, the end storage area 223ea is based on the received operation command when the player receives an operation command indicating that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated. The end condition is stored, and the display mode of the switching effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. Then, when the end condition command for indicating the finally selected end condition is received, the end condition set on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command, the end condition actually set, and the end condition actually set, If the comparison results are not the same, the end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the command (end condition command) for indicating the finally selected end condition is set at the end of the jackpot game receives the end condition command. In the previous stage, it is possible to predict the end condition selected by the player based on the operation command and set the effect mode based on the prediction result, and it is possible to execute the effect without discomfort to the player. In the present embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is set as the end timing of the jackpot game, but the player is not limited to this, and for example, the player presses the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc). When an operation is performed, the end condition command may be set in addition to the operation command. In this configuration, the display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the received end condition command, that is, based on the actually set end condition. Can be done.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
The control process of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 153. In the sixth embodiment, the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149) is replaced with the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the special electric start port winning process (see FIG. 50) is performed. In that the special electric start opening winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is replaced with the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) and the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152) is executed instead of S108). Different, otherwise the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the timer interrupt process 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 6. In the timer interrupt process 6 as opposed to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) described above, the special electric start port winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is replaced with the special electric start port winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). ) Is executed and the switching process (see S171) is added, and the other processes (S101 to S107, S109 to S112) are the same as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) described above. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special electric start opening winning process 6 (S178) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric start opening winning process 6 (S178). In the special electric start opening winning process 6 (S178), the processing content to be executed when the execution condition of the game per character is satisfied is changed with respect to the above-mentioned special electric starting port winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). They differ in that they are the same otherwise. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric start opening winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the same processing of S1301 to S1307 as the special electric starting port winning process (see S108 of FIG. 50) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and then the processing of S1301 to S1307 is executed. The end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, the special electric operation command is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1302 that it is not hit by a normal figure (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the execution condition of the game per character is satisfied, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set. By setting, it is configured to change the end condition of the game per character. As a result, it is possible to end the game per character when the end condition selected by the player is satisfied, so that the player can select the size of the privilege given during the special electric game, and the game. You can motivate yourself. In addition, in this embodiment, every time the execution condition of the game per character is satisfied, the end condition of the game per character to be executed is set, but during the big hit game as in the present embodiment. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the end condition of the game per character can be selected, the execution condition of the game per character is the first when the jackpot game ends or after the jackpot game ends. When it is satisfied, the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the operation scenario per accessory corresponding to the end condition is set, and the setting is made until the next big hit game is executed. It may be configured to execute the game per character based on the action scenario per character.

With this configuration, the accessory corresponding to the end condition selected by the player without executing the process of reading the information from the end condition storage area 203ea each time the execution condition of the game per accessory is satisfied. You can perform a winning game.

Further, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the end condition of the game per character can be selected during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, the game per character A flag (end condition switching flag) indicating that the end condition has been switched is provided, and only when the end condition switching flag is set to on, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read and used. It is preferable to configure it so as to switch the end condition of the hit game. As a result, when a new game per character is executed under the same end conditions as the previous game per character, the process of reading the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea can be skipped. It is possible to simplify the control process when executing the game per character.

Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed by the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and a process based on the player's operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is executed.

When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, the ending of the jackpot game is now. If it is determined that it is not during the period (S2201: No), the operation to the end condition switching button group 22z is invalid, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON in the process of S2201, that is, when it is determined that the current end period of the jackpot game is in progress (S2201: Yes), then switching is in progress. It is determined whether the flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

In the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is not set to on, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed. If it is (S2202: No), it is determined whether there is an operation to the switching button 22za (S2203), and if it is determined that it is not operated (S2203: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), then the switching flag 203ec is set to on (S2204), the switching command is set (S2205), and this processing is performed. To finish.

Here, the discrimination process of S2203 will be described. In the present embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za, the switching button detection switch detects the pressed switching button 22za, and the detection result is sent to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. Is configured to be output. Then, in the determination process of S2203, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the above-mentioned changeover button detection switch.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za is already operated (display of FIG. 145 (b)). When the screen is displayed (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (S2206). In the discrimination process of S2206, when the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the pressed first selection button 22zb is detected by the detection switch for the first selection button, and the detection result is the main control device. Since it is output to the input / output port 205 of 110, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the detection switch for the first selection button. When the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the second selection button detection switch detects the pressed second selection button 22zc, and the detection result is the input / output port of the main control device 110. Since it is output to 205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the detection switch for the second selection button.

In the process of S2206, when it is determined that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (S2206: Yes), the information indicating that the selection button has been operated and the operation are performed. Set the operation command including the information indicating the type of the selected button (S2207), store the end condition selected by the processing of S2206 in the end condition storage area 203ea (S2208), and turn off the switching flag 203ec. Set (S2209) and end this process.

Further, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc is operated, that is, from the detection switch for the first selection button or the detection switch for the second selection button. If it is determined that the detection signal is not output (S2206: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), any of the selection buttons is selected at the timing when the operation to the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is effectively determined. When (1st selection button 22zb, 2nd selection button 22zc) is operated, information indicating the selected end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea, but a command indicating the selected end condition is set. It is configured to set an operation command including information indicating that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button. doing. Further, since the switching flag 203ec is set to off in the processing of S2209, it is possible to operate the end condition switching button group 22z and select the end condition again during the ending period of the jackpot game. ing.

That is, since the end condition is not fixed until the ending period of the jackpot game is completed, the command (end condition command) for indicating the selected end condition is not output to the voice lamp control device 113. ing. With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the end condition command, the information included in the received end condition command (end condition type) until the next jackpot game is executed. It is possible to set the effect according to. Therefore, the control process on the voice lamp control device 113 side is simplified as compared with the case where the end condition command is set every time the player operates the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc). be able to.

In addition, since the operation command indicating that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated while the switching flag 203ec is set to on can be set, it is a big hit. During the ending period of the game, it is possible to execute an effect based on the received operation command. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player who operates the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc).

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854). In the jackpot control process 6 (S1854), for the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56), the process executed at the start timing of the ending period and the end timing of the jackpot game are set. Is different from the processing executed in the above, and other than that, it is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1911 as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed, and the process of S1911 is completed. Later, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and this process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the ending period set after the last round game is completed in the jackpot game is set, the switchable flag 203eb is set to be turned on, so that the player operates the switch button 22za. Is configured to be effectively determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1912). When it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the same processes of S1913 to S1917 as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed, and then the end condition is executed. The setting process is executed (S1952), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1912 that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1912: No), the same process of S1918 as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed. This process ends.

Next, the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting process (S1952) is executed in the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and the selection of the end condition selection of the bonus game executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. It executes processing based on the result.

When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to off (S2301), then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to on (S2302), and then turned on. If it is determined that the settings have been made, that is, if the jackpot end timing is reached while the selection screen for selecting the end condition (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed (S2302: Yes), the switching flag 203ec Is set to off (S2303), the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (finally selected end condition type) is read (S2304), and the end condition is read based on the information read from the end condition storage area 203ea. Set the command (S2305) and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, when the switching button 22za is not operated on the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)), or the process ends. When the desired selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) are operated (pressed) on the condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S2304.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the end condition command is applied only to the end condition finally selected in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. Is configured to set. Further, the period during which the end condition of the game per character can be selected is configured to be only during the big hit game. With this configuration, the number of end condition commands output to the voice lamp control device 113 side in the wake of one big hit game can be made one, and the end condition included in the end condition command can be set to one. The termination condition corresponding to is applied at least until the next jackpot game is executed.

Therefore, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the effect based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next big hit game is executed. When the effect mode is changed accordingly, it is possible to prevent the process for changing the effect mode from becoming complicated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. The sixth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61), and other than that. It is the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 6 (S4172) will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 6 (S4172). This command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is a process for determining whether or not a command regarding the end condition of the game per accessory has been received with respect to the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61) in the first embodiment described above. , Is different from the process executed based on the result of the discrimination process in that, and is the same except for the addition. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes in S4201 to S4219 as in the command determination process (see S4102 in FIG. 61) of the first embodiment described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether or not the end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, the end condition-related commands include a switching command and an operation command set in the switching process of the main controller 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151) and an end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153). Corresponds to the end condition command to be set.

If it is determined that the end condition-related command has been received in the process of S4271 (S4271: Yes), then the end condition-related process is executed (S4272), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4271, if it is determined that the command related to the end condition has not been received (S4271: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4220), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the end condition-related processing (S4272) will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end condition related process (S4272). In this end condition-related process (S4272), when the player executes a selection operation for selecting the end condition of the game per character, various processes for setting the effect mode corresponding to the selection operation are executed. NS.

When the end condition-related process (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is in progress (S5701), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S5701: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. That is, in the present embodiment, since the end condition of the game per character can be selected only during the jackpot game, when the end condition related command is received other than during the jackpot game, it corresponds to the received command. It is configured so that the effect to be performed is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an unintended effect when an erroneous command is received due to noise or the like.

In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current jackpot game is in progress (S5701: Yes), then the switching command is received, that is, the player operates the switching button 22za during the jackpot ending period. It is determined whether (pressed) or not (S5702). If it is determined that the switching command has been received in the process of S5702 (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating the selection screen is set (S5703), and this process ends.

When the process of S5703 is executed, the ending screen of the jackpot (see FIG. 145 (a)) is switched to the selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) for selecting the end condition of the game per character. The display command is set. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other display commands. Is output. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S5703, it creates image data for displaying the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)), and creates a third symbol display device. The selection screen is displayed at 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is a switching button when it is effectively determined that the player has operated (pressed) the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc), that is, during the ending period of the jackpot. This command is set when the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated while 22za is operated and the end condition selection screen is displayed, and is operated by the player. This command contains information to indicate the type of select button.

When it is determined that the operation command has been received in the processing of S5704 (S5704: Yes), whether the operation command received this time is the operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, the information included in the operation command It is determined whether the information for indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated is included (S5705), and when it is determined that the first selection button 22zb is used (S5705: Yes), the first selection button 22zb is displayed. A display command indicating the end of winning (condition), which is the corresponding end condition, is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the process of S5706, the end condition determination screen (FIG. 146 (a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). See) is displayed. After that, the set end condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process ends.

In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time does not operate the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time operates the second selection button 22zc. Therefore, a display command indicating the end of time (condition) is set (S5707), and this process is terminated. When the display command is set in the process of S5707, the end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). Specifically, on the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146 (a), the display area HR22 (see FIG. 145 (b)) is enlarged and displayed in place of the display area HR21, and the display area HR22a is displayed as “time”. "End" is displayed, and the characters "time" are displayed in the display area HR23. After that, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process ends.

In the process of S5704, if it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S5704: No), then it is determined whether the end condition command has been received (S5709), and it is determined that the end condition command has not been received. If this is the case (S5709: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the end condition command received this time. , It is determined whether the same termination condition is shown (S5710).

In the process of S5710, when it is determined that the end conditions are the same, that is, when the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition. (S5710: Yes) ends this process as it is. If the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command do not indicate the same end condition (S5710: No), the end condition actually set and the end condition are determined. Since the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is different, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition indicated by the end condition command. A display command for switching to the display mode is set (S5711), and this process is terminated.

When the display command is set in the process of S5711, the display corresponding to the end condition indicated by the end condition command is displayed in the display area HR23 while displaying the comment "End condition switching in progress" in the center of the main display area Dm. The aspect is displayed.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select either the winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition of the game per character. That is, when the winning end condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if the period during which the time ending condition can be satisfied elapses, and when the time ending condition is selected, the V winning device 65 is reached. Even if the number of winnings reaches the number at which the winning end condition can be satisfied, the winning end condition is not satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to end the game per accessory when the end condition desired by the player is satisfied, so that the player can be made to play the game during the special electric game more positively. ..

In the sixth embodiment, when the winning end condition is selected, the game per character is not completed based on the elapsed time during the game per character, and when the time end condition is selected, the time end condition is selected. It is configured so that the game per character does not end based on the number of balls won in the V winning device 65 during the game per character, but the game is not limited to this, and for example, the winning end condition is selected. If so, the forced time end condition or the time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as the normal time end condition elapses. When is selected, the compulsory winning end condition that is established when the number of winnings (for example, 10) is larger than the number of winnings (for example, 3) set as the normal winning end condition is set. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game per character from being executed for a long time.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, so that the end condition of the game per character can be selected. ing. That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the end condition of the bonus game can be selected, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game ends, the bonus game is hit. It is configured so that the end condition of the game cannot be switched.

With this configuration, the game status during the V rush, that is, the fluctuation status of the special symbol and the fluctuation status of the normal symbol, the end condition of the game per character is frequently switched, and the player is overloaded. It is possible to suppress the provision of a favorable gaming situation. Further, in the jackpot game, the end condition of the game per character can be selected at the timing when the game in which the variable winning device 650 wins the ball is completed and before the special electric game is executed. , The game of firing a ball and the act of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, since the end condition of the game per character can be selected while the period of the time saving state (40 seconds) set after the end of the jackpot game is notified, the remaining displayed on the jackpot ending screen. It is possible to have the player select the end condition of the game per accessory while grasping the time-saving period mode 801. Specifically, when the display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time saving period mode 801, the winning end condition is set as the ending condition of the game per character. Aiming at a special electric game in which the period for interrupting the special symbol fluctuation is efficiently set by selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the game per character, the period of the time saving state is long as the display mode of the remaining time saving period mode 801. When a display mode indicating (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, a unit is obtained by selecting a time end condition and increasing the number of balls to be awarded to the V winning device 65 in one game per winning combination. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) per hour increases.

In the sixth embodiment, the player can select the end condition of the game per character during the period when the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The end condition of the game per character may be selectable at any timing during the jackpot game.

In addition, even when the standby screen (demo screen) that is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time saving state is displayed, the end condition of the game per character can be selected. Alternatively, the end condition of the game per character may be selectable during the period during which the game per character is being executed. Even in such a case, since the end condition of the game per character can be selected at the timing when the remaining time (time reduction period) in the time saving state is not subtracted, the character can be given a time margin to the player. You can select the end condition of the winning game.

On the other hand, unlike the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, the end condition of the game per character may be selectable only during the period in which the remaining time (time reduction period) in the time reduction state is subtracted. With this configuration, during the special electric game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) in the time saving state is subtracted, the operation of concentrating only on the special electric game or selecting the end condition of the game per character. It is possible to let the player select whether to execute the game, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game content, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 156. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time saving state is set, in all the games such as the winning game (game per character, small hit game, big hit game), on the game board 13. Of the game areas formed in the above, the game (left-handed game) in which the ball is launched so that the ball flows down the left side area (left side of the variable display unit 80) is executed.

As a result, since the game area in which the ball is launched to the player is not changed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, in each embodiment, as described above, since it is not necessary to change the game method during the game (for example, when the winning game is executed), the game per drawing is executed (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13). Even when (see a)) or when a game per character is executed (see FIG. 18 (a)), a guidance notification (for example, a comment display of "right-handed") for changing the game method is provided. It is configured to notify the player of a device (for example, a general electric winning device 640, a V winning device 65, etc.) that is not executed and is opened during the winning game to be executed in the display area HR3.

However, in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13A) in each of the above-described embodiments, there is simply an image display schematically showing a winning device (Public winning device 640) corresponding to the winning game to be executed. There is a problem that it is only displayed and is unnecessary for a player who understands the content of the game to be executed. Further, since the area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, when an unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13A), other display areas are displayed. There is a problem that the area for executing the effect display becomes narrow and the effect of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. On the other hand, if each display area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set for the purpose of widening the area for executing the other effect display and enhancing the effect, the display area of the display area HR3 becomes. There was a problem that the game became narrower and the player was provided with a game that was difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the second modification, the guidance display mode (display area HR3) indicating the winning device (Public winning device 640, V winning device 65, variable winning device 650) that the player should aim for during the winning game. It differs from each of the above-described embodiments in that the display mode of the displayed display image) can be variably set based on various conditions. The other contents are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, an example of a display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 on the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when the game per normal figure is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. 156 (b) is a schematic diagram showing FIG. 156. A schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when a player executes a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in (a) is displayed. It is a figure.

In the second modification, as in each of the first embodiments described above, when the game per game is executed, the ball can be awarded to the general electric winning device 640. Then, a special electric operating port 643 is provided inside the general electric winning device 640, and when a ball wins the special electric operating port 643, a game per accessory that enables the ball to win the V winning device 65. It is configured to be executed. Further, a V winning opening 165 is provided in the V winning device 65, and when the ball wins the V winning opening 165, the ball can win the variable winning device 650 (V jackpot). The game) is configured to be executed. In other words, it is configured so that a plurality of possible hit games can be executed based on one hit game (game per normal figure).

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, for example, when the ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 during the game per game, the game per character and the game per character are continuously executed. become. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed according to the type of the winning game being executed, the guidance display mode displayed in the display area HR3 at the timing of switching from the game per game to the game per character. Therefore, there is a problem that the timing at which the guidance display mode for guiding the winning device (V winning device 65) corresponding to the game per character is displayed to the player is delayed. In addition, considering that the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed is delayed, for example, when the hit game is switched from the game per game to the game per character, specifically, the game per game ends. It is conceivable to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) between the time when the ball wins the special electric operation port 643 and the game per character is executed, but the waiting period is set. As a result, there is a problem that the sense of speed of the special electric game aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) is lowered in a series of flows, and the interest of the game cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), the game is a per-figure game, and an image display imitating the general electric winning device 640 as a guidance display mode in the display area HR3 is displayed. In the executed state, the hit game that can be executed next, that is, the hit game that is executed when the ball is entered into the special electric actuating port 643 in the running normal game per game (game per character). ), The second guidance display mode for guiding the winning device (V winning device 65) that the player should aim at to the player in advance is displayed in the display area HR30.

With this configuration, when the game result of the game per game this time is a specific game result (game result of winning a ball to the special electric actuating port 643), the next winning game to be executed Since the winning device to be aimed at can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, by notifying in advance the game content of the next game per character that can be executed during the game per game, the role can be played during the period from the end of the game per game to the execution of the game per character. It is possible to eliminate the need to provide a waiting period for the player to grasp the game content (winning device to be aimed at) of the hit game (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) in a series of flows.

As described above, since the game per character is configured to be executed when the game result of the game per game being executed becomes a specific game result, the display area is displayed during the game per game. The comment "Aim" is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed on the HR30. In addition, in a state where the execution of the game per character is not confirmed, that is, in the state where the game is being played per normal figure and the ball has not entered the special electric actuating port 643, the display imitating the V winning device 65. Only a part of the image (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 of FIG. 18A) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily understand the first guide display mode showing the game content of the winning game being executed and the second guide display mode showing the game content of the winning game that can be executed next. Since it can be identified, for example, it is possible to prevent the game of aiming at the V winning device 65 from being executed during the game of hitting a normal figure.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a), as the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, an image display imitating a winning device that is opened in the corresponding hit game is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode may be set only by displaying characters, or may be set by using both characters and images.

Further, as an image display imitating the winning device displayed as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, the photographing data obtained by actually photographing each winning device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be used. .. As a result, an image actually taken of the winning device can be used as the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can easily understand the effect.

On the contrary, among the winning devices corresponding to the winning game, a simple display that displays only the minimum necessary display information may be used. In this case, since the simple display can be diverted to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the cost of developing the game machine can be reduced.

Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in the second modification, when the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, the hit game currently being executed (for example, It is configured to display the past history information mode for making it possible to notify the type of the winning game that triggered the execution of the jackpot game).

With this configuration, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it is possible to look back at the past game contents, so the jackpot game executed this time won a jackpot by a special symbol lottery. To inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the game is a jackpot game executed based on the above, or a jackpot game executed based on the ball winning a prize in the V winning opening 165 during the game per character. Can be done.

Further, in the second embodiment, the second guide display mode displayed during the game per game is changed according to the progress of the game per game, that is, in the game per game being executed, the special electric operating port 643. It is configured to be variably set according to the change in the degree of expectation that the ball will win. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of a game per normal figure from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (Public prize). A display command indicating (image data schematically showing the device 640) and a display command indicating the second image data (image data schematically showing the V winning device 65) to be displayed as the second guidance display mode. And are set and transmitted to the display control device 114.

The display control device 114 creates the image display data of the first guide display mode and the image display data of the second guide display mode shown in FIG. 156 (a) based on the reception of the above-mentioned display command. , Is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. That is, immediately after the game per game is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed. Then, when a winning command indicating that the winning sensor 640s has detected that the ball has won the winning device 640 during the game per game is output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 A command indicating the progress of the game per normal figure is output to the display control device 114.

As a result, as a second guide display mode, an image imitating the V winning device 65 is shown in FIG. Image display data exposed more than the display mode shown in a) (image display data displaying about 3/4 of the image imitating the V winning device 65) is created, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is created. Display on. Similarly, it indicates that a state in which it is confirmed that the ball wins the special electric operation port 643, for example, a state in which the ball has passed through the second movable valve 642 and flows down toward the special electric operation port 643 is detected. When the command is output from the main control device 110, the entire image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as the second guidance display mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode of the guidance display (second guidance display mode) for the next winning game that can be executed according to the progress of the winning game being executed, that is, that is, The higher the expectation that the ball wins in the special electric operating port 643 in the game per game being executed, the more clearly the guidance display for guiding the next game to be executed can be displayed.

The example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a) is merely an example, and during a period in which one hit game is being executed on a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of hit games in a series of flows. It suffices if it is possible to guide the game method of the winning game that can be executed next. When a configuration is used in which the probability that the winning game is executed is different, the first guide display mode or the first guide display mode displayed during the winning game is displayed according to the type of the playing game to be executed. 2 The guide display mode may be changed. Specifically, the display color and size of the first guide display mode are changed so that the higher the probability that the next hit game (for example, the game per character) is executed, the more conspicuous the player is. Then it is good. Further, the display mode of the second guide display mode displayed at the start of the game per game may be changed, and for example, the disadvantage that the probability that the next game (for example, the game per character) is executed is low. When the game per figure is executed, the display mode is such that about half of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guide display mode, and the game per character is easier to be executed than the game per figure. The horse running the game per figure may be configured to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guide display mode.

With this configuration, by visually recognizing the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, not only the game method of the winning game to be executed can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner, but also the running winning game can be played by the player. Since it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the winning game is advantageous to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode. Further, as described above, the display mode is configured to be changed stepwise according to the game result and the degree of expectation that are advantageous to the player, and the winning game to be executed (the game per normal figure) is determined according to the degree of advantage. It is executed while using common image data by configuring so that the stage of the display mode initially set is different, that is, by changing the timing of displaying the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high. Since it is possible to notify the player of the degree of advantage of the hit game, the capacity of the image data can be reduced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned contents, the example in which the game per hit figure and the game per character are executed as one example of the hit game is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of hit games are executed as a series of hit games. Of course, it may be used in all cases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (b), the display contents displayed when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during the game per normal drawing will be described. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed, the display area HR3 that guides the game method of the game per normal figure being executed is displayed. Enlarged display. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player who wants to know the game method of the winning game being executed. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is displayed smaller than the size shown in FIG. 156 (a), and when the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen and the frame is displayed. When the button 22 is operated four times, the screen returns to the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a).

In this way, by varying the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the game method of the hit game being executed based on the player's operation, the size desired by the player The guidance display mode can be displayed with. Further, when the guidance display mode is reduced or deleted, the display area of other effect displays (effect display such as reference numeral 811 and reference numeral 812) displayed on the display screen overlapping with the display timing of the guidance display mode. Is configured to be large. Further, it has an effect display that is executed only when the display area of the other effect display becomes large. As a result, the player can positively operate the frame button 22.

Not limited to this, for example, by enlarging the first guide display mode, a detailed display location of the first guide display mode, for example, the second movable valve 642 in the Fuden winning device 640 is imitated. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize that the display mode is a specific display mode different from the usual one, and this specific display mode is configured to be easily displayed when a hit game that is advantageous to the player is being executed. Then it is good. As a result, even the player who already understands the game method can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In the example described above, the guide display mode can be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22), but the guide display mode is based on the operation on the operation means. As long as it is variable, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a directional operation means (cross switch) capable of performing an operation indicating at least a left-right direction or an up-down direction as an operation means, the directional operation is performed. By operating the means, the area other than the winning device that is the target of the guidance display mode (near the area where the target winning device is arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10) is displayed. The guide display mode may be changed, or the guide display mode may be changed so as to rotate (horizontally rotate, vertically rotate) the winning device that is the target of the guide display mode. In this case, the display control device 114 stores in advance image data showing the entire game area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device, and stores the operation contents for the direction operating means. When a command corresponding to the indicated operation signal is received, image data corresponding to the command may be created and displayed. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the information that is advantageous to the player is displayed in the area that can be displayed only when the directional control means is operated. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

In the second modification described above, all the games can be executed by the left-handed game as in the first embodiment described above, but for example, a plurality of hit games are set as a series of games. In an executable gaming machine, when one hit game is executed by a left-handed game and the next hit game is executed by a right-handed game, the display area HR3 on which the first guide display mode is displayed is set to the third symbol. The display area HR30 formed on the left side of the display surface of the display device 81 and displaying the second guide display mode may be formed on the right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the game method to the player depending on the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in this case, the player may be able to operate the position where the display area HR3 and the display area HR30 are displayed by operating the above-mentioned direction operation means.

In the second modification described above, the case where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of games has been described, but even when a specific winning game is executed alone, the above-mentioned production can be achieved. Can be applied. For example, a special symbol variation period and a jackpot game are set as a series of games, and during the special symbol variation period, an image aiming at the special symbol entry port 64 is displayed as the first guide display mode, and the second guide display mode is displayed. It may be applied so as to display an image showing the variable winning device 650. In this case, the first guide display mode, which is less necessary to guide the player to the game method, may be deleted, and only the second guide display mode may be displayed. Further, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable winning devices 650 that are opened when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, which variable winning device 650 is finally displayed as the second guidance display mode. May be configured to be feasible to inspire the player.

Further, in the second modification described above, the guidance display mode when the game per normal figure is executed has been described. For example, a winning game is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, and the game per normal figure is executed. The period up to this time may be configured to display only the first guidance display mode. In addition, at that timing, the guidance display mode is switched and displayed in order so as to show the flow of the game when all the games of one example are successful, that is, the flow of the game per normal figure, the game per character, and the game per jackpot. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the variable content of the guidance display mode displayed during the winning game may be appropriately set, and for example, the guidance display mode may be changed by using blinking or discoloration in addition to enlargement, reduction, and rotation. , The guide display mode may be changed by making a character appear in the vicinity of the guide display mode. Further, the game method may be guided by combining the decorative structure imitating the actual winning device and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in each of the second modified examples described above, in order to guide the player to the game method during the game in an easy-to-understand manner, an image display using an image imitating the real thing is executed. Not limited to, for example, the position of the target winning device in the gaming area, the part of the winning device where the ball can enter, and the area where the ball can pass through the winning device. When an advantageous area and an unfavorable area are provided for the gaming machine, a display image simplified to the extent that the player can grasp at least one of the advantageous area is displayed. You may use it. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the minimum necessary information, and it is possible to use common image data for different pachinko machines 10, so that the development cost of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. The manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, or when the ball enters a specific area (V winning opening 165) during the game per character, the big hit game Is configured to be feasible, and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, as the end condition of the time reduction state, the time reduction end condition (time reduction number of times) that is established based on the execution of the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) without winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be set. Furthermore, if the game per character is executed during the dynamic display period (variable period of the special symbol) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result, the dynamic display period is subtracted. Is interrupted based on the end of the game per character, or the end of the jackpot game executed based on the ball passing (entering) a specific area during the game per character. It is configured to restart the process for subtracting the dynamic display period.

Further, in the first embodiment, a process of updating the number of special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (a process of subtracting the remaining time saving number) is executed based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, it is executed during the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the special symbol change, and after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is configured to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied. There is.

With this configuration, during the execution of the special symbol variation, the process for subtracting the dynamic display period based on the execution of the game per character is interrupted, and then the interrupted dynamic When the process for subtracting the display period is restarted, the time reduction number can be prevented from being updated when the dynamic display period after the restart has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, when the time reduction state is set after the jackpot game ends, the residual dynamic display period of the dynamic display during interruption is extremely short, and the time reduction number set after the jackpot game ends changes the special symbol after resumption. It is possible to suppress the immediate subtraction by the stop display of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing of executing the determination of whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the timing at which the dynamic display period of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the time-saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that satisfies the end condition of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed, so that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be kept as long as possible. Can be continued. Furthermore, since it is not determined whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the special symbol, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state during the dynamic display period of the special symbol. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

The above-mentioned contents may be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation). ) And are configured to be executable. Then, when the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small hit, big hit), when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol change (movement of the special symbol) being executed is performed. The process for subtracting the target display period) is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, if a big hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is discarded, and if a small hit is won, the other special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is interrupted. It is configured in.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the cumulative number of lottery times, which is the sum of the number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol, is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100). When the number of times the lottery of the first special symbol reaches a specific number of times (for example, four times), the time saving end condition is satisfied.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above performs a process of updating the number of special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (a process of subtracting the remaining time saving number) based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. The timing of executing the determination of whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing of executing the determination of whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied is the timing when the dynamic display period of the special symbol has elapsed, or one of them. As a result of the process of subtracting the remaining time reduction number executed at the time of the special symbol change, the other one during the execution of the special symbol variation (the special symbol variation in which the time reduction number after subtraction becomes 0) in which the time reduction end condition can be satisfied. This is the timing when the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied and before the special symbol lottery is executed.

With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (variation) more than the specified number of times is not executed during the time saving state, and it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to continue the gaming state (time saving state) as long as possible.

In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the process of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied and the time saving state are terminated based on the processing result (shift to the normal state). ) Processing is the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed), but other timings may be used. For example, the stop display of the special symbol has elapsed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). It may be the timing (timing that is confirmed and displayed), or if the special symbol fluctuation (final fluctuation in the time saving state) that satisfies the time saving end condition is won (small hit or big hit), the winning game May be executed, a predetermined timing during the hit game (for example, one second after the start of the hit game), and an end timing of the hit game. That is, the process of updating the number of special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (the process of subtracting the remaining time saving number) is executed, and after the special symbol fluctuation that is the execution target is stopped and displayed, the next special symbol is displayed. It may be a period until the lottery is executed.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of lottery of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) is provided. , Not limited to this, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result other than the big hit winning and a part of the lottery results in the case of losing and winning) is a predetermined number of times (for example). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the time-saving end condition is reached (5 times), the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of balls that have passed through the specific end area in the time-saving state reaches a specific number (for example, 10), The time saving end condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the time saving state is set exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) may be set so as to be configurable. Further, as in the fourth embodiment described above, if the gaming machine is configured so that a hit game (small hit game) different from the big hit game can be executed, the number of times the small hit game is executed reaches a specific number of times. The time saving end condition that is satisfied when this is done may be configured to be settable.

Further, when the end condition of the time saving state that is satisfied under various conditions is configured to be settable, it is preferable to configure so that different time saving end conditions are set according to the opportunity for setting the time saving state. Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the big hit game ends, the time saving end condition may be set based on the game state when the big hit is won or the big hit type set at the time of the big hit winning. The time saving end condition may be set based on the number of special symbol lottery executed before the jackpot is won. Further, the time saving end condition may be set based on the number of times that the gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set across the jackpot game. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the time saving end condition set.

In addition, among a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be set as the time saving end condition, the player may be configured to select the time saving end condition set for the current time saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player perform the game while letting the player predict which time-saving end condition can be selected to execute the most advantageous game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol change is interrupted during the time saving state, the time saving number is not subtracted when the restarted special symbol change is stopped and displayed. , Not limited to this, it may be configured so that the number of time reductions is subtracted when the restarted special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the time reduction is performed at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to execute the update (subtraction) process of the number of times. Even if such a configuration is used, the length of the short period after resumption will be different depending on the length of the residual fluctuation period of the special symbol change at the time of interruption. You can be interested in when the special symbol change was interrupted (whether the jackpot game was executed).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the process of updating (subtracting) the number of time reductions is configured to be executed during the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the start of the special symbol variation. For example, the execution may be performed after a lapse of a predetermined period (5 seconds) after the start of the special symbol variation. With this configuration, depending on the timing at which the special symbol change is interrupted, it is possible to provide a case where the time reduction number is updated (subtracted) based on the special symbol change after the restart and a case where the special symbol change is not performed. Specifically, when the special symbol change is interrupted 2 seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process is executed 3 seconds after the special symbol change is restarted. On the other hand, if the special symbol change is interrupted 10 seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process for a reduced number of times is not executed after the special symbol change is restarted. Therefore, even if the special symbol change is interrupted immediately after the start of the special symbol change, that is, when the remaining fluctuation time is long, a disadvantageous state may occur for the player. On the other hand, it is possible to make people interested in the game after resuming (the game in the time saving state). In addition, if it is configured to execute the update (subtraction) process of the number of time reductions during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol (variation time, jackpot lottery result, stop type) ), It is preferable to configure so that the timing of executing the update (subtraction) process of the reduced number of times is different. With this configuration, it is advantageous for the player (the number of time reductions is not updated due to the special symbol fluctuation after resumption, or the time reduction state set at the time of resumption can be continued for a long period of time). Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the interruption timing of the above, the player can be made to play the game while predicting the content of the game to be executed later, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution satisfies the predetermined condition, an effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. There is. Specifically, when the remaining period of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the fluctuation time of the next executed special symbol change. It is configured so that a lucky time effect can be executed when is long. With this configuration, if a game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. Can be done.

In addition, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution, a method of determining whether or not the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) (absolute determination). And a method (relative discrimination) for determining whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation to be executed next is configured to be feasible. As a result, the player can grasp the timing at which the special symbol variation is advantageously interrupted.

In each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to execute an effect that can notify the player of the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change during execution, but the interruption of the special symbol change that is advantageous to the player. The timing may be any effect as long as it can be predicted by the player, and the effect may be executed with a condition other than the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation as an execution condition. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which the update process of the time reduction number of special symbol changes is executed during the special symbol change, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute an effect indicating that the update process of the time reduction number of times has been executed. You may.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when a specific hit game (a game per character, a small hit game, or a big hit game) is executed during the execution of the special symbol change, the execution of the special symbol change is interrupted or discarded. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a condition other than the winning game is satisfied, the special symbol change during execution may be interrupted or discarded.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a winning device is provided in which a winning is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, and a ball is easily won when a game per game is executed. When the ball passes (enters) a specific area (special electric actuating port 643, special electric actuating port 1643, second ball entry port 1645), a game advantageous to the player (feature hit game, small hit game), that is, , Depending on the result of the game, a game in which a jackpot game can be executed can be executed. Further, it is possible to set a gaming state (time saving state) in which the ball winning the prize in the Fuden winning device 640 easily passes through the specific area described above and a gaming state (normal state) in which the ball does not easily pass through.

With this configuration, even if the ball wins the Fuden winning device 640 during the game per game executed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game in the normal state from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering a specific area during the normal state, a special method for preventing the ball from winning the normal electric winning device 640 by the game per figure executed during the normal state. Since it is not necessary to provide the configuration on the game board 13, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls that have won the prize-winning device 640, the balls that have not passed (entered) the specific area are configured to enter the out port, and the player is asked to enter the ball. It is configured so that the privilege (prize ball) is not given, but it is not limited to this, and the first privilege (providing a game that can trigger a big hit game) is given when passing (entering) a specific area. ) May be configured to give a second privilege (prize ball) different from that.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the type of privilege given to the player different depending on the ball that has won the Fuden winning device 640 according to the set gaming state, which is surprising to the player. It is possible to provide a sexual game.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, a gaming state (time saving state) in which the ball winning the prize-winning device 640 is likely to pass through the specific area described above and a gaming state (normal state) in which the ball is difficult to pass are set. The first specific area for executing the game per character, which is easy to establish the trigger for executing the big hit game, in the specific area where the ball that won the prize in the general electric winning device 640 enters during the time saving state after being configured to be possible. Either (the second special electric actuating port 1643) or the second specific area (special electric actuating port 643) for executing the game per accessory that is less likely to execute the jackpot game than the first specific area. A switching means (third movable valve 1642) for switching is provided.

With this configuration, it is easy to pass through the specific area after making the ratio (easiness of passing) of the balls winning in the Fuden winning device 640 pass through the specific area different depending on the set gaming state. Either the first specific area in which the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 in the game state (time saving state) is set is advantageous to the player, or the second specific area is more disadvantageous than the first specific area. Can be passed through. Therefore, even in a state where it is confirmed that the first privilege is given to the player by the ball winning the Fuden winning device 640 (a state in which the first privilege is easily given), the ball enters (passes) in any specific area. ) Can be of interest to you. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the game per game that is executed during the time saving state until the end.

In the second embodiment described above, the ease of winning the ball into the V winning opening 165 in the game per accessory to be executed is determined according to the type of the specific area (special electric operating port) into which the ball enters. It's different. That is, the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the character per game is different, but the execution probability is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, for example, the V jackpot game executed when the ball wins the V winning opening 165. (The number of rounds, the game state (time reduction number) set after the jackpot game is completed) may be configured to be different depending on the type of the specific area (special electric operation port) into which the ball enters.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, when the ball wins the special electric operation port 643, the special symbol fluctuation during execution is interrupted (the subtraction process of the fluctuation time is interrupted). However, as in the third embodiment described above, the special symbol variation during execution is discarded (forced special symbol variation) according to the conditions that are established when the ball wins the special electric actuating port 643. It may be configured to end the time saving state after making it stop) or discarding it.

Further, as in the fourth embodiment described above, for the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute a lottery of a plurality of types of special symbols (lottery of the first special symbol, lottery of the second special symbol) in duplicate. , The technical idea of the second embodiment described above may be applied. In the fourth embodiment described above, the second special symbol lottery execution trigger is provided in the Fuden winning device 640, and the ball is won in the Fuden winning device 640 in the normal state. It is configured so that the winning ball can easily enter the second entrance 1645 when the ball wins in the Fuden winning device 640 during the time saving state than in the case. In addition, the right first ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol is provided in the Fuden winning device 640, and the ball that wins the Fuden winning device 640 during the time saving state is the second ball opening 1645 or A switching means may be provided so as to enter any of the right first entrances. In this case, the lottery that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second entrance 1645 than the right first entrance, which triggers the lottery of the first special symbol that can be executed even in the normal state. Should be configured to be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to entertain the player to the end of the result of the game per game that is executed during the time saving state. Further, when the configuration as in each of the above-described embodiments in which the number of lottery (variation number) of the first special symbol is defined as the end condition of the time saving state is used, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is used during the time saving state. ) Can be suppressed from occurring. Further, in this case, the operation of the switching means provided in the Fuden winning device 640 may be variably configured based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, for example. , When the time saving state is set and the first special symbol lottery is not executed, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small (for example, one), the public prize is won. It is preferable to configure the switching means to control the operation so that the ball winning the device 640 can easily enter the right first ball entrance. With this configuration, the first special symbol lottery can be executed more reliably during the time saving state.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the Fuden winning device 640 is configured to be executed at the start of the game per game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute based on the timing when the normal symbol indicating the winning of the normal figure is stopped and displayed, or the timing when the stop display period has elapsed, or it is predetermined after the game per normal figure is started. It may be configured to be executed at the timing when the period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to a predetermined rule.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time saving state is set, a specific game (game per character) is performed by the end of the time saving state (by the end of the special symbol variation in which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied). Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 having a game property of aiming at a big hit game (V big hit game) via a small hit game) has been described.

In the pachinko machine 10 having such playability, the longer the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the time saving state, the longer the period (time saving period) in which the time saving state is set can be lengthened, and the pachinko machine 10 can be specified during the time saving period. It was possible to increase the number of times the game was executed.

Further, when the specific game is executed, the special symbol fluctuation during execution is interrupted (the process for subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol is configured. When the fluctuation (process for subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation) is performed after the end of the specific game or the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game), that is, when the condition for executing the new special symbol fluctuation is satisfied. It is configured to restart.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the length of the short period of time varies depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation and the interruption period due to the specific game. It was possible to enthusiastically perform a game so as to execute a large number of specific games while hoping that a long fluctuation time could be selected.

However, for example, a game period for executing a specific game (during a period in which a normal symbol is changed or a game in which a normal symbol is played, a ball cannot be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 (difficult to win) (difficult to win). The closing period of the electric accessory 640a)) is a period during which the specific game cannot be executed and the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted. Therefore, the specific game can be executed (the closed period). The opening period of the electric accessory 640a during the game per game in which the ball can be won by the electric accessory 640a, that is, the period during which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, but the game per accessory is played. It is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period that can be executed).

Further, in the specific game in which the special symbol variation is interrupted, when the number of winning balls to the variable ball entering means (V winning device 65) opened during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3). Either the end condition that is satisfied (winning end condition) or the end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the game per character was started (time end condition). It is configured to end when the end condition of is satisfied, and it is useful when any of the end conditions is satisfied according to the game content (whether or not the ball is fired) by the player during the game per character. The hit game was finished.

On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the state in which the specific game is being executed and the above-mentioned disadvantage period overlap, the production mode of the specific game can be changed based on the length of the disadvantage period. It is configured. As a result, it is possible for the player to select the content of the game (the end condition to be established) during the specific game, so that the game can be enthusiastically performed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 3, 88, or 89, a special electric actuating port 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640 as an opportunity to interrupt the special symbol change during execution. Further, also in the fourth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 114, a second ball entrance 1645 is provided in the Fuden winning device 640 as an opportunity to interrupt the special symbol change during execution. In a gaming machine with such a configuration, the period (the flow-down period of the ball) until the ball winning the general electric winning device 640 enters the special electric operating port or the second ball entry port is randomized (delayed). It is advisable to provide a delay means.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the period until the end of the plurality of special symbol fluctuations is configured to be a time-saving period, and the time-saving state (time-saving number of times) is newly set by executing the jackpot game. In that case, the remaining period of the suspended special figure change is added without subtracting the number of time reductions. Therefore, compared to the case where the remaining time reduction number remains and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation during execution is short, the remaining time number is reduced and the execution special feature is being executed. It is configured so that the player may be advantageous if the jackpot game is executed when the remaining period of the figure fluctuation is long (the jackpot game is executed after the time saving period is shortened).

As a result, a delay means may be provided in the general electric winning device 640 to delay the timing at which the ball enters the special electric operating port or the second ball entry port, which may be advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to entertain at what timing the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 enters the special electric operating port or the second ball entering port. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game of intentionally entering the ball into the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port in a state where the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long.

In this case, as a delay means, a crune member capable of rolling the ball is provided, and when a plurality of balls flow into the crune member, the ball easily flows into the passage port provided at the center of the crune member. It may be configured so that the ball passing through the passing port flows into the special electric actuating port or the second ball entry port. With this configuration, the ball can be used as a special electric activation port or a second ball entry port depending on the content of the game during the game (the degree of winning of the ball in the general electric winning device 640) while providing the delay means. It is possible to control the timing of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the ball enters the special electric operating port or the second ball entry port at an arbitrary timing.

In addition, when the ball flows into the delay means (cruin member), a suggestion effect suggesting to the player a period advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long) is executed, or the ball moves. A result notification means may be provided to notify whether the timing of entering the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port is a timing advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure variation is long). Further, in the above-mentioned example, an example in which a crune member is used as the delay means has been described, but any device that can change the flow period of the ball that has entered the Fuden winning device 640 is sufficient. A plurality of flow paths having different periods (flow-down period) from entering the winning device 640 to entering the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port are provided, and one of the plurality of flow paths is provided. A distribution means for distributing the balls may be provided.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 192. Like the pachinko machine 10 used in the fourth embodiment described above, the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery) are executed in duplicate. By making it possible (so-called simultaneous fluctuation specification) and changing the length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol selected according to the set gaming state, Of the two types of special symbol lottery that can be executed in duplicate, there is one that changes the special symbol type in which the lottery is likely to be executed according to the gaming state. Specifically, when one gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set, a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is set. When a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the symbol and a specific gaming state (for example, latent state) different from the normal state is set, the first special A long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the symbol, and a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Some are configured so that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed, and the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed during the latent state.

Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a small hit is configured to be won with a high probability (for example, about 1/1) in the second special symbol lottery, and a small hit is executed based on the small hit winning. There is a case in which a latent state in which a game is frequently executed is set as a game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since a game (advantageous game) in which a small hit game occurs frequently can be executed only in a specific gaming state (latent state), the player is expected to shift the gaming state. However, it was possible to play a game. However, since the fixed fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed in the latent state, the small hit game in the latent state is selected. It is not possible to make a large difference in the execution frequency, that is, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the small hit is almost won when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the small hit game is executed only by the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery. Since there is a difference in frequency, there is a risk that the game in the latent state will become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the range that can be selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a shorter fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, by executing the game (right-handed game) in the latent state, both the start prize (hold memory) of the first special symbol and the start prize of the second special symbol are both executed. Depending on the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol change that is being executed is interrupted, or the lottery result indicating a loss is forcibly stopped (discarded). It is configured so that it can be made to do. Then, by forcibly stopping the movement of the first special symbol during execution, it is possible to positively reduce the number of reserved first special symbols. As a result, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol can be reduced based on the lottery result of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 4 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, the gaming states are a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and latent state. A certain state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set, and a detailed explanation will be described later, but the latent state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state for the player. However, the normal state is configured as the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player. Further, the probabilistic state is configured as a gaming state in which the degree of advantage is higher than that of the normal state. In the following description, the game state may be indicated by using the name of the effect mode executed during each game state. For example, the normal state is referred to as a normal mode, the probability change state is referred to as a probability change mode, and the latent state is referred to as a rush mode. In some cases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is based on the board surface structure (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The V winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640 have been deleted, and instead, a right variable winning device 1650, a right electric accessory 164, and a right second entrance ball slot 645 are provided. Further, they are different in that the arrangement positions of the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are different. Other configurations are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, of the game areas formed on the game board 13, the left side area (left side area) and the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80 are respectively. A winning opening (entry opening) is provided so that the ball can be won (winned). Therefore, unlike the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, a game in which the ball is allowed to flow down to the left side region (left-handed game) and a game in which the ball is allowed to flow down to the right side region (right-handed hitting). It is configured so that the game) and can be executed.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, the player is configured to perform a different game according to the set game state, and when the normal state is set, the player is configured to perform a different game. A left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball opening 64, and when a probability variation state is set, a right-handed game is executed to cause the right electric accessory 164 to win the ball. When the latent state is set, the right-handed game is configured to execute a right-handed game in order to allow the ball to enter the right second entrance 645. Further, even when a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, the right-handed game is executed.

That is, when a game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the right-handed game is configured to be performed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player grasp whether or not the current situation is advantageous by the game method, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Although the details will be described later, during the game state (probability change state, latent state, and various hit states) in which the right-handed game is executed, the player can see the right-handed game on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the guidance display mode for executing the above is displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball opening 64c) and the ball that has flowed down the left side region due to the left-handed game enter the first ball opening 64 (central first ball opening 64c). The ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of the ball flowing down the right side area due to the right-handed game entering the first entrance 64 may differ depending on the nails planted on the board surface of the game board 13 and various structures. Specifically, one out of every 15 balls that have flowed down the left side region by the left-handed game enters the first entrance 64 (central first entrance 64c). It is configured so that one ball enters the first entry port 64 (central first entry opening 64c) for every 250 balls that have flowed down the right side region by the right-handed game. Therefore, in the normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by inserting the ball into the first entry port 64 (central first entry opening 64c), it is most important for the player to perform the left-handed game. It is an advantageous game method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80), a right variable winning device 1650 and a through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650 are provided. A right electric accessory 164 having an opening / closing door 164r1 capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first entrance 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67 and the right first entrance 164r. With the opening / closing door 164r1 closed, the ball that has flowed down (passed) on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 can enter the right second entry port 645, and the ball does not enter any of the above-mentioned entry openings. A variable winning device 650 is provided in the downstream region where the ball flowing down the right region reaches.

As shown in FIG. 157, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 with the right electric accessory 164 closed (the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed) to the right second entrance 645. The flow path of the game ball is set so that it can be reached. That is, even if the right-handed game is performed in a high-probability state (probability variation state) of a normal symbol in which the right electric accessory 164 is likely to be opened, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 enter the right first position. Since the ball enters the ball opening 164r, the game ball cannot enter the right second entry port 645. With this configuration, even in the probabilistic state (probability change mode), the game can be advanced by the right-handed game.

In the seventh embodiment, the variable member (opening / closing door) 1650a is variably configured so that almost all the balls flowing down the right side region can win the right variable winning device 1650 in the open state by the right-handed game. There is. The right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable ball winning means) that is opened in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery.

When the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (when the small hit game is not executed), about 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area is the area where the through gate 67 is arranged (right variable winning). Of the left and right regions formed by the nails planted on the left side of the device 1650, the right region (first path)) flows down, and the remaining half is the left region (second path). Flow down. The ball flowing down the left region (second path) flows down toward the variable winning device 650 without entering the right electric accessory 164 and the right second entrance ball opening 1645.

On the other hand, all of the spheres that have flowed down the right region (first path) where the through gate 67 is arranged flow down toward the upstream side of the right electric accessory 164 (upstream end side of the opening / closing door 164r1). , The upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 flows down from the upstream side to the downstream side. Then, about two-thirds of the balls discharged from the upper surface of the right electric accessory 164 enter the right second entrance 645, and the remaining about one-third are the right electric accessory 164 and the right second. It passes through the gap formed between the ball entry port 645 and flows down toward the variable winning device 650.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of routes for the ball launched to the right side region by the right-handed game to reach the variable winning device 650 are provided, and the period required for the ball to flow down is different for each. A route is formed. Specifically, the flow period of the sphere in the right region (first path) is about 2 seconds, and the flow period of the sphere in the left region (second path) is about 1 second. With this configuration, balls fired at different timings (balls fired by right-handed games), specifically, multiple balls fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds can be changed at the same timing. It is possible to reach the winning device 650. Therefore, during the period when the variable winning device 650 is in the open state (during the big hit game), it is possible to easily make a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 650 at the same time. You can be interested in the behavior of the sphere.

The right electric accessory 164 is opened when a winning prize is won in a lottery of ordinary symbols (general drawing lottery) in which lottery conditions can be satisfied when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (when a game per normal drawing is executed). It is a variable ball entry means that is operated. Here, the contents of the ordinary symbol lottery (general drawing lottery) and the game per normal symbol in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described.

In the seventh embodiment, even if the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball can enter the right electric accessory 164 by the right-handed game, although the probability is low. For example, when a right-handed game is played in a normal state, one ball out of about 50 balls is configured to win a prize in the right electric accessory 164. This ball entry ratio is set lower than the ratio of balls that enter the first ball entry port 64 (ratio of about 1 ball in 20 balls) when a left-handed game is performed in a normal state. The ball that has entered the right electric accessory 164 is configured to always enter the right first entry port 164r. Then, when the ball is inserted into the right electric accessory 164, the lottery right of the first special symbol is acquired (the lottery condition is satisfied) as in the case where the ball is inserted into the first entry port 64. ).

Further, when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64, a prize ball (4 pieces) is given in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol as a privilege of inserting the ball. On the other hand, when a ball is inserted into the right electric accessory 164, a prize ball (1 piece) is given in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol as a privilege of inserting the ball. That is, when the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed when the left-handed game is executed rather than when the right-handed game is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to acquire the right and the number of prize balls given when the ball is inserted into the entrance to which the ball is inserted in order to acquire the lottery right of the first special symbol is increased. ing. Therefore, in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

In addition, when a right-handed game is played in the normal state, about one-third of the balls flowing down the right side region enter the right second entrance 645. When a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a lottery right for executing the lottery of the second special symbol is given, and one prize ball is given. Although a detailed description will be described later, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery right of the second special symbol is not stored (held storage). Therefore, even if the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is not smoothly performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, when the jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is performed and a game in which the ball is awarded to the variable winning device 650 is executed. Since the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the jackpot game, the ball enters the right first entrance 164r in the right electric accessory 164 during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol becomes the upper limit value.

As a result, when the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the game is started with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being the upper limit. In the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and a long time (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. ) Is selected. Then, a game (small hit RUSH) in which a large number of prize balls are obtained while frequently winning small hits in the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent state becomes a predetermined number (1 or 2), it is more than when the number is other than the predetermined number (0, 3, 4). It is configured so that a short fluctuation time can be easily selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation. That is, the period during which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes a predetermined number during the latent state is the period during which the number of small hit games executed per unit time is most likely to increase, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes.

As described above, the present embodiment does not have a hold storage function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, so that it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game during the latent state. Then, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the latent state is configured to be a long time (10 minutes). Therefore, it is difficult to reach a predetermined number (1 or 2) of the reserved balls of the 1st special symbol in the latent state with the lapse of the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a part of the case where a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol change during execution is forcibly stopped (discarded). As a result, in the latent state, the player can be made to play a game in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced while playing a game aiming at a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous period of the second special symbol lottery (variation) in the latent state is set based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and further, the second special symbol lottery is performed. It is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased when the game to be executed (right-handed game) is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous period of the second special symbol lottery (variation) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the advantageous period will continue.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a hold storage function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is based on the number of hold storages of the first special symbol. Is configured to be selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the second special symbol is based on the total value of the reserved storage number of the first special symbol and the reserved storage number of the second special symbol. It may be configured to select the fluctuation time of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol selected during the latent state is configured so that a long fluctuation time is always selected, but the variation time is not limited to this, for example. As the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the short fluctuation (for example, 20 seconds) may be selected with a probability of about 1/10. With this configuration, the variation time lapse of the first special symbol can be included in the realistic method of causing the reserved storage of the first special symbol to occur during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to have a substantially plurality of triggers for reducing the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol in the latent state.

Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the discard condition is satisfied in a part of the case where the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the execution of the first special symbol change is discarded. However, a discard condition that can be satisfied regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol may be used. For example, the number of balls entered into the right variable winning device 1650 during the execution of the small hit game. You may set a discard condition that is established based on the fact that the number of prizes exceeds a predetermined prize condition (for example, 11 prizes), or the player is placed in any of the game areas (right side area) of the game board 13. Discarding conditions that can be established when a ball enters the ball mouth may be set. In this way, by establishing the discard state to the first special symbol due to various factors, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the advantageous period is set.

Next, the configuration of the right electric accessory 164 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 (a) is a front perspective view schematically showing a closed state of the right electric accessory 164 (a state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed), and FIG. 158 (b) is a front perspective view of the right electric accessory 164. It is a front perspective view which shows typically the open state (the state which the opening / closing door 164r1 is open).

As shown in FIG. 158 (a), convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c provided for preventing the flow of the game ball are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, the game ball flows down on the opening / closing door 164r1 from the left side to the right side along the outer circumference of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. That is, on the opening / closing door 164r1, a zigzag-shaped flow path is formed by the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. Therefore, as compared with the case where the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c are not provided (that is, the game ball flows linearly on the opening / closing door 164r1 from the left direction to the right direction in the front view), the opening / closing door 164r1 It is possible to lengthen the period required to completely flow down the upper surface of the door. Thereby, while one sphere is flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1, a plurality of spheres (subsequent spheres) can easily reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. Therefore, the period during which the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 can be lengthened, and it is easy to make the ball win the right electric accessory 164 when the game is executed. can do.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, but in the present embodiment, when a high probability state (probability variation state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state, most of the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 are on the right. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the operation content of the game per normal symbol, and the path of the ball passing through the through gate 67 are designed so as to enter the electric accessory 164. With this configuration, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal state, and by executing the right-handed game, the first special symbol is drawn more than in the normal state. Can be made easier to execute. Further, since it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the probabilistic state, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game in the probabilistic state from executing an excessively advantageous game. can. In the present embodiment, in the unlikely event that a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the probability change state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time (60) is shorter than that in the normal state. Seconds) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, while the second special symbol fluctuation for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is being executed, the probabilistic state changes to the latent state, and the state shifts to the latent state. Nevertheless, it suppresses the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a transition condition for shifting the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent probable state, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the probabilistic state is set to a predetermined number (50 times). Set the first transition condition that is satisfied when the game is reached and the second transition condition that is satisfied when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed during the probability change state. doing. That is, in a probabilistic state in which it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, if a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (when the second transition condition is satisfied), the probabilistic change Even if the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the state has not reached the predetermined number of times (50 times), the state can be shifted to the latent state.

FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the opening / closing door 164r1 slides from the front side of the front view toward the back side of the front view, and enters the inside of the game board 13 through the opening provided in the game board 13. It is stored. As a result, the right first ball entry port 164r is opened. Although detailed description is omitted, the opening / closing door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can switch between an on state and an off state based on an instruction from the main control device 110. When a current is passed through the solenoid, the solenoid is turned on and the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened. That is, it is configured so that the current is passed to the solenoid only when the winning is won by the lottery of the normal symbol and the game per normal symbol is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to require power during the period when the opening / closing door 164r1, which occupies a large proportion of the power of the pachinko machine 10, is closed, so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed. ..

When the first entry port 164r is opened (when the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened), the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can win the right electric accessory 164. Further, since the distance in the height direction of the opening for accommodating the opening / closing door 164r1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 is moved when the sliding movement of the opening / closing door 164r1 is started. The game ball that was flowing down is not stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening / closing door 164r1, and is located on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 when the opening / closing door 164r1 slides into the game board 13. The ball can be dropped from above the opening / closing door 164r1 toward the first entry port 164r.

In the seventh embodiment, by providing the three convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1, the game ball bypasses the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, and the game ball passes through the opening / closing door 164r1. It was configured to have a longer transit period, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 has a friction coefficient higher than that of other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, etc.). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, the surface may be provided with irregularities).

FIG. 159 is a plan view of the opening / closing door 164r1 as viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 159, on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of the sphere are embedded in a zigzag path on which the sphere can roll (easily). These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged at a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball from each other in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. These pass detection sensors 228a to 228f are known to have an output of H (high) when a game ball is arranged above them, and an output of L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the upper part. It consists of an optical sensor. In the seventh embodiment, the combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Then, the passing status of the ball on the opening / closing door 164r1 is calculated by combining the outputs of the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the ball passing status notification based on the calculation result can be executed.

With this configuration, the player can grasp how close the ball launched by the right-handed game to the right second entrance 645 in the probabilistic state. Therefore, by shifting the execution timing of the right-handed game in the probabilistic state based on the content of the ball passing status notification to be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged only on the opening / closing door 164r1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the ball has the through gate 67. Passage detection sensors are provided in the area from the passage to the top of the opening / closing door 164r1 and the area after passing the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1, and the number of balls reaching the opening / closing door 164r1 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 are determined. The number of passed balls may be detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the flow state when the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the right side region will be described. FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic state in which the ball is in a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol), and the flow state of the ball when the ball enters the right second entry port 645. FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow state of a ball in a latent state and a small hit game is being executed.

In the seventh embodiment, when the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the ball is inserted into the right second entrance 645 by the right-handed game. The game of making a ball is configured to be the most advantageous game for the player. When the right-handed game is executed in the latent state, as shown in FIG. 160A, the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state, and the right second 2 Enter the ball into the ball entrance 645.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the latent state, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is halved. It is set so that 30 seconds is set as a period (variation time) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the stop display (confirmation) of the lottery result. That is, when a right-handed game is performed during a game state (normal state, latent state, jackpot game state) in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the through gate 67 is played at a rate of 1 in 2 balls. Will pass, so one out of every four balls will win a game per game, and the game will be played once every 60 seconds.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a meandering spherical flow path (passing period 1. Since 3 seconds) is formed, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to have a plurality of balls stay on the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 which is in the closed state with high probability. It is configured.

Therefore, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to win one or two balls in one minute to the right electric accessory 164. In addition, since the ball is easily accommodated on the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, even if the game period of the game per normal figure is set to a short period (for example, 0.2 seconds open). It is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the game per game.

By setting the game period of the game per normal figure short in this way, when the right-handed game is executed after determining that the game per normal figure is to be executed based on the stop display mode of the normal symbol, the ball is played. By the time it reaches the right electric accessory 164, it is possible to finish the game per game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the right-handed game after determining that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, and the game of efficiently winning the ball to the right electric accessory 164.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable winning device (second attacker) that is opened during the small hit game is provided on the upper (upstream) side of the through gate 67. It is provided. Therefore, even if the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the game state (latent state) in which the second special symbol lottery can be smoothly executed, the small hit game is executed. It is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric accessory 164.

With this configuration, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is more difficult for the right electric accessory 164 to win the ball in the normal state or the latent state than during the jackpot game. can do. Therefore, in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved balls) up to the upper limit by winning a ball in the right electric accessory 164. However, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 from being excessively increased due to the right-handed game executed during the latent state.

<Regarding the content of the production in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 to 165, characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the flow of the effect from the setting of the probability change state as the game state to the setting of the latent state, and the flow of the effect executed during the latent state will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the flow of the effect from the setting of the probability variation state as the gaming state to the setting of the latent probability state will be described. In the present embodiment, in a part of the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game. There is. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the probability change state is set, the game state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state. Specifically, as a probabilistic state, the high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. That is, the game state is configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a big hit after the probabilistic state is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the probability change state is set, an effect for suggesting the period until the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player is set is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the conditions until the latent state is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 161A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the probability change state (probability change mode) is set. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied in the probability change mode. ..

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the time saving number of times is elapsed (added) in the probabilistic state, so that the mode directly shifts to the most advantageous latent mode (latent state). Therefore, in the probabilistic state (probability change mode), an effect aiming at the latent probability state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), an effect in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs a rocky mountain is executed. In addition, the characters "Aim for the top !!" are displayed in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, and the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811 has a probability change mode. The display content suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations (number of lottery) until the end of (the number of time reductions elapses a predetermined number (for example, 50 times)) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 161 (a), the case where the character "remaining 50 m" is displayed with respect to the display area HR2 is illustrated. The remaining meter display to the top is subtracted by 1 m each time the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol) is executed, so that the remaining meter (distance) to the top is displayed to the player. ) Is the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition to the latent mode.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 described above is variably (subtracted) each time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the meter display after the variability (subtraction) is displayed. When the display mode becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "remaining 0 m"), the game state is configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , It is configured so that it is added every time the fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed, and the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is configured so that the latent probability mode is set when a specific numerical value is added. You may. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the meter display each time the variation display of the third symbol is executed. For example, when the variation display of the third symbol is executed a plurality of times, the display mode of the meter display is changed. It may be configured to be variable. With this configuration, the timing at which the display mode of the meter display changes can be made different from the variable display timing of the third symbol, so that the player can see the latent mode (latent state). It is possible to provide an unexpected effect by executing an effect in which the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is greatly reduced at one time while recognizing the approximate period until is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2, the period until the latent probability mode is set is shortened (the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied is approaching). Is configured to execute only the effect of subtracting the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display in order to notify the player, but when the latent state is set, a specific transition display mode (for example, for example) is executed. It suffices if "remaining 0 m") is displayed. For example, an effect of temporarily increasing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display may be executed while the probability change state is set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the latent state is set, so that the player can play the game while always expecting the latent state to be set.

In this case, as the transition conditions for transitioning from the probabilistic state to the latent state, at least a plurality of transition conditions, specifically, the jackpot type that triggered the setting of the probabilistic state and the jackpot winning time As the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state according to the game state, a first transition condition (for example, 20 times of time saving) that is easy to be satisfied and a second transition condition that is harder to be satisfied than the first transition condition (for example, 20 times of time saving). For example, the number of times of time reduction is 50), which is configured to set one of the time reduction end conditions, and when the probability change state is set, a display indicating the period until the first transition condition, which is easy to be satisfied, is satisfied. When the mode (for example, "remaining 20 m") is configured to be displayed in the display area HR2 and the time saving end condition actually set is the first transition condition, the display mode of the meter display is subtracted as it is. Is executed, and when the time reduction end condition actually set is the second transition condition, it is specified at the timing when the second transition condition is satisfied while increasing the display mode of the meter display based on the number of remaining time reductions. It may be configured so that the transition display mode of is displayed. With this configuration, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time saving end condition set for the current probability change state is.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set in the probability change state set after the execution of the specific jackpot game. More specifically, the first time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation (lottery) executed during the probability change state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and the execution during the probability change state. The second time saving end condition that is satisfied when the result of the special symbol change (lottery) to be performed is a specific result (for example, small hit C winning) is set. Then, the display area HR2 is configured to display a meter display based on the first time reduction end condition that can calculate the timing at which the time reduction end condition is satisfied in advance. That is, during the probability change state, the meter display is subtracted each time the special symbol change is executed, and the latent state is set when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "remaining 0 m"). The effect of notifying that it is done is executed. On the other hand, if the second time reduction end condition is satisfied before the above-mentioned first time reduction end condition is satisfied (before the display mode of the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode), the meter display is displayed. As a shortening effect in which the aspect (numerical value) sharply decreases, an effect in which the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "remaining 0 m") is executed after the effect in which the character 811 vigorously climbs a mountain.

In this way, by configuring the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 to be variable in various modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the transition to the latent state is made. It is possible to make the player who is playing the game play the game while always expecting the transition to the latent state. In addition, regardless of which time reduction end condition is satisfied, the player can be notified of the transition to the latent state by displaying a specific transition display mode as the display mode of the meter display. It is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161 (b), the content of the effect to be executed when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probability change state will be described. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the number of time reductions has elapsed (the time reduction end condition is satisfied) in the probability variation mode (probability variation state). As shown in FIG. 162 (a), when the time saving end condition (for example, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations) is satisfied, the effect that the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is displayed. The words "Come to the top !!" are displayed. Further, the characters "remaining 0 m" are displayed on the display area HR2. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state has changed to the latent state (latent mode).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed as compared with the case where the game state other than the latent probability state is set. Is configured to be easy to execute, and the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (higher probability than the lottery of the first special symbol). Then, by frequently executing the second special symbol lottery, the small hit game is frequently executed, and the player is configured to execute the game in which many benefits (prize balls) can be obtained. .. Hereinafter, a game in which a small hit game is frequently executed by a second special symbol lottery in a latent state is referred to as "RUSH", and an effect executed during the RUSH game is referred to as "RUSH effect".

FIG. 162 (a) shows from the transition to the latent state (latent mode) to the state in which the prize ball can actually be obtained (until the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol). It is a figure which showed the display mode in the state (preparation state) in between. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the prepared state, the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and the display area HR1 is "started RUSH by right-handed !!". Is displayed. In addition, the characters "RUSH is being prepared" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player enters the RUSH state in which the prize ball can be obtained by performing the right-handed game.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probability change state, but the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the latent probability state is set. It may not be possible to make it. Specifically, when the second special symbol change is executed during the probability change state and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol change while the second special symbol change is being executed. Will shift the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent state while the second special symbol change is being executed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol change in the latent state is not executed until the second special symbol change being executed (the second special symbol change in which the change is started during the probability change state) is stopped and displayed. ..

In this way, after the latent probability state is set, if there is a period during which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly executed, the display screen (RUSH preparation) shown in FIG. 162 (a) occurs. By displaying the screen), it is possible to notify the player that the RUSH game will be executed later, so that the RUSH game is not executed even though the latent state is set. It is possible to suppress giving a feeling of distrust to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation during execution is a predetermined period or more (for example, 10 seconds or more). In this case, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is executed, but it is actually advantageous after the game state in which the advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed is set. When the length of the period until the execution condition of the game is satisfied is a predetermined period, it may be configured to notify that the advantageous game will be executed later. For example, the game may be played during the disadvantageous game (probability change state). In the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 has a different game method (for example, a left-handed game) to be executed by a player and a game method (for example, a right-handed game) to be executed by a player during an advantageous game (latent state). It is preferable to configure the RUSH preparing display shown in FIG. 162 (a) to be executed by using the period from the setting of the latent state to the actual execution of the second special symbol change by the right-handed game. ..

Further, for example, a disadvantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is easier to win in the lottery of the normal symbol than the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the length of the selected variable time is longer. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to be easy to become, and is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed during the normal symbol winning game that is executed when the normal symbol lottery is won. If so, at the time when the advantageous gaming state is set, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is executed during the period until the normal symbol variation executed during the disadvantageous gaming state is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (a), the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 is hidden (displayed invisible), or "preparation" is performed in the display area HR1. It is good to display the characters "Please wait for a while." That is, although the latent state is set, the player is notified that the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (difficult to execute) even if the right-handed game is executed. It is advisable to display the RUSH preparation period display as shown above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted because the RUSH game is not executed even though the right-handed game is executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change (lottery) is executed during the latent state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (b) is displayed and the RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the latent state and the second special symbol change in which the small hit is won is executed, the display area HR1 The characters "RUSH start" are displayed in, and the characters "RUSH rush !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, an icon (treasure box 812) imitating a treasure box is displayed in the main display area Dm. Thereby, during the RUSH game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect (RUSH effect) using the icon (treasure box 812) imitating the treasure box is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the display contents of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, the effect that the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, from the opened treasure chest 812, an effect of displaying the lottery result display mode showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is executed. As the lottery result display mode, for example, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, and when it is a big hit, the character "win" is imitated. The display mode is displayed, and if it is out of alignment, a display mode imitating a "cross mark" is displayed. In this way, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed only by executing the effect of opening the treasure box 812 and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 with respect to the treasure box 812 that is always displayed. , The effect of displaying the treasure box 812, the effect of opening the treasure box 812, and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 are performed when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than in the case of executing. However, since the number of effects to be executed can be reduced, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, the effect performed during the super RUSH game, which is more advantageous to the player than during the other RUSH games, will be described. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed during the latent state is configured to be variable based on the number of special symbols held and stored (the number of reserved special symbols held). Specifically, in the second special symbol variation executed when the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, 1), the second special symbol variation is executed when the number of special figure reservations is other than the specific number. 2 It is configured so that a shorter fluctuation time can be easily selected than a special symbol fluctuation. As described above, while the latent state is set, the effect of giving the player a privilege (prize ball) is executed by frequently performing the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the latent state, the larger the ratio of the small hit game period to the unit period can be increased, so that the player can make the game state more playable. can. Hereinafter, during the RUSH game, the RUSH game during the period in which the number of reserved special symbols becomes a specific number and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation becomes short will be referred to as a super RUSH game and will be described.

First, the content of the effect executed when the RUSH game is switched to the super RUSH game will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the effect content executed in a state where the number of reserved special figures is easily subtracted during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, when a specific small hit (for example, small hit B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent state, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly removed. It is configured to stop and display with. Further, it is configured so that a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) can be easily selected for the first special symbol fluctuation executed in the latent state. Further, the right-handed game executed during the latent state is configured so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) can be acquired. That is, it is configured so that it becomes difficult to reduce the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 based on the passage of fluctuation time while executing the RUSH game in the latent state.

Therefore, in order to reduce the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 until the conditions for executing the Super RUSH game are satisfied, it is necessary to win a specific small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol change in which a specific small hit is won is executed, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the characters "Aim for further summit" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the main character is displayed. In the display area Dm, an effect for the character 811 to aim at a higher position is executed.

Specifically, a display mode indicating the stage corresponding to the difference between the currently acquired number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1, which is a condition for executing the super RUSH game, is displayed. In the display area HR71 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display suggesting to the player the situation until the super RUSH game is executed is displayed.

Then, when a specific small hit is won a plurality of times during the RUSH game and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 reaches the specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164 (b) is displayed. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when the execution condition of the super RUSH game is satisfied. When the execution condition of the super RUSH game (for example, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 2) is satisfied, the character 811 reaches the top, and the display mode for notifying that the execution condition of the super RUSH game is satisfied is handed. The production taken in is executed. Then, in the display area HR71, a display mode “2” indicating that the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has the execution condition of the super RUSH game is displayed.

In addition, after setting the state in which FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b) are displayed, that is, the effect mode suggesting the entry of Super RUSH in the special figure discard setting process (see S4643 in FIG. If the special figure 1 hold is acquired, the super RUSH game may not be executed when the first special symbol change being executed is discarded. Therefore, in the state where FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b) are displayed, a process of determining whether or not the special figure 1 hold is newly acquired is executed, and if it is acquired, the effect mode is switched. It is configured to execute the processing of. For example, when the special figure 1 hold is newly acquired, the effect that the peak shown in FIG. 164 (a) moves away corresponding to the newly acquired number of the special figure 1 hold is executed. As a result, even if the super RUSH rushing opportunity disappears during the execution of the effect suggesting the rushing into the super RUSH, it is possible to execute the effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b), the contents of the effect when the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 have been described. Even when the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, an effect suggesting the entry of the super RUSH is executed. In this case, the process of determining whether the advantageous period (the period during which the super RUSH game is executed) is set (increased advantageous state) is executed by increasing the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 by one. , When it is determined that the game is in an increasing advantageous state, it is determined whether or not the game per normal figure is executed. In this determination, the lottery result of the fluctuation of the normal symbol being executed and the pre-reading process based on the information held in the normal symbol (the same process as the pre-reading process for the special symbol executed in each of the above-described embodiments is performed as the normal symbol. Whether or not the game per normal figure is executed is determined based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) of whether or not the information to be won per normal figure is included in (corresponding to the process to be executed for). Then, when it is determined that the game per normal figure is executed, the super RUSH rush effect is executed to suggest that the opportunity to increase the special figure 1 hold will soon come.

As an effect mode of this super RUSH rush effect, the player is notified that the super RUSH game will be executed by increasing the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 (by winning a ball in the right electric accessory 164). The notification mode is set. This makes it easier for the player to establish the conditions for executing the super RUSH game. In this embodiment, the player can grasp the conditions for executing the super RUSH game, that is, the case where the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of balls reserved in special figure 1 and the case where the super RUSH game is executed and reserved in special figure 1. The case where the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls and the case where the super RUSH game is executed are configured to execute an effect that allows the player to identify, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the super RUSH game is executed. It is configured to notify the player only that the condition to be performed is likely to be satisfied, and to let the player select whether to execute a game in which the number of reservations is increased or a game in which the number of reservations is decreased. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of the effect executed during the super RUSH will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during Super RUSH. When the super RUSH game is executed, the second special symbol variation with a shorter fluctuation time than the normal RUSH game is likely to be executed. As a result, the execution interval of the small hit game is shortened and the small hit game is executed in a unit time. The number of times can be increased as compared with the normal RUSH game. Therefore, during the super RUSH game, the game period is more advantageous to the player than during the normal RUSH game. Then, during the Super RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), the characters "Super RUSH" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a plurality of treasure chests 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the characters "speed up" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

That is, during the super RUSH game, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the second special symbol lottery is drawn using the fluctuation period of one second special symbol fluctuation. Since it is difficult for the player to easily understand the effect of suggesting the result (the effect of displaying the treasure box) and the effect of notifying the lottery result (the effect of opening the treasure box and displaying the contents), there are a plurality of effects in advance. The treasure chests 812a to 812c are displayed, and the effect of opening the treasure chests is executed based on the lottery result as appropriate.

Specifically, a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes (for example, color and design) are displayed in advance, and an effect of opening the treasure chest according to the lottery result of the second special symbol to be executed is executed. It is configured in. In this case, as a lottery result in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is advantageous to the player, for example, when the big hit in which the latent state is set again after the big hit game is won, the rainbow color or the golden color As a result of the lottery that opens the luxurious treasure box and is disadvantageous to the player, for example, if the jackpot whose normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, the jackpot at the end of the RUSH game is won, it is tattered. The effect of opening the treasure chest is executed.

By displaying a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes in advance in this way, the lottery result can be obtained without performing an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure chests displayed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to facilitate the execution of an effect that suggests (an effect that makes the display mode of the treasure box to be opened different).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game (super RUSH game) does not have the hold storage function, for example, the winning information of the second special symbol that is held and stored can be stored. It is not possible to perform an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) that suggests the lottery result from the period before the second special symbol change based on the winning information is executed based on the pre-determination result. It is configured in. Therefore, since it is difficult to set a long period for executing the effect suggesting the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, it is possible to further enhance the effect of displaying a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes in advance. can.

When using a configuration in which a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes are displayed in advance as in the present embodiment, the number of treasure chests displayed at the same time and the display mode may be randomly set, or the latent probability may be set. The display mode may be changed according to the number of games played (the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed) in the state. In addition, the current number of reserved balls of the special figure (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is read, and based on the read result, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH game is likely to end, and the treasure box is determined based on the determination result. It may be configured to change the display mode and the number of displays. With this configuration, not only the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery but also the game status of the super RUSH game can be grasped by the player using the display mode and the number of displays of the treasure box. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165 (b), the production content of the effect suggesting the end of the super RUSH game during the super RUSH game will be described. FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the super RUSH game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the special figure (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is a specific number (1 or 2), the super RUSH game is configured to be executed. The right side area of the game board 13 is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) can be increased by the game (right-handed game) executed during the super RUSH game. (See Fig. 157).

Therefore, the super RUSH game may end when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases during the super RUSH game, that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases from 2 to 3. In such a case, the end suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 165 (b) is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 165 (b), the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the player wins the normal symbol during the Super RUSH game (winning probability 1/30), and the right electric accessory 164 It is an end suggestion effect executed when the character is opened, and a display mode suggesting that the character 811 crouches down and the super RUSH game ends is displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, the characters "Pinch of end" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

By executing the end suggestion effect in this way, the right electric accessory 164 wins a ball during the super RUSH game, and the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game due to the increase in the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1. If this is done, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (b), the factor for ending the super RUSH game, that is, in the state where the super RUSH game ends due to the increase in the number of balls reserved in special figure 1, the number of balls held in special figure 1 increases. It is configured not to notify the player that it is in a state where it is easy to increase (a state in which the game is executed per normal figure), but it is not limited to this, for example, "Stop right-handed and rest the rabbit. You may display the comment "Let's do it" and execute a guidance notification that makes it difficult for the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the Super RUSH game from ending based on the increase in the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the Super RUSH game for the player. Since the display content displayed on the screen can be watched, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the execution timing of the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 165 (b) may be the start timing of the game per normal figure, or the normal symbol variation (variation time 10 seconds to 30 seconds) that is won per normal figure. The start timing, the timing at which the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and the information contained in the normal symbol holding ball are determined in advance, and a predetermined value is set based on the preliminary determination result. The timing may be (for example, 30 seconds before the game is executed per normal figure).

Further, when the above-mentioned guidance notification (guidance notification that makes it difficult for the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the normal game by interrupting the right-handed game) is executed, the notification content of the guidance notification is executed. If the right-handed game is interrupted after grasping It is preferable to execute the notification, and for example, it is preferable to configure the guidance notification to be executed 10 seconds before the game per game is executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the game in which the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not increased for the player who has grasped the guidance notification. In addition, when the game per game is not actually executed, or when, for example, the information contained in the normal symbol holding ball is determined in advance and it is determined in advance that the game per game will be executed 60 seconds later, that is, the right. The above-mentioned end suggestion effect (so-called Gase effect) may be executed at a timing when the number of reserved balls cannot be increased even if the striking game is not interrupted.

In FIG. 165 (b) described above, it is executed when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 increases and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is no longer a specific number (1 or 2), and the super RUSH game can be completed. The end suggestion effect was explained, but conversely, as the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 decreases, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is no longer a specific number (1 or 2), and the Super RUSH game ends. In some cases.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the end suggestion effect executed when the super RUSH game ends due to the decrease in the number of reserved balls in Special FIG. 1 will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen of an end suggestion effect executed when the super RUSH game ends due to a decrease in the number of reserved balls in Special Fig. 1. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state in which the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is one, and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol change during execution is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the end suggestion effect is executed in the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 165 (b) described above. ..

In this case, after 1.5 seconds, the first special symbol change is stopped and displayed, and the next first special symbol change is started, so that the number of balls reserved for special figure 1 becomes 0 and the super RUSH game ends. Become. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Pinch to end !! Save hold" are displayed. By executing the end suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the super RUSH game will end unless the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is increased.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of triggers for reducing the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 are provided, and as shown in FIG. A specific small hit (small hit B) may be won in a special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol change being executed may be forcibly stopped (discarded). Regardless of the state in which any of the triggers is established (can be established), by executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the game is played when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game for the player. It is possible to suppress giving a person a sense of discomfort.

As the timing for executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation during execution and the residual fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in which the small hit B is won are determined. , Even if the remaining period until the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 becomes 0 is calculated based on the determination result, and the execution is performed at the timing when the calculation result becomes a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, it may be configured to execute at predetermined intervals (for example, 30-second intervals) from the timing when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is changed from 2 to 1. That is, in the state where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 1, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 becomes 0 because the Super RUSH game continues even if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 increases by 1. It may be configured to execute the end suggestion effect in order to make the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 two without determining the timing to obtain.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the super RUSH game can be completed regardless of whether the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 increases or decreases, the player during the super RUSH game So far, it is possible to execute a game in which the super RUSH game is continued by increasing the number of balls held in Special Figure 1 and a game in which the super RUSH game is continued by not increasing the number of balls held in Special Figure 1. It is possible to provide a novel playability that is not found in the game.

It should be noted that, different from the effect content of the present embodiment, for example, the end suggestion effect (FIG. 165) is executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is easily satisfied by increasing the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1. (B)) and the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 166) executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is likely to be satisfied by reducing the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 are the same. , The sub-display area Ds may be configured to execute an effect that allows the player to select whether or not to continue the right-handed game. As a result, the game method selected by the player, that is, the game method in which the super RUSH game is continued by executing the right-handed game in order to increase the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1, and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 are increased. The duration of the super RUSH game can be different depending on the game method in which the super RUSH game is continued by interrupting the right-handed game in order to prevent the player from playing the game. Can be done. Further, when the player selects an erroneous game method, the game method becomes a game method that facilitates the establishment of the end condition of the super RUSH game. Therefore, the game method selected by the player is used as a later game result. The impact can be greater.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the period during which the super RUSH game is executed is configured to be within a specific range (1 or 2) in which the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is continuous. Without limitation, for example, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls in which the super RUSH game is executed may be set in a discontinuous range. For example, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 and 3. In some cases, the super RUSH game may be configured to be executed. In this case, as the end suggestion effect, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 can be changed from 1 to 0 and from 3 to 4, the above-mentioned FIGS. 165 (b) and 166 are used. When the same end suggestion effect is executed and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 can be changed from 1 to 2, or 3 to 2, the end of the Super RUSH game is not suggested, but the end of the Super RUSH game. It is preferable to configure the standby effect to be executed as an effect suggesting the transition to the standby state. That is, according to the above-mentioned example, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 2, the super RUSH game is executed even if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 decreases or increases. Special Figure 1 Compared to the case where the number of reserved balls is 0 or 4, the super RUSH game is more likely to be executed (standby state), so by executing the standby effect, the player is informed to that effect. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, in this case, the first special symbol change executed when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is two (the special figure 1 reserved ball used in the first special symbol lottery this time is subtracted). The fluctuation time selected in (1st special symbol variation when the number of balls is 2) is configured to be shorter than when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 0 or 4. You may. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the transition from the standby state to the super RUSH game, and it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game for the player who has transitioned to the standby state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition contents of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in the present embodiment, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). , The latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set. Then, the amount of the privilege given to the player who plays the game is configured to be different according to the set game state. Specifically, when the latent state is set, the player is given the most benefits, and then the amount of the benefits given to the player is reduced in the order of the probabilistic state and the normal state. It is configured.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that a normal state is set as an initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (a state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). Then, in the normal state, it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery when the left-handed game is executed than when the right-handed game is executed. Is executed. When a ball enters the first ball opening 64 during the normal state, the first special symbol lottery for winning the jackpot is executed with a probability of 1/200. If the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type (big hit A7) in which the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends is set at a rate of 35%, and the probability changes after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 45%. The jackpot type (big hit B7) in which the state is set is set, and the jackpot type (big hit C7) in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends is set at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, it is most likely to shift to the probabilistic state, then to the normal state, and to the latent state most. It is configured to be difficult. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game property in which a latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set by passing through a plurality of game states.

Next, when the probability variation state is set, the normal symbol becomes a high-probability state, so that the right electric accessory 164 is easier to open than the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the first ball is entered by the left-handed game. Since it is easier to insert the ball into the right first entry port 164r by the right-handed game than to insert the ball into the mouth 64, the game of executing the first special symbol lottery is executed by the right-handed game. .. Further, during the probability change state, the special symbol becomes a high probability state, and the first special symbol lottery in which the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/60 is executed. If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, a jackpot type (big hit A7) in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends is set at a rate of 35%, and a jackpot game is set at a rate of 45%. The jackpot type (big hit B7) in which the latent probability state is set after the end is set, and the jackpot type (big hit C7) in which the probability change state is set again after the jackpot game ends is set at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the probabilistic state is configured to be easier to shift to the latent probable state when the jackpot is won than in the normal state which is the initial state. As a result, when a big hit is won during the normal state and the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state can be made easier to shift to the latent state than the normal state. It is possible to facilitate continuous game play.

In addition, if the special symbol variation is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot in the state where the probability variation state is set, the condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (time saving end condition) is satisfied. , It is configured to shift to the latent state. In other words, when the probability variation state is set, the probability variation is the first transition condition (establishment probability is about 35%) that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot (winning probability 1/60). The latent state is set when any of the second transition conditions (establishment probability is about 30%) that is satisfied when the jackpot is won during the state and the jackpot B7 is set. Will be. Further, the above-mentioned first transition condition changes the probability of establishment according to the remaining period of the probability change state. For example, in the state where the special symbol change is executed 49 times during the probability change state, it is executed next. The first transition condition is satisfied (probability of establishment is about 90%) when the player loses the prize (probability of winning 59/60) in the 50th special symbol change.

In this way, when a plurality of transition conditions for transitioning the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent probable state are provided, the transition condition in which the probability of establishment changes according to the number of executions of the special symbol change (first transition condition). By providing a transition condition (second transition condition) in which the probability of establishment does not change according to the number of times the special symbol change is executed, the game is played against the player who is playing the game in the probabilistic state. The desired game result can be changed according to the progress of. Therefore, immediately after the probability variation state is set, that is, the probability that the latent probability state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition rather than the probability that the latent probability state is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition. In the period when the value is higher, the player is subjected to an effect of inciting whether or not the second transition condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined period elapses after the probability change state is set, that is, the first transition condition is satisfied. In the period when the probability that the latent probability information is set based on the above is higher than the probability that the latent probability state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition, the first transition condition is satisfied for the player. It is possible to perform an effect that incites whether or not.

Next, the flow of the game in the latent state will be described. When the latent state is set, as described above, the RUSH game is executed according to the number of reserved special figures (the number of reserved balls in special figure 1). Specifically, when the number of special figure holdings (special figure 1 holding number of balls) is 0,3,4, it is easy to select a normal length as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the latent state. When the RUSH game is executed and the number of special figure holdings (special figure 1 holding ball number) is 1 or 2, a length shorter than usual is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the latent state. It is configured so that an easy super RUSH game is executed. In this way, by changing the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation according to the game situation (special figure 1 reserved number of balls), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time, and by extension, the small hit game Since it is possible to change the number of times the game is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game in the latent state while expecting the player to perform a more advantageous RUSH game.

Both the above-mentioned RUSH game and the super RUSH game are games executed in the latent state, and the winning probability of the special symbol (winning in the second special symbol) is set to common (1/60). ing. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to be high (59/60). If the jackpot is won during the latent state, the jackpot type (big hit D7) in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends is set at a rate of 35%, and the latent state is set at a rate of 65% after the jackpot game ends. Is set again. On the other hand, if a small hit is won during the latent state, the game state does not change. That is, once the latent state is set, the RUSH game (game in the latent state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% of the jackpot winning) is set.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 174. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment has a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, and a voice lamp control provided in the main control device 110 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a part of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (a). FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is smaller than the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 116) by using the first random number 7 table 202fa instead of the first per random number table 202a. The small hit random number 7 table is replaced with the hit random number table 202de, the second hit random number 7 table 202fc is replaced with the second hit random number table 202b, and the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd is replaced with the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db. The difference is that the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe is provided instead of the pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff and the normal figure variation pattern selection 7 table 202fg are newly provided. ing. Further, although not shown, in the seventh embodiment, the range in which the value of the random number counter C1 per first can be updated is "0 to 399" to "0 to 599" with respect to the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the range in which the value of the random number counter C2 per second can be updated is changed from "0 to 999" to "0 to 299". Since the other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the random number 7 table 202fa per first will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b). FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 7 table 202fa per first. The first random number 7 table 202fa is determined to be a hit against the above-mentioned first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23 (b)) according to the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol. The difference is that the value of the random number counter C1 per first is specified.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which the special symbol lottery has been executed, if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot judgment value (special). If the range of the value "0 to 2" of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the value determined to be a jackpot in the symbol lottery and the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot determination value is the first. The range of the value "0 to 9" of the random number counter C1 per unit is defined. That is, in the seventh embodiment, no matter which type of special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/200, and the special symbol is selected. Regardless of which type of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state where the high probability state is set, the jackpot is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/60. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is defined in common for each special symbol type, but the value is not limited to this, and is different for each special symbol type. The value of the random number counter C1 per unit may be specified to be the jackpot determination value, or the number of values of the first random number counter C1 which is the jackpot determination value may be different for each special symbol type. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value (“0 to 2”) of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the low probability state of the special symbol is set is the value of the special symbol. Even when the high probability state is set, the value of the first random number counter C1 which is determined to be a big hit is set. With this configuration, the first look-ahead process (see S1757 of FIG. 135) and the second look-ahead process executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 of FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the second look-ahead process. In the process (see S1764 of FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes information on winning a big hit without executing a process of determining (predicting) the gaming state at a certain point in time. Not limited to this, at least a part or all of the value of the first random number counter C1 which is determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is not determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The contents of the random number table 202fa per first may be specified. With this configuration, when the same value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired, it is set when the jackpot determination using the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is executed. The determination result can be different depending on the game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for fraudulent acts to acquire the value of the specific first random number counter C1.

Next, the contents of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (c). FIG. 168 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 7 table 202fb. The small hit random number 7 table 202fb has a symbol in accordance with the change in the range of possible values of the first random number counter C1 with respect to the small hit random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the fourth embodiment described above. The only difference is that the types are different in that the range of the small hit determination value in the second special symbol is changed to "10 to 599", and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the seventh embodiment is configured so that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol, but the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol with a high probability (590/600).

Next, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (d). FIG. 168 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 168 (d), in the second random number 7 table 202fc, when the normal symbol is in the low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 has a value of "0", which is a normal symbol hit. In the case of a high probability state of a normal symbol, the random number counter C4 for the second acquired random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 299".

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (1/299) is set to the low probability. As a result, the execution probability of the game per normal symbol can be made different between the normal state and the latent state, which are the low probability states of the normal symbol, and the probabilistic state, which is the high probability state of the normal symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the same game method (right-handed game) is executed in the probabilistic state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the latent state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to. Then, in the right-handed game executed in the latent state, a game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by inserting the ball into the right second entrance 645 (see FIG. 157) is performed, and the game is in the probability changing state. In the right-handed game to be executed in, a game is configured in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by inserting a ball into the right electric accessory 164.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the details of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd. Like the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment, there are three jackpots of "big hit A7" to "big hit C7" as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "big hit D7" to "big hit E7" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type is "big hit A7". It is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds (R) normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the normal state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit. It should be noted that whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set is variable according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. More specifically, when the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set (0 is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f). That is, if the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 35 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A7", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A7" is determined is 35% (35/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "35 to 79" and "big hit B7" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit. If the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, 50 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit B7" is won in the probabilistic state and the latent state, the time saving counter 203h The value is set to 0.

That is, if the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state (50 times). On the other hand, when the "big hit B7" is won in the probabilistic state or the latent probable state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous latent probable state. Therefore, "big hit B7" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, if the player wins in a game state other than the normal state, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 45 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B7", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B7" is determined is 45% (45/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" and "big hit C7" as the jackpot type. This "big hit C7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit. If the "big hit C7" is won in the probability variation, 50 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while in the normal state and the latent state, if the "big hit C7" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. Is set to 0.

That is, in the normal state, winning the "big hit C7" is more advantageous to the player than winning the "big hit B7", and in the probabilistic state, winning the "big hit B7" rather than winning the "big hit C7". It is more advantageous for the player to win. Further, in the latent state, the degree of advantage does not change depending on whether the "big hit B7" is won or the "big hit C7" is won.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 20 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C7", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ratio of shifting to the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is determined according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured differently, with 20% in the normal state, 45% in the probabilistic state, and 65% in the latent state, so that the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends. .. With this configuration, when the game state shifts, for example, when the jackpot is won during the normal state and the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the latent state rather than the normal state. Since it is possible to provide an easy advantageous state, it is possible to enthusiastically continue the game for the player whose latent state has not been set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type is "big hit D7". Is specified in association with each other. This "big hit D7" is a big hit type in which the same contents as the above-mentioned "big hit A7" are defined, the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the type in which the special symbol is set to the normal state after the big hit is completed. The jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot). It should be noted that whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set is variable according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. More specifically, when the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set (0 is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f). That is, if the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 35 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D7", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit D7" is determined is 35% (35/100). In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed when the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, this "big hit D7" is a game. It is an end opportunity to end the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "35 to 99" and "big hit E7" as the jackpot type. This "big hit E7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit. If the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, 100 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit E7" is won in the probabilistic state and the latent state, the time saving counter 203h The value is set to 0.

That is, if the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state (100 times). On the other hand, when the "big hit E7" is won in the probabilistic state or the latent probable state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, "big hit E7" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, if the player wins in a game state other than the normal state, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 65 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E7", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E7" is determined is 65% (65/100).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is mainly executed. Is configured so that the latent state loops at a rate of 65% and the latent state ends (normal state is set) at a rate of 35%. Therefore, the player wishes not to win the "big hit E7" while winning the prize ball by the small hit game executed with a high probability (59/60) in the state where the latent probability state is set. It will be executed.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. Similar to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202fe determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is a data table to do. In the seventh embodiment, as the variation pattern selection table 202fe, the contents of the data table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state are partially changed with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the gaming state. Is different in that the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when is in the probability variation state and the latency 7 table 202fe3 referenced when is in the latency state are added.

First, the contents of the normal 7 table 202fe1 referred to when the gaming state is the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents specified in the normal 7 table 202fe1. The normal 7-table 202fe1 has a variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a second special as a symbol type with respect to the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above. There is a big difference in that the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the symbols (Special Figure 2) are defined respectively.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99" and the normal fluctuation (10000 milliseconds (10 seconds)). )) Is associated, super fluctuations (15,000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) are associated with the range of "100 to 179", and special fluctuations (20,000 milliseconds (20 seconds)) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". Are associated with each other.

In FIG. 170, the length of the fluctuation time defined for various fluctuation patterns is shown in milliseconds (1/1000 second unit), but for convenience of explanation, the length of the fluctuation time is shown in the following description. Will be described using seconds.

As the fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol is out of the lottery, the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 180". , The range of "181 to 197" is associated with the out-of-middle fluctuation (10 seconds), and the value of "197,198" is associated with the out-of-order super variation (15 seconds).

On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, long fluctuations (long fluctuations per hit, long fluctuations missed) (600 seconds) are associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the lottery result. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the total value of the reserved storage numbers of all the special symbols. In this embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have the hold storage function, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is substantially based on the number of hold storages (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol. , And the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be selected. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 of FIG. 139) is executed after the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, the fluctuation pattern is not selected when the number of special figure reserved balls is four. On the other hand, since the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 of FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery as in the fourth embodiment described above, the special symbol is reserved. The fluctuation pattern may be selected when the number of balls (special figure 1 reserved balls) is four.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (a), the contents of the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the probability variation state will be described. FIG. 171 (a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the probability variation 7 table 202fe2. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the game in which the right electric accessory 164 is won a ball by the right-handed game and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. Will be done. Then, for the first special symbol variation in the probability variation state, a variation pattern having the same contents as the above-mentioned normal 7 table 202fe1 is defined. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern in which a variation time (60 seconds) shorter than the variation pattern defined in the normal 7 table 202fe1 is set is defined. Since the other elements are the same as those of the above-mentioned normal 7 table 202fe1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right electric accessory 164 is opened with high probability, so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the right second entrance 645. It is configured to be. That is, it is configured so that it is more difficult for the ball to enter the right second entrance 645 when the right-handed game is executed in the probabilistic state than when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. .. Further, when the normal state is set, the game of entering the ball into the first ball opening 64 by the left-handed game is the proper game method, and when the probability variation state is set, the right-handed game is used to move the ball to the right. The game in which the ball is inserted into the electric accessory 164 is configured to be an appropriate game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state, the ball can be easily entered into the right second entrance 645, and thus the ball can be easily entered into the right second entrance 645. By setting a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is defined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during, the right-handed game is executed in the normal state, and the second special symbol is executed. The act of executing the lottery is suppressed.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game, which is an appropriate game method, is executed in the probabilistic state, most of the balls fired by the right-handed game play the right electric role as described above with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160. The ball enters the object 164, but when the ball flowing down the right region behaves irregularly, for example, when the balls flowing down the right region collide with each other and jump over the open / close door 164r1 in the open state, the second entry to the right The ball may enter the ball mouth 645.

In the present embodiment, when the proper game method is executed in this way, the ball flows down in an unpredictable manner, and the ball enters the right second entrance 645, that is, the probability change. When a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state ( 60 seconds) is set. Further, as will be described in detail later, when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change state is in the latent state regardless of the number of special symbol changes executed during the probability change state. It is configured so that it can be migrated to.

As a result, the player who is executing the game in the probabilistic state is made to pay close attention to the behavior of the ball flowing down the right area, and is enthusiastically playing the game while expecting that the second special symbol lottery is executed. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (b), the contents of the latent probability 7 table 202fe3 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol variation in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 171 (b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the latent probability 7 table 202fe3. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the ball is made to enter the second ball entrance 645 by the right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. The game to make is performed. Then, by executing a long fluctuation (10 minutes) for the first special symbol fluctuation executed in the latent state, the number of reserved memories (special) of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the latent state is executed. (Fig. 1 Number of reserved balls) is configured to be the upper limit. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set in the latent state is changed according to the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1) of the special symbol (first special symbol). It is configured.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the variation pattern determined in response to the first special symbol lottery is the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Regardless of this, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (super long fluctuation per hit, super long fluctuation off) is associated. That is, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is always set for the first special symbol fluctuation executed in the latent state.

On the other hand, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a winning (big hit) is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the number of holding special figures (number of holdings of special figure 1) is "0 to 3", the fluctuation type When a long fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the counter CS1 "0 to 198" and the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 hold number) is "4", all of the variation type counter CS1 A short variation (1 second) is associated with the range "0 to 198".

In addition, as a fluctuation pattern determined when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed (including small hits A and C), the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation number) is "1, 2". Is associated with a short variation (0.5 seconds) out of the entire range "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 hold) is "0, 3, 4". In this case, the deviation middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Further, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a small hit B is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is determined when the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation number) is "0, 1, 2". When the small hit middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the type counter CS1 and the number of special figure holdings (special figure 1 holding number) is "3,4", the fluctuation type counter A small hit short variation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of CS1.

That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the latent state is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. As the fluctuation pattern, a short fluctuation of 0.5 seconds and a long fluctuation of 10 seconds are set, and the small hits A and B, which are set at about 95% of the small hits, were won. In that case, if the number of special figures held is a specific number (1, 2), a game (super RUSH game) in which a short variation (0.5 seconds) is set is executed, and a game other than the specific number (0, 3, 4) is executed. ), The game (RUSH game) in which the long variation (10 seconds) is set is executed.

With this configuration, the number of small hit games per unit time can be made different according to the number of special figure holdings (special figure 1 holding number of balls) in the latent state, and as a result, the unit time The amount of benefits (number of prize balls) that the player can obtain can be different. Therefore, the player who is executing the RUSH game in the latent state can be enthusiastically played with the aim of the super RUSH game which is more advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if the small hit B is won, that is, if the small hit type in which the process of discarding (forced stop) the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is won is won, the number of special figure pending (special figure 1 reserved). When the number of balls) is larger than the specific number (1, 2) (3, 4), a short variation (0.5 seconds) is set, and the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold ball number) is set to the specific number (1). , 2) When it is less than or equal to (0, 1, 2), the long variation (10 seconds) is set. That is, if a small hit that can reduce the number of balls held in Special Figure 1 is won, and if the number of balls held in Special Figure 1 (the number of balls held in Special Figure 1) is larger than the specified number, the number of balls held in Special Figure 1 is held. It is configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is determined than when (the number of reserved special figures) is less than a specific number.

With this configuration, if the small hit B is won when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (special figure reserved number) is larger than the specific number, the first special symbol change that is being executed is immediately discarded. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the number of balls held in the special figure 1 (the number of balls held in the special figure) to a specific number. On the other hand, if the small hit B is won when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of special figure reserved) is less than the specific number, a long fluctuation time is set as the small hit fluctuation, so it is being executed. It is possible to lengthen the period required to discard the first special symbol variation of the above, and thus it is possible to prevent the number of balls held in the special figure 1 (the number of reserved balls in the special figure) from being reduced from the specific number. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation) of the second special symbol fluctuation is more in the case where the number of special figure reserved balls is "0", which is the lower limit value, than in the case where the number of special figure reserved balls is other than the lower limit value. It is configured so that long-term fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) can be easily set as the time). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), when the number of special figure reserved balls is "0", which is the lower limit value, it fluctuates for a long time (10 seconds) regardless of which small hit is won. Fluctuation) is configured to be set.

In this way, by imposing a penalty that the fluctuation is likely to be executed for a long time when the number of reserved balls in the special figure is "0", which is the lower limit value, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is set after the latent state is set. The game is interrupted until (the number of reserved special symbols) becomes "0". Specifically, the game is played until the first special symbol fluctuation in the latent state in which the fluctuation time of 10 minutes is set is executed four times. After the interruption, it is possible to suppress the act of executing the game in the latent state.

In the present embodiment, the degree of advantage in the latent state is divided into two stages according to the number of reserved special figures, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent state is determined according to the number of reserved special figures. The degree of advantage in the middle may be divided into three or more stages. In this case, for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol set when the number of balls reserved for the special figure is "0", which is the lower limit value, the fluctuation time (for example, the fluctuation time longer than the above-mentioned long-time fluctuation (10-second fluctuation)) is longer. , 30 seconds) can be set to increase the penalty that the long-time fluctuation is likely to be executed when the number of special figure holding balls is "0", which is the lower limit value, or the special figure holding Of the specific numbers (1, 2), the number of special figure reservations on one side (for example, 1) has a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 seconds) than the number of special figure reservations on the other side (for example, 2). It may be configured to be settable so that an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player can be executed.

In addition, there are cases where the latent probability state is set, that is, when the jackpot where the latent probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game is won, and when the latent probability state is set via the probability change state. It is configured to refer to different fluctuation pattern tables, and the one in which the latent state is set when one of the triggers (for example, the trigger in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends) is established is the other trigger (for example). For example, an advantageous game (second special symbol variation) that is more advantageous to the player during the latent state than when the latent state is set due to the establishment of the latent state via the probability change state). A game in which a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern of the above) may be easily executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected (determined) with the same specified contents regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed in the latent state. Not limited to, for example, the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first period (first half period) after the latent state is set and the second period (second half period) after the first period elapses. In this case, for example, for the latent probability 7 table 202fe3 shown in FIG. 171 (b), the number of special figure fluctuations (first) since the latent probability state is set. Different fluctuation patterns are defined according to the total number of special symbol fluctuations and the second special symbol fluctuations), and the second period is more advantageous to the player than the first period (second special symbol fluctuations). It is preferable to configure the game so that a short fluctuation time can be easily selected as the fluctuation pattern of the game). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more advantageous by continuing the latent state for a long time, that is, the longer the period during which the jackpot is not won (so-called hamari period) during the latent state. It is possible to provide a novel playability.

In addition, when the probability change state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and based on winning the small hit C, the probability is latent without executing the specified number of special symbol fluctuations (50 times). When the state is changed, the advantageous game (a game in which a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation) that is most advantageous to the player may be executed. In this case, for example, for the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 that is referred to when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol variation is the specified number of times (50 times) for the variation pattern data referred to during the probability variation state. ) It is sufficient to specify the period until the execution, and to specify the special fluctuation pattern data that is referred to when the state shifts to the latent state within the specified number of times. That is, for the special symbol variation executed in the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 in which the variation pattern data is specified for the range of the specified number of special symbol variations (50 times) during the probability variation state within the specified number of times. The fluctuation pattern data of the above and the fluctuation pattern data for the special symbol fluctuation executed in the latent state may be defined in advance.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while more expecting that the second special symbol change (lottery) will be executed during the probability change state. In this case, after the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends reaches the specified number (50 times), the variation is made with reference to the latent probability 7 table 202fe3 shown in FIG. 171 (b). It may be configured to set a pattern, or even after the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends reaches the specified number of times (50 times), the state shifts to the latent state within the specified number of times. The special fluctuation pattern data referred to in the case of the above may be continuously settable.

Although the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in accordance with each gaming state has been described above with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171 but not limited to the example described in the present embodiment, the setting is not limited to the example described in the present embodiment. The fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern set based on the game state, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the result of the hit / fail judgment does not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment (compared to other fluctuation patterns). It suffices if it is stipulated so that it does not deviate from the technical idea relatively). Further, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, an example in which a specific fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions is shown, but the variation type acquired under each specific condition is shown. A different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be selectably configured according to the value of the counter CS1. In this case, it is stipulated that the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern that can be latent and the average value calculated based on the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern do not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment. For example, as a fluctuation pattern for special figure 1 defined in the latent probability 7 table 202fe3, it is executed in the latent probability state with a small probability (for example, when the value "1" of the fluctuation type counter CS1). It may be configured so that a fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can be set for the second special symbol fluctuation to be set is set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to rarely provide a game that is unexpected to the player without changing the flow of the main game executed in the latent state. Can improve the interest of. In the above-mentioned example, the fluctuation pattern selected for the latent state is given as an example, but based on the same technical idea, for the fluctuation pattern selected when another gaming state is set. Of course, the same technical idea may be applied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172 (a), the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described. The small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table that is referred to when selecting a small hit type after winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery, and corresponds to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. It is stipulated that three types of small hits, "small hit A7", "small hit B7", and "small hit C7", are selected.

If you win a small hit in the special symbol lottery, depending on the selected small hit type, the small hit operation content, the symbol confirmation time (the period required to confirm the stop display of the special symbol), and the special symbol being executed It is configured so that the processing contents for fluctuations can be different. In this embodiment, as explained using the small hit random number 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 168 (c)), the small hit is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 of FIG. 179) executed by the control device 110, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is referred to.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, "small hit A" is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 74". , "Small hit B7" is associated with the range of "75 to 79", and "Small hit C" is associated with the range of "80 to 99". Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of "small hit A" selected at the time of winning the small hit is 75% (75/100), " The ratio of selecting "small hit B" is 5% (5/100), and the ratio of selecting "small hit C" is 20% (20/100).

When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Further, "0.2 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and the process of interrupting the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of suspending the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed is executed, the process of suspending the process for measuring the lapse of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation during execution is performed. Will be executed. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on, and while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to on, the first special symbol (special). A process of skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di showing the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of FIG. 1) is executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the restart condition is established (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to off), and the process of updating the value of the interrupted special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is restarted. .. With this configuration, it is possible to prohibit the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation during execution from being reduced while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied). Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the winning first special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed in duplicate. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, since the process of measuring the change time elapsed of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change that was executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied when the small hit is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol change during execution is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol change during execution may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the first special symbol change may be interrupted when the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed. That is, even if the interruption condition is satisfied, the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is continuously executed, and the update process is executed until the preset variation time elapses. If it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied and it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change may not be executed until the restart condition is satisfied. As a result, it is not necessary to interrupt the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation in the middle, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the state where the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, that is, the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is skipped, the first 3 On the display surface of the symbol display device 81, the interruption effect of interrupting the variation display of the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) and the fact that the first special symbol variation is interrupted as the current game situation are played. A notification display for notifying a person and a guidance display for indicating that the suspended special symbol change is resumed after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small hit game) are configured to be displayable. As a result, when the special symbol change is interrupted, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as the above-mentioned interruption effect, for example, an effect mode of the variable display effect (variable display effect using the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is preferable to configure different interruption effects to be executable according to the above. For example, when the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the third symbol is fluctuating at a speed that is difficult for the player to see, as an interruption effect, an effect of continuing the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol until the restart condition is satisfied is executed. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can see the fluctuating third symbol. Is configured to execute an effect of continuing the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol until the restart condition is satisfied as the interruption effect. In this way, by making the variation effect mode (interruption effect mode) of the period during which the interruption condition is satisfied different according to the variation effect mode of the third symbol at the time when the interruption condition is satisfied, the player can see. It is possible to execute the interruption effect without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, when the interruption condition is satisfied immediately before the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped, for example, among a plurality of symbols, the other symbols other than one symbol are stopped at the combination indicating the jackpot winning (combination of symbols showing the same number). It is displayed, and the interruption condition during the fluctuation effect (so-called reach effect) that fuels whether the remaining one symbol stops at the combination indicating the jackpot winning (whether all the symbols stop at the same number). If is satisfied, the interruption effect of continuing the variation display for the remaining one symbol described above may be executed, or the one symbol in the variation display may be displayed indicating that the interruption condition is satisfied. The reach effect may be terminated by displaying the stop display in a mode (for example, "temporarily rest !!"). Then, after the restart condition is satisfied, the characters "Break end !!" are displayed, and the result of the reach effect that was executed before the interruption is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect. good. As a result, various effects can be executed according to the timing when the interruption condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to diversify the effects to be executed based on the establishment of the interruption condition and enhance the effect. Can be done.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 172 (a). When "small hit B" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of discarding the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed is executed, the first special symbol change regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol change being executed and the remaining fluctuation time. The process for stopping and displaying the lottery result in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order is executed. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, the process of clearing the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) to 0 is performed. Execute and set a forced stop command indicating that the first special symbol change has been stopped and displayed. Furthermore, if the first special symbol change that is the target of the forced stop has won the jackpot, the information indicating the jackpot winning set at the start timing of the first special symbol change is cleared (special figure 1 jackpot flag). Set 203i to off).

When the forced stop command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the forced stop command (when the forced stop display condition is satisfied), the third symbol change during execution (the third symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol change). A forced stop effect for switching the variation display mode of (third symbol variation) displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is executed.

Although detailed description is omitted, the forced stop condition is satisfied based on the winning of "small hit B", and the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. , The special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is forcibly stopped due to a loss. Further, depending on the timing at which the forced stop condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the forced stop effect for displaying the forced stop display of the third symbol change during execution is configured to be different.

Specifically, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the third symbol is fluctuating at a speed at which it is difficult for the player to see the fluctuating third symbol. When the forced stop display condition is satisfied, as a forced stop effect, an effect is executed in which the forced stop display is executed in a short period (first period) with respect to the third symbol fluctuation display during high-speed fluctuation, and the third symbol is executed. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can see the fluctuating third symbol, the slow fluctuation is performed as a forced stop effect. It is configured to execute the effect that the forced stop display is executed by using the second period longer than the above-mentioned first period with respect to the third symbol variation display inside.

That is, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol that is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a sudden deviation, the game is played. In order not to give a sense of discomfort to the person, the third symbol is displayed forcibly stopped in a short period (first period) for the purpose of immediately notifying the player that the forced stop condition has been satisfied. On the other hand, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, the player can identify the third symbol that is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, if the forced stop effect is suddenly executed in that state, it is executed. If the production mode of the third symbol variation in the inside is suddenly changed, the player feels uncomfortable. In addition, since the forced stop effect is to stop and display the third symbol in a display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is finally out of order, the effect mode of the third symbol change during execution is suddenly switched. After that, the third symbol is displayed off the display, which causes a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced.

On the other hand, when the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol. , As the forced stop effect, it is configured to execute the effect that the forced stop display is executed by using the second period longer than the first period described above for the third symbol fluctuation display during the low speed fluctuation, and is being executed. According to the content of the third symbol variation display of the above, the effect mode of the forced stop effect to be executed during the second period is set, and the off display is finally executed. Therefore, according to the variation effect mode of the third symbol at the time when the forced stop condition is satisfied, from the time when the forced stop condition is satisfied until the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the effect mode and the effect period different, it is possible to execute the forced stop effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

When "small hit C" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Further, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "small hit A". Further, when "small hit C" is selected during the high probability state (probability variation state) of the normal symbol, a process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is executed. That is, "small hit C" is set as a time-saving end condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the processing to be executed for the first special symbol change being executed differs depending on the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. I'm letting you. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in which small hit type is selected when the small hit is won. Further, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be different depending on the content of the process (interruption, discard) executed for the first special symbol change.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the determination time of the special symbol is set to be different depending on the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, the period from when the special symbol for indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed until the small hit game is executed can be made different according to the selected small hit type. Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing at which the small hit game is executed and make it difficult to execute the game of firing the ball.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game is configured to be executed with the same open content regardless of which small hit type is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is selected. Depending on the type of small hit, the type of attacker to be opened in the small hit game may be different, or the content of the opening operation (opening time, number of times of opening) may be different.

Next, the contents of the general map variation pattern selection table 202fg will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal map variation pattern selection table 202fg. The normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol lottery, and is based on the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 and the set gaming state. Each data is defined so that different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are selected accordingly.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation time is set in the range of 10 seconds to 30 seconds with respect to the value of the second variation type counter CS3 in the range of "0 to 198". Each fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) is specified. More specifically, the fluctuation pattern of "10 seconds" in the range of "0 to 99", the fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds" in the range of "100 to 149", and "30 seconds" in the range of "150 to 198". Fluctuation patterns are associated with each other. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation patterns of different fluctuation times to be selectable according to the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 acquired when the same gaming state is set, it is normal for the player. The stop display timing of the symbol variation, and by extension, the normal symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the game per normal symbol is executed.

Further, during the probability variation state, a variation pattern (short variation) of "0.8 seconds" is associated with the entire range in which the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS3 is "0 to 198". With this configuration, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery in the right-handed game executed during the probability change state, can enter the right electric accessory 164 with high probability. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the latent state is set, the acquired fluctuation pattern of "0.1 seconds" is associated with the range of "0 to 169" for the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3, and "170 to 198". The fluctuation pattern of "10 seconds" is associated with the range of "". With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 in the latent state than in the latent state, and the ball is appropriately used as the right electric accessory in the latent state. The ball can be entered into the object 164.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a probability variation flag 203fa for storing a high probability state of a special symbol is added, and the other parts are the same. be. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and numbers of game states that can be set are different from those of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, for example, the game state can be stored in the game state storage area 203 g. Although the types and numbers of information are different, the role of the game state storage area 203g and the processing contents for updating the stored information are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the game state has changed to the probability change state, and is set to on when it is determined that the probability change state is set. Then, it is set to off when the end condition of the probability change state is satisfied.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the present embodiment, with respect to the fifth embodiment described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the fluctuation number counter 223fc, the preparation state flag 223fd, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe , Special figure 2 Fluctuation time counter 203ff, RUSH middle flag 223fg, ceiling effect executing flag 223fh, super RUSH middle flag 223fi are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are different from the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation start flag 223d and stop type selection flag 223e in that the target is changed to the second special symbol. doing. Therefore, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the process of determining whether or not the flag is set to ON and the process of determining the setting status of the flag are the first special. Whereas the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb were executed based on the symbol variation, the flag was turned on in the process executed based on the second special symbol variation. A process of determining whether or not to set the flag and a process of determining the setting status of the flag are executed. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation number counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol variation.

The ready state flag 223fd is a flag for indicating whether or not it is in the ready state. If it is on, it means that it is in the ready state (see FIG. 162 (a)), and if it is off, it means that it is in the prepared state. Means not. In the latent state, the flag 223fd in the ready state is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the prepared state has already been completed (switched to the display in RUSH), and whether or not the effect of the prepared state is executed. , Determines whether to perform the RUSH state effect.

The RUSH middle flag 223fg is a flag for indicating whether or not the RUSH game is in progress (consecutive villa mode). It means that you are not in RUSH game (ream villa mode). In the latent state, the flag 223fd in the ready state and the flag 223fg in the RUSH are referred to, and it is determined which state to set the effect mode.

Whether or not the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is executing the effect of the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (top arrival effect), which is executed with the probability variation number or the time reduction number remaining 1. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is on, it means that the peak reaching effect (see FIG. 161 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the peak reaching effect is not being executed. do. When the symbol stop timing is reached while the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is on, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode and the preparation state is set. In this embodiment, even if the remaining number of probable changes (time reductions) in the probabilistic state is not 1, the time reduction ends when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit C). It is configured so that the condition is satisfied, and the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is set to ON. In this case, the effect mode is gradually changed according to the subtraction situation of the number of probability changes, and the summit arrival effect is suddenly executed as compared with the case where the summit arrival effect is executed. Therefore, for example, a small hit Based on the information indicating that C has been won and the setting status of the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh, it is preferable to configure the warp effect to be executed as a dedicated peak reaching effect. As a result, the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without discomfort, and the player reaches the summit earlier than planned (the latent state is set). It is possible to notify that in an easy-to-understand manner.

The super RUSH middle flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the number of special figure reserved balls is a specific number while the RUSH game is being executed, and that the RUSH game that is advantageous to the player is being executed. If it is off, it means that it is in a super RUSH game, and if it is off, it means that it is not in a super RUSH game. When the super RUSH middle flag 223fi is set to on, the super RUSH effect (see FIG. 165) is executed.

<About the main control process in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the content of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 182. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment has a lottery of a first special symbol (special figure 1) (special figure 1 lottery) and a lottery of a second special symbol (special figure 2), similarly to the fourth embodiment described above. (Special figure 2 lottery) is configured to be executable in duplicate, and the function (holding storage function) for temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol is deleted from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. The points that have been set, the points that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set, and the types of small hits that are set when the small hits are won in the special figure 2 lottery are increased, and the types of small hits that are set are increased. A game in which the processing to be executed is different for the first special symbol change (special figure 1 change) being executed according to the above, and when the set small hit type is a specific small hit type. It differs in that it is configured to shift the state (shift the high-probability state of a normal symbol to the low-probability state). Further, as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the difference is that the contents specified in the various data tables referred to in the control process executed by the main control device 110 are different. .. Other than that, it is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S258 in FIG. 124) of the fourth embodiment described above. When it is determined that it is not set to ON (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol fluctuation which is stopped this time is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 124) is executed. When it is determined that the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) is changed and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), that is, the first special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped this time. Among the processes executed when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, various flags and various counters are cleared based on the stop of the jackpot fluctuation (start of the jackpot game) (S860 in FIG. 124), and the probability change flag 203fa is used. The difference is that the process in which is added (S870 in FIG. 175) is executed, and the other processes are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 of FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 7 (see S278 of FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 of FIG. 176). The time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) determines that the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to ON for the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125) in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the gaming state set in the case (S2104: Yes in FIG. 125) is changed, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, the gaming states are the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, normal). It is configured to be able to set three types of gaming states: a high-probability state of a symbol) and a latent state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol). Then, when the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to ON, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. The state shifts from the state in which the probability change mode is set to the state in which the latent probability mode (RUSH game) is executed.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). Since the seventh embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that it does not have the hold storage function of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is started (second). The content of the information to be referred to when (determining whether the start condition for starting the special symbol change is satisfied) is changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON. (S951), if it is determined that it is set to on (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S951 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), then the ball moves to the second entry port (right second entry port 645). It is determined whether or not the ball has entered (S974). In the present embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have the hold storage function (because it does not have the second special symbol hold ball number counter and the second special symbol hold ball storage area), the second special symbol In the state where the fluctuation start process 7 (S280) is executed, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 and has acquired the right to execute the second special symbol lottery.

Although detailed description is omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the ball has entered the right second entry port 645, the second special symbol change start process 7 in the control process of the main control device 110. (S280) is the length of the period during which the execution is performed a plurality of times, and the detection signal is output for a period shorter than the shortest fluctuation time set for the second special symbol variation. It is configured so that the detection signal indicating that the ball has entered the right second entry port 645 is not missed due to the processing timing of various control processes executed by the main control device 110. Here, in the process of S974, once the winning of the ball is detected, the process for starting the second special symbol change is executed, and the second special symbol change is executed at a predetermined fluctuation time. Therefore, even if the control process of the main control device 110 is configured to output the detection signal for the length of the period during which the second special symbol variation start process 7 (S280) is executed a plurality of times, one detection is performed. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol variation from being executed a plurality of times based on the output of the signal. Not limited to this, a flag is set so that the currently output detection signal becomes invalid when the process for starting the second special symbol variation is executed based on the reception of the detection signal. Processing may be added. With such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably suppress that the second special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times based on the output of one detection signal.

In the process of S974, if it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entry port (right second ball entry port 645) (S974: Yes), then the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed. (S978), after that, the same processes of S959 to S963 as those of the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 of FIG. 126) described above are executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S974 that the ball has not entered the second ball entry port (right second ball entry port 645) (S974: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 of FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 of FIG. 177) will be described. do. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is a special symbol set for the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot judgment corresponding to the probability state is executed, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, S1051 and S1052 are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) described above. If it is determined that the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to ON in the process of S1052 (S1052: Yes), the processes of S1053 to S1056 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1071. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is not set to ON (S1052: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1071 as it is.

In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203fa is set to on, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol (S1071), and it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to on. (S1071: Yes), the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) with reference to the data defined in the high probability state of the first random number table (7 random numbers per first table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)). To get. On the other hand, in the processing of S1071, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is not set to ON, that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol (S1071: No), the first random number table (7 random numbers per first). The lottery result (win / fail determination result) is acquired by referring to the data defined in the low probability state of 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)).

Then, after the lottery result is acquired by the processing of S1073 or the processing of S1072, the same processing of S1058 to S1062 as the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S955 of FIG. 127) is executed, and the present End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) will be described. The special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 of FIG. 129) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. Yes, this is a process executed when selecting a variation pattern when the result of the target second special symbol lottery is not a big hit (it is a miss including a small hit).

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277), and as shown in FIG. 179, the above-mentioned special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 of FIG. 130). On the other hand, when selecting the fluctuation pattern, the difference is that the processing content when selecting (determining) the small hit type is different for the small hit won this time, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the same processing of S1371 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 of FIG. 130) is executed, and this second special When it is determined that the lottery result of the symbol (special figure 2 lottery result) is not a small hit (S1371: No), the same processing of S1377 to S1379 as the special drawing 2 deviation pattern selection process (see S1257 of FIG. 130). Is executed to end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1371 that it is a small hit (S1371: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1372), and the small hit type is acquired based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. Selection 7 The small hit type is selected with reference to the table 202ff (S1391). Next, the same processes of S1374 to S1376 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1257 of FIG. 130) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the process of selecting the small hit type is executed, but the process is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be obtained. When the determination process (second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178)) determines that the current lottery result is a small hit, a process of selecting the small hit type is also executed. It is also possible to specify different small hit judgment values for each small hit type, and make them correspond to the small hit judgment value (value of the first random number counter C1) used when the small hit is determined to be won. It may be configured so that the small hit type is determined. As a result, the types of counters can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (S283) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (S283). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (S283) is a process executed when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation has elapsed and the second special symbol fluctuation during the fluctuation is stopped, and is the second described above. It differs from the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) in that a part of the processing executed when the second special symbol fluctuation to be processed is a jackpot fluctuation is changed, and other than that. Are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (S283) is executed, first, the same processing of S1551 to S1559 as the above-mentioned second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) is executed, and then the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (S283) is executed. FIG. 2 The jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol lottery among the jackpot flags 203i), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time saving end waiting flag 203dm, and the probability change flag 203fa are set to off. The value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

That is, when one special symbol change is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot winning, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed and the remaining fluctuation time are completely discarded and then stopped and displayed. All the information related to the game state (probability change flag 203fa, time saving counter 203h, time saving end waiting flag 203dm) is also reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during the jackpot game, the privilege (prize ball) other than the privilege (prize ball) obtained by winning the ball in the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) opened by the jackpot game is given. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire the prize, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given an excessive privilege.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having the simultaneous fluctuation specification, the special symbol variation executed before the jackpot game is restarted after the jackpot game is completed, or the number of time reductions is subtracted by the information based on the special symbol variation executed before the jackpot game. Since it is not played, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. When the process of S1580 is completed, the same processes of S1561 to S1563 as the above-described second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S263 of FIG. 132) are then executed to end this process.

Next, the contents of the special drawing 2 detachment stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process 7 (S1584). The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 7 (S1584) determines that the small hit flag 203 deg is set to ON for the above-mentioned special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see S1564 in FIG. 133) (S1651 :. Yes), the small hit process (S1671) is executed. Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description will be omitted. Here, the contents of the small hit process (S1671) executed in the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG. 182.

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit process (S1671). This small hit process (S1671) is executed when the second special symbol that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed, and is a process (interruption process, forced stop (interruption process, forced stop) according to the selected small hit type. This is for executing the (discard) process) for the first special symbol change during execution.

When the small hit process (S1671) is executed, first, in the small hit type set for the second special symbol variation this time (special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179)). The selected small hit type) is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit A" (S1683). When it is determined that it is "small hit A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 1 is changing (the first special symbol is changing) (S1684), and the special figure 1 is changing. (S1684: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S1685), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is turned on is set (S1686). , End this process. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1683, when it is determined that it is not "small hit A" (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit C" (S1687), and " When it is determined that it is "small hit C" (S1687: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is in the probabilistic state (in the high probability state of the normal symbol). (S1688). When it is determined that the current state is in the probabilistic state (S1688: Yes), that is, the second special symbol change in which the "small hit B" is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probabilistic state is processed this time. If it is a target, then it is determined whether the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to on (S1689), and it is determined that the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is not turned on (S1689: No), that is, the probability change. When it is determined that it is not the final fluctuation of the state, the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to ON (S1690), and the process proceeds to S1684 described above. Further, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the processing of S1688, that is, it is determined that the current state is not in the probability change state (S1688: No), or in the processing of S1689, the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set. When it is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that it is the final variation of the probabilistic state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1684 described above.

That is, when the "small hit C" is won in the probabilistic state, the time saving end wait flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted to 0, so that the probabilistic change state is in progress. It is possible to shift the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent state before executing the special symbol change (lottery) of the above a predetermined number of times (50 times). Therefore, the "small hit C" winning is set as an end condition for ending the probability change state (high probability state of the normal symbol). In the present embodiment, since the latent probability state is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state, the number of special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state is small, that is, the jackpot is won during the probability change state. By setting the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 0, it is possible to shift to the latent state with a low possibility of shifting to the normal state without shifting to the latent state. The end condition established by winning the "small hit C" is the end condition that is more advantageous to the player than the end condition that shifts to. When the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (when the normal symbol is in the low probability state), that is, when it is in the normal state or the latent state, the process for ending the time saving state is not executed. , The same process is executed when the "small hit C" is won and when the "small hit A" is won.

In the processing of S1687, when it is determined that the item is not "small hit C", that is, when it is determined that the read small hit type is "small hit B" (S1687: No), the special figure 1 is currently changing. (S1691) is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (S1691), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing (S1691: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 change is executed. (S1692), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed at the off symbol (S1693), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is set to on, that is, whether the first special symbol variation during execution is the jackpot variation ( S1695), when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is set to on (S1695: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag (big hit flag 203i) is set. Of these, the flag corresponding to the first special symbol) is set to off (S1696), the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S1697), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not changing (S1691: No), this process is terminated as it is. Further, in the processing of S1695, the special figure 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is not set to on, that is, the first special symbol variation during execution is an out-of-range variation. If it is determined that (S1695: No), the processing of S1696 and S1697 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 192. First, the contents of the command determination process 7 (S4192) will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61), and is received from the main control device 110 in the same manner as the command determination process 7 (S4192) described above. It executes processing corresponding to various commands.

When the command determination process 7 (S4192) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S4231), and if it is determined that the state command has been received (S4231: Yes), the state command reception process is executed (S4232). , End this process. This received command process (S4232) executes the same process as the received command process (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) described above. Although detailed description will be omitted, a state command indicating the current gaming state is received, a mode effect mode is set according to the game state, and a corresponding effect mode (for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is set. , Rear image) display command is set. For example, when a state command indicating a probabilistic state is received, a display command corresponding to an effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 climbs a mountain is set, and when a state command indicating a latent state is received, a state command is received. A display command corresponding to the preparation state shown in FIG. 162 or the effect mode for showing the RUSH game state shown in FIG. 163 is set. The details of the switching control of the effect mode in the latent state will be described later.

In the command determination process 7 (S4192), the order of determining whether or not the status command is received is different from the above-mentioned command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to execute the determination of whether the state command is received before the determination of whether the special figure fluctuation pattern command is received. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute the process based on the special figure variation pattern command after determining the current gaming state. Not limited to this, various command determinations may be executed in the same order as the above-mentioned command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61).

When it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of S4231 (S4231: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203), and when it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203). : Yes), set the fluctuation start flag (special figure fluctuation start flag 223d, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special figure fluctuation pattern command to on (S4233), and issue the fluctuation pattern command from the received command. Extract (S4234). Then, this process ends.

When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received in the processing of S4203 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205), and it is determined that the command has been received. (S4205: Yes) sets the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command to on (S4235), and from the received command. The stop type is extracted (S4236). Then, this process ends.

If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the process of S4205 (S4205: No), the same processes of S4208 to S4214 as the above-mentioned command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 61) are executed, and the process of S4214 is performed. If it is determined that the stop-related command has been received in the process, the stop-related process 7 is executed (S4236), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

In the process of S4214, when it is determined that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the same processes of S4216 to S4218 as the above-mentioned command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 61) are executed, and S4214 is executed. If it is determined that the stop-related command has been received in the process of, the hit-related process 7 is executed (S4237), and this process is terminated. Although detailed description of the hit-related process 7 (S4237) is omitted, the above-mentioned hit-related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67) is a process based on the reception of a small hit-related command instead of the accessory hit-related command. Is executed. Similar to the above-mentioned bonus-hit-related command, this small-hit-related command indicates a small-hit start command indicating the start of the small-hit game, and indicates the start of a round game released by the winning device to be operated during the small-hit game. At least a round command and an ending command indicating the end of the small hit game are included, and a process of setting a display command corresponding to each received command is executed. As a result, the effect mode corresponding to the small hit game executed by the main control device 110 can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

Then, in the process of S4218, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4220: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) executed in the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be described with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related process 7 (S4236). This stop-related process 7 (S4236) is a preparation state setting process (S4641 in FIG. 184) when a special figure confirmation command is received (S4601: Yes) for the above-mentioned stop-related process (see S4215 in FIG. 65). When it is determined that the special figure discard command has been received in the process of S4642 by executing the process of determining whether the special figure discard command has been received (S4642) and the point where the process of executing (see) has been added (S4642: Yes), the difference is that the process of executing the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641) will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641). As described above, this preparation state setting process (S4641) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162 (a)). In this preparation state setting process (S4641), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is on (S8001), and if it is determined that it is off (S8001: No), the state shifts to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility of causing it, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S8001, when it is determined that the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is on (S8001: Yes), the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is set to off (S8002), and the display mode during RUSH preparation (S8002). (See FIG. 162 (a)) is set (S8003). Next, both the RUSH middle flag 223fg and the ready state flag 223fd are set to ON (S8004), and this process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 185), the display mode of the preparation state can be set from the time when the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode (RUSH game).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the latent probability state is an advantageous game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hit game is frequently executed (consecutive villa mode). And configured the normal state as the most unfavorable normal mode. Then, by ending the number of probable changes (50 times) in the probable change state, the mode shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode. In other words, it is possible to directly shift from the probabilistic state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a big hit. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game with the goal of elapse of the number of probable changes in the probable change state.

Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that sets the latent probability state to the most advantageous gaming state and makes it possible to set the latent probability state after winning a big hit. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the latent state is not set unless the jackpot is won, so that the ball is held while staying in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won). Since it forms a disadvantageous state that is easily reduced, it does not give the player a sense of satisfaction, and there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the number of probability changes in the probability change state, which is more disadvantageous than the latent state, the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (latent state) is directly performed without going through the jackpot winning. ). In other words, even if the jackpot is not won, the player can easily continue to win the prize balls intermittently just by continuing the right-handed game. With this configuration, when the number of probable changes can be completed, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and accomplishment, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit C), the most advantageous consecutive villa mode without elapse of the number of probability changes. It is configured to shift to (latent state). As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for the lottery results other than the jackpot winning in the probabilistic state.

In addition, the above-mentioned lottery result (small hit C) is configured so that it can be won only by a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) that is difficult to be executed during the probability change state. Therefore, when the game ball launched by the right-handed game in the probabilistic state enters the right second entrance 645 with irregular behavior and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the player feels expectation. Can be given.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol is not held and stored, the small hit C cannot be won unless the ball is entered into the second entrance 645 during the probability change state. It is configured. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the behavior of the ball in the probabilistic state. It should be noted that only a part of the configuration of the present embodiment described above may be adopted. For example, a second special symbol having a hold storage function and acquired during a jackpot game in which a probability change state is set, for example, may be adopted. The second special symbol lottery based on the reserved memory of the special symbol may be configured to be executed during the probability change state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation a plurality of times immediately after the probability variation state is set. In this case, as an effect during the period when the second special symbol change is executed, for example, as a pre-stage of the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. When (warp fanning effect) is executed and the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small hit C", the character 811 gets into the helicopter and executes the effect of reaching the summit shown in FIG. 161 (b). good.

As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a period during which the probability change state is easily set is set immediately after the probability change state is set. Further, in this case, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the probability variation state, when the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the probability variation state is set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times). , It is preferable to configure so that short fluctuation (variation time is 5 seconds) can be easily selected. As a result, the second special symbol lottery based on the special diagram 2 hold acquired during the jackpot game can be smoothly executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, by frequently opening the right electric accessory 164 during the probability change state, it is difficult for the ball launched by the right-handed game to enter the right second entrance 645. However, for example, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) is temporarily selected as a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol with a small probability (for example, a probability of 1/100), and is temporarily right. It may be configured so that a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entry port 645 can be formed. As a result, it is possible to temporarily facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state. Therefore, in the state where the probability change state is set, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small hit C), the chance of shifting to the latent state can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the "small hit C" that triggers the transition from the probabilistic state to the latent state can be won only in the second special symbol lottery, but the first is not limited to this. The special symbol lottery may also be configured so that it can be won with a slight probability (for example, 1/200) lower than that of the second special symbol lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is configured to notify the state of preparation from the transition to the consecutive villa mode (latent state) to the first winning of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. When it becomes possible to actually win a prize ball (that is, when a small hit fluctuation is started), it is configured to notify that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been reached. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the situation in which the prize ball cannot be obtained for a long time even though the RUSH state is notified.

In the seventh embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/1 (59/60), but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of a small hit is not limited to this. It may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the small hit probability may be lowered.

Next, the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643). This special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed when the special figure discard command is received in the stop-related process 7 (see S4236 of FIG. 184). In the present embodiment, by executing the right-handed game in the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed while securing the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball), and the lottery is performed frequently. It is configured to execute a RUSH game in which a player executes a small hit game.

Then, during the latent state, the fluctuation time set as the first special symbol fluctuation is likely to be long (600 seconds). Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol change executed during the latent state is configured to be different according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1. Specifically, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is set. The smaller the number (when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 1 or 2), the shorter the fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation. In addition, when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol change being executed is discarded (forced stop).

That is, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by winning a specific small hit while frequently executing the small hit game in the second special symbol lottery in the latent state. A game aiming at an efficient game (a game that increases the number of small hit games executed within a unit time) will be executed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RUSH games executed in the latent state are the normal RUSH games, the super RUSH games in which the number of small hit games executed within a unit time is increased as compared with the normal RUSH games. Is made possible to execute the effect of notifying the player, and when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, a suggestion effect suggesting a transition to the super RUSH game (see FIG. 164). ) Is executable. As a result, the player who is executing the game in the latent state is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that a more advantageous state (super RUSH game) exists and the situation until the super RUSH game is executed. It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

When the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed, it is first determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No). Since the current state is not the latent state (RUSH game), the processes of S8102 to S8107 described later are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S8108.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, when it is determined that the RUSH middle flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read out. , Determines if the current number of reserved special figure balls is 3. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 and the state is forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, when it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is 3 (S8103: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 164 (b)) indicating the entry of Super RUSH is determined, and the Super RUSH middle flag is set to ON. (S8105), the forced stop mode of the first special symbol is determined (S8108), display commands for indicating the determined various modes are set (S8109), and this process is terminated.

Here, the processing of S8108 will be described. In the present embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel (overlapping), a specific small hit (small) in the second special symbol lottery The timing at which the second special symbol variation won in B7) is stopped and displayed is determined regardless of the variation timing of the first special symbol variation. Therefore, it may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the first special symbol change is started, or it may be forcibly stopped (discarded) at the timing immediately before the stop display of the first special symbol change. Then, the variation mode of the third symbol (decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that is variablely displayed in response to the first special symbol variation is variable based on the passage of the variable time. With the pachinko machine 10, for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the player executes a high-speed fluctuation display to the extent that it is difficult to identify the third symbol, and when the fluctuation time is about to end (immediately before the fluctuation is stopped), the third symbol is displayed. It is common to execute a low-speed fluctuation display in which the fluctuation speed is reduced to the extent that the player can identify.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, based on the forced stop of the first special symbol change, the third symbol change being executed is displayed by the third symbol display device at the timing when the command indicating the forced stop is received. If the display mode displayed on the display surface of 81 is stopped and displayed, for example, when the third symbol is displayed in low-speed fluctuation, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a jackpot. There was a risk that it would end up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the high-speed fluctuation stop mode and the low-speed stop mode are based on the remaining period of the first special symbol change being executed as the forced stop mode of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the processing of S8108. One of the stop modes at the time of fluctuation is determined. Then, it is output to the display control device 114 by the display command set in the process of S8109. On the display control device 114 side, the forced stop display mode of the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the type of the forced stop mode included in the received display command. , The display control based on the determined forced stop display mode is executed.

Specifically, when a display command indicating the stop mode during high-speed fluctuation is received, the image data of the display mode indicating forced stop is interrupted by the image data prepared for executing the high-speed fluctuation display, and the high-speed fluctuation is performed. Display control is executed so that the display suddenly switches to the display mode indicating forced stop. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player without delay that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuating third symbol during high-speed fluctuation, even if the display mode indicating forced stop is suddenly stopped and displayed, the image is replaced. It does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, when a display command indicating the stop mode at low speed fluctuation is received, the image displayed (or is) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is read out, and the reach state (a combination indicating a jackpot winning combination) is the first. 3 Determine whether or not the symbol can be stopped and displayed). Then, when it is determined that the current state is not in the reach state, the image corresponding to the display data in which each third symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (establishment line) among the display data used for the low-speed fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. The image is determined, and the slow fluctuation is continued until the forced stop image is displayed, and then the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. In addition, in the reach state, image data is created in which one symbol included in the remaining third symbol row that is changing is replaced with a forced stop symbol indicating forced stop, and the forced stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The variation display data for forced stop is generated so as to be performed, and the display control based on the variation display data for forced stop is executed.

In this way, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, the third symbol is forcibly stopped according to the variation display mode of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the processing different, the third symbol can be stopped and displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player regardless of the timing at which the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

Further, when the above-mentioned display control is executed, the period from the forced stop of the first special symbol variation to the stop display of the third symbol variation display is set to the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed. In this case, for example, in the case of forcibly stopping the first special symbol change, the period from the forcible stop display of the first special symbol change to the confirmation of the forcible stop, or the first special symbol change. The symbol confirmation period from when the special symbol indicating the small hit B winning in the second special symbol fluctuation for which the forced stop condition for forcibly stopping the game is satisfied is set to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). Then, within the predetermined period, various forced stop display controls for stopping and displaying the third symbol variation may be executed. Then, if a third symbol display mode (for example, "123") for forcibly stopping confirmation is displayed based on the output of the command (confirmation command) indicating that the confirmation period has elapsed from the main control device 110. good. With this configuration, when the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped, the period until the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped is different depending on the changing display mode of the third symbol variation being executed. However, the third symbol variation display can be forcibly stopped within the fixed period, and further, when the fixed period elapses, the third symbol can be displayed in the same display mode in the display mode for forced stop confirmation.

Returning to FIG. 186, the description will be continued. In the process of S8103, when it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is not 3 (S8103: No), then it is determined whether the number of special figure reserved balls is 4 (S8106), and it is determined to be 4. If this is the case (S8106: Yes), an effect mode aiming at the top (for example, an effect mode in which the character 811 goes up one step from the effect screen shown in FIG. 164 (a)) is determined (S8107), and the process proceeds to S8108. Transition. If it is determined that the value is not 4 in the process of S8106, the process of S8107 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8108.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153). This variation display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. , The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5234 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation count counter 223fc (S5231), and the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5202). ), Next, the effect mode setting process for generating the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (S5232), and the data in the winning information storage area 223b is input. It shifts (S5233) and shifts to the processing of S5234.

In the process of S5234, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5234). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5234: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is on (S5234: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is added by 1 (S5235), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa is set to off (S5234: Yes). S5236), then the variation display setting process 7 for special figure 2 is executed (S5237). The details of the variation display setting process 7 (S5237) for the special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. When the processing of S5237 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S5238.

In the process of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5238). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is not on (that is, is off) (S5238: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since it is in a state, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is on (S5238: Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fb is set to off ( S5239), then, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned effect mode setting process (S5232) will be described. As described above, this effect mode setting process (S5232) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this effect mode setting process (S5322), first, it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S8201), when it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), and then it is determined whether the state is the probability change state. (S8202). In the process of S8202, when it is determined that the state is not in the probabilistic state (S8202: No), it means that the state is in the latent state (consecutive villa mode), the ceiling effect setting process is executed (S8203), and the determined effect mode is determined. The display variation pattern command indicating the above is set (S8208), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S8202 that it is in the probabilistic state (S8202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is set in order to determine whether the first special symbol this time is the final variation in the probabilistic state. It is determined whether it is 1 (S8204). In the process of S8204, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), the ceiling effect setting for selecting the effect mode of the final variation display effect before shifting to the RUSH game. The process is executed (S8206), and the process is transferred to S8208. On the other hand, in the processing of S8204, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (consecutive villa mode), the fluctuation pattern command indicates. The effect mode corresponding to the variation type is determined (S8205), and the process shifts to S8208. On the other hand, in the process of S8201 when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then the effect mode for the normal mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined. (S8207), the process shifts to S8208.

Next, the details of the ceiling effect setting process (S8202, S8206) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 188. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol in the prize information storage area 223b is read (S8301), and the read execution is performed. It was determined whether or not the area data was data corresponding to the jackpot (S8302), and when it was determined to be a jackpot (S8302: Yes), that is, it was determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation this time was a jackpot fluctuation. In this case, the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (determining the effect mode for notifying the jackpot (S8303)), and ending this process. That is, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Since the jackpot game is executed without shifting to the latent state, the effect mode for notifying the jackpot without determining the effect mode for notifying the arrival of the summit (see FIG. 161 (b)). (For example, an effect mode in which a display mode indicating a jackpot winning is displayed while climbing a cliff) is determined. By configuring in this way, a jackpot game is performed even though the summit reaching effect is executed. Is executed, and then a gaming state other than the latent state is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is a jackpot winning in the process of S8302, the peak reaching effect is not executed regardless of the selected jackpot type. If a jackpot whose latent state is set after the jackpot game is won, the summit reaching effect is executed, and then an effect of displaying a display mode indicating the jackpot winning is executed on the summit. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of determining whether or not to execute the peak reaching effect in the final fluctuation of the probability change state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot game is performed during the probability change state. When the jackpot for which the latent state is set after the end is won (during the jackpot fluctuation), the effect of reaching the summit is executed, and then the effect of displaying the display mode indicating the jackpot winning is executed on the summit. It may be configured. As a result, the production mode of the effect (the effect in which the character 811 aims at the top) executed during the probability change state can be changed based on the remaining period of the probability change state and the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In addition, when the peak reaching effect is executed, the latent state can be reliably set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S8302, when it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not the data indicating the jackpot (S8302: No), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (FIG. 169 (b)). (See) is determined (S8304), the ceiling effect executing flag 223fh is set to ON (S8305), and this process ends.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 169 (b)) is performed according to the pre-reading result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the latent state. It is possible to preferably set whether or not to execute.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 190, the details of the variation display setting process 7 (S5237) for special figure 2 executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see S4153 of FIG. 187) described above will be described. The variation display setting process 7 (S5237) for the special figure 2 is a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. When the variation display setting process 7 (S5237) for special figure 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RUSH middle flag 223fg is on (S8401), and it is determined that the RUSH middle flag 223fg is off. (S8401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, then it is determined whether or not the probabilistic state is set (S8402).

In the process of S8402, when it is determined that the probability variation state is not set, that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8402: No), the first variation corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command. 2 The variable display mode of the special symbol is determined (S8403), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the probabilistic state (S8402: Yes), the probabilistic change setting process for setting the variation display mode of the second special symbol variation in the probabilistic state (S8402: Yes). S8404) is executed to end this process. The detailed contents of this probabilistic change setting process (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG. 191.

In the process of S8401, if it is determined that the RUSH middle flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ready state flag 223fd is on (S8405), and the ready state flag is determined. When it is determined that 223fd is off (S8405: No), it means that the player is in the RUSH game (the state in which the preparation state is completed), and therefore the second special symbol in the latent state (RUSH game). The RUSH medium setting process (S8410) for setting the variation display mode of the variation is executed, and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the RUSH middle setting process (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

On the other hand, in the process of S8405, when it is determined that the preparation state flag 223fd is on (that is, the preparation state is in progress) (S8405: Yes), then the fluctuation pattern command notifies the fluctuation type of the small hit. If it is determined whether or not it is (S8406), and if it is determined that the variation type of the small hit is notified (S8406: Yes), the preparation state flag 223fd is set to off (S8407), and the effect of this variation display effect is produced. As an aspect, an effect mode (see FIG. 162 (b)) of the RUSH rush effect for notifying the RUSH rush is determined (S8408), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing content of the probabilistic change setting process (S8404) will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probabilistic change setting process (S8404). This probabilistic change setting process (S8404) is for setting the effect mode when the second special symbol change is executed during the probabilistic change state, and the small hit C is won during the probabilistic change state, and the probability change number (S8404). The process for setting the effect mode (shortcut effect mode) when the latent probability state is set is executed without elapse of 50 times). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed in the probabilistic state, most of the balls flowing down the right side region win the right electric accessory 164, and the first special symbol change is executed. It is configured in. However, when the balls that flow down the right area collide with each other and behave irregularly, the balls rarely enter the right second entrance 645, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. In some cases. Then, when the small hit C is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, the probability change is performed without executing the special symbol change for the number of probability changes (50 times), which is the end condition of the probability change state. It is configured so that the state can be transferred to the latent state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the probability change state, a special effect is executed to indicate to the player that the chance to shift to the latent state has come. ..

When the probabilistic change in-probability setting process (S8404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol change this time is a change in which the small hit C is won (S8501). When it is determined that the small hit C is (S8501: Yes), then the value of the fluctuation count counter 223fc is read (S8502), and the probability variation remaining number is 5 based on the value of the fluctuation counter 223fc read in the process of S8502. It is determined whether the number of times is less than or equal to (S8503), and when it is determined to be less than or equal to 5 times (S8503: Yes), the effect mode indicating the small hit RUSH (RUSH game) rush is determined, and the process of S8506 described later is performed. Transition.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8503, when it is determined that the number of probabilistic transformations is not 5 times or less (6 times or more) (S8503: No), an effect indicating that a shortcut is entered into the small hit RUSH (RUSH game). A mode (for example, warp effect) is determined (S8504), and the process proceeds to S8506. Further, in the process of S8501, if it is determined that the current fluctuation does not win the small hit C (S8501: No), the process proceeds to the process of S8506 as it is.

In the process of S8506, the character 811 wears a flame from the effect mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 161 (a)) indicating that the special 2 variation (second special symbol variation) is executed during the probability variation (for example, the character 811 wears a flame from the display mode shown in FIG. 161 (a)). (Variable display mode of character 811), determine (S8506), set display pattern commands indicating various determined production modes (S8507), and end this process. ..

Next, the contents of the RUSH middle setting process (S8410) will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH middle setting process (S8410). In this RUSH middle setting process (S8410), a process for setting various effects for the second special symbol variation executed during the RUSH game is executed.

When the RUSH middle setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether the super RUSH middle flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S8601: Yes), the next step. In addition, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a small hit B winning (S8602). If it is determined that the small hit B has been won (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is forcibly stopped when the fluctuation is stopped. It is set (S8603), and the effect mode for RUSH corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8602, when the current fluctuation does not win the small hit B (S8602: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S8601 that the super RUSH middle flag 223fi is not set to ON (S8601: No) proceeds to the process of S8604 as it is, and then ends this process.

<About another example using the game board configuration of the 7th embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path through which the ball passing through the through gate 67 can flow down is formed in the right side region of the game board 13, and the right electric accessory 164 is placed in the flow path. It is configured to be arranged, and while the right electric accessory 164 is closed (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the right electric accessory 164), the ball is placed on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164. A flow path (see FIG. 158) was formed so that the ball could flow down, and a right second entry port 645 was arranged at a position where a ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 could enter. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of the game per normal figure), a flow path through which a ball flowing down the right region, and by extension, a ball passing through the through gate 67 can flow down (hereinafter, specified). The rate at which the ball flowing down the flow path wins the right electric accessory 164 (the right first ball entrance 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (referred to as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery). The rate of entering the ball into the starting port) and the rate of entering the ball into the right second entry port 645 (the rate of entering the ball into the starting port that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol lottery) can be changed. It was configured to be able to.

Specifically, when the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the right electric motor so that most of the balls flowing down the specific flow path win the right electric accessory 164. When the open pattern of the accessory 164 is specified and the latent probability state is set, the ball flowing down the specific flow path wins the right electric accessory 164 than when the probability variation state is set. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the opening pattern of the right electric-accessory 164 are specified so as to reduce the ratio of the movement. In addition, when the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is specified so that the rate of winning the right electric accessory 164 is lower than when the latent state is set. ing. In addition, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set in both the latent state and the normal state, and the opening operation pattern (opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164) executed in the game per normal symbol is the same. However, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the interval at which the game is executed per normal symbol is different, and as a result, the rate at which the ball flowing down the specific flow path wins the right electric accessory 164 is different. It was composed of.

According to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the starting ports (right first ball entry port 164r, right second ball entry port 645) where the ball can easily enter are made different according to the set gaming state. As a result, by executing the right-handed game, it is possible to easily make different types of special symbols for which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Therefore, when different gaming states are set for the player, different games are played. It was possible to play sexual games and improve the interest of the games.

However, in the seventh embodiment described above, a special symbol type in which a special symbol lottery is mainly executed is defined for a set gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state), and specifically, in the probabilistic state. Was configured so that the first special symbol lottery could be easily executed and the second special symbol lottery could be easily executed during the latent state. Therefore, unless the set game state is variably set, the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that is mainly executed cannot be different, and the player who is playing the game for a long time in the same game state There was a problem of getting tired of playing games early.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it is preferable to use each of the following configurations or a combination of each configuration instead of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Structure example 1: Configuration of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the fluctuation pattern is defined corresponding to the set gaming state and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3, and the fluctuation pattern is selected. When the processing to be performed is executed, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS3 is selected. That is, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the same gaming state is set, the variation pattern having the same content is defined regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed during the gaming state. The fluctuation pattern was selected based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 acquired from the data table. On the other hand, in the present configuration example 1, according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol lottery executed after the end of the probabilistic jackpot game), which is executed in a state where a specific game state (probability change state) is set. , The normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected fluctuation time and the length of the selected fluctuation time can be different.

That is, with respect to the configuration of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172 (b)) of the seventh embodiment described above, different fluctuation patterns are generated according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the game state is set. It differs in that it is specified. Specifically, in the range where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probabilistic change state is set is 1 to 2, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 2 seconds is defined, and in the range of 3 to 50 times, it is described above. Similar to the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.8 seconds is defined.

With this configuration, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected as the normal symbol fluctuation from the time when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol variation is executed twice. Therefore, the predetermined period after the probabilistic state is set (the period until the special symbol change is executed twice) is to the right of the outside of the predetermined period (the period after the special symbol change is executed twice). It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 645. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery only for a part of the period during the probability change state. Therefore, a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery only for a part of the period during the probability change state, and the probability change without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined predetermined period (probability change number of times 50 times). It is possible to facilitate the transition from the state to the latent state which is more advantageous to the player than the probable state.

In the configuration example 1 described above, a variation pattern of a normal symbol that can be selected so that a predetermined period after the probability variation state is set is more advantageous to the player than a period other than the predetermined period is defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a specific period elapses after the probability variation state is set, a variation pattern of a normal symbol that is advantageous to the player may be easily selected. With this configuration, when a specific period elapses without ending the probabilistic state, it is possible to make the player perform a game that is more advantageous than within the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game for a player who is playing a game for a long time without changing the game state.

Further, in the above-described configuration example 1, different fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) are selected according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability variation state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. Regardless of the number of special symbol fluctuations, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.8 seconds can be selected, and the probability that each fluctuation pattern is selected is determined by the number of special symbol fluctuations. Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol changes after the probability variation state is set satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol executed after the probability variation state is set). A fluctuation pattern (when the number of fluctuations is 2 or less, or when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability variation state is set is even) is more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (the variation pattern (when the number of fluctuations is 2 or less) is more advantageous to the player. It may be configured so that a 2-second fluctuation pattern) can be easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to easily set the period during which the game advantageous to the player is executed only by variably setting the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.

In the above-mentioned configuration example 1, one type is used as the general figure fluctuation pattern selection table to be referred to when the probabilistic state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it depends on the jackpot type that triggers the probable change state to be set. , You may configure to select the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol by referring to different data tables. In this case, even if the jackpot type is set to the same probability variation state after the jackpot game ends, the winning jackpot Depending on the type, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of normal symbol fluctuation by referring to a different data table (normal figure fluctuation pattern table). In this case, depending on the jackpot type, the length of the advantageous period (the period during which a game advantageous to the player (for example, the second special symbol lottery) is more likely to be executed than other periods) and the timing at which the advantageous period is set are determined. It is good to configure it so that it is different. In addition, when a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the probable change state is set as the advantageous period, and when a specific disadvantageous jackpot type is set, the advantageous period is set for the entire period of the probable change state. It may be configured so that it is not set.

In addition, in the period in which a specific game state (probability change state) is set as described above, in a part of the period, when the game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the other period, the game can be executed. For the player, in addition to the current game state, the player is asked whether the current period is an advantageous period (a period in which a game that is more advantageous to the player than other periods (for example, a second special symbol lottery) is likely to be executed). It is preferable to configure the period suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the rabbit, for example, during the mountain climbing effect (see FIG. 161 (a)) executed during the probabilistic state in the seventh embodiment described above. The character 811 that imitates the above is changed to a more powerful display mode, the characters "Powerful zone entry" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the effect that the period until reaching the summit can be shortened is executed. Then it is good.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the current period is advantageous in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, for example, a plurality of normal map fluctuation pattern tables having different advantageous periods are prepared as the normal map fluctuation pattern tables referred to during the probability change state, and one of them is based on the jackpot type set at the time of winning the probability change jackpot. Even when the normal map fluctuation pattern table is configured to be selectable, the advantageous period can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. It should be noted that the above-mentioned period suggestion effect is intended for all effects configured so that it is easier to be executed during the advantageous period than outside the advantageous period, and the present is the advantageous period for the player. Even if it is a production other than a production that directly explains something, when the production is executed, the possibility that the current advantageous period is higher than the possibility that it is outside the advantageous period suggests the period. Included in the production. Therefore, the period suggestion effect may be executed in a period outside the advantageous period (unfavorable period) as long as the execution frequency is lower than the advantageous period.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned period suggestion effect, that is, an effect for suggesting to the player that the present is likely to be an advantageous period, the normal map fluctuation pattern table referred to in this probabilistic state is probable change. Of the plurality of normal map fluctuation pattern tables that can be referred to during the state, a state suggestion effect suggesting that the normal map fluctuation pattern table is likely to set an advantageous period may be executed.

Further, when the probability variation state is set, when the ball enters the right second entry port 645, a notification for notifying that the ball has entered the right second entry port 645 is notified. The production mode of the effect may be configured to be different based on the determination result of whether or not the present is the advantageous period. For example, the ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the advantageous period. If this is the case, the ball is entered in a state where the frequency of entering the ball is high (during the advantageous period). Notification effect that can be set when the ball enters the right second entrance 645 in the state (during the disadvantageous period) and the ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the advantageous period. It is preferable to configure so that the effect mode for blessing the player is set rather than the effect mode of. In this way, when a plurality of periods with different ease of entering a specific ball opening are configured to be set, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed according to the set period. When the ball can be entered into a specific entry port during a period in which it is difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to execute a notification effect of a special effect mode.

In the above-described configuration example 1, the specific flow path (through gate 67 is set. It is configured to change the rate at which the ball that has flowed down (the flow path through which the ball has passed) reaches the right second entrance 645, but it is not limited to this, and for example, it is won by a normal symbol lottery. If you win, select the winning normal symbol type or select the length of the period (normal symbol confirmation period) from when the winning normal symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed until the game per normal symbol is executed. It may be different depending on the type of the general map fluctuation pattern. That is, the period from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation to the execution of the game per normal symbol is set as a predetermined condition (big hit type, game state, number of special symbol fluctuations, value of fluctuation type counter CS3, result of lottery for regular symbols, etc.). It may be configured so that it can be changed according to the above.

<Structure example 2: Opening operation configuration of the right electric accessory>
In the seventh embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the opening operation pattern of the right electric accessory 164 in the game per normal figure executed during the probabilistic state is one type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the probabilistic state. A plurality of types of opening operation patterns of the right electric accessory 164 in the game per normal figure executed during the game can be set, and the right electric accessory 164 in the game per normal figure can be set according to the set opening operation pattern. It may be configured so that the length of the period in which the ball is in the closed state (the ball flows down the opening / closing lid 164r1 to the right second entry port 645) is different. With this configuration, the ball that has flowed down the specific flow path (the flow path through which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) is the second on the right, depending on the hit type of the game that is executed during the probability change state. The rate of reaching the entrance 645 can be changed.

Further, for example, as an opening operation pattern of the game per normal figure, the first open state (a state in which the ball is easily won to the right electric accessory 164) is in the first closed state (the ball is moved to the right electric accessory 164) for 2 seconds. When an open operation pattern is set in which the second open state is set for 5 seconds and the second open state is set for 0.5 seconds, and one ball wins the right electric accessory 164 during the game per game. It may be configured so that the game per normal figure ends.

With this configuration, for example, if the ball is made to win the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the game per normal figure ends at that point, but during the first open state, By executing the game so that the ball does not win the right electric accessory 164, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the right second entrance 645 during the game per game. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the opening operation pattern in which the game per normal figure ends when the period of the first opening state elapses. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of letting the player choose whether or not to shoot the ball (perform the right-handed game) during the normal game.

In the seventh embodiment described above and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment, in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 in the right region of the game board 13. The right electric accessory 164 is arranged in the flow path to form a flow path through which the right electric accessory 164 can flow down, and the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the ball wins a prize in the right electric accessory 164). During the difficult state), a flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, and the ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 can enter. The right second entrance 645 was arranged at such a position. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of the game per normal figure), a flow path through which a ball flowing down the right region, and by extension, a ball passing through the through gate 67 can flow down (hereinafter, specified). The rate at which the ball flowing down the flow path wins the right electric accessory 164 (the right first ball entrance 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (referred to as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery). The rate of entering the ball into the starting port) and the rate of entering the ball into the right second entry port 645 (the rate of entering the ball into the starting port that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol lottery) can be changed. In the probabilistic state, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. That is, the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific flow path is configured to execute a lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than the starting port provided on the downstream side, and the starting port provided on the upstream side is reached. By changing the winning ratio of the balls, the winning ratio of the balls to the starting port on the downstream side where the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed is configured to be variable, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , It is configured so that a lottery that is more advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific area than when the ball enters the starting port provided on the downstream side. You may.

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, no matter what trigger is set in the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, specifically, the jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed is won. However, even if the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, or even if a predetermined transition condition (for example, the number of probability changes is 50) is satisfied during the probability change state and the latent state is set, the latent state is set. Is executed during the jackpot game or the probability change state in order to facilitate the state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the hold memory (special figure 1 hold) of the first special symbol is secured at the time when is set. It was configured so that the special figure 1 hold could be obtained in the right-handed game. Specifically, since the first special symbol change is executed during the probability change state and the first special symbol change is not executed during the jackpot game, the latent probability state is set when the latent jackpot is won. In this case, the latent probability state is more likely to be executed when the special figure 1 hold number is the upper limit value (4) than when the latent probability state is set via the probability change state.

In addition, when the latent state is set, a game (second special symbol lottery) having a different degree of advantage (different variation time) is executed according to the number of special figure 1 hold, and special figure 1 hold. It was configured so that a smaller number of games would be more advantageous to the player than a larger number of special figures 1 held.

That is, when the probability change number (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the probability change state) reaches 50 times during the probability change state, the special figure is played by the right-handed game executed until the probability change number reaches 50 times. It was configured so that the number of 1 hold was the upper limit (4) with high probability. Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the small hit C is won in the second special symbol lottery during the probability change state, the probability change state is changed to the latent state before the number of probability changes reaches 50 times. It was configured so that it could be migrated. Therefore, for example, when the small hit C is won immediately after the probability change state is set and the state shifts to the latent state, the latent state is set as compared with the case where the latent state is set based on the establishment of other transition conditions. Since the execution period of the right-handed game before the certainty state is set is shortened, it is possible to easily reduce the number of special figures 1 held at the time when the latent probability state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the transition condition more advantageous to the player than the other transition conditions described above (the transition condition that is satisfied when the probability variation number reaches 50 times).

In this way, a plurality of transition conditions (big hit, probability variation number 50 times, small hit C winning) are set in advance in order to set a specific gaming state (for example, latent probability state), and the type of transition condition that is established. By variably configuring the degree of advantage after a specific game state is set according to the player, not only the game state set for the player but also the transition condition to be established is interested. be able to. Furthermore, in order to set a specific gaming state (for example, latent probability state) in a state where the same gaming state (for example, probability change state) is set, a plurality of transition conditions (probability change number of times 50 times, small hit C winning) Since the transition conditions that can be established without going through the jackpot are set in advance, and the degree of advantage after the specific game state is set is variably configured according to the type of the established transition conditions, the game is played. A game aiming to win a big hit against a person and a game aiming to establish an advantageous transition condition can be performed in parallel. Further, since the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) set in advance is configured so that the degree of advantage after setting the latent probability state can be easily changed according to the timing of establishment, specifically. , Special Figure 1 When the transition condition is satisfied with a small number of reservations, it is configured so that an advantageous game (Super RUSH) can be easily executed after the latent state is set. It is possible to play the game while having an expectation that the transition condition will be satisfied. Further, since the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) can be satisfied regardless of the number of reservations in Special Figure 1, it is possible to make the player always expect the specific transition condition to be satisfied. ..

In the seventh embodiment described above, among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning to the latent state, the transition condition established by winning the small hit C is configured to be most advantageous to the player, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be configured so that it is more advantageous to the player when the number of probable changes reaches 50 times. In this case, for example, it is configured so that the probability variation state is more advantageous to the player than the latent probability state, or the latent probability state is set in the state where the number of reserved balls is large in Special Figure 1 is less latent. It may be configured so that a game that is more advantageous to the player than the state is set is executed.

Further, as the effect (mountain climbing effect) executed during the probabilistic state shown with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b), the effect mode of the effect executed when the transition condition is satisfied is set at that time. It may be changed according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1. For example, when the execution condition for executing an advantageous game after setting the latent probability state is satisfied (for example, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is one). When the transition condition is satisfied in the state of It may be configured to notify that the transition condition is satisfied in an advantageous state. In addition, when the small hit C is won (when the second special symbol change when the small hit C is won is started) or when it is confirmed that the number of probability changes will reach 50 times (special figure 1 hold is pre-read and the probability changes). When it is confirmed that the big hit will not be won by the time the number of times reaches 50 times), the effect of urging the right-handed game to be interrupted may be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of special figure 1 reservations from increasing unnecessarily.

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, the game is forcibly interrupted until the first special symbol variation (10-minute variation) of the long-term variation is executed a plurality of times in the state where the latent probability state is set. It was possible to play the game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, but on the other hand, by interrupting the game for a long time during the latent state, the game that is most disadvantageous to the player is executed. It is good to set a penalty like this. Specifically, it is configured so that the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern differs according to the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved symbols), and is selected when the number of reserved symbols of the ordinary symbol is 0. It is preferable to configure the normal figure fluctuation pattern so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal figure fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol is more than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, it may be configured so that a normal map fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set can be easily selected.

With this configuration, if the game is interrupted for a long time during the latent state, and the number of reserved figures is set to 0, the player is in a disadvantageous situation where it is difficult to increase the number of reserved figures 1 from 0. Can play a game. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a normal figure fluctuation pattern may be configured so as to be selectable based on the number of normal figure reservations and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. When the number of figure holdings is 1 or 2, it is easy to set a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol so that the number of special figure 1 holding balls tends to be 3 or more, and the number of normal drawing holdings is 0. Then, when the number of special figure reservations is 0, it is preferable to set a long fluctuation time in order to make it difficult to newly acquire the special figure 1 reservation.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration may be applied with a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is changed according to the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol. Specifically, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, a through gate 67 is also provided in the left side region with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 157, and a left-handed game is played. A position where the ball can be won regardless of whether the game is a right-handed game (a game in which the ball is made to flow down in the left area) or a right-handed game (a game in which the ball is made to flow down in the right side area). The configuration of the game board 13 is different in that a variable winning device 650 that is opened during the jackpot game is arranged at the lower position of the mouth 64), and the left-handed game and the right-handed game are played during the jackpot game. It is configured so that a person can make a choice. Then, the ratio of the launched ball passing through the through gate 67 is different between the case where the right-handed game is performed and the case where the left-handed game is performed. As a result, the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved symbols) acquired at the end of the jackpot game can be made different depending on which game is played during the jackpot game. Then, as the game states set after the jackpot game is completed, the first game state is more advantageous than the case where the number of reserved figures is large, and the second is more disadvantageous than the case where the number of reserved figures is small. The game state and the game state can be set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the game method during the jackpot game while predicting the game state set after the jackpot game is completed.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 200. In the seventh embodiment described above, a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation) capable of duplicating the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery). In the specification), when a specific gaming state (for example, latent state) is set, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation becomes the second special symbol fluctuation. It was configured so that a fluctuation pattern for a short time (for example, 1 second) was set as the fluctuation time, and further, a small hit could be won in the special figure 2 lottery.

With this configuration, the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery can be increased more than the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery during the latent state, and the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. By making small hit games occur frequently, it is possible to provide a game that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed in duplicate as in the seventh embodiment described above (so-called so-called gaming machine). , Simultaneous variation specification), when a specific gaming state (for example, probability variation state) is set, the variation time of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) becomes longer (for example, 10 minutes). By configuring the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) so that the fluctuation time is shortened (for example, 1 second), the other special symbol lottery is preferentially executed.

Then, the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol) is more advantageous than the lottery of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol) (for example, of the second special symbol lottery). It is easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol lottery, or the content of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won), and it is advantageous to the player during a specific game state (for example, a probability change state). There is something that makes it easier for the game to be played.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, at least during the period when the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol lottery is a disadvantageous lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery is an advantageous lottery that is advantageous to the player. .. Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery result of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol lottery) is predetermined as at least one of the termination conditions for terminating a specific gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state). Set the end condition that is established when the lottery result (for example, a missed win or a big hit win) is set, and provide a playability that allows a large number of advantageous special symbol lottery to be executed before the end condition is satisfied by the disadvantageous special symbol lottery. By doing so, there are things that improve the interest of the game.

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) that is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues is the first special symbol lottery. Since it is set only by the result of the above, there is a problem that it is not possible to enthusiastically play the game while expecting the player to continue the advantageous gaming state for a long time. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the lottery result for ending the advantageous gaming state (for example, the jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends), the lottery result is shown. The period until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result is started) becomes the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and once the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues is set. , There was a problem that the period could not be changed (discarded).

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) mainly executed in the advantageous gaming state, the disadvantageous special symbol fluctuation during execution (the second special symbol lottery). 1 Special symbol change) is configured to be discarded. That is, if the result of the unfavorable special symbol change during execution is the result of ending the advantageous gaming state (for example, the result indicating the jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends), the lottery result is displayed. By discarding it, it is possible to extend (continue) the advantageous gaming state. In addition, when the unfavorable special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed is discarded, the number of unfavorable special symbol changes is not updated (added) due to the discarded unfavorable special symbol change. Therefore, as an end condition for ending the advantageous game state, a change number end condition that is satisfied when the number of disadvantageous special symbol changes in the advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) is set. Even in the case, it is possible to extend (continue) the advantageous gaming state.

With this configuration, the period for which the advantageous gaming state continues can be changed based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), so that the player who plays the game in the advantageous gaming state can use it. On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game.

Further, in this modification, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery in the advantageous game state (probability change state), the small hit type that discards the above-mentioned disadvantageous special symbol change (first special symbol change) during execution. (Small hit B) and the small hit type (small hit C) that terminates the advantageous gaming state after discarding the disadvantageous special symbol fluctuation (first special symbol fluctuation) being executed can be set at least. ing.

That is, in this modified example, as the end condition for ending the advantageous gaming state, the end condition that is established based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second Tobetsu symbol) is set. By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the advantageous gaming state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues.

Further, since the end condition that can be established based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) in the advantageous game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. In addition, as described above, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the set small hit type. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), the player can pay attention to the content of the subsequent game.

Further, in the present modification, as in the seventh embodiment described above, the number of reserved balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (first special symbol) (the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the reserved balls of the advantageous special symbol). The fluctuation time of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) fluctuation can be set variably according to the above. Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the disadvantaged special symbol (first special symbol) (unfavorable special symbol) The smaller the number of reserved balls and the total number of reserved balls of the advantageous special symbol), the shorter the variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the advantageous gaming state (during the probability variation state). It is configured to be easy.

As a result, the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the advantageous gaming state can be increased by winning a small hit in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) and discarding the unfavorable special symbol fluctuation during execution. ..

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. The probability state of the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (a specific small hit winning or execution of a special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times) is satisfied. It was configured like this. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, once the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery can be increased until the next jackpot winning, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, if the high-probability state of the special symbol is set, the high-probability state of the special symbol will not end until the jackpot is won, so the high-probability state of the special symbol will not end. There was a problem that the player's motivation to play was reduced.

On the other hand, in this modification, a condition is added to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state, and even if the big hit is not won in the special symbol lottery, the high-probability state of the special symbol is low. It is configured so that it can move to a stochastic state. As a result, even if the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol may end without winning the jackpot, so the player is playing in the high probability state of the special symbol. It is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this modification, when the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of special symbol is set, and the first 2 When the transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and when the first transition condition is satisfied before the second transition condition, the probability change state is changed to the time saving state (low probability of the special symbol). When the state shifts to the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state of the normal symbol) and the second transition condition is satisfied before the first transition condition, the probability change state is changed to the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low of the normal symbol). It is configured to shift to the probabilistic state). Then, when both transition conditions are satisfied, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set.

That is, it is configured to finally transition to the normal state through different processes depending on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition that can be satisfied during the probability change state are satisfied. With this configuration, the player playing in the probabilistic state is interested not only in when the probabilistic state ends, but also in which gaming state the probabilistic state shifts to. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation while the latent state is set, and the normal state is set. While is set, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation, and a big hit is made by a special symbol lottery as in this modification. When the first transition condition (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is 50 times) that can be satisfied even if the player does not win is set, the normal state is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition. Among them, there is a possibility that both the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and there is a problem that the player cannot smoothly play the game. was there.

On the other hand, in this modification, from the gaming state (for example, the probabilistic state) in which the long-term variation is set as the variation pattern of one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation), the other special symbol variation (For example, the second special symbol variation) is configured so as not to directly shift to the gaming state (for example, the normal state) in which the variation pattern is set for a long time without going through the jackpot winning of the special symbol. , The first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are both configured to be less likely to occur for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). As a result, the player can smoothly play the game.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of this modification is located on the right side of the gaming area formed on the game board 13 (on the right side of the variable display unit 80) with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 157) of the seventh embodiment described above. Some of the configurations of the formed regions) are different, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 193, in this modification, the distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side region, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is formed on the left side of the distribution member 700, and the left flow path 701. It is configured so that it can be alternately distributed to the right flow path 702.

On the upstream side of the left side flow path 701, a movable lid 1500 forming the flow bottom surface of the left side flow path 701 is provided, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a constant opening / closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown). Is configured to be executed, and an open state in which a ball can enter the first ball entry port 64b on the right side arranged below the movable lid 1500 and a closed state in which it is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball. It is configured so that the opening and closing operation is executed so that it is located.

Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55), and the movable lid opening / closing process results in an opening period of 0.1 seconds. And an opening / closing operation that repeats a closing period of 0.8 seconds on average according to a predetermined scenario is executed. The right-side first ball entry port 64b, which is controlled to open and close in this way, is configured so that the ball is more difficult to enter than the first ball entry port 64.

Then, the sphere that has flowed down the left side flow path 701 and has flowed down on the movable lid 1500 (the sphere that has flowed down the flow path formed on the movable lid 1500 located in the closed state) has flowed down the bent portion of the left side flow path 701. Then, it flows down toward the electric accessory 640a by a nail planted at a position facing the lower end of the flow path 701 on the left side.

On the other hand, a bending portion is formed in the right flow path 702 by the sorting device 700, and a small hit attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is arranged so as to be a part of the flow bottom surface of the bending portion. ing. The small hit attacker 3650 flows in when the opening / closing lid 3650a, which is controlled to open / close during the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning in the second special symbol lottery, and the opening / closing lid 3650a are in the open state. It is composed of a flow path through which the ball flows down and a small hit winning opening 3653 in which the ball flowing down the flow path enters. Regarding the opening / closing control content of the opening / closing lid 3650a during the small hit game, the accessory hit control process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment. Since it is the same as the content of, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of this modified example, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling surface on which the movable member 1500 is always arranged is arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling. When the timing when the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened coincide with each other. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling (or falling onto the constantly movable member) on the constantly movable member 1500 is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is in the open state is 0 in 0.9 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

That is, in a game state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first entrance 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game is performed. It is possible to prevent a state in which there is no hold (special figure 1 hold) of the first special symbol when the probability change state is set after the end. In addition, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time, the first ball entry port is set in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at 64.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when a left-handed game is performed, about 15 of the 250 fired balls are designed to enter the first entry port 64. If a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 shots enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the first entrance 64, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. Become.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, about 9 out of the 250 fired balls are designed to enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b even if the prize balls to be paid out are to be fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed game is more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be arranged based on the design concept to the extent that the player is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game in the time saving state or the jackpot state.

Further, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball on the path until the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500, the ball launched by the right-handed game is movable. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing of reaching the lid 1500. In this modified example, the purpose is to delay the flow of the ball (to make the flow behavior of the ball different) and to distribute the ball launched by the right-handed game to a plurality of flow paths. The distribution member 700 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different configurations may be used for each purpose, or the ball distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700. On the other hand, a delay means for making the flow period of the sphere (the flow period until reaching the movable lid 1500) different (for example, a flow path having a friction coefficient of the flow surface different from that of other flow surfaces, or a sphere). A flow path that finally reaches the movable lid 1500 may be provided regardless of which direction the flow direction is branched.

Next, the electric accessory 640a reached by the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 will be described. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric accessory 640a is provided in a region where both the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the ball flowing down the second flow path 702 can reach, and is usually drawn by a symbol. A guided state (protruding state) in which a ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a can flow down toward the second entry port 640 and an electric accessory 640a by a game per hit that is executed when a winning ball is won. It is variable to the release state (buried state) in which the ball that has reached is not accepted.

Further, the variable mode (opening / closing control content) of the electric accessory 640a executed as the above-mentioned game per normal symbol is different depending on the set probability state of the normal symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In the set gaming state (probability change state, time saving state), the electric accessory 640a has a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) for the ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a to reach the second entry port 640. In the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the opening and closing is controlled so that the player is in the guided state and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a goes to the second entrance 640. The opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be in the guided state for a time that cannot be reached (for example, 0.1 second).

With this configuration, in the game state (for example, normal state, latent state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the advantageous player than the right-handed game. In a gaming state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set (for example, a probabilistic state or a time saving state), a right-handed game can be regarded as an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game.

Finally, the sphere that has passed through the electric accessory 640a (the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 701 and the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 702) reaches the V winning device 2650. The V winning device 2650 is opened and closed by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball winning the V winning device 2650 passes through a specific gate during the jackpot game. , It is configured so that a high probability state of a special symbol can be set after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 2650.

As shown in FIG. 194, the V winning device 2650 is combined with an opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b to form a V winning device 2650. There are a plurality of base members 2650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c to light LEDs from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED substrate 2650d, the back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 2650d with the base member 2650c, and the jackpot winning opening (big hit winning opening) 2650a formed in the opening forming member 2650b. The opening / closing unit 2650f having the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the above, the flow path cover body 2650g which is combined with the back surface side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, and the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g are formed. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked to the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and the like. A fixing cover body that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i and a flow path solenoid 2650k that covers the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 2650j with screws. It is composed of 2650m.

FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650. FIG. 195 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and FIG. 195 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Lb-Lb of the V winning device 2650. As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the V winning device 2650 is formed with a jackpot winning opening (big hit winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning opening (big hit winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 195 (b). A bottom surface inclined to the lower left is formed in. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 195 (b).

As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the opening of the jackpot winning opening (big hit winning opening) 2650a is opened by the opening / closing door 2650f1 composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1 so that the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the jackpot winning opening (big hit winning opening) 2650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). ..

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the jackpot winning opening (big hit winning opening) 2650a. You can win a prize inside. Therefore, the ball can be made to win a certain V winning device 2650 during the big hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 195 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a configuration in which the sphere guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and the special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 196 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the spheres are distributed to the special exhaust flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball, and the flow path cover body 2650g has. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 2650 g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guidance piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and is guided to the special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2. Is guided to. The special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V route through which the inflowing sphere passes through the specific region (detection switch) 2650e3, and the sphere that has flowed into the special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2. The passage is detected by the detection switch 2650e3 that can detect the passage, and then the ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes through the V route, a special symbol is used. It is configured to set a high probability state. That is, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting a high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) capable of passing through a specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. The purpose is to set any flow path (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3, and the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to ON. The flow path is switched so that the ball winning the V winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196 (a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the transition content of the gaming state in this modified example will be described. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition contents of the gaming state in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. In this modified example, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the state where the normal state is set, the ball is put into the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game. A game is performed in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed. When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery), the big hit A is set at a rate of 40% and the big hit B is set at a rate of 60% as the big hit type. Then, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), the big hit C is set at a rate of 100% as the big hit type.

When the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as the jackpot A7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game is completed. When the jackpot B is set, the same jackpot game as the jackpot B7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. In this modification, when the probability variation state is set, the special symbol executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the end condition (first transition condition) of the high probability state (special symbol high probability) of the special symbol. The number of lottery (ST times) is set to 50, and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as the end condition (second transition condition) of the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of the normal symbol). (Time saving number of times) 70 times (second transition condition A) or special figure 1 lottery number of times 2 times (second transition condition B) is set.

When the jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is performed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved balls) is the upper limit (4) after the jackpot game is completed. Can be easily reached. During the probability change state, a game in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed is performed by a right-handed game. In this modification, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to execute the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery so that the game state that is most advantageous to the player becomes the probabilistic state, and is normal. It differs from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed when the high probability state of the symbol is set.

Specifically, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be easier to win a small hit than the special figure 1 lottery, and the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery is set to 1/20. Further, it is configured so that it is easier to set a game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player after the big hit game is completed in the case of winning the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery than in the case of winning the big hit in the special figure 1 lottery. ing. Further, the latent probability 7 table 203fe3 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the latent probability state in the above-described seventh embodiment is referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In the seventh embodiment, the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the latent probability state. ..

In the present embodiment configured in this way, a right-handed game in which a special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed is performed in a probabilistic state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set and a time saving state, and a low probability of a normal symbol is performed. A left-handed game is performed in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed in the normal state in which the state is set and the latent state.

Next, the relationship between the game result in the probabilistic state and the transition content of the game state will be described. As described above, in this modification, the first transition condition for transitioning from the probable change state to the time saving state when it is satisfied and the second transition condition for transitioning from the probable change state to the latent state when it is satisfied are set. Has been done. Specifically, as the first transition condition, the number of special symbol lottery (ST times) 50 times executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and as the second transition condition, during the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the number of executed special symbol lottery (time reduction number) 70 times (second transition condition A) or the number of special figure 1 lottery times 2 times (second transition condition B) is set.

In other words, after the probability change state is set, if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, it shifts to the time saving state, and then the special symbol lottery in the time saving state is executed 20 times. , It is configured to shift to the normal state. Here, in the present modification, different fluctuation times are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1) in the probability variation state. It is configured. Specifically, as in the case of the latent probability 7 table 203fe3 in the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 1 and 2), and when the number is more than a predetermined number (for example, for example). It is configured so that a shorter fluctuation time than 4) can be easily selected.

With this configuration, in the probabilistic state in which the set period (ST number of times 50 times) is defined, the lottery that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed. By winning the small hit B in two lottery and discarding the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the player can be made to play a novel game of reducing the number of balls held in the special figure 1.

Further, in this modification, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the game is interrupted and the special figure 1 change is executed a plurality of times. When the act of reducing the number of reserved balls is executed in FIG. 1, the second transition condition B is satisfied, and the transition from the probabilistic state to the latent state is configured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game is lowered due to the interruption of the game during the period in which the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state in which the long-time fluctuation time is easily selected is executed. can.

Next, the fluctuation status of each special symbol when the gaming state shifts will be described. First, the flow when the second transition condition B is satisfied and the latent probability state is set while the probability change state is set will be described. As described above, since the second transition condition B can be satisfied when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed, a new special figure 1 change is executed immediately after the latent state is set. Since the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the newly executed special figure 1 fluctuation is selected using the fluctuation pattern table referred to during the latent state, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation is during the normal state. A variable pattern that can be selected will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed for a long time during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation for a long time.

On the other hand, a case where the first transition condition is satisfied and the time saving state is set during the probability change state will be described. As described above, the first transition condition can be satisfied either when the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped or displayed, or when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed, so that the time saving state is set. At the same timing, the special figure 1 fluctuation for a long time may be executed. However, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special figure lottery is performed 20 times or the big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, and the total fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation 20 times executed during the time saving state is added. The value is configured to be at least longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation set during the latent state. The contents of the variation pattern table are defined so that the variation of the special figure 1 executed in the time saving state can be easily selected as the variation time shorter than the variation of the special figure 1 executed in the latent state.

With this configuration, in the case of transitioning from the probabilistic state to the time-saving state and then to the normal state, both the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation take a long time (for example, 10 minutes). ) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that fluctuates. In addition, if a big hit is won in the special figure lottery during the time saving state or the latent state, the special figure fluctuation during execution is discarded, so after the big hit game ends, the game state set after the big hit game ends. A new special drawing lottery will be executed accordingly. Therefore, when a new game state is set with the jackpot winning as an opportunity, the long-time special figure fluctuation that was executed before the jackpot winning is continuously executed even after the jackpot game ends, so that the first special It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which both the symbol variation and the second special symbol variation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes).

As described above, in this modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executable in duplicate, and the second special is more than the case where the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the jackpot winning in the symbol lottery makes it easier to set the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed. With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed (game).

The same technical idea as that of the present modification may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having a game playability different from that of the present modification. For example, the pachinko machine 10 using the first to third embodiments described above may be applied. Even if the big hit is not won in the special symbol lottery, if the predetermined execution conditions (for example, the ball enters the special electric start port or the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery), the predetermined game ( The fact that a ball that has entered a variable ball-entry means that is open during a predetermined game has entered a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) by enabling a game per character or a small hit game. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the jackpot game is executed as an opportunity.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), the internal structure of the small hit attacker 3650 is changed, and the ball winning the small hit attacker 3650 is either the normal winning opening 3652 or the V winning opening 3653. The movable valve 3651 may be configured to be movable so as to win a crab, and the jackpot game may be executed when the ball wins the V winning opening 3653 (see FIG. 197 (b)). Further, even if the ball winning the small hit attacker 3650 wins the normal winning opening 3652 (see FIG. 197 (a)), the same winning ball as when winning the V winning opening 3653 is given. It is good to configure it to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the content of the effect executed in this modification will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, various transition conditions for terminating the probabilistic state are set, and the probabilistic state is configured to shift to a different gaming state according to the established transition conditions. Among them, the content of the effect relating to the second transition condition B, which is established when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the probability change state, will be described.

In this modified example, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the small hit type (small hit A, small hit C) that interrupts the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation is the same as in the seventh embodiment described above. , The small hit type (small hit B) that discards the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution can be set. Then, when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed without being discarded, the special figure 1 change number is updated.

That is, if the small hit B is set when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is not updated, and a new special figure 1 is created. It is configured to carry out fluctuations. Therefore, it is configured so that the above-mentioned second transition condition B is unlikely to be satisfied when the execution special figure 1 fluctuation is continuously discarded in the probabilistic change state. On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state, a long special figure 1 fluctuation in which a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation time is set and a short-time (for example, 1 minute) fluctuation time are set. When the short special figure 1 variation to be performed and the short special figure 1 variation are configured to be selectable, and the long special figure 1 variation is being executed and the remaining variation time is, for example, 8 minutes, the small hit B is won. It is more advantageous for the player to win the small hit A and interrupt the change in the long special figure 1 than to discard the change in the long special figure 1. That is, in some cases, it may be difficult to satisfy the second transition condition B.

Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation newly executed after discarding the long special figure 1 variation being executed is the short special figure 1 variation, the case where the long special figure 1 variation is not discarded is compared with the case where the long special figure 1 variation is not discarded. There is a high possibility that the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 will be updated as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation in Short Special Figure 1 elapses.

Therefore, in this modification, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the status of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution (the length of the remaining fluctuation time) and the special figure 1 variation to be executed next are set. Based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery that is mainly executed, whether or not the current gaming state is advantageous to the player (a state in which the probability variation state can be easily continued). It is configured to perform an effect that suggests (whether or not). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game content in the probabilistic state in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 199 (a) schematically shows an example of the display contents when the RUSH period variable effect executed when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the probability change state (RUSH). FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of an extension display showing that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the effect of the RUSH period variable effect. Further, FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extension display showing that the RUSH period has been shortened as a result of the effect of the RUSH period variable effect, and FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the extension display. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the extension display which shows that the RUSH period was extended as a production result of a variable effect. Of the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in this modification, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As shown in FIG. 199 (a), during the RUSH period, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined lottery result (big hit, small hit, part of the miss), the rabbit in the main display area Dm. An effect (variable period effect) is executed in which the character 811 imitating the above finds the treasure box 812 to which the extra bag 812h is attached. Then, the characters "what is the extra content?" Are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The treasure box 812 is a display mode for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery that is mainly executed, and how the RUSH period (probability change state period) of the bag 812h is changed based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. This is a display mode for notifying the player of the bag.

After the period variable effect shown in FIG. 199 (a) is started, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the second of the opened treasure chests 812 is displayed. An effect of displaying the result display mode 812a indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), as the result display mode 812a, the display mode of "V" indicating that the small hit was won in the special figure 2 lottery is displayed. As the result display mode 812a, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, and when it is a big hit, the character "win" is imitated. The display mode is displayed, and if it is out of alignment, a display mode imitating a "cross mark" is displayed.

Then, from the opened bag 812h, a situation display mode 812j indicating whether the RUSH period (probability change state period) is variable (shifted to a state where it is easy to change) based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time. Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), as the situation display mode 812j, a display mode of "extension" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended is displayed. As the status display mode 812j, in addition to the display mode of "extension" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, "sorry" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened and a small hit C are set and the RUSH period ends. "End" indicating "End", "?" That does not affect the RUSH period because the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery that is the target of the variable period production is out of order, and the lottery of the special figure 2 lottery that is the target of the variable period production A display mode such as "celebration" is displayed to congratulate the result as a big hit.

Here, regarding the setting method of various display modes displayed when the period variable effect is executed, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIGS. 183 to 192). Will be explained using. First, in the state command receiving process (see S4322 in FIG. 183) executed in the command determination process 7 (S4192 in FIG. 183), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and the probabilistic state is in progress. When it is determined, the process of setting a display command for displaying "RUSH in" shown in FIG. 199 (a) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Next, instead of the variation display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (see S5237 of FIG. 190) executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see S4153 of FIG. 187), the variation of the special figure 2 this time is a jackpot variation. It discriminates whether it is a small hit fluctuation or a missed fluctuation, and executes a selection process for selecting whether to execute a period variable effect based on the discrimination result. In this selection process, it is selected whether or not to execute the period variable effect based on the contents defined in the dedicated data table (period variable effect selection table). Specifically, if the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is a big hit fluctuation, it is about 20%, if it is a small hit fluctuation, it is 100%, and if it is a missed fluctuation, it is 10%. The contents of the period variable effect selection table are specified so that the execution of the variable effect is selected.

Here, when it is selected to execute the period variable effect in the jackpot fluctuation, the display mode of "this" is set as the result display mode 812a and the display mode of "celebration" is set as the situation display mode 812j in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command for displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In addition, when it is selected to execute the period variable effect in the out-of-range fluctuation, the display mode of "x" is set as the result display mode 812a and "?" Is set as the status display mode 812j according to the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command for displaying the display mode of is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

On the other hand, if it is selected to execute the period variable effect in the small hit fluctuation, then the small hit type set in the current small hit fluctuation is read out, and the special figure 1 being executed at the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. The type determination process for determining whether the small hit type is to interrupt the fluctuation or the small hit type to be discarded is executed. Next, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation currently being executed is calculated based on the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, and is executed next from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern command included in the winning information stored in the reserved first area) is predicted.

Then, as a result of the type determination process, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is a small hit type, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of interruption is the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next. If it is longer than, the display mode of "extension" is set as the status display mode 812j, and if the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of interruption is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next, "extension" is displayed. A display command for displaying the display mode of "Sorry" on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Further, as a result of the type determination process, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is a small hit type for discarding, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of discarding is the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next. If it is longer than, the display mode of "sorry" is set as the status display mode 812j, and if the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of discarding is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next, "sorry" is displayed. A display command for displaying the display mode of "extension" on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Further, when the small hit type set this time is small hit C, the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state at the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation, so that the situation display mode 812j is "finished". A display command for displaying the display mode of is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

As described above, in this modified example, even if the same small hit type is set, the timing at which the small hit fluctuation is stopped and displayed and the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next time are It is configured so that the effect result of the period variable effect is variable according to the set variation pattern. That is, as a result of the effect of the variable period effect, at the timing when the current small hit fluctuation is stopped and displayed, there is a case where the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is interrupted at the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation, and a case where the small hit type is interrupted. It is configured to relatively determine which is more advantageous to the player depending on the type of small hit to be discarded, and set the effect mode (display mode) of the period variable effect based on the determination result. ing. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the small hit fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the small hit type advantageous to the player is set at that time.

In this modified example, as described above, the effect mode of the variable period effect is relatively set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the remainder when the special figure 1 variation is interrupted. The production mode of the period-variable effect may be determined depending on whether or not the fluctuation time is longer than the specific time (for example, 1 minute), or the remaining fluctuation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded is the specific time (for example, 1 minute). , 30 seconds) may be determined depending on whether or not it is longer than 30 seconds.

Further, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above and the technical idea of the modified example of the seventh embodiment may be combined. For example, in the latent state of the seventh embodiment, an end condition other than the jackpot winning is provided. , The latent state may be terminated even when the termination condition is satisfied.

Specifically, the first end condition that can be satisfied when the total number of lottery of the first special symbol and the number of lottery of the second special symbol reaches 100 times, and the number of lottery of the first special symbol is 5. A second end condition that can be satisfied when the number of times is reached and a third end condition that can be satisfied when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a specific small hit (small hit C) can be set. Just do it.

With this configuration, when the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above, the player is informed how long the latent probability state will continue. It can be confusing. That is, in the seventh embodiment described above, once the latent state is set, the latent state continues at least until the next big hit game is executed (until the big hit is won), so that the latent state is in the latent state. There was a problem that the game became monotonous, but in this modified example, it is possible to let the player play the game while expecting that the latent state will continue for a long time or will continue until the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Furthermore, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit type (small hit A) that interrupts the execution of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change that is being executed are discarded (forced by missing). A plurality of small hit types including at least a small hit type (small hit B) to be stopped) can be set. Then, when the small hit B is set as the small hit type and the first special symbol change is discarded, the number of lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state is updated by the discarded first special symbol change. It is configured so that it will not be done. With this configuration, the ease with which the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied in the latent state can be changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, the degree of advantage of the lottery result of the second special symbol can be made different depending on the execution status of the first special symbol.

For example, in a gaming machine configured so that at least the fluctuation time A (2 minutes) and the fluctuation time B (10 minutes) can be set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the latent state, the fluctuation time B (10 minutes). ) Is set, and when the remaining time of the first special symbol change during execution is longer than 2 minutes, the first special symbol being executed is discarded rather than being discarded. , It is more advantageous for the player to be interrupted, and when the remaining time of the first special symbol fluctuation during execution is shorter than 2 minutes, it is better for the player to discard the first special symbol during execution than to interrupt it. It becomes advantageous to.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in both the lottery result of the special symbol and the change status of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the degree of advantage to the player can be made different by combining a plurality of events (special symbol lottery, change status of the first special symbol), it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to predict.

Further, the above-mentioned technical idea may be used for a gaming machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, the processing for the special figure change during execution may be different depending on the winning type acquired when the special electric power operating port is won.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation specification) in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in duplicate. Correspondingly, the length of the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is changed by discarding or interrupting the first special symbol variation during execution. That is, by discarding the first special symbol variation, it is difficult to satisfy the end condition that can be satisfied based on the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery, thereby aiming for a long-term advantageous gaming state. Instead of this, when a specific area is provided in the small hit attacker opened in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the ball passes through the specific area. May be configured so that the jackpot game is executed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration in which only the first special symbol has the hold storage function is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage is limited to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A function may be provided. In this case, as the number of reserved balls referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to be executed in the gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player, only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is used. May be configured to refer to, or the cumulative number of reserved balls, which is the sum of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, may be referred to. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In this case, for example, the second The larger the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern with a short fluctuation time) that is advantageous to the player as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. It is good to configure it so that it becomes.

With this configuration, the player needs to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while acquiring the reserved balls of the second special symbol, so that the game is interrupted and the first special symbol is reserved. The act of reducing the number of balls can be suppressed. In addition to this, the cumulative number of reserved balls, which is the sum of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is selected based on both the difference and the total number of reserved balls is a specific number (for example, 5) or more, and the difference is 3 or more. In the above, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern so that the variation pattern advantageous to the player (the variation pattern having a short variation time) can be easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. As a result, the player can be made to play the game positively, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment described above, when a gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a specific number (1 or 2). , The variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) that is more advantageous to the player is selected as the second special symbol variation than in the case other than the specific number, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is set as the specific number. Although a small value is set, the value is not limited to this, and for example, a specific number may be a plurality of values (for example, 3 or 4) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. However, the values may be separated (for example, 1 or 3). In this case, if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a small hit type is set to discard the first special symbol fluctuation during execution, the small hit winning is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, there are cases where it is advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol variation, and cases where it is advantageous for the player not to discard (interrupt) it. Can be provided. With this configuration, the player can be more interested in the relationship between the lottery result of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, one type of variation pattern table is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set. However, it is not limited to this, for example, a large number of jackpot types in which the probability change state and the latent probability state are set after the jackpot ends are provided, and are referred to during the latent probability state based on the set jackpot type. A plurality of fluctuation pattern tables referred to during the latent state may be provided so that the fluctuation pattern tables can be made different. In this case, the second special may be provided according to the reference fluctuation pattern table. It is preferable to make the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol different, which makes it easy to select a variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) that is advantageous to the player as the symbol variation. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol aimed at by the player during the latent state, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to predict. Further, when a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables referred to during the latent state are provided, in some of them, the player is given a second special symbol variation regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is advantageous for the player as the second special symbol variation regardless of the advantageous variation pattern table in which the advantageous variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) is easily selected (always selected) and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is preferable to provide both or one of the disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table in which the fluctuation pattern (short-time fluctuation pattern) is difficult to be selected (not selected).

Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above, when the first special symbol variation during execution is discarded, the number of time reductions is not subtracted, but the first special symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the number of time reductions is subtracted when the fluctuation is discarded. In this configuration, when a gaming state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set, a short-time (for example, 5 seconds) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern is configured so as to be easily selected, and the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation. Then, in the second special symbol variation that is efficiently executed in response to the first special symbol variation, the probability variation state is reached until a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is won for a small hit that discards the executing first special symbol variation. It is possible to provide the player with a novel game property that the game inside can be executed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol becomes one or two during the latent state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation is shortened. rice field. Furthermore, the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol is reduced by winning a specific small hit (small hit B) in the second special symbol lottery and discarding (forced stop) the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation. Was configured in. Further, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, in a game (right-handed game) executed in the latent state, the hold memory of the first special symbol can be acquired. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured to be long (for example, 10 minutes). With this configuration, as a game in the latent state, a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. In the second special symbol lottery, a big hit or a small hit that is advantageous to the player. A game that wins a lot of prize balls by winning the game and a game that reduces the holding memory of the first special symbol and increases the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery, which is an unprecedented game It was something that could be provided to the player.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol is 4 (upper limit), the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery may be increased. In this case, with respect to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, it may be difficult to acquire the hold memory of the first special symbol during the game (right-handed game) in the latent state. In this case, unlike each of the above-described embodiments, it is disadvantageous for the player to win a specific small hit (small hit B) in the second special symbol lottery.

Even with this configuration, it is easy to draw a special symbol (second special symbol) that is advantageous to the player according to the number of reserved special symbols (first special symbol) that is disadvantageous to the player. It can be different. Further, in this case, for example, by acquiring the reserved memory number of the first special symbol up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the second special symbol lottery is advantageously executed. It is possible to easily set the state to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game in order to acquire the reserved memory number of the first special symbol up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game.

Further, even if the reserved memory number of the first special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit value during the jackpot game, the process of starting the first special symbol change after setting the latent probability state starts the second special symbol change. Since it is executed before the processing, it is possible to suppress that the second special symbol variation is executed in an advantageous state after the latent probability state is set. As the control process of the main control device 110, the process of starting the second special symbol variation may be executed before the process of starting the first special symbol variation. With this configuration, for example, when the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is changed (decreased) from the number of reserved memories acquired during the jackpot game. The second special symbol change can be executed without any problem.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol) is a specific number (for example, one), the game is advantageous to the player (for example, the first game). The first game (for example, a game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped) is configured so that the 2 special symbol fluctuations can be easily executed, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol) can be easily set to a specific number. ) And the second game (for example, a game in which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped after the lapse of the fluctuation time), which makes it difficult to make a specific number, are configured to be feasible. Further, it is designed so that the specific number (for example, 1) of the special figure reserved balls in which a game advantageous to the player is easily executed is smaller than the upper limit number of the special figure reserved balls (for example, 4). However, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is larger than the specific number, the first game is more likely to be executed than when the number is less than the specific number. Further, when the current number of reserved special figure balls is a specific number, or when the number is less than the specific number, the first game is more difficult to be executed than when the number is larger than the specific number.

With this configuration, the number of special figure reserved balls can be brought close to a specific number simply by having the player play the game with the aim of executing the first game, and the player can understand. Easy games can be played.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of special figure reserved balls that makes it easy for the player to execute a game advantageous to the player is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls, but the number is not limited to this, for example. , The upper limit number of special figure reserved balls may be set as the number of special figure reserved balls (specific number) that makes it easy for the player to execute a game advantageous to the player. In this case, when the game for forcibly stopping the special symbol fluctuation is executed, the number of balls reserved for the special symbol tends to decrease, which is disadvantageous to the player. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property in which the game is performed with the aim of preventing the game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped from being executed.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 215. In the seventh embodiment described above, the processing content for the first special symbol change during execution is configured to be different depending on the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. rice field. Specifically, when small hit A or small hit C is set as the small hit type, the special symbol change during execution is interrupted, and when small hit B is set, the special symbol change during execution is interrupted. It was configured to be destroyed.

In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol change being executed, the processing according to the set small hit type is executed. Therefore, for example, the small hit winning Even during the jackpot fluctuation, which is a lottery result that is more favorable to the player, there is a problem that the jackpot fluctuation is discarded based on the small hit winning. In addition, when such a configuration is used, a high expectation effect having a high expectation that the first special symbol fluctuation during execution is a big hit is executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, since the player notices that the jackpot fluctuation has been discarded (the jackpot winning has become invalid), there is a problem that it is difficult to execute the high-expectation effect.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Moreover, since the second special symbol is configured so as not to be stored on hold, for example, the second special symbol won by the small hit is stopped and displayed at a timing before the first special symbol won by the big hit is stopped and displayed. Even if a means for determining whether or not to perform is provided in advance, the timing at which it is determined that the stop display is not displayed is immediately before the jackpot fluctuation is stopped and displayed. There was a problem that it was difficult to execute (time corresponding to the fluctuation time of).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed (when special processing is executed for the special symbol change during execution), the content of the special symbol change during execution is determined. It is significantly different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that it is configured to determine the processing content. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the fluctuation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation during execution. If the discrimination result is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is discarded and the specific fluctuation is specified. When it is other than the pattern, it is configured so that the other special symbol change during execution can be interrupted.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot is won, the advantageous jackpot type in which the jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, the probability variation jackpot) is executed, and the disadvantage to the player. It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the disadvantageous jackpot type in which a large hit game (for example, normal jackpot) is executed, and further, the fluctuation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is selected. It is configured to be different.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the fluctuation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. The pattern is easily selected, and the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type.

With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, it is easier to execute a jackpot game (for example, probabilistic jackpot) which is advantageous to the player than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small (for example). It is possible to make it difficult to execute a big hit game (for example, a normal big hit) that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, it is easy to be abandoned by a small hit winning). That is, the ratio of the probabilistic jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting that the advantageous jackpot game is executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won in any of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. There is. With this configuration, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery wins a big hit, the big hit can be discarded by the other small hit. Depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the ratio of the probabilistic jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be surely different.

First, with reference to FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 201 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in the present embodiment is a part of the configuration of the right side region and the lower region (variable) with respect to the above-described modified example of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). It differs in that a part of the configuration of the lower area of the display unit 80) is different. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 201, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment is based on the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193). The point that the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 through which the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 can flow down are provided extending to the lower side of the right side region, the through gate 67, and the electric combination. The configuration and arrangement position of the object 640a have been changed, and the small hit attacker (second attacker) that is opened in a part of the small hit game that is opened in the small hit game instead of the small hit attacker 3650. ) 5650 is different in that it is arranged at the lower center position of the game board 13. Other than that, they are the same, and the same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the right side region of the gaming board 13 will be described focusing on the differences from the configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193). The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 passes through the bending path 701a, passes through the through gate 67, and flows out to the lower side of the right side region. Further, the sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side thereof, flows into the inflow port 704a, and flows into the back surface side of the first flow path 701 (FIG. 201). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side from the viewpoint), passes through the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and flows out from the outflow port to the lower right region on the game board 13. .. Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (first flow path 701 and second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge in the lower right region and flow down on the variable winning device (first attacker) 2650 and out. It flows into the mouth 66.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13, the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 will be described. In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream portion of the first flow path 701 having the bending path 701a, and the second ball enters in the downstream portion of the second flow path 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow path 704b). A mouth 640 is arranged. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second entry port 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without reducing the flow speed of the ball. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of balls are simultaneously entered into the second entry port 640. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball is promptly inserted into the second entrance 640. You can enter the ball.

Further, different flow paths (first flow path 701, 1st flow path 701,) in which the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since it is arranged in the second flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so as to allow the ball to flow down to only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second entry port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easy to insert a ball into the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to make.

Next, a case where the sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the sphere flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, it is configured so that the time required for the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outflow port is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right region in one minute, the balls that have flowed into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are fired next to the balls are fired next to the second flow path 702. The ball that has flowed into the game board 13 flows down the lower right region of the game board 13 (the region where the first variable winning device 2650 is arranged) almost simultaneously (with a difference of about 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the gaming state (big hit state or small hit state) in which the first variable winning device 2650 is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at one time.

Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 so that a plurality of flow paths overlap each other when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball flow paths (the area occupied by the ball flow paths of the game board 13) can be reduced. can.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second entry port 640), and is the first in the lower right region of the game board 13. The sphere is configured to flow out to the downstream side of the sphere that has flowed out from the flow path 701. As a result, the spheres that flowed out vigorously from the outlet 704c (the spheres that flowed out at a higher speed than the spheres that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the spheres that flowed out from the first flow path 701, which was irregular. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball flow occurs.

In the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the two flow paths by the distribution member 700, but other configurations may be used, for example, two. The spheres may be distributed at different ratios instead of alternating (1: 1) with respect to the flow paths, or the spheres may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, the sphere may be randomly distributed to a plurality of flow paths according to the weight of the sphere and the timing of flow down. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 700 whose distribution destination of the next passing sphere changes depending on the weight of the passing sphere is used. For example, the vibration is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule. A component member may be used.

Next, the lower region of the game board 13 in which the small hit attacker 5650 is arranged will be described. The small hit attacker 5650 is a variable ball entry means that is opened in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small hit attacker 5650 is arranged at a position below the first ball entry port 64, and a ball flowing down on the game board 13 reaches by a nail planted in the game board 13. It is configured to be difficult. Therefore, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to win the prize ball is executed.

In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the control for suspending or forcibly stopping the other special symbol fluctuation during execution is configured to be executable, and further, the execution is executed. It is configured to switch the control content to be executed based on the fluctuation content of the other special symbol variation in the inside. That is, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to win the prize ball, but a predetermined control (interruption or forced stop) is executed for the second special symbol change during execution. It will be an execution opportunity to make it happen.

<About the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 208. The eighth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment in that the partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the partial configuration of the RAM 203 are different from each other. Everything else is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 202, the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment is a small hit random number 8 table instead of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb with respect to the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 168 (a)). 202gb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is replaced with the variable pattern selection 7 table 202fe, the variable pattern selection 8 table 202ge is replaced with the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, and the small hit type is replaced with the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff. The difference is that the selection 8 table 202 gf is provided, and the other points are the same.

Here, the contents of the small hit random number 8 table 202 gb will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 8 table 202 gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small hit random number 8 table 202 gb defines the small hit determination value for the first special symbol. Specifically, for the first special symbol whose symbol type is the first special symbol, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "300 to 599" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol. With respect to the second special symbol, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 is "550 to 599" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

That is, in the present embodiment, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/2 when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/12 when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win. In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the small hit game in which the ball cannot (difficultly) win the small hit attacker 5650 during the small hit game is opened. Is executed, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variable winning device 65, which is opened during the big hit game, is configured to execute the small hit game. Therefore, even if it is set to win a small hit with a high probability in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively given a specific (prize ball). Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit probability is set to be lower than the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery, and in the probabilistic state or the latent state in which the game is executed by the right-handed game. , It is possible to make it difficult to reduce the number of balls held by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd provides a winning device (a winning device to be opened) for executing the jackpot operation with respect to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) described above. The difference is that the value of the time reduction counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot is different, and the other points are the same. For convenience of explanation, each jackpot type used in the seventh embodiment described above and each jackpot type used in the eighth embodiment have different names (for example, jackpot A7). And jackpot A8), but the elements that do not explain the differences are the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal jackpot (big hit A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, it is set at the time of winning the jackpot. It is stipulated that the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the gaming state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, when the jackpot C8, which is set at a rate of 20% of the jackpot wins in the first special symbol lottery, is won, the value of the time saving counter 203h is 10,000 regardless of the game state set at the time of the jackpot winning. Is set to. That is, in reality, the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

As described above, the jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery are defined as jackpot types with different degrees of advantage for the player, and "big hit A8" in the order of the most disadvantageous to the player. "Big hit B8" and "Big hit C8" are specified. In other words, it is stipulated that "big hit C8" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (when the jackpot E8 is won), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. .. That is, when the "big hit E8" is won, the probability change state of 100 times (the special symbol variation is 100 times) is set after the big hit game is completed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed during the probability change state and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are executed in parallel (overlapping), the most advantageous jackpot type is ". While aiming to win the jackpot C8, a game aiming not to win the jackpot types "big hit A8" and "big hit D8" whose probabilistic state ends is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, among the fluctuation pattern selection tables in the eighth embodiment, the probability variation 8 table 202ge and the latent probability 8 table 202ge referred to during the probability variation state will be described. do. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation 8 table 202ge, and FIG. 206 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latency 8 table 202ge. ..

In the present embodiment, the right-handed game is executed in the state where the probability variation state and the latent probability state are set, and the game in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in duplicate is performed. Then, the fluctuation pattern set when the jackpot is won is configured to be different according to the selected jackpot type. Further, it differs based on the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1) and the total number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2). It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern can be selected.

Specifically, it is configured so that the larger the total number of special figures held, the shorter the fluctuation time selected when the jackpot in favor of the player is won than when the total number of special figures held is short. , The larger the total number of special figures held, the longer the fluctuation time selected when the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player, is won than when the total number of special figures held is short.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, control is executed for the other special symbol fluctuation during execution according to the fluctuation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation during execution. It is configured so that the contents are different. Specifically, when the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern of 30 seconds or more, a process for discarding the special symbol variation is executed. If the fluctuation pattern is less than 30 seconds, a process for interrupting the special symbol fluctuation is executed.

With this configuration, when the total number of special figures held is large, the special symbol fluctuation is discarded when the jackpot type that is more disadvantageous to the player is set than when the total number of special figures held is small. When a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to make it difficult to discard (easily interrupt) the special symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player can continue the state in which the total number of special figures held is large.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the probability variation 8 table 202g2, the variation differs based on the special symbol type, the hit / fail judgment result (result of the selected type), and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations). The pattern is specified.

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), and among the jackpots in the winning / failing judgment result, the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the number of special symbol reservations (total special symbol). In the range where the number of holdings) is "0 to 3", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of holdings of the special figure is In the range of (total number of reserved special figures) of "4 to 7", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern. It is stipulated.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and among the jackpots in the winning / failing judgment result, the jackpot type is "big hit B" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is In the range of "0 to 3", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved special figures (total special figure). In the range where the number of holds) is "4 to 7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. ..

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and among the jackpot judgment results, the jackpot type is "big hit C" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0". In the range of "~ 3", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with an ultra-long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total special figure reservation). In the range where the number) is "4 to 7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined by associating an ultra-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. ..

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0 to 3". In the range of, the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is ". In the range of "4 to 6", the entire range (" 0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figures held (total special figure hold). In the range where the number) is "7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and among the jackpot judgment results, the jackpot type is "big hit D" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is In the range of "0 to 3", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved special figures (total special figure). In the range where the number of holdings) is "4 to 7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. ..

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and among the jackpot judgment results, the jackpot type is "big hit E" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0". In the range of "~ 3", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations). ) Is defined in the range of "4 to 7" in which a short variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 as a variation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0 to 7". In the range of, that is, the entire range, a short variation with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the latent probability 8 table 202g2, the special symbol type, the hit / fail judgment result (result of the selected type), and the special figure hold number (total special figure hold number) are displayed. Different fluctuation patterns are defined based on this.

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), and among the jackpots in the winning / failing judgment result, the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the number of special symbol reservations (total special symbol). In the range of "0 to 4", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of pending special figures. In the range where (total number of special figures held) is "5 to 7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. It is stipulated.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and among the jackpots in the winning / failing judgment result, the jackpot type is "big hit B" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is In the range of "0 to 4", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved special figures (total special figure). In the range where the number of holdings) is "5 to 7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. ..

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and among the jackpot judgment results, the jackpot type is "big hit C" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0". In the range of "~ 4", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations). ) Is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0 to 6". In the range of, the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is ". In the range of "7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and among the jackpot judgment results, the jackpot type is "big hit D" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is In the range of "0 to 4", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved special figures (total special figure). In the range where the number of holdings) is "5 to 7", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined by associating a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. ..

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and among the jackpot judgment results, the jackpot type is "big hit E" and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0". In the range of "~ 4", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations). ) Is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is "0 to 3". In the range of, the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is ". In the range of "4 to 6", the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 325 as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations). ) Is the range of "7", and the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") is defined by associating a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution is performed when the execution condition for executing the specific control (for example, interruption or discard) is satisfied for the special symbol change during execution (for example, when the small hit game is executed). The content of the specific control to be performed is configured to be switched according to the content of the special symbol change during execution. Then, the variation display mode of the special symbol variation during execution (the variation display mode set at the time of executing the special symbol variation) is configured to be switched to the variation display mode according to the content of the specific control. As a result, the switching content of the variation display mode can be changed according to the content of the special symbol variation during execution, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, a switching condition for switching the variation display mode of the special symbol fluctuation during execution to the specific variation display mode (variation display mode for forcibly stopping) according to the set gaming state. The ease of establishment of is different. Furthermore, the ease with which the switching condition is satisfied is different depending on the type of the special symbol being executed and the set jackpot type (the length of the selected fluctuation time is different). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how the variable display mode is switched when the execution condition is satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ease with which the execution condition is satisfied differs depending on the special symbol type, and specifically, the lottery result in which the execution condition can be satisfied by the special symbol lottery (specifically, the lottery result ( The probability of winning a small hit) is different depending on the special symbol type, and the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation set when the small hit is won is also different. As a result, the game result can be greatly different depending on which special symbol type executes the variation indicating which lottery result at which timing. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, a specific fluctuation time is selected according to each condition, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each condition is supported. A plurality of fluctuation times that can be selected may be defined so that different fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time are selected according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as a threshold value as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed, but the threshold value is not limited to this, and a plurality of threshold values may be set. Further, in the present embodiment, a fluctuation time (for example, 28 seconds or 30 seconds) that approximates a threshold value set as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed is selected. As a result, when the variation effect corresponding to the selected variation pattern is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the same effect mode can be executed. The difference in fluctuation time (for 2 seconds) can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the fluctuation effect from the start timing of the special symbol variation, or by advancing the end timing of the variation effect from the end timing of the special symbol variation. The difference period may be configured to display a still image (for example, an image displayed at the start of the variation effect or an image displayed at the end of the variation effect).

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the small hit type selection 8 table 202 gf in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 8 table 202 gf. The small hit type selection 8 table 202gf defines the small hit type for the first special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172 (a)), and the small hit. The difference is that the release target that is opened in the game is changed, the symbol confirmation time is changed, and the control content that is performed for the special symbol change during execution is changed, and other than that, it is the same. be. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

To explain specifically the contents specified in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf, "small hit A8" is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 89". , "Small hit B8" is associated with the range of "90 to 99". Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of "small hit A8" selected at the time of winning the small hit is 90% (90/100), " The ratio of "small hit B8" selected is set to 10% (10/100).

When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the small hit attacker (second attacker) 5650 is opened for 0.1 seconds. Further, "0.1 second" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and the process of interrupting the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is executed, the process for interrupting the process for measuring the fluctuation time lapse of the second special symbol variation during execution is performed. Will be executed. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, and while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, the second special symbol (special figure 2). 2) The process of updating the value of the variation time counter 203dj, which indicates the variation time (residual variation time) of), is executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the restart condition is satisfied (the temporary stop flag of the special figure 2 is set to off), and the process of updating the value of the interrupted special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prohibit the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during execution from being reduced while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied). Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the winning second special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed in duplicate. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, since the process of measuring the change time elapsed of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change that was executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the result of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In the present embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied when the small hit is won, the process of interrupting the special symbol change during execution is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol change during execution may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the first special symbol change may be interrupted when the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed. That is, even if the interruption condition is satisfied, the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation is continuously executed, and the update process is executed until the preset variation time elapses. If it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied and it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change may not be executed until the restart condition is satisfied. As a result, it is not necessary to interrupt the update process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation in the middle, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Further, when "small hit A" is selected, the target for opening the small hit game is the small hit attacker (second attacker) 5650, and the small hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball during the small hit game is executed. ..

When "small hit B" is selected, the small hit game is executed with the same operation content as the above-mentioned "small hit A". Further, depending on the change status of the second special symbol being executed, either the process of interrupting the change of the special figure 2 being executed or the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in a part of the case where a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control to be executed for the other special symbol change being executed is the status of the other special symbol change ( It is configured to be switchable based on the fluctuation status and setting status). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern set for the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped (discarded). In the case of a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of less than 30 seconds, the control content can be switched so as to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not to discard the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed according to the fluctuation status of the special symbol fluctuation during execution, so that the timing of winning the small hit B8 is determined. The player can be watched at what timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the content of the fluctuation pattern, that is, the length of the fluctuation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol fluctuation during execution, for example, it corresponds to a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player. By simply defining the fluctuation pattern table so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is long, it is possible to make it easy to forcibly stop (discard) the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player. The conditions used when determining the control content are not limited to this, and for example, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution and whether or not the lottery result satisfies the specific condition are determined, and the determination result is determined. The result of the control content may be determined based on. Further, the control content to be executed for the executing first special symbol variation may be determined based on the combination of the executing first special symbol variation and the lottery result of the second special symbol won by the small hit. ..

Next, the contents of the small hit type corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) as the symbol type in the small hit type selection 8 table 202 gf will be described. "Small hit C8" is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 79", and "small hit D8" is associated with the range of "80 to 89". , "Small hit E8" is associated with the range of "90 to 99". Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of "small hit C8" selected at the time of winning the small hit is 80% (80/100), " The ratio of selecting "small hit D8" is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of selecting "small hit E8" is 10% (10/100).

When "small hit C8" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the big hit attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. Further, even when "small hit D8" is selected, the same small hit game as the above-mentioned "small hit C8" is executed, and further, it is being executed according to the changing state of the first special symbol being executed. Special Figure 1 Either the process of interrupting the fluctuation or the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. The content of the control process when suspending or forcibly stopping the first special symbol fluctuation based on the "small hit D8" is the target of the control process executed based on the "small hit B8" as the second special symbol. Since it is only switched from the first special symbol to the first special symbol, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the present embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment described above in that the special variation flag 203ga is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special fluctuation flag 203ga is for indicating whether the special symbol fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set, and when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set. Set to on. In the present embodiment, when the small hit variation won in a specific small hit type is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation is interrupted according to the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed. It is configured so that it can be switched between executing the process and executing the process of discarding (forced stop). That is, in one special symbol lottery, for the other special symbol variation, the processing condition for switching the changing mode during execution to a variation mode different from the variation mode set when executing the other special symbol variation. When is satisfied, the variation mode after switching is configured to be different depending on the variation mode during execution.

With this configuration, when the above-mentioned processing conditions are satisfied, what kind of variation mode is switched to is determined based on the other special symbol variation, which is surprising to the player. A certain game can be provided.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 215. In the eighth embodiment, with respect to the seventh embodiment described above, a point configured so that a small hit can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more when a fluctuation pattern is selected. Is added to the point that determines whether the fluctuation pattern for which is set is selected, and when the special symbol fluctuation that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed, it is executed for the other special symbol fluctuation that is being executed. The difference is that the process for determining the process content is added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, various control processes executed for the first special symbol will be used to illustrate and explain the characteristic processing contents of the eighth embodiment, but the same processing contents will be described. , It is also executed in the control process of the corresponding second special symbol, but since the description is duplicated, the detailed description using the illustration will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386), the result of this lottery is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) described above. When it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (see S457 in FIG. 121), the difference is that the special figure 1 deviation processing 8 (S481) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation process 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation processing 8 (S481). In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery (when the deviation is won), a process for determining whether or not the small hit is won is executed. The detailed contents differ from the above-mentioned special figure 2 deviation processing (see S1059 in FIG. 128) in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and other than that. Are the same.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (S481), first, whether or not the lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the processing of S457 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small hit. Determine (S485).

If it is determined in the processing of S485 that a small hit has been won (S485: Yes), the small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S486), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S487). ), Then, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S488), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S485, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S485: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S485), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 1 deviation change process (S481 in FIG. 210) executed as one process of the first special symbol change start process (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, the change in the special symbol (lottery). By setting the small hit flag 203i to ON when it is determined that a small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting, the setting status of the small hit flag 203i at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on.

The small hit flag 203i used in the present embodiment has a special figure 1 area indicating that the small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery and a special figure 2 area indicating that the small hit was won in the second special symbol lottery. If you win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, set the flag of the special figure 1 area to on, and if you win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, , The flag of the special figure 2 area is set to be on. As a result, even if a small hit is won in duplicate in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily memorized.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is performed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) described above. , After selecting the fluctuation pattern, there is a difference between the point that the discrimination process for setting the special fluctuation flag is added and the point that the process for selecting the fluctuation pattern other than the jackpot winning is added, and other than that. Are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the same processes of S551 to S555 as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) are executed, and then the process is selected this time. It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S582: Yes), the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) is performed. The same processes S556 to S559 are executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S582: No), the processing of S583 is skipped and the same S556 to S559 as the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 of FIG. 122). Process is executed and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S551 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S551: No), the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process is executed (S581), and then the process proceeds to the process of S551. The content of the deviation pattern selection process (S581) of the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process 8 (S581). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581), the same processing content as that of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above is applied to the second special symbol. The process of switching from to the first special symbol is executed.

When the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, if it is determined that the lottery result (special figure 1 lottery result) of the first special symbol this time is not a small hit (S591: No), The processing having the same contents as S1377 to S1379 of the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 of FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S597 to S599), and then the main processing. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S591 that it is a small hit (S5911: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S592), and the small hit type is acquired based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. Selection 8 The small hit type is selected with reference to the table 202gf (S593). Next, the same processing as the processing of S1374 to S1376 of the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1277 of FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S594 to S596). End the process.

Next, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 8 (S288) will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 8 (S288). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 8 (S288) determines that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON for the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) described above. In the case of (S851; No), that is, the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. When it is determined that the point changed to 8 (S892) and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), the process of determining whether the second special symbol change is executed is executed. (S891), various flags and various types based on the point configured to skip the processing of S853 to S855 when the second special symbol change is not executed, and the stop of the big hit change (start of the big hit game). The difference is that the process of adding the special variation flag 203ga (S893 of FIG. 213) is executed in addition to the process of clearing the counter (S870 of FIG. 175), and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 8 (S892) will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process 8 (S892). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 8 (S892), the same process as the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 7 (see S1584 in FIG. The difference is that the small hit process 8 (S1972) is executed instead of the small hit process (see S1671 in FIG. 181) by switching to the special symbol, and the other points are the same. The explanation is omitted.

Here, the small hit process 8 (S1972) executed in the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit process 8 (S1972). The small hit process 8 (S1972) differs from the small hit process of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1671 in FIG. 182) in the content of the control process executed according to the winning small hit type. It differs in that. Specifically, when a specific small hit type (small hit B, D, E) is won, processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is performed. It differs in that it is configured to run.

When the small hit process 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small hit type set for the first special symbol variation this time is read (S1682), and the read small hit type is "small hit A or small". It is determined whether it is "hit C" (S1981). When it is determined that it is "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether the current special figure 2 is changing (the second special symbol is changing) (S1684). FIG. 2 When it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress (S1684: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special symbol change is interrupted (temporary stop) is set to ON (S1685), and the special figure 2 is set. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the temporary stop flag is turned on is set (S1686), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1981, when it is determined that it is not "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S19811: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is "small hit E8". However, when it is determined that the value is "small hit E8" (S1982: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, the current state is in the probability change state (normal symbol is in the high probability state). ) (S1688). When it is determined that the current state is in the probable change state (S1688: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to on (S1689), and the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is not turned on. When it is determined (S1689: No), that is, when it is determined that it is not the final fluctuation of the probability change state, the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set to ON (S1690).

Next, it is determined whether the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983), and when it is determined that the special variation flag 203ga is not set to ON, that is, the variation pattern set to the second special symbol variation being executed is determined. If the fluctuation pattern does not have a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more, or if the second special symbol fluctuation is not executed (S1983: No), the process proceeds to S1684 described above. Further, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the processing of S1688, that is, it is determined that the current state is not in the probability change state (S1688: No), or in the processing of S1689, the time saving end wait flag 203 dm is set. When it is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that it is the final variation of the probabilistic state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1684 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1983 that the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1692. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S1982 that it is not "small hit E8", that is, when it is determined that it is "small hit B8" or "small hit D8" (S1982: No), the processing of S1688 to S1690 Is skipped and the process proceeds to S1983.

In the processing of S1692 to S1697, the same processing as the small hit processing of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1671 of FIG. 182) is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and then executing the processing. , The special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to off (S1184), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed (when special processing is executed for the special symbol change being executed), the content of the special symbol change being executed is executed. It is configured to determine the processing content according to. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the fluctuation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation during execution. If the discrimination result is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is discarded and the specific fluctuation is specified. When it is other than the pattern, it is configured so that the other special symbol change during execution can be interrupted. That is, when a specific condition for executing special processing is satisfied for a special symbol fluctuation during execution, the processing content of the special processing is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. Although it is configured, the content of the special processing determined when a specific condition is satisfied may be different depending on, for example, the set gaming state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if a specific condition is satisfied, only "interruption" is determined as a special process, and when the probability change state is set, the above-mentioned eighth implementation is performed. Similar to the form, it may be configured so that "interruption" or "discard" is set. By making the decision contents of the special process different according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to give diversity to the game playability in each game state.

Further, the content of the special processing to be determined may be different depending on the type of the special symbol for which the specific condition is satisfied. For example, the second special symbol is more than the case where the specific condition is satisfied for the first special symbol. It may be configured so that "discard" is more easily determined when the specific condition is satisfied. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific conditions are more difficult to be satisfied than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win the small hit), or the specific conditions are satisfied. In the case, the condition for determining "discard" (in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern during execution is 30 seconds or more) is set in the second special symbol when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol. It may be configured so that the condition is less likely to be satisfied than when the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the fluctuation pattern during execution is 32 seconds or more). As a result, the content of the special processing can be changed depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is satisfied, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when a specific condition for executing special processing is satisfied for a special symbol fluctuation during execution, the processing content of the special processing is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol change during execution is a specific lottery result, the special symbol change during execution is not "discarded". Alternatively, the condition in which "discard" is determined depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol change during execution is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern during execution). May be different (30 seconds or more). With this configuration, the ease of "discarding" can be made different according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, so that a game suitable for the design concept can be easily executed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot is won, the advantageous jackpot type in which the jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, the probability variation jackpot) is executed, and the disadvantage to the player. It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the disadvantageous jackpot type in which a large hit game (for example, normal jackpot) is executed, and further, the fluctuation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is selected. It is configured to be different.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the fluctuation time of less than 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. The pattern is easily selected, and the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set is easily selected as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type.

With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, it is easier to execute a jackpot game (for example, probabilistic jackpot) which is advantageous to the player than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small (for example). It is possible to make it difficult to execute a big hit game (for example, a normal big hit) that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, it is easy to be abandoned by a small hit winning). That is, the ratio of the probabilistic jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting that the advantageous jackpot game is executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won in any of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. There is. With this configuration, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery wins a big hit, the big hit can be discarded by the other small hit. Depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the ratio of the probabilistic jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot can be surely different.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the other special symbol is set as a condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of special processing (interruption or discard) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation). The conditions that are satisfied when a specific small hit is won in the fluctuation (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) are shown, but other than this, an opportunity to establish the specific condition may be provided, for example, the ball is specified. It may be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters the ball entrance of the pachinko machine, or a state in which the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power is temporarily supplied). May be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the condition is rejected. Further, a game method in which the game method executed by the player is illegal (for example, a magnetic sensor for detecting a magnetic force is provided, and a game method when the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic force, or an impact detection for detecting an impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided so that a specific condition is satisfied when the impact detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of impact).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol variation executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (when the probability variation state and the time saving state are set) is discarded (forced stop). , The number of time reductions (probability change number) is not added according to the discarded special symbol fluctuation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured to set the latent probability state when the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) while the probability change state is set. When the special symbol change executed during the probability change state is discarded (forced stop), the time reduction number (probability change number) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, a display mode for showing the number of time reductions (probability change number) until the probability change state ends on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, FIG. 161 (for example, FIG. The value) displayed in the display area HR2 in a) is also configured so that the display mode is not updated in synchronization with the number of time reductions. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation has been discarded without updating the number of time reductions. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of time reductions (probability variation number) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the special symbol variation. In the case of the machine 10, the display mode is restored based on the fact that the special symbol variation is discarded (for example, when the remaining time reduction number is displayed, the addition is performed, and when the elapsed time reduction number is displayed, the display mode is displayed. If there is, subtract it).

In addition, as a transition condition for shifting from the probabilistic state to the latent state (end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (time reduction end condition)), a plurality of time reduction end conditions (for example, the first special symbol). The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol change reaches 100 times, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol change is executed five times). In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition that is most likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving end conditions (for example, the second special symbol variation 5 times). If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only "5"), the first special symbol change is executed immediately after the probability change state is set. However, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so as not to be updated. Then, when the first special symbol change is executed 95 times after the probability variation state is set and the first special symbol change is further executed (when the 96th first special symbol change is executed), the first special symbol change is executed. , The display control for updating the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4" is executed. In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the time reduction number display displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the special symbol type in which the special symbol change is executed during the probability change (time reduction) state. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the probability change state ends in an easy-to-understand manner.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 223. The ninth embodiment has a point that a hold storage function is provided for the second special symbol as opposed to the seventh embodiment described above, and an effect (RUSH) executed during the latent state (RUSH game). There is a big difference between the change in the production mode of (medium production) and the difference in the big hit type, small hit type, and variation pattern of the normal symbol.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of reserved special symbols for indicating the number of reserved special symbols (see dm1a in FIG. 161). Further, in recent gaming machines, in order to show the number of reserved special figures to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, a look-ahead process (pre-determination process) is executed for the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold, and the look-ahead result (pre-determination result) is displayed in a variable display mode of the corresponding hold symbol (for example, the hold symbol). There is a device that executes a hold change effect to notify the player by changing the color and effect of (or changing the design of the hold symbol).

However, in the above-mentioned hold change effect, the number of reserved symbols subject to the hold change effect is determined according to the number of acquired special figure hold balls. Therefore, when the number of special figure hold balls is small, the special figure hold change effect is special. Figure It is more difficult to execute the hold change effect than when the number of hold balls is large. That is, as long as the effect using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed according to the number of acquired special symbol reserved balls, the number of acquired special symbol reserved balls is increased. Since the effect of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) that notifies the player of the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) is variable, for example, for a player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure hold balls. Has a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced because he / she gives a feeling of dissatisfaction with not being able to acquire a large number of special figure holding balls and a feeling of dissatisfaction that the effect of the look-ahead effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls acquired is set according to the result of the look-ahead processing (pre-discrimination processing) executed for the winning information of the special symbol held and stored. Regardless of this, it is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) that changes the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). As a result, even when the number of special figure reserved balls acquired is small, the same look-ahead effect as in the case where the acquired special figure reserved balls is the upper limit can be executed according to the look-ahead result. It will be possible. Therefore, even for a player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect with a high effect of the effect, so that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-mentioned icon effect is the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be reserved and stored (the reserved memory of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). The number) is configured to be the upper limit (4), and the reserved symbol for indicating the number of acquired special symbol reserved balls is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to discriminate). Is displayed). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special symbol reserved balls (the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). It can be made to think that it is a reserved symbol for showing. It is possible to prevent a player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls from losing their motivation to play.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which the latent state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be reserved and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect to the player who has the illusion that the specific symbol displayed by the icon effect to the player is a reserved symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the look-ahead processing (pre-determination processing) executed for the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold, the number of times the attacker released in the small hit game is released is determined. , It is configured to determine the number of display of a specific symbol based on the discrimination result. Then, the number of times the attacker is opened in one small hit game is configured to be different depending on the type of the winning small hit. Further, as a part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker opening operation as the small hit game is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify the player that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is the period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, if at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that the latent state will be set after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, every time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the content of the production in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219, characteristic production contents among the production contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. Specifically, the content of the icon effect for variably displaying the specific symbol executed in the latent state (during the RUSH game) will be described. This icon effect is an effect of variably displaying the number of specific symbols (icons) based on the pre-reading result for the reserved memory (special figure 2 hold) of the acquired second special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 216 (a), the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the latent state (RUSH game) is set immediately afterwards will be described. FIG. 216 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during the ending period in the jackpot game before entering the RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a latent jackpot (a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends) is won in a state where the latent state is not set, that is, , The first hit when entering the RUSH game and the case where the latent jackpot is won with the latent state set are configured so that the production mode displayed during the ending period is different. ..

During the ending period at the time of the first hit when entering the RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and the display area HR70 is formed in the central part. Then, in the display area HR70, an icon 871 imitating a carrot and an acquired number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216 (a)) are displayed. Then, the characters "RUSH continues as long as there is an icon" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the present embodiment, when the RUSH game is executed, the icon 871 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the game executed during the RUSH game based on the number of the icons 871 displayed and the display mode. It is configured to suggest the contents of. The icon 871 is configured so that the number of displays and the display mode can be variably set based on information (lottery information, look-ahead information) regarding the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game.

As described above, in the present embodiment configured to execute the icon effect during the RUSH game, the initial icon effect shown in FIG. 216 (a) is performed during the ending period of the jackpot game that triggers the entry into the RUSH game. The display screen is displayed, and four icons 871 are displayed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at that time and the look-ahead result. As a result, regardless of the state in which the RUSH game is executed, the production mode of the icon effect at the time of entering the RUSH game can be the same. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the present embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific start condition is satisfied at the start of the icon production, for example. , The number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon production when there is a jackpot advantageous to the player (latent jackpot for which the latent probability state is set again) in the look-ahead result for the reserved ball of the second special symbol. May be configured so that the number of icons is other than 4, and in this case, the number of icons 871 which is less than 4 may be displayed.

When the RUSH game is started, the icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a hold icon 873 in the display area HR71, and the main display is an effect using the hold icon 873 and the character 811 imitating a rabbit. It is executed in the area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), in the present embodiment, the upper limit display number of the hold icon 873 is configured to be the same as the hold upper limit number of the second special symbol whose lottery is mainly executed during the RUSH game. Therefore, a maximum of four hold icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

For the hold icons 873a to 873d, the first hold icon 873a, the second hold icon 873b, the third hold icon 873c, and the fourth hold icon 873d are displayed in order from the top of the display area HR, and the first hold icon 873a is produced in order. Used. Then, when the first hold icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 for use in the production, the remaining second hold icons 873b to fourth hold icons 873d are shifted and displayed to the hold icons in the previous order. NS. In addition, when a new hold icon is acquired, it is additionally displayed in the order after the hold icon that has already been displayed.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is pre-read, and the number of hold icons is determined based on the pre-reading result. ing. Then, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is different in the small hit game according to the winning small hit type, and even when the big hit is won, a part of the winning big hit type is the second. The jackpot game that opens the attacker 1650 a predetermined number of times is configured to be executed.

That is, for example, even if the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is 2, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is 4 as a result of pre-reading (preliminary determination) for the two special figure 2 reserved balls. In this case, the number of hold icons to be displayed can be set to four. With this configuration, the number of holding icons displayed can be determined regardless of the number of special figure 2 reserved balls actually acquired. Therefore, in a state where many special figure 2 reserved balls have not been acquired. Even if there is, it is possible to carry out an icon production that is rich in fun.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (a), among the icon effects during the RUSH game, the contents of the effects that consume the hold icon will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit game is executed during a RUSH game. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the small hit game is executed, the digestion effect in which the character 811 eats the hold icon 873a is executed, and the prize ball display mode showing the prize balls acquired in the small hit game is executed. 874 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217 (a), the prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in the display mode of "+15" indicating that one ball has won a prize in the second attacker 1650 and there are 15 prize balls. There is. In addition, the characters "Itadakimasu" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect of the character 811 eating the hold icon 873a is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 217 (a), since the display screen displayed during the digestion effect is explained by taking as an example the case where the second attacker 1650 is opened once and the small hit game is executed, the character 811 is in hand. The number of hold icons 873a to be taken is one, but for example, when the small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice is executed, the digestion effect in which the character 811 eats the two hold icons is executed. Will be done. Although detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, in some small hit games or some big hit games, a hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened a plurality of times is executed. In the big hit game, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is larger than that in the small hit game.

That is, as the effect shown in FIG. 217 (a), the effect that the character 811 eats a plurality of hold icons is executed, so that the degree of expectation for the jackpot winning can be increased. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the content of the effect that consumes the hold icon (reduces the number of hold icons) among the icon effects executed during the RUSH game.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in the small hit game and the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in the big hit game are configured to be the same. ing. Therefore, by grasping the opening operation content of the second attacker 1650 executed during the hit game, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the type of the hit game (small hit game, big hit game) this time. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the number of hold icons 873 corresponding to the number of times the character 811 eats in one digestion effect, that is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hit game being executed is displayed. , Not limited to this, for example, the hold icon used for the digestion effect remains at the end timing of the digestion effect, that is, the number of holds is larger than the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released in the small hit game. Digestion effects using icons may be performed. With this configuration, the number of pending icons displayed at the start of the digestion effect can be increased, so that the player can be expected to win the big hit.

Further, the number of hold icons used in the digestion effect may be changed during the execution period of the digestion effect. As a result, the number of hold icons can be increased at any time, so even if an icon effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed, the number of hold icons used for the effect during the digestion effect period can be increased. It is possible to play the game while expecting an increase during the digestion production period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), as the icon effect executed during the RUSH game, the effect content of the acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of hold icons have been acquired will be described. FIG. 217 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in the acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of hold icons have been acquired as the icon effect executed during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 by the character 811 is executed in the same manner as the effect (see FIG. 162 (b)) executed during the RUSH game of the seventh embodiment described above. Then, it is configured to execute an acquisition effect in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of hold icons are displayed from the treasure box.

As shown in FIG. 217 (b), the treasure box 812 displayed during the RUSH game opens, and in the display area HR70, an icon 871 imitating a carrot and an acquired number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217 (b)) are displayed. Is displayed. Then, the characters "get carrot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and an effect of notifying the player that the number of display of the hold icon has increased is executed.

As described above, in the icon production of the present embodiment, the number of hold icons displayed is controlled so that the hold icon does not become 0 while the RUSH game continues, and acquisition for increasing the number of hold icons at various timings. The production is configured to be feasible. Then, it is configured to suggest that the more the number of icons 871 acquired in one acquisition effect is, the more advantageous the game is executed by the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of display of the hold icon can be increased at a timing different from the timing of increasing the number of hold balls in Special Figure 2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218 (a), the contents of the continuous effect executed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 218 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the continuous effect executed during the icon effect. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. This continuous effect has a pattern executed for one fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation and a pattern executed over a plurality of second special symbol fluctuations, and is displayed as a hold. The production using all the icons is executed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed when four hold icons (upper limit number) are displayed, and when the continuous effect is executed, FIG. 218 (a). ), The four hold icons (873a to 873d) displayed in the display area HR71 are displayed in a row in the center of the main display area Dm, and the character 811 eats in order from the first hold icon 873a. Is executed. Then, behind the last hold icon 873d, a V icon 873y indicating a jackpot winning (a jackpot winning of a jackpot type advantageous to the player) is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "I have eaten all the carrots !! Maybe a treasure will come out from inside" are displayed to show the player the contents of the continuous production.

That is, when the continuous production is executed, it is suggested whether the hold icon is completely digested and the jackpot is won, or the hold icon cannot be digested and the RUSH game is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the V icon 873z may be displayed from the pending icons being digested in the state where the continuous production is being executed and the last pending icon is digested.

Here, with reference to FIG. 218 (b), the content of the effect when the V icon 873z is displayed during the continuous effect will be described. FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the V icon 873z is acquired without digesting all the hold icons during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), while the third hold icon 873c is being digested (while eating), the effect of discovering the V icon 873z from the third hold icon 873c is executed. .. In this case, since the fourth hold icon 873d has not been digested, the fourth hold icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71. If the jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game will be executed with the hold icon displayed. Therefore, at this point, the latent state (RUSH game) will be executed again after the jackpot game is completed. The player will be notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the content of the effect in which a special icon different from the normal hold icon is displayed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special icon is displayed during the icon production. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the number of reserved icons that can be displayed is calculated based on the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened, which is calculated in advance. There is.

Then, when the number of hold icons that can be displayed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 4 or more), that is, the display upper limit number is exceeded, the special icon is displayed. Then, when the second special symbol change during execution or the pre-reading result of the second special symbol includes a jackpot winning that is advantageous to the player, the number of pending icons that can be displayed is easily exceeded by a predetermined number. doing.

As shown in FIG. 219, when the number of pending icons that can be displayed is calculated to be a predetermined number or more, a special icon effect in which a special icon 873x imitating a gorgeous carrot appears from the treasure box 812 is executed in the acquisition effect. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "lucky, SP carrot get" are displayed to indicate to the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In the present embodiment, the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is defined as four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, so that the number of pending icons that can be displayed is four. When the number of icons exceeds the number, a special icon is displayed so that the player can perform an effect that raises the expectation for a big hit while maintaining the upper limit of the number of icons displayed at the same time in the display area HR71. However, the maximum number of hold icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is set when the number of hold icons that can be displayed exceeds 4 (when special conditions are met). It may be configured to be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the player who has recognized that the hold icon indicates the number of hold balls of the second special symbol is held for a number exceeding the upper limit of the number of hold balls of the second special symbol. By displaying the icon, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. Furthermore, when the number of hold icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of hold balls of the second special symbol is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot winning can be increased, so that the player is surprised to see a production with a high expectation of the jackpot. It can be performed using a sexual effect.

As described above, various production screens executed during the characteristic production (icon production) executed in the ninth embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of special figure 2 hold is 0 while the RUSH game is being executed, one or more hold icons are displayed so that the result of the special symbol lottery is not related to the hold. It may be configured to execute the pseudo-variation effect using the icon, or it may be configured to hide the hold icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold icon, a display mode imitating a normal carrot (see the hold icon 873a in FIG. 217 (a)) and a display mode imitating a luxurious carrot (special icon in FIG. 219). (Refer to 873x) and is configured to be configurable, but other display modes may be settable. For example, the first display mode corresponding to either a small hit or a big hit and a big hit The corresponding second display mode and the third display mode corresponding to a specific jackpot may be configured to be configurable. Further, in order to additionally display a large number of hold icons at one time, a reduction effect for digesting a large number of hold icons at one time may be executed.

<About the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 223. In the ninth embodiment, the partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the partial configuration of the RAM 223 are different from those of the seventh embodiment described above. doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202 hd included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202 hd. The jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd has a jackpot type (big hit) associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the above-described seventh embodiment. The open target of the jackpot operation specified for A to C) and the value of the time saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game is completed are different from each other and are associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2). The difference is that the types of jackpot types have been increased, and the others are the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and as the jackpot type. "Big hit A9" is specified in association with each other. Since this "big hit A9" is the same big hit type as the "big hit A7" of the seventh embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "35 to 79" in association with "big hit B9" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B9" is different from the "big hit B7" of the seventh embodiment described above in that the value of the time reduction counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and is the same except for that.

Specifically, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state, 100 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, and when the "big hit B9" is won in the probabilistic state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is 50. Is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit 9" is won in the latent state, 0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, if the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state or the probability change state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state. On the other hand, when the "big hit B9" is won in the latent state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Further, even if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit B9" in the probability change state than to win the "big hit B9" in the normal state. In order to set the probabilistic state, the number of probable changes is smaller when winning in the probabilistic state than when winning in the normal state.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily shift to a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player by shifting from the normal state, which is the initial gaming state, to a different gaming state. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game aiming at the most advantageous gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" and "big hit C9" as the jackpot type. This "big hit C9" is different from the "big hit C7" of the seventh embodiment described above in that the value of the time reduction counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and is the same except for that.

Specifically, when the "big hit C9" is won in the normal state, the probability variation state, and the latent state, that is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the time reduction counter 203h is used regardless of the set gaming state. The value is set to 0. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is always set after the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot type is the most advantageous to the player. In the state where the latent state is set, the values of the "big hit B9" and the "big hit C9" are the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ratio of shifting to the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is determined according to the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. , Normal state and probabilistic state are set and latent state is set differently, 20% in normal state and probable state, 65% in latent state. It is configured so that the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, as described above, the normal state in which the transition rate to the latent probability state is set to 20% and the probabilistic state are both configured to shift to the probabilistic state at a rate of 45%. It is configured so that the degree of expectation of transition to the latent state when transitioning to is different. With this configuration, the transition ratio that shifts to the most advantageous gaming state (latent state) for the player after the end of the jackpot game is set for a plurality of gaming states as the gaming states set at the time of winning the jackpot. Even if they are set to be the same, the degree of expectation of transition to the latent state can be different for each game state set at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery will be described. As shown in FIG. 220, in the ninth embodiment, four types of jackpots (big hits D9 to G9) associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2) are defined, depending on the selected jackpot type. The contents of the opening operation of the jackpot game are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type is associated with "big hit D9". Is stipulated. This "big hit D9" is a big hit type in which the same contents as the "big hit D7" of the seventh embodiment described above are defined. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "35 to 69" in association with "big hit E9" as the jackpot type. This "big hit E9" is a type of big hit (8 rounds probable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit. When the "big hit E9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent probable state, 0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, 0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h regardless of the set gaming state. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is always set after the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot type is the most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 35 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E9", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E9" is determined is 35% (35/100).

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 89" in association with "big hit F9" as the jackpot type. This "big hit F9" has 9 jackpot rounds, and in the 1st round (R), the 2nd attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the 2nd round (R) to the 9th round (R) Until then, the jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 30 seconds is executed, and after the jackpot ends, the jackpot of the type (9 round probability variation jackpot) is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol. When the "big hit F9" is won in the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

As described above, when the "big hit F9" is won, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed as the first round. That is, in the look-ahead of the second special symbol, in addition to the jackpot winning, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated once. As a result, in the icon production in which the number of pending icons to be displayed is determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened (the number of times the small hit game is opened), a pattern suggesting a small hit win and a pattern suggesting a big hit win are obtained. It can be difficult for the player to understand, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, in the "big hit F9", a 9-round jackpot game is defined so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened is the same as the above-mentioned "big hit E9". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650.

In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual big hit game is executed in the second round (R) and thereafter. For example, even if the "big hit F9" is won, the jackpot game of 8 rounds (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 is opened for 1.5 seconds in the 1st round (R). It may be configured to execute the opening operation and the opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 28.5 seconds. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified. Therefore, for example, a notification means (for example, LED) for notifying the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. When the means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting the lamp) is provided, the types of the number of rounds notified by the notifying means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "big hit G9" as the jackpot type. This "big hit G9" has 11 jackpot rounds, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds (R), the 2nd attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the 4th round (R) to 11th round (R). ) The jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed, and after the jackpot ends, the jackpot is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol (11 round probability variation jackpot). When the "big hit G9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent probable state, 0 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h.

As described above, when the "big hit G9" is won, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed as the first to third rounds. That is, in the look-ahead of the second special symbol, in addition to the jackpot winning, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated to be three times. As a result, in the icon production in which the number of pending icons to be displayed is determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened (the number of times the small hit game is opened), a pattern suggesting a small hit win and a pattern suggesting a big hit win are obtained. It can be difficult for the player to understand, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated as the result of one lottery for the second special symbol lottery, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated even when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small. Can be calculated in large numbers, and the production mode of the icon production can be diversified. Further, in the "big hit G9", 11 rounds of big hit games are defined so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is opened is the same as the above-mentioned "big hit E9". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650.

In this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed in the first round (R) to the third round (R), and the actual big hit game is executed after the fourth round (R). Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, even if the "big hit G9" is won, the big hit game of 8 rounds (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 in the 1st round (R). The opening operation for opening the first attacker 650 for 1.5 seconds may be executed three times, and then the opening operation for opening the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds may be executed. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified. Therefore, for example, a notification means (for example, LED) for notifying the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. When the means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting the lamp) is provided, the types of the number of rounds notified by the notifying means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf will be described with reference to FIG. 221 (a). FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf has an increased number of small hit type types with respect to the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff of the seventh embodiment described above. The small hit operation content (opening operation content of the small hit game) specified for the small hit type and the processing content for the first special symbol change executed when the small hit game is executed are changed. It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referred to when the small hit type is selected after the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery as in the above-mentioned small hit type selection 7 table 202ff. It is stipulated that four types of small hit types, "small hit A9" to "small hit D9", are selected according to the value of the small hit type counter C5.

When a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the small hit operation content and the processing content for the special symbol change during execution can be different depending on the selected small hit type. In this embodiment, no matter which small hit type is selected, the interruption process is executed for the special symbol change during execution. This interruption process is a process of temporarily suspending (for example, until the end of the small hit game) the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution. Since this interruption process has the same contents as the above-described seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, "small hit A9" is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 59". , "Small hit B9" is associated with the range of "60 to 79", and "Small hit C9" is associated with the range of "80 to 89", and the range of "90 to 99". Is associated with "small hit D9". Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of "small hit A9" selected at the time of winning the small hit is 60% (60/100), " The percentage of "small hit B9" selected is 20% (20/100), the percentage of "small hit C9" selected is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of "small hit D9" selected is 10%. It is configured to be (10/100).

When "small hit A9" is selected, a small hit game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker 650) is opened for 1.5 seconds, and when "small hit B9" is selected, a right variable winning is performed. When a small hit game is executed in which the device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds and "small hit C9" is selected, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds. When the small hit game to be executed twice is executed and "small hit C9" is selected, the small hit game to execute the 0.5 second opening of the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 three times is executed. It is stipulated to be.

That is, in the present embodiment, according to the small hit type selected when the small hit is won, the small hit game that opens the first attacker 650 that is mainly opened during the big hit game and the small hit game that mainly opens during the small hit game. A small hit game that opens the second attacker 2650, which is operated to be opened, is configured to be feasible. With this configuration, isn't the big hit game executed immediately after the small hit game is executed? Can make the player think. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed while the hold icon is displayed during the latent probability state, the latent probability state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Icon production is executed. Therefore, if the "small hit A" is won while the hold icon is displayed, the player can be delighted that an advantageous big hit game has been executed when the first attacker 650 is opened.

Further, when "small hit B9" to "small hit D9" are selected, a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened is executed, but the second attacker is executed for each selected small hit type. The number of times 1650 is opened is different. That is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened, which is calculated for one special symbol lottery, can be made different. This makes it possible to greatly deviate the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened from the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 and the number of small hits won when calculating the number of held icons displayed in the icon production. Become. Therefore, the number of display of the hold icon determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be easily displayed without being synchronized with the number of hold balls in the special figure 2.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game in which either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 is opened is executed according to the selected small hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening operation may be set in which the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 are opened in order in one small hit game. Thereby, the opening operation executed as one small hit game can be made to make the player think that a plurality of small hit games are continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the relationship between one special symbol lottery and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221 (b), the contents of the general map variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be described. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 9 table 202 hg. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the normal symbol variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg has a variation of the normal symbol selected during the latent state with respect to the normal map variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the pattern is the same as in the normal state, and otherwise it is the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in the present embodiment, the ball launched by the right-handed game is configured to enter the right electric accessory 164 during the probability change state as in the seventh embodiment. doing. On the other hand, the ball launched by the right-handed game during the latent state is configured to be more difficult to enter the right electric accessory 164 as compared with the seventh embodiment described above. That is, in the seventh embodiment described above, even in the latent state, the ball is inserted into the right electric accessory 164 to facilitate the increase in the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In the ninth embodiment, since it does not have such game playability, the same fluctuation pattern as in the normal state is selected.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (a). FIG. 222 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), in the ninth embodiment, the icon display number selection table 222ha, the continuous effect selection table 222hb, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above are provided. The difference is that the above is provided, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table referred to when selecting the display number of the hold icon displayed in the above-mentioned icon effect with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and is a non-display information storage area 223hb. The number of display of hold icons based on the information on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened calculated based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110 stored in, and the number of special figures 2 held in the acquired figure 2. Is stipulated.

Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. 223 (a). FIG. 223 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), the number of icon displays (number of pending icons displayed) that can be selected is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol among the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 (count of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 223c). The number of icon displays is defined based on the value) and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb.

Specifically, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1" is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "5 (special)" is specified as the number of icon displays. On the other hand, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is "1", the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb does not become "6" or more, so the corresponding value is not specified.

Further, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is "2" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 2" is specified as the number of icons to be displayed. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "1 to 4" is specified as the number of icons to be displayed, and the icon is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. When the value is "6 to", "5 (special)" is specified as the number of icon displays.

Special Figure 2 When the number of pending items is "3" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 3" is specified as the number of icon displays. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "2 to 4" is specified as the number of icon displays, and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is specified. In the case of "6 to", "4" is specified as the number of icon displays.

When the number of reserved special figures 2 is "4" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 4" is defined as the number of icon displays. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "3 to 4" is specified as the number of icons to be displayed, and the icon is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. When the value is "6 to", "4" is specified as the number of icon displays.

Here, when the number of icon displays is "5 (special)", the number of icon displays larger than "4", which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, is selected. In the form, since the upper limit display number of the hold icon is "4", a special icon (Fig.) For indicating that the selected icon display number exceeds the upper limit number "4" of the special figure 2 hold ball number. 219 special icon 873x) is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the larger the difference between the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb, that is, as a look-ahead result of one reserved ball in the special figure 2. The more the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated, the easier it is for the special icon to be displayed. With this configuration, even if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is small, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large (for example, 3 or 4), since the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to be read ahead is large, it is executed when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small. It is more likely that the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated multiple times as the look-ahead result of one special figure 2 hold, but when the number of special figure 2 hold balls is large (for example, 3). (4) is configured so that "4" can be easily set without setting "5 (special)" as the number of icons to be displayed. Then, when the number of icon displays is "4", the continuous effect described later is easily executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a special icon is frequently displayed in a state where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is large.

Further, even when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small (for example, 2), when the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is large as a pre-reading result, that is, the small hit C9 or the small hit D9 (FIG. 221 (a)). If you win the jackpot G9 (see FIG. 220), or if you win the jackpot G9 (see FIG. 220), the number of icon displays that is larger than the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is selected.

On the other hand, even when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is large, when the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is small as a pre-reading result, that is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, or when the small hit A9 (small hit A9) If the winner is (see FIG. 221 (a)), or if the jackpot D9 and the jackpot E9 (see FIG. 220) are won, the number of icon displays smaller than the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is selected. It is configured to.

With this configuration, the number of reserved icons used for icon production can be determined regardless of the actual number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, so it is very interesting regardless of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. However, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect.

In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the hold icon is displayed to the player. Special Figure 2 It is configured to make you think that it is a reserved symbol to show the number of reserved balls, and it is configured so that you can perform an interesting look-ahead effect regardless of the actual number of reserved balls, but it is limited to this. However, for example, the hold icon used for the icon effect and the hold symbol indicating the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the player can grasp the actual number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 and the number of displayed hold icons, for example, when a large number of hold icons are displayed while the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is small. You can make me think that I won the jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type (big hit F9 or jackpot G9) for which the number of times the second attacker is opened is calculated is won, the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, all jackpots that can be predicted based on the number of hold icons displayed are jackpots for which the latent state is set. Therefore, since the prediction based on the production mode (holding icon display) of the icon production is the prediction of the jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to make the player more interested than the prediction including the jackpot winning which is disadvantageous to the player. It can improve the fun of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot winning in which the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is not calculated, that is, a jackpot in which the second attacker 1650 is not released (big hit D9, jackpot E9) is executed during the jackpot game, the jackpot is executed. The rate at which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed is set to 50%. Therefore, even if the big hit is won when the effect mode of the icon effect is an effect mode in which the big hit winning cannot be predicted (for example, the number of displayed pending icons is small), the latent state is changed after the big hit game is completed. You can leave the possibility of being set. In this case, the effect of inciting whether or not the hold icon is completely digested is executed before the jackpot game is executed, and if even one hold icon is displayed at the age when the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot is hit. It is configured to notify that the latent state is set (RUSH game continues) after the game is completed.

In this way, by using the hold icon displayed in the icon effect for various purposes, it is possible to execute a wider variety of effects and enhance the effect.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 222. The continuous effect selection table 222hb is a data table that is referred to when selecting whether or not to execute the above-mentioned continuous effect with reference to FIG. 218, and the number of pending icons displayed in the icon effect is four. It is referred to when the second special symbol change is started in the state. The continuous effect selection table 222hb defines whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the winning information (special figure 2 winning information) regarding the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

Here, the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223 (b), in the continuous production selection table 222hb, among the special figure 2 prize information, the prize information of the execution area (the prize information used in the second special symbol lottery this time) and the pending information are displayed. Whether or not to execute is specified based on the winning information of (holding area), the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4. That is, it is stipulated that the continuous effect can be selected only when four hold icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, when the winning information included in the execution area is a big hit, that is, when the second special symbol change executed this time is a big hit change, when the big hit type is "big hit F9, big hit G9". , Execution of continuous effect A (execution A) is specified, and in the case of other jackpot types "big hit D9, jackpot E9", the range of the acquired effect counter 223f is continuous in the range of "0 to 89". The non-execution of the effect is associated with it, and the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B) is associated with the range of "90 to 99". If the execution area contains winning information related to the jackpot winning, the jackpot game will be executed after the second special symbol change this time, so the winning information stored in the holding area will not be taken into consideration. Whether or not to execute the production is specified.

Here, in the continuous production of the pattern in which the jackpot is finally won, as the production result of the continuous production, the first result of getting the V icon 873y by digesting all the hold icons and the V icon without digesting all the hold icons. Of the second result of obtaining 873z, which effect result is to be determined is executed. More specifically, when it is determined whether the jackpot to be executed in this continuous production is a probabilistic jackpot (big hit E9 to G9) and not a probabilistic jackpot (big hit D9) (execution B). (Case) sets the first result that digests all the hold icons, and if it is determined that it is a probabilistic jackpot, a lottery (result) for deciding whether to set the first result or the second result. The selection lottery) is executed, and the type of the effect result is set based on the result of the selection lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the latent state is not set after the end of the jackpot game even though the jackpot game is executed with the hold icon remaining. can.

Further, even if the probability variation jackpot is won (execution A), the first result can be set as the effect result of the continuous effect, so that the continuous effect of getting the V icon 873y is obtained, for example. Even if is executed, the player can be made to play the game while having expectations until the end. If a jackpot game corresponding to a probable change jackpot is executed with all the hold icons digested, the hold icon will be displayed by the time the jackpot game ends when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied during the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute the effect to be displayed. For example, when an operation effect for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 during the jackpot game is executed and the effect result of the operation effect is a predetermined effect result. It is preferable to configure so that the generation condition is satisfied.

With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically allow a player who is in a big hit game to play a game in order to quickly grasp the game state set after the big hit game is completed. Further, the method for satisfying the generation condition is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of balls are won by the variable ball-entry means (first attacker 650 or second attacker 1650) which is opened during the jackpot game. It is also possible to set a generation condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls are inserted into a ball entry means different from the variable ball entry means that is opened during the jackpot game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 223 (b). Special Figure 2 If the execution area of the winning information contains the winning information indicating the small hit winning, and the winning information is "small hit B9" to "small hit D9", "big hit E" in the hold, When there is winning information indicating the jackpot type of either "big hit F" or "big hit G", the execution (execution B) of the continuous production B is associated with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 69". It is defined that the non-execution of the continuous effect is associated with the range of "70 to 99". If there is no winning information indicating the jackpot type of "big hit E", "big hit F", or "big hit G" in the hold, the value of the effect counter 223f is continuous in the range of "0 to 69". The non-execution of the effect is associated with it, and the execution of the continuous effect C (execution C) is associated with the range of "70 to 99". In addition, if the execution area of the special figure 2 prize information includes the prize information indicating the small hit winning, and the prize information is "small hit A9", the prize information stored in the hold area does not matter. , Non-execution of continuous production is stipulated.

Special Figure 2 If the execution area of the winning information contains the winning information indicating the winning, the winning information indicating the jackpot type of "big hit E", "big hit F", or "big hit G" in the hold. If there is, the execution of continuous production is specified in association with it, and if there is no winning information indicating the jackpot type of "big hit E", "big hit F", or "big hit G" in the hold, it is associated and continuous. Non-execution of production is stipulated.

As described above, when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol executed this time and the look-ahead result of the second special symbol stored on hold (stored in the hold area). Since it refers to the winning information), it is possible to execute a continuous production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Therefore, after grasping that the jackpot will be won when the continuous production is executed, it is possible to watch the continuous production while paying close attention to whether the production result of the continuous production is the first result or the second result. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect is executed only when four hold icons are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the larger the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2, the easier it is to display the four reserved icons. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the four hold icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be enhanced. In addition, even if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached the upper limit, the upper limit number (4) of hold icons may not be displayed, so the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached the upper limit. Even in the state, the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the four hold icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be further enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed only when four hold icons are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is continuous when two or more hold icons are displayed. It may be configured so that the production can be executed. In this case, for example, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the look-ahead result, and for example, the jackpot (big hit E9) which is advantageous to the player is won. It is preferable to configure the continuous production to be executed with a small number of hold icons only when there is prize information indicating that the game is to be performed. As a result, the expectation of the continuous production, that is, the expectation of the jackpot winning that is advantageous to the player can be different depending on the number of display of the hold icons at the time when the continuous production is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to be interested in the timing when the continuous production is executed.

Further, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 and the pre-reading result. For example, the jackpot (big hit E9) which is advantageous to the player is won. When there is winning information to be shown, as a preparatory effect for executing the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be executed after the forced increase display is executed so that the number of hold icons displayed is the upper limit. ..

When the contents specified in the continuous effect selection table 222hb are explained with reference to FIG. 223 (b), the types of continuous effect include continuous effect A (execution A), continuous effect B (execution B), and so on. A continuous effect C (execution C) is provided, and in the execution A, a continuous effect (see FIG. 218 (b)) in which the V icon 873z is acquired mainly in the middle of the continuous effect is provided, and in the execution B, the V icon is mainly obtained at the end of the continuous effect. In the execution C, the hold icons 873a to 873d imitating carrots cannot be completely digested (cannot be eaten), and V Although it has been explained that the effect in which the icon cannot be acquired is executed, it is sufficient that the effect having the above-mentioned contents is mainly executed. For example, the effect of execution B is executed in execution A with a low probability, that is, , If the effect result is more disadvantageous than the actual game result, another continuous effect may be configured to be feasible.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (b). FIG. 222 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment is not displayed with respect to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the information storage area 223ha, the number of undisplayed icons counter 223hb, the number of displayed icons counter 223hc, and the continuous production flag 223hd are added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened, which is calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main control device 110, and will be described later. In the winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224), the number of times the extracted second attacker 1650 is opened is stored (S4486 in FIG. 224). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of icons to be displayed based on the stored information, and then the referred information is discarded. In addition, regarding the winning information that has already been acquired before the latent state is set, the second attacker 1650 is opened for all the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223hb at the end timing of the jackpot game. The number of times is extracted and the result is stored.

By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this way, the timing of receiving the winning information of the special symbol and the timing of determining the effect mode can be easily made different.

The number of undisplayed icons counter 223hb is a counter for indicating the number of pending icons that have not yet been displayed among the number of pending icons that can be displayed at present, and the value of the counter is subtracted when a new pending icon is displayed. Will be done. In the present embodiment, as the effect of increasing / decreasing the hold icon, the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, the true icon effect of increasing / decreasing the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are displayed. A pseudo effect (an effect that finally has the same value) that increases or decreases only the number of reserved icons in appearance without increasing or decreasing the value of the completed icon number counter 223 hc is configured to be feasible.

The displayed icon number counter 223hc is a counter for measuring the number of currently displayed pending icons, and is a counter that is added when a new pending icon is displayed and subtracted when the number of pending icons decreases. Is. When displaying a new hold icon, the total number of hold icons to be displayed is determined by referring to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the determined total number is used. The number of displayed icons is determined based on the difference from the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc.

The continuous effect in progress flag 223 hd is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to on while the continuous effect is being executed. While the continuous effect in-progress flag 223 hd is set to on, the icon effect is configured so that the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons is not executed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, among the control contents of the ninth embodiment, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 227. The control content of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment is that the winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) is performed instead of the winning command processing (see S4211 in FIG. 183) with respect to the seventh embodiment described above. The jackpot end process 9 (see S4954 in FIG. 225) is set in place of the jackpot end process, and the preparation state setting process 9 (see S4691 in FIG. 226) is set in RUSH instead of the preparation state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 185). The difference is that the RUSH middle setting process 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is executed instead of the process (see S8410 in FIG. 192), and the other steps are the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be described with reference to FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command process 9 (S4281). In the winning command process 9 (S4281), information related to the icon effect executed during the RUSH game is updated, and a process of determining the number of hold icons 873 (see FIG. 217) displayed in the icon effect is executed. Will be done.

When the winning command processing 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether the RUSH middle flag 223fg is set to ON. (S4482), if it is set to ON (S4482: Yes), the winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the received winning command is extracted (S4484). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a winning command to win.

When it is determined that there is hit information in the process of S4484 (S4484: Yes), the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is extracted based on the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) indicated by the hit information (S4485). A value corresponding to the number of times of extraction is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, the number of icons to be displayed is selected with reference to the icon display number selection table 222ha based on the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4487). After that, the difference between the selected icon display number and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), other processing is executed (S4412), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning command is received as the winning command, only the information used for the icon effect is updated, and the control for changing the display number of the hold icon is not executed. As a result, the timing at which the display number of the hold icon changes and the timing at which the winning command is received can be made different, which makes it difficult for the player to understand when and how the display number of the hold icon changes. be able to. In the present embodiment, when the winning command is received as the winning command, only the information used for the icon production is updated, and the control for changing the display number of the hold icon is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control for changing the number of hold icons displayed may be executed, or control for changing the number of hold icons displayed when a predetermined lottery is executed and a winner is won. It may be configured to run.

Further, in the process of S4484, when it is determined that there is no hit information (S4484: No), then it is determined whether or not the continuous production flag 223 hd is set to ON (S4489), and it is not set to ON. (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is larger than 0 (S4490). When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S4490: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S4491), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S4492), and the mode of the pseudo effect is adjusted. The values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated (S4493), display commands for indicating the set production mode are set (S4494), and the process proceeds to S4412. do.

When it is determined that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON in the processing of S4489 (S4489: Yes), that is, when the continuous production is currently in progress, or the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0. In the case (S4404: No), that is, when the number of hold icons displayed cannot be increased, the process proceeds to S4412 without setting the pseudo effect.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 9 (S4954). The jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is based on the winning information already acquired when the RUSH game can be executed after the jackpot ends, that is, when the latent probability state is set and the probability variation state is set. The processing content is significantly different from the above-mentioned jackpot end processing in that the processing for setting the information related to the icon effect is executed.

When the jackpot end process 9 (S4954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH middle flag 223fg is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5051: No), Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S5052). When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is (S5052: Yes), that is, when the probability variation state is set by the jackpot executed at a timing other than during the RUSH game, all the winning information storage areas 223b are stored. The winning information is read out (S5053), the winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the winning information is extracted (S5054), and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated based on the extracted winning information (S5053). S5055). Then, the calculated total number of times of the second attacker (total number of times of opening) is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5056).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a latent jackpot (S5057), and if it is a latent jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display for indicating the corresponding latent mode (preparation mode, RUSH mode). Set the command for (S5058), set the number of displayed icons to 4 (S5059), set the value of the displayed icon number counter to 4 (S5060), and from the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted (S5061), a display command indicating the end of the jackpot is set (S5062), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5057 that it is not a latent jackpot (probability variation jackpot) (S5057: No), a display command for indicating the probability variation mode is set (S5063), and the process proceeds to S5062. ..

When it is determined that the RUSH middle flag 223fg is set to ON in the processing of S5051, that is, when it is a jackpot won during the RUSH game (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot. However, if it is a normal jackpot (S5064: Yes), the RUSH game ends, so various flags and counters related to the RUSH game are reset (set to the initial state) (S5065), and this jackpot The corresponding RUSH display command is set (S5066), and the process proceeds to S5062. In this case, in the process of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH game is set. If it is determined that the process of S5065 is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH game is continued is set.

Next, the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). In the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691), the hold icon is displayed at the timing of transition from the probability change state to the latent state with respect to the preparation state setting process (see S4641 of FIG. 226) of the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing for is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processing of S8001 to S8004 as the preparation state setting process (see S4641 of FIG. 226) is executed, and then the corresponding latent mode (RUSH mode) is executed. Set the display command to indicate (S8051), set the number of displayed icons to 4 (S8052), set the value of the displayed icon number counter to 4 (S8053), and store it in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the displayed information (S8054), and this process is terminated.

That is, the same process as that executed at the end of the jackpot when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game is executed. As a result, it is possible to unify the initial display of the icon effect (a state in which four holding icons are displayed regardless of the number of holding balls in Special Figure 2) regardless of the trigger when the latent state is set. Therefore, the load of the control process can be reduced because the control process for changing the effect mode of the icon effect can be unified according to the transition to the latent state.

Next, the contents of the RUSH middle setting process 9 (S8450) will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH middle setting process 9 (S8450). In the RUSH middle setting process 9 (S8450), a process for setting an effect mode of the icon effect to be executed according to the second special symbol change executed during the RUSH game is executed.

When the RUSH middle setting process 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8561), and if it is 4, (S8561: Yes), continuous effect selection is performed. The continuous effect is selected with reference to the table 222hb (S8562), and it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (S4453). When it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (S4453: Yes), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the selected continuous effect is set (S4454), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are also updated according to the number of reserved icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous effect. If it is determined in the process of S4453 that the continuous effect is not executed (S8563: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8561 when it is determined that the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is not 4 (S8561: No), it is then determined whether the continuous effecting flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655). ), When it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8655: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is larger than 0 (S8656). When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S8656: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S8657), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S8658), and the mode of the pseudo effect is adjusted. The values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated (S8659), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S8660), and this process is terminated. ..

When it is determined that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON in the processing of S8655 (S8655: Yes), that is, when the continuous production is currently in progress, or the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0. In that case, that is, when the number of hold icons displayed cannot be increased, this process ends without setting the pseudo effect.

<About a modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the ninth embodiment described above will be described. In the icon effect executed in the ninth embodiment described above, the continuous effect can be executed based on the pre-reading result. Then, the production mode of the continuous production was determined when setting the continuous production. Specifically, as the effect result of the continuous effect, the type of the effect mode, such as the effect mode to be executed so as to leave the hold icon remaining or the effect mode to be executed so as to digest all the hold icons, is determined in advance. It was configured so that the production according to the type was executed. With this configuration, the production result of the continuous production does not differ from the actual game result, and the processing load during the continuous production can be reduced. However, the production pattern of the continuous production There was a problem that it was not possible to give diversity to.

On the other hand, in this modified example, at the start of the jackpot game that is the target of the continuous production, the production mode of the continuous production is changed based on the winning jackpot type and the number of remaining pending icons. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to set the production mode of the continuous production by dividing it into, for example, the first half period until the jackpot game is started and the second half period after the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the production pattern of the continuous production.

Further, in this modified example, since the process of increasing the number of hold icons displayed can be executed after the jackpot game is started, the effect mode in which all the hold icons are exhausted is set in the first half period of the continuous effect. Even so, if the winning jackpot type is a latent jackpot, the number of hold icons displayed can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the production mode in the first half period of the production pattern of the continuous production, and it is possible to facilitate the diversification of the production patterns.

Further, in this modified example, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. As a result, even though the second attacker 1650 is open in the big hit game, the player can be made to think that the small hit game is being executed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Here, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 228. The present modification differs from the above-described ninth embodiment in that the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) executed at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed, and is the same except for the above-described ninth embodiment. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 9 (S4802).

When the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4901: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). ), After that, it is determined whether the RUSH middle flag 223fg is set to on (S4951), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S4951: Yes), then the continuous production flag 223hd is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S4952). That is, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot that is the target of continuous production.

In the process of S4952, if it is determined that the continuous production flag 223 hd is set to on (S4952: Yes), the continuous production flag 223 hd is set to off (S4953), and the current jackpot is a latent jackpot (S4953). It is determined whether the hit is a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed (S4954), and if it is determined to be a latent jackpot (S4954: Yes), the number of open second attackers 1650 during the jackpot is set. Correspondingly, the information of the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated, that is, the hold icon is displayed corresponding to the opening of the second attacker 1650 executed in the jackpot game executed this time. Each value is updated to digest the number (S4955).

After that, a display command corresponding to the updated content is set (S4956), and after the update, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 0 (S4957), and if it is determined to be 0, that is, If the number of hold icons displayed becomes 0 when the continuous production is advanced in accordance with the opening of the second attacker 1650 even though RUSH continues due to the latent jackpot (S4957), the continuous production is executed. Later, an additional effect (aspect) for displaying one hold icon is set (S4958), and this process ends. As an additional effect mode set here, there is an effect in which carrots fall from the sky during the jackpot game. Further, although detailed description is omitted, when the jackpot game executed during RUSH is in progress and the hold icon is not displayed, that is, when the RUSH game may be terminated by this jackpot game. Is configured to execute a pseudo additional effect as to whether or not the above-mentioned additional effect is executed. Like the additional effect, this pseudo additional effect is composed of a first effect that encourages something to fall from the sky and a second effect that something other than carrots falls from the sky. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations until the end.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4954 that this jackpot is not a latent jackpot (S4954: No), that is, if the RUSH game ends with this jackpot, all the displayed hold icons are consumed. The effect mode is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received in the process of S4951 (S4951: No), the same processes of S4913 to S4916 as the above-mentioned jackpot related process (see S4802 of FIG. 68) are executed. This process ends.

In addition, the technical idea used in this modification, that is, the technical idea of executing the effect of changing the display number of the hold icons at the timing when the jackpot game is started, is used for purposes other than executing in the continuous effect. Is also good.

In this modified example, since the process of increasing the number of hold icons displayed after the jackpot game is started is configured to be executable, it is assumed that the effect mode in which all the hold icons are exhausted is set in the first half period of the continuous effect. However, if the winning jackpot type is a latent jackpot, the number of hold icons displayed can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition conditions when determining the production mode in the first half period of the production pattern of the continuous production, and it is possible to facilitate the diversification of the production patterns.

Further, in this modified example, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. As a result, even though the second attacker 1650 is open in the big hit game, the player can be made to think that the small hit game is being executed.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment described above, the special figure acquired according to the result of the pre-reading process (pre-discrimination process) executed for the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold. It is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) that changes the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) regardless of the number of reserved balls. As a result, even when the number of special figure reserved balls acquired is small, the same look-ahead effect as in the case where the acquired special figure reserved balls is the upper limit can be executed according to the look-ahead result. It will be possible. Therefore, even for a player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect with a high effect of the effect, so that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-mentioned icon effect is the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be reserved and stored (the reserved memory of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). The number) is configured to be the upper limit (4), and the reserved symbol for indicating the number of acquired special symbol reserved balls is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to discriminate). Is displayed). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special symbol reserved balls (the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). It can be made to think that it is a reserved symbol for showing. It is possible to prevent a player who cannot acquire a large number of special figure reserved balls from losing their motivation to play.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which the latent state is set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be reserved and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect to the player who has the illusion that the specific symbol displayed by the icon effect to the player is a reserved symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the look-ahead processing (pre-determination processing) executed for the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold, the number of times the attacker released in the small hit game is released is determined. , It is configured to determine the number of display of a specific symbol based on the discrimination result. Then, the number of times the attacker is opened in one small hit game is configured to be different depending on the type of the winning small hit. Further, as a part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker opening operation as the small hit game is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify the player that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is the period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, if at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that the latent state will be set after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, every time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of icons (number of pending icons) that can be displayed in the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received. ) Is determined, and the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons displayed at various timings is executed, but the process (display) of determining the number of icons that can be displayed (number of pending icons) The winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), which is executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received, is not executed every time the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed. When the process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed, it may be configured to be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the number of additional receptions of a predetermined period (for example, a period indicating an elapsed time of 30 seconds or a prize information command (winning command)) after the previous process of determining the number of displayable icons is executed is three. It may be configured to execute the displayable icon number determination process when the period up to) has elapsed. As a result, the timing at which the winning information command (winning command) is actually received and the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information contained in the command can be made different. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the number of hold icons has been determined for the figure hold memory). In this way, the received prize information command includes an effect mode in which the number of pending icons displayed is increased or decreased within the range of the number of icons that can be displayed by changing the timing of determining the number of icons that can be displayed. Since it is possible to easily dissociate the winning information, it is possible to easily provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Further, in addition to the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, the displayable icon number determination processing is executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, it is preferable to execute an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means with predetermined contents on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player who correctly operates the operation means for the operation effect to be executed to execute the icon effect based on the prize information included in the received prize information command. Can be enthusiastically played.

In addition to that, it is detected that a ball has entered the general winning opening 63 or the through gate 67 provided in the game board 13, and is displayed based on the detection result (with a predetermined probability when the ball is entered). It may be configured to execute the process of determining the number of possible icons. With this configuration, the number of pending icons that can be displayed is determined by the game that is not related to the special symbol lottery, so the timing when the player actually receives the winning information command (winning command) and , The timing to determine the number of displayable icons based on the information contained in the command can be different, so you can see which winning information (special figure hold memory) the number of hold icons was decided. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, as the effect of increasing / decreasing the hold icon, the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, the true icon effect of increasing / decreasing the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are displayed. Pseudo-effects that increase or decrease only the number of reserved icons that appear without increasing or decreasing the value of the completed icon number counter 223hc (effects that eventually have the same value) are configured to be feasible, and any production is produced. The mode is also configured to be set by the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the pseudo effect is executed and pseudo. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the range of the number of hold icons to be increased / decreased by the pseudo effect and the display command indicating that the pseudo effect is to be executed are set, output to the display control device 114, and output to the display control device 114. When a display command indicating that the pseudo effect is to be executed is received, the effect mode may be determined based on the information included in the received display command.

With this configuration, only the icon effect (true icon effect) set based on the winning information of the special symbol needs to be controlled by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to control the effect mode. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing of. In addition, by executing a pseudo effect of increasing / decreasing (variable) only the apparent number of reserved icons without increasing / decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, the icon effect is held. The variable pattern of the number of icons can be diversified. In addition, since the simulated effect is executed so that the increase and decrease of the final hold icon match, when setting the effect mode of the true icon effect, the effect state of the pseudo effect is taken into consideration. There is no need to do so, and the processing load of the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 263. In the tenth embodiment, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed from the seventh embodiment described above, and a part of the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is described. The changed points, the changed points of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223, the control processing executed by the main control device 110, and the control executed by the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that some of the processing has changed. Further, due to the above-mentioned differences, a part of the effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also different. The same components as those in the seventh embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the major differences between the tenth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above will be briefly described. In the tenth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are not executed in duplicate (in parallel), and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol is prioritized and executed. Then, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Further, it is configured so that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol differs depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variation state) than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state). In order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance to the ball is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a that is opened in the winning game (normal symbol winning game) executed at the time of winning the normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), the lottery right of the second special symbol can be obtained. That is, when the game is played in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. Taking this as an opportunity, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol, is executed. It is configured in. With this configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly different depending on the set game state, so it is expected that the game state with a high degree of advantage to the player will be set. However, it is possible to play games enthusiastically.

Here, for example, when a normal state that is the most disadvantageous game state for the player is set among a plurality of game states, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is a lottery for the player, is not executed at all. With such a configuration, the player's motivation to play in the normal state, that is, the motivation to play in order to set a more advantageous game state (time saving state, probability change state) is reduced, and the game is played. There was a problem that I got bored early. On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied during the period in which the normal state is set, a predetermined number (up to five) of lottery rights for the second special symbol can be acquired. doing. Specifically, when a winning prize is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, it is possible to execute a game per normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640 is released for 5 seconds. It is configured. With this configuration, even in the normal state, which is a disadvantageous game state for the player, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed. It is possible to make a player who is playing a game aiming to win a special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win a prize in a normal symbol lottery, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the special figure 2 variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reserved special symbols 2. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 variation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off variation effect indicating that the lottery result is out of order in the first half period of the variation effect. Is executed, and in the latter half of the period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) by the pseudo-off variation effect is restarted to execute the pseudo-hit variation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. The number of times that the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit fluctuation effect is configured to be changed according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 2. With this configuration, a variable effect that pseudo-stops the third symbol multiple times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be made to think that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lottery.

As a result, even if a big hit is won in the special figure 2 hold used for the second special symbol lottery to be executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 hold acquired during the game per normal figure, the player On the other hand, since it is possible to make the player think that he / she has won a big hit because he / she has acquired a plurality of special figure 2 holds during the game, he / she can more enthusiastically acquire the special figure 2 hold during the game. Can be done.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 in the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, as the pseudo-hit fluctuation effect described above, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the third symbol display device 81 A variation effect imitating the variation effect displayed on the display surface (the effect mode of the special figure 1 variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. It is configured in. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variation effect from being repeated in a situation where the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired, so that the player can receive a pseudo variation effect. It can be difficult to identify what is being done. In addition, after the pseudo fluctuation effect imitating the special figure 1 variation effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to perform a variation effect that is unexpected for a person.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 229, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is on the right side of the variable display unit 80 with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 157) in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the configuration of the right region formed and the configuration of the lower region formed on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 are different, and the other regions are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, even if a game (left-handed game) in which the ball is made to flow down to the left side region formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 is executed, a game in which the ball is made to flow down to the right side region. The game board 13 is configured so that there is no difference (hard to occur) in the game value obtained by the player even if the (right-handed game) is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 229, the game board 13 is formed symmetrically with respect to the perpendicular line at the center of the game board 13, and the ball enters the lower region of the variable display unit 80. A first ball opening 64 that can be a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol and a second special symbol that can be a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol when the ball enters the ball, which is provided at a position below the first ball opening 64. The electric accessory 640a, which is attached to the 2 entrances 640 and the 2nd entrance 640 and is opened in the normal symbol winning game executed when the player wins the normal symbol lottery, and the 2nd entrance thereof. A V-winning device 2650, which is provided at a position below the ball mouth 640 and is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, is arranged.

The ball launched by the left-handed game flows down the left side region and passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left side region at a rate of 1/2, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 does not pass through the through gate 67 either. The ball is also flowed down toward the first ball entry port 64 provided in the lower region by the nail planted in the game board 13. Here, the ball that has flowed down from between the nails enters the two general entry ports 63. In the present embodiment, about 1/50 of the ball flowing down the left side region is configured to enter any of the two general entry ports 63, and the ball enters the general entry port 63. When a ball is entered, 10 prize balls (privileges) are given.

The first ball entry port 64 is configured so that one ball can enter every 15 balls as in the first embodiment described above, and when a ball enters, four balls can enter. The ball is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. In the second entry port 640, when the electric accessory 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 229), almost no ball enters and the electric accessory 640 is open (the state shown in white in FIG. 229). In the state shown in black in FIG. 229), the ball is fired in the left-handed game, and the ball is configured to enter at a rate of 1 ball to about 2 balls flowing down the left side region. When a ball enters, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. In addition, the V winning device 2650 is configured so that almost no balls enter in the state where the jackpot game is not executed, and balls enter at a ratio of 2 balls to about 3 balls during the jackpot game. When a ball enters, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the V winning device 2650 will be described. This V winning device 2650 is a variable ball winning means that is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game is specified. By passing through the gate, it is possible to set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game is completed. Further, according to the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game in which the ball winning the V winning device 2650 easily flows down the specific gate and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to flow down are made feasible. Then, a jackpot game in which the ball winning the V winning device 2650 easily flows down the specific gate, that is, a jackpot game in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific gate if a normal game is performed during the jackpot game (game). ) Is a probabilistic jackpot (game), and the ball that has won the V winning device 2650 is difficult to flow down the specific gate. A jackpot (game) that is difficult to play is usually referred to as a jackpot (game) and explained.

As described above, even if the probability variation jackpot game is executed, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game, a high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol is reached after the jackpot game is completed. ) Is never set. That is, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends is not fixed. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the round game executed in the fifth round of the jackpot game, a round game (V round game) in which the ball is most likely to flow down to a specific gate is executed. It is configured in. Therefore, until the end of this V-round game, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game cannot be determined. By configuring so that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined by the game result during the jackpot game in this way, the player can receive various benefits (prize ball, high probability state of special symbol) in the jackpot game. It is possible to play a game to acquire a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the above-described configuration is used, the effect mode of the notification effect (for example, the effect mode of the jackpot ending period) for notifying the player of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (for example, the jackpot). It is not possible to set it (at the start of the game), and it is necessary to set the effect mode of the notification effect during the jackpot game in which the control process related to the exit of the ball and the control process related to the display are densely executed. There is a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the probabilistic jackpot game is executed, the probabilistic variation state is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the production mode of the notification effect after the jackpot game ends. It is set, and immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate. When the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate. It is configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the probabilistic jackpot, which is advantageous for the player, has a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, even if the notification to that effect is given for a long period of time, the player is only uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probabilistic jackpot game, the jackpot ending It is said that a strange notification effect will be executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different just by executing the process of switching the effect mode of the period to the effect mode executed during the ending period of the normal game. There was a problem. In addition, if the dedicated effect mode set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probabilistic jackpot game is facilitated in advance, the image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It is necessary to store the data in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type, and during the probabilistic jackpot game. When the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate, only the production mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the production mode set for the second half of the ending period of the normal hit game. It is configured. As a result, a notification effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player is executed without providing a dedicated effect mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probabilistic jackpot game. can do.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification effect to be executed when it is not possible to flow down to a specific gate, but it is not limited to this, for example, from the final round period of the jackpot game. By executing the notification effect, the notification effect may be configured to be executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period, or the final jackpot game may be completed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuously executing the round effect executed during the round period and then executing the notification effect, the notification effect may be executed for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

Since this V-winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V-winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. .. Further, the configuration of the right side region of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right side region go to the through gate 67, the general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the rate of entering the ball is the same as that of the left side region described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is executed, even if the player executes the right-handed game, the left-handed game It is configured so that the same benefits are given even if the above is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his / her mood.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is symmetrically configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the amount of benefits that the player can obtain is It suffices to configure so that there is no significant difference between the case where the left-handed game is played and the case where the right-handed game is played. The number of ball entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. It is more difficult to win the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is easier to win the prize ball than the left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to do so. In the case of such a configuration, the player can play the game by any game method in the normal state, that is, while the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is being executed. In a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 (a game in a time saving state or a probabilistic state), a right-handed game can be considered to be more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game. ..

<About the display contents in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIGS. 230 (a) and 230 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth control example is variablely displayed by the third symbol (synchronized with the special symbol) with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above. The scroll direction of the decorative symbol) has been changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (from right to left), and the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is one (see FIG. 11 (a)). ) To 5 (see FIG. 230 (a)), and the difference is that the notification mode of the information related to the game is different. In addition, some elements are the same as (similar to) the first control example, but are given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9". In the present embodiment, the number of identification information imitating a specific number (for example, the identification information imitating the number "4") is configured to be larger than the number of identification information imitating other numbers. doing. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in the reach state, the jackpot symbol passing on the effective line (imitation of the specific number) is compared with the case where the identification information imitating a specific number is in the reach state. Since the number of identification information) can be increased, it is possible to visually predict that the player is expected to win a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the characters corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol sequence Z1 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The columns Z2 and the lower symbol column Z3 are configured so that the symbols are formed in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is also formed between the main symbols. In FIG. 230 (b), a blank symbol (sub symbol) is displayed using a symbol imitating a triangle.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the oblique direction. If each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in this control example, a combination of the same main symbols), The jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 230 (a), in this control example, since each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the third symbol display device. Until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol string (in this control example, the middle symbol string V2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating by making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may try to do so. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 230 (b). As shown in FIG. 230 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the front view. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1), or the fourth symbol (special figure 2) for showing the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The special figure 2 fourth symbol) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

Further, the small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. , The 4th symbol (4th symbol of the ordinary symbol) for showing the lottery status of the normal symbol (normal symbol), or the 4th symbol (special diagram 2) for showing the lottery status of the 2nd special symbol (special diagram 2). The fourth symbol) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle mark and a cross mark, and the fourth symbol is shown in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed in a variable manner (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 230 (b)) to indicate a situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (FIG. (Refer to the small display area Dm2 of 230 (b)), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol and a plurality of colors. By using the display mode indicating that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode in which the numbers and colors are changed, and the display mode indicating the specific symbol or color is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It may be configured to indicate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 230 (b), in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the area Dm on the upper left side and the upper right side is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined by the effect of the variation effect executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It may be different depending on the mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from limiting the area in which the variation effect is executed and reducing the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure to execute.

Since the display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction. However, in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is limited to the small area Ds1, and the executing area Ds1a and the waiting area Ds1b are formed in the small area Ds1. There is. Since the display content of the executing area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the standby area Ds1b will be described. In the present embodiment, eight pedestals are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is normally displayed.

When the total value of the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) and the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball) is 8, that is, the rightmost pedestal. When the reserved symbol is displayed in, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), a dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols stored in the hold is executed. While this period effect is being executed, the waiting area Ds1b is not a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but a period during which the period effect is executed. It may be configured so that the hold symbol for effect which shows only (the hold symbol which is the target of the period effect) is displayed.

With this configuration, even if a new holding ball is acquired during the period production, the new holding symbol is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the player can be informed of how long the period production will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical to the left and right, and the same game result is given depending on whether the right-handed game or the left-handed game is performed. It is not displayed because it is configured to be played, but for example, depending on the set game state, the right-handed game may be more advantageous than the left-handed game, and the right-handed game may be more advantageous. If the pachinko machine 10 makes it possible to set the case where the left-handed game is more advantageous than the hitting game, the direction in which the player is to shoot the ball on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured so that the guidance display mode for guiding (game direction) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

To explain in more detail, as a guidance display area, a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game, and letting the player perform a left-handed game. It is preferable to configure the display mode of "left-handed" to guide the player, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, for example, a probabilistic state. , It is displayed during the time saving state and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is preferable to configure so that the display mode of is displayed. In addition, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in each of the above-described embodiments may be configured to be appropriately displayable.

<About the production contents of the 10th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 231 to 236, a characteristic effect content among various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. do. First, with reference to FIG. 231 (a), the display screen when the reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed when the reach state is reached in the normal state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the third symbol that is variablely displayed is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and is a big hit at any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 230 (a)). When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating the winning, the reach state is reached, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the upper symbol row Z1 as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot winning. The effective line in which the lower symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is set as the reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be variablely displayed. Then, after the reach state is reached, one low speed (main symbol (third symbol imitating a number)) that the player can visually recognize each identification information (third symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2 shifts. The time required for this is changed at a speed of about 0.5 seconds).

As described above, in the present embodiment, since one symbol row has 10 types of main symbols, when the middle symbol row Z2 is variablely displayed at a low speed, it takes time to make one round. It is configured to be 5 seconds (0.5 × 10). Then, the middle symbol row Z2, which is variablely displayed at a low speed, is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to be variable to a different production mode (reach mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), which third symbol (in FIG. 231 (a), the identification information imitating "9" (third symbol imitating a crab)) is in the reach state. Even in the case of, the identification information (third symbol imitating an octopus) that imitates the number "1" in the middle symbol string Z2 (see FIG. 230) that is variablely displayed during reach can be visually recognized first. It is configured so that the low-speed fluctuation display is executed so as to be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the variation effect is changed according to the variation mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state, for example, after the reach state is reached. It is configured so that the symbol row Z2 can be changed to a different production mode (reach mode) at the timing of one round or the timing of two rounds. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol row Z2 that is first visible after the reach state is reached, a different effect mode (reach mode) is given to the player at what timing. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it is variable to.

In the present embodiment, the timing of changing to a different production mode (reach mode) is set to the timing of one lap or the timing of two laps of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state is reached, but the timing is not limited to this. For example, from the timing when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information whose reach is stopped) passes through the reach effective line, which is a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached, and the identification information which is a combination indicating a jackpot. It may be configured so that the misaligned identification information can be changed to a different effect mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this way, the game is configured so that the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information whose reach is stopped can be changed to a different production mode (reach mode) based on passing through the reach effective line. It is possible to give a person a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a combination that is a big hit and the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to a different effect mode (reach mode). Specifically, when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information whose reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached, passes through the reach effective line, the effect mode (reach mode) is changed. When it is configured to be variable, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed for the player in a combination that is a big hit and the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is variable to a different production mode (reach mode) are overlapped. Therefore, when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information whose reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating a jackpot, approaches the reach effective line, the player is given a great expectation and pays close attention to the fluctuation effect. Can be made to.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the specific identification state (third symbol imitating the number 1) becomes visible first regardless of which third symbol reaches the reach state. Since the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a low-speed fluctuation manner, for example, the combination of the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed is shifted by one type from the combination of the third symbol which is a big hit. In the case of (reach one frame off) (when the final stop display mode is determined in advance), the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed from the reach state until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed (the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed). There is a new problem that the period up to) differs depending on the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state.

Specifically, when the reach state is reached with the "third symbol imitating the number 1", the middle symbol string Z2 displays the "third symbol imitating the number 1" as a specific symbol in low-speed fluctuation. Therefore, in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach is out of one frame as the final stop display mode, 5.5 seconds (1st lap) and 10.5 seconds (2nd lap) after the reach state is reached. In short, when the reach state is reached with the "third symbol imitating the number 6", the middle symbol string Z2 displays the "third symbol imitating the number 1" as a specific symbol in low-speed fluctuation. As the final stop display mode, it takes 8 seconds (1st lap) and 13 seconds (2nd lap) after the reach state is reached in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach is out of one frame.

Therefore, in order to establish the reach state with the third symbol of a different type in the fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation time is set, the timing of the reach state is set by back calculation from the stop display timing of the third symbol. It was necessary to execute the process. That is, there is a problem that the non-uniform reach effect that changes according to the type of the third symbol in which the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach state is in the reach state is executed, and the effect is reduced. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, with the execution of the lottery of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is determined by the main control device 110 by the lottery, and the determined variation. The time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the variation display effect of the effect period corresponding to the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, synchronizes with the variation display of the first symbol, and synchronizes with the variation display of the third symbol. Is configured to execute. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic fluctuation time and an addition time command indicating the fluctuation time to be added, and the fluctuation included in the addition time command. It is configured to change the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state based on the length of time. More specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the addition time. NS. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 37 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the addition time. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify that the variation type is 7 seconds longer than the basic time according to the notification content of the addition time command. As a result, the type of the third symbol to be in the reach state can be set only by checking the content of the addition time command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 231 (b) to 234, the contents of the effect related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 231 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the winning normal symbol variation in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed during the execution of the winning normal symbol variation in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 231 (b), when the normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. .. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 that is opened in the game per normal figure is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Is executed to notify the player that the is formed (indicated by six lines in the figure). In the situation shown in FIG. 231 (b), since the winning normal symbol change is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is a display imitating the closed electric accessory 640. It is an aspect. With this configuration, the player will soon be able to play the game per game. It is possible to predict that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 231 (b), the execution of the winning normal symbol change is taken as an example, but a part of the normal symbol change in which the lottery result is out of order (for example, the out-of-order change) is being executed. A small display area Dm3 is formed with a probability of 1/100 of the above, and an effect of displaying an icon imitating an electric accessory 640 (gase effect) is executed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears by the time the normal symbol fluctuation (disengagement fluctuation) being executed is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prolong the period in which the player is expected to perform the game per game.

Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols can be held, and when a new lottery right (holding a normal figure) is acquired, the acquired lottery right is used. The result of the ordinary symbol lottery that was used can be determined in advance. Then, a command (information) indicating the pre-determination result can be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the stage before the normal symbol change that wins the suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the game per normal symbol is executed, that is, the stage where the pre-determination result is won and the normal symbol hold is acquired. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the game per game will be executed soon. In this case, rather than the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 231 (b), it is preferable to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode that is difficult for the player to understand. The result, or the pre-determination result for the acquired special figure hold, is configured to execute the suggestion effect in the same effect mode as the effect suggesting, and the executed suggestion effect creates a situation advantageous to the player. It may be configured to notify the player only of the upcoming visit.

In this way, it is possible to understand the production mode of the suggestion effect to show the player that the game per normal figure is executed so that the timing at which the game per normal figure is actually executed and the execution timing of the suggestion effect deviate from each other. By making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggestion effect is a game per normal figure, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the suggestion effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232 (a), the content of the effect when the game per normal figure (game per long opening) is executed in the normal state will be described. FIG. 232 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content displayed when the game per normal drawing (game per long opening) is executed in the normal time (during the normal state). In the present embodiment, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the normal symbol is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 229, when the right-handed game is executed, about 1/2 of the launched balls pass through the through gate 67 in any of the cases where the left-handed game is executed. ing. In addition, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols (holding regular symbols) can be stored.

That is, while the game is being continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the winning symbol is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Further, when the player wins the game in the normal state, the game per game (per long opening) in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 229, since the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first entry port 64, the ball launched only by continuing the game aiming at the first entry port 64 is the second. It is configured so that the ball can enter the ball entry port 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second entry port 640 in the game per normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol that occurs with a low probability. There is.

As shown in FIG. 232 (a), when the game per normal figure is executed in the normal state, the combination indicating that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win in the small display area Dm2 (two circles in the figure). The identification information (design) is stopped and displayed, the comment "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and the electric chew (electric combination) in the open state is displayed in the small display area Dm3. An icon imitating the object 640) is displayed. Since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery can be executed in parallel (overlapping), the variation display and the small display of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol variation are executed. The variation display of the fourth symbol executed in the area Dm1 is continuously executed even during the game per normal diagram.

Further, in the standby area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, a special feature indicating the number of hold memories (special figure 2 hold) of the second special symbol acquired based on the ball entering the second entry port 640. FIG. 2 The reserved symbol (indicated by a black circle in the figure) is larger than the special figure 1 reserved symbol (indicated by a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special symbol acquired. It is preferentially displayed (on the left side of the waiting area Ds1b). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 232 (a), it is a state after four or more balls have been put into the second ball opening 640 during the game per normal figure, and the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit. It shows the state after acquiring a certain four pieces.

In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is prioritized over the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 hold acquired later is the special feature acquired earlier. Fig. 1 The special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the hold. With this configuration, when a game per normal figure is executed during the normal state and a plurality of special figure 2 holds are acquired, it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery preferentially and continuously. Therefore, it is possible to execute a dedicated effect by setting one period in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as an advantageous period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. can.

Next, the contents of the effect in the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 (b) to 234. FIG. 232 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 232 (b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in the normal state, the comment of "entering the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set in the period until all the special figure 2 hold acquired during the normal state is exhausted, and basically after the first second special symbol lottery (variation) is started. It is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 until the final second special symbol lottery (variation) is completed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the current advantageous period is in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, when a big hit is won in the chance zone, the characters "probability change GET high probability medium" are displayed as a guidance display mode to show that the probability change state can be acquired with a high probability. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this chance zone, a pseudo-variation effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of special symbol changes have been executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change) is performed. It is configured to run. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 232 (a)) indicating the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is hidden, and the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm is hidden. The number of special figure 1 reserved (“2” indicating that the number of special figure 1 reserved is 2 in the figure) is the number of special figure 2 reserved in the small display area Ds12 (in the figure, the number of special figure 2 reserved is "3") indicating that there are three is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 232 (b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is larger than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 232 (a)) of the sub-display area Ds. Since it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation effect is executed during the chance zone, it is possible to make it think that the special symbol lottery (variation) is actually executed a plurality of times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, a part of the main display area Dm (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) is used to display the number of reserved special figures. In the zone, the number of reserved special figures may not be notified to the player, or in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). The figure may be configured to notify the number of pending numbers. Further, it suffices to make it difficult for the player to identify the number of special figure reservations. You may switch to the display mode in which the color is variable. With this configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current number of reserved special figures from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 232 (b), a character 1801 imitating a rabbit indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. As described above, since the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlapping), the period during which the game per normal symbol is executed is the period of the first special symbol. There are cases where it overlaps with the fluctuation period (see FIG. 232 (a)) and cases where it does not overlap. If the game per normal symbol is executed more than during the change period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the execution of the first special symbol change is completed, and the first special symbol is drawn. If it does not overlap with the fluctuation period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the game per game (during the game per game). That is, the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery differs depending on the change status of the first special symbol when the game per normal symbol is executed, and the currently executed special symbol change is the first special symbol. There arises a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the variation is a variation or a second special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so that the currently executed special symbol change is the first. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 (a) to 234, the contents of the pseudo-variation effect (special variation effect) among the variation effects executed in the chance zone will be described. FIG. 233 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect, and FIG. 233 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 hold. FIG. 234 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state of being performed, and FIG. 234 does not acquire the special figure 2 hold. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state.

Here, the contents of the special variation effect (pseudo variation effect) will be described. This special variation effect is a variation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) during the fluctuation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and the player is given a plurality of special effects. It is a pseudo-variation effect that makes you think that the symbol variation has been executed. First, the reach effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. (Displayed with ") to temporarily stop the third symbol (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half of the special variation effect, the character "sorry" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player has a chance. It is configured so that the second special symbol lottery of 1 executed in the zone seems to have been missed. That is, in the first half period of the special variation effect, the special first half effect is executed in which the reach effect that is expected to win the big hit is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the effect result indicating that the effect is out of order.

After that, in the latter half period of the special variation effect, the variation effect (special second half effect) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured so that the effect mode is different depending on the number of acquired special figure 2 hold. For example, in the state where the special figure 2 hold is secured, FIG. 233 (b) shows. As shown, the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation in the chance zone, and when the special figure 2 hold is not secured, the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. 234. The special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation that is executed after the process. That is, in the present embodiment, as the special variation effect, the type of the special symbol variation to be executed after the execution of the second special symbol variation is completed is determined based on the number of reserved special symbols, and the effect corresponding to the determination result is determined. The mode of the special second half effect is set in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly think that a plurality of special symbol changes have been executed during one second special symbol change.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)), the number of reserved special figures 2 that has been acquired. The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the latter half of the period is configured to be different. Although detailed description is omitted, when neither the special figure 2 hold nor the special figure 1 hold is secured when the special variation effect is executed, the third symbol shown in FIG. 233 (a) is secured. Instead of executing the temporary stop display of, one fluctuation effect (variation effect that does not temporarily display the third symbol even once) is executed using the entire fluctuation period of the second special symbol change. It is configured. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation effect is executed only when the number of special symbol reservations is secured. Therefore, it is said that the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation. It can make you think strongly.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, an effect mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired. It is configured to be done. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five times or more, the player can expect that the second special symbol change during execution is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the third symbol is temporarily stopped and the case where the stop is displayed, the number of temporary stops can be accurately determined. hard. Therefore, it seems that the temporary stop display count and the stop display count are mixed and the temporary stop display is displayed 5 times or more, or a part of the temporary stop display is assumed to be the stop display, and the temporary stop display is actually displayed 5 times or more. Nevertheless, it is possible to make the player think that the temporary stop display number has not reached 5 times, and it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the effect result.

In addition, other configurations may be used as the effect mode of the special variation effect, for example, in order to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times of the third symbol temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol variation. The display mode indicating the number of temporary stop display times may be configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol whose temporary stop is displayed during one second special symbol change may be displayed. At least a part of the effect mode of the special variation effect (for example, the background color, the effect of the third symbol, etc.) may be configured to be changed stepwise according to the number of times. Further, it may be configured to display a display mode (for example, the first time and the second time) indicating the number of times the temporary stop is temporarily displayed at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 234, when the special variation effect is executed without securing the special figure 2 hold, the characters "chance zone end" are displayed as a sub-display as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended. An effect mode in which the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the area Ds and executed in the main display area Dm becomes a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol changes in the horizontal direction). Is executed as a special second half effect, so after making the player think that the chance zone has ended, the effect result of the special variation effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. .. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the content of the effect in the state in which the probability variation state is set will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content when the first special symbol variation is executed in a state where the probability variation state is set, and FIG. 235 (b) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content when the second special symbol change is executed in the state where the probability change state is set.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation state is set with a high probability (the probability variation jackpot game in which the ball can be easily flowed down to the specific gate during the jackpot game is always executed. ). The probabilistic state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

That is, once the probability change state is set, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery by the time the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) (the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/50). ), It is configured so that the probability change state can be looped with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game so that the player who is executing the game in the probable change state wins the big hit in the second special symbol lottery as soon as possible.

On the other hand, even if the probability change state is set, for example, immediately after winning the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state and setting the probability change state after the jackpot game ends, that is, , In the state where the probability change state is set, the first special symbol lottery may be executed in the state where the special figure 2 hold is not acquired and the special figure 1 hold is acquired. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation big hit game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas in the case where the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. The probability variation jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. That is, even if the probabilistic state is set, it may not be possible to loop the probabilistic state when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability change state, the player can quickly determine that the winning jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed. In this embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state, the third symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is generated because the player's motivation to play is reduced. A double reach effect, which is a variable effect in which (identification information with an odd number) and a third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot are simultaneously reached, is executed. It is configured to be easy. More specifically, when the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is always executed (FIG. 235 (a)). reference).

As a result, when a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. It is possible to prevent the effect from being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from predicting in advance that a normal jackpot will be won during the fluctuation period of the special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed as in the above-mentioned chance zone, and the player can see the player. It is configured so that it is difficult to grasp the number of special figures on hold. Then, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, the characters "in super chance mode" are displayed as a display mode for notifying the player that the current state is in the probable change state.

Here, in the super chance mode, the double reach (the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) and the third symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot (identification information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) shown in FIG. When the identification information with the number 2) and the double reach effect, which is a variation effect that puts the reach state at the same time, are executed, it means that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change. Since there is a risk that the player can easily grasp the effect, in the present embodiment, the double reach effect shown in FIG. 235 (a) can be executed even in the variation effect executed in response to the second special symbol variation. It is configured in. That is, in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variation jackpot game is always executed when the jackpot is won, the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to the normal hit can be executed. ing.

With this configuration, even if the double reach effect shown in FIG. 235 (a) is executed, it can be determined whether the special symbol variation during execution is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation. It can be made difficult for the player to easily discriminate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol that becomes the reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round is selected. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), the effect of changing to the third symbol (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (to the probability variation double reach). It is configured so that promotion production) is executed.

With this configuration, when the special symbol lottery being executed is a big hit, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the probabilistic big hit game will be executed without fail. In addition, even if the double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player is expected to play the game while expecting that the player will be promoted to the probabilistic double reach on the way. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach effect being executed to the probabilistic double reach effect, when the variable mode of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (one lap has passed). Although the variable condition that holds is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol corresponding to the reach state as the third symbol that is variablely displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 (the third symbol that is a combination that becomes a big hit). A variable condition that is established when the symbol) passes the reach valid line may be set, or is established when the operation result for the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is a specific operation result. It may be configured to set a variable condition.

Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol that is in the reach state is set. It may be configured to increase the number of symbols. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 235 (a), the blank symbol (indicated by a triangular mark in the figure) is deleted, and "3.2.1" is displayed in order from the left as the upper symbol row Z1. It may be configured to execute a triple reach effect in which "1.2.3" is displayed in order from the left as the lower symbol string Z3. Even with this configuration, the triple reach effect can increase the number of reach of the third symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot than the double reach effect, so the probability variation jackpot in this special symbol lottery It is possible to visually notify the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical idea may be applied to the variation effect executed in the normal state. For example, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. When the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single reach production, the type of the third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of the third symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, or the third symbol in the reach state may be switched. It may be configured to increase the number of. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the player is provided with a more advantageous effect result until the variation effect is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot ending period in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 236 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, and FIG. 236 (b) is the ending of the probabilistic jackpot game. FIG. 236 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the period, and FIG. 236 (c) shows a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game. FIG. 236 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the probabilistic jackpot game. ..

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game (probability change jackpot game) in which the probability variation state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player is easily set, the jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the probability variation state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player is difficult to be set. ), The jackpot ending period is set longer. Specifically, it is stipulated that the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds for the probabilistic jackpot, and 15 seconds is set as the jackpot ending period for the normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the probability change state is set during the ending period in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, the probability variation state is not set unless the ball that has won the V winning device 2650 flows down to the specific gate. There is. Therefore, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability change jackpot game, the probability variation state is not set after the probability variation jackpot game ends, and the time saving state (special symbol) is the same as in the normal jackpot game. Low probability state, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

In this case, if the notification effect indicating that the probability change state is set is executed during the ending period of the probability change jackpot game, the effect content of the notification effect and the actually set game state will be different, and the player will be informed. There was a problem of giving a feeling of dissatisfaction. Further, when the production mode of the notification effect executed in the ending period (17 seconds) of the probabilistic jackpot game is switched to the production mode of the notification effect executed in the ending period (15 seconds) of the normal jackpot game, There is a problem that the length of the actual ending period and the length of the effect period of the notification effect are different, and the player will execute the notification effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a unified period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. There is. Then, the production mode of the notification effect executed in the latter half period is configured to be determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236, when a normal jackpot game is executed, a time saving state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. When the effect mode (see FIG. 236 (a)) in which the characters "chance mode 100 times" suggesting that the characters are displayed is executed, and then the jackpot is won during the time saving state for the latter half period (7 seconds). (If a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery), the characters "Hit and Super Chance GET in Chance Mode" are displayed as a game guidance mode to show that the probability change state is likely to be set (Fig. 236 (c). ) Is configured to execute.

On the other hand, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, the "super chance mode 100" suggesting that the probability variation state is set for the first half period (10 seconds) as the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. An effect mode (see FIG. 236 (b)) in which the characters "times" are displayed is executed, and then, for the latter half period (7 seconds), "card picking" is performed as a warning mode that is not directly related to the game content. It is configured to execute an effect mode (see FIG. 236 (d)) in which the characters "Please be careful not to forget" are displayed.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be preset at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. As a result, during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, it is not necessary to execute the process for determining the effect mode of the notification effect every time, so that the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game is reduced. Can be made to.

Here, a case will be described in which the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game even though the probability variation jackpot game is executed. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. 236 (b), the process of hiding the characters "super" and the notification effect executed in the latter half of the jackpot ending period (7 seconds) are usually hit. A process of switching to a notification effect (see FIG. 236 (c)) executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period of the game is executed.

More specifically, as the display mode shown in FIG. 236 (a), a display layer (display hierarchy) in which the characters "super" are displayed and a display layer (display) in which the characters "chance mode 100 times" are displayed. Display for the display layer (display layer) where the characters "super" are displayed based on the determination result of whether or not the ball could be flowed down to a specific gate during the jackpot game. It is configured so that the presence or absence of instructions can be switched. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the ball could flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game by a simple control process. Further, since the effect mode is switched in the latter half period of the jackpot ending period, which is the latter half period, the effect mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types without limitation. Further, in the present embodiment, the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all jackpot types, but the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is not limited to this, and the first half period of the jackpot ending period is all jackpots. It may be configured to have the same length for each type. Further, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the jackpot type A and the jackpot type B have the same length in the first half of the jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot type B and the jackpot type C may be configured so that the latter half period of the jackpot has the same length.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ending period of a different length is set according to the winning jackpot type, but the ending period is not limited to this, and the ending period is lengthened according to the game result during the jackpot game. It may be configured to be different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in the present embodiment and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 237 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the effect when a variation pattern in which the non-reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol, and FIG. 237 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the effect when the variation pattern in which the reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the 3rd symbol.

A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 242, but in the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern (variation time) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, a fluctuation pattern in which the basic time and the addition time are added is used. It stipulates. Then, the period corresponding to the basic time is set as the common fluctuation pattern, and the period corresponding to the addition time is set as the peculiar fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in order to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol is displayed after the reach state is displayed. The period until the stop display is displayed is configured to be different depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state. Then, the third symbol corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third symbol to be in the reach state. With this configuration, the third symbol variation effect (third symbol variation effect executed in correspondence with the basic time) that is executed during a predetermined period after the third symbol starts to change is common. Can be transformed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), in the case of the non-reach variation effect, since the addition time is not set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the third symbol The upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at the timing when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the variation effect (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped so that the reach state does not occur on the effective line. The stop display is performed in the display mode, and two seconds later, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating that the lottery result is off. After that, after a stop display period (fixed time) of 1 second, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is confirmed and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 237 (b), when the reach variation effect is executed, the basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common variation pattern for 30 seconds, from the reach state to the elapse of 5 seconds. The production mode of is set. That is, the effect mode from the reach state to the one round of the middle symbol row Z2 is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the effect mode (reach pattern, stop symbol) is set according to the addition time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, an effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 238 (a) shows a normal jackpot, FIG. 238 (b) shows the flow of the production of the ending period for the probability variation jackpot, and FIG. 238 (c) shows the ball during the probability variation jackpot game. It shows the flow when the specific gate is not flowed down.

As shown in FIG. 238, in the present embodiment, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot, and the ED period is set to 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the probabilistic jackpot. It is configured. Then, the ending display mode divided into the first half period and the second half period is displayed (see FIG. 236).

In the present embodiment, the production mode in the ending period is set at the start timing of the jackpot game, and whether or not a V prize is won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined in the ending period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate). It is configured to discriminate at the start timing of the ED period) and switch the ending display mode based on the discriminant result.

<About the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 245. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment has a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, and a voice lamp control provided in the main control device 110 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a part of ROM 222 and a part of RAM 223 provided in the device 113 are changed, and the other parts are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239 (a). FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 239 (a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has a special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja instead of the first random number table 202a with respect to the ROM 202 (see FIG. 116) of the fourth embodiment described above. , The variable pattern selection 10 table 202jb instead of the variable pattern selection 4 table 202dc, the normal hit random number 10 table 202jc instead of the second hit random number table 202b, and the big hit type selection 10 table instead of the big hit type selection 4 table 202db. The difference is that 202jd is provided and the small hit random number table 202de is deleted. Further, although not shown, in the tenth embodiment, only the update range is different instead of the first random number counter C1 with respect to the fourth embodiment described above, and other than that, the special hit has the same function. The random number counter C1 (update range "0 to 999") is replaced with the second random number counter C2, and only the update range is different. Other than that, the normal random number counter C5 (update range "0 to 299") has the same function. ) Is provided. Since the other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, as described above, the names of various counters have been partially changed, but since the basic functions are the same, detailed explanations thereof and various counters referred to in various data tables specified in ROM 202 are used. The description of is omitted.

First, the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja will be described with reference to FIG. 240 (a). FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja. The special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja is determined to be a hit with respect to the above-mentioned first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 23 (b)) according to the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol. The difference is that the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is specified.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which the special symbol lottery has been executed, if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot judgment value (special). If the range of the value "0-4" of the special hit random number counter C1 is defined as the value determined as a big hit in the symbol lottery and the high probability state of the special symbol is set, it is set as the big hit judgment value and the special hit. The range of the value "0 to 19" of the random number counter C1 is defined. That is, in the tenth embodiment, no matter which type of special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/200, and the special symbol is selected. Regardless of which type of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state where the high probability state is set, the jackpot is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/50. In the present embodiment, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for each special symbol type, but the value is not limited to this, and a different special hit is specified for each special symbol type. The value of the random number counter C1 may be specified to be the jackpot determination value, or the number of values of the special hit random number counter C1 which is the jackpot determination value may be different for each special symbol type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the value (“0 to 4”) of the special hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit when the low probability state of the special symbol is set is the high of the special symbol. Even when the probability state is set, it is configured to be the value of the special hit random number counter C1 which is determined to be a big hit. With this configuration, the first look-ahead process (see S1757 of FIG. 135) and the second look-ahead process executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 of FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the second look-ahead process. In the process (see S1764 of FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes information on winning a big hit without executing a process of determining (predicting) the gaming state at a certain point in time. Not limited to this, at least a part or all of the value of the special hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is special so that it is not determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The contents of the symbol jackpot random number table 202ja may be specified. With this configuration, when the same value of the special hit random number counter C1 is acquired, the gaming state set when the jackpot determination using the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is executed. The determination result can be different depending on the situation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for fraudulent acts to acquire the value of the specific special hit random number counter C1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240 (b), the contents specified in the normal random number 10 table 202jc will be described. FIG. 240 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 10 table 202jc per ordinary. As shown in FIG. 240 (b), in this normal hit random number 10 table 202jc, when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 2". In the case of a high probability state of a normal symbol, the random number counter C5 for the acquired normal symbol is defined in the range of "0 to 149".

That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (1/100) is set to the low probability. As a result, it is possible to make the execution probability of the game per normal symbol different between the normal state, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, the probability variation state, which is the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the time saving state.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd will be described with reference to FIG. 241 (a). FIG. 241 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd. Like the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment, the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 241 (a), the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd in the tenth embodiment includes the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 which is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. 2 Special figure 2 10 tables 202jd2 for big hits are specified, which is referred to when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241 (b), the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 will be described. FIG. 241 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1. The special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 is a data table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241 (b), in the special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1) are "big hit A" to "big hit B". Two jackpot types are specified.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type is obtained with respect to the range in which the value (update range "0 to 99") of the special hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". "Big hit A" is defined in association with each other. This "big hit A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass) through the specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability variation jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game is completed, "0" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Further, "Big hit A" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special hit type counter C2, 50 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A", so in the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A" is determined is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99" with "big hit B" as the big hit type. This "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of big hit rounds is 7 and a normal big hit game is executed. After the big hit game is completed, "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. This is a jackpot type in which "0" is set. Further, "Big hit B" stipulates that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special hit type counter C2, 50 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B", so in the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B" is determined is 50% (50/100).

That is, the two jackpot types (big hit A, jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds in the jackpot game, but are in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. The ease of passing the ball through the specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see Fig. 196)) provided in the above is different, and the "big hit A" is different from the "big hit B" during the big hit game. It is configured so that a jackpot game that makes it easy to flow down to a specific gate is executed. Therefore, "big hit A" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 241 (c), the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 will be described. FIG. 241 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2. The special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 is a data table that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241 (c), in the special figure 2 jackpot 10 table 202jd2 in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot types of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are "big hit C" to "big hit E". Three jackpot types are specified.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the jackpot type is defined as "big hit C". Has been done. This "big hit C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass) through the specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability variation jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game is completed, "0" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Further, "Big hit C" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special hit type counter C2, 30 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C", so in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C" is determined is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "30 to 69" with "big hit D" as the big hit type. This "big hit D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass) through the specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability variation jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game is completed, "0" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Further, "Big hit D" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special hit type counter C2, 40 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D", so in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C" is determined is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" with "big hit E" as the big hit type. This "big hit E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass) through the specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability variation jackpot game (when not in V), the jackpot After the game is completed, "0" is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Further, "Big hit E" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special hit type counter C2, 30 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E", so in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E" is determined is 30% (30/100).

That is, the three jackpot types (big hit C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are all executed probabilistic jackpot games, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is determined. The "big hit E", in which the most round games are executed, is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and the "big hit A" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

As explained above, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation jackpot game is always executed, so the probability variation jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, compared to the first special symbol lottery. In terms of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, it is an advantageous jackpot type. In terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the maximum number that can be obtained is larger in the second special symbol lottery, and the minimum number that can be obtained. Also stipulates that the number of second special symbol lottery will be smaller. In addition, it is stipulated that the number of prize balls that can be obtained on average is larger in the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, and in other respects, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous. In this embodiment, the jackpot type shown in FIG. 241 is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various types are based on the same technical idea as each jackpot type that can be set in each of the above-described embodiments. The jackpot type may be configured to be set.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb. As shown in FIG. 242 (a), the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb has a probability variation with the normal 10 table 202jb1 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the state where the normal state is set. A 10 table 202jb2 for probability variation / time reduction is defined, which is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of special symbol variation in a state or a state in which a time reduction state is set.

First, the normal 10 table 202jb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 242 (b). FIG. 242 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal 10 table 202jb1. Various fluctuation patterns are defined in the normal 10 table 202jb1 corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. Specifically, the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19". In this case, a normal (reach) with a fluctuation time of 33 seconds to 42 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the addition time is set in 0.5 second units in more detail according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. For example, the acquisition is performed. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the addition time is "3.5 seconds", and when it is "2", the addition time is added. When the time is "4 seconds" and "3", the addition time is "4.5 seconds", when the time is "3", the addition time is "5 seconds", and when it is "4", the addition time is added. When the time is "5.5 seconds" and "5", the addition time is "6 seconds", when the time is "6", the addition time is "6.5 seconds" and "7". When the addition time is "7 seconds" and "8", the addition time is "7.5 seconds", and when the addition time is "9 to 11", the addition time is "8 seconds" and "12". In the case, the addition time is "8.5 seconds", when it is "13", the addition time is "9 seconds", and when it is "14", the addition time is "9.5 seconds", "15". If it is, the addition time is "10 seconds", if it is "16", the addition time is "10.5 seconds", and if it is "17", the addition time is "11 seconds", "18". If it is, the addition time is defined as "11.5 seconds", and if it is "19", the addition time is defined as "12 seconds".

Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the addition time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the information included in the basic command is included. The variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the above, and the reach symbol (type of the third symbol) is set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, the type of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is first visible to the player when the player is in the reach state, is always the specific third symbol (in the present embodiment, the number 1 is added to the third symbol). Even if it is configured to be a symbol), the reach effect can be executed by various types of the third symbol without changing the period from the execution of the variable effect to the reach state.

Further, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this super is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 13 seconds to 22 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. In the present embodiment, the addition time is set in 0.5 second units in more detail according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-mentioned normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the reach effect is variably configured according to the information (seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, the number of seconds included in the addition command is ". In the case of "3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal reach effect (the effect of stopping and displaying after the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates about one lap), and in the case of "13 seconds to 22 seconds", the super reach effect (middle symbol row). The effect of being stopped and displayed after Z2 fluctuates by about two laps) is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, for example, when a variable effect is executed in the same effect mode during the first predetermined period, and then a variable effect in which the effect mode branches is executed, the same effect mode is executed. It is possible to set the period based on the basic command (command containing information indicating the basic time) and set the fluctuation effect after branching based on the addition command (command containing information indicating the addition time). .. Therefore, for example, even if the total fluctuation time is the same, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily differ by simply changing the ratio of the basic time to the fluctuation time and the ratio indicated by the addition time. Variable effects can be set.

In the present embodiment, the basic time (30 seconds) when the normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when the super reach is executed are made the same, and the variable time set as the addition time is set. It is configured to change the production mode of the reach effect according to the length of, but it is not limited to this, and the basic time for normal reach is specified as 30 seconds and the basic time for super reach is specified as 40 seconds. , The addition time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" only for determining the type of the third symbol.

Next, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an addition time of 35 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, the effect of switching the variation effect of the third symbol once in the reach state to another variation effect is executed, so that the player first becomes the player when the reach state is reached. Even if the type of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 that can be visually recognized is always set to a specific third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in the present embodiment), the player can see it. Since it is possible to change the display order of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 in the middle of the fluctuation corresponding to the third symbol that finally stops without giving a sense of discomfort, as in the normal and super described above, It is not necessary to set the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state by changing the addition time.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the pass / fail judgment result is incorrect, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the fluctuation time is 8 seconds as the fluctuation pattern. The deviation is regulated. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the disengagement is determined, as the variation effect of the third symbol, the variation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the disengagement without being in the reach state is executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the addition time.

Further, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the reach deviation of the fluctuation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this reach loss is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 22 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. In the present embodiment, the addition time is set in 0.5 second units in more detail according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-mentioned normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. That is, even if the lottery result is out of order, the same variation pattern command as in the case where the lottery result is a win is set. If the lottery result is out of order, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed so that the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is not a combination that is a big hit. On the lamp control device 113 side, the correction process is executed so that the third symbol shifted by one from the setting content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when the winning is won is set. As a result, when the reach-out effect is executed, it is possible to easily set the effect mode in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed (disengaged stop display) in the vicinity of the third symbol, which is a combination of big hits.

On the other hand, when the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 99". In this case, a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. 232 (b) to 234, the fluctuation in the chance zone. It is configured so that the production is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the addition time (30 seconds) are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, they are included in the basic command. The fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) is set based on the information provided, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as a fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. 232 (b). An effect mode of a special variation effect in which the third symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction is set. Then, as shown in FIG. 233 (a), an effect mode for displaying the stop display (temporary stop display) of the third symbol is set at the elapsed timing of the basic time. Then, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 0 seconds is received (when the fluctuation pattern is out of the special range), the third symbol is confirmed and displayed as it is, and the fluctuation effect is terminated.

On the other hand, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the fluctuation pattern is a special reach), as shown in FIG. 233 (b) and FIG. 234, the third is temporarily stopped. A variable effect is set in which the symbol restarts. A detailed effect mode of the variable effect in which the temporarily stopped third symbol restarts will be described later with reference to FIG. 244.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239 (b). FIG. 239 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 239 (b), the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol holding ball storage area. 203dc, 1st special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, probability variation counter 203ja, jackpot start flag 203jb, jackpot Medium flag 203jcc, probability variation setting flag 203jd, probability variation passing counter 203je, winning number counter 203jf, remaining ball timer flag 203jg, remaining ball timer 203jh, probability variation effective flag 203j, probability variation effective timer 203jj, discharge number counter 203jk, and other memory area 203z. I have at least.

Of the various configurations of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment, the configurations having the same names as the above-described embodiments are given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation, but the names are used. However, those having the same configuration and omitting detailed explanations have the same contents even if the symbols are different.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a special hit random number counter C1 and a special hit type counter C2. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In this control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the data shift is performed only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db has four holding areas like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A random number counter C5 is normally stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C5 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203 dc is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is the same as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203da and the 2nd special symbol hold ball storage area 203db. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added one by one. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203dd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the fluctuation displayed on the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203dd is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the fluctuation display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added one by one. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. Since the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d has the same contents as the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d used in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203ja is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the special symbol is set is set. After the jackpot game is completed, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set in the probability variation counter 203ja (see S2602 in FIG. 253). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. Further, the value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a state where the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0, that is, a high probability state of the special symbol is set (S622 in FIG. 248). reference).

In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation), and the probability variation counter 203ja. When the value of is 0, the probability change state ends and the state shifts to the time saving state, but it is not limited to this, for example, a special symbol until the next jackpot game is executed. It may be configured so that the high probability state of is continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the probability variation counter 203ja.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) as a condition for terminating the probability variation state, that is, a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. Only the condition is set, but the value is not limited to this, and the value of the probability change counter 203ja is subtracted when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied. It may be configured as. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special out-of-lot winning), or when the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special drawing), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja may be subtracted, or the ball may be configured to be subtracted from a specific entry port (for example, the first ball). The value of the probability variation counter 203ja may be subtracted based on the ball entering the ball (1 entry port 64, 2 entry entry port 640, etc.).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted by 1, but a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 203ja are grouped together according to the type of the satisfied end condition (for example, 2). It may be configured to be subtracted, or it may be configured to subtract so that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the probability variation counter 203ja. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the probabilistic state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game in the probabilistic state.

Further, the condition for terminating the probabilistic state may be different depending on the content of the condition for setting the probable change state (big hit type). As a result, not only the player can be made to execute the jackpot game, but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interested, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The jackpot start flag 203jb is a flag indicating whether or not to start the jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203jb is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. The jackpot start flag 203jb is set to on when the end timing of the variation display indicating the jackpot is reached. Further, the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to off when the jackpot start is set (see S2403 in FIG. 251).

The jackpot middle flag 203jc is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203jc is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203jc becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S2403 in FIG. 251). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Then, in the special symbol variation processing 10 (see FIG. 247), the jackpot hit flag 203jc is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is hit (see S601 in FIG. 247).

The probability change setting flag 203jd is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by a ball at a specific gate (special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the ball has entered (flowed down). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into the specific gate (passage of the probability change switch provided at the specific gate), the probability change setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715 in FIG. 254). .. On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203jd is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S2605 in FIG. 253). The probability change setting flag 203jd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

If the probability change setting flag 203jd is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch has passed, the probability change setting flag 203jd is used. May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203m, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203jd to turn on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203je is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed the probability variation switch (flowed down the specific gate) in one round (5 rounds of the jackpot in the present embodiment) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the special winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passing counter 203je and the discharge number counter 203jk described later. The probability variation passage counter 203je is updated by adding one by one when the ball passes through the probability variation switch (flows down the specific gate). Further, after executing the determination process of whether or not the number of balls won in the V winning device 2650 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0". The probability variation pass counter 203je is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203jf is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 in one round in the jackpot game, and the winning of the specific winning opening 2650a is detected. Based on this, it is added and updated one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the V winning device 2650 (value of the winning number counter 203jf) and the number discharged (total value of the discharging number counter 203jk and the probability variation passing counter 203je) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203jf is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203jg is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball brushing period after one round is completed and the specific winning opening 2650a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to on, it means that it is a ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 2650a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for.

The remaining ball timer 203jh is the time required for the ball winning in the V winning device 2650 to be discharged when the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be discharged to the V winning device 2650 is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203jh. It is set as the upper limit of. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203jh (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the V winning device 2650 and the number of ejected pieces match. NS. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the V winning device 2650.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability change setting flag 203jd is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. It may be configured not to be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability change effective flag 203ji passes (enters) when the game ball passes through the probability change switch (enters the V region) after the distribution member switches to an arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to a specific gate. It is a flag for determining whether or not the sphere) is valid. When the probability change effective flag 203ji is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch.

The probability change effective timer 203jj is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203ji is set to ON. After the V accessory is switched to the non-V side arrangement by the probability change effective timer 203jj, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203jj is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the probability change switch is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probability change switch, the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch and passed through, or the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected by radio waves or the like. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud.

The discharge number counter 203jk is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203jk is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharges.

Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245. First, the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 243 (a). FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic view showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja and the probabilistic change effect selection table 222jb are added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, and the variation pattern selection. The difference is that the contents of the table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b are changed in accordance with the present embodiment. Regarding the changes in the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b, detailed explanations of the contents will be omitted, but various values due to the changes in the main control device 110 have been changed. It is something that is.

First, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the normal medium special drawing 2 effect selection table 222ja will be described. FIG. 244 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium special drawing 2 effect selection table 222ja. The normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja shows the third symbol when the fluctuation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol fluctuations executed while the normal state is set. It is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode, and corresponds to the values of the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the second special symbol lottery, the number of special figures 2 held, the number of special figures 1 held, and the effect counter 223f. Different production modes (production contents) are specified.

In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, a common out-of-reach effect is executed corresponding to the basic time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 233 (a)), and then. Pseudo-variation effect (see FIGS. 233 (b) to 234) is executed during the addition time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected by referring to the special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja during normal operation. It is configured in.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a big hit and the special figure 2 hold number is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number fluctuates in the range of "0 to 79". "Pseudo 3 effect" is specified as a pattern, and "special pseudo 2 effect" is specified as a variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99". When the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of this is in the range of "0 to 99" and the variation pattern is "pseudo 2 effect" and the number of special figure 2 hold is 1, it is acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 hold. The value of the effect counter 223f is defined as a variation pattern of "pseudo 1 effect" in the range of "0 to 89", and a variation pattern of "special pseudo 4 effect" in the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit and the special figure 2 hold number is 0, the "special end effect" is when the special figure 1 hold number is 1 to 4, and when the special figure 1 hold number is 0. "Pseudo-less production" is set.

When the lottery result is out of order, when the special figure 2 hold number is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is ". When "pseudo 3 effect" is specified and the special figure 2 hold number is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is ". When the special figure 2 hold number is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the "pseudo 1 effect" is used as a variation pattern. However, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, "pseudo-less effect" is specified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of the pseudo-variation effect of the second special symbol, the presence / absence of the special figure 2 hold number and the special figure 1 hold number is determined, and then the execution is performed. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variable effect in an effect mode corresponding to a special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier to think that the pseudo-variation effect executed during one special symbol variation period is as if it were a variation effect corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Further, since the number of pseudo fluctuations (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) executed in the pseudo fluctuation effect is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special figures 2 that have already been acquired, it is in the normal state. It is possible to make it think that all the special figure 2 hold acquired during the game per normal figure executed in is used. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation effect in which the jackpot is won is executed, the player thinks that the jackpot was won as a result of acquiring many special figure 2 holds during the game per normal figure executed in the normal state. Can be made. In addition, when the pseudo-variation effect that is won out is executed, the variation effect using the special figure 2 hold is executed next after making it think that all the special figure 2 hold has been exhausted (chance zone). (Because of the continuation), it is possible to provide the player with a unique effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the pseudo-variation effect (special pseudo-two effect, pseudo-four effect) that is set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the number of pseudo-variation times executed in the pseudo-variation effect and the special figure It is possible to make the player interested in the number of 2 reservations.

Next, the contents of the effect selection table 222jb during probabilistic change will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect selection table 222jb during probabilistic change. This probabilistic effect selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to when setting a variation effect when a variation pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected as a variation pattern of special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state. Is.

As shown in FIG. 245, different production modes are defined depending on the type of special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the production counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49" and "probability variation single reach". However, "double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99", "double reach" is defined when the jackpot is normal, and "non-reach" is defined when the jackpot is off.

If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and "special double reach" is set to ". "Probability variation double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99", and in the case of deviation, "double reach" is in the range of "0-4" and "double reach" is in the range of "5-10". "Probability variable double reach" is defined as "non-reach" in the range of "11 to 99".

With this configuration, both when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state, "double reach" (normal hit shown in FIG. 235 (a)). Since the reach effect) in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the above are in the reach state) is executed, any of the cases when the "double reach" is executed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the third symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery is being executed.

Further, when the "special double reach" is set, the effect mode of the "double reach" is first set, and then the effect mode is changed to the "probability variable double reach" shown in FIG. 235 (b). Is executed. Therefore, even if the "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, the game can be performed while expecting to be promoted to the "probability change double reach" on the way. In this "special double reach", the timing at which the effect mode of the reach effect is changed is the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 makes one or two laps, but the player is not limited to this and the operation button 22 The effect mode may be changed based on the timing of operating.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the flow of the game in the tenth embodiment will be briefly described. FIG. 246 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the game in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 246, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that three gaming states, a normal state, a probabilistic state, and a time-saving state, can be set as the gaming state. Then, in the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is executed more than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured to be easy.

If a jackpot is won (big hit probability 1/200) in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the normal jackpot game and the probability variation jackpot game are executed with a probability of 1/2, and the player goes to a specific gate during the jackpot game. When the ball flows down, it shifts to the probabilistic state, and when the ball does not flow down to the specific gate, it shifts to the time saving state.

The probability change state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or the jackpot is won. If the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot during the probability change state, the time is shortened. Move to the state. This time saving state is configured to continue from the end of the jackpot game until 100 special symbol lottery is executed. For example, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving number of times Is 100 times, and when the state is changed from the probability change state to the time saving state, the time saving number is 50 times.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255. In the tenth embodiment, as described above, in a state where both the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 hold) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) are stored. The point that the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. By letting the ball flow down to a specific gate arranged in the V winning device 2650 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. The point that is. As an end condition for ending the probabilistic state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in addition to the end condition that is established when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. It is different from each of the above-described embodiments in that it is configured to provide an end condition that is satisfied in such a case.

Then, as the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to configure the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned differences, the special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 of FIG. 247) and the normal symbol variation, which will be described later, are used. Process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249), through-gate passage process (see S157 in FIG. 250), and jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) are configured to be executed. Since the other control contents are the same as any of the control processing contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special symbol variation process 10 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 10 (S154). This special symbol variation process 10 (S154) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the variation display. 3 This is a process for controlling the variable display of a symbol.

In the special symbol variation processing 10 (S154), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) (S601). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203jc is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S601, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot game (during the jackpot game) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602). ), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S602: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the second special symbol reserved ball count counter. The value of 203de (the number of holdings N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is subtracted by 1 (S605) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203de is set (S606). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203de from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Of these, it is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S606, the data stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203db is shifted (S607). In the process of S607, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203db is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process shifts to S608.

On the other hand, in the processing of S604, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd (of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display based on the lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is larger than 0 (S609).

If it is determined in the process of S609 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S609: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S609, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S609: Yes), the number of the first special symbol reserved balls is The value (N1) of the counter 603dd is subtracted by 1 (S610), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by the calculation is set (S611). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203dd from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Of these, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 corresponding to the second special symbol.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S611, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203da is shifted by the same method as the process of S607 (S612), and the process is the process of S608. Move to. In the process of S608 executed after the process of S607 or S612, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S608), and ends this process. In this special symbol change start process, the same as the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 41) executed in the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. The process for determining the lottery result of the special symbol and the process for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 41).

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S614). In the process of S614, the value of the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated corresponding to the value of the fluctuation time counter after the update. In this fluctuation time counter, a value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S608) is set at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and then the processing of S614 is executed. It is updated (subtracted) every time. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S613 (S613: Yes), that is, when the value of the fluctuation time counter updated in the processing of S614 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of is set (S615). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S608). When this special symbol variation start process (S608) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to E is determined.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S615 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S616). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S616: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to on (S617), and the values of the time saving counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203ja are cleared (set to 0) (S618). ), The process proceeds to S619. When the jackpot start flag is set to ON by the process of S617, when the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 of FIG. 251) of the main process executed by the main controller 110 is executed, the process goes to S2401: Yes. The opening command is set by branching (S2402). As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S616, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S616: No), the processes of S617 and S618 are skipped, the update process is executed (S620), and then the process proceeds to S619.

The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent to. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the contents of the update process (S620 of FIG. 247) executed in the special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 of FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S620). In this update process (S620), the process is executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed (when the fluctuation is stopped), and the remaining period of the period in which the probability change state is continuously set is updated. The process for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

When the update process (S620) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol (S621), and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0. If it is determined to be larger than (S621: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted (updated) by 1 (S622), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update is 0 (S623). ), If it is determined to be 0 (S623: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S621 that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not larger than 0 (0) (S621; No), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not currently in the high probability state of the special symbol. The process of S622 to S624 described above for updating is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S625.

Further, in the processing of S623, the processing of S624 is skipped even when the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 and the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) continues. Then, the process proceeds to S625.

In the processing of S625, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, and when it is determined that the value is larger than 0, that is, when the current state is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S625: Yes), the time reduction The value of the counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S626), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S627). When the horse determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S627, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S628), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja, the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the current game. A status command indicating the status is set (S629), and this process ends. Further, it was determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h was not larger than 0 (0) in the processing of S625 (S625: No), or that the value of the time saving counter 203h was not 0 in the processing of S627. In the case (S627: No), the process proceeds to S629 as it is.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 10 (S166) will be described with reference to FIG. 249. The ordinary symbol variation process 10 (S166) includes various processes related to the ordinary symbol variation (lottery) (process of executing the ordinary symbol variation, process of setting the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol variation to be executed, and execution. The process of updating the normal symbol fluctuation inside, the process of stopping the normal symbol fluctuation, and the process of determining the game content of the normal symbol game that is executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit) are executed. There is a part of the process of selecting the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the process of determining the game content of the game per ordinary symbol with respect to the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 of FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it has changed, and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) is executed, first, the same processes of S1101 to S1113 as the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 of FIG. 48) are executed. After that, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time saving medium (high probability state of the normal symbol) by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S1161), and it is determined that the game state is in the time saving medium (high probability state of the normal symbol). If this is the case (S1161: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S1162), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1161 that the time is not short (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S1161: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 10 seconds (S1163), and this process is terminated.

Further, the same processing of S1115-S1118 as the above-mentioned normal symbol variation processing (see S106 of FIG. 48) is executed, and the time saving counter 203h determines whether the current gaming state is during the time saving (high probability state of the normal symbol). When it is determined by referring to the value (S1118) and it is determined that the time is short (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S1118: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640 is as the game content of the game per ordinary figure. Sets the game content (opening operation) for 1 second x 2 times (S1165), executes the process of S1121, and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the time is not short (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S1118: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640 is 5 seconds x 1 as the game content of the game per normal figure. The game content (opening operation) of the times is set (S1164), the process of S1121 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the low probability state of the normal symbol has a lower probability of hitting the normal symbol than the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 240 (b)). , Although the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long, it is configured so that the period during which the electric accessory 640 is released is long in the game per normal symbol executed when the winning is won. With this configuration, in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol), if a normal symbol is won with a low probability, a situation may occur in which the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640. Can be suppressed. In addition, since it is possible to easily acquire the maximum number (4) of special figure 2 hold during one game per normal figure, a plurality of second special symbol lottery is held in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)). It is possible to make it easier to execute the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the contents of the through-gate passing process (see S157) will be described with reference to FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S157). In this through-gate passing process (see S157), the actual hit / fail determination is made using the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C5 with respect to the through-gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) of the first embodiment described above. Is executed (before the hit / fail judgment (see S1111) is executed in the normal symbol variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249)), and the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is acquired in advance. The difference is that the processing for doing so is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the through-gate passing process (see S157) is executed, first, the same processing of S1201 to S1205 as the through-gate passing process of the first embodiment described above (see S107 in FIG. 49) is executed, and then a normal hit. The lottery result is acquired in advance based on the random number 10 table 202jc (S1211), and the winning information command for the general drawing including the normal hit determination result (preliminary determination result acquired in the processing of S1211) is set (S1212). End the process.

The prize information command for general drawing set in the process of S1212 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same process as the prize information command indicating the pre-discrimination result of the special symbol set in each of the above-described embodiments. NS. With this configuration, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right of the ordinary symbol stored on hold, and to execute the effect based on the prior determination result.

Specifically, for the normal map received in the state where the chance zone is set, that is, in the state where the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the game per game being executed during the normal state. If the winning information command includes information indicating the winning of a normal symbol, it is possible to execute an effect of continuing the chance zone until the next game of winning a regular symbol is executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next game per normal symbol is executed, the first special symbol lottery is entered. The effect mode of the variable effect executed in response is not the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 231 (b)), but the first. 2 It is preferable to configure so that an effect mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 232 (b)) is set. With this configuration, when a game per game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in a normal state, a chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the chance zone does not end even though the second special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times since the chance zone was set, the player will soon be able to execute the next game per normal figure. Can be grasped, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In addition, in the present embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone, a pseudo variation effect in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped a plurality of times is executed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict when the chance zone will end or whether or not the chance zone is extended.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074) will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074). This jackpot control process 10 (S1074) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110, and responds to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. It is a process for executing various effects and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 2650a.

In the jackpot control process 10 (S1074), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S2402), the jackpot start flag 203jb is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag 203jc is set on (S2403). , End this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is off (S2401: No), then whether the special symbol is currently being jackpotped (that is, the jackpot middle flag 203jc is on). Whether or not (S2404). In the process of S2404, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot hit flag 203jc is off) (S2404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2404, if it is determined that the jackpot is currently being hit (the jackpot flag 203jc is on) (S2404: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (whether or not it is the start timing of a new round). S2405).

In the process of S2405, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2405: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds is executed (S2406). ), End this process. The details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

On the other hand, in the process of S2405, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2405: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S2407). .. Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S2407: Yes), the ending command is set (S2408), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. .. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect (see FIG. 236) indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S2407: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2409 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2410), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 253. On the other hand, in the processing of S2409, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S2409: No), the winning process for controlling the specific winning opening 2650a according to the winning is executed (S2411) to specify. An abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the winning opening 2650a is normally discharged is executed (S2412), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormal process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2406) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S2406). This jackpot operation setting process (S2406) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252) is started, it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the 5th round (S2501). In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the start timing of 5 rounds is reached (S2501: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V accessory (flow path solenoid (probability solenoid)) 65k is set (S2502), and the jackpot is hit. An opening pattern of the specific winning opening 2650a corresponding to the type is set (S2503).

Although detailed description is omitted here, in the present embodiment, the content of the round game executed in a specific number of rounds (fifth round) among the round games executed a plurality of times during one big hit game. Is different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variation jackpot), as a round game of the fifth round, V so that the ball can easily flow down to a specific gate. It is configured so that a round game in which a character is operated is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to a specific gate only for a specific period of the jackpot games that are executed for a long period of time. Can perform the game of.

In this embodiment, when the fifth round in the probability variation jackpot game is executed, it is a chance period for the player to let the player flow the ball down to the specific gate on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the character "Aim for V" is displayed as a guidance notification mode for indicating. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of a specific period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate among the jackpot games executed for a long period of time in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, based on the detection means that the detecting means has detected that the sphere has flowed down the specific gate, "VGET" is used as a guidance notification mode for guiding the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 that the sphere has flowed down the specific gate. Is configured to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed is satisfied.

The above-mentioned notification mode of the guidance notification may be changed according to the condition being satisfied. For example, "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time of a specific period or the remaining time that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to the specific gate. It is advisable to change the character color of the character, change the size of the display area, or change the character with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not firing the ball in a situation where the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate.

Further, in the present embodiment, a period during which the ball easily flows down to the specific gate and a period during which it is difficult to flow down to the specific gate are set by changing the operation pattern of the V accessory for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the V winning device 2650. It is possible, but not limited to this, for example, the V accessory is configured to operate in a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning opening 2650a is opened can be changed according to the jackpot type. Thereby, a period in which the ball easily flows down to the specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific gate may be set. As a result, the operation pattern of the V accessory can be made common, so that the V accessory is less likely to break down.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that this round is not the fifth round (S2501: No), the processing of S2502 and S2503 is skipped and the normal opening of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2504). ), The process shifts to S2505. In the process of S2505, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S2505), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252), the specific winning opening 2650a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow path 2665e2 can be set to pass through in the fifth round. can. As a result, in the jackpots A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific gate (probability change switch 2665e3) just by firing the ball in the fifth round, so that the probability change state (special) after the jackpot ends. A high-probability state of a symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2410) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S2410). This jackpot end process (S2410) is executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S2410), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203jd is on (S2601). In the processing of S2601, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203jd is on (S2601: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the specific head (probability variation switch 2650e3) during the jackpot, so that the probability variation counter 203ja The value of the value is set to 50 (S2602), and the process proceeds to S2603. On the other hand, in the process of S2601, if the probability variation setting flag 203jd is off (S2601: No), the process of S2602 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2603.

In the process of S2603, 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2603), and then the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja (S2604). The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the subordinate state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot middle flag 203jc and the probability variation setting flag 203jd are set to off (S2605), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 253), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed the specific gate (probability change switch 2665e3) during the jackpot game. can.

Next, the details of the winning process (S2411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S2411). This winning process (S2411) is executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 2650a.

In this winning process (S2411), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 2650a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round validity period (S2701: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2701 when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening 2650a is detected (S2702), and the specific winning opening 2650a is determined. If winning is detected (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203jf to update (S2703), and a winning command indicating that winning to the specific winning opening 2650a is detected is set. (S2704), the process proceeds to S2705. On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 2650a is not detected in the processing of S2702 (S2702: No), the processing of S2703 and S2704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2705.

In the process of S2705, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705), and if the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. On the other hand, in the processing of S2705, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 9 or less (S2705: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2706), and the round time has elapsed. If so (S2706: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. In the process of S2706, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of each round game of the jackpot this time. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the round game is satisfied by the same round time elapsed and the number of winnings regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds. The end condition of the round game may be different, or the end condition of the round game may be different depending on the number of rounds executed.

In the process of S2707, the closure of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2707), and the closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set is set (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the closure of the specific winning opening 2650a this time is based on the end of the 5th round (S2709), and if it is determined that the closure is based on the end of the 5th round (S2709: Yes), the flow path. The solenoid (probability change solenoid) 2665k is set to off (S2710), and the process shifts to S2711. On the other hand, in the processing of S2709, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a this time is due to the completion of rounds other than the 5th round (S2709: No), the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 2665k is turned on. Since it is not set to, the process of S2710 is skipped and the process is transferred to S2712.

In the processing of S2711, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg, the probability variation valid flag 203ji, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2711), and the processing shifts to S2712. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less in the processing of S2705 (S2705: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S2706 (S2706: No), S2707. The process of ~ S2711 is skipped, and the process shifts to S2712.

In the process of S2712, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2712), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2712: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2713. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2712 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2712: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203ji is on (S2716). In the process of S2716, if the probability variation valid flag 203ji is off (S2716: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203j is on (S2716: No), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203jj (S2717), and then it is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2716: No). S2718). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203jj is not the upper limit value (S2718: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2713, the probability change switch 2665e3 is monitored, and the process of updating the probability change setting flag 203jd is executed. As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203jj is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 2665e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 2665e3 from being improperly passed the ball and being given the probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2718: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203ji and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2719), and the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203jj is reset (S2720). ), End this process.

Further, in the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 2665e3 (S2713), and if the sphere has not passed the probability change switch 2665e3 (S2713: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability change switch 2665e3 (S2713: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203je (S2714), the probability change setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715), and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, the abnormality processing (S2412) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S2412). This abnormal processing (S2412) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 2650a is normally discharged. It is a process to do.

In the abnormality processing (S2412), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S2801), and if it is not the round valid period (S2801: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (see FIG. 196) (S2802).

In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 2650e4 (S2802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203jk (S2803), and the process proceeds to the process of S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 2650e4 (S2802: No), the process of S2803 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2804.

In the process of S2804, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is on (S2804). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is off (S2804: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is on (S2804: Yes), the ball is in the bleeding period, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh to update (S2805). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is not the upper limit value (S2806: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806: Yes), then the number of discharges (the total value of the value of the probability variation passing counter 203je and the value of the discharge number counter 203jk) is won. It is determined whether or not the number matches (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) (S2807).

If it is determined in the process of S2807 that the number of ejected items and the number of winning items do not match (S2807: No), an error command is set (S2808), and the process proceeds to the process of S2809. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge flow path 2650e2 and passing it through the probability change switch 2650e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S2807, when it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S2807: Yes), the process of S2808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2809. In the process of S2809, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to off (S2809), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is reset (S2810). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203jf, the discharging number counter 203jk, and the probability variation passing counter 203je are reset (S2811), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 255), a problem may occur in which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 2650a is not normally discharged due to the clogging of the ball inside the V winning device 2650 or the like. It can be detected and notified at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 to 263, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) is replaced with the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) with respect to the seventh embodiment described above, and the variable display setting process 7 (see S4193 in FIG. The difference is that the variation display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261) is executed instead of (see S4153 in FIG. 187), and the other parts are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 10 (see S4193) will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 10 (see S4193). When this command determination process 10 (see S4193) is executed, the same process of S4221 to S4208 as the command determination process 7 of the seventh embodiment described above (see S4192 in FIG. 183) is executed.

Then, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4208: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding value is set to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (first special). The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2) are stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223ja (S4921), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S4208: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command (winning information command) has been received (S4210), and if it is determined that it has been received. (S4210: Yes), the winning command process 10 is executed (S4292), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the winning command process 10 (S4292) will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

In the process of S4210, when it is determined that the winning command (winning information command) has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether the stop command has been received (S4923), and it is determined that the command has been received. (S4293: Yes) sets the stop display of the third symbol (S4294), and ends this process. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4293: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the normal figure has been received (S4216), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4216: Yes), the normal figure The related process 10 is executed (S4295), and then the present process is terminated. A detailed description of the general drawing-related process 10 (S4295) will be described later with reference to FIG. 258.

In the processing of S4216, if it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4296), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4296: Yes). ), The jackpot-related process 10 is executed (S4297), and then this process is terminated. A detailed description of the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S4296: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4220), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the winning command process 10 (see S4292) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command process 10 (S4292). This winning command process 10 (S4292) is set when a winning command (winning information command) set when the lottery right of the special symbol lottery is acquired from the main control device 110 or when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery is acquired. This is a process executed when a winning information command for a general drawing to be executed or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) through a specific gate (probability change switch) during a jackpot game is received.

When the winning command process 10 (S4292) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). ), It is determined whether the command received this time is a prize information command for general drawings (S4441), and if it is determined that it is a prize information command for general drawings (S4441: Yes), the hit information (S4441: Yes) is included in the received command. If it is determined whether or not the winning information per winning figure is included (S4442) and it is determined that there is per information (S4442: Yes), then whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the present is a high-probability state of a normal symbol (S4443).

Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high probability state of the normal symbol, that is, it is the normal state (S4443: No), the state in which the lottery right of the normal symbol lottery to win the normal symbol during the normal state has been acquired. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that a chance zone is set, a display command for suggesting the opening of the electric chulong is set (S4444), and the process proceeds to S4445. When a display command is set in the process of S4444, the display control device 114 is notified with the same control content as the various display commands set in the control process of the other voice lamp control device, and is in the normal state. A suggestion effect (for example, a small display area Dm3 is set in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) suggesting that the game per normal figure is executed and the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (open for 5 seconds). The effect of inciting whether or not it is formed) is executed.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed only when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery that is won per ordinary figure is acquired in the normal state, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Even when it is determined that the prize information command for the general drawing contains the prize information indicating a specific loss winning, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned suggestion effect to be executed. As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to set the case where the game per normal figure is executed and the case where the game is not executed. Therefore, the game is performed while letting the player predict the content of the game to be executed in the future. Can be made.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery that is won per ordinary figure is acquired in the normal state. Based on the special symbol lottery or the pre-determination result of the special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing at which the game per regular figure is actually executed, that is, for the regular figure indicating the winning of the regular symbol. Pre-game state processing for determining whether or not the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command is executed (the timing when the game per normal figure is executed) is the normal state is executed, and in the normal state When it is determined that there is, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone is set.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 257. When it is determined in the processing of S4441 that the winning information command for general drawing is not received (S4441: No), when it is determined in the processing of S4442 that there is no winning information (S4442: No), the time saving counter is processed in S4443. When it is determined that the value of 203h is larger than 0 (S4443: Yes), the process proceeds to S4445.

In the processing of S4445, the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2791) set when the ball flows down to the probability change switch (specific gate) in the winning processing (see S2411 in FIG. 254)). (S4445), if it is a V winning command (S4445: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4446), other processing is executed (S4412), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the V winning command has not been received in the processing of S4445 (S4445: No), the processing of S4446 is skipped, the processing of S4412 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the general map-related process 10 (S4295) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal drawing-related process 10 (S4295). The normal figure-related process 10 (S4295) includes a normal figure variation pattern command indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a normal figure hit start command indicating that the game per normal figure has been started, and the like. , This is a process that is executed when a command to end the game per game is received.

When the normal map-related process 10 (S4295) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure variation pattern command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4701: Yes), the normal map variation for display is executed. A start command is set (S4702), and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the normal symbol is in a high probability state (S4781). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4781: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4781: No), the fluctuation of the normal map received this time. It is determined whether the pattern command is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the normal symbol lottery that is won per normal figure (S4782), and if it is determined that the pattern command is not won per normal figure (S4782: No). , Ends this process as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won the game per normal map (S4782: Yes), the long open hit is executed and the fluctuation per normal map is executed. Therefore, a display command indicating that the long open wait is in progress is set ( S4783), this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4783, the display mode shown in FIG. 231 (b) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it easy for the player to predict that a chance zone is likely to be set soon.

In this embodiment, a process of displaying the display mode (display mode forming the small display area Dm3) shown in FIG. 231 (b) is used based on whether or not the normal symbol variation is a hit variation. However, the display mode is not limited to this, and is shown in FIG. (Display mode forming the small display area Dm3) may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be changed according to the content of the variation effect (third symbol variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, for example, the third. When a variable effect with a high jackpot expectation (for example, reach effect) is executed in the symbol variation effect, a smaller display area than when a variable effect with a high jackpot expectation (for example, reach effect) is not executed. It is preferable to configure the display contents to be variable so that the display area of Dm3 becomes small. In this way, by variably controlling the display content by having a relationship between the variable effect suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable effect suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery, which are executed independently. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to unnecessary provision of a large amount of game information to the player, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the normal figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure hit start command has been received (S4703), and the normal figure hit start command is determined. (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4784), and if it is determined that the value is not larger than 0 (S4784: No), the long release is performed. A display command indicating the inside is set (S4785), and this process ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4785, the display mode shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the long open hit is being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4784 that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4784: Yes), the process of S4785 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the start command per normal figure has not been received (S4703: No), it is determined whether the end command per normal figure has been received (S4709), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4709). S4709: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4786), and if it is determined that it is not large (S4786: No), then the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223ja is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S4787), and when it is determined that the value is 1 or more (S4787: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect in-progress flag 223jb is set to ON (S4788), and it is not set to ON. If it is determined (S4788: No), a display command indicating the chance zone entry is set (S4789), the special effect in-progress flag 223jb is set to off (S4790), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processes of S4786 to S4788, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the above-mentioned determination result, the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297) will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 10 (S4297). In the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is the jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the jackpot start command is used (S4901: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4891), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4891: Yes), the chance mode is entered (time reduction state is set). The ending display mode shown is set (S4882), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4891: No), that is, when it is determined that it is a probability variation jackpot, an ending display mode indicating that the super chance mode is entered (probability variation state is set) is set ( S4983), this process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 241, different lengths of ending periods are set according to the set jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game executed this time at the timing is configured to be set in advance. With this configuration, various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control that displays information for indicating the number of prize balls acquired and during execution) Control to display information to indicate the number of round games) and prize ball payout control to pay out prize balls according to the number of balls won to the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed. Since it is not necessary to execute the display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the process of setting the ending display mode at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed, but the jackpot of a special symbol whose jackpot game is confirmed to be executed is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the fluctuation, or may be set by using the remaining period of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 which is executed during the period when the control processing is small in the jackpot game period. Is also good.

If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the jackpot related command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4913), and it is determined that the round number command has been received. If so (S4913: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S4914), and it is determined whether the number of rounds this time is 5 rounds (V round) (S4894). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 5 (V round) (S4984: Yes), a display command for guiding the V prize is set (S4985), and this process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in the processing of S4894 that the number of rounds this time is not 5 rounds (V round), that is, a round game other than the 5th round is started (S4984: No), this processing is terminated as it is. ..

If it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the process of S4913 (S4913: No), then it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4986), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4986: Yes). ), The ending process 10 is executed (S4987), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of S4986 (S4986: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S4915), and when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4915: Yes). ), The jackpot end process is executed (S4916), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S4915 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the process of the ending process 10 (S4987) will be described with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 10 (S4987). The ending process 10 (S4987) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot related process 10 (see S4297 in FIG. 259) described above, and is an ending executed during the ending period. The process for finally determining the display mode is executed.

When the ending process 10 (S4987) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4991: Yes), V The winning flag 223jc is set to off (S4992), the execution of the ending display corresponding to the already set ending display mode is set (S4995), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223jc is not set to ON in the processing of S4991 (S4991: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S4993), and it is not a probabilistic jackpot (normally). If it is determined (S4993: No), the process proceeds to S4995 as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4993, when it is determined that the hit is a probability variation jackpot (S4993: Yes), a display switching command for switching the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period is set (S4994). The process proceeds to S4995.

When the display switching command is set in the process of S4994, the display control device 114 is notified, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set in response to the setting of the probability change state in advance (FIG. 236 (FIG. 236). The process of switching d)) to the display mode (see FIG. 236 (c)) corresponding to the setting of the time saving state is executed. In the present embodiment, since the display period of the display mode to be switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183). The variation display setting process 10 (S4183) replaces the effect mode setting process (S5232) with respect to the variation display setting process 7 (see S4153 of FIG. The difference is that the process (S5251) is executed and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed instead of the variation display setting process 7 (S5237) for the special figure 2. Further, the difference is that the process of subtracting the value of the fluctuation count counter (S5231, S5235 in FIG. 187) is deleted. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the contents of the special drawing 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) is executed when the variation display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261) sets the variation effect of the first special symbol, and is set. The process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state being played is executed.

When the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probabilistic state based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g (S8251). Here, when it is determined that the state is not in the probabilistic state (normal state, time saving state) (S8251: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (for example). , An effect mode in which the third symbol change is started and then disengaged and stopped without reaching, or an effect mode in which the third symbol change is started and the reach state is reached for 5 seconds), that is, the third symbol. The effect mode corresponding to the period during which the common effect mode can be executed is determined regardless of the stop symbol of (S8252), and then the effect corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command. Aspect (for example, an effect mode corresponding to a period from the time when the reach state is reached to the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, a period which is variable according to the stop symbol of the third symbol. (S8253), and the process proceeds to the process of S8257, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8251 when it is determined that the state is in a probable change state (S8251: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S8254), and the basic fluctuation time (basic) is extracted. It is determined whether the time) is 30 seconds (S8255). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242 (c), when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state, the basic time is always 30 if the jackpot is won. The fluctuation pattern of seconds is selected, and about 90% of the cases where the player loses the prize is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the basic time of 30 seconds is selected.

In the process of S8255, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8255: Yes), the effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probabilistic change effect selection table 222jb (S8256), and the determined effect is determined. A display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S8257), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8255: No), the above-described processes S8252 and S8253 are executed, and then the process S8257 is executed to end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the special drawing 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252). The special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed when the variation display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261) sets the variation effect of the second special symbol. The process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state being played is executed.

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S8261), and if it is determined to be the normal state (S2861: Yes). , A display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S8262), then the special effect during effect flag 223jb is set to on (S8263), and the effect mode is determined based on the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja (S8263). S8264), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S8265), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8261, when it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S8261: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state (S8266), and it is determined that it is not in the probabilistic state. (S8266: No) is an effect mode (for example, an effect of stopping the movement without reaching after the third symbol change is started) corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Aspect, or an effect mode from the start of the third symbol variation to the reach state and 5 seconds elapse), that is, an effect corresponding to a period in which a common effect mode can be executed regardless of the stop symbol of the third symbol. The mode is determined (S8267), and then the production mode (for example, 5 seconds after the reach state is reached) corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command, and then the third symbol The effect mode corresponding to the period until the stop display is displayed), that is, the effect mode of the period variable corresponding to the stop symbol of the third symbol is determined (S8268), and the process proceeds to the above-described S8265 process. After that, this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of S8266, when it is determined that the state is in a probable change state (S8266: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S8269), and the basic fluctuation time (basic) is extracted. It is determined whether the time) is 30 seconds (S8270). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242 (c), when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state, about 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won, the loss is won. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected with a probability of about 4% in the case of the above.

In the process of S8270, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8270: Yes), the effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probabilistic change effect selection table 222jb (S8271), and the determined effect is determined. A display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S8265), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8270: No), the above-described processes S8267 and S8268 are executed, and then the process S8265 is executed to end this process.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured so as not to be executed in duplicate (in parallel). The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Further, it is configured so that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol differs depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variation state) than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state). In order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance to the ball is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a that is opened in the winning game (normal symbol winning game) executed at the time of winning the normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), the lottery right of the second special symbol can be obtained. That is, when the game is played in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. Taking this as an opportunity, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol, is executed. It is configured in. With this configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly different depending on the set game state, so it is expected that the game state with a high degree of advantage to the player will be set. However, it is possible to play games enthusiastically.

In addition, when a winning prize is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640 is configured to be able to execute a game per normal symbol that is released for 5 seconds. There is. With this configuration, even in the normal state, which is a disadvantageous game state for the player, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed. It is possible to make a player who is playing a game aiming to win a special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win a prize in a normal symbol lottery, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the special figure 2 variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reserved special symbols 2. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 variation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off variation effect indicating that the lottery result is out of order in the first half period of the variation effect. Is executed, and in the latter half of the period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) by the pseudo-off variation effect is restarted to execute the pseudo-hit variation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. The number of times that the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit fluctuation effect is configured to be changed according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 2. With this configuration, a variable effect that pseudo-stops the third symbol multiple times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be made to think that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lottery.

As a result, even if a big hit is won in the special figure 2 hold used for the second special symbol lottery to be executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 hold acquired during the game per normal figure, the player On the other hand, since it is possible to make the player think that he / she has won a big hit because he / she has acquired a plurality of special figure 2 holds during the game, he / she can more enthusiastically acquire the special figure 2 hold during the game. Can be done.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 in the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, as the pseudo-hit fluctuation effect described above, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the third symbol display device 81 A variation effect imitating the variation effect displayed on the display surface (the effect mode of the special figure 1 variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. It is configured in. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variation effect from being repeated in a situation where the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired, so that the player can receive a pseudo variation effect. It can be difficult to identify what is being done. In addition, after the pseudo fluctuation effect imitating the special figure 1 variation effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to perform a variation effect that is unexpected for a person.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance as the effect mode of the notification effect (at the start of the jackpot game). Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, and the ball hits the specific gate. When it is flowing down, the notification effect of the effect mode set in advance is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the probabilistic jackpot, which is advantageous for the player, has a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, even if the notification to that effect is given for a long period of time, the player is only uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probabilistic jackpot game, the jackpot ending It is said that a strange notification effect will be executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different just by executing the process of switching the effect mode of the period to the effect mode executed during the ending period of the normal game. There was a problem. In addition, if the dedicated effect mode set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probabilistic jackpot game is facilitated in advance, the image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It is necessary to store the data in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type, and during the probabilistic jackpot game. When the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate, only the production mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the production mode set for the second half of the ending period of the normal hit game. It is configured. As a result, a notification effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player is executed without providing a dedicated effect mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probabilistic jackpot game. can do.

In this embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification effect to be executed when it is not possible to flow down to a specific gate, but it is not limited to this, for example, from the final round period of the jackpot game. By executing the notification effect, the notification effect may be configured to be executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period, or the final jackpot game may be completed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuously executing the round effect executed during the round period and then executing the notification effect, the notification effect may be executed for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

Since this V-winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V-winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. .. Further, the configuration of the right side region of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right side region go to the through gate 67, the general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the rate of entering the ball is the same as that of the left side region described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is executed, even if the player executes the right-handed game, the left-handed game It is configured so that the same benefits are given even if the above is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his / her mood.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is symmetrically configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the amount of benefits that the player can obtain is It suffices to configure so that there is no significant difference between the case where the left-handed game is played and the case where the right-handed game is played. The number of ball entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. It is more difficult to win the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is easier to win the prize ball than the left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to do so. In the case of such a configuration, the player can play the game by any game method in the normal state, that is, while the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is being executed. In a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 (a game in a time saving state or a probabilistic state), a right-handed game can be considered to be more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game. ..

In each of the above embodiments, every time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is used. Has been described for transmission from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the special figure entrance 64 is held up to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 is held up to 1 time, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to this. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the special figure entry port 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol. Therefore, for example, each display mode may be set using common image data included in the display control device 114.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the left side of the game board 13 is divided into a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although it is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at the area is executed, it may be configured so that the target area of the different game board 13 is different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the game board is configured. A left-handed game aiming at the left side area of 13 may be executed, and in the case of a time saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed. May be executed and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or the jackpot game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a right-handed game may be executed during the jackpot game and a left-handed game may be executed only during the normal state when the time saving state is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player understand in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth to determine that it has been operated by a lever-shaped operating means, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. Although it is used as an effect operation means for the purpose, it suffices if it is possible to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation on the frame button 22, for example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operating means (frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display can be input. A control device capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of production operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of production operation means can be centrally managed, so that the production operation can be performed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation on the means.

Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, a switching button group 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the game per accessory is provided, and the movable valve 750 and the like. Part of each operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), third frame button (release button) 22c, or The whole may be configured to be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 296. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above, by shifting to the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small hit probability becomes easy to be executed, and the game ball is entered into the right variable winning device 1650. It was configured to form a state in which it was possible to frequently obtain the opportunity to win a prize ball. That is, it is configured to form an extremely advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without winning a big hit.

In addition to this, in the eleventh embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol are set. The combination (setting) with the jackpot probability can be changed. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, six types of combinations (settings) are defined as combinations (settings) of jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 269 (a)), for example. The jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 can be arbitrarily set by a clerk in the hall or the like performing a predetermined operation (setting change operation) outside business hours or the like. The higher the jackpot probability setting (high setting), the easier it is to win the jackpot in both the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol) and the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol), so the normal state continues for a long period of time. On the other hand, it becomes difficult to finish (it becomes difficult for addiction to occur), but it becomes easy to end the most advantageous latent probability state in a relatively short period of time (in the latent probability state, it becomes easy to set another game state by winning a big hit). On the other hand, the lower the jackpot probability is set (low setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a long period of time (more likely to be addicted), but the more advantageous latent state is likely to continue for a relatively long period of time. The total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game in the latent state tends to increase. In other words, depending on the jackpot probability (probability), the gameplay (the unfavorable state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period of time, and the unfavorable game state and the advantageous game state are both relatively long periods. Since it is possible to make the game playability that is easy to continue different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. On the other hand, various operating means (setting key 110b, setting change switch 110c) for changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (combination of jackpot probability in high probability state and low probability state) are provided. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 7 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 264, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 264, the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment has a first special below the central first ball entrance 64c with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 157) in the seventh embodiment described above. The only difference is that the special figure 1 winning device 1640 is provided, which is opened when a small hit is made in the symbol lottery. That is, in the eleventh embodiment, not only the lottery of the second special symbol but also the lottery of the first special symbol can be won as a small hit, and a small hit is adopted according to the type of the special symbol. The types of prize-winning devices that are opened (allowing the ball to be entered) at the time of winning are different.

The special drawing 1 winning device 1640 has a special drawing 1 winning opening 1640a through which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the special drawing 1 winning opening 1640a, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate. It is composed of at least a special figure 1 small hit solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the shaft to the front side. In the special figure 1 winning device 1640, the opening / closing plate completely covers the special drawing 1 winning opening 1640a in a normal state, and it becomes difficult for a game ball to enter the special drawing 1 winning opening 1640a (special drawing 1 winning device 1640a). (The winning opening 1640a for FIG. 1 is closed) The closed state is maintained. If a small hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 small hit solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface, and the game ball can easily win the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a. Temporarily form an open state. As shown in FIG. 264, in the special drawing 1 winning device 1640, the central first ball entrance 64c is arranged vertically above the winning device 1640, and the upper right direction and the upper left direction of the front view are blocked by the game nails. Therefore, even if the special drawing 1 winning opening 1640a is opened, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the special drawing 1 winning opening 1640a. That is, the small hit of the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment is not provided to allow the player to win the prize ball, and the player intentionally or mistakenly hits the right in the normal state. It is provided to forcibly end (discard) the long variation of the second special symbol by the small hit of the first special symbol when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed due to the above. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed when the variable display of the big hit or the small hit is stopped. If so, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. That is, in the normal state, the game ball enters the second entrance 645 by right-handed, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and the long variation of the second special symbol (variation display for 600 seconds) is executed. Even if it does, there is a high probability (for example, about 90% of the rate) that the game ball is entered into the central first entrance 64c by left-handed and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. It is possible to win a big hit or a small hit of the first special symbol, and forcibly end (discard) the long fluctuation of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute the variation of the special symbol on the side that is easy to be executed for each game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, details of various operating means for changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 265 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the setting value display device 110a capable of displaying the set value to the main control device 110, and the setting change operation (and the setting confirmation operation) ) Is accepted and not accepted (normal game state), and an operator (for example, a pachinko machine 10) is installed in a state of accepting a setting change operation (setting change state). A setting change mechanism composed of at least a setting switch 110c capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 according to the operation of the clerk in the hall is provided. A method of changing the setting using this setting changing mechanism and a method of confirming the setting will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 266.

First, the setting change procedure of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (d). As shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (d), in order to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As a result, it is rotated to the ON position (see FIG. 266 (a)). That is, in order to change the setting, it is first necessary to shut off the power of the pachinko machine 10. Next, with the setting key 110b rotated to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 266 (b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state. When the setting is changed, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a composed of the 4-digit 7-segment display. From this display content, it is possible to easily make the operator (for example, a clerk in the hall) understand that the setting has been changed to the changed state normally.

When the setting change state is entered, the set value is switched by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 266 (c)). In the eleventh embodiment, six types of setting values 1 to 6 are provided, and the larger the numerical value, the higher the jackpot probability. That is, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is the lowest (for example, 1/320 in the low probability state, 1/102 in the high probability (probability variation) state), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 is the highest (for example, 1 in the low probability state). / 220, 1/70 in a high probability state). In the setting change state, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, the setting is changed in the order of 1 → 2 → ... → 6. Further, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the set value is 6, the set value is configured to return to 1. Further, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. Note that FIG. 226 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode in a state where the set value is set to "5". As shown in FIG. 226 (c), when the set value is switched to 5 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "5" indicating the setting 5 is displayed for the last digit of the set value display device 110a. Will be done.

After the operator completes the operation of switching to the desired set value, the setting key 110b is rotated counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b in the OFF position, so that the setting change state is terminated and the normal game is played. Is shifted to a possible state (see FIG. 266 (d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped keyhole portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. As a result, the key part can be inserted into the keyhole part only when the operator (for example, a clerk in the hall) performs the setting change operation, and the key part can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is completed. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized player or the like from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, and thus it is possible to prevent the hall from being inflicted with an unexpected disadvantage. can.

Next, a procedure (setting confirmation operation) for confirming the setting will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 (e) to 266 (g). In order to confirm the setting, first, in the same manner as the setting change operation, the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position in the state where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (see FIG. 266 (e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while keeping it off), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 266 (f)). When the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value currently set for the setting value display device 110a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 266 (f), a state in which "5" is set as a set value is shown. When the confirmation of the setting by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is ended by rotating the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state shifts to the state in which the normal game is possible (see FIG. 266 (g)).

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are separately provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be deleted so that the setting can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, each time the setting key 110b is rotated 60 degrees, the setting may be switched in the order of 1 → 2 → ... → 6. Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out from the keyhole portion to return to a state in which normal gaming is possible. With such a configuration, the configuration of the setting changing mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, in the eleventh embodiment, the transition of the effect mode when the setting change operation is finished and the state shifts to the state where the normal game is possible will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect that can suggest the set value set by the setting change operation to the player. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, the current setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed every time a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, only between the time when the setting is changed and the time when the jackpot is first won. The setting suggestion effect in which the value is suggested by the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be feasible.

In this setting suggestion effect, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed at the third symbol with the same number, and the final out-of-reach effect (so-called reach-out effect) is executed and the reach is reached. It is configured to suggest the set value to the player by the numbers of the left and right third symbols stopped at the time of occurrence. More specifically, the reach of one symbol (reach effect in which the third symbol with the number "1" on the left and right is stopped and displayed) is selected when "1" is set as the set value. There is a high possibility that the reach of 2 symbols will be selected when "2" is set as the set value, and the reach of 3 symbols is likely to be selected when "3" is set as the set value. The reach of 4 symbols is likely to be selected when "4" to "6" are set as the set value, and the reach of 5 symbols is likely to be selected as the set value. It is highly likely that it will be selected when "5" or "6" is set, and the reach of 6 symbols will be more likely to be selected when "6" is set as the set value. It is configured. Further, the reach of the "9" symbol is configured so that it can be selected only when "6" is set as the set value. On the other hand, the reach of the eight symbols is configured so that the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of being selected.

FIG. 267 is a diagram showing a transition of the effect mode after the setting change operation in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 267, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting change operation is completed, the normal effect mode is executed over the variation display based on the lottery of 49 special symbols, and the 50th variation. In the display, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Then, in the 51st to 99th variation displays, the normal effect mode is executed, and in the 100th variation display, the setting suggestion effect is executed. After that, the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of times of the variation display becomes a multiple of 50 until the first big hit is won. In the eleventh embodiment, is the fluctuation pattern for which the setting suggestion effect should be set according to the type of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113? It is configured so that the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not it is present.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272 (b), but in the eleventh embodiment, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear 122, the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 50. A variation pattern scenario is set so that a special variation type (outside special reach variation) that is not normally selected is selected for each multiple. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined and the variation pattern effect of the determined effect mode is executed only when the special reach variation is notified as the variation pattern command. doing. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting change (power on with the operation of the RAM clear switch 122) has been executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on, and the like. Since it is not necessary, the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be reduced.

After the setting is changed, until the first big hit is won, the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the lottery of 50 special symbols is executed. It is possible to start the game with the pachinko machine 10 that has not won the jackpot many times and make it think that it is necessary to confirm whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. The player can be motivated to continue. More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 where the result of the previous day is bad (the actual number of games (the number of lottery of special symbols) and the number of big hits are low). If the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed, the player can be made to predict that the expected setting value has been changed to an advantageous setting value. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting suggestion effect is confirmed is to be continued. I can remind you. In addition, for example, if the result of the previous day is good (the result is that the probability of big hit calculated from the actual number of games and the number of big hits is high), the setting suggestion effect cannot be confirmed in the pachinko machine 10. Since the player can be convinced that the setting of is not changed, the game can be continued with the expectation that the result will be as good as the previous day. Further, in the setting suggestion effect, when an effect that can be expected to have a high setting is executed, the game can be continued with a stronger expectation that the setting is high. In addition, even if the jackpot is won before the setting suggestion effect is executed (before the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times), the event of winning within 50 times occurs as the setting is higher. Since it is possible to make the player think that it is easy, it is also possible to make the player want to continue the game.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, the pachinko machine 10 is specified regarding the degree of advantage of the pachinko machine 10 every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed a specific number of times (50 times) until the first jackpot is won. By executing an effect that can suggest the elements (set values) of, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in particular, in a state where the jackpot is not won.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (a). FIG. 268 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment replaces the random number 7 table 202fa per first with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 168 (a)). The point that the first random number 11 table 202ma is provided, the point that the small hit random number 11 table 202mb is provided instead of the small hit random number table 202fb, the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd is replaced with the big hit type selection 11 table. The difference is that 202 md is provided, the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, and the variation pattern scenario table 202mf is added. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf is four fluctuation pattern tables defined in the fluctuation pattern 11 table 202me (normal 11 table 202me1, time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2, latent probability 11 table 202me3, RAM clearing table 202me4). It is a data table that is referred to in order to determine which of the fluctuation pattern tables is referred to to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

First, with reference to FIG. 269 (a), the details of the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 269 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 11 table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment, a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. The range of is specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for the set value "1" (setting 1), the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first is obtained. ) Is defined in association with "0 to 204", and for the set value "2" (setting 2), the range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first is set to "0 to 217". Is specified in association with each other, and for the set value "3" (setting 3), "0 to 233" is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first. With respect to the set value "4" (setting 4), "0 to 251" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first, and the set value "5" (setting 5) is defined. ) Is defined in association with "0 to 272" as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first, and the set value "6" (setting 6) is the first. "0 to 297" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) of the hit random number counter C1. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the range that can be taken by the random number counter C1 per first is expanded to "0 to 65535". Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is The jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/240 (273/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 is Is 1/220 (298/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 643" corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first. For setting 2, "0 to 686" is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first, and for setting 3, the first hit. "0 to 735" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1, and for setting 4, "0" is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 per first. ~ 791 ”is specified in association with each other, and“ 0 to 857 ”is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random counter C1 for the setting value 6, and the setting value 6 is defined. Therefore, "0 to 935" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/102 (644/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/95 (686/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is The jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/89 (736/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/82 (792/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/76 (858/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 is Is 1/70 (936/65536). The ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state to the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, as a total, the higher the setting, the higher the degree of advantage for the player. That is, the setting 6 is configured to be the most advantageous to the player, and the setting 1 is configured to be the most disadvantageous. In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability, so the total prize balls that can be obtained by the jackpot itself will increase, and even if the number of prize balls that can be obtained by small hits during the latent state decreases. , The higher the setting, the higher the total advantage. That is, a low setting (for example, setting 1) tends to be disadvantageous to the player as the game is continued, so how many prize balls can be obtained in the latent state of 1 (big hit). How many times the lottery of special symbols can be executed without winning the game) will be a game for a short time, and at a high setting, it will be more advantageous as the game is continued, so it will be easier to go. It will be a long-term game playability that can stably obtain prize balls.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to set one of the six-step setting values from 1 to 6, and the higher the setting, the lower the probability state and the higher the probability ( Probability change) The jackpot probability in the state is high. Therefore, the higher the setting, the more difficult it is for the disadvantageous normal state to continue for a long period of time (it is less likely to cause addiction), but on the other hand, the most advantageous latent state is likely to end in a relatively short period of time (big hit in the latent state). Winning makes it easier to set other game states). Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state which is the most advantageous gaming state, a small hit is won with a high probability and the right variable winning device 1650 is opened. Therefore, even if you don't win the jackpot, you are often given the opportunity to win a prize ball. Further, once it shifts to an advantageous latent state, it is configured so that it does not shift to another gaming state unless a big hit is won. Therefore, in the latent state, the longer the period during which the jackpot is not won (that is, the more addictive) the more prize balls are obtained by the small hit, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in an advantageous latent state, a low setting with a low jackpot probability and a relatively easy occurrence of addiction has a latent probability of 1 than a high setting with a high jackpot probability and relatively less addiction. In, the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game tends to increase. In other words, depending on the jackpot probability (probability), the gameplay (the unfavorable state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period of time, and the unfavorable game state and the advantageous game state are both relatively long periods. Since it is possible to make the game playability that is easy to continue different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol is configured to be common to all settings, but this is limited to this. The ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be different for each setting. More specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is made different according to the set value as in the eleventh embodiment described above, while the jackpot probability in the high probability state is constant regardless of the set value (for example). , 1/90). With this configuration, the ease of addiction in the high probability state can be made common regardless of the setting, so that the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, since the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand playability that the higher the setting is, the more advantageous it is in all aspects. Further, for example, the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be different between the odd number setting (settings 1, 3, 5) and the even number setting (settings 2, 4, 6). Specifically, for example, in the odd number setting, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is low (for example, 1/100), while in the even number setting, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is high (for example, 1/70). You may. With this configuration, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the game playability can be greatly different depending on the setting. Further, in this case, as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the even-numbered setting has a higher jackpot probability than the odd-numbered setting, and the setting is higher in the odd-numbered setting and in the even-numbered setting. It may be configured so that the jackpot probability is higher. With this configuration, the playability can be greatly different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, it is difficult for the unfavorable normal state to continue for a long time in the even number setting, but it is difficult for the latent state to continue for a long time. Is easy to continue for a long time, but since the latent state is easy to continue for a long time, it is difficult to get hooked So to speak, it is possible to realize playability like rough waves. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, since it is possible to select an appropriate setting according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269 (b), the details of the small hit random number 11 table 202 mb in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 269 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number 11 table 202 mb in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269 (b), in the eleventh embodiment, a common value is associated as a random number value determined to be a small hit (value of the random number counter C1 per first) regardless of the type of the special symbol. Is stipulated. More specifically, 936 to 58981 are defined in association with each other as a range of random number values (counter values of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to small hits. Of the 65535 random numbers (counter values) from 0 to 65535 that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to small hits is 58046, so a special symbol lottery can be performed. The rate at which the lottery result is a small hit when executed is about 88.6% (58046/65536).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a high probability (88.6% ratio), so that it is in an advantageous latent state. In, the right variable winning device 1650 is frequently opened, and the player can frequently win the prize ball. Therefore, since it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the latent state, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the game will shift to the latent state. In addition, not only the lottery of the 2nd special symbol but also the lottery of the 1st special symbol is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, so that the player has intentionally or mistakenly hit the right in the normal state. When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed due to the above, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated (discarded) by the small hit of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the details of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md. The jackpot type selection 11 table 202md is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, as in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 270, in the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment, six jackpots of "big hit A11" to "big hit F11" are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, five jackpot types of "big hit G11" to "big hit K11" are defined.

As shown in FIG. 270, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by associating the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2 with "big hit A11" as the jackpot type. ing. In this "big hit A11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the most advantageous latent state regardless of the game state at the time of winning (time reduction regardless of the game state). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), which is a type of jackpot (16 rounds (R) probability variation jackpot). This "big hit A11" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is also the most advantageous. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, one is the random number value (counter value) associated with the "big hit A11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A11" is determined is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "big hit B11" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "1 to 49". This "big hit B11" has 8 rounds of jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot, the probability change state of the special symbol is set (the probability change flag 203g is set to on). Is. If the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, 65536 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while in the gaming state other than the normal state (time saving state, probability change state, and latent state), the time saving is shortened. 0 is set in the value of the counter 203h.

That is, if the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state. In this probabilistic state, since the number of time reductions is set to 65536, the probabilistic state continues substantially until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the "big hit B11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so that the game state after the end of the big hit is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when the player wins in the normal state. On the other hand, if the player wins in a game state other than the normal state, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 49 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B11" is determined is 49% (49/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 59" with "big hit C11" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit C11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit (value of the time saving counter 203h). 65536 is set to, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), which is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variation jackpot).

That is, when the "big hit C11" is won, a probability change state that substantially continues until the next big hit is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "big hit C11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C11" is determined is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "60 to 64" with "big hit D11" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit D11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit (value of the time saving counter 203h). 100 is set to, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on). This is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variation jackpot). In addition, unlike the "big hit C11", the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100 in the "big hit D11", so that the probability change state does not always continue until the next big hit. That is, if the lottery of the special symbol within 100 times after the end of the "big hit D11" does not result in a big hit, the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0 and the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit C11" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. If you win a big hit by lottery of special symbols within 100 times, the operation will be exactly the same as "Big hit D11", so it will be more advantageous than "Big hit C11" in terms of the game state after the big hit. It can be rephrased as an easy jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 5 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit D11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "65 to 84" and "big hit E11" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit E11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively disadvantageous time saving state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (value of the time saving counter 203h). Is set to 100 and the probability variation flag 203g is set to off). This is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot). Therefore, "big hit E11" is a big hit type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 20 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "85 to 99" and "big hit F11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit F11" has 8 rounds of big hit, and the state of the special symbol after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation flag 203g is set to off). (8 rounds normal jackpot). If the "big hit F11" is won in the normal state, 100 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit F11" is won in the game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h The value is set to 0. Therefore, if the "big hit F11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit F11" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit type. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 15 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit F11", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit F11" is determined is 15% (15/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0-4", and the jackpot type is "big hit". "G11" is specified in association with each other. In this "big hit G11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to on). 16 rounds probable change jackpot). If the "big hit G11" is won in the normal state, 65536 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit G11" is won in the game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h The value is set to 0. Therefore, when the "big hit G11" is won in the normal state, the probability variation state which substantially continues until the next big hit is set, while when the "big hit G11" is won in the game state other than the normal state, the most. It is set to an advantageous latent state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 5 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G11", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit G11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, "big hit H11" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5-9". This "big hit H11" has two jackpot rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to on). 2 round probability change jackpot). If the "big hit H11" is won in the normal state, 65536 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit H11" is won in the game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h The value is set to 0. Therefore, when the "big hit H11" is won in the normal state, the probability variation state which substantially continues until the next big hit is set, while when the "big hit H11" is won in the game state other than the normal state, the most. It is set to an advantageous latent state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, five are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit H11", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit H11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "10 to 14" and "big hit I11" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit I11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change state of 100 times of time reduction regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit (time reduction counter 203h). The value is set to 100, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), which is a type of jackpot (two-round probability variation jackpot). Therefore, "big hit I11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, five are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit I11", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit I11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "15 to 64" and "big hit J11" as the jackpot type. This "big hit J11" has two jackpot rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a probabilistic state that substantially continues until the next big hit, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. (65536 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on) This is a type of jackpot (two-round probability variation jackpot). Therefore, the "big hit J11" is a big hit type having a lower degree of advantage than the "big hit I11" in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 50 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit J11", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit J11" is determined is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "65 to 99" and "big hit K11" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit K11", the number of rounds of the big hit is 2 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of 100 times (time saving counter) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. The value of 203h is set to 100, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to off.) This is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 2 rounds). Therefore, the "big hit K11" is the most disadvantageous big hit type among the big hit types of the second special symbol in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 35 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit K11", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit K11" is determined is 35% (35/100).

In addition, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, there is no big hit type that directly shifts to the latent state, aiming at the right second entrance 645 by hitting right in the normal state. This is to suppress the irregular game method of firing the game ball. That is, if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, a long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed and the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated, and the game state after the jackpot is completed is also disadvantageous compared to the jackpot of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that it is disadvantageous to play an irregular game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress anomalous game methods.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 271. Although not shown here, the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment determines the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the jackpot. The normal 11-table 202me1 referred to for the purpose, the time-saving / probabilistic 11-table 202me2 referred to for determining the fluctuation pattern when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, and the latent state. The variation pattern is determined when the special symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability 11 table 202me3, which is referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed, and in the normal state after the RAM is cleared. It is composed of four types of data tables, a RAM clearing table 202me4 that is referred to for the purpose.

Of these, the provisions of the time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2 are the same as those of the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 in the seventh embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here. First, with reference to FIG. 271 (a), the details of the latent probability 11 table 202me3 constituting the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability 11 table 202me3.

As shown in FIG. 271 (a), for the lottery of the first special symbol, an ultra-long fluctuation of 60,000 ms is defined in association with the lottery result regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation display for 600 seconds (10 minutes) is always executed. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, when the lottery result is a hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the short fluctuation per 2000 ms with respect to the range of "0 to 49". Therefore, for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198", a long fluctuation per 5000 ms of the fluctuation time is defined in association with the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order (or a small hit), the fluctuation time is in the range of "0 to 49" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The deviation short fluctuation of 2000 ms is defined in association with it, and the deviation long fluctuation of 5000 ms is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “50 to 198”. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, only the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time (2 seconds or 5 seconds) is executed, so that the small hit of the second special symbol is executed in a relatively short period of time. The game is executed. Therefore, since more prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time in the latent state, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the RAM clearing table 202me4 will be described with reference to FIG. 271 (b). As described above, the RAM clearing table 202me4 is a lottery of special symbols in the normal state (normal state after the RAM clearing operation) set when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 122. It is a data table referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) based on. Here, as described above, in order to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (setting the combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the high probability state), the RAM clear operation is indispensable. Therefore, after the setting is changed, the RAM clearing table 202me4 is always referred to until the jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 39" regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation. The normal fluctuation per 20,000 ms of the fluctuation time is specified in association with each other, and the super fluctuation per 30,000 ms of the fluctuation type counter is specified in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "40 to 119". For the range of CS1 value of "120 to 198", a special fluctuation per 40,000 ms of the fluctuation time is defined in association with it.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is out of order and the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation is a multiple of 50, the out-of-order special reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25,000 seconds is supported regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is specified with. This off-special reach variation is a variation type that can be determined only in the normal state after the RAM clear operation. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command indicating the deviation special reach variation, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect as the effect mode (variation pattern effect) during the execution of the deviation special reach variation. There is. That is, after the RAM clear operation (after the setting is changed), the setting suggestion effect can be executed every 50 times when the special symbol lottery is executed, provided that the jackpot has never been won. Therefore, we hope that players who want to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 currently playing the game based on the content of the setting suggestion effect will be continuously out of the lottery of special symbols at least 50 times. It is possible to provide a novel playability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, if the setting suggestion effect does not occur even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more after the power is turned on, the player indicates that the RAM clear operation has not been performed (that is, the setting has not been changed). Can be convinced. Therefore, when the result of the day before the pachinko machine 10 playing the game is good (the result is that the jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (the number of lottery of special symbols) and the number of jackpots is high). Can be made to predict that the jackpot probability is set to a good setting (high setting) before the previous day and has not been changed with the good setting until today. On the other hand, on the contrary, the result of the day before the pachinko machine 10 playing the game is bad (the actual number of games (the number of lottery of special symbols) and the number of big hits, and the big hit probability calculated from the result is low. ) In that case, the player can be made to predict that the jackpot probability is set to a bad setting (low setting) before the previous day, and the bad setting has not been changed until today. In this way, depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to realize the game property in which the presence or absence of the setting change and the setting value are inferred, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player for the advantage.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result is out of order and the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation is other than a multiple of 50, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0". A short deviation of 8000 ms is associated with the range of "~ 70", and a long deviation of 12000 ms is associated with the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 "71-130". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified in the range of "131 to 170", and the deviation time is 20,000 ms, and the normal fluctuation is specified in association with the range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "171 to 198". On the other hand, the deviation super fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with it. That is, if the number of fluctuations is other than a multiple of 50 and the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the missed special reach fluctuation is not selected. In this way, by limiting the timing at which the off-special reach fluctuation is executed (that is, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect) to the number of fluctuations that is a multiple of 50, the game is to be continued until the number of fluctuations becomes a multiple of 50. It is possible to give the player a sense of purpose. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 that has not won a big hit even once on the day.

Further, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time is long per 600,000 ms regardless of the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Fluctuations are specified in association with each other. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms is defined in association with the number of fluctuations after the RAM clear operation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state after the RAM clear operation, an extremely long fluctuation time of 600,000 ms is set under any circumstances. Therefore, in the normal state, the game efficiency when the game is played by right-handed can be extremely deteriorated, and even if the game is off, the special reach fluctuation is not selected (the setting suggestion effect is not executed), so that the player It is extremely disadvantageous for. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed player is hit in a normal state.

Regarding the normal table 202me1, when the table 202me4 for clearing the RAM is deviated by the lottery of the first special symbol, the deviating special reach variation is not selected even if the number of fluctuations is a multiple of 50. The difference is only in that it is configured so that (the fluctuation pattern at the number of fluctuations other than a multiple of 50 is selected), and the other specified contents are the same as the RAM clearing table 202me4, so the details. The explanation will be omitted.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 272. As described above, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf includes four fluctuation pattern tables (normal 11 table 202me1, time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2, latent probability 11 table 202me3, RAM) defined in the fluctuation pattern 11 table 202me. This is a data table that is referred to in order to determine which of the fluctuation pattern tables (variation time) of the clearing table 202me4) is referred to to select the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

As shown in FIG. 272, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment shows the game state after the end of the previous jackpot, the type of the previous jackpot, and the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of special symbols after the end of the jackpot. A variation pattern table to be referred to for selecting a variation pattern is defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272, when the game state after the end of the previous jackpot is a latent state and the previous jackpot type is the jackpot A11, B11, G11, H11, after the jackpot ends. Regardless of the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol, the variation pattern scenario in which the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the latent probability 11 table 202me3 (see FIG. 271A) is associated and defined. Has been done. Therefore, if the jackpots A11, B11, G11, and H11 are won, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed by right-handing until the next jackpot, and the small hit of the second special symbol is won. It forms an advantageous playing state in which the opportunity to obtain a prize ball is often given.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, for the game state after the end of the previous jackpot and the previous jackpot type is the jackpot D11 and I11, the number of lottery of special symbols within 100 times after the end of the jackpot In the case of, the time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2 is referred to, and in the case of the number of lottery of the special symbol after 101 times, the variation pattern scenario in which the latent probability 11 table 202me3 is referred to is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpots D11 and I11 are won and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probabilistic state, the first special symbol lottery will be performed by right-handed until the lottery of the special symbol after the jackpot ends 100 times. It is executed frequently (a long variation is always set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed), while the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed after the 101st time, and the second special symbol is drawn. It forms an advantageous gaming state in which the chances of winning a small hit and getting a prize ball are often given. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the lottery will be executed 101 times or more without winning the jackpot in the probabilistic state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the game state after the end of the previous jackpot is in a probabilistic state, and the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpots D11 and I11 (that is, any of the jackpots B11, C11, G11, H11, and J11). ), The variation pattern scenario in which the time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2 is referred to is defined in association with each other regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot B11, C11, G11, H11, J11 are won and the probability variation state is set, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held until the next jackpot. To form.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, when the game state after the end of the previous jackpot is the normal state and the previous jackpot type is the jackpot F11, the number of lottery of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is determined. Instead, a variation pattern scenario in which the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the game is not performed aiming at the central first entrance 64c by hitting the left side, the game efficiency is remarkably deteriorated, which forms a disadvantageous game state for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, when the game state after the end of the previous jackpot is a time saving state and the previous jackpot type is any of the jackpots E11, F11, and K11, the number of times is within 100 times after the end of the jackpot. In the case of the number of lottery of the special symbol, the time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2 is referred to, and in the case of the number of lottery of the special symbol after 101 times, the variation pattern scenario in which the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred is defined in association with each other. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the RAM clearing table 202me4 is referred to is associated with the normal state after the RAM is cleared, regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol after the RAM is cleared. It is stipulated. Therefore, in the normal state after clearing the RAM, every time the number of lottery of the special symbol becomes a multiple of 50, the special reach variation is selected and the setting suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, we hope that players who want to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 currently playing the game based on the content of the setting suggestion effect will be continuously out of the lottery of special symbols at least 50 times. It is possible to provide a novel playability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (b). FIG. 268 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment has a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db and a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 173). 2 Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, set value storage area 203ma, winning state storage area 203mb, special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, It differs from the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf in that is added. It is also different in that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are deleted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db is different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the fluctuation according to the entry timing to the right second entry port 645. Each value of the type counter CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is the area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area). It is memorized in order from the smallest area of. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a judgment such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each counter value stored in the execution area. When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning the right second entrance 645, and the first special symbol reserved for counting the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It has the same function as the ball counter 203da. That is, it is a counter capable of counting the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit value (4).

The set value storage area 203ma is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, if "00H" is stored as data in the set value storage area 203ma, it means that the set value "1" is set, and if "01H" is stored as data, it means that the set value is stored. If it indicates that the set value "2" is set and "02H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "3" is set and "03H" is stored as data. For example, it indicates that the set value "4" is set, and if "04H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "5" is set, and "05H" is stored as data. If so, it indicates that the set value "6" is set. When executing the lottery of the special symbol, the data of the set value storage area 203ma is read, and the lottery of the special symbol (big hit lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, in the random number 11 table 202ma per first (see FIG. 269 (a)), the range of random numbers corresponding to the set value indicated by the data in the set value storage area 203ma and the first hit stored in the execution area. A special symbol lottery is executed by comparing with the value of the random number counter C1 (see S492 and S493 in FIG. 278 and S1081 and S1082 in FIG. 285). The initial value of the set value storage area 203ma is set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, "01H" → "02H" → ... -> The values are updated by "05H" and "01H", and when the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is "05H", the data is updated to "01H". When the power is turned on with the pressing of the RAM clear switch 122, all the data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) by writing. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203ma is also reset to the initial value "01H". That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without executing the setting change operation, the setting 1 can be changed. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the power is turned on with the pressing of the RAM clear switch 122 (RAM clear operation), all the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, only the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be configured to be retained even when the RAM clear operation is performed. That is, the data in the set value storage area 203ma may not be updated (changed) unless the setting switch 110c is operated (pressed) in the setting change state. With this configuration, if the hall side wants to reset the data in the RAM 203 without changing the set value (for example, the hall business hours will end with the most advantageous latent state, and the data will be reset. Otherwise, if the situation remains most advantageous even at the start of business on the next business day, etc.), that wish can be easily fulfilled, and the convenience of the hall can be improved.

The winning state storage area 203mb is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 and the probability variation flag 203fa is off), the normal state is set in the winning state storage area 203mb. "00H" is stored as information indicating. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the probability variation flag 203fa is off), the time saving state is shown in the winning state storage area 203mb. "01H" is stored as information. If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is in the probability change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203fa is on), the probability change state is shown in the winning state storage area 203mb. "02H" is stored as information. If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 and the probability change flag 203fa is on), the latent state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "03H" is stored as the information to be shown. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203 mb is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S1991 in FIG. 292).

In the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203 mc, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the central first entrance 64c or the right first entrance 164r at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot determination value is matched (see S459 in FIG. 278). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203 mc is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the small hit of the second special symbol (S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, S11608 in FIG. 289. reference).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203 mc is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S854 in FIG. 282). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is set when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the right second entry port 645 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag set to on (see S1059 in FIG. 285). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is set off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the small hit of the first special symbol (S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, S11608 in FIG. 289. reference).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S1554 in FIG. 288). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

In the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the central first entry port 64c or the right first entry opening 164r is when the value of the first random number counter C1 starts to fluctuate. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the small hit determination value is matched (see S10481 in FIG. 279). The special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the big hit of the second special symbol (S3009 in FIG. 283, S1594 in FIG. 288, and FIG. 289. See S11608). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S3006 in FIG. 283). ). As a result, while the small hit of the first special symbol is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, and a problem occurs in which the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate during the small hit. This can be prevented (suppressed).

The special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf indicates that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the right second entrance 645 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined (see S1332 in FIG. 286). The special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the big hit of the first special symbol (S10855 in FIG. 282, S3009 in FIG. 283, and FIG. 289. See S11608). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S11605 of FIG. 289). ). As a result, while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, and a problem occurs in which the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate during the small hit. This can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, which is realized by performing control based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203, is shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to 273. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing a method of transitioning the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is roughly divided into four gaming states. That is, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), and the probabilistic state (probability changing state of the special symbol). In addition, four gaming states are provided: a normal symbol time saving state) and a latent probability state (a special symbol probability variation state and a normal symbol normal state). In the following, for the sake of brevity, the most disadvantageous normal state is referred to as the normal mode, and although the degree of advantage is the lowest next to the normal state (normal mode), the game can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. The time saving state is called the pullback mode, and the probabilistic state with a relatively high degree of advantage that allows the game to be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held until the next big hit is called the consecutive villa mode A, and then the big hit. The most advantageous latent state in which a player can win a small hit frequently and continue to increase the number of balls held is called a consecutive villa mode B. In FIG. 273, the normal mode is shown on the upper left side, the pullback mode is shown on the upper right side, the consecutive villa mode A is shown on the lower left side, and the consecutive villa mode B is shown on the lower right side.

As shown on the upper left side of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another state in the case of a big hit. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 273, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected (determined) and the jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 1% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the series is continued after the jackpot ends. Shift to villa mode B. In addition, when one of the jackpots B11 to D11, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 64% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the consecutive villa mode A which is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. Move to. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected (determined) and either the jackpot E11 or F11, which is determined at a rate of 35% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the pullback mode has a relatively low degree of advantage after the jackpot ends. Move to. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the normal mode, the game can be played with the expectation that the mode will be changed to either the consecutive villa mode A or B. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability is configured to be different depending on the setting, and the higher the setting (the higher the setting), the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot early in the disadvantageous normal mode. That is, the higher the setting, the longer the period during which the jackpot is not won in the disadvantageous normal mode becomes difficult (it becomes difficult to get hooked). As mentioned above, if a jackpot is won in the normal mode, it will always shift to another mode with a higher degree of advantage than the normal mode, so in the normal mode, the high setting with a high jackpot probability is compared with the low setting. Therefore, the degree of advantage increases.

Further, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the pullback mode to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified time reduction number of times has passed. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 273, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected (determined), either jackpot A11 or B11, which is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). Shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B after the jackpot ends. In addition, when it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol and either jackpot C11 or D11, which is determined at a rate of 15% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), a relatively advantageous consecutive villa mode A after the jackpot ends. Move to. In addition, when the jackpot F11, which is the jackpot of the first special symbol and is determined at a rate of 15% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), and the specified time reduction number (100 times) has elapsed since the pullback mode was set. If this is the case, the mode shifts to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage is again selected (determined) after the jackpot ends. Set (loops pullback mode). Therefore, in the pullback mode, the rate at which the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B is set when the jackpot is won is significantly higher than in the normal mode (1% → 50%), so that when the jackpot is won, , It is possible to expect more strongly to shift to the consecutive villa mode B. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot during the specified time reduction number (100 times). In other words, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that the jackpot will be won again within the time saving number (pulling back the jackpot) and the transition to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B will occur, while the lower the setting, the more likely it will be within the time saving number of times. There is a high possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous normal mode without winning the jackpot. Therefore, even in the pullback mode, the high setting having a high jackpot probability has a higher degree of advantage than the low setting as in the normal mode.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode A to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time reductions has passed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 273, when the jackpots A11 and B11, which are the jackpots of the first special symbol and are determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), and the consecutive villas. When the number of time reductions set in the mode A has elapsed, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode B, which is most advantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode with a relatively low degree of advantage. NS. Furthermore, when the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot F11 determined at a rate of 15% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal mode which is the most disadvantageous to the player. NS. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained and the jackpots C11 and D11 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 15% are determined, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode A, the jackpot probability is high, and the rate of transition to the consecutive villa mode B, which is advantageous when the jackpot is won, is also high (50%) as in the pullback mode. , Form an advantageous gaming state for the player. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, even in the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot earlier. Therefore, if 100 times are set as the number of time reductions in the consecutive villa mode A, the one with the lower setting will be a special symbol lottery and will be missed 100 times in a row. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the more advantageous consecutive villa mode B. That is, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage. In the consecutive villa mode A, it is more likely that the number of time reductions (65536 times) that will continue until the next big hit is set, but if it continues until the next big hit, the jackpot probability gives the degree of advantage. The impact is relatively small. This is because, as long as the probabilistic state continues, the game ball can easily enter the right first ball entry port 164r, so that the game can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 273, there is a possibility of shifting from the consecutive villa mode B to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 273, it becomes a jackpot of the second special symbol, and when jackpots I11 and J11 determined at a rate of 55% are selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the jackpot is selected. After the end, the player shifts to the consecutive villa mode A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. Further, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot K11 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 35% is determined, a pullback mode having a low degree of advantage is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpots G11 and H11 determined at a rate of 10% are selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is again the most advantageous. It is set to the consecutive villa mode B (loops the consecutive villa mode B). In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, the prize ball by the small hit of the second special symbol can be obtained while staying in the consecutive villa mode, and when it becomes a big hit, it goes to the most disadvantageous normal mode. Since there is no possibility of transitioning to, it is very advantageous for the player. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability, so that the consecutive villa mode B, which is advantageous for the player, is likely to end early (the jackpot is won with a small number of lottery). It will be easier). The consecutive villa mode B is substantially continued until the next big hit, and while the consecutive villa mode B is continuing, it is possible to frequently win prize balls by small hits, so the big hit is not won. You can expect to win more prize balls. Therefore, the lower setting, which makes it difficult to win the jackpot (the probability of the jackpot is low), is the most advantageous game because the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained when shifting to the consecutive villa mode B is higher than the high setting. It is possible to realize a novel playability that the low setting is more advantageous in the state. In other words, in the consecutive villa mode B, it is possible to realize an extremely special game property in which the degree of advantage decreases as the winning is easier, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 274, the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is a setting suggestion effect selection table with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 30A) of the RM222 of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The only difference is that 222 ma has been added. The setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma provides an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect to be executed during the execution period of the deviation special reach variation when the deviation pattern command notifies the deviation special reach variation as the variation type from the main control device 110. A data table referenced for selection.

The details of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma. As shown in FIG. 275, in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma in the eleventh embodiment, the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect mode are defined in association with each set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1, 10 counter values of "0 to 9" are associated with the effect mode of one symbol reach as the value range of the effect counter 223f. In the case of settings 2 to 6, three counter values of "0 to 2" are associated and defined as a range of values of the effect counter 223f. For this reason, when a special reach fluctuation is notified in setting 1 (when the number of fluctuations after changing the setting is a multiple of 50), the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of one symbol reach is 10% (10 / 10 /). On the other hand, when a special reach variation is notified in a setting other than setting 1, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern effect of one symbol reach is 3%. Therefore, when one symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the minimum setting of 1 is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 1, three counter values of "10 to 12" are defined and set as the values of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of the two symbol reach. In the case of 2, 10 counter values of "3 to 12" are associated and defined as the values of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of settings 3 to 6, the three counter values of "3 to 5" are associated with each other. It is stipulated. Therefore, the rate at which the variation pattern effect of 2 symbol reach is selected when the deviation special variation is notified in the setting 1 is 1% (1/100), and 2 when the deviation special variation is notified in the setting 2. The rate at which the variation pattern effect of the symbol reach is selected is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which the variation pattern effect of 2 symbol reach is selected is 3 when a special variation is notified in settings 3 to 6. % (3/100). Therefore, when the two symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 2 is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, the three counter values of "13 to 15" are defined in association with each other as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of the three symbol reach. , In the case of setting 3, 15 counter values of "6 to 20" are associated and defined as the values of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of settings 4 to 6, 3 counter values of "6 to 8" correspond to each other. It is specified with. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern effect of the three symbol reach is 3% (3/100), while the deviation special in the setting 3 is selected. When the fluctuation is notified, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of the three symbol reach is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the three symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 3 is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values of "16 to 18" are defined in association with each other as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of the four symbol reach. , In the case of setting 3, three counter values of "21 to 23" are associated and defined as the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 4, 15 counter values of "9 to 23" are associated with each other. It is specified, and in the case of settings 5 and 6, seven counter values of "9 to 15" are specified in association with each other. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern effect of 4 symbol reach when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 3 is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special variation is notified in the setting 4. The rate at which the variation pattern effect of 4 symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100), and the rate at which the variation pattern effect of 4 symbol reach is selected when a special variation is notified in settings 5 and 6. Is 7% (7/100). Therefore, when 4 symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 4 is relatively high, and the player has expectations for settings 5 and 6. Can be squeezed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values of "19 to 21" are defined in association with each other as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of the five symbol reach. , In the case of settings 3 and 4, three counter values of "23 to 26" are associated and defined as the values of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 15 counter values of "15 to 29" correspond to each other. In the case of setting 6, seven counter values of "16 to 22" are specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 4, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern effect of 5 symbol reach is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 5. The rate at which the variation pattern effect of 5 symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100), and the rate at which the variation pattern effect of 5 symbol reach is selected when a special variation is notified in setting 6 is 7. % (7/100). Therefore, when 5 symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 5 is relatively high, and the expectation of setting 6 is also given to the player. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values of "22 to 24" are defined in association with each other as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of 6 symbol reach. , In the case of settings 3 and 4, three counter values of "27 to 29" are associated and defined as the values of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, three counter values of "30 to 32" correspond to each other. In the case of setting 6, 15 counter values of "23 to 38" are specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 5, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern effect of 6 symbol reach is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 6. The rate at which the variation pattern effect of 6 symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when 6 symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 6 is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, 75 counter values of "25 to 99" are defined in association with each other as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of 8 symbol reach. , In the case of settings 3 and 4, 70 counter values of "30 to 99" are associated and defined as the values of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 67 counter values of "33 to 99" correspond. In the case of setting 6, 57 counter values of "39 to 96" are specified in association with each other. Therefore, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern effect of 8 symbol reach when the deviation special variation is notified in the settings 1 and 2 is 75% (75/100), and the deviation special variation is notified in the settings 3 and 4. In this case, the rate at which the variation pattern effect of 8 symbol reach is selected is 70% (70/100), and the rate at which the variation pattern effect of 8 symbol reach is selected when a special variation is notified in setting 5. Is 67% (67/100), and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern effect of 8 symbol reach when the out-of-order special variation is notified in the setting 6 is 57%. Therefore, the lower the setting, the easier it is to select the variation pattern effect of 8 symbol reach. Therefore, when 8 symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after changing the setting is a multiple of 50, the possibility of low setting is relatively high. It gets higher.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of setting 6, three counter values of "97 to 99" are defined in association with each other as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of 9 symbol reach. On the other hand, in the case of other settings, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated. Therefore, when 9 symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the setting 6 which is the maximum setting is fixed.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to infer the setting from the content every time the number of fluctuations after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50 (the selection rate of each production mode is different for each set value). It is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the player can be reminded to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on until the jackpot is won is improved. Can be made to.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 292. First, the details of the special symbol variation processing 11 (FIGS. 276, S121) will be described with reference to FIG. 276. This special symbol variation process 11 (FIGS. 276, S121) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIGS. 119, S151) of the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above, and the seventh embodiment (FIG. 119, S151) is executed. And the fourth embodiment), this is a process for setting the display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, as in the case of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 119).

Of the special symbol variation processing 11 (FIGS. 276 and S121), in each of the processes S251, S254, S259 and S262, the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIGS. 119, S151) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S251, S254, S259 and S262 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 276, in the special symbol variation processing 11 (S121) in the eleventh embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed in the processing of S254 (value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di). Is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is subtracted and updated (S291), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is displayed. Update (S292). Next, when it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di updated in the process of S291 is 0 (S256), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256). : Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 11 for setting the stop display of the first special symbol is executed (S293), and the process proceeds to the process of S259. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 11 (S293) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283. If it is determined in the process of S256 that the fluctuation time counter 203di in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S293 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S259.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S254 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not larger than 0 (0) (S254: No), it means that the first special symbol is not being displayed for fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol variation start process 11 for starting the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (S294), and the process shifts to S259. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 281. However, the first special symbol change start process 11 (S294) is the first special symbol change start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment. It is a process executed instead of.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 11 in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S259 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a value larger than 0 (S259: No), the present is the first. Since it means that the fluctuation display of the 2 special symbols is being performed, the value of the special diagram 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is then subtracted and updated (S295), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is displayed. (S296), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update by the processing of S295 has become 0 (S262). In the process of S262, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is updated to 0 (S262: Yes), it means that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has elapsed, so that the second special The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 11 for setting the stop display of the symbol is executed (S297), and this process is terminated. Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289, but the second special symbol variation stop process 11 (S297) is the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (see FIG. 180) in the seventh embodiment. ) Is a process executed instead of). On the other hand, in the processing of S262, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update is not updated to 0 (S262: No), the processing of S297 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is. do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 276, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) in the processing of S259 (S259: No), the fluctuation of the second special symbol Since it means that the display has not been executed, next, the second special symbol variation start process 11 for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (S298), and this process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287, but the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) is replaced with the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment. Is the process to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the details of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121), will be described. The first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 120, S258) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment). , This is a process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In each of the processes S351 to S355 of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), the first special symbol variation start process (FIGS. 120, S258) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S351 to S355 is executed.

Further, in the first special symbol change start processing 11 (S294) in the eleventh embodiment, after the processing of S355 is executed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 for executing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is executed. (S391). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, but the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). This is a process executed instead of (see FIG. 121).

When the process of S391 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is then executed (S392). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 280, but the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. This is a process executed in place of (see 122). When the process of S392 is completed, the game state update process for updating the game state is executed (S393), and this process is terminated. Details of this game state update process (S393) will be described later with reference to FIG. 281.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processes 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIGS. 121, S356) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment). , As described above, this is a process for executing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.

In each of the processes S451 and S458 to S461 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIGS. 121, S356) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), respectively. ), And the same processes as those of S451 and S458 to S461 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 278, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S451 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON. (S491), when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is on (S491: Yes), it means that the present is a high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, so that the first hit for the high probability time From the random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)), the hit random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S492), and the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, in the processing of S491, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is off (S491: No), it means that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol, so the first random number for the low probability time. From the 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)), the hit random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S493), and the process proceeds to S494. In the processing of S494 executed after the processing of S492 or S493, the lottery result (judgment result) of the big hit lottery is acquired by using the winning random number value read in the processing of S492 or S493 and the data of the execution area (S494). ), The process shifts to S458.

Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (see FIG. 278) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S458 that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot (S458: No). ), The special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 for setting the stop symbol according to the type of deviation is executed (S495), and this processing is terminated. The details of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 (S495) will be described with reference to FIG. 279.

The special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 (S495) is a process for setting a stop symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation (including a small hit which is a kind of deviation), and is the eighth described above. This is the same process as the special figure 1 deviation variation process 8 (see FIG. 210) in the embodiment. Of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 (see FIG. 279) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S485 and S487 to S489, the special drawing 1 deviation variation process 8 (FIGS. 210 and S481) in the eighth embodiment, respectively. ), And the same processing as each processing of S487 to S489 is executed.

Further, in the special figure 1 deviation processing 11 (S495) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S485 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit (S485: Yes), the special figure The 1-small hit flag 203me is set to ON (S10481), and the process shifts to S487. By setting the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, it is possible to easily determine that the small hit symbol should be stopped when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processes 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 122, S357) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment). Is.

In each of the processes S551 to S553 and S555 to S559 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S551 to S553 and S555 to S559 of (FIGS. 122 and S357) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 280, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S553, the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (see FIG. 272) is referred to. The fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations is read out (S560), and the process proceeds to S555. By reading the fluctuation pattern table with reference to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf, the fluctuation pattern can be made different according to the number of fluctuations after the jackpot, the game state, and the previous jackpot type, so that the fluctuation pattern is diversified. be able to. In the processing after S555, as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 122) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), the variation pattern is selected by referring to the read variation pattern table. Then, the process of setting the start of the selected fluctuation pattern is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the details of the game state update process (S393), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This game state update process (S393) is a process for updating the game state at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the game state update process (S393), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is in the time reduction (S2901). ). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S2901 (S2901: No), it is not necessary to update the gaming state (number of time reductions), so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S2901: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S2902), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter is executed. Set (S2903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h after subtraction has become 0 (S2904), and if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h has become 0 (S2904: Yes), the gaming state has been changed. Therefore, in order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the changed gaming state, the process proceeds to S2905. On the other hand, in the process of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h after subtraction is not 0 (S2904: No), there is no change in the gaming state, so this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203fa is on (S2905), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is on (S2905: Yes), the number of time reductions becomes 0 in the probability variation state. Since it means that the state has changed to the latent state, a state command indicating the latent state is set (S2906), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is off (S2905: No), it means that the number of time reductions has become 0 in the time reduction state and the normal state has been entered. The indicated state command is set (S2907), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 11 (S293) will be described. The first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIGS. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process of the first special symbol. This is a process for setting the stop display.

In each of the processes S851 to S855, S863, and S864 of the first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293), S851 of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIGS. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S855, S863, and S864 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 282, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 11 (S293) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc is set to off in the processing of S851. (S581: No). Move to processing. The details of the special drawing 1 disengagement stop processing (S10851) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283.

On the other hand, in the process of S581, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203 mc is set to ON (S581: Yes), then whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 is determined. Determine (S10852). In the process of S10852, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S10852: Yes), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped. -The process of S855 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S10853. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S10852: No), it means that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not executed, so the processing of S852 to S855 is performed. Is skipped and the process proceeds to S10853.

In the process of S10853, the start of the jackpot is set (S10853), and the data stored in the winning state storage area 203 mb is converted into data according to the current gaming state (that is, data indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot). It is updated (S10854), and then all the values of the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md, the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf, the probability variation flag 203fa, and the time saving counter 203h are reset (S10855). Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S10856), and the process proceeds to S863.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the details of the special figure 1 out-of-order stop process (S10851) executed in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 11 (see FIGS. 282 and S293) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S10851).

In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S10851), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is on (S3001), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is off. (S3001: No) means that the lottery result of this special symbol is a pure deviation (not a small hit), so that the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 The fluctuation stop at the out-of-order symbol is set (S3002), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is on (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0. (S3003). In the processing of S3003, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S3003: Yes), it means that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is being executed. The process for forcibly stopping the second special symbol when it comes off is executed. More specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to on (S3004), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is set (S3005), and the first symbol display device 37 In (S3006), the fluctuation stop at the out-of-order symbol is set for the second special symbol during the fluctuation display (S3006). Next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3003, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S3003: No), it means that the second special symbol is not in the fluctuation display. The process of S3007 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3008.

In the process of S3008, the start of the small hit of the first special symbol is set (S3008), and the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are set to off (S3008). 3009). Next, data indicating that a small hit is being made is set in the game state storage area 203 g (S3010), and the first special symbol being displayed in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing with the small hit symbol. After setting (S3011), this process ends.

By executing this special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 283), when a small hit of the first special symbol is obtained, the second special symbol is forcibly disengaged and fluctuating stop when the stop display of the small hit is displayed. Can be made to. Therefore, in particular, when the second special symbol makes a long fluctuation in the normal state, the long fluctuation can be easily ended only by winning a small hit with a high probability in the lottery of the first special symbol. ..

Next, the details of the second special symbol change start processing 11 (S298) will be described with reference to FIG. 284. The second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (FIGS. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In each of the processes S951 and S952 of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (S298), S951 and S952 of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (FIGS. 177 and S280) in the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284, in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing 11 (S298) in the eleventh embodiment, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON in the processing of S951, that is, that is, If it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S951: No), the processes of S953 to S957, S981 and S982 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S983 (S393) described later. The processes of S953 to S957, S981 and S982 are the first special symbol holding balls for each of the processes S351 to S355, S391 and S392 of the first special symbol variation start process 11 (FIGS. 277 and S294) described above. Number counter 203dd, value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 ( S392), the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), Since they are the same except that they are changed to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (see FIG. 284) in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is completed, the game state update process (FIGS. 281 and S393) described above is completed. ) Is executed (S983), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 11 (FIG. 284, S298), will be described. The second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (FIGS. 178 and S978) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is a process of the second special symbol. This is a process for executing a jackpot lottery.

In each of the processes S1051, S1058 to S1061 and S1071 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), S1051 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (FIGS. 178 and S978) of the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1058 to S1061 and S1071 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON in the process of S1071 (S1071). : Yes), out of the first random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)) for high probability, the hit random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S1081), and the process is shifted to S1083. do. On the other hand, in the process of S1071, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is not set to ON (S1071: No), among the random number 11 table 202ma per first for low probability (see FIG. 269 (a)). , The hit random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out (S1082), and the process proceeds to S1083. In the process of S1083, the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the big hit lottery is acquired based on the winning random number value read in the processes of S1081 and S1082 and the data of the execution area (S1083).

Further, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (see FIG. 285) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1058 that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the second special symbol The special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 for setting the variation display corresponding to the deviation of is executed (S1084), and this processing is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (S1084) will be described with reference to FIG. 286.

As shown in FIG. 286, in the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (S1084), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1331), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit, (S1331: Yes), special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to on (S1332). Next, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small hit (S1333), the small hit symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1334), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1331, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S1331: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 Is set (S1335), and this process is terminated. By executing this special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (see FIG. 286), an appropriate stop symbol can be set depending on whether the type of deviation is a pure deviation or a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), which is one of the processes in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (FIGS. 284 and S298), will be described. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 129, S956) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and fourth embodiment). Is.

In each of the processes S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256 and S1258 to S1260 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), the second special symbol in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256 and S1258 to S1260 of the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 129 and S956) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 287, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1251 that the special figure 2 lottery result is not a big hit ( S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1253.

Further, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (see FIG. 287) in the eleventh embodiment, after the process of S1253 is executed, the variation according to the number of variations is referred to by referring to the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (FIG. 271). The pattern table is read (S1281), and then the processes of S1255, S1256, S1258 to S1260 are executed to end this process.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 11 (S297) will be described with reference to FIG. 288. The second special symbol variation stop process 11 (S297) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIGS. 180, S283) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In each of the processes S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S1563 of the second special symbol variation stop process 11 (S297), the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 180, FIG. The same processes as those of S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S1563 of S283) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 288, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 11 (S297) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is off in the processing of S1551 (S1551). : No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 11 for displaying the stop display of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the disengagement is executed (S1596), and the process proceeds to S1562. The details of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described later with reference to FIG. 289.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1551 when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md is on (S1551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0 (S1551: Yes). S1591). In the processing of S1591 when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0 (S1591: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to on (S1592), and the first variation is being displayed. Each process of S1553, S1554 and S1505 for forcibly stopping the special symbol at the off symbol is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1593.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1591 when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S1591: No), it means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in fluctuation, and the first Since it is not necessary to forcibly stop the special symbol, the processing of S1592, S1553, S1554 and S1505 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S1593.

In the process of S1593, the start of the jackpot is set (S1593), and the data of the winning state storage area 203 mb is updated to the data corresponding to the current gaming state (data indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot) (S1594). Next, the values of the special figure 1 big hit flag 203 mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203 me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203 md, the probability change flag 203 fa, and the time saving counter 203 h are all reset (S1595), and the process proceeds to S1561.

Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described. The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 11 (S1596) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 7 (FIGS. 181, S1584) in the seventh embodiment described above, and the second special symbol is disengaged. This is a process for stopping at the corresponding stop symbol.

Of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 11 (S1596), the process of S1660 is the same as the process of S1660 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 7 (FIGS. 181 and S1584) in the seventh embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 289, in the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 11 (S1596) in the eleventh embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to on (S11601). FIG. 2 When it is determined that the small hit flag 203m is set to ON (S11601: Yes), then the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0, that is, the first special symbol changes. It is determined whether the display is in progress (S11602). In the process of S11602, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being performed (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0) (S11602: Yes), the first special symbol being changed is being displayed. Is removed and the process of forcibly stopping with a symbol is executed. Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to on (S11603), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to on is set (S11604). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed at the off symbol (S11605), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is set to 0 (S11606), and the process proceeds to S11607.

On the other hand, in the process of S11602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is 0 (S11602: No), since the first special symbol is not changing, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed. The processing of S11603 to S11606 for forcibly stopping is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S11607.

In the process of S11607, the start of the special figure 2 small hit is set (S11607), and the special figure 1 big hit flag 203 mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203 mf are set to off (S11608). Next, data indicating that a small hit is being made is set in the game state storage area 203 g (S11609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol (S11610), and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, the contents of the start-up process 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 290. This start-up process 11 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is a process executed to perform various initial settings based on.

In each of the start-up processes 11 of S1701 to S1714, the same processes as those of S1701 to S1714 of the start-up process (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed. NS.

Further, as shown in FIG. 290, in the start-up process 11 in the eleventh embodiment, after the process of S1703 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged in the on position (S1721). When it is determined in the process of S1721 that the setting key 110b is arranged in the on position (S1721: Yes), it means that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set. The set value control process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1722), and the process proceeds to the process of S1710. Details of this set value control process (S1722) will be described later with reference to FIG. 291.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the setting key is not in the on position (S1721: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1704.

Further, in the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 290) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1710, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S1723), and the process proceeds to the process of S1711.

Next, the content of the set value control process (S1722), which is one of the start-up processes 11 (FIG. 290), will be described with reference to FIG. 291.

As shown in FIG. 291, in the set value control process (S1722), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 265) is turned on (S3101), and if it is turned on (S3101: Yes). ), A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S3102). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S3103, S3104) of the RAM 203. In the RAM initialization process (S3103, S3104), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S3103), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S3104). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, a state command indicating the setting change state is set (S3105), and the process shifts to S3106.

In the process of S3106, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S3106). In the process of S3106, when it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S3106: Yes), the data in the set value storage area 203ma is updated by 1 (S3107), and the process of S3108 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3106, if it is determined that the setting switch is off (S3106: No), the process of S3107 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3108.

In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position (S3108). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position (S3108: Yes), this process ends as it is. That is, the setting change state is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 292). As a result, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which normal games can be played.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is not arranged at the off position (S3108: No), the process returns to the process of S3106. That is, each process of S3106 to S3108 is repeated until it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position in the process of S3108.

If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S3101: No), a payout return command is first transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S3109), and then the set value storage area is used. The data of 203 ma is read out (S3110). When the processing of S3110 is completed, next, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (S3111), a status command indicating the setting confirmation status is set (S3112), and the setting key 110b is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is arranged in the off position (S3113). If it is determined in the process of S3113 that the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position (S3113: Yes), this process ends as it is. In other words, it shifts to the playable state. On the other hand, in the process of S3113, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not arranged at the off position (S3113: No), the process of S3113 is repeatedly executed. That is, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is placed in the off position.

By executing this set value control process (see FIG. 291), the set value can be changed according to the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. Further, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is arranged in the off position.

Next, the details of the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 292. The jackpot control process 11 (S1831) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (FIGS. 56, S1804) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and performs various controls during the jackpot game. It is a process to be performed.

Among the jackpot control processes 11 (S1831), in each of the processes S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to S1918, S1901 to S1912 and S1901 to S1912 of the jackpot control processes (FIGS. 56 and S1804) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1916 to S1918 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 292, in the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1912 that the current timing is the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the winning time The data in the state storage area 203 mb is read (S1991), and the time reduction counter 203h and the probability change flag 203fa are updated according to the game state (game state at the time of winning the jackpot) corresponding to the read data and the current jackpot type. Then (S1992), the process proceeds to S1916. By executing this jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 292), the gaming state after the jackpot ends can be appropriately set according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 296. First, the contents of the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 293. This command determination process 11 (S4131) is a process to be executed in place of the command determination process 7 (FIGS. 183 and S4192) in the seventh embodiment described above, and is controlled according to the type of command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for performing.

In each of the command determination processes 11 (S4131) excluding the process of S4241, the same processes as those of the command determination processes 7 (FIGS. 183 and S4192) in the seventh embodiment except for the process of S4322, respectively. Is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 293, in the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has been received in the process of S4231 (S4231: Yes), the status command is notified. The state command reception process 11 for performing control according to the game state is executed (S4241), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command process 11 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. 294. This state command receiving process 11 (S4241) is a process executed in place of the state command receiving process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4322)) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the status command reception processing 11 (S4141), the processing of S4509 is the same as the processing of S4509 of the status command reception processing (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4322)) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 294, in the state command receiving process 11 (S4241) in the eleventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the setting change state (S4511), and the setting is made. If it is determined that the command indicates the change state (S4511: Yes), the display command corresponding to the setting change screen is set (S4512), and the process proceeds to S4509.

On the other hand, in the process of S4511, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the setting change state (S4511: No), then it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the setting confirmation state. (S4513). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the setting confirmation status (S4513: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting confirmation screen is set (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4509.

On the other hand, in the process of S4513, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4513: No). S4515). If it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4515: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4515 that there is a change in the game state (S4515: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S4516), and the process proceeds to S4509. ..

Next, the details of the variation display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 295. The variation display setting process 11 (S4132) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) in the seventh embodiment described above.

In each of the variable display setting processes 11 (S4132) except S5261, the same processes as those of the variable display setting process 7 (FIGS. 187 and S4153) except S5232 in the seventh embodiment are executed. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 295, in the variation display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S5202, the variation display mode according to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command received this time. The effect mode setting process 11 for setting the above is executed (S5261), and the process proceeds to the process of S5233. The details of the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. The effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process (FIGS. 188 and S5232) in the seventh embodiment described above.

Of the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261), the processes S8201, S8207, and S8208 are the same as the processes S8201, S8207, and S8208 of the effect mode setting process (FIGS. 188 and S5232) in the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 296, in the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S8201: No), The effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8281), and the process proceeds to S8208.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201 when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is out of alignment and is a special reach variation (S8282). In the process of S8282, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is out of alignment and is not a special reach variation (S8282: No), the process is shifted to S8207. On the other hand, in the processing of S8282, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is out of alignment and it is a special reach fluctuation (S8282: Yes), after the setting is changed (after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation), the number of fluctuations is not a big hit. Means that is a multiple of 50, and since it is the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma (see FIG. 275) is read out (S8283), and the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma (see FIG. 275) is read out. ), The effect mode accompanied by the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter is determined (S8284), and the process proceeds to S8208.

By executing this effect mode setting process 11 (see FIG. 296), it is possible to infer the setting from the content every time the number of fluctuations after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50 (each effect mode for each set value). Since the setting suggestion effect can be executed, it is possible to remind the player to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 until it is elected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 is arbitrary (for example, by performing a predetermined operation (setting change operation) by a clerk in the hall or the like outside business hours or the like. It is configured so that it can be set to any one of the six types of jackpot probabilities. The higher the jackpot probability setting (high setting), the easier it is to win the jackpot in both the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol) and the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol), so the normal state continues for a long period of time. On the other hand, it becomes difficult to finish (it becomes difficult for addiction to occur), but it becomes easy to end the most advantageous latent probability state in a relatively short period of time (in the latent probability state, it becomes easy to set another game state by winning a big hit). On the other hand, the lower the jackpot probability is set (low setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a long period of time (more likely to be addicted), but the more advantageous latent state is likely to continue for a relatively long period of time. The total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game in the latent state tends to increase. In other words, depending on the jackpot probability (probability), the gameplay (the unfavorable state and the advantageous game state are likely to end in a relatively short period of time, and the unfavorable game state and the advantageous game state are both relatively long periods. Since it is possible to make the game playability that is easy to continue different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured so that it is always set to the normal state by performing the setting change operation (the setting of the RAM 203 is initialized by the RAM clear operation), and then the setting is made. Only in the normal state of transition after the change (after the RAM clear operation), a specific type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the establishment of the specific condition. That is, every time the number of lottery of the special symbol after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation) becomes a multiple of 50, the variation time is 25 seconds off and the special reach variation is selected. With this configuration, was the setting change operation executed according to the variation type of the variation pattern that is executed when a specific condition is satisfied (the number of lottery of special symbols is a multiple of 50) after the power is turned on? Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is used, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on until a specific condition is satisfied. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the effect mode (variation pattern effect) during the execution of the special reach variation is set according to the type of the third symbol (number attached to the third symbol) when the reach occurs. It is configured so that the set values that have been set can be suggested. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game when the reach effect of the effect mode that is easy to be executed at a high setting is executed. Further, when the effect mode of the content suggesting the high setting is not executed in the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the person want to confirm the setting suggestion effect again. That is, since the lottery of the special symbol can be made to be executed 50 times, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are separately provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be deleted so that the setting can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, each time the setting key 110b is rotated 60 degrees, the setting may be switched in the order of 1 → 2 → ... → 6. Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out from the keyhole portion to return to a state in which normal gaming is possible. With such a configuration, the configuration of the setting changing mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol is configured to be common to all settings, but is limited to this. Instead, the ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be different for each setting. More specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is made different according to the set value as in the eleventh embodiment described above, while the jackpot probability in the high probability state is constant regardless of the set value (for example). , 1/90). With this configuration, the ease of addiction in the high probability state can be made common regardless of the setting, so that the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, since the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand playability that the higher the setting is, the more advantageous it is in all aspects. Further, for example, the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be different between the odd number setting (settings 1, 3, 5) and the even number setting (settings 2, 4, 6). Specifically, for example, in the odd number setting, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is low (for example, 1/100), while in the even number setting, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is high (for example, 1/70). You may. With this configuration, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the game playability can be greatly different depending on the setting. Further, in this case, as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the even-numbered setting has a higher jackpot probability than the odd-numbered setting, and the setting is higher in the odd-numbered setting and in the even-numbered setting. It may be configured so that the jackpot probability is higher. With this configuration, the playability can be greatly different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, it is difficult for the unfavorable normal state to continue for a long time in the even number setting, but it is difficult for the latent state to continue for a long time. Is easy to continue for a long time, but since the latent state is easy to continue for a long time, it is difficult to get hooked So to speak, it is possible to realize playability like rough waves. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, since it is possible to select an appropriate setting according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved. Further, for example, only setting 6, which is the highest setting, may be configured so that the playability is significantly changed with respect to other settings. Specifically, for example, for settings 1 to 5, the jackpot probability in the eleventh embodiment described above is adopted, while only setting 6 has an extremely high jackpot probability (for example, a probability that is twice or more that of setting 5). ) May be set. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol may be set to 1/100, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol may be set to 1/30. With this configuration, the player can easily determine whether or not the setting is 6 in a relatively short game from the winning rate of the jackpot. Therefore, since the player who is convinced that the setting 6 is set can play the game for a long time, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, by making it easy to determine whether or not the setting is 6, when the setting 6 is set, the hole uses the setting 6 which is the highest setting (that is, the most advantageous for the player). Can be made known to the player. Therefore, the reputation of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, a part of the probability variation jackpot (when the jackpot is D11, E11, I11) is configured so that the probability variation state in which the number of time reductions is 100 is set after the jackpot ends, and in the probability variation state. It was configured to shift to the most advantageous latent state when the time reduction number of 100 times has passed (they have been continuously missed in the lottery of 100 special symbols). In other words, in a specific game state (probability change state), it shifts to an advantageous state by continuously losing (lottery result different from the jackpot) over a specific number of times (100 times) of special symbol lottery. By configuring it, the gameplay that becomes more advantageous as the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is lower (that is, the lower the setting) is realized, but the gameplay that becomes more advantageous as the jackpot probability is lower is realized. The configuration for doing so is not limited to this. For example, the specification is such that the probability variation state of the special symbol is terminated based on the execution of the lottery of the special symbol a specific number of times (for example, 100 times), and the latent probability state is the most disadvantageous state (even if right-handed). 1) It is difficult to execute the lottery of special symbols and the lottery of 2 special symbols), and it shifts to the normal state, which is relatively advantageous when the lottery of special symbols continues to be missed in the latent state. It may be configured to do so. That is, in the latent state, the number of rounds is small even if the jackpot is won, and most of the jackpot types are set again after the jackpot ends, while the jackpot ends when the jackpot is won in the normal state. It may be configured so that most of the jackpot types are set to an advantageous probability change state later. Then, in the probabilistic state, it is easy to win the jackpot with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and it is configured so that the probabilistic state can be easily set again even after the jackpot ends, and the transition to an advantageous probabilistic state can be achieved. You may adopt the specification that makes one goal play a game. Even in this specification, the lower the jackpot probability in the latent probability state, the easier it is to shift to a relatively advantageous normal state, and as a result, it is easier to shift to the most advantageous probability change state, so that the jackpot probability is low (that is,). , The lower the setting), the higher the degree of advantage can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In this case, if the jackpot probability is low, it is difficult to win a jackpot in a normal state with a high degree of advantage, and there is a high possibility that the probability variation number (specific number of times) will end without becoming a jackpot in an advantageous probability variation state. Therefore, in a high setting with a high jackpot probability, the latent state and the disadvantageous jackpot are likely to be repeated, but if it is possible to shift to the normal state, it is possible to win the jackpot with a relatively small number of lottery times. In the probabilistic state, it is possible to realize a playability in which the jackpot and the probabilistic state are likely to be repeated more times. In this way, since the playability can be different between the low setting and the high setting, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the disengagement special reach fluctuation can be executed only in the normal state set after the setting is changed (after the RAM clear operation), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the normal state set under conditions other than after the setting is changed (after the RAM clear operation), the probability of drawing a special symbol becomes a multiple of a specific number (50 times), and the probability is relatively low (for example, 1). By configuring so that the special reach variation is executed with a probability of / 10), the setting suggestion effect may be executed even in a normal state other than after the setting is changed. With this configuration, even in the normal state set under conditions other than after the setting change, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the number of lottery is a multiple of a specific number of times (50 times). The operating rate of the machine 10 can be improved. Also, instead of making the selection probability of the special reach variation different, for example, the period in which the special reach variation is selected is made longer than the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation) (for example, a special symbol). (Every time the number of lottery is a multiple of 100). Further, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the common fluctuation pattern scenario regardless of whether or not the setting has been changed. That is, even in the normal state other than after the setting change, the special reach fluctuation is executed every time the number of lottery becomes a multiple of 50, and the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of lottery becomes a multiple of 50. It may be configured to obtain. With such a configuration, the operating rate in an unfavorable normal state can be further improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the RAM clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the RAM clearing table 202me4 is displayed while the normal state continues regardless of whether or not the setting change state is entered. It was configured to refer to and determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, even if the setting is not changed, if the RAM clear operation is performed, the special reach fluctuation is executed every time the number of lottery of the special symbol becomes a multiple of 50, and the setting suggestion effect is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed every time the number of lottery of special symbols becomes a multiple of 50 in the subsequent normal state only when the setting is changed when the power is turned on. With this configuration, it is easier to check whether or not the setting has been changed because the special reach fluctuation is executed and the setting suggestion effect is executed only when the clerk in the hall is actually performing the setting change operation. Can be identified by the player.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the special reach variation is executed, the set value is suggested by the number attached to the third symbol when the reach occurs as the variation pattern effect. , It is not always necessary to suggest the set value by the production. For example, it may be configured to execute a variation pattern effect of an effect mode that can only suggest whether or not it is a special reach variation. That is, even if the off-special reach variation is determined, the set value may not be suggested from the effect mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to grasp the set value on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and it appears only when the fluctuation type of the out-of-order special reach fluctuation is notified (or only in the case of the out-of-order special reach fluctuation). It is possible to reduce the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 side because the effect of (easy-to-use mode) may be executed. Further, since the setting is suggested, the player may think that the setting is low, and it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from being reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern of the special reach variation is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The voice lamp control device 113 may simply be configured to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1% ratio) when determining the effect mode of the variation pattern effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a special reach variation, and a common variation pattern table can be used in the normal state, so that the number of variation pattern tables can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the setting change state, the setting suggestion effect is executed every 50 times when the special symbol lottery is performed in the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation). It was configured to do (a special reach variation is selected), but it is not limited to this. For example, when the out-of-order special reach variation is selected, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect may be different. That is, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect on the voice lamp control device 113 side when the disengagement special reach fluctuation is notified may be different depending on the set value. Alternatively, by making the fluctuation pattern selection table referenced in the normal state after the RAM clear operation different for each set value, the special reach fluctuation is selected when the number of fluctuations becomes a multiple of 50 according to the set value. The ratio itself may be different. More specifically, for example, in a multiple of 50, the higher the setting, the easier it is to select a variation pattern other than the special reach variation (the setting suggestion effect is less likely to be executed). With this configuration, when the number of lottery of special symbols is a multiple of 50, but the special reach fluctuation is not executed (the setting suggestion effect is not executed), the expectation for the high setting is expected. The feeling can be improved. Further, for example, by making the fluctuation pattern selection table referenced in the normal state after the RAM clear operation different for each set value, a special reach fluctuation is executed according to the set value (setting suggestion effect is executed). ) The cycle may be different. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to how many fluctuations the special reach fluctuation is executed, so that the game can be actively started from the state where the jackpot is 0 times. can. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is also cleared to the initial value. It is not limited to. For example, the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be configured not to be cleared even if the RAM clear operation is performed. In other words, the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be configured so that it can be updated only while the setting key 110b is arranged in the on position. With this configuration, if the hall side desires to perform the RAM clear operation, although the setting is not desired to be changed, the desire can be fulfilled, so that the convenience of the hall can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the right variable winning device 1650 which can win a prize during the small hit game, and when a big hit is made in the lottery of the special symbol, The variable winning device 650, which enables winning in each round of the jackpot, is provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 650 may be configured to be able to enter a ball regardless of whether the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit. With this configuration, the right variable winning device 1650 can be deleted, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the degree of freedom in the gaming area can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the set value is configured to be suggested only by the setting suggestion effect. That is, when the number of lottery of the special symbol is a multiple of 50 and the fluctuation pattern of the special reach fluctuation is set in the normal state after the setting change, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the fluctuation pattern production in the special reach fluctuation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the opening effect and the ending effect of the jackpot, it may be configured to suggest the setting. In this case, the type (selection ratio) of the characters appearing on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect and the ending effect may be different for each set value. Further, for example, an advantageous game state is displayed when the advantageous game state is shifted to the advantageous game state (consecutive villa mode A or the consecutive villa mode B) and then the advantageous game state is terminated to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode. The type of display mode of the display mode (so-called result display) indicating the game result in the game state may be different. Specifically, for example, as a title displayed according to the game result, a title of a type determined only according to the game result and a title of a type determined in consideration of a set value may be provided. good. With this configuration, the result display can be noticed at the end of the advantageous gaming state.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may also be configured to display a numerical value indicating a set value.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting, the more likely it is to be advantageous to the player (so-called opportunity allocation becomes higher), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, some settings may be configured so that the total degree of advantage is the same for some other settings. More specifically, for example, by adjusting the jackpot probability, the degree of advantage of the setting 1 and the setting 6 may be made equal to each other. That is, in setting 1, once the player shifts to the latent state, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the latent state is significantly increased as compared with other settings (for example, the height of the special symbol). By reducing the jackpot probability in the probability state to 1/200), even if the jackpot probability is low in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is more advantageous than the set values other than setting 6 (settings 2 to 5). It may be configured as follows. Further, in addition to this, the setting 2 and the setting 5 may be configured to have the same degree of advantage, and the setting 3 and the setting 4 may be configured to have the same degree of advantage, respectively. That is, the settings 1 and 6 may be configured to have the highest degree of advantage, and the settings 3 and 4 may be configured to have the lowest degree of advantage. That is, in settings 1 to 3, the lower the jackpot probability is, the more advantageous the game is (the main game is to increase the number of balls held by the small hit prize ball in the latent state), and the setting is made from setting 4. In No. 6, the game property may be configured so that the higher the jackpot probability is, the more advantageous the game property (the game property in which the number of balls held by the jackpot prize ball is mainly increased). With such a configuration, the difference in game playability for each setting can be made more remarkable, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in this case, whether the playability setting (settings 1 to 3) is set mainly to increase the number of balls held by the small hit prize ball in the latent state, or the large hit prize ball is used to hold the ball. It may be configured so that it is possible to notify the player whether or not the gameability setting (settings 4 to 6) is set, which mainly increases the number of players. More specifically, for example, in the demo display displayed when the game on the pachinko machine 10 has not been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or more, which game property is notified (for example, setting). If it is 1 to 3, the character "blow type" is displayed, and if the setting is 4 to 6, the character "knock type" is displayed). As a result, the player can start the game with the desired playability setting, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, in order to change the volume display displayed when the volume change operation for changing the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed instead of or in addition to the demo display screen, and the light intensity of various light emitting members such as LEDs. Even in the display mode such as the light amount display displayed when the light amount changing operation of the above is performed, the playability (whether it is a blow type or a steadily type) may be configured to be able to be notified. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm the playability at an arbitrary timing of the player by performing the volume change operation or the light amount change operation, so that the convenience of the player can be further improved. Further, the display mode on the ending screen of the jackpot and the result screen after the end of the latent state may be different depending on the playability. Specifically, for example, when the one-shot type game playability (settings 1 to 3) is set, the total number of prize balls acquired in the advantageous state is displayed in a more conspicuous manner, while the steadily type game. When the sex (settings 4 to 6) is set, the total number of jackpots won in the advantageous state may be displayed in a more conspicuous manner. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily visually recognize items that the player tends to pay more attention to for each playability, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, in this case, the setting value display device 110a may be configured to display the settings A, B, and C instead of the settings 1, 2, and 3. That is, the notation of the set value may be different depending on the playability. With this configuration, when the hall clerk changes or confirms the set value, the degree of advantage is not in the order of numbers (settings 3, 4 → 2, 5 → 1, 6). It is possible to prevent confusion due to (increasing).

In the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, the variation pattern table is determined by referring to the RAM clearing table 202me4 (see FIG. 271 (b)) until the first big hit is won (50 special symbols). The special reach fluctuation is executed every time the lottery is executed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern scenario may be set so that the normal 11 table 202me1 is switched to the referenced state by winning the small hit. In this case, the RAM clearing table 202me4 may be configured so that when a lottery result other than a big hit is obtained, the special reach variation is always executed. In other words, in the specification that wins a small hit with a high probability, after changing the setting, until the first small hit game (or big hit game) is executed, every time a special symbol lottery is executed, a special reach is executed every time. It may be configured to be. With this configuration, it is possible that the settings can be changed by simply executing one special symbol lottery on the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol lottery has not been executed even once after the opening of the hall. It is possible to determine whether or not there is sex. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall.

In the eleventh embodiment, only after the setting is changed, the special reach fluctuation is executed every time the lottery of 50 special symbols is executed. However, even in the normal state other than after the setting is changed, It may be configured so that the special reach variation is executed every time the lottery of 50 special symbols is executed. With this configuration, from the number of fluctuations at the end of the game on the previous day, the number of fluctuations for which the special reach will be set if the setting has not been changed is predicted, and the special reach will be missed at the predicted number of times. It is possible to realize a novel playability that the player can be convinced that there is a high possibility of changing the setting when is not executed.

In the eleventh embodiment, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed 50 times, the special reach variation is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the off-special reach variation may be configured to be executed only once. In other words, when the normal state is set, it is configured to set the number of lottery of special symbols until the special reach fluctuation is set, and when the setting is changed, 50 times is set, while other conditions. When the normal state is set in, it may be configured to set a number of times that is substantially impossible to digest, such as 65536 times. Then, after the special reach variation is set, it may be configured to set a number of times that is substantially impossible to digest, such as 65536 times. With this configuration, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the special reach is lost.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 306. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the jackpot probability can be set to any one of the settings of a plurality of stages (six stages), and the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. It was configured in.

In addition to this, in the twelfth embodiment, when a specific lottery result different from the jackpot is obtained in a predetermined gaming state, a period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player is formed. More specifically, the consecutive villa mode B ( It is possible to set a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a long fluctuation time when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed in the latent state). That is, by intensively executing the lottery of the second special symbol while the long variation of the first special symbol is being executed, the jackpot of the first special symbol, which has a relatively low degree of advantage, is not won. It is possible to form an advantageous period (chance zone) in which the jackpot of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be aimed at.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the small hit symbol becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the change of the first special symbol and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is discarded. It was configured so that it would not be displayed (stopped and displayed with an out-of-order symbol). With this configuration, if the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol (during the chance zone), the long fluctuation will be discarded (chance zone is forcibly terminated). It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to fully entertain the player in the chance zone once entered.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the 113 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the processing has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 11 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 297 and 298, a characteristic effect mode executed in the consecutive villa mode B (latent state) of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a display mode of a continuous disengagement effect executed when a lottery of the first special symbol is performed in the consecutive villa mode B of the twelfth embodiment. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the eleventh embodiment described above, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is configured to be a small hit or a big hit with a high probability (about 90%). ing. That is, it is configured so that the lottery of special symbols will be missed with a relatively low probability. In the twelfth embodiment, when this relatively low-probability deviation is continuous over a predetermined first number of times (for example, three consecutive deviations in the lottery of the first special symbol), the first number of times is said. It is configured to set a long fluctuation as an out-of-eye fluctuation (form a chance zone in which a lottery of an advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed). Further, even when the disengagement is continuous (for example, two consecutive disengagements) over the second number of times less than the first number of times, the second number of disengagements is performed at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%). It is configured to set long fluctuations (form a chance zone) as fluctuations. That is, the more consecutive the deviations of the first special symbol are, the easier it is to form the chance zone. Therefore, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of consecutive deviations of the first special symbol. The continuous disengagement effect described below is an effect mode executed to suggest (notify) the player the number of consecutive disengagements and whether or not to enter the chance zone.

First, with reference to FIG. 297, a display mode at the start of the above-mentioned continuous deviation effect will be described. This continuous loss effect is started when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery after the end of the big hit or the end of the small hit of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 297, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit adds the character SP to the top in the main display area Dm when the missed symbol of the first special symbol is stopped. The production of discovering the hill on which the flag FG was erected is executed. In addition, along with the effect of discovering this hill, the characters "Aim for further peaks" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display that suggests to the player the situation until the chance zone (super RUSH game) is executed is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the chance zone is started if the character 811 imitating a rabbit can climb the hill and reach the flag FG. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), two ladders, a ladder HG1 extending from the base to the middle and a ladder HG2 extending from the middle to the top, are hung on the hill discovered by the character 811. In addition, a jumping platform JD is installed at the foot of the hill. When the chance zone is started in the twelfth embodiment, the character 811 reaches the summit (flag FG) by climbing the ladder one by one, which requires two fluctuations, and the jumping platform JD is used for 1 One of the two patterns, one is to jump to the top at once due to fluctuations, and the other is to perform one of the two patterns. More specifically, in the case where the lottery for the first special symbol is missed for two consecutive times, if the fluctuation pattern for the second consecutive time is set to long fluctuation, the jumping platform JD is used to jump to the top at once. The production is executed and the start of the chance zone (Super RUSH) is notified. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is drawn for three consecutive misses and the second consecutive miss is not a long fluctuation, the effect of climbing the ladder HG1 that continues from the base to the middle during the second consecutive miss fluctuation. Is executed, and the effect of climbing the ladder HG2 that continues from the middle to the top is executed during the third consecutive deviation fluctuation, and the start of the chance zone (Super RUSH) is notified.

On the other hand, if the lottery for the first special symbol following the first loss was not missed (it was a small hit), as shown in FIG. 297 (b), the character 811 was displayed in the main display area Dm. Although he jumps toward the summit using the jumping platform JD, he cannot reach the summit and falls. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "failure ..." are displayed. With these production modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the deviations are not continuous and the player does not enter the chance zone.

FIG. 298 is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the first special symbol is drawn three times in a row in the consecutive villa mode B (RUSH) and the long variation of the first special symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 298, when the long variation of the first special symbol is started, the character 811 reaches the flag SP in the main display area Dm, and the effect of raising the flag SP and rejoicing is executed. In addition to this, the characters "Super RUSH rush !!" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds, and the remaining fluctuation time until the long fluctuation ends (that is, the remaining time until the chance zone ends). Time) countdown display is displayed. As a result, the player can easily confirm the end of the chance zone (Super RUSH) in which only the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability is different depending on the setting, while the small hit probability is common to all settings. And, as the lottery result of the special symbol, only three kinds of lottery results of big hit, small hit, and miss are provided. For this reason, the higher the setting, the lower the probability that the player will be out of the game, so that the possibility of entering the chance zone (consecutive loss) is reduced. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of shifting to the chance zone that is advantageous to the player, so when shifting to the consecutive villa mode B, the lower setting is more advantageous. It is possible to realize extremely special and novel playability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 to 301. Here, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is a random number 12 table per first instead of the random number 11 table 202ma per first with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 268 (a)). The point that 202na is provided, the point that the small hit random number 12 table 202nb is provided instead of the small hit random number 11 table 202mb, and the big hit type selection 12 table 202nd is provided instead of the big hit type selection 11 table 202md. The difference is that the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me.

First, with reference to FIG. 299 (a), the details of the random number 12 table 202na per first in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 299 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (a), the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment has the same special symbol state and set value as the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment. In association with this, the range of random number values (counter values) determined to be jackpots is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for setting 1, the range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first is set to "0 to 0". "204" is associated and defined, and for setting 2, "0 to 217" is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first, and for setting 3, it is defined. , "0 to 233" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first, and for setting 4, the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first is defined. As a range, "0 to 251" is associated and defined, and for setting 5, "0 to 311" is associated and defined as a range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first, and is set. With respect to 6, "0 to 409" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is The jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/210 (312/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 is. Is 1/160 (410/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 467" corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first. For setting 2, "0 to 498" is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first, and for setting 3, the first hit. "0 to 534" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1, and for setting 4, "0" is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 per first. ~ 575 ”is associated and defined, and for setting 5,“ 0 to 712 ”is associated with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random counter C1 and is defined with respect to the set value 6. Therefore, "0 to 935" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/140 (468/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/131 (499/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is The jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/123 (535/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/114 (576/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/92 (713/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 is Is 1/70 (936/65536). As in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state to the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability of the setting 5 and the setting 6 in the low probability state of the special symbol is mainly increased, and the jackpot probability in the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol is generally increased. I lowered it to. As a result, it is possible to relatively increase the probability of being missed in the lottery of the first special symbol and increase the execution frequency of the continuous missed effect. You can have more frequent expectations for the transition to. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the small hit random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 299 (b). FIG. 299 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (b), in the small hit random number 12 table 202nb, 58982 pieces of 936 to 59917 are set as random number values (values of the random number counter C1 per first) determined to be small hits of the first special symbol. Random number values (counter values) are specified in association with each other. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits is 58982, so the first special symbol lottery is small. The probability of winning is 1 / 1.11 (58982/65536). As described above, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state of the special symbol is 1/140 (setting 1) to 1/70 (setting 6). Therefore, the probability of losing in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state of the special symbol is 1 / 10.8 (setting 1) to 1 / 11.7 (setting 6). As described above, in the latent state, it becomes easier to set an advantageous chance zone as the number of deviations continues in the lottery of the first special symbol. And, the lower the setting, the lower the jackpot probability, and the higher the probability of losing. Therefore, in the latent state, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the lower setting makes it easier to enter the advantageous chance zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 299 (b), in the small hit random number 12 table 202nb, 64599 of 936 to 65534 is set as a random number value (value of the random number counter C1 per first) determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. Random number values (counter values) are specified in association with each other. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits is 64599, so it is small in the lottery of the first special symbol. The probability of winning is 1 / 1.01 (64599/65536). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won. However, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the consecutive villa mode B (latent state), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is distributed in the same manner as the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to be determined. Therefore, if the small hit of the first special symbol is first displayed as a stop during the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped due to the detachment. In other words, even if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, about half of them will be changed to a miss because the small hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. The chance to get a prize ball is lost by the small hit game of the design. In other words, in the consecutive villa mode B in the twelfth embodiment, the frequency of small hits of the second special symbol is about half as compared with the consecutive villa mode B (latent state) in the eleventh embodiment described above. (The frequency of winning prize balls is halved). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is lowered as a whole, and the small hit probability of the second special symbol is increased, so that the consecutive villa mode B (latent probability) in the eleventh embodiment is used. It is adjusted so that it is not too disadvantageous compared to the state).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the long variation of the first special symbol can be set when the lottery of the first special symbol continues to be missed. During this long fluctuation, there is no possibility that the small hit symbol (and big hit symbol) of the first special symbol will be stopped, so if the small hit of the second special symbol is won, it will definitely be based on the small hit winning. A small hit game can be executed. That is, during the long fluctuation (chance zone) of the first special symbol, the execution frequency of the small hit game of the second special symbol increases, and the acquisition frequency of the prize balls also increases, forming an extremely advantageous state. In addition, even if a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is controlled so as not to be discarded (it is not forcibly stopped by the outlier symbol), so that it is in an advantageous state (chance zone). ) Can be continued for a longer time. Further, as will be described in detail later, it is configured that a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous to the player than a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, the ratio at which the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B (latent state) is set (loops the consecutive villa mode B) after the jackpot ends in the jackpot of the second special symbol than the jackpot of the first special symbol. Is configured to be high. Therefore, in the chance zone where the lottery of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed (the lottery of the second special symbol is intensively executed), the loop rate of the consecutive villa mode B in the case of a big hit is also substantially improved. As a result, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode B, in order to shift to the chance zone, it is possible to realize an extremely special and novel playability in which the player expects continuous deviations. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300, the details of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 300 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment, six types of jackpots, "big hit A12" to "big hit F12", are defined as jackpot types of the first special symbol. On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three types of jackpot types, "big hit G12" to "big hit K12", are defined.

As shown in FIG. 300, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by associating the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2 with "big hit A12" as the jackpot type. ing. In this "big hit A12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the most advantageous latent state regardless of the game state at the time of winning (time reduction regardless of the game state). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), which is a type of jackpot (16 rounds (R) probability variation jackpot). This "big hit A12" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is also the most advantageous. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, one is the random number value (counter value) associated with the "big hit A12", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A12" is determined is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, "big hit B12" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "1 to 49". This "big hit B12" has 8 rounds of jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot, the probability change state of the special symbol is set (the probability change flag 203g is set to on). Is. When the "big hit B12" is won in the normal state and the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while in the time saving state and the probability changing state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. NS.

That is, if the "big hit B12" is won in the normal state and the latent state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state. In this probabilistic state, since the number of time reductions is set to 65536, the probabilistic state continues substantially until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the "big hit B12" is won in the time saving state and the probability change state, the number of time saving times is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B12" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when winning in the normal state and the latent state. On the other hand, if the player wins in a game state other than the normal state, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 49 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B12", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B12" is determined is 49% (49/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 59" with "big hit C12" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit C12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit (value of the time saving counter 203h). 65536 is set to, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), which is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variation jackpot).

That is, when the "big hit C12" is won, a probabilistic state that substantially continues until the next big hit is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "big hit C12" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C12", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C12" is determined is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "60 to 64" and "big hit D12" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit D12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit (value of the time saving counter 203h). 100 is set to, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to on). This is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variation jackpot). In addition, unlike the "big hit C12", in the "big hit D12", 100 is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h, so that the probability change state does not always continue until the next big hit. That is, if the lottery of the special symbol within 100 times after the end of the "big hit D12" does not result in a big hit, the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0 and the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D12" is a big hit type that tends to be more advantageous than the "big hit C12" in terms of the gaming state after the big hit ends. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 5 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D12", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit D12" is determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "65 to 84" and "big hit E12" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit E12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively disadvantageous time saving state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (value of the time saving counter 203h). Is set to 100 and the probability variation flag 203g is set to off). This is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot). Therefore, "big hit E12" is a big hit type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 20 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E12", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E12" is determined is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "85 to 99" and "big hit F12" as the jackpot type. This "big hit F12" has 8 rounds of big hit, and the state of the special symbol after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol (the probability variation flag 203g is set to off). (8 rounds normal jackpot). If the "big hit F12" is won in the normal state, 100 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit F12" is won in the game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h The value is set to 0. Therefore, if the "big hit F12" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit F12" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit type. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 15 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit F12", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit F12" is determined is 15% (15/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0-9", and the jackpot type is "big hit". "G12" is specified in association with each other. In this "big hit G12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to on). 16 rounds probable change jackpot). If the "big hit G12" is won in a game state other than the latent state, 65536 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit G12" is won in the latent state, the time saving counter is set. 0 is set to the value of 203h. Therefore, if the "big hit G12" is won in a game state other than the latent state, a probabilistic state that substantially continues until the next big hit is set, while if the "big hit G12" is won in the latent state, , Set to the most advantageous latent state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G12", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit G12" is determined is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "10 to 64" and "big hit H12" as the jackpot type. This "big hit H12" has 8 rounds of big hit, and the state of the special symbol after the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to on). 8 round probability change jackpot). If the "big hit H12" is won in a gaming state other than the latent state, 65536 is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h, while if the "big hit H12" is won in the latent state, the time saving counter is set. 0 is set to the value of 203h. Therefore, if the "big hit H12" is won in a gaming state other than the latent state, a probabilistic state that substantially continues until the next big hit is set, while if the "big hit H12" is won in the latent state, , Set to the most advantageous latent state. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 55 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit H12", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit H12" is determined is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "65 to 99" and "big hit K12" as the jackpot type. In this "big hit K12", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state of 100 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (time saving counter). The value of 203h is set to 100, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to off), which is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot). Therefore, the "big hit K12" is the most disadvantageous big hit type among the big hit types of the second special symbol in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 35 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit K12", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit K12" is determined is 35% (35/100).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained in the consecutive villa mode B (latent state), the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is more disadvantageous than the eleventh embodiment described above. It is configured to be. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the rate is 50% (that is, when either jackpot A11 or B11 is won). ), The game state after the big hit is set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B (latent state), but in the twelfth embodiment, the consecutive villa mode B (latent state) is set. In the meantime, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached, the advantageous consecutive villa mode B is set only at a rate of 1%. On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the advantageous consecutive villa mode B (latent state), the advantageous consecutive villa mode has a high probability (65% ratio). It is configured so that B is set. Therefore, in the latent state, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be a big hit than the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that a chance zone (long fluctuation period of the first special symbol) will be set in which the lottery of the special symbol can be executed biased to the lottery of the second special symbol. Since it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous latent state, the jackpot of the second special symbol is set to the advantageous latent state after the big hit is set higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, a chance zone in which the lottery of the special symbol can be executed biased to the lottery of the second special symbol is formed as an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the jackpot of the second special symbol to have a higher ratio of the probability variation jackpot (the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation state or the latent state after the jackpot ends) than the jackpot of the first special symbol. It may be configured so that the degree of advantage of the second special symbol becomes high.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 301. Although not shown here, the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment determines the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the jackpot. The 12 tables 202ne1 for normal use referred to for the purpose, and the 12 tables 202ne2 for time reduction / probability change referred to for determining the fluctuation pattern when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probability change state and the time reduction state, and the latent state. 12 tables 202ne3 for latency, which are referred to to determine the variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is executed, and the variation pattern is determined when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after clearing the RAM. It is composed of four types of data tables, a RAM clearing table 202ne4 that is referred to for the purpose. Of these four types of data tables, the normal 12 table 202ne1, the time saving / probability changing 12 table 202ne2, and the RAM clearing table 202ne4 are the normal 11 table 202me1 and the time saving / probability changing according to the eleventh embodiment described above, respectively. Since the same data as the 11 table 202me2 and the RAM clearing table 202me4 are specified, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

With reference to FIG. 301, the details of the latent probability 12 table 202ne3 constituting the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability 12 table 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 301, in the latent probability 12 table 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used regardless of the number of fluctuations after the hit and the small hit. A short fluctuation is defined as a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) with a value in the range of "0 to 149" in association with a short fluctuation per 2000 ms, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "150 to 198". As a fluctuation type, a long fluctuation per 5000 ms of the fluctuation time is defined in association with the fluctuation type.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time is configured to change according to the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit and the small hit. .. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of lottery of the first special symbol) after the end of the big hit and the small hit is 1, it depends on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (That is, for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take), the variation type is defined in association with the deviation short variation of the variation time of 1000 ms. Therefore, the chance zone (long fluctuation) is not set in the first (non-continuous) deviation in the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after hitting (big hit or small hit) is 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 158". On the other hand, the fluctuation type is defined by associating with the deviation short fluctuation of 1000 ms, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 value is in the range of "159 to 198", and the fluctuation type is the deviation super long fluctuation of 600,000 ms. It is specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation is two consecutive times in the latent state, the deviation ultra-long fluctuation is set at a rate of about 20% (40/199). That is, it is possible to form an advantageous state (chance zone) in which only the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after hitting (big hit or small hit) is 3 or more, the fluctuation time is 600,000 ms as the fluctuation type regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The extra long fluctuations are specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation is three or more consecutive times in the latent state, the deviation long fluctuation (chance zone) is always set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property that strongly desires the continuation of deviations, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the lower the setting, the higher the probability that the first special symbol will come off. Therefore, in the latent state, the lower the setting, the more advantageous (the chance zone is more likely to be set, and as a result, the second special symbol is advantageous. It is possible to realize a novel playability (it becomes easier to win a big hit). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" regardless of the number of fluctuations after the hit (big hit and small hit). Short fluctuations are defined in association with the fluctuation type (variation pattern) per 2000 ms for the range, and the fluctuation time is 5000 ms as the fluctuation type for the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "50 to 198". Long fluctuations in hitting are specified in association with each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149" regardless of the number of fluctuations after the hit (big hit and small hit). As a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern), short fluctuations per 2000 ms are defined in association with the range of "", and the fluctuation time as a fluctuation type for the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "150 to 198". However, long fluctuations per 5000 ms are specified in association with each other. In other words, the distribution is the same as when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation time is 1000 ms and the short fluctuation corresponds to the fluctuation type regardless of the number of fluctuations after the hit (big hit and small hit) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is specified with. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" regardless of the number of fluctuations after the hit (big hit and small hit). The fluctuation pattern) is defined by associating a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2000 ms, and a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198". Is stipulated. In other words, the distribution is the same as when a small hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery result other than the deviation is obtained in the latent probability state (that is, the state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the latent probability 12 table 202ne3), the first special symbol is displayed. And the second special symbol have a common correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to prevent only the disadvantageous first special fluctuation from continuing to be stopped first. In addition, the more consecutive the loss in the lottery of the first special symbol, the higher the ratio of the loss super long fluctuation (the chance zone where the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed) is set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes it more strongly expected that the deviation will be continuous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, in the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment, a continuous disconnection effect counter 223na is added to the configuration (see FIG. 174) of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (and the seventh embodiment) described above. It differs only in that it is.

The continuous disengagement effect counter 223na is a counter indicating the progress of the effect in the continuous disengagement effect (see FIGS. 297 (a), (b) and 298). The initial value of the continuous deviation effect counter 223na is set to 0, and the value is added and updated by 1 each time the deviation is continuously performed in the lottery of the first special symbol during the latent state (FIG. 306). See S8735 and S8741). When setting the effect mode of the continuous disengagement effect, the effect mode according to the value of the continuous disengagement effect counter 223na and the variation type is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 12 (S11595) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 detachment stop process 12 (S11595) in the twelfth embodiment. The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 12 (S11595) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the eleventh embodiment described above.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 12 (S11595), the process of S11602 to S11606 is deleted from the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 11 (FIGS. 289 and S1596) in the eleventh embodiment described above, S11608. The difference is that the process of S11611 is executed instead of the process of. That is, when the second special symbol is fluctuated and stopped by a small hit, even if the first special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuating first special symbol is not forcibly stopped by the disengaged symbol (the fluctuation display is continued as it is). ) Is different only in that it is configured as. By configuring so that the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol is not discarded (forced stop) when the 2nd special symbol becomes a small hit, the chance zone (displacement fluctuation of the 1st special symbol) becomes the 2nd special symbol. It is possible to prevent the player from being forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining time of the chance zone by winning only once in a small hit in the lottery.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306.

First, with reference to FIG. 304, the details of the effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIGS. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment described above.

Of the effect mode setting process 12 (S5271), in each process of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 to S8284, S8201, S8207, S8208 of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIGS. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment, respectively. , And the same processes as those of S8281 to S8284 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 304, in the effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), the present is latent. It is determined whether or not the state is certain (S8291). If it is determined that the current state is not in the latent state (S8291: No), the process proceeds to S8281. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not in the latent state (S8291: Yes), the first in the latent state. When the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the special figure 1 effect setting process for setting the effect mode is executed (S8292), and the process proceeds to the process of S8208. The details of the special drawing 1 effect setting process (S8292) will be described with reference to FIG. 305.

As shown in FIG. 305, in the special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S). S8701). In the processing of S8701, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701: Yes), the deviation effect setting process for setting the production mode of the continuous deviation effect (see FIG. 297). (S8702) to end this process. The details of the effect setting process (S8702) at the time of disconnection will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8701, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous deviation effect counter 223na is larger than 0. (S8703). In the process of S8783, when it is determined that the value of the continuous disengagement effect counter 223na is larger than 0 (S8703: Yes), the effect mode in which the arrival at the top of the hill fails is determined (S8704), and the continuous disengagement effect counter 223na is determined. The value of is reset to 0 (S8705), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8703, when it is determined that the value of the continuous deviation effect counter 223na is 0 (S8703: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8706), and then the effect mode is determined. It is determined whether or not the flag 223fi in Super RUSH is on (that is, in the chance zone) (S8707). If it is determined that the super RUSH middle flag 223fi is on (S8707: Yes), the super RUSH middle flag 223fi is set to off (S8708), and then this process ends. If it is determined that the flag 223fi in Super RUSH is off (S8707: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the details of the above-mentioned off-set effect setting process (S8702) will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S8702) at the time of disconnection in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 306, in the off-set effect setting process (S8702), first, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH middle flag 223fi is on (S8731). In the processing of S8731, when it is determined that the flag 223fi in Super RUSH is on (S8731: Yes), at least the previous fluctuation display is set to the out-of-order ultra-long fluctuation, and further, the out-of-order ultra-long fluctuation is set to this time as well. Since it means that the chance zones have been set (at least two consecutive chance zones), the effect mode indicating the addition of the super RUSH is determined (S8732), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8731, when it is determined that the super RUSH middle flag 223fi is off (S8731: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous disconnection effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733). When it is determined that the value of the continuous deviation effect counter 223na is 0 in the processing of S8733 (S8733: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the first variation of the continuous deviation effect (see FIG. 297 (a)) is determined. (S8734), 1 is added to the value of the continuous disconnection effect counter 223na (S8735), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the continuous deviation effect counter 223na is not 0 (S8733: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous deviation effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736). ). When it is determined that the value of the continuous off effect counter 223na is not 1 (2 or more) (S8736: No), the effect mode of climbing the second stage ladder and entering the super RUSH (chance zone) is set. (S8737), the process proceeds to S8742.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous deviation effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation and ultra-long fluctuation (S8738). ). If it is determined that this fluctuation is off and the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the ultra-long fluctuation (S8738: Yes), the production mode of entering the super RUSH (chance zone) by reaching the top of the hill at once with the jump stand It is determined (S8739), and the process proceeds to S8742. On the other hand, in the processing of S8738, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the ultra-long fluctuation (S8738: No), the effect mode of climbing the first ladder is determined (S8740). 1 is added to the value of the continuous disengagement effect counter 223na (S8741), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S8742, the value of the continuous disconnection effect counter 223na is reset, the flag 223fi in Super RUSH is set to ON (S8742), and this process is terminated. By executing this disengagement effect setting process (see FIG. 306), when the disengagement of the first special symbol is continuous, the effect mode of the continuous disengagement effect is preferably according to the number of consecutive times and the selected variation pattern. Can be set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the higher the setting, the lower the probability that the special symbol will come off, and then the first special symbol is drawn by lottery in an advantageous latent state. The configuration is such that a chance zone that is advantageous to the player is set when the player loses the game consecutively over the number of times. More specifically, as the first deviation fluctuation, the deviation ultra-long fluctuation with an extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to bias the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol during the execution of the extra-long fluctuation. In other words, in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability that a small hit will be won and a prize ball will be won, and if the big hit is won, the gaming state after the big hit will be the most advantageous latent probability again. It can be configured to be more likely to be set to a state. Therefore, in the latent state, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the lower the setting, the easier it is to set the chance zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost two times in a row in the latent state, the chance zone is set at a rate of 20%, and when the loss is three or more times in a row. Although it was configured to set the chance zone at a rate of 100%, the correspondence relationship between the number of consecutive deviations and the setting rate of the chance zone is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. In addition, a chance zone may be set even if the deviations are not continuous, or a certain percentage (for example, 50% or 50%) when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery regardless of the number of consecutive times. The chance zone may be set at a rate of 100%). With such a configuration, the appearance rate of the chance zone can be increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in the chance zone is executed, it is easy to select the jackpot type that is advantageous when the jackpot is won, and the small hit that is won with high probability. If you win, you can easily win the prize ball during the small hit game, but it is not limited to this, and the specifications are arbitrarily set within the range that is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol. be able to. Specifically, for example, the ratio of the probability variation jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot differs between the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol, and the proportion of the probability variation jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, 50%) may be configured to have a higher rate of probable change jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (for example, 80% or 100%). With this configuration, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a big hit will be obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol during the chance zone. Further, for example, regarding the type of jackpot, the lottery of the second special symbol is more disadvantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, the rate at which the advantageous consecutive villa mode B (latent state) is set is low. Or lower the rate of probabilistic jackpots). With this configuration, there is a high possibility that it will be disadvantageous to win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the chance zone, but it will be advantageous for the player by continuing to win the small hit, so the chance zone It is possible to realize a novel playability that the game can be played with the strong hope that it will not be a big hit.

In the twelfth embodiment, basically, when a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the lottery of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped by the off symbol, and the second special symbol is used. Only when a small hit is made, the first special symbol is configured to continue the variable display even while the variable display is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the change display of the first special symbol is being executed when the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped regardless of whether the jackpot is a big hit or a small hit, the execution is in progress. Continue the variable display without forcibly stopping (during the big hit game and the small hit game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed after the big hit game and the small hit game are completed. May be configured to restart). With this configuration, if a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the chance zone will continue even after the jackpot ends, so in particular, after the jackpot ends, it will be in an advantageous latent state again (consecutive villa mode B). ), You can continue to receive the benefits of the chance zone even after the jackpot ends. Therefore, since the superiority of the chance zone can be further enhanced, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game when the chance zone is set.

In the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous consecutive villa mode B (latent state), when the lottery of the first special symbol, which is relatively disadvantageous, is missed, only the lottery of the second special symbol, which is relatively advantageous, is performed. It was configured to form a chance zone that can be executed frequently, but the opportunity to set the chance zone is not limited to the outlier. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation (for example, setting it to 10 minutes), the execution of the jackpot fluctuation can be performed by the advantageous second special symbol. It may be formed as a chance zone in which only the lottery can be executed frequently. In this case, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the chance zone and the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed before the end of the chance zone (that is, the first special symbol). (If you do not forcibly change the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol to the off by stopping the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol), the jackpot of the first special symbol, which is relatively disadvantageous at the end of the chance zone, will start, so during the chance zone It is possible to realize playability that is strongly expected to be a big hit of an advantageous second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player during the chance zone. Further, a chance zone may be formed when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is missed, only the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed to form an advantageous chance zone. However, instead of or in addition to this, a long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) can be set even if the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is missed, so that it is relatively relatively It may be configured to form a period (pinch zone) in which only the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is executed. With such a configuration, the lower the setting, the easier it is for the chance zone and the pinch zone to appear. Therefore, the lower the setting, the more advantageous the game in the consecutive villa mode B can be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 327. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a specification in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (overlapping), and the first special symbol is in a latent state. The configuration is such that a chance zone can be set so that the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous in the case of a loss in the lottery, can be executed in a biased manner.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the specification that only one type of variable display can be executed, a period (chance zone) advantageous to the player is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. It was configured. More specifically, in the thirteenth embodiment, a jackpot (direct hit) executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a specific area (V area) provided at a predetermined position on the game board 13. ) Is provided with a jackpot (per V) that is executed based on the game ball entering (V winning), and if the game is missed by a special symbol lottery in a specific game state (time saving state). By implementing a specific game method during the deviation fluctuation, the ball entry rate (V winning rate) to the specific area (V area) is increased. With this configuration, as in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the lower the setting, the more the degree of advantage in a specific game state (time saving state) can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configurations of ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the above are partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The point is that the control process has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 12 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 307, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 307 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307, the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment is the first in the game board 13 with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 264) of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment). 3 A lottery device 6750 for executing a big hit lottery (feature lottery) by distributing the inflowing game ball to either a specific area (V area) or an out port is provided below the symbol display device 81. The point that the right variable winning device 1650, the right electric accessory 164 are deleted, and the second entry ball that is provided with the electric accessory 6400a in place of the right second entry port 645. The difference is that the mouth 6400 is provided.

The lottery device 6750 is in a state where a game ball can enter for a predetermined period when a small hit is made in a special symbol lottery (that is, a small hit attacker 6750a provided at the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750). (Opened), the game ball that entered while the ball can be entered enters the V winning opening 6750f1 provided inside the lottery device 6750, and the game ball enters the jackpot (per V). Win. Inside the lottery device 6750, one V winning opening and five out openings (out openings 6750f2 to 6750f6) are provided. Since the game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6750 always enters the V winning opening 6750f1 or any of the out openings, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning opening. The ratio (probability) of doing (V winning occurs) is 1/6.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the possibility of winning a small hit is 0, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (for example). , 98%) to win a small hit. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, by continuing to hit right, there is a high probability that a small hit will occur and the small hit attacker 6750a will be released. Therefore, it becomes easy to enter the V winning opening. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 even if the player hits right, so it is necessary to advance the game by hitting left. A left-handed game ball can enter the first entrance 64, but cannot enter the second entrance 6400. Therefore, in the normal state of a normal symbol, a small hit is won. There is no. In the thirteenth embodiment, only two types of gaming states, a normal state and a time saving state, are provided. That is, the high-probability state and the low-probability state of the special symbol are not provided, and the lottery probability (direct hit lottery probability) of the special symbol is always constant.

Next, the details of the lottery apparatus 6750 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 308. FIG. 308 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 308, one V winning opening 6750f1 and five normal V winning openings 6750f2 to 6750f6 are provided inside the lottery device 6750, and the distribution rotating body 6750f always rotates at a constant speed. Is provided. The game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 6750f enters one of one V winning opening and five out openings. Since the distribution rotating body 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until when the power is turned off, the timing of winning a small hit and the inside of the lottery device 6750 Depending on the rolling speed of the game ball in the above, it is possible to change which of the entry ports (one V winning opening and five out openings) provided in the distribution rotating body 6750f. That is, every time the game ball enters the inside of the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the entrances.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308, a small hit attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the front view of the lottery device 6750. The small hit attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) when the small hit is won. The game ball that has reached the small hit attacker 6750a from above during this opening period flows into the inside of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 308, the lottery device 6750 is provided with an induction flow path 6750b for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the distribution rotating body 6750f, and is one of the floor surfaces of the induction flow path 6750b. A ball discharge door 6750c for opening and closing the floor surface is provided in the portion. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c form one flow path, so that the game ball is moved to the downstream side of the ball discharge door 6750c. Can be made to flow down. On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls into the discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the distribution rotating body 6750f. Further, as shown in FIG. 308, the flowing game ball is temporarily stopped in the induction flow path 6750b on the downstream side of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c by about one game ball (induction flow path). A ball stopper 6750e capable of (closing a specific position of 6750b) is provided.

The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stop portion 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotating body 6750f in one small hit to a maximum of one. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotating body 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. 309. FIG. 309 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device 6750 in a state where both the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stop portion 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 309 (a), in the state where the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stop portion 6750e are closed, the game ball flowing into the inside of the lottery device 6750 passes through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c. Therefore, the flow is hindered by the ball stop portion 6750e, and the ball is stopped to the right of the ball stop portion 6750e. If the game ball further flows down the guide flow path 6750b while the game ball of 1 is stopped, the flow is hindered by the game ball that has already been stopped, and the game ball is moved to the right side of the stopped game ball. Be stopped. As described above, since the ball stop portion 6750e is arranged with a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, the ball stop portion 6750e enters the lottery device 6750 after the second one. The ball is parked on the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c.

FIG. 309 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while the game ball is stopped. As shown in FIG. 309 (b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the game balls other than the game balls parked on the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e fall into the discharge area 6750d, resulting in pachinko. It falls to the outside of the machine 10. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which only one game ball is parked inside the lottery device 6750. The ball stop portion 6750e is in a state where it can pass through the guide flow path 6750b by tilting to the left in the front view after 0.5 seconds have passed since the ball discharge door 6750c was opened. As a result, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can flow down toward the distribution rotating body 6750f. The game ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 6750b is dropped from the upper right direction of the front view toward the distribution rotating body 6750f with respect to the distribution rotating body 6750f, and is almost arranged on the right side of the front view at the time of the drop. Enter the ball into the mouth. By controlling in this way, it is possible to limit the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotating body 6750f in one small hit to a maximum of one, so that the probability of a big hit lottery using the lottery device 6750 (distribution). The ratio of distribution to the V winning opening by the rotating body 6750f) can be made constant.

Next, the details of the distribution rotating body 6750f will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a top view of the distribution rotating body 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189, the distribution rotating body 6750f is configured to have a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and six entry ports are arranged at the outer edge portion thereof. Since the distribution rotating body 6750f is provided with an inclination in the downward direction from the center toward the outer edge, the game ball arriving from above with respect to the vicinity of the center of the distribution rotating body 6750f is inclined toward the outer edge. It is distributed to any of the entrances provided on the outer edge portion along the above.

As shown in FIG. 310, the distribution rotating body 6750f is provided with one V winning opening having a substantially trapezoidal shape in the top view and five out openings having a substantially trapezoidal shape in the top view. That is, the V winning opening 6750f1 and the out opening 6750f2 to 6750f6 are arranged in order. As shown in FIG. 310, the distribution rotating body 6750f always has a constant speed (for example, 6 seconds) in the clockwise direction of the top view with the axis 6750fz as the rotation axis while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to continue to rotate at a rotation speed of one rotation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 311, each part of the lottery device 6750 (small hit attacker 6750a, ball stopper 6750e, and ball) in the case where a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the thirteenth embodiment. The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the discharge door 6750c) will be described. FIG. 311 is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of each part at the time of winning a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 311, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit attacker 6750a is released at the same time as the start of the small hit (the start of the small hit validity period). As shown in FIG. 311, the open state of the small hit attacker 6750a continues for 2 seconds and is closed after 2 seconds. After that, the small hit attacker 6750a is maintained in the closed state until the small hit is completed. If the game ball can be entered into the small hit attacker 6750a during the opening period of 2 seconds, the game ball is made to reach the distribution rotating body 6750f during the small hit valid period, and one of the balls is entered. A game ball can be put into the mouth.

Further, as shown in FIG. 311, the ball stop portion 6750e is maintained in a closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) from the start of the small hit until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, and 3.5 seconds have elapsed. From the time point (1.5 seconds after the small hit attacker 6750a is closed) to the end of the small hit, it is switched to the open state (the state where the induction flow path 6750b can flow down) and closed again at the end of the small hit. It can be switched to the state. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) from the start of the small hit until 3 seconds have passed, and at the time when 3 seconds have passed (the small hit attacker 6750a is closed). From the time when one second has passed) to the end of the small hit, the open state (see FIG. 309 (b)) is switched, and when the small hit ends, the closed state is switched again. That is, for 3 seconds after the start of the small hit, both the ball stop portion 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are in a closed state, so that all the game balls that have entered the inside of the lottery device 6750 are stopped. It is stopped in the induction flow path 6750b by the portion 6750e.

Further, when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stop portion 6750e closed, so that the ball discharge door 6750c is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e1. All the game balls other than the game balls of No. 1 fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c into the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, there is only one game ball parked inside the lottery device 6750. Then, since the ball stop portion 6750e is opened 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 is directed toward the distribution rotating body 6750f. Flow down. In this way, by opening the ball discharge door 6750c first and then opening the ball stop portion 6750e, two or more game balls are inside the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6750a. Even if the ball enters, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6750d until the ball stop portion 6750e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotating body 6750f in one small hit can be limited to one each time, the winning probability of the big hit in the small hit (probability that the game ball enters the V winning opening). ) Can always be constant (1/6).

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is 1. It is randomly set to any of 2 seconds, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds. Therefore, even if the fluctuation start timing (the timing of entering the second ball entry 6400) can be adjusted by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is not possible to adjust until the start timing of the small hit game. Since it becomes impossible (starts at any timing 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the small hit start timing that makes it easier to win a V prize from the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 6750f is set. It can be configured so that the game method of predicting and adjusting the launch timing of the game ball does not hold. In other words, the jackpot (per V) winning rate in the case of a small hit in a short time state can be made constant (1/6). Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 30 seconds regardless of the gaming state, the electric accessory 6400a is released only at the shortest interval of 30 seconds (second entry ball). Opportunity to enter the mouth 6400 is given only every 30 seconds). On the other hand, when the small hit is won at a rate of 98% in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds or less (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds). In other words, even if the validity period (6 seconds) of the small hit game is taken into consideration, the period required from the start of the lottery of 1 special symbol to the end of the small hit game is 9 seconds or less (normal symbol fluctuation time). (It will be less than the period), so in the short time state, it is basically difficult to store the reserved balls even if you continue to hit right. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, "0.5 seconds x 1 time" is set as the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a when the normal symbol hits in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is configured so that one game ball can only be inserted during the opening period based on the hit of the symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the situation where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, the fluctuation time is fixed to 1 second. That is, while the reserved ball exists, a new special symbol lottery is executed every 7 seconds (variation time 1 second + small hit game period 6 seconds). In this case, the timing at which the ball stop portion 6750e is opened and the game ball stopped inside the induction flow path 6750b heads for the distribution rotating body 6750f is also every 7 seconds. Here, as described above, since the distribution rotating body 6750f is configured to constantly rotate at a rotation speed of one revolution in 6 seconds while the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10. When the game ball heads for the distribution rotating body 6750f every 7 seconds, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 6750f about every 7/6 laps. Here, as described above, the distribution rotating body 6750f has six entry ports (V winning opening 6750f1, out openings 6750f2 to 6750f6) arranged at equal intervals, so that the game balls are played every 7/6 laps. When the ball reaches the distribution rotating body 6750f, the ball enters the ball entry port adjacent to the ball entry port that was distributed (entered) the previous time (about 7 seconds ago) in the rotation direction. do. Therefore, as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the game ball can be entered into the adjacent entry opening for each small hit change, so that the game ball can easily enter the V winning opening 6750f1. I can say. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, the long variation of the second special symbol is set so that the long variation of the second special symbol can be set during the long variation of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the maximum number of reserved balls (4) can be stored. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability that can make a deviation that is not so pleasing originally a big chance per V.

Next, the outline of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern (off long fluctuation) of a long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) is controlled to be set. However, during this period, it is possible to store up to (4) reserved balls with the second special symbol. That is, it is configured to set a variation time of a length that enables the lottery of the normal symbol to be executed at least four times or more when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed. As described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds, and the opening period at the time of hitting the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, during the long fluctuation, the lottery of the normal symbol can be executed about 5 times. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily store up to four reserved balls of the second special symbol, which is the maximum value, simply by continuously hitting the right side during the long deviation. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a change over time in the progress of the game after the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit in the chance zone (long fluctuation).

FIG. 312 (a) shows an example of the time-dependent change in the arrangement (rotation position) of the distribution rotating body 6750f immediately after the end of the chance zone. The numbers attached to FIG. 312A correspond to any of the six entry ports (V winning opening 6750f1, out opening 6750f2 to 6750f6), respectively. That is, the number "1" is adjacent to the first entrance (any of the six entrances), and the number "2" is adjacent to the first entrance in the rotation direction. The mouth, the number "3" is adjacent to the second entrance in the rotation direction, the third entrance is adjacent to the third entrance, and the number "4" is adjacent to the third entrance in the rotation direction. The number "5" is adjacent to the fourth entrance in the rotation direction, and the number "6" is in the rotation direction with respect to the fifth entrance. The adjacent sixth entrances are shown respectively. Note that FIG. 312 (a) shows, as the position (rotational position) of the distribution rotating body 6750f, the time-dependent change of the ball entry port into which the game ball dropped from the induction flow path 6750b can enter. Here, in FIG. 312 (a), in order to make the explanation easy to understand, a situation is illustrated in which the first ball entry port is arranged so that the ball can enter at the end timing of the chance zone. Since the rotation operation of the distribution rotating body 6750f is executed regardless of the end timing of the chance zone (the situation of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol), the end timing of the chance zone and the first entrance are always inserted. The timing of moving to the arrangement that allows the ball does not match.

As shown in FIG. 312 (a), the type of the ball entry port arranged at the position where the game ball can enter the distribution rotating body 6750f is switched every second. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), until 1 second elapses from the end of the chance zone, the game ball can enter the first entry port, and 2 seconds after 1 second elapses. Until the lapse of time, the game ball can enter the second entrance, and from 2 seconds to 3 seconds, the game ball can enter the third entrance. From the lapse of 3 seconds to the lapse of 4 seconds, the game ball can enter the 4th entrance, and from the lapse of 4 seconds to the lapse of 5 seconds, the game is played to the 5th entrance. The arrangement is such that the ball can enter the ball, and the game ball can enter the sixth entry port from the lapse of 5 seconds to the lapse of 6 seconds. After that, the ball entrances that are arranged so that the ball can be entered are switched one by one every second.

On the other hand, FIG. 312B is a diagram showing the transition of the game after the end of the long deviation (chance zone). If the reserved balls are accumulated until the end of the out-of-long fluctuation (during the chance zone), the small hit fluctuation will start at the end of the chance zone. As described above, the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is always set to 1 second in the situation where the reserved ball exists, so that the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed when 1 second elapses, and the small hit game. Is started. As described above in FIG. 311 in the small hit game of the thirteenth embodiment, the small hit attacker 6750a is opened for 2 seconds immediately after the start, and during the opening period, the ball first enters the lottery device 6750. The ball (the game ball stopped by the ball stop portion 6750e) is flowed down toward the distribution rotating body 6750f 3.5 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, the small hit attacker 6750a is released from 1 second to 3 seconds after the end of the chance zone, and the game ball is directed toward the distribution rotating body 6750f 4.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone. It is swept down. Here, since the flow period from the ball stop portion 6750e to the distribution rotating body 6750f takes 0.5 seconds to 1 second, it takes 5 seconds from the end of the chance zone to actually reach the distribution rotating body 6750f. It will be between the time when 5.5 seconds have passed. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 6750f in an arrangement in which the sixth entry port can enter the ball. Therefore, if the sixth entry port is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, a V winning occurs) and wins per V (V at the end of the small hit). On the other hand, if the sixth entrance is one of the out openings, no V prize will be generated and no V will be won. Note that FIG. 312 (b) illustrates the case where the sixth entry port is the out opening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 312 (b), if the V prize does not occur in the first small hit after the chance zone ends, after the small hit validity period has elapsed (6 seconds after the start of the small hit). At the same time, the variable display based on the second held ball held during the chance zone is started. That is, 7 seconds after the end of the chance zone, the fluctuation display based on the second reserved ball is started. If the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit (4) in the chance zone, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display based on the second reserved ball (variation display executed when there are two reserved balls) Is always set to 1 second. Therefore, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at 1 second (8 seconds after the end of the chance zone) after the start of the fluctuation, and the small hit game is started, and the small hit attacker 6750a is 2 seconds (end of the chance zone). It will be released (from 8 seconds later to 10 seconds later). Then, as a result of opening the ball stop portion 6750e when 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit (11.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone), the range of 12 to 12.5 seconds has passed after the end of the chance zone. The game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 6750f within. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 6750f in an arrangement in which the first ball entry port can enter the ball. Therefore, if the first entry port is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, a V winning occurs) and wins per V (V at the end of the small hit). On the other hand, if the first entrance is one of the out openings, no V prize will be generated and no V will be won. In addition, in FIG. 312B, the case where the first ball entry port is the out port is illustrated. In this way, in the second small hit game after the end of the chance zone, the ball enters in the direction of rotation with respect to the entry port (sixth entry port) entered in the first small hit game after the end of the chance zone. Enter the ball into the adjacent ball entry port (first ball entry port).

Then, in the small hit based on the third reserved ball held in the chance zone (the third small hit after the end of the chance zone), similarly, as shown in FIGS. 312 (a) and 312 (b), the second small hit. The game ball enters the ball entry port (second ball entry port) adjacent to the ball entry port (first ball entry port) that has entered the ball in the small hit game. Regarding the fourth reserved ball, since the reserved ball is 0 at the time of digestion of the reserved ball, any of 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds is randomly set as the fluctuation time, but 1 When the fluctuation time per second is set, the ball entry port (third ball entry port) adjacent to the ball entry port (second ball entry port) that entered the ball in the third small hit game is adjacent to the ball entry port (third ball entry port). When the ball enters the mouth) and a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, two in the rotation direction with respect to the ball entry port (second ball entry port) entered in the third small hit game. If the ball enters the ball entry port (fourth entry port) at a position advanced by a minute and a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set, the ball entry port (fourth entry port) entered in the third small hit game. The ball enters the ball entry port (fifth entry port) at a position three times ahead in the rotation direction with respect to the ball entry port (2 entry port).

In summary, by continuously executing right-handed hits in the chance zone, the reserved balls are accumulated to the maximum, and the game balls are entered into the small hit attacker 6750a during the opening period of the small hit game after the chance zone ends. By letting the ball enter the ball, the ball can almost certainly enter the sixth entry port, the first entry opening, the second entry opening, and any of the third to fifth entry openings. It is also possible to insert a game ball into the ball. That is, during the hold digestion after the end of the chance zone, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter four different entrances among the six entrances provided in the distribution rotating body 6750f. .. Therefore, the probability that a V prize will occur between the end of the chance zone and the digestion of all the reserved balls for the maximum number (4) accumulated during the chance zone is 4/6. When the small hit game is executed four times with the reserved ball being 0, the V winning rate is about 52% (1-5 / 6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6), so it is a chance zone. By setting, it is possible to form an advantageous situation in which the V winning rate is increased by 10% or more. If the normal symbol hit is started and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the hold digestion, the number of small hit games increases, so that the V winning rate is further increased. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to form an advantageous situation in which a V prize is more likely to occur than usual when the player loses the game in the time-saving state. It is possible to realize a novel playability of wishing to become. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, a characteristic effect in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed in the time saving state, the fluctuation time is controlled so as to be set to the missed long fluctuation of 5 minutes (300 seconds), and the missed long fluctuation is set. It is configured so that the maximum number of reserved balls can be stored during the execution of fluctuations. Then, by accumulating up to the maximum number of reserved balls, there is a high possibility that a V prize will occur in the small hit game executed between the end of the out-of-long fluctuation and the digestion of all the reserved balls ( It is configured to be 4/6 or more). FIG. 313 describes an effect mode (charge time effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of this off-long variation (during the chance zone).

FIG. 313 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the charge time effect executed when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 313 (a), when the off-long fluctuation is executed (enters the chance zone) and the charge time effect is executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit appears in the substantially central portion of the main display area Dm. A display mode in which the whole body begins to exert force with a rugged expression is displayed, and a display area in which the characters "Charge time rushes !!" is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape is formed above the character 811. In addition, a countdown display of the remaining period until the end of the charge time (chance zone) is also displayed in this display area. In the example of FIG. 313 (a), the state of the remaining 4 minutes and 56 seconds is illustrated, and the characters "remaining 4:56" are displayed in the display area. Further, an expectation display image KH having a vertically long substantially rectangular shape is displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to the character 811. The expected degree display image KH is a display area in which characters indicating the expected degree at which a V prize is generated in a small hit game for the number of reserved balls executed after the end of the chance zone is displayed, and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. It is configured so that the expected degree displayed increases as the number increases. FIG. 313 (a) illustrates a state in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, and the expected degree display image KH displays “expected degree 0/6”. Further, the characters "Right-handed to raise expectations !!" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds, and the small display area Ds1 formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds is the first. The number of reserved balls of the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous manner by numbers. With these display modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the expectation of a big hit is improved by hitting right.

FIG. 313 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a game ball enters the second entry port 6400a and the number of reserved balls increases during execution of the charge time effect. When a ball entering the second entry port 6400a is detected during the execution of the charge time effect, the character 811 is switched to an appearance mode in which the character 811 wears an aura OG (the surroundings emit light), and the character 811 is displayed on the upper left side. , An expectation-increasing image UG is formed in which the characters "UP !!" are displayed in a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape. Further, the expectation degree displayed on the expectation degree display image KH is increased by 1 to become "1/6". In addition, the number indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the small display area Ds1 is also updated. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the degree of expectation increases as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases. As the number of reserved balls increases, the range of the aura OG expands, and the expectation displayed on the expectation display image KH increases up to 4/6. By changing these display contents, the expectation for the small hit game executed after the end of the chance zone (charge time) can be further increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the display mode of the aura image OG and the expectation display image KH is simply changed according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. No. For example, each time the number of reserved balls increases, the look-ahead result may be determined, and the display mode may be determined in consideration of the determination result. More specifically, for example, when the look-ahead result is a small hit, the display mode of the aura image OG or the expectation display image KH is increased by one step, while when the look-ahead result is a big hit, the maximum The display mode may be set to correspond to the expected degree of (for example, 6/6). With this configuration, the game can be played by paying attention to the change in the display mode (suggested expectation) during the execution of the charge time effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Can be done.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 314 (a). FIG. 314 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment has a first random number table 202pa instead of the first random number 12 table 202na with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment described above. The point that the small hit random number 12 table 202nb is provided, the small hit random number 13 table 202pb is provided, and the second random number 13 table 202pc is provided instead of the second random number 7 table 202fc. The difference is that the jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd is provided in place of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd, and the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne. ..

First, with reference to FIG. 315 (a), the details of the random number 13 table 202pa per first in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315 (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the random number 13 table 202pa per first. As shown in FIG. 315 (a), in the first random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment, the value range of one type of first random number counter C1 is defined in association with each set value. There is. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is no low probability state or probability variation state of the special symbol, and the jackpot lottery (lottery of the special symbol) is always executed with a constant jackpot probability.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 315 (a), for setting 1, "0 to 204" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random counter C1. For setting 2, "0 to 217" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first per random counter C1, and for setting 3, the counter of the first per random counter C1. "0 to 233" is defined in association with the range of the value (random value), and "0 to 251" corresponds to the setting 4 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random counter C1. For setting 5, "0 to 311" is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first, and for setting 6, the first hit. "0 to 409" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is The jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/210 (312/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 is. Is 1/160 (410/65536).

Next, with reference to FIG. 315 (b), the details of the small hit random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 315 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315 (b), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is not associated with the first special symbol. Therefore, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0. On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "410-64634" is defined in association with the range of the counter value of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1 / 1.02 (64225/65536). Therefore. Taking the jackpot probability into consideration, the probability of losing in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/59 (setting 1) to 1/73 (setting 6). In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of entering the chance zone in the time saving state (the lottery of the special symbol will be missed and the long fluctuation will be set), so the time saving after the advantageous time saving state is set Until the lottery based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols held in the state is completed, the probability of winning per V is also higher in the low setting. Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, if a player wins a V, the gaming state after the end of the V is always set to an advantageous time saving state. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, the lower the setting, the longer (more times) the repetition of the time saving state and the jackpot is likely to continue. Therefore, in an advantageous time saving state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the setting is low, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the details of the second random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 315 (c). FIG. 315 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315 (c), in the second hit random number 13 table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment, a random number value (second) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. Only "0" is specified as the counter value of the hit random number counter C4). Therefore, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is 1/300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 315 (c), in the second hit random number 13 table 202pc, a random number value (second hit random number counter C4) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol "0 to 299" is specified as the counter value). Therefore, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is 1/1 (300/300). As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is configured to be extremely low. As a result, even if an attempt is made to execute a lottery for a second special symbol with a high probability of a small hit by hitting right in a normal state, it is difficult for the normal symbol to hit, and the game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6400. Because it becomes difficult, it can be configured so that it is more likely to be a loss than a left-handed strike. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed player is hit in a normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the details of the first type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The first hit type selection 13 table 202pd is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won, similarly to the first hit type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. be. FIG. 316A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first type selection 13 table 202pd.

As shown in FIG. 316 (a), the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment is a big hit when a big hit is made in a special symbol lottery (so-called "direct hit" occurs). When a big hit is made based on a direct hit table 202pd1 for specifying (determining) the type and a V winning (a game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 during a small hit game). A V-hit table 202pd2 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type is specified. First, the details of the direct hit table 202pd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 316 (b).

FIG. 316 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the direct hit table 202pd1. As shown in FIG. 316 (b), in the thirteenth embodiment, "big hit A13" and "big hit A13" are used as the big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained (a direct hit occurs) in the lottery of the first special symbol. There are two types of jackpots, "big hit B13". "Big hit A13" is a big hit type (4 rounds, which is a big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 4 and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of 5 times. .. On the other hand, in the "big hit B13", the number of rounds of the big hit is 4, and if the player wins in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the big hit ends, while if the player wins during the time saving state, the normal state is set again. It is a jackpot type (4 rounds normal jackpot) in which a time saving state of 5 times is given. Therefore, in the normal state, the "big hit A13" is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B13" because the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more advantageous. In the time saving state, regardless of which jackpot is won, the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, so that the degree of advantage is the same.

As shown in FIG. 316 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 64" and "big hit A13", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "65 to 99". Therefore, "big hit B13" is defined in association with each other. That is, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the "big hit A13" is determined at a rate of 65% (65/100), and the "big hit B13" is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 316 (b), the direct hit table 202pd1 is provided with "big hit C13" as a big hit type that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. This "big hit C13" has 12 jackpot rounds, and if the player wins in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the big hit ends, while if the player wins during the time saving state, the time is shortened. It is a jackpot type (4 rounds normal jackpot) that is given a time saving state of 5 times. If you win a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. 100% (100/100) "big hit C13" is determined.

Next, the details of the V-per-V table 202pd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 316 (c). As described above, the V-hit table 202pd2 identifies (selects) the type of jackpot to be executed based on the occurrence of V-winning in the small-hit game (the game ball has passed the V-winning switch 6500e3). Data is a specified data table. FIG. 316 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V-per table 202pd2. As shown in FIG. 316 (c), the V-hit table 202pd2 defines three types of jackpots: "big hit D13", "big hit E13", and "big hit F13".

As shown in FIG. 316 (c), "big hit D13" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". This "big hit D13" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 12 rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This "big hit D13" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the jackpot types and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is also advantageous. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit C7" is 50. The probability (ratio) that "big hit D13" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 50/100 (50%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 316 (c), the hit of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69" with the "big hit E13". This "big hit E13" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This "big hit E13" has the second largest number of rounds after "big hit C13" and "big hit D13", and the game state after the big hit is advantageous is a time saving state. Therefore, in terms of the number of rounds, "big hit C13" , It is a big hit type that is advantageous next to "Big hit D13". In addition, it is the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E13" is 20. The probability (ratio) that "big hit E13" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 20/100 (20%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 316 (c), the "big hit F13" is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" for the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit F13" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "big hit F13" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds, but is the most advantageous type of jackpot in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit F13" is 30. The probability (ratio) that "big hit F13" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 30/100 (30%).

As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won at a rate of about 98%, and a V prize is generated in one small hit game. The probability is 1/6. In addition, it is almost impossible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol unless the lottery of the second special symbol results in a relatively low probability of losing. Therefore, when the time saving state of 5 times is set, the small hit game is executed 5 times and the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol shifts to the normal state with 0, or the V prize is won within 5 times. In most cases, it is generated and hits V. The probability that a V prize will occur within 5 small hits executed in a time-saving state is about 59.8% (1-5 / 6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6). Therefore, basically, once the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won at a rate of about 59.8% (a rate of more than 60% when the direct hit is also taken into consideration). Then, if you win the second special symbol directly, or if you win the V, an advantageous time saving state will always be set after the big hit ends, so if you shift to the time saving state, at a rate of over 60%. Form an advantageous state that repeats the jackpot and the time saving state. Therefore, since the game can be performed with one goal of shifting to the time saving state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 317. Although not shown here, the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment is referred to for determining the variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. Table 202pe1 and 13 table 202pe2 for time saving, which is referred to to determine the fluctuation pattern when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the time saving state, and the lottery of the special symbol in the normal state after clearing the RAM (after changing the setting). It is composed of a RAM clearing table 202pe3, which is referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern when is executed. For convenience of explanation, first, the details of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 will be described.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 317, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit in the time saving 13 table 202pe, the fluctuation type (variation) with respect to the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of reserved balls. As a pattern), short fluctuations per 1000 ms of fluctuation time are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1000 ms is defined as a fluctuation type for the entire range of the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of reserved balls. There is. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state, the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms regardless of the lottery result.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the fluctuation time corresponds to the middle fluctuation of 5000 ms. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified in the range of "50 to 198", and the fluctuation time is specified in association with a long fluctuation per 10,000 ms. Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-long variation of the variation time of 300,000 ms is defined in association with the entire range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. Has been done. Therefore, if the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is missed in the time saving state, the 2nd special symbol will continue to fluctuate for 5 minutes, and during that time, a chance zone in which the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol can be stored is formed. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation time is configured to be variable according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, the fluctuation time as the fluctuation type is obtained with respect to the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 65". Is defined in association with a small hit variation A of 1000 ms, and a small hit variation B with a variation time of 2000 ms is specified as a variation type with respect to the range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "66 to 132". , The small hit variation C having a variation time of 3000 ms is defined as the variation type in association with the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "133 to 198". That is, the fluctuation time of 1 second, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the fluctuation time of 3 seconds are configured to be selected at a ratio of approximately 1: 1: 1. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls is 0, it is possible to configure the game method aiming at the small hit start timing at which it is easy to win a V from the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 6750f, so that the number of reserved balls is 0. The V winning rate in the state can be uniformly reduced to 1/6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is within the entire range that can be taken. On the other hand, the small hit variation A having a variation time of 1000 ms is defined in association with each other. For this reason, when the maximum number of reserved balls is accumulated in the chance zone, the fluctuation time is fixed to 1 second until the number of reserved balls becomes 0 (until 3 reserved balls are digested), so that the game is played in a small hit game. The interval at which the sphere reaches the distribution rotating body 6750f can be set to a fixed interval (7-second interval). As a result, for the distribution rotating body 6750f that makes one revolution in 6 seconds, until the reserved ball becomes 0, each small hit is adjacent to the entry port that was entered in the previous small hit. A game ball can be inserted into the ball mouth. That is, in the small hit game for the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make it difficult for the balls to enter the same entrances, so that the possibility of winning a V prize can be improved. Therefore, when the player is given the opportunity to move to the chance zone and collect the reserved balls, the expectation for the V prize can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Although not shown, in the thirteenth embodiment, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same except for the deviation even in the normal state. ing. Therefore, for example, even if a long fluctuation is set due to a loss in the lottery of the second special symbol executed with the number of time reductions remaining once, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is held during the long fluctuation. By accumulating, it is possible to execute a small hit game having a high V winning rate after the end of the long fluctuation (that is, after the end of the time saving state). That is, regardless of the timing of losing in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit game with a high V winning rate can be executed after the end of the chance zone, so that it is always lost until the time saving state ends. Can be expected. It should be noted that, in the normal state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, the fluctuation time is configured to be set to the missed short fluctuation of 1 second. This is because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low and the reserved ball of the second special symbol cannot be stored even if the deviation long fluctuation is executed when the deviation occurs in the normal state, so the lottery of the special symbol is executed. This is not the case, and the purpose is to prevent a long period of wasted time in which the reserved balls cannot be stored.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 314 (b). FIG. 314 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (b), the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment has a jackpot type with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above (see FIG. 268 (b)). The difference is that the storage area 203pa and the V passage flag 203pb are added. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, the probability change flag 203fa, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203mc, and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203md. The difference is that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are deleted. The deletion of these flags and counters is due to the deletion of the simultaneous fluctuation function and the probability change function.

The jackpot type storage area 203pa is for determining the jackpot type (type per V) that is set when the game ball that has won the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning opening 6750f1 during the execution of the small hit game. It is a storage area where the data of is stored. In the jackpot type storage area 203pa, when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored (FIG. 320). S36022). When the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 in the lottery device 6750, the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot type storage area 203pa is set at the end of the small hit (FIG. 324). (See S3311).

The V-passing flag 203pb is a flag indicating whether or not V winning has been detected during the small hit game. If the V-passing flag 203pb is on, it means that the V-winning has already been detected during the small hit game, and if it is off, it means that the V-winning has not been detected. The initial value of the V passage flag 203pb is set to off, and is set to on when a V winning is detected (see S3406 in FIG. 325). Further, at the end of the small hit when the V winning is detected, the start of the big hit according to the small hit type is set and then turned off (see S3312 in FIG. 324). With this V passing flag 203pb, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the big hit should be started at the end of the small hit game (that is, whether or not the V prize has occurred during the small hit game).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 318 to 325. First, the details of the special symbol variation processing 13 (S141) will be described with reference to FIG. 318. The special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIGS. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above, and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIGS. 276 and S121). This is a process for setting a variable display of a special symbol in the device 37.

Of the special symbol variation processing 13 (S141), in the processing of S251, the same processing as the processing of S251 of the special symbol variation processing 11 (FIGS. 276 and S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) is executed. Will be done.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (S141) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S251 that the present is not in the big hit or the small hit (S251: No), the first symbol display device. It is determined whether or not the display mode of 37 is changing (S10201), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10201: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd The value (number of hold times N1 of the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol) is acquired (S10202), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol hold ball counter 203dd is larger than 0. (S10203).

In the process of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S10203: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd The value (N1) of (N1) is subtracted by 1 (S10204), and the special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The special figure 1 reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as an external output process (S1801) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 322) described later. ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203dd from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol hold ball number of RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223c.

After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10205, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted (S10206). In the process of S10206, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the 1st special symbol hold ball number counter 203dd is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process proceeds to S10212.

On the other hand, in the process of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is 0 (S10203: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de (second). The number of holdings N2) of the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol is acquired (S10207). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is larger than 0 (S10208). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is not 0 (S10208: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203de is subtracted by 1 (S10209) and changed by calculation. A special figure 2 holding ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is set (S10210). The special figure 2 reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as an external output process (S1801) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 322) described later. ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203de from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol hold ball number of RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223c.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10210, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted by the same method as the process of S10206 (S10211).

In the process of S10212 executed after the process of S10206 or S10211, the special symbol variation start process 13 for starting the variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S10212), and this process is terminated. The details of the special symbol change start processing 13 (S10212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319.

In the process of S10201, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10201: Yes), the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time is updated (S10213), and the updated fluctuation time counter Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S10214: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10215), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10214, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S10214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10216). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 319. When the special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined.

After the processing of S10216 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S10217). If the result of this lottery is a big hit of a special symbol (S10217: Yes), the data corresponding to the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area 203 mb (S10218), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0. (S10219). Next, the start of the jackpot is set, the jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10225.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (including small hit) (S10217: No), is the value of the time reduction counter 203h larger than 0 (that is, the time reduction of the normal symbol)? (S10221), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S10221: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 and updated (S10222), and processing is performed. To S10223. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S10221 (S10221: No), the processing of S10222 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S10223.

In the processing of S10223, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S10223), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10223: Yes), the start of the small hit is started. The small hit start process for setting is executed (S10224), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S10223, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (S10223: No), the processing of S10224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10225. do.

In the process of S10225, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process is terminated (S10225). The stop command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 322) described later. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

By executing this special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 318), it can be configured to execute only one of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. In addition, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the special symbol variation start process 13 (S10212), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 13 (FIG. 318, S141), will be described. In this special symbol variation start processing 13 (S10212), first, the data stored in the execution area is acquired (S321), and among the acquired data in the execution area, the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the first value. The lottery result of the big hit lottery is acquired by referring to the random number 13 table 202pa per 1 (see FIG. 315, (a)) and the small hit random number 13 table 202pb (see FIG. 315, (b)) (S322). Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S322 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S323), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S323: Yes), the jackpot type. Data indicating the type of the jackpot this time is stored in the storage area 203pa (S324). Then, the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set according to the jackpot type this time (S325). In the process of S325, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type. Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S326). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S326, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current gaming state among the variation pattern selection 13 tables 202pe, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used. Determine the corresponding fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). When the process of S326 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S332.

On the other hand, in the processing of S323, when it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is not a big hit (S323: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery of the special symbol this time is a small hit (S327). ), When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S327: Yes), the display mode at the time of a small hit is set (S328). When the processing of S328 is completed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S329). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S329, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the combination of symbols indicating small hits. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current gaming state among the variation pattern selection 13 tables 202pe, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used. Determine the corresponding fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). When the process of S329 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S332.

On the other hand, in the processing of S327, if it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is not a small hit (S327: No), the display mode at the time of disengagement (disappearance symbol) is set (S330), and then, The fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S331). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S329, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current gaming state in the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the fluctuation is performed. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the type counter CS1 is determined. When the process of S331 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S332.

When any of the processes of S326, S329, and S331 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by any of the processes of S326, S329, and S331 is set (S332). ). Next, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern this time is set in the fluctuation time counter (S333). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in any of the processes of S325, S328, and S330 is set (S334). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are controlled by a voice lamp in the external output process (S1801) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 322) described later. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the processing of S334 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 318).

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the details of the above-mentioned small hit start processing (S10225) will be described. As described above, this small hit start process (S10225) is a process for starting a small hit when a small hit is obtained in a lottery of a special symbol. In this small hit start process (S10225), first, the operation scenario (see FIG. 311) of the lottery device 3750 in the small hit game is read out (S3601), and then the small hit type storage area 203pa of this time is obtained. Data indicating the jackpot type that is started when a V prize is generated in the above is stored (S3602). More specifically, in the processing of S3602, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot D13 (12 round time reduction jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type, and the first hit. If the value of the type counter C2 is within the range of "50 to 69", the jackpot E13 (8 round time reduction jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "70 to 99". If so, the jackpot F13 (4 round time reduction jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type. When the process of S3603 is completed, the start of the small hit is set and the main process is completed.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 13 (S142) will be described with reference to FIG. 321. This ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the normal symbol variation processing 13 (S142), in each of the processes S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118, and S1121, the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively, The same processes as those of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 321, in the ordinary symbol variation processing 13 (S142) in the thirteenth embodiment, after the processing of S1112 or S1113 is executed, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be 30 seconds (S1131). This fluctuation time of 30 seconds is a period of length that makes it difficult to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol even if the player continues to hit right in an advantageous time saving state. In other words, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to the gaming state so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol cannot be increased unless it is missed by the lottery of the special symbol and the long fluctuation is set. It is fixed in 30 seconds regardless. As a result, it is possible to give great joy to the player when the lottery of the second special symbol is missed during the time saving state.

Further, in the processing of S1118, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is not on (off), that is, the present is a low probability state of the normal symbol (S1118: No), the opening time of the electric accessory and The number of times is set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S1133). On the other hand, in the process of S1118, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are set to "0.5 seconds x 1 time" (S1118: Yes). S1132). This opening time of 0.5 seconds x 1 time makes it difficult to insert two or more game balls into the second entry port 6400 (a hold ball of the second special symbol is hit by one normal symbol). It is made up of lengths (which makes it difficult to obtain). After executing the process of S1132 or S1133, the process proceeds to the process of S1121.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the details of the main process 13 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The main process 13 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the main processes 13, the processes S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 are the same as the processes S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main process (FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 322, in the main process 13 in the thirteenth embodiment, after the process of S1803 is executed, the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is replaced. , The jackpot control process 13 is executed (S1841). The details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) will be described later with reference to FIG. 323. After the processing of S1841 is completed, the small hit control process for executing various controls during the execution of the small hit game is executed (S1842), and the process shifts to S1806. The details of this small hit control process (S1842) will be described later with reference to FIG. 324.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841), which is one process in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described. The jackpot control process 13 (S1841) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (FIGS. 56, S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is various types during the execution of the jackpot game. This is a process for executing control.

Among the jackpot control processes 13 (S1841), in each of the processes S1901 to S1912 and S1916-1918, S1901 to S1912 and S1901 to S1912 of the jackpot control processes (FIGS. 56 and S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1916-1918 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, in the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1912 that the current timing is the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the winning time The data of the state storage area 203 mb is read (S1991), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated according to the game state corresponding to the read data of the winning state storage area 203 mb and the current jackpot type (S1992). , S1916.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the contents of the small hit control process (S1842), which is one process in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described. In this small hit control process (S1842), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the small hit (S3301). In the process of S3301, when the start of the small hit is set in the small hit start process (see FIG. 320), it is determined that the start timing of the small hit is reached.

In the process of S3301, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit (S3301: Yes), the small hit opening command indicating the start of the small hit opening period is set (S3302), and the small hit flag 203dg is turned on. Is set to (S3303), the start of the operation scenario for small hits is set (S3304), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the small hit flag 203 deg is on (that is, whether the small hit is in progress) ( S3305), if it is determined that the small hit flag 203 deg is off (S3305: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203 deg is on (S3305: Yes), it means that the small hit game is being executed. Therefore, next, is it the end timing of the small hit (that is,? , Is it the end timing of the ending period?) (S3306), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S3305: Yes), the end of the small hit is stopped by turning off the small hit flag 203dg. Set (S3308). Next, if it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203pb is on (S3309) and if it is determined that the V-passing flag 203pb is on (S3309: Yes), the V prize has been detected in this small hit. Therefore, the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S3310), the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203pa is set (S3311), and the V passes. The flag 203pb is set to off (S3312), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3309, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3309: No), it means that the V winning is not detected, so that the jackpot game based on the V winning is set. Each process of S331 to S3312 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S3306, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S3306: No), the entry into the V winning opening 3750f1 is monitored, and when the entry is detected, the occurrence of the V winning is generated. The V passage detection process for storing is executed (S3307), and this process is terminated. By executing this small hit control process (see FIG. 324), the big hit game can be started only when a V prize is detected during the execution of the small hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the contents of the V passage detection process (S3307), which is one of the small hit control processes (FIGS. 324 and S1842), will be described. As described above, this V passage detection process (S3307) is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the V winning opening 3750f1 and storing the occurrence of the V winning when the entry is detected.

As shown in FIG. 325, in the V-passing detection process (S3307), first, it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203pb is on (S3401), and when it is determined that the V-passing flag 203pb is on (S3401). S3401: Yes), since it means that the entry (passage) to the V winning opening has already been detected and it is not necessary to monitor the entry to the V winning opening 3750f1, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not a ball (passing) to the V winning opening 3750f1 is detected (S3402), and the V winning is won. If it is determined that the ball entering (passing) to the mouth 3750f1 has not been detected (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a ball has been detected in the V winning opening 3750f1 in the processing of S3402 (S3402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning is in the valid period (S3403), and the valid period If it is outside (S3403: No), there is a possibility that the game ball has entered (passed) into the V winning opening 3750f1 due to fraudulent activity, etc., so set an error command (S3404) and perform this process. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the period is within the V valid period (S3403: Yes), the V pass command is set (S3405), and then the V pass flag 203 pb is set to ON (S3406). ), End this process.

By this V passing detection process, when a V winning occurs, the occurrence of the V winning can be memorized by setting the V passing flag 203pb to ON, so that the jackpot game is effective depending on the presence or absence of the V winning. Whether or not it is possible can be accurately determined.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 and 327. First, the contents of the variation display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 326. The variation display setting process 13 (S4161) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 11 (FIGS. 295 and S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above.

Of the variable display setting process 13 (S4161), the process of S5231 is the same as the process of S5231 of the variable display setting process 11 (FIGS. 295 and S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment). Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 326, in the variation display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5281). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5281: No), the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5285. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5281: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation count counter 223fc (S5231), and the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5282). Next, the effect mode setting process 13 for setting the effect mode according to the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is executed (S5283), the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5284), and S5285. Move to the processing of. The details of the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described later with reference to FIG. 327.

In the process of S5285, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5285), and if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not set to ON (S5285: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on (S5285: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S5286), and the display stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command. (S5287), this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described with reference to FIG. 327. The effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment described above.

In each of the effects S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 of the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283), S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327, in the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the current state is not the normal state in the process of S8201 (S8201: No), then this time. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern deviates and is a long fluctuation (S18201). In the process of S18201, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is out of alignment and is not a long variation (S18201: No), the process proceeds to the process of S8207. On the other hand, in the processing of S18201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is out of alignment and it is a long fluctuation (S18201: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the charge effect (see FIG. 313) is determined (S18202), and the processing of S8208 is performed. Move to. By executing the charge effect, the player can easily understand that the game should be performed with the aim of increasing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by hitting right during the chance zone (charge time). be able to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in a time saving state which is more advantageous than the normal state (the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), It was configured so that V prizes were generated at a rate of 1/6. When a V prize occurs, the big hit starts after the small hit ends, and the game state after the big hit ends becomes an advantageous time saving state again. Therefore, pay attention to whether or not the V prize occurs in the small hit game. You can play a game. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, if the player wins the game in a short time, a chance zone is formed in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored up to the maximum number. By continuously right-handing in the chance zone and accumulating the reserved balls to the maximum, a small hit game with a higher V winning rate than usual is executed, so we strongly hope that it will be out in a short time state. It is possible to realize a high level of playability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting (the higher the jackpot probability), the lower the probability of losing the game. Therefore, when the time is shortened, the lower setting becomes the chance zone. There is a high probability of migration. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage in the time saving state, so it is possible to realize extremely special and novel playability that makes you wish for a lower setting when shifting to the time saving state. can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed during the time saving state, the long deviation fluctuation with a long fluctuation time (5 minutes) is set, and only during the long deviation fluctuation. It was configured so that the reserved balls of the second special symbol could be stored, but the game balls were distributed to the V winning opening 6750f1 by the distribution device 6750 for the period during which the reserved balls of the second special symbol could be stored (that is, the distribution device 6750. The period of control so that it is easy to be used) is not limited to this. For example, even during the execution of the jackpot game, the reserved balls of the second special symbol may be easily accumulated. With such a configuration, a situation in which the player is likely to be assigned to the V winning opening 6750f1 immediately after the end of the big hit is likely to occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, for example, when a direct hit is won in a short time state, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the direct hit (for example, setting it to 5 minutes), a state in which a V prize is likely to occur after the end of the direct hit is formed. You may. In this case, the higher the setting, which makes it easier to win directly, the higher the degree of advantage, so that the player can be made to think that he / she wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 having a higher setting.

In the thirteenth embodiment, in a situation where one or more reserved balls with the second special symbol exist, each time the small hit game is executed, the game ball enters in the previous small hit (distribution rotating body). Set the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (set to 1 second) so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entry port adjacent to the ball entry port (sorted by 6750f) in the rotation direction. Although it was configured, it is not always necessary to set a fluctuation time that facilitates entry into the ball entry port adjacent to the ball in the direction of rotation. The behavior when the small hit game is continuously executed in the situation where the reserved balls are accumulated shall be arbitrarily determined within a range that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit game is executed the same number of times without holding. For example, even if a fluctuation time (for example, 7/6 seconds) is set, which makes it easier to enter the ball two adjacent ball openings in the rotation direction with respect to the ball entry port that entered the ball in the previous small hit. good.

In the thirteenth embodiment, in the lottery device 3750 that draws whether or not to make a big hit by the game ball that has entered, the possibility that a V prize will occur is increased as the setting becomes lower. It is not limited. For example, even if it is applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which a probability variation lottery device is provided to draw a lottery during a jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (whether the special symbol is in the low probability state or the probability variation state) is applied. good. Specifically, if at least one game ball that has entered the probability variation lottery device that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the jackpot game enters the V winning opening, the state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. May be set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, while it may be set to the low probability state of the special symbol when the V prize does not occur during the jackpot game. Then, the lower the setting, the lower the jackpot probability, but the percentage of jackpot types in which the probability variation lottery device is operated in an operation pattern in which V winning is likely to occur may be high. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 14th embodiment, a chance zone (long fluctuation) that facilitates the formation of a situation in which a V prize is likely to occur in a small hit game (a state in which the reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit value) when the player loses the position in the time saving state. It was configured to set, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the normal state, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured to be able to win a small hit with a lower probability (for example, a probability of 1/100) than the lottery of the second special symbol, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be configured to form a chance zone based on. Specifically, for example, when two consecutive small hits are won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is configured to be extremely long, and right-handed strikes are performed during that time during the time saving state. It may be configured so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored like the set chance zone. With this configuration, even if a V prize does not occur in the small hit game of the first special symbol, if a small hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery after the end of the small hit game, the V prize will be awarded. Since it is possible to obtain a chance that it is likely to occur, it is possible to pay attention to the result of the first special symbol lottery after the end of the small hit and to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 328 to 363. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment described above, a jackpot lottery for a special symbol and a lottery for determining a variation pattern for showing the result of the jackpot lottery are executed with reference to different random numbers. It was configured like this. That is, the big hit lottery is executed by comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 with the first hit type selection 13 table 202pa, and the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern is the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , It was configured to be executed by comparing with the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment, the jackpot lottery for special symbols and the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern are configured to be executed based on the same random number value. Then, a special deviation variation pattern is selected as the deviation variation pattern corresponding to the random number value that is a hit in some set values and is out of order in some set values. In other words, it is possible to infer (narrow down) the set value when the deviation pattern that is selected only for some set values is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the type of fluctuation pattern executed at the time of disconnection, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the 14th embodiment, the more disadvantageous the situation is for the player, the higher the execution rate of the specific effect (winning rate suggestion effect) that can suggest the setting. That is, the more the number of times that the game cannot be changed to the advantageous game state (probability change state that continues until the next big hit, or the time reduction state where the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the end of the big hit continues, the higher the execution rate of the winning rate suggestion effect. It was configured to be. As a result, it is possible to remind the player to start the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the disadvantageous situation continues for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Although the details will be described later, in the 14th embodiment, four types of gaming states of a normal state, a time saving state, a probability variation state, and a latent probability state are provided, and the normal state and the latent probability state are disadvantageous. It is configured as a game state. That is, in the normal state and the latent state, even if the electric accessory 6400a is hard to be released and right-handed, the second special symbol lottery is hard to be executed (by left-handed, the first special symbol lottery is executed to play the game. It is configured as an unfavorable gaming state. Further, in a disadvantageous game state, even if the probability variation jackpot is won, a small number of time reductions (for example, 8 times) is set at a high rate, and if the jackpot is not won again during the small number of time reductions, the next It is configured so that it is difficult to shift to an advantageous probability change state that continues until the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which a game is played with a strong desire to win a big hit in a small number of time reductions (8 times). Further, in the 14th embodiment, when the jackpot is won, a high probability state (latent state or probability variation state) of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends at a high rate (90% rate). Instead, an upper limit number (for example, 11 times) is provided for the number of consecutive times (probability variation limit number) of the high probability state of the special symbol. That is, when the probability variation limit number is reached, even if the probability variation jackpot is won, the state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is forcibly set to the low probability state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the game state after the end of the big hit, so that a deep game property can be realized.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configurations of ROM 202 and RAM 203 are partially changed, the configurations of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is performed. The point is that some changes have been made, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 13 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirteenth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 328, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, in the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment, the lottery device 6750 is deleted with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 307) of the game board 13 in the 13th embodiment described above. The difference is that each part of the game board 13 is provided with various movable members (roles) capable of executing a predetermined effect operation.

Next, the operation unit 300 provided with various movable members will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 and 330. FIG. 329 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 330 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300 with the disassembled operation unit 300 viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 330) of the operating unit 300 is opened from the bottom wall portion 311 and the outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311. A back case 310 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 328) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

In the operation unit 300, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, the decorative accessory unit 700, and the second slide operation unit 800 are housed in the internal space of the rear case 310, respectively. It is configured as one unit. Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 312 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 312. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 311 in a manner surrounded by. In the assembled state (see FIG. 329), the second slide operation unit 800 has a rectangular opening formed at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 when viewed from the front.

The swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decorative accessory unit 700 are arranged on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800 in a laminated state, respectively, and the rear case 310. (See FIG. 329). As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800) is laminated with another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) on the front side. Since it is arranged, the predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit in the front view. In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 328) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332, the outline of the operation mode of the standing accessory 400 and the first slide operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 331 and 332, FIGS. 329 and 330 will be referred to as appropriate.

331 and 332 are front views of the operating unit 300. In addition, in FIG. 331, the upright accessory 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged at the overhang position, and in FIG. 332, the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhang position. Each of these states is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 331, the swinging operation unit 400 swings toward an arm member 420 whose base end side is pivotally supported so as to swing, and a swinging end side opposite to the base end side of the arm member 420. It is provided with an upright accessory 410 that is pivotally supported, and these arm members 420 and the upright accessory 410 are operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the overhang position shown in FIG. 331. Let me. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329, the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 are retracted below the opening 311a of the rear case 310 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 331, the arm member 420 is lifted and the standing member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the back case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81).

As shown in FIG. 332, the first slide operation unit 500 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise with the tilting accessory 510 sliding diagonally downward and the rotation shaft 520a as the rotation axis. It is equipped with a character 520. The tilting accessory 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. 332. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329, the tilting accessory 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 332, the tilting accessory 510 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81).

As described above, the game board 13 in the 14th embodiment is provided with a plurality of movable members (various accessories such as the standing accessory 410 and the tilting accessory 510), and can perform various effects. It is configured to be executable. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333, a characteristic effect mode in the 14th embodiment will be described. In the 14th embodiment, the expectation (winning rate) of winning a big hit in a lottery of special symbols within 100 times is set as a kind of variable display effect in a normal state and a latent state, which are relatively disadvantageous to the player. The winning rate suggestion effect that notifies (suggests) the player is configured to be feasible. Here, in the 14th embodiment, as described above, it is extremely difficult to execute the lottery of the special symbol even if the normal state and the latent state are both right-handed (it is necessary to proceed with the game by left-handed). There is) It is configured as a disadvantageous gaming state. That is, since the behavior of the pachinko machine 10 (operation of the pachinko machine 10) other than the jackpot probability is common between the normal state and the latent state, basically, whether it is the normal state or the latent state. It becomes difficult to distinguish. However, if the specifications are such that it is completely unknown whether it is in the normal state or the latent state, and if the lottery of special symbols is continuously missed, the normal state with a low jackpot probability may be set. The player feels uneasy about whether or not there is, and the player is motivated to play the game even though the latent state is set to have a slightly higher degree of advantage because the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state. There is a risk of losing the game and quitting the game. That is, there is a possibility that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be lowered. Therefore, in the 14th embodiment, by executing the winning rate suggestion effect, it is possible to identify whether the state is the normal state or the latent state according to the content of the effect. As a result, the player can be reminded to continue the game until the winning rate suggestion effect is executed, and the motivation for the game is improved when the effect content has a high possibility of being in a latent state. be able to. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the 14th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, the rate at which the number of time reductions is set to 0 is lower than that in the case where the jackpot is won in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal state from becoming excessively disadvantageous as compared with the latent state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate in the normal state.

FIG. 333 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode at the start of the winning rate suggestion effect. When the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is set in the normal state or the latent state, the boy with the headband displayed in the small area Ds2 is imitated while all the third symbols are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. The effect is executed in which the character 710 utters the line "The winning rate within 100 games is ...". The dialogue uttered by the character 710 after this dialogue suggests the probability of winning a jackpot (winning rate) during 100 games (that is, until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times). In addition, since the probability that the latent state will be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state, it is easy to suggest a higher winning rate in the latent state.

FIG. 333 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the winning rate is suggested by the character 710 in the winning rate suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 333 (b), in the winning rate suggestion effect, the effect that the character 710 numerically suggests the winning rate to the player is executed by the dialogue. FIG. 333 (b) illustrates a situation in which the line “30% over” suggesting that the winning rate is at least 30% or more is issued. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode in which the line "30% over" is issued is configured so that it is more likely to be selected in the latent state than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the expectation of being in a latent state is high, and thus it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game. In the 14th embodiment, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 1/200 and 1 / 55.6. In the low probability state of special symbols, the ratio of winning 1/200 jackpot (winning rate) by the time 100 special symbol lottery is executed is about 39.4%, so the winning rate is "30% over". The rate is a numerical value that is applicable even in the normal state of setting 1. As a result, even if a winning rate of "30% over" is suggested in a normal state where the jackpot probability is low, it is possible to actually realize the behavior of winning the jackpot at a rate exceeding 30%. It is possible to suppress distrust of the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334 (a), another aspect of the winning rate suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment will be described. Here, in the winning rate suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment, the theoretical value of the winning rate (winning rate within 100 games) of winning a big hit before the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed is not exceeded. The winning rate is suggested. The winning rate within 100 games varies depending on the setting. More specifically, in the 14th embodiment, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is set to 1/200, while the jackpot probability of setting 6 is set to 1/90 in the low probability state of the special symbol. ing. Therefore, the winning rate of setting 1 within 100 games is about 39.4%, while the winning rate of setting 6 within 100 games is about 67.3%. Therefore, for example, when the winning rate of "40% over" is notified in the normal state, the setting 1 is denied. Conversely, when the winning rate of "40% over" is notified in setting 1, the normal state is denied (the latent state is determined). As described above, in the 14th embodiment, in consideration of the difference in the jackpot winning rate for each setting and the game state word, a specific effect mode (within 100 games in a specific setting or outpatient state) in the winning rate suggestion effect is taken into consideration. When the winning rate exceeding the winning rate (a mode of notifying the winning rate) is executed, some situations (some settings or normal states) are denied. As a result, in the winning rate suggestion production, in addition to being able to suggest to the player whether it is in the normal state or the latent state, it is also possible to suggest the set value, so that a more interesting production mode can be obtained. It can be realized.

FIG. 334 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning rate suggestion effect in which the setting 6 is determined. As shown in FIG. 334 (a), in setting 6, the winning rate of "66.6% over" can be notified as a winning rate suggestion effect. By setting all the digits (tens digit, one digit, and one decimal place) of the value indicating the winning rate to "6", it is possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 6. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more easy-to-understand production mode. It should be noted that this effect mode of "66.6% over" is configured so that it can be executed only in the normal state in setting 6. In the normal state, the 100 game winning rate of setting 5 (big hit probability 1/120) is about 56.7%, and the 100 game winning rate of setting 6 (big hit probability 1/90) is about 67.3%. , When "66.6% over" is notified in the normal state of setting 6, it is possible to actually realize the behavior of winning a big hit at a rate exceeding 66.6%. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

In addition, in the 14th embodiment, the situation becomes more disadvantageous to the player (either the advantageous gaming state (probability change state that continues until the next big hit or the time saving state where the number of time saving times is 100 times) is shifted). The higher the number of consecutive times (the number of throughs) that could not be done), the higher the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect will be executed. That is, it is configured so that the rate at which the setting is suggested is high. As a result, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game in a disadvantageous situation, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the setting suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment will be described. In the 14th embodiment, the main control device 110 is provided with an out-of-order variation pattern (variation type) that can be selected (or is easily selected) only with a part of the set values. More specifically, deviation fluctuations that are selected only at setting 2 or higher (setting 1 negative super reach), deviation fluctuations that are selected only at setting 4 or higher (high setting confirmed super reach), and deviation fluctuations that are selected only at setting 6 or higher. (Setting 6 confirmed super reach) and the like are provided. In addition, even-numbered settings are easier to select than odd-numbered settings (even-numbered suggestion super reach), and odd-numbered settings are easier to select than even-numbered settings (cardinal follower super reach). .. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when these fluctuation types are notified, as the fluctuation pattern effect, as in the eleventh embodiment, the numbers attached to the left and right third symbols when the reach occurs are used. It is configured to suggest a variation pattern type (that is, a set value) (execute a setting suggestion effect).

FIG. 334 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern effect (effect mode) when the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the high setting confirmed super reach is notified from the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 334 (b), when the high setting confirmation super reach is executed, the third symbol with the number "4" and the number "5" are added to the right symbol column. The third symbol and the third symbol with the number "6" are stopped in a vertical row, while the third symbol with the number "6" is attached to the left symbol row. , The third symbol with the number "5" and the third symbol with the number "4" are stopped in a vertical row to perform a reach effect. That is, the reach of the third symbol with the number "4" is generated in the downward-sloping direction, the reach of the third symbol with the number "5" is generated in the horizontal direction, and "6" is generated in the upward-sloping direction. The reach effect (so-called triple reach effect) in which the reach of the third symbol with the number “” is generated is executed, and finally the off-design symbol is stopped and displayed. In the setting suggestion effect, the setting is suggested by the numbers attached to the symbols that are reaching, so just by checking the third symbol during the execution of the high setting confirmation super reach, the settings 4, 5, and 6 It can be easily understood that it suggests that it is one of the above.

In addition, in the setting suggestion effect, in order to execute the effect that the reach occurs in the third symbol to which any number of "1" to "6" is attached, the normal out-of-order super reach (that is, it is selected regardless of the setting). When the obtained super reach) is notified as a variable type, the effect that the reach occurs in the third symbol with a pattern other than "1" to "6" (that is, any one of "7" to "9"). Is configured to run. As a result, when an out-of-order super reach effect is executed, the player can easily understand whether it is a setting suggestion effect or a normal super reach effect simply by checking the numbers attached to the third symbol. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more easy-to-understand production mode.

<Electrical configuration in the 14th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 335 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment is the first random number 13 table 202pa with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment described above (see FIG. 314 (a)). Instead of the first random number 14 table 202qa, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd, and the variation pattern selection 13 table pe is replaced with the variation pattern. The difference is that the selection 14 table 202qe is provided, the time saving table 202qf is added, and the small hit random number 13 table 202pb is deleted due to the abolition of the lottery result of the small hit. There is. Since other configurations are the same as those of the thirteenth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 336 (a), the details of the first random number 14 table 202qa in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 336 (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first random number 14 table 202qa. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), the first random number 14 table 202qa in the 14th embodiment is a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. The range is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for setting 1, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random counter C1 is set to "0 to 0". 328 counter values (random values) of "89,200 to 437" are defined in association with each other, and for setting 2, the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 per first is "100 to 189". , 230 to 503 ”are defined in association with 364 counter values (random values), and for setting 3, the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first is set to“ 0 to 89, 410 counter values (random values) of "230 to 549" are defined in association with each other, and for setting 4, the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first is set to "100 to 189,280". 468 counter values (random values) of "~ 657" are defined in association with each other, and for setting 5, the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first is set to "0 to 89,280-". 546 counter values (random values) of "735" are defined in association with each other, and for setting 6, the range of the counter values (random values) of the random counter C1 per first is set to "100 to 189, 300 to 937". 728 counter values (random values) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/200 (328/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/180 (364/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is The jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/160 (410/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/140 (468/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120 (546/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 is Is 1/90 (728/65536).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1179" corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first. For setting 2, "0 to 1310" is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random counter C1 per first, and for setting 3, the first hit. "0 to 1474" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1, and for setting 4, "0" is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 per first. ~ 1648 ”is associated with each other, and for setting 5,“ 0 to 1965 ”is associated with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random counter C1 and is specified with respect to the set value 6. Therefore, "0 to 2620" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 55.6 (1180/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/50 (1311/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is The probability is 1 / 44.4 (1475/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1 / 38.9 (1685/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1 / 33.3 (1966/65536). The jackpot probability of setting 6 is 1/25 (2621/65536). As in the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state to the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

Here, unlike the other embodiments, the values of the random numbers (counter values of the first random number counter C1) determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol are not continuous (some of the values are skipped). ) Is a range in which an odd number setting is easier to select than an even number setting as a random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) that is not determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol (that is, is determined to be out of order). Provide a range in which even settings are easier to select than odd settings, a range that cannot be selected in setting 1, a range that can be selected only in high settings (settings 4 to 6), a range that can be selected only in setting 6, and the like. Because. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 339 and the like, but in the fluctuation pattern selection 14 table in the 14th embodiment, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation and the value of the random number counter C1 per first are defined in association with each other. There is. That is, the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery are determined by referring to a common counter (first random number counter C1). Then, in some set values, the range of the random number value determined to be a big hit is defined by associating the type of the special deviation fluctuation pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to estimate (narrow down) the set value when the special deviation fluctuation pattern is executed. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the type of the fluctuation pattern executed at the time of disconnection, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 336 (b), the details of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 336 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 336 (b), in the first hit type selection 14 table 202qb in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot type is determined (selected) when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. At least a special 1 hit table 202qd1 and a special 2 hit table 202qd2 for determining (selecting) the big hit type when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol are specified. First, the details of the special 1 per table 202qd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 337 (a).

FIG. 337 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special 1 per table 202qd1 in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 337 (a), the special 1 hit table 202qd1 in the 14th embodiment has eight types of big hits, "big hit A14" to "big hit H14", as the big hit types of the first special symbol. It is stipulated. "Big hit A14" to "Big hit C14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit D14" to "big hit F14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the "big hit G14" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, the "big hit H14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. It should be noted that whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is given is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit and the big hit type.

As shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 5", "big hit A14" (9-round probability variation jackpot) is defined in association with the jackpot type. ing. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit A14" is "0 to 5". ", So when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of" jackpot A14 "determined (selected) is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit B14" (9-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "6 to 46" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B14" is 41, which is "6 to 46". The rate at which "big hit B14" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 41% (41/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit C14" (9-round probability variation jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "47 to 66" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C14" is 20 of "47 to 66". When a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate at which "big hit C14" is determined (selected) is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), the value "67" of the first hit type counter C2 is defined by associating "big hit D14" (three-round probability variation big hit) as the jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D14" is one, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit D14" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit E14" (three-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "68,69" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E14" is two, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit E14" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit F14" (three-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "70 to 89" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit F14" is 20 from "70 to 89". When a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate at which "big hit F14" is determined (selected) is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit G14" (9 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 92" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G14" is 3, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit G14" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit H14" (3 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "93 to 99" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit H14" is 7, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit H14" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 7% (7/100).

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability variation jackpot is obtained at a rate of 90% (when any of "big hit A14" to "big hit F14" is obtained). It is configured to win a normal jackpot at a rate of 10% (when either "big hit G14" or "big hit H14" is achieved). In addition, a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

Next, the details of the special 2 per table 202qd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 337 (b). As described above, the special 2 hit table 202qd2 is a data table for determining the hit type when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 337 (b), in the 14th embodiment, four jackpot types of "big hit I14" to "big hit L14" are provided as the hit types of the second special symbol. "Big hit A14" to "Big hit C14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit D14" to "big hit F14" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. "Big hit I14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 9, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit J14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the "big hit K14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, the "big hit L14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 66", "big hit I14" (9-round probability variation jackpot) is defined in association with the jackpot type. ing. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit I14" is "0 to 66". The ratio of "Big hit I14" is determined (selected) when the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 67% (67/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), "big hit J14" (three-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "67 to 89" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit J14" is "67 to 89". The percentage of "big hit J14" determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 23% (23/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), "big hit K14" (9 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 92" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit K14" is "90 to 92". The percentage of "big hit K14" determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), "big hit L14" (3 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "93 to 99" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit L14" is "93 to 99". ", So when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of" jackpot L14 "determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio is 90% (“big hit I14”, as in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. If it becomes either "Big hit J14"), it becomes a probabilistic big hit, and at a rate of 10% (when it becomes either "Big hit K14" or "Big hit L14"), it is configured to win a normal big hit. In addition, a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%. That is, it is configured so that the distribution of the number of rounds is the same as the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 338 (a). The fluctuation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the 14th embodiment is different from other embodiments in that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined according to the value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 per first. Data is specified. FIG. 338 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the 14th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 338 (a), the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the 14th embodiment is a gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set (that is, the normal state in which the game should be advanced by left-handed, the latent state. The left-handed state table 202qe1 for determining (selecting) the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the certain state) and the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set (that is, the time-saving state in which the game should be advanced by right-handed). , Probability change state), at least composed of a right-handed state table 202qe2 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variation time). First, the details of the left-handed state table 202qe1 will be described with reference to FIG. 338 (b).

FIG. 338 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the left-handed state table 202qe1. As shown in FIG. 338 (b), the left-handed state table 202qe1 in the 14th embodiment is associated with the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the random number counter C1 per first, and the fluctuation pattern. Is stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the first random number counter C1 is 4. A "hit normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 20,000 ms is defined in association with a value that is a multiple of, and a "hit" with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms for a value other than a multiple of 4 for the value of the first random number counter C1. "Super reach" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state and the latent state, the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the fluctuation time is set at a rate of about 3/4. It is set to 30 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 99". An “even suggestion super reach” with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the range of. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the odd number setting, “0 to 89” in the range of the random number values (counter value of the random number counter C1 per first) corresponding to the even number suggestion super reach. While the range of is set to the random number value judged to be a big hit, in the even setting, the hit random number value so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the even suggestion super reach and the range of the random number value judged to be the big hit do not overlap. Is set. Therefore, in the odd setting, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random number value corresponding to the even suggestion super reach, it will be a 90% big hit (the deviation fluctuation is not executed), so the ratio of the even suggestion super reach is executed. It is substantially 1/10. That is, since the even-numbered suggestion super reach is 10 times more likely to be executed when the even-numbered setting is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the even-numbered suggestion super reach is likely to be even-numbered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), an “odd number suggestion super reach” having a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first random number counter C1 is “100 to 199”. There is. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the even number setting, “100 to 189” in the range of the random number values (counter value of the random number counter C1 per first) corresponding to the odd number suggestion super reach. While the range of is set to the random number value determined to be a jackpot, in the odd number setting, the hit random number value so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the odd number suggestion super reach and the range of the random number value determined to be the jackpot do not overlap. Is set. Therefore, in the even number setting, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random number value corresponding to the odd number suggestion super reach, it will be a 90% big hit (the deviation fluctuation is not executed), so the rate at which the odd number suggestion super reach is executed is It is substantially 1/10. That is, since the odd-numbered suggestion super reach is executed 10 times more easily when the odd-numbered setting is executed, the player can be made to think that the odd-numbered suggestion super reach is likely to be executed when the odd-numbered superreach is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is defined in the range of "200 to 229" in association with the "setting 1 negative super reach" having a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in setting 1, the entire range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach is regarded as a big hit. While it is set to the random number value to be judged, in other settings, the hit random number value is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach and the range of the random number value judged to be the jackpot do not overlap. ing. Therefore, in setting 1, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach, it will be a big hit (the deviation fluctuation is not executed), so that the setting 1 negative super reach may be executed. Is 0. That is, since the setting 1 negative super reach is executed only in the setting 2 or higher, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the setting is not at least the minimum setting when it is executed. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is defined in the range of "200 to 229" in association with the "setting 1 negative super reach" having a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in setting 1, the entire range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach is regarded as a big hit. While it is set to the random number value to be judged, in other settings, the hit random number value is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach and the range of the random number value judged to be the jackpot do not overlap. ing. Therefore, in setting 1, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach, it will be a big hit (the deviation fluctuation is not executed), so that the setting 1 negative super reach may be executed. Is 0. That is, since the setting 1 negative super reach is executed only in the setting 2 or higher, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the setting is not at least the minimum setting when it is executed. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "230 to 279" in association with the "high setting confirmed super reach" having a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the settings 1 to 3 (low setting), the range of the random number value (counter value of the random number counter C1 per first) corresponding to the high setting confirmed super reach is set. While the entire range is set to the random number value determined to be a jackpot, in settings 4 to 6 (high setting), the range of the random number value corresponding to the high setting confirmed super reach and the range of the random number value determined to be a jackpot The hit random number value is set so that and does not overlap. Therefore, in settings 1 to 3, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random value corresponding to the high setting confirmed super reach, it will be a big hit (the deviation fluctuation is not executed), so the high setting confirmed super reach is executed. The possibility is 0. In other words, since the high setting confirmed super reach is executed only at the setting 4 or higher (high setting), the player feels a great sense of security that the high setting (the jackpot probability is set relatively high) when executed. Can be embraced by. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), a "setting 6 fixed super reach" having a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first random number counter C1 is "280 to 299". ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the settings 1 to 5 (settings other than the setting 6), the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (counter value of the first random number counter C1). While the entire range of is set to the random number value determined to be a jackpot, in setting 6, the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach and the range of the random number value determined to be a jackpot overlap. A random number value is set so as not to hit. Therefore, in settings 1 to 5, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach, it will be a big hit (the deviation fluctuation is not executed), so the setting 6 confirmed super reach is executed. The possibility is 0. In other words, setting 6 confirmed super reach can be executed only at setting 6 (high setting), so when it is executed, it is the highest setting (the jackpot probability is set to the highest), which is an extremely great sense of security and satisfaction. Can be embraced by the player. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "300" or more, the normal (that is, selected regardless of the setting) deviation fluctuation pattern is used. It is associated. More specifically, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is defined in association with the range of "300 to 10084" with the "outlier super reach" having a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, and the random number counter C1 per first is defined. A "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 8000 ms is defined in association with the range of "1085-33465", and the value of the random number counter C1 per first varies with respect to the range of "33466 to 53224". A "long deviation" with a time of 12000 ms is specified in association with it, and a "out of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 20000 ms is specified in association with the range in which the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "53225-65535". ing.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", the fluctuation time is 120,000 ms with respect to the entire range of possible values of the first random number counter C1. The "hit long fluctuation" of is specified in association with each other. If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation time is 120,000 ms for the entire range of possible values of the random number counter C1 per first. "Long fluctuation" is specified in association with each other. For this reason, when an irregular game method of hitting right is practiced in a state where the game should proceed by hitting left (normal state, latent state), the electric accessory 6400a is hardly released, so that the second special symbol is used. In addition to making it difficult to execute the lottery, even if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, a longer fluctuation time is set compared to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, so that the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which right-handed hitting is performed in a gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the game should be advanced by left-handed hitting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, in the 14th embodiment, the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) associated with various fluctuation patterns corresponding to the deviation and the hit are determined. The outline of the correspondence between the random number value (counter value of the random number counter C1 per first) and the setting 4 will be specifically described by taking settings 1 and 4 as an example.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 339, the random number value determined to be a hit in setting 1 is in the range of random number values corresponding to the even suggestion super reach (the range in which the random number counter C1 per first is "0 to 99"). , 90% of the range "0-89", the entire range of random number values corresponding to setting 1 negative super reach (the range of random number counter C1 per first is "200-229"), and high setting confirmed The entire range of random number values corresponding to super reach (the range of random number counter C1 per first is "230 to 279") and the range of random numbers corresponding to setting 6 confirmed super reach (random number counter C1 per first is the range of "230 to 279"). The entire range of "280 to 299") and the range of random numbers corresponding to the out-of-order super reach (the range of "300 to 10084" for the random number counter C1 per first) of "300 to 437" The range is set to. Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning in setting 1 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the even number suggestion super reach (within the range of "0 to 99"), 90% ("" (Within the range of 0 to 89) is determined to be a big hit, and a hit normal fluctuation or a hit super fluctuation is executed. In other words, in setting 1, which is an odd number setting, even if the random number value corresponding to the even suggestion super reach is acquired, only 10% of the even suggestion super reach is actually executed, so that even suggestion super reach is actually executed. Becomes harder to execute.

Further, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning in setting 1 is within the range of the random number corresponding to any of setting 1 negative super reach, high setting confirmed super reach, and setting 6 confirmed super reach (“200”). If it is within the range of "~ 299"), it is always determined that the hit is a big hit, and the hit normal fluctuation or the hit super fluctuation is executed. In other words, in setting 1, the possibility that setting 1 negative super reach, high setting confirmed super reach, and setting 6 confirmed super reach are executed is zero.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 339, the random number value determined to be a hit in the setting 4 is a range of random numbers corresponding to the odd number suggestion super reach (the first hit random number counter C1 is in the range of "100 to 199"). Of these, the range of "100 to 189", which occupies 90%, and the entire range of random number values corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (the range where the random number counter C1 per first is "280 to 299") are out of range. It is set to the range of "300 to 657" which is a part of the range of the random number value corresponding to the super reach (the range of the random number counter C1 per first is the range of "300 to 10084"). Therefore, when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning in setting 4 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the odd number suggestion super reach (within the range of "100 to 199"), 90% ("" (In the range of 100 to 189) is determined to be a big hit, and a hit normal fluctuation or a hit super fluctuation is executed. In other words, in setting 4, which is an even number setting, even if the odd number value corresponding to the odd number suggestion super reach is acquired, the odd number suggestion super reach is actually executed only 10%, so the odd number suggestion super reach is actually executed. Becomes harder to execute.

In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning in setting 4 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (within the range of "280 to 299"), it is always determined as a big hit. Then, the hit normal fluctuation or the hit super fluctuation is executed. In other words, in the setting 4, the possibility that the setting 6 final super reach is executed is set to 0.

Although not shown, the same applies to other settings. In setting 2, odd-numbered suggestion super reach (range of random number value “100 to 199”) becomes difficult to execute, and high setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 A random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit is set (distributed) so that the possibility that the definite super reach (range of the random number value "230 to 299") is executed becomes 0. ing. Further, in setting 3, even suggestion super reach (range of random number value "0 to 99") becomes difficult to be executed, and high setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 confirmed super reach (range of random number value "230 to 299"). A random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit is set (distributed) so that the possibility of executing is 0. Further, in setting 5, even suggestion super reach (range of random number value "0 to 99") becomes difficult to be executed, and setting 6 confirmed super reach (range of random number value "280 to 299") may be executed. A random number value determined to be a big hit (counter value of the first random number counter C1) is set (distributed) so as to be 0. Then, in setting 6, it becomes difficult to execute the odd number suggestion super reach (range of random number value "100 to 199"), and the random number value (first) determined to be a big hit so that other variable types are executed without limitation. The hit random number counter C1 counter value) is set (distributed).

With this configuration, it is possible to set the deviation type that is difficult to execute and the deviation type that is unlikely to be executed for each setting, so that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be estimated from the execution status of the deviation fluctuation. It is possible to realize playability. For example, when the setting 1 negative super reach and the odd number suggestion super reach are confirmed, the player can be made to guess that the possibility of the setting 3 or the setting 5 is high. Further, when the high setting confirmed super reach and the even number suggestion super reach are confirmed, the player can be made to guess that the possibility of setting 4 or setting 6 is high. Further, when the setting 6 final super reach is executed, the player can be convinced that the setting 6 is set. In this way, in the 14th embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property of guessing (narrowing down) the setting from the execution status of the deviation variation pattern of a specific type. It is possible to further improve the interest in the game. Further, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type drawn by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 simply analyzes the variation pattern command output every time the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the variation pattern effect according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is only necessary to specify the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type and the production mode of the fluctuation pattern effect, and it is not necessary to grasp the set value itself (that is, the main control device). Since the set value does not have to be notified from the 110 to the voice lamp control device 113), the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced and the set value can be prevented from being acquired illegally (the set value does not have to be acquired illegally). Can be suppressed).

Next, with reference to FIG. 340, the details of the right-handed state table 202qe2 constituting the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection 14 table 202qe will be described. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the right-handed state table 202qe2. As shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is "big hit", regardless of the type of special symbol, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is a multiple of 4, and the fluctuation time is 10000 ms. "Hit normal reach" is defined in association with each other, and "Hit super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15,000 ms is defined in association with a value other than a multiple of 4 of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, if a big hit is made in the special symbol lottery in the time saving state and the probability change state, the fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds at a rate of about 3/4. Set. That is, it becomes easier to set a short fluctuation pattern as compared with a state in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is "out of order", the fluctuation time is set with respect to the range in which the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "0 to 4999" regardless of the type of the special symbol. Is defined in association with a "out-of-order super reach" of 15,000 ms, and a "short out-of-order" with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms is specified in association with the range in which the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "5000 to 44999". , The value of the first random number counter C1 is defined in association with the range of "45,000 to 54999" with the "long deviation" of the fluctuation time of 7,000 ms, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is "55,000 to 65535". With respect to the range of "", "out of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10000 ms is defined in association with it. That is, in the time saving state and the probabilistic state, even if the deviation occurs, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time can be easily selected as compared with the normal state and the latent state. As a result, the gaming efficiency in the advantageous state can be increased, so that the interest of the player in the advantageous state can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the details of the time saving table 202qf in the 14th embodiment will be described. The time reduction table 202qf is a data table that is referred to for setting the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202qf.

As shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot A14 (9 round probability variation jackpot) and jackpot D14 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. If the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit, the number of time reductions (65536 times) that will continue until the next jackpot is given, while the probability variation limit number (11 times) is reached by the jackpot. Is set to 8 times of time saving. Therefore, if the jackpot A14 or the jackpot D14 is won before the probability variation limit is reached, the probability variation state (the most advantageous gaming state) that continues until the next jackpot is set, while the probability variation limit is reached. Since only the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of 8 times are set in the above, the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the probability variation limit number has been reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot A14 (9 round probability variation jackpot) and jackpot D14 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Is given the number of time reductions (65536 times) that substantially continue until the next jackpot if the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit, while 100 if the probability variation limit is reached by the jackpot. The time reduction number of times is set. Therefore, even if the probability variation limit has been reached, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls held, so that it is possible to have a sense of expectation for pulling back the jackpot. In the 14th embodiment, it is configured so that the player is not clearly notified whether or not the limit number of times has been reached (whether it is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state). Therefore, even if the probability variation limit is actually reached and the time saving state is set, the player can expect the probability variation state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variation jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. For the jackpot I14 (9-round probability variation jackpot), 8 time reductions are given regardless of whether the hit is before the probability variation limit is reached or the probability variation limit is reached. That is, if it is before the limit is reached, it will be in a probable state until the lottery of eight special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit, and it will be in a latent state after the ninth time. On the other hand, if the limit number of times has been reached, the time will be shortened from the end of the jackpot until the end of the eight special symbol lottery, and the ninth and subsequent times will be in the normal state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variation jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. For I14 (9-round probability variation jackpot), the same number of time reduction grants as jackpot A14 and jackpot D14 is associated. That is, the number of time reductions (65536 times) that substantially continues until the next big hit is defined in association with the hit before the probability variation limit number is reached, and the time reduction of 100 times is defined with respect to the hit after the probability variation limit number is reached. The number of times is specified in association with each other. Therefore, the jackpots B14, E14, and I14 are more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 and D14 in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends when they are won in the normal state or in the latent state where the probability variation limit number has not been reached. When the player wins in other situations (when the player wins in the probability change state, when the time is shortened, or when the probability change limit number is reached), the same game state as the jackpots A14 and D14 is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9-round probability variation jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3-round probability variation jackpot) won in the normal state are defined as 8 times as the number of time reductions. .. In addition, if the probability variation jackpot is won in the normal state, the probability variation limit number will not be reached, so the number of time reduction grants when the probability variation limit number is reached is not specified (since the probability variation limit number cannot be reached, it is specified. No need). Further, for the jackpots C14 and F14 that are won in the latent state, 0 times are associated and defined as the number of time reductions regardless of whether the hit is before the probability variation limit is reached or the probability variation limit is reached. There is. That is, when the jackpots C14 and F14 are won in the latent state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given even once, which is extremely disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot C14 (9 round probability variation jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the same number of time reduction grants as the jackpots A14, B14, D14, E14, and I14 are associated with each other. That is, the number of time reductions that continue until the next big hit is specified in association with the hit before the probability variation limit number is reached, and the number of time reductions of 100 times is specified in association with the hit after the probability variation limit number is reached. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot G14 (9 rounds normal jackpot), the jackpot H14 (3 rounds normal jackpot), and the jackpot won in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. For K14 (9 rounds normal jackpot) and jackpot L14 (3 rounds normal jackpot), 8 times are specified in association with each other as the number of time reductions. In addition, since the probability variation limit number cannot be reached when a normal jackpot is won, the number of time reduction grants when the probability variation limit number is reached is not specified (it is not necessary to specify it). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpots G14, H14, K14, and L14 that were won in the game state (time saving state, probability variation state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, 100 times are given as the time saving number. It is associated. That is, when the jackpots G14, H14, K14, and L14 are won, the number of time reduction grants that continue until the next jackpot cannot be set, which is more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 to F14 and H14 to J14.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, the probability variation limit number has been reached for the jackpot J14 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. Regardless of whether or not, 0 times is specified as the number of time reductions in association with each other. Therefore, since the jackpot J14 has a small number of rounds and is not given a time saving state, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player when it is won in the normal state or the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot J14 won in the game state (time saving state, probability variation state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, if the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit. While a time saving state (65536 times) that substantially continues until the next big hit is given, when the probability variation limit number is reached by the big hit, 100 time saving times are set.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the probability variation limit number has been reached. doing. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 335 (b). FIG. 335 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 14th embodiment has a probability variation flag 203fa and a limit counter with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 13th embodiment described above (see FIG. 314 (b)). It differs in that 203qa and the limit arrival flag 203qb are added. Further, it is different in that the small hit flag 203dg, the big hit type storage area 203pa, and the V passage flag 203pb are deleted. The purpose of deleting these configurations is to delete the configuration for realizing the V hit because the jackpot (V hit) based on the V prize is not provided in the 14th embodiment.

The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the game state has changed to the probability change state, and is set to on when it is determined that the probability change state is set. Then, it is set to off when the end condition of the probability change state is satisfied.

The limit counter 203qa is a counter for counting the number of probable variation limits. If the value of the limit counter 203qa is less than 11 at the end of the probability variation jackpot, it indicates that the probability variation limit number has not been reached, so that the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203qa is 11 at the end of the probability variation jackpot, it indicates that the probability variation limit number has been reached, so that the state after the jackpot ends is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. The initial value of the limit counter 203qa is set to 0, and each time a probability variation jackpot is won, the value is added and updated by 1 at the end of the probability variation jackpot (see S3504 in FIG. 352). Further, the limit counter 203qa is reset to 0 when it is determined that the probability variation limit has been reached (the counter value has been updated to 11) at the end of the probability variation jackpot, and at the end of the normal jackpot (FIG. 352). See S3502).

The limit arrival flag 203qb is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation limit number of times has been reached. If the limit arrival flag 203qb is on, it means that the probability variation limit number has been reached (the probability variation jackpot has been won 11 times in a row), and if it is off, it means that the probability variation limit number has not been reached. .. The limit arrival flag 203qb is set to off based on the fact that the initial state is set to off and the counter value of the limit counter 203qa is updated to 11 which is the probability variation limit number at the end of the jackpot (FIG. 352). See S3507). Further, the limit arrival flag 203qb is set to off at the start of the jackpot (see S10233 in FIG. 347).

Next, a state transition method in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 342. Here, in the 14th embodiment, as described above, four gaming states are provided: a normal state and a latent state which are disadvantageous to the advantageous player, and a time saving state and a probable change state which are advantageous to the player. Further, in the 14th embodiment, there are two types of probabilistic states: a probabilistic state in which the number of time reductions is 8 times, and a probabilistic state in which the time reduction continues until the next big hit is won. Further, as the time saving state, there are two types, that is, a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 8 times and a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 100 times. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the normal state and the latent state, which are disadvantageous to the player, are referred to as the normal mode A and the normal mode B, respectively, and the time saving state (8 times) and the probabilistic state are changed. Are referred to as chance mode A and chance mode B, respectively, and the time saving state with a large number of time saving times (100 times) is called the pullback mode, and the probabilistic state (substantially the consecutive villas) that continues until the next big hit is substantially achieved. The state to be confirmed) is called the consecutive villa mode. First, a mode transition method in the normal mode A will be described with reference to the upper left side of FIG. 342.

As shown on the upper left side of FIG. 342, in the normal mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when the jackpot is won. That is, when either the jackpot A14 or D14, which is determined at a rate of 7% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot is finished is the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous to the player. Is set to. In addition, if any of the jackpots B14, C14, E14, and F14, which are determined at a rate of 83% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends becomes chance mode B. Set. Further, when either the jackpot G14 or H14, which is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A. In this way, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the time saving state of the normal symbol is always given at least 8 times. Therefore, by winning the jackpot again within the time saving number of times, the mode is shifted to the consecutive villa mode. Can be expected. Further, when a jackpot is obtained in the normal mode A, the jackpot B14, C14, E14, or F14 is mainly won (at a high rate of 83%), and the mode shifts to the chance mode B. That is, in most cases, the lottery can be received eight times in a high probability state of the special symbol, so that the transition to the consecutive villa mode can be expected more strongly.

Next, a method of mode transition in the normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. 342. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 342, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big hit is won. Specifically, when one of the jackpots A14 and D14, which is determined at a rate of 7% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot is completed is advantageous to the player. Set to consecutive villa mode. When the probability variation limit is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode A. If either the jackpot B14 or E14, which is determined at a rate of 43% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode B. When the probability variation limit is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to chance mode A. Further, when either the jackpot G14 or H14, which is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A. On the other hand, if either the jackpot C14 or F14, which is determined at a rate of 40% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is changed to the normal mode B again. Set. That is, a disadvantageous state is set in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given. When the probability variation limit is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the normal mode A. That is, the time saving state is not given regardless of whether the probability variation limit is reached or not. In this way, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode B, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given only at a rate of 60%. Therefore, in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the normal mode B is better than the normal mode A. Is disadvantageous. However, in the normal mode B, since the jackpot probability is tripled or more, the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the jackpot probability.

Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described with reference to the center left side of FIG. 342. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 342, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of time reductions is completed. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 342, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a probability variation jackpot (big hit A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% is won. The mode after the big hit is set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode for the player. On the other hand, if a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery and a normal big hit (big hit G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the big hit is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions elapses in the chance mode A (the lottery of the special symbol is missed eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode A, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be won during the time reduction of 8 times.

Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode B will be described with reference to the center right side of FIG. 342. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 342, in the chance mode B, as in the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of time reductions is completed. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 342, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a probability variation jackpot (big hit A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% is won. The mode after the big hit is set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode for the player. When the probability variation limit is reached in the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, if a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery and a normal big hit (big hit G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the big hit is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions elapses in the chance mode B (the lottery of the special symbol is missed eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode B which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode B as well, as in the chance mode A, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be won during the time reduction of 8 times.

Next, a mode transition method in the pullback mode will be described with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 342. As shown on the lower left side of FIG. 342, in the pullback mode, as in the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when a big hit is won or when the number of time reductions is completed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 342, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a probability variation jackpot (big hit A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90% is won. The mode after the big hit is set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode for the player. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions elapses in the pullback mode (the lottery of the special symbol is lost 100 times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if you win a normal jackpot (big hit G14, H14, K14, L14) that is determined at a rate of 10% when you win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends will switch to the pullback mode again. Set (loops pullback mode).

Next, a mode transition method in the consecutive villa mode will be described with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 342. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 342, in the consecutive villa mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when the jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 342, when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a normal big hit (big hit G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% is won. The mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, if a probabilistic jackpot (big hit A14 to F14, I14, J14), which is determined at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is again set by the player. Set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (loop the consecutive villa mode). If the probability variation jackpot is won and the probability variation limit number is reached, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, in order to shift to the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous for the player, basically, after shifting to the chance modes A and B in which the number of time reductions of 8 times is set. Therefore, it is necessary to win the jackpot within the range of 8 times, which is a relatively small number of times. However, once the transition to the consecutive villa mode is made, a very advantageous state is formed in which the consecutive villa mode and the jackpot are repeated at a high rate of 90%. Therefore, when the transition to the consecutive villa mode is performed, the player You can have a great sense of satisfaction with.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343 (a), the details of the RAM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 343 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 222 according to the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343 (a), the configuration of the RAM 222 in the 14th embodiment suggests a winning rate with respect to the configuration of the RAM 222 (see FIG. 274) in the 13th embodiment (and the 11th embodiment) described above. The difference is that the effect lottery table 222qa, the effect type selection table 222qb, the power supply return operation table 222qc, and the accessory operation setting table 222qd are added.

First, with reference to FIG. 344 (a), the details of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa in the 14th embodiment will be described. The winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa is a data table in which the ratio at which the winning rate suggestion effect (see FIG. 333) is determined as the variation pattern effect is defined for each game situation. Here, as described above, in the 14th embodiment, the more disadvantageous the player continues (the more times the player cannot shift to the consecutive villa mode or the pullback mode), the more the winning rate suggestion effect is produced. It is configured so that the execution probability of is high.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 344 (a), the current gaming state is the normal state (normal mode A), and the number of consecutive times that the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous state after the big hit (through) is For the situation of 3 times or less, the probability of 1/100 is defined in association with the lottery probability of the winning rate suggestion effect. Further, for a situation in which the current gaming state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times (through) that could not be shifted to the advantageous state after the big hit is 4 times or more and 6 times or less. Therefore, a probability of 1/90 is defined in association with the lottery probability of the winning rate suggestion effect. Further, for a situation in which the current gaming state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times (through) that could not be shifted to the advantageous state after the big hit is 7 times or more and 9 times or less. Therefore, a probability of 1/80 is defined in association with the lottery probability of the winning rate suggestion effect. Furthermore, the winning rate is suggested for the situation where the current gaming state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times (through) that could not be shifted to the advantageous state after the big hit is 10 times or more. A probability of 1/50 is defined in association with the lottery probability of the production.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the latent state (normal mode B), a probability of 1/50 is defined as the lottery probability of the winning rate suggestion effect regardless of the number of throughs. As described above, in the 14th embodiment, the probability of executing the winning rate suggestion effect is increased so that the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player (the situation in which the unpleasant situation continues). With this configuration, the more the disadvantageous situation continues, the more likely it is that the setting will be suggested in the winning rate suggestion production, so even if the disadvantageous situation continues, it is possible to maintain motivation for the game. can. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect is executed in the relatively advantageous latent state (normal mode B) is constant regardless of the situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the latent state, the probability of executing the winning rate suggestion effect may be increased as the disadvantageous situation for the player continues. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's motivation for the game to be lowered when the disadvantageous situation continues.

Next, the details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described. The effect type selection table 222qb is a data table that is referred to for determining the effect mode when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect (see FIG. 333) is determined. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, first, with reference to FIG. 344 (b), the correspondence relationship between the jackpot probability in the 14th embodiment and the winning rate within 100 games is explained, and then FIG. 345. The details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described with reference to.

FIG. 344 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the probability variation state of the special symbol and the winning rate within 100 games for each set value. As shown in FIG. 344 (b), in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is 1/200, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 39.4% (100 special symbol lottery). The probability of continuous deviation of 199/200 is about 60.6%). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/180, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 42.7% (the probability of losing 179/180 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery is about 57.3). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 3 is 1/160, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 46.6% (the probability of losing 159/160 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery is about 53.4. %). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/140, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 51.2% (the probability of losing 139/140 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery is about 48.8. %). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 56.7% (the probability of losing 119/120 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery is about 43.3). %). Furthermore, the jackpot probability of setting 6 is 1/90, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 67.3% (the probability of losing 89/90 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery is about 32.7. %).

On the other hand, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is 1 / 55.6, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 83.7% (54 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery). The probability of being out of .6 / 55.6 is about 16.3%). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/50, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 86.7% (the probability of losing 49/50 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery is about 13.3). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 3 is 1 / 44.4, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 89.7% (43.4 / 44.4 is continuously out of the lottery of 100 special symbols). The probability is about 10.3%). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1 / 38.9, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 92.6% (37.9 / 38.9 is continuously out of the lottery of 100 special symbols). The probability is about 7.4%). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1 / 33.3, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 95.2% (32.3 / 33.3 is continuously out of the lottery of 100 special symbols). The probability is about 4.8%). Furthermore, the jackpot probability of setting 6 is 1/25, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 98.3% (the probability of losing 24/25 in a row in 100 special symbol lottery is about 1.7. %).

The winning rate suggestion effect in the 14th embodiment is configured to select an effect mode that does not contradict the actual winning rate within 100 games calculated from the jackpot probability (in the effect type selection table 222qb). Data is specified). As a result, the content of the winning rate suggestion effect can be matched with the actual behavior (big hit winning rate), so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the details of the effect type selection table 222qb in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect type selection table 222qb. As shown in FIG. 345, in the effect type selection table 222qb in the 14th embodiment, the range of the value of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with the effect mode, the game state, and the set value. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, in the normal state and for the setting 1, the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "0 to 84", and the odd number setting suggestion effect (within 100 games). An effect mode in which 13.5% is suggested as the winning rate) is defined in association with each other, and an even number setting suggestion effect (winning rate within 100 games) is defined for a range in which the value of the effect counter 203f is "85-94". 24.6% is suggested in association with the effect mode), and for the range of the effect counter 203f of "95 to 99", the latent suggestion effect (30 as the winning rate within 100 games) is defined. The effect mode in which% is suggested) is defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of setting 1, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 13.5% over implying the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 85%. Then, an even number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over implying setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%, and a latent probability suggestion effect (high possibility of a latent state) is performed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which a 30% over indicating that is notified) is executed. That is, most of them are odd-numbered setting suggestion effects. As described above, since the winning rate within 100 games in the normal state of setting 1 is about 39.4%, it is higher than the winning rate notified by the above three effects, which may contradict the actual behavior. No.

Further, as shown in FIG. 345, in the normal state and for the setting 2, an odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 203f is "0 to 9", and the effect is produced. An even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range where the value of the counter 203f is "10 to 91", and a latent suggestion effect is defined for the range where the value of the effect counter 203f is "92 to 96". Is defined in association with each other, and for the range of the effect counter 203f in the range of "97 to 99", a latent probability or 2 or more confirmed production (a production mode in which 40% is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games) corresponds. It is specified with. Therefore, in the case of setting 2, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 13.5% over implying the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%. Then, an even-numbered setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over implying setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 82%, and a latent probability suggestion effect (high possibility of a latent state) is performed at a rate of 5%. (A mode in which 30% over is notified) is executed, and at a rate of 3% (a mode in which 40% over is notified, which is higher than the jackpot winning rate of 39.4% in the normal state of setting 1). Is executed. That is, most of them are even-numbered setting suggestion effects, but with a low probability, latent or 2 or more confirmed effects are also executed. Therefore, if the player is convinced that he / she is in a normal state (for example, in a situation where a big addiction occurs between big hits) and a confirmation effect of latent or 2 or more appears, setting 2 or more is required. Since it can be guessed that there is, the player can have the pleasure of guessing the setting.

Further, as shown in FIG. 345, in the normal state and for the setting 3, an odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 203f is "0 to 80", and the effect is produced. An even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range where the value of the counter 203f is "81 to 90", and a latent suggestion effect is defined for the range where the value of the effect counter 203f is "91 to 95". Is specified in association with each other, and for the range where the value of the effect counter 203f is "96 to 98", the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is specified in association with each other, and for the value "99" of the effect counter 203f. , Setting 3 or more fixed effect (effect mode in which 45.6% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of setting 3, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 13.5% over implying the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 81%. Then, an even-numbered setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over implying setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%, and a latent probability suggestion effect (high possibility of a latent state) is performed at a rate of 5%. (A mode in which 30% over is notified) is executed, and a 40% over, which is higher than the jackpot winning rate of 39.4% in the normal state of setting 1, is 40% over, which is a latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect at a rate of 3%. The notified mode) is executed, and the setting 3 or more final effect (a mode in which 45.6% over indicating that the setting is high is notified) is executed at a rate of 1%. That is, most of them are odd-numbered setting suggestion effects, but with a low probability, latent or 2 or more confirmed effects and setting 3 or more confirmed effects are also executed. Therefore, when these production modes are executed, the setting can be inferred, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 345, in the normal state and for the setting 4, an odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 203f is "0 to 9", and the effect is produced. An even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range where the value of the counter 203f is "10 to 89", and a latent suggestion effect is defined for the range where the value of the effect counter 203f is "90 to 94". Is specified in association with each other, and for the range of the value of the effect counter 203f of "95 to 97", the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is specified in association with each other, and for the value of the effect counter 203f "98". , Setting 3 or more confirmed effects are defined in association with each other, and for the value "99" of the effect counter 203f, latent probability or 4 or more confirmed effects (a production mode in which 50% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games). Is specified in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of setting 4, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 80%, and 5%. The latent probability suggestion effect is executed at the rate of 3%, the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect (is executed, the setting 3 or more confirmed effect is executed at the rate of 1%, and the latent probability or 4 or more is executed at the rate of 1%. A definite effect (a mode in which 50% over, which is higher than the jackpot winning rate of 46.6% in the normal state of setting 3, is notified) is executed. That is, most of the effects are even number setting suggestion effects, but with a low probability. A latent or 2 or higher confirmed effect, a setting 3 or higher confirmed effect, or a latent or 4 or higher confirmed effect is also executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 345, in the normal state and for the setting 5, an odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 203f is "0 to 77", and the effect is produced. An even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range where the value of the counter 203f is "78 to 87", and a latent suggestion effect is specified when the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range "88 to 92". Is specified in association with each other, and for the range of the effect counter 203f in the range of "93 to 95", the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is specified in association with each other, and the value of the effect counter 203f is "96,97". Therefore, a fixed effect of setting 3 or more is defined in association with the value "98" of the effect counter 203f, and a fixed effect of latent or 4 or more is specified in association with the value "99" of the effect counter 203f. On the other hand, a fixed effect of setting 5 or more (an effect mode in which 56% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined in association with the setting. Therefore, in the case of setting 5, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 78%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and 5%. The latent probability suggestion effect is executed at the rate of, the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is executed at the rate of 3%, the setting 3 or more confirmed effect is executed at the rate of 2%, and the latent probability or 4 or more is confirmed at the rate of 1%. The effect is executed, and a final effect of setting 5 or more (a mode in which a 56% over implying a setting 5 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 1%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 345, in the normal state and for the setting 6, an even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 203f is "0 to 9", and the effect is produced. Even number setting suggestion effects are defined in association with the range where the value of the counter 203f is "10 to 84", and the latent suggestion effect is defined for the range where the value of the effect counter 203f is "85 to 89". Is specified in association with each other, and for a range in which the value of the effect counter 203f is "90 to 92", a latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is specified in association with each other, and for the value "93,94" of the effect counter 203f. Therefore, a fixed effect of setting 3 or more is defined in association with the value "95" of the effect counter 203f, and a fixed effect of latent or 4 or more is specified in association with the value "96,97" of the effect counter 203f. Is defined in association with a setting of 5 or more confirmed effects, and for the value "98" of the effect counter 203f, a latent or 6 confirmed effect (60% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games). The effect mode) is defined in association with each other, and the setting 6 final effect (the effect mode suggesting a winning rate of 66.6% over within 100 games) corresponds to the value "99" of the effect counter 203f. It is specified with. Therefore, in the case of setting 6, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is decided in the normal state, the odd setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 75%, and 5%. The latent probability suggestion effect is executed at the rate of 3%, the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is executed at the rate of 3%, the setting 3 or more confirmed effect is executed at the rate of 2%, and the latent probability or 4 or more is confirmed at the rate of 1%. The effect is executed, the setting 5 or more confirmed effect is executed at a rate of 2%, and the latent probability or 6 confirmed effect is executed at a rate of 1% (60%, which is higher than the jackpot winning rate of 56.7% in the normal state of setting 5). The mode in which the over is notified) is executed, and the setting 6 final effect (a mode in which the 66.6% over implying the setting 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 1%. Therefore, when the setting 6 final effect is executed, or when the latent or 6 final effect is executed in a situation where the normal state is confident, the player can be greatly satisfied. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 345, in the latent state, the selection ratio of each effect mode is common regardless of the setting. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, the value of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with the range of "0 to 59", and the value of the effect counter 203f is "60 to 83". The range of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect, and the value of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with the latent probability or 4 or more confirmed effect. The latent probability or 6 confirmed effect is defined in association with the value "89" of the effect counter 203f, and the latent probability confirmed effect (winning rate within 100 games) is defined for the value of the effect counter 203f "90 to 99". A mode in which 80% over, which is higher than the winning rate of setting 6 in the low probability state of 67.3%, is notified) is defined in association with the above. Therefore, in the case of the latent state, the latent probability suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60%, the latent probability or 2 or more confirmed effect is executed at a rate of 24%, and the latent probability or 4 or more confirmed effect is executed at a rate of 5%. The latent probability or 6 confirmation effect is executed at a rate of 1%, and the latent probability confirmation effect is executed at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment, the set value and the game state are estimated from the effect contents by making the distribution of the effect mode of the winning rate suggestion effect different according to the game state and the set value. It is possible to realize the playability to be made. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the power recovery operation table 222qc will be described with reference to FIG. 346. The power recovery operation table 222qc is a data table that is referred to when executing a power recovery operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on. The power recovery operation is executed every time the power is turned on (regardless of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). In this power supply return operation table 222qc, a return operation for each type of accessory is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223qe. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of any of the accessories by the return operation, an error command is set (see S9003 in FIG. 357). This error command contains information indicating the type of error and the location of the error. Upon receiving this error command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality. In this way, by performing the return operation based on the power-on, it is possible to quickly grasp whether or not an abnormality has occurred in each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from starting the game for the player without noticing that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (return to the origin) before executing the power return operation based on the power return operation table 222qc. That is, when the power is cut off in the middle of changing the accessory, the power return operation is executed after the origin is returned based on the power is turned on. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare one type of power recovery operation that starts from the origin position (it is necessary to specify different patterns of power recovery operations depending on the arrangement of the accessory when the power is turned on). Therefore, the amount of data in the power recovery operation table 222qc can be reduced.

When the power is cut off during the variable operation of the accessory and the power is turned on again, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not backed up because the operation of the accessory is not executed. That is, once the power is cut off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the production that has been performed up to that point. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, when the power is turned on, the origin return operation is executed and then the power return operation is performed.

In the present embodiment, the stored contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up, but the information stored in the RAM 223 may be retained even after the backup power is supplied and the power supply is cut off. As a result, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time when the power is turned off can be determined after the power is turned on, and the production can be executed continuously, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. be able to.

FIG. 346 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the power recovery operation table 222qc. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), in the power supply return operation table 222qc, the operation content of the accessory is defined for each value of the return pointer 223qe. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223qe is subjected to the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) every time the main process 14 (see FIG. 355) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation is completed. It is updated one by one in.

As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the power supply return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured so that the return operation is executed in the order of the tilting accessory 510 → the standing accessory 410 according to the update of the return pointer 223qe. ing. Further, in the return operation, each accessory is changed from the origin position to the overhang position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the entire operating range in which the accessory may change during the normal game is comprehensively operated by the return operation. As a result, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

Further, in the power supply return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment, the operation is stopped for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after each accessory is changed to the overhanging position. As a result, in addition to being able to detect whether or not an abnormality occurs during the operation up to the overhang position and the operation from the overhang position to the origin position, it is possible to detect whether or not an abnormality occurs while the operation is stopped. can do. The abnormality during the operation stop is, for example, the case where the operation does not stop even though the operation stop is set, or the origin before the predetermined period (2000 ms) specified as the operation stop period elapses. This is the case where the product returns to the position, the operation of returning to the origin position is not started even after the operation stop period has elapsed, and so on.

Further, the power supply return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period of a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the return operation of all the accessories is completed. This stop period is used as a timing to end the confirmation and shut off the power of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the control device on the sub side such as the voice lamp control device 113 starts up normally in the shipping inspection or the like. It is provided. That is, if the accessory operates immediately after the return operation is completed, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 waits until the operated accessory returns to the origin and then shuts off the power supply or operates the accessory. The power supply must be shut off during the operation, and the accessory must be manually returned to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, if the power is cut off during the operation stop period by providing the operation stop period after the return operation is completed, the power is cut off with all the accessories in the origin position. It can be in a state of being. Therefore, it is not necessary to wait until the position returns to the origin position or manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power is cut off, so that the inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection can be improved.

In the 14th embodiment, if the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation of each accessory from being disturbed and making it difficult to perform the setting change operation, so that the convenience at the time of the setting change operation can be improved. Further, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, so that an abnormal load is generated when the return operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft. There is a possibility of causing damage such as. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. , It is possible to prevent damage to the opening / closing shaft and the like. Further, in the 14th embodiment, when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the origin return operation) is avoided. This is because the situation of the pachinko machine 10 is unlikely to change when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on. With this configuration, the accessory can be returned to the normal movable state at an early stage after the setting confirmation state is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 346 (b), the details of the accessory operation setting table 222qd in the 14th embodiment will be described. The accessory operation setting table 222qd is a data table that defines the type (group) of the accessory to be operated and the operation timing in various effects of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222qd. FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the accessory operation setting table 222qd. As shown in FIG. 346, in the accessory operation setting table 222qd, a timing for operating the accessory and a group of the accessories to be operated at the operation timing are defined for each corresponding effect.

Specifically, in the super reach production in which the production time is 30 seconds, at the timing when 20 seconds have passed from the start of the production, the tilting accessory 510 moves to the overhanging position and then moves to the origin position. It is stipulated that it will be executed. In addition, in the normal reach production where the production time is 20 seconds, at the timing when 19 seconds have passed from the start of the production, the standing accessory 410 is moved to the overhanging position, and then a series of operations of moving to the origin position are executed. It is stipulated. Furthermore, in the super reach production where the production time is 30 seconds, a series of operations of moving the tilting accessory 510 to the overhanging position and then moving to the origin position are executed at the timing when 20 seconds have passed from the start of the production. Is stipulated. In addition, it is stipulated that at the timing when 29 seconds have passed from the start of the production, the standing accessory 410 is moved to the overhanging position and then a series of operations to be moved to the origin position are executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the operation timing of the accessory and the group of the accessory to be operated are defined in the accessory operation setting table 222qd, each group is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222qd. On the other hand, it is possible to realize the movements of a wide variety of accessories only by executing the predetermined movements.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is not performed in all the variation effects, but the operation of the accessory is set only in a part of the variation effects having a relatively long fluctuation time. A fluctuation effect with a relatively long fluctuation time has a low probability of being selected as an effect for notifying the deviation, and is likely to be selected as an effect for notifying a jackpot. , It is possible to give the player a high expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the player as to whether or not the accessory operates, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accessory is configured to operate only in a part of the variation pattern production, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to operate the accessory in other effects such as a jackpot opening effect, an ending effect, and a round effect. In addition, the types of variable effects for operating the accessory may be increased so that the accessory can be operated even in the off-normal reach, for example. As a result, the production can be further diversified, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 343 (b). FIG. 343 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 14th embodiment is a secondary setting value with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 302) in the 13th embodiment (and the 12th embodiment) described above. A storage area 223qa, a slew count counter 223qb, an initialization flag 223qc, a closing operation flag 223qd, a return pointer 223qe, an accessory operation flag 223qf, a return delay flag 223qg, and a return standby flag 223qh have been added. It is different in that it is. Further, the interruption flag 223m, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the preparing state flag 223fd, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff. , RUSH middle flag 223fg, ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, super RUSH middle flag 223fi, and continuous disconnection effect counter 223na are different in that they are deleted. These deletions are mainly intended to eliminate flags and counters for managing various effects that are not executed in the 14th embodiment.

The slave set value storage area 223qa is a storage area for storing data indicating the set value of the pachinko machine 10. In the sub-set value storage area 223qa, when the data indicating the set value set in the setting change state is notified as the set value command from the main control device 110, the data corresponding to the set value notified by the command is given. Is stored (see S14204 in FIG. 358).

The slew count counter 223qb is a counter for counting the continuous number of times (the number of slews) that could not be shifted to the advantageous gaming state. When setting the effect mode of the variable pattern effect, the number of slews indicated by the value of the slew count counter 223qb and the specified contents of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa are referred to, and whether or not the winning rate suggestion effect can be executed. The lottery probability is determined (see S18215 in FIG. 363).

The initialization flag 223qc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for executing the return operation of the accessory that is executed based on the power-on. While the initialization flag 223qc is on, the initial operation process (see FIG. 357), which is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory, is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223qc is off, it indicates that the return operation of the accessory has already been completed, so that the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) is skipped (see S8901: No in FIG. 356). This initialization flag 223qc is set to on in the origin return process (see S4021) of the start-up process 14 (see FIG. 353) (see S8807 in FIG. 354). On the other hand, in the initial operation process, it is set to off when it is determined that the return operation of the accessory has been completed (that is, when the END information is read from the power return operation table 222qc) (see S9104 in FIG. 357). ).

The on-time operation flag 223qd is a flag indicating whether or not the home return of the accessory executed before the power return operation is completed. When the closing operation flag 223qd is on, it indicates that the origin return of the accessory is completed, and when it is off, it indicates that the origin return is not completed. This closing operation flag 223qd is set to ON when it is determined that the home return operation has been completed (see S9008 in FIG. 357). Further, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the operation flag 223qd at the time of turning on is also cleared (that is, turned off) by shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

The return pointer 223qe is used to select the operation data of the accessory from the power return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346 (a)) that defines the operation content of the return operation of the accessory that is executed based on the power-on. Be done. More specifically, each time the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) executed at 1 ms intervals is executed, the return pointer 223qe is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223qe), and the update is performed. The operation of the accessory indicated by the value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223qe is cleared to zero based on the power being cut off (the value becomes 0000H). Therefore, every time the power is turned on, the return operation of the accessory can be executed from the beginning of the power return operation table 222qc.

The accessory operation flag 223qf is a flag indicating whether or not each accessory is variable. The accessory operation flag 223qf is composed of 2 bytes, and each accessory is associated with each bit. Each bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf indicates that the corresponding accessory is variable when the value is 1, and indicates that the corresponding accessory is stopped when the value is 0. The value of the free bit is fixed at 0. Based on the state of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf, the type of the accessory in operation can be specified.

The return delay flag 223qg indicates that the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the accessory is delayed until the setting confirmation state is completed because the setting confirmation state is set when the power is restored. It is a flag to indicate.

The return standby flag 223qh is a flag for indicating that the setting confirmation state set at the time of power recovery has been completed and the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the accessory can be started. be.

<About the main control process in the 14th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 352. First, the details of the special symbol variation processing 14 (S181) in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 347. This special symbol variation process 14 (S181) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 13 (FIGS. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

Of the special symbol variation processing 14 (S181), in each of the processes S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10222, and S10225, S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10201 to S10213 to the special symbol variation processing 13 (FIGS. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S10222 and S10225 is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 14 (S181) in the 14th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S10231), and when it is determined that the present is a big hit (S10231: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10231, when it is determined that the current time is not a big hit (S10231: No), the process shifts to S10201.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 347) in the 14th embodiment, each process of S10202 to S10206 relating to the lottery of the first special symbol and each process of S10208 to S10211 relating to the lottery of the second special symbol The processing order has been changed. That is, in the 14th embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 347) in the 14th embodiment, after the processing of S10206 or S10211, the first symbol display device 37 replaces the special symbol variation start processing 13 (see FIG. 319). The special symbol variation start process 14 for starting the variation display is executed (S10232), and this process is terminated. The details of the special symbol change start processing 14 (S10232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 348.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 347) in the 14th embodiment, when the processing of S10219 is completed, the limit arrival flag 203gb is set to off, and the processing shifts to S10220. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 14 (S181) in the 14th embodiment, after the processing of S10222 is executed, the process proceeds to the processing of S10225 as it is. This is because, in the 14th embodiment, no deviation is provided as a result of the lottery of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the above-mentioned special symbol variation start processing 14 (S10232) will be described. This special symbol variation start process 14 (S10232) is a process to be executed in place of the special symbol variation start process 13 (FIGS. 319, S10212) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

In each of the special symbol variation start processes 14 (S10232), S321, S323 to S326 and S330 to S334, S321 and S321 of the special symbol variation start process 13 (FIGS. 319 and S10212) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S323 to S326 and S330 to S334 are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 348, in the special symbol variation start processing 14 (S10232) in the 14th embodiment, first, after the processing of S321 is executed, whether or not the probability change flag 203fa is turned on, that is, the present is. When it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change state (S341) and it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON (S341: Yes), the first random number 14 table 202pa for high probability (FIG. 335). Of (see (a)), the hit random number value corresponding to the current set value is read (S342), and the process proceeds to S344. On the other hand, in the process of S341, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203fa is off (S341: No), the current random number 14 table 202pa for low probability (see FIG. 335 (a)) is present. The hit random number value corresponding to the set value is read out (S343), and the process proceeds to S344.

In the process of S344, the lottery result is acquired based on the winning random number value read in the process of S342 or S343 and the data of the execution area (S344), and the process proceeds to the process of S323.

The processes of S3341 to S344 do not have the probabilistic function in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, but are changed by having the probabilistic function in the fourteenth embodiment.

Next, the details of the set value control process 14 (S1731) in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 349. The set value control process 14 (S1731) is a process executed in place of the set value control process (FIGS. 291 and S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and executes control in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. It is a process to do.

In each of the set value control processes 14 (S1731), S3101 to S3113, the same processes as those of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control processes (FIGS. 291 and S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed. NS.

Further, in the set value control process 14 (S1731) in the 14th embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key is in the off position (S3108: Yes), the data of the set value storage area 203ma is shown. The set value command is set (S3121), and this process ends. By executing the process of S3121, the set value can be immediately notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when the setting change state is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, the details of the main process 14 of the main control device 110 in the 14th embodiment will be described. This main process 14 (see FIG. 350) is a process to be executed in place of the main process 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

In each of the main processes 14 of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816, the same processes as those of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main process 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment are executed. NS.

Further, in the main process 14 (see FIG. 350) in the 14th embodiment, after executing the process of S1803, the jackpot control process 14 is executed instead of the jackpot control process 13 (see FIG. 323) in the 13th embodiment. (S1851), the process proceeds to S1806. The details of the jackpot control process 14 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. 351.

Of the jackpot control processes 14 (S1851), the processes S1901 to S1912 and 1918 are the same as the processes S1901 to S1912 and 1918 of the jackpot control process 13 (FIGS. 322 and S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351, in the jackpot control process 14 (S1851) in the 14th embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1912 that the current timing is the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the jackpot ends. The jackpot end process 14 for setting the later game state is executed (S11911), and this process is ended. The details of the jackpot end processing 14 (S11911) will be described with reference to FIG. 352.

As shown in FIG. 352, in the jackpot end processing 14 (S11911), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S3501). In the processing of S3501, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot (that is, it is a normal jackpot) (S3501: No), the value of the limit counter 203ga is set to 0 (S3502), and the probability variation flag 203fa is set. It is set to off (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3508.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S3501: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203ga (S3504), and then the value of the limit counter 203ga after the addition is added. It is determined whether or not the value is 11 (S3505). In the processing of S3505, if it is determined that the value of the limit counter after addition has reached 11 (S3505: Yes), the limit arrival flag 203gb is set to ON (S3507), and after the processing of S3502 and S3503 is executed, S3508 Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the processing of S3505, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203ga after addition is not 11 (S3505: No), the probability variation flag 203fa is set to ON (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

In the process of S3508, the number of time reductions corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203 mb, and the state of the limit arrival flag are read from the time reduction assignment table 202qf (see FIG. 341) (S3508). , The read time reduction number is set to the counter value of the time reduction counter 203h (S3509). Next, a time reduction setting status command for notifying the set number of time reductions is set (S3510), a status command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot is set (S3511), the type of jackpot being executed, and the winning status. The fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the data of the storage area 203 mb and the state of the limit arrival flag is specified (S3512). Then, the data indicating the scenario specified in the process of S3512 is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area (S3513), the end of the jackpot is set (S3514), and the present process is terminated. By executing this jackpot end processing 14 (see FIG. 352), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends, taking into account the probability variation limit number of times.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 14th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 to 363. First, with reference to FIG. 353, the details of the start-up process 14 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 14th embodiment will be described. The start-up process 14 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is executed based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. It is a process.

In each of the start-up processes 14 of S4001 to S4011, the same processes as those of S4001 to S4011 of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed. NS.

Further, in the start-up process 14 in the 14th embodiment, when the process of S4001 is completed, the arrangement of each accessory at the time of power-on is determined, and if there is an accessory deviated from the origin, the origin is found. The origin return process for returning to the position is executed (S4021), and the process proceeds to the process of S4002. The details of the origin return process (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG. 354.

As shown in FIG. 354, in the home-origin return processing (S4021), first, it is determined whether or not a state command indicating a setting change state has been received (S8801). If it is determined that a status command indicating the setting change status has been received in the processing of S8801 (S8801: Yes), the return delay flag 223qg is turned on to delay the start of the origin return operation and the power return operation of the accessory. (S8802), and this process ends. As a result, it is possible to delay the return operation of the accessory until the setting change state is completed, so that it is possible to prevent the accessory from operating in the setting change state and making it difficult to perform the setting change operation. Can be done. Further, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, so that an abnormal load is generated when the return operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft. There is a possibility of causing damage such as. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. , It is possible to prevent damage to the opening / closing shaft and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of S8801 when it is determined that the status command indicating the setting change status has not been received (S8801: No), it is then determined whether or not the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8801: No). S8803). When it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8803: Yes), the initialization flag 223qc and the on-time operation flag 223qd are set to off (S8804), and this process is terminated. That is, it is set so as not to perform (avoid) the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the accessory. This is because the setting confirmation state is often changed by the operation of the operator (for example, a clerk in the hall) in the situation where the pachinko machine 10 is operating without any problem in the playable state. This is because it is extremely unlikely that something is wrong. By avoiding the return operation of the accessory in the setting confirmation state, the time from the end of the setting confirmation state to the transition to the state where the game can be performed as usual including the operation of the accessory is shortened. can do.

On the other hand, in the process of S8803, if it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has not been received (S8803: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that deviates from the origin (S8805). ). In the process of S8805, when it is determined that there is an accessory deviated from the origin (S8805: Yes), the operation in the direction of the origin position is set for the accessory deviated from the origin (S8806), and S8807 Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin (S8805: No), the process of S8806 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8807. In the process of S8807, the initialization flag 223qc is set to ON (S8807), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the details of the main process 14 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th embodiment will be described. The main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the main processes 14, in each of the processes S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118, S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 of the main process (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

Further, in the main process 14 in the 14th embodiment, when the process of S4111 is completed, the accessory control process for controlling the operation of various accessories is then executed (S4141). The details of this accessory control process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357. When the process of S4141 is completed, the command determination process 14 is then executed (S4142). The details of this command determination process 14 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 358 to 361. After executing the process of S4142, the variable display setting process 14 is executed (S4143), and the process proceeds to the process of S4114. Details of the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363.

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, the contents of the accessory control process (S4141), which is one of the main processes 14 (FIG. 355), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 356, in the accessory control process (S4141) in the 14th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223qc is ON (S8901). In the process of S8901, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223qc is on (S8901: Yes), the initial operation process for setting the return operation (initial operation) of the accessory is executed (S8902), and this process is performed. To finish. Details of this initial operation process (S8902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 357.

On the other hand, in the process of S8901 when it is determined that the initialization flag 223qc is off (S8901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory to stop the operation (S8903). When it is determined that there is an accessory to stop the operation (S8903: Yes), the operation stop of the accessory is set, 0 is set to the corresponding bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf (S8904), and the processing of S8905 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S8903, when it is determined that there is no accessory to stop the operation (S8903: No), the process of S8904 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8905.

In the process of S8905, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that starts operation (S8905). In the processing of S8905, when it is determined that there is an accessory to start operation (S8905: Yes), the operation start is set, 1 is set to the corresponding bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf (S8906), and the processing of S8907 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S8905, if it is determined that there is no accessory to start the operation (S8905: No), the process of S8906 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8907.

In the process of S8907, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag 223qh is on (S8907). When it is determined that the return standby flag 223qh is on (S8907: Yes), the return operation of the accessory is delayed and the delay is canceled (the return operation is ready to be executed). In order to mean that, the return standby flag 223qh is set to off (8908), and the process proceeds to S8909. If it is determined that the return standby flag is off (S8907: No), this process ends as it is.

In the process of S8909, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that deviates from the origin (S8909). If it is determined that there is an accessory that deviates from the origin (S8909: Yes), set the operation toward the origin position for the accessory that deviates from the origin (S8910), and turn on the initialization flag 223qc. Set (S8911) and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin (S8909: No), the process of S8910 is skipped, the process of S8911 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the details of the initial operation process (S8902), which is one of the accessory control processes (FIGS. 356 and S4141), will be described.

As shown in FIG. 357, in the initial operation process (S8902) in the 14th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation of the accessory is detected (S9001). If it is determined that an abnormal operation has been detected in the processing of S9001 (S9001: Yes), a notification operation according to the accessory that detected the abnormality is set (S9002), an error command is set (S9003), and S9004. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, if it is determined that no abnormal operation has been detected in the processing of S9001 (S9001: No), the processing of S9002 and S9003 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S9004.

In the process of S9004, it is determined whether or not the on-time operation flag 223qd is on (S9004). When it is determined that the on-time operation flag 223qd is off (S9004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an accessory whose origin is being returned (S9005). If it is determined in the process of S9005 that there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S9005, when it is determined that there is no accessory during origin return (S9005: No), the number of drive steps of all accessory motors is set to 0 (S9006), and the operation is stopped for 1 second. The period is set (S9007), the on-time operation flag 223qd is set to ON (S9008), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9004, when it is determined that the on-time operation flag 223qd is on (S9004: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the operation stop period (1 second) has elapsed (S9009). If it is determined that the operation stop period has not elapsed (S9009: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S9009, when it is determined that the operation stop period has elapsed (S9009: Yes), the return pointer 223qe is updated (S9010), and the power return operation table 222qc (see FIGS. 346 and 3) is restored. The data specified by the pointer 223qe is read (S9011), and then it is determined whether or not the END information is read (S9012). If it is determined that the END information has been read in the processing of S9012 (S9012: Yes), it means that the power recovery operation has ended. Therefore, the initialization flag 223qc and the on-time operation flag 223qd are set to off (S9014). ), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9012, when it is determined that the data read from the power recovery operation table 222qc is not END information (S9012: No), the operation of the accessory corresponding to the read data is set (S9013). End the process.

Next, the details of the command determination process 14 (S4142) in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 358. The command determination process 14 (S4142) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 11 (FIGS. 293 and S4131) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above.

In each of the command determination processes 14 (S4142), S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235, and S4242, the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235, and S4242 of the command determination process 11 (FIGS. 293 and S4131) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 358, in the command determination process 14 (S4142) in the 14th embodiment, when it is determined that the state command has been received in the process of S4231 (S4231: Yes), the 13th embodiment (S4231: Yes) And 11th Embodiment), instead of the state command reception process 11 (see FIG. 294), the state command reception process 14 is executed (S14201), and this process is terminated. Details of this state command reception process 14 (S14201) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360.

Further, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4218: Yes), the jackpot-related process 14 for executing the control according to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S14202). , End this process. The details of the jackpot-related process 14 (S14202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 361.

On the other hand, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether or not the set value command has been received (S14203). When it is determined that the set value command has been received (S14203: Yes), the slave set value storage area 223qa is updated according to the set value indicated by the command (S14204), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S14203, when it is determined that the set value command has not been received (S14203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4220.

Next, with reference to FIG. 359, the contents of the state command reception process 14 (S14201), which is one of the commands in the command determination process 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described. This state command receiving process 14 (S14201) is a process executed in place of the state command receiving process 11 (FIGS. 294, S4241) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above.

Of the state command receiving processes 14 (S14201), the processes S4509 and S451 to S4514 are the processes of the state command receiving processes 11 (FIGS. 294 and S4241) of the thirteenth embodiment, respectively, and the processes S4509 and S451 to S4514. The same process is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 359, in the state command receiving process 14 (S14201) in the 14th embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4513 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: No), the normal state setting process for executing the control according to the type of the received state command in the state where the normal game is possible is executed (S4521), and the process shifts to the process of S4509. The details of this normal state setting process (S4521) will be described with reference to FIG. 360.

In this normal state setting process (S4521), first, it is determined whether or not the return delay flag 203qg is on (S9101). When it is determined that the return delay flag 203g is on (S9102: Yes), it means that a state command indicating a normal game state has been notified in the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is terminated and the return operation is performed. Since it means that it has become possible, the return delay flag 203qg is set to off, the return standby flag 203qh is set to on (S9102), and the process proceeds to S9105. On the other hand, in the process of S9101 when it is determined that the return delay flag 203qg is off (S9101: No), then whether or not the received command is a command indicating either a normal state or a latent state is determined. Determine (S9103). In the process of S9103, when it is determined that the received command is a command indicating either the normal state or the latent state (S9103: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the slew count counter 223qb to update (S9104). ), The process proceeds to S9105. On the other hand, in the process of S9103, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the normal state or the latent state (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S9105.

In the process of S9105, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the gaming state (S9105). If it is determined in the process of S9105 that there is a change in the game state (S9105: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S9106), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9105 that there is no change in the gaming state (S9105: No), the process of S9106 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the contents of the jackpot-related process 14 (S14202), which is one process in the command determination process 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described. The jackpot-related process 14 (S14202) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (FIGS. 68, S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the jackpot-related processes 14 (S14202), in each of the processes S4901 and S4902 and S4913 to S4916, S4901 and S4902 of the jackpot-related processes (FIGS. 68 and S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S4913 to S4916 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot-related process 14 (S14202) in the 14th embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received in the process of S4901 (S4901: No), S4913. Move to processing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot-related process 14 (see FIG. 361) in the 14th embodiment, after the process of S4902 is executed, it is determined whether or not the hit is during the time saving state of the normal symbol (S4921). ). If it is determined that the hit is not during the time saving state of the normal symbol (S4921: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4921, when it is determined that the hit is during the time saving state of the normal symbol (S4921: Yes), the value of the slew count counter 223qb is reset to 0 (S4922), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot-related process 14 (see FIG. 361), the number of slews can be reset when the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp how long the disadvantageous situation for the player continues.

Next, the details of the variation display setting process 14 (S4143) in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 362. The variation display setting process 14 (S4143) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 13 (FIGS. 325 and S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

Of the variation display setting process 14 (S4143), in each process of S5231, S5281, S5282, and S5284 to S5287, S5231, S5281, S5282 of the variation display setting process 13 (FIGS. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S5284 to S5287 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 362, in the variation display setting process 14 (S4143) in the 14th embodiment, after the process of S5282 is executed, the effect mode setting process 13 (see FIG. 327) in the 13th embodiment is replaced. , The effect mode setting process 14 is executed (S5291), and the process proceeds to the process of S5284. The details of the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291) will be described with reference to FIG. 363.

Of the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291), in each process of S8207 and S8208, the same process as each process of S8207 and S8208 of the effect mode setting process 13 (FIGS. 326 and S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 363, in the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291) in the 14th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern for suggesting the setting is notified (S18211). When it is determined that the variation pattern for setting suggestion has been notified (S18211: Yes), the setting suggestion effect mode corresponding to the type of variation pattern is determined (S18212), and the process proceeds to S8208. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the even-numbered suggestion super reach is notified, reach occurs in each of the third symbols with the three numbers "2", "4", and "6" (triple reach). When the suggestion effect of setting the mode is set and the fluctuation pattern of the odd-numbered suggestion super reach is notified, the third symbol with the three numbers "1", "3", and "5" is used. When the setting suggestion effect of the mode in which reach occurs (triple reach occurs) is set and the fluctuation pattern of setting 1 negative super reach is notified, two numbers "2" and "6" are added. When the setting suggestion effect of the mode in which reach occurs (double reach occurs) is set in each of the third symbols and the fluctuation pattern of the high setting confirmed super reach is notified, "4", "5", " When the setting suggestion effect of the mode in which reach occurs (triple reach occurs) is set in the third symbol with the three numbers of "6", and the fluctuation pattern of setting 6 confirmed super reach is notified, The setting suggestion effect of the mode in which the reach occurs in the third symbol with the number "6" is set. As a result, when a reach occurs, the set value suggested by the setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped by simply checking the number attached to the reach pattern, so that the player can easily understand the effect. Aspects can be realized.

In the 14th embodiment, when the reach is generated in a variation pattern other than the setting suggestion, the third symbol other than the third symbol with the numbers "1" to "6" used for the setting suggestion is used. (Third symbol with numbers "7" to "9") is configured to generate reach. As a result, it is possible to easily understand whether or not the fluctuation pattern is for setting suggestion simply by checking the number attached to the symbol in which the reach has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize a production mode that is easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the process of S18211, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern for setting suggestion is not notified (S18211: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation this time is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18211: No). S18213). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214). In the process of S18214, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214: Yes), the possibility of executing the state suggestion effect is drawn with the lottery probability corresponding to the value of the slew count counter 223qb (S18215). , It is determined whether or not the lottery for whether or not the execution is possible has been won (S18216). In the process of S18216, when it is determined that the lottery for execution is won (S18216: Yes), the set value and the value of the effect counter 223f correspond to each other with reference to the effect type selection table 222qb (see FIG. 345). The production mode is determined (S18217), and the process proceeds to S8208.

On the other hand, in the processing of S18213, it was determined that the current fluctuation was not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: No), and in the processing of S18214, it was determined that the current state was neither the normal state nor the latent state. In the case (S18214: No) and in the process of S18216, when it is determined that the lottery for whether or not the state suggestion effect can be executed has not been won (S18216: No), the process proceeds to the process of S8207.

By executing this effect mode setting process 14 (see FIG. 363), when a fluctuation pattern for setting suggestion is notified from the main control device 110, an effect suggesting a set value according to the variation type is executed. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern for setting suggestion is not notified, the more the situation that is disadvantageous to the player continues, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect can be. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the variation of the variable display effect that can suggest the setting to the player, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment is configured to execute the big hit lottery of the special symbol and the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the same random number value. Then, a special deviation variation pattern is selected as the deviation variation pattern corresponding to the random number value that is a hit in some set values and is out of order in some set values. In other words, it is possible to infer (narrow down) the set value when the deviation pattern that is selected only for some set values is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the type of fluctuation pattern executed at the time of disconnection, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type drawn by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 simply analyzes the variation pattern command output every time the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the variation pattern effect according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is only necessary to specify the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type and the production mode of the fluctuation pattern effect, and it is not necessary to grasp the set value itself (that is, the main control device). Since the set value does not have to be notified from the 110 to the voice lamp control device 113), the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced and the set value can be prevented from being acquired illegally (the set value does not have to be acquired illegally). Can be suppressed).

Further, in the 14th embodiment, the more disadvantageous the situation is for the player, the higher the execution rate of the specific effect (winning rate suggestion effect) that can suggest the setting. That is, the winning rate increases as the number of times that the game cannot be changed to an advantageous gaming state (probability change state that continues until the next big hit, or a time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the end of the jackpot continues (the number of throughs increases). It was configured so that the execution rate of the suggestion effect was high. As a result, it is possible to remind the player to start the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the disadvantageous situation continues for a long time, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the 14th embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation of each accessory from being disturbed and making it difficult to perform the setting change operation, so that the convenience at the time of the setting change operation can be improved. Further, in the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, so that an abnormal load is generated when the return operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft. There is a possibility of causing damage such as. On the other hand, by delaying the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. , It is possible to prevent damage to the opening / closing shaft and the like.

Further, in the 14th embodiment, when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the origin return operation) is avoided. This is because the situation of the pachinko machine 10 is unlikely to change when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on. With this configuration, the accessory can be returned to the normal movable state at an early stage after the setting confirmation state is completed.

In the 14th embodiment, the winning rate suggestion effect is executed in the normal state as the number of consecutive times (the number of throughs) that could not be shifted to either the advantageous consecutive villa mode or the pullback mode after the end of the big hit increases. It was configured to increase the probability and increase the possibility that the set value would be suggested as a result, but it is not limited to this. For example, the more consecutively the normal jackpot is won, the higher the execution probability of the winning rate suggestion effect may be when the normal state is entered after the jackpot ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered even if he / she wins a disadvantageous normal jackpot.

In the 14th embodiment, the greater the number of consecutive times (the number of throughs) that could not be shifted to either the advantageous consecutive villa mode or the pullback mode after the end of the jackpot, the higher the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect will be executed in the normal state. It was configured to be higher, but it is not limited to this. For example, in combination with the twelfth embodiment described above, in the advantageous consecutive villa mode B (latent state), the winning rate suggestion effect is more likely to be executed as the lottery of the first special symbol continues. May be good. Further, for example, in the consecutive villa mode B, a small hit of the first special symbol, which makes it almost impossible to obtain a prize ball, causes a disadvantageous situation in which the advantageous small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped. The more it occurs, the more likely it is that the winning rate suggestion effect will occur. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the stress of the player when a disadvantageous situation occurs. Further, for example, in the probabilistic state, the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes a lottery for whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol each time the lottery of the special symbol is executed is set to the probabilistic state. The set value may be more easily suggested by the winning rate suggestion effect as the number of lottery of the special symbol from the time when the game is played to the time when the special symbol is won in the fall lottery is smaller. With this configuration, the player's disappointment can be reduced even if the player falls into a low-probability state of a disadvantageous special symbol with a small number of lottery.

In the 14th embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot determination value (random value) is different depending on the setting, and some of the set values are out of order, and some of the set values are out of order. By configuring so that a special fluctuation pattern is determined in such a case, it is possible to suggest a set value by the special fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration is such that different data is simply referred to the fluctuation pattern selection table defined according to the setting, and a fluctuation pattern that is easily selected by some setting values and a fluctuation pattern that is selected only by some setting values are provided. You may. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to set the jackpot determination value as a discrete value, so that it is possible to reduce the trouble of the developer when setting the jackpot determination value.

In the 14th embodiment, when the setting key 110b is on and the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the return operation of the accessory is delayed, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the return operation of the accessory may be unconditionally executed. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period from the end of the setting change state to the state in which the normal game can be performed including the accessory.

In the 14th embodiment, only the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the setting, but this is the target that can be made different according to the setting. It is not limited to. The degree of advantage of the player may differ depending on the set value. For example, the probability variation limit may be increased as the setting becomes higher. With this configuration, when shifting to the consecutive villa mode, the higher the setting, the more times the consecutive villa mode is likely to loop, so the pachinko machine with a higher setting value for the player. You can strongly desire to play a game at 10. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying more attention to the contents of the setting suggestion effect and the winning rate suggestion effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 14th embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on (that is, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c on the back side of the pachinko machine 10). (If) is configured to delay the start of the return operation (origin return operation, power return operation) of the accessory until the setting change state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, even if the setting change state ends, the start of the return operation of the accessory may be delayed while at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open. With this configuration, the accessory operates in a state where the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, and the load on the opening / closing shaft and the front frame 14 of the inner frame 12 is different from that during the normal game. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hinge 18 and the hinge 19 from being damaged as a result of a larger load than usual.

In the 14th embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the start of the return operation of the accessory is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Some or all of the accessories may be executed based on the power-on without delaying the return operation. In this case, the function of starting the return operation immediately after the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the setting is changed does not interfere with the setting change operation, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In the state, the amount of movement of the center of gravity position based on the movement of the accessory may be set to be within a predetermined amount (for example, 5 cm). When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, they are supported only by the opening / closing shaft, so that the position of the center of gravity can be greatly deviated (a heavy weight or a fast moving object). , An accessory with a long moving distance, etc.) may cause an excessive load on the opening / closing shaft. Therefore, by configuring the configuration so that only the return operation of the accessory, which has almost no effect on the position of the center of gravity of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 due to the movement, is started immediately after the power is turned on, the opening / closing shaft of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 and the like can be started. Can be prevented from being damaged.

In the 14th embodiment, the third symbol for notifying the jackpot is selected without any limitation. In other words, even if a reach occurs in the third symbol with "6", if three identical third symbols are aligned and a big hit is notified, the setting 6 confirmed super reach, which is a kind of deviation fluctuation, is used. It was configured so that it would be confirmed that there was no such thing, but it is not limited to this. For example, if a reach occurs in the third symbol with the numbers "1" to "6" (that is, if a reach occurs in the third symbol that can be selected by the fluctuation pattern of the setting suggestion), it is a hit. Even if it is configured to suggest the setting with the number attached to the third symbol that has reached even if it is out of the way (it suggests the setting regardless of whether or not the same third symbol is aligned) good. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the jackpot even though he / she thinks that a good setting has been suggested, and making the player think that he / she has been delighted.

<Modified example of the 14th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 368. In the 14th embodiment described above, when a reach occurs in the third symbol display device 81, the number attached to the symbol in which the reach occurs is configured to suggest the type of the variation pattern to the player. Was. More specifically, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of even number setting by simultaneously reaching the third symbol with the three numbers "2", "4", and "6". The fact that reach occurs at the same time in the third symbol with the three numbers "1", "3", and "5" suggests that there is a high possibility of an odd number setting, and "2" and "6" Reaching each of the 3 symbols with 2 numbers suggests that there is no possibility of setting 1, and 3 numbers of "4", "5", and "6" are added. Reaching at the same time in the 3rd symbol suggests that it is a high setting (any of settings 4 to 6), and reaching occurs in the 3rd symbol with the number "6". So, it was configured to suggest that it was setting 6.

In addition to this, in the present modification, various production examples suggesting that the setting suggestion effect may occur depending on the effect mode before the reach occurs will be described.

First, FIG. 368 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the reach symbol selection effect for causing the player to select the type of the reach symbol is executed. This reach symbol selection effect can be executed in a predetermined period (for example, 5 to 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) before the timing when the reach occurs (for example, 11 seconds after the start of fluctuation). It is a sexual production. As shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the reach symbol suggestion effect is executed, a display area imitating a balloon is formed with respect to the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and inside the display area. The text "Choose a reach pattern with PUSH !!" is displayed. Further, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a display area in which the characters "Choose!" Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape is formed in the center thereof, and the upper right side of the main display area Dm is formed. The three third symbols with the numbers "4", "5", and "6" are displayed on the screen, and the third symbol with the numbers "6" is displayed on the lower right side. An area is formed, a display area on which the third symbol with the number "7" is displayed is formed on the upper left side, and numbers "2", "4", and "6" are attached on the lower left side. The three third symbols are displayed. During the execution of this reach symbol selection effect, one of the four display areas in which different combinations of third symbols are displayed is set to look lit (light emitting), and the remaining display area is turned off. Set. The third symbol shown in the display area set to the appearance that is lit when the player presses the frame button (PUSH button) 22 is set as the reach symbol in the variable display effect. As a result, the player can be given the pleasure of selecting the reach pattern, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, if you select the reach in the third symbol with the number "6" and the reach is out, it is confirmed that it is the setting 6 confirmed super reach, so even if it hits, it will be off. Even if it becomes, the player can be pleased. In other words, when the options in the reach symbol selection effect include a combination of symbols such as high setting suggestion super reach and setting 6 confirmed super reach, which are relatively advantageous to the player when the setting is deviated. In addition, a player who desires a high setting can be expected to deviate from the variable display after selecting a combination of symbols for suggesting the setting. On the contrary, a player who expects a big hit can be made to play a game in the expectation that the big hit will be notified. In this way, by executing the reach symbol selection effect, the reach symbol to be selected and the expected variation display result are different depending on whether the player wants a high setting or a player who wants a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the case of a player who desires a high setting, in particular, when the expectation of a notice for the fluctuation (for example, a so-called hold notice effect, a comment notice effect, etc.) is low (content corresponding to a low possibility of becoming a big hit). In the case of), when the combination option (display area) corresponding to the suggestion of the high setting is displayed in the reach symbol selection effect, the expectation that the high setting is suggested can be increased. In other words, when the reach symbol selection effect is executed in consideration of other effects, it is highly likely that the setting is suggested (off) or the jackpot is likely to be notified. Since it is possible to realize the playability of the player, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 368 (b), the reach symbol look-ahead effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 368 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the reach symbol look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 368 (b), when the reach symbol look-ahead effect is executed, the characters "6 reach in hold" are displayed in the small area Ds3. That is, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the reach effect of the effect mode in which the reach is generated by the “6” symbol is executed in the variable display based on any of the reserved balls. Therefore, also in this case. A player who desires a high setting can be expected to come off when a reach occurs with the symbol of "6". In addition, when a notice effect (so-called hold notice effect) in which the display mode of some of the reserved symbols is changed has occurred, the hold ball in which the hold notice effect is generated (that is, the display mode has not been changed). It is possible to realize a novel playability in which it is possible to more strongly expect that the reach of the symbol "6" does not occur in the reserved ball, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reserved ball). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in the reach symbol look-ahead effect, a pattern for notifying another third symbol for setting suggestion is also provided, and another symbol (for example, a "7" symbol having a high expectation of big hit) is notified. Aspects are also provided. As a result, when the reach symbol look-ahead effect is executed, it is possible to realize the playability of estimating the jackpot expectation degree, the expectation degree at which the setting suggestion is made, etc. from the type of the notified symbol. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the 14th embodiment, the set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, but instead of or in addition to this, the third symbol display device 81 May be configured to be displayed as well. In this case, by delaying or avoiding the return operation of the accessory in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the set value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 due to the movement of the accessory is hidden behind the accessory. Since it is possible to suppress the storage, it is possible to more preferably control the operation of the accessory in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state.

In the 14th embodiment, the start of the return operation of the accessory is suppressed (delayed) during the setting change state, but the return operation may be started even in the setting change state. In this case, in the setting change state, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, and in most cases, the clerk in the hall operates the pachinko machine 10 on the back side. It becomes difficult to confirm. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the operation of the accessory during the setting change state, it is more noticeable than in the case where the operation of the accessory occurs in a state other than the setting change state (attention is paid to the back side of the pachinko machine 10). Even if it is done, it may be configured to notify the abnormality in a mode that can be easily noticed). With this configuration, if an abnormality occurs in a part or all of the accessory, the clerk in the hall can easily notice the abnormality.

<15th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 to 367. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described 11th to 14th embodiments, the value of the first random number counter C1 is constantly updated in the main control device 110, and the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of winning the start is obtained. By determining whether or not matches the winning random number, a lottery (big hit lottery) for whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is executed. In addition, the jackpot lottery is executed using the first hit random number table defined by associating different hit random numbers for each set value.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment is configured to provide a random number generation IC 900 capable of generating a winning random number (first hit random number counter R1) in addition to the main control device 110, and this random number at the time of starting winning. The random number value generated by the generation IC 900 (counter value of the first random number counter R1) was acquired and used for the big hit lottery. Further, this random number generation IC900 is configured so that the update range of random numbers can be specified, and by setting different random number update ranges according to the set value, a big hit lottery is performed using a common hit determination value. It is configured so that the probability can be changed. For example, if the random number update range of the second setting is halved with respect to the random number update range of the first setting, the probability denominator of the jackpot probability in the second setting becomes half of the first setting. The jackpot probability in the second setting can be halved from the jackpot probability in the first setting. With this configuration, the main control device 110 simply sets the random number update range according to the set value for the random number generation IC when changing the setting, and when executing the lottery of the special symbol, It is only necessary to compare the common hit random number value with the counter value of the first hit random number counter R1 acquired from the random number generation IC. That is, in the main control device 110, it is not necessary to store different hit determination values for each set value, and only a common 1 hit determination value that does not depend on the setting needs to be stored. The processing load at the time of lottery of special symbols can be reduced by the amount that the process of selecting the hit determination value can be deleted. In addition, the capacity of the random number table per first can be reduced.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is that the random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The point is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The eleventh regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 364. FIG. 364 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 364, in the fifteenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above, the random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. It differs in that it is done. The random number generation IC 900 is used to generate a winning random number (first random number counter R1) acquired based on the starting prize. That is, instead of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, the counter value (random number value) used for the jackpot lottery (determination) executed in the main control device 110 is acquired from the external IC. It is configured to do. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. The random number generation IC 900 can randomly generate a numerical value of 16 bits (0 to 65535) at the maximum as the value of the random number counter R1 per first. This random number generation IC 900 is configured to have, for example, a clock generation circuit capable of generating a clock frequency of 250 kHz inside, and each time a clock signal is generated by this clock generation circuit, it synchronizes with this clock signal. A random number value (value of the random number counter R1 per first) within the set random number update range can be randomly generated. That is, since it is configured to be able to randomly generate a random value every 0.004 milliseconds, it is possible to generate a random value at an interval shorter than the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). can. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the random number value is not updated over a plurality of timer interrupt processes, so that the randomness in the jackpot lottery can be ensured.

In the fifteenth embodiment, only the random number counter R1 per first is generated by the random number generation IC 900, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a part or all of various counter values such as the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, the second hit random number counter C4, and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are generated by the random number generation IC900. It may be replaced with a random number value. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 365. Although not shown, the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment has a random number per first random number 11 instead of the random number 11 table 202ma for the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 268 (a)). The only difference is that the 15 table 202ra is provided and the random number range setting table 202rb that defines the random number update range of the random number generation IC900 for each set value is added.

First, with reference to FIG. 365 (a), the details of the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 365 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment, "0 to 204" is defined as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the height of the special symbol is high. "0 to 643" is defined as a jackpot determination value in the probability state (probability change state). That is, only the jackpot determination value of setting 1 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 269 (a)) is specified. In the fifteenth embodiment, instead of sharing the random number values (hit determination values) defined in the first random number 15 table 202ra, the range of the random number values generated by the random number generation IC 900 is set according to the setting. By making it variable, the jackpot probability for each setting is configured to be the same as that of the eleventh embodiment.

Next, the details of the random number range setting table 202rb according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 365 (b). The random number range setting table 202rb is a data table that is referred to when setting a random number generation range (random number update range) according to the set value for the random number generation IC900. At the end of the setting change state, the random number generation range corresponding to the set value is specified by referring to the random number range setting table 220rb, and the specified random number generation range is set for the random number generation IC900. .. By making the random number generation range different, the probability denominator in the jackpot lottery can be made different for each setting, so that the jackpot probability can be substantially made different according to the setting.

As shown in FIG. 365 (b), in the random number range setting table 202rb according to the fifteenth embodiment, “0 to 65535” is defined in association with the random number generation range corresponding to the setting 1, and corresponds to the setting 2. "0 to 61499" is associated and defined as the random number generation range to be performed, and "0 to 57399" is associated and defined as the random number generation range corresponding to the setting 3, and the random number generation range corresponding to the setting 4 is defined. "0 to 53299" is associated and defined, and "0 to 49199" is associated and defined as the random number generation range corresponding to the setting 5, and "0 to 45099" is defined as the random number generation range corresponding to the setting 6. It is specified in association with each other.

Therefore, in setting 1, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 65536 values of "0 to 65535", the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in setting 1 is 1, respectively. / 320 (205/65536), and 1 / 101.8 (644/65536). Further, in the setting 2, since the value of the random number counter R1 per first can take 61500 values of "0 to 61499", the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in the setting 2 is 1 respectively. / 300 (205/6 1500) and 1 / 95.5 (644/6 1500). Further, in the setting 3, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 57400 values of "0 to 57399", the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in the setting 3 is 1 respectively. / 280 (205/57400) and 1 / 89.1 (644/57400). Further, in the setting 4, since the value of the random number counter R1 per first can take 53300 values of "0 to 53299", the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in the setting 4 is 1, respectively. / 260 (205/53300), and 1 / 82.8 (644/53300). Further, in the setting 5, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 49,200 values of "0 to 49199", the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in the setting 5 is 1 respectively. / 240 (205/49200) and 1 / 76.4 (644/49200). Further, in the setting 6, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 45100 values of "0 to 45099", the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in the setting 6 is 1, respectively. / 220 (205/45100) and 1/70 (644/45100).

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of the common hit determination value that does not depend on the set value is defined for the first random number 15 table 202ra, and the random number generation IC900 generates the random number value. By making the range different according to the set value, the jackpot probability for each setting is changed. With this configuration, the amount of data in the first random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and when the jackpot lottery is executed, the process of reading the jackpot determination value according to the set value becomes unnecessary. , The processing load at the time of big hit lottery can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 15th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367. First, with reference to FIG. 366, the details of the start winning process 15 (S1751) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The start winning process 15 (S1751) is a process executed in place of the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 134) in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), and various random value values (various random values (see FIG. 134)) are executed based on the start winning process. This is a process for acquiring the counter value).

Of the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, in each of the processes S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764, the start winning process 4 in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764 of (see FIG. 134) are executed.

Further, in the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1755 is completed, the value of the first random number counter R1 is then acquired from the random number generation IC 900 (S1771). Further, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 is acquired, and these acquired counter values (random number values) are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da (S1772) and processed. To S1757.

Further, in the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1762 is completed, the value of the first random number counter R1 is then acquired from the random number generation IC900 (S1773). Further, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 is acquired, and these acquired counter values (random number values) are stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db (S1774) and processed. To S1764.

By executing this start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366), the value of the first random number counter R1 randomly generated by the random number generation IC 900 can be acquired every time the start winning is detected.

Next, the details of the set value control process 15 (S1741) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 367. This set value control process 15 (S1741) is executed in place of the set value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process for performing control in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state.

Of the set value control processes 15 (see FIG. 367), in each of the processes S3101 to S3113, the same processes as those of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment are executed. Will be done.

Further, in the set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position, the random number generation range corresponding to the set value is set to the random number range. It is read from the setting table 202rb (see FIG. 365 (b)), the read random number generation range is set in the random number generation IC900 (S3131), and this process is terminated.

By executing this set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), the random number generation range can be set according to the set value. Therefore, the probability denominator is changed according to the set value, and as a result, the set value is set. The jackpot probability can be different accordingly.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment is configured to acquire the counter value (random number value) used for the jackpot lottery (determination) executed in the main control device 110 from an external IC. .. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of the common hit judgment value regardless of the set value is applied to the first random number 15 table 202ra in which the judgment value determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery is defined. Is defined, and the range in which the random number value is generated in the random number generation IC 900 is made different according to the set value, so that the jackpot probability for each setting is changed. With this configuration, the amount of data in the first random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and when the jackpot lottery is executed, the process of reading the jackpot determination value according to the set value becomes unnecessary. , The processing load at the time of big hit lottery can be reduced.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly known as a setting) is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot can be changed according to the setting as a pachinko machine. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The degree of advantage for each setting may be changed by changing the ratio according to the setting. Further, for example, the rate at which the jackpot that is given a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot that is given a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times). The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be changed. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the rate of determination is significantly higher only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot finishes in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of jackpot rounds to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be set to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out is more likely to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probabilistic state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in a slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (The update timing of the number of time reductions and the determination timing of the end of the time reduction are different)
By the discrimination means that executes the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the dynamic display means that can dynamically display the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display means. When the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the first game state, and the first In a gaming machine having a second gaming state different from the gaming state, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of gaming states including at least one of the gaming states, the discrimination by the discriminating means The gaming state setting includes an update means capable of updating the related first information and an end determination means capable of determining whether the first information updated by the update means satisfies the end condition. The means sets the second gaming state when it is determined by the ending determining means that the ending condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set, and the gaming machine sets the second gaming state. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the update timing of the first information by the update means is executed differently from the end determination timing for determining whether the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or failing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is won. If so, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player was executed. Further, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific gaming state is set, an advantageous state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lottery reaches a specific number of times. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can be made to play the game while expecting that the first gaming state is set, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced. Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed for the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery times in the advantageous state and the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the number of lottery times reaching a specific number of times. It was configured to be executed at the timing to be executed, and to provide the player with the set advantageous state for a longer period of time. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed: the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery times in the advantageous state and the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the number of lottery times reaching a specific number of times. Since it is configured to be executed when the execution is performed, there is a problem that the processing to be executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

Further, in recent game machines such as pachinko machines, games for executing privileged games are configured to be playable in duplicate (duplicate games are possible), and lottery in the other game is performed according to the game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation period for showing the result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be executed in duplicate, a game aiming at executing a privilege game can be efficiently performed. Further, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted according to the game result of one game, the privileged game is executed in duplicate by a plurality of games to be executed in duplicate, and the player is notified. On the other hand, it was possible to prevent the execution of a privilege game that was difficult to understand.

However, when the above-mentioned advantageous state can be set for the gaming machine capable of executing the duplicate game, the lottery count measurement (subtraction) processing in the advantageous state and the lottery count have reached a specific number of times. Since the termination process of the advantageous state executed based on is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game is based on the privilege game being given by one game. If the subtraction of the variable time to indicate is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the granted privilege game, the subtraction of the suspended variable time is restarted and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If this is done, there is a problem that the lottery count measurement (subtraction) process is executed. That is, since the lottery count measurement (subtraction) process in the advantageous state is executed based on the fact that the lottery result executed in the non-advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the game in the advantageous state is performed for the player. There was a problem that it could not be executed satisfactorily. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by causing the player to appropriately perform the game in the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A1, the update of the first information by the update means and the end determination by the end determination means can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the end condition is satisfied by updating the first information, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing executed at the same timing, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In the game machine A1, the update timing is the timing at which the determination is executed by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the update timing of the first information related to the discrimination of the discriminating means is set as the timing when the discriminating is executed by the discriminating means. There is an effect that the information can be updated reliably. Further, since the first information can be updated by the updating means by executing the discrimination by the discriminating means, the player is interested in both the discriminating the discriminating means and the set gaming state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game. Further, when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the first information is updated by the update means, so that it is possible to suppress the unnecessary execution of the update process and reduce the processing load. There is.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the ending determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the determination of the end condition is executed during the period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, so that the player can grasp the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It is possible to prevent the gaming state from changing while paying close attention to the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine A3, the discriminating means executes discrimination corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the end discriminating timing is set after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Next, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the determination is performed by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though the update means updates the first information to the first information that can satisfy the end condition, the determination by the determination means is executed before the second game state is set. Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information and the end determination timing are different, there is an effect that the determination executed by the determination means can be appropriately executed.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the first information is updated by the updating means based on the number of times of the determination executed by the discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated every time the discrimination means executes the discrimination, so that the update status of the first information is updated for the player. Can be made easy to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming state suddenly shifts to the second gaming state and the player is confused.

In the gaming machine A5, the updating means updates the first information between the execution of the determination by the determination means and the execution of the dynamic display for showing the determination result of the determination. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, since the first information is not updated during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machines A1 to A6, when the interruption condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display and the interruption means interrupt the interruption. It is possible to change the restart means for restarting the dynamic display when the restart condition is satisfied and the first information updated by the update means when the dynamic display is interrupted by the suspend means. The gaming machine A7, characterized in that it has various information variable means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing means. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the presence or absence of interruption in addition to the discrimination result of the discrimination means during the dynamic display of the identification information, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. ..

In the gaming machine A7, the information variable means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can be made to play the game while expecting that the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the privileged game executing means also performs the privileged game when a second condition different from the first condition that can be satisfied based on the result of the determination executed by the discriminating means is satisfied. The gaming machine A9 is feasible, and the interruption condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7 or A8, the interruption condition can be satisfied when the second condition that the privilege game can be executed without using the discrimination by the discriminating means is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game different from the discrimination of the discrimination means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that it has a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the second condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball-entry means. A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A9, as a game different from the discrimination by the discriminating means, a game in which the gaming ball is inserted into the ball entering means can be performed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine A10, a variable member that can be changed into a first state in which the gaming ball can enter the ball entering means and a second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and its variable The variable control means has a variable control means capable of executing a variable operation for changing the member to the first state for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the execution condition, and the variable control means is in a state in which the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the variable operation than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the period during which the first gaming state in which the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the second gaming state continues is changed based on the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played a game for satisfying the second condition.

<Characteristic B group> (Depending on the setting conditions, the percentage of benefits given depending on the winning ball will differ)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-entry based on the establishment of execution conditions. A variable control means that changes the means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and a game ball that enters the specific area. A setting information determining means capable of discriminating setting information when the variable ball entering means is variably controlled by the variable control means in a gaming machine having the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege based on the above. According to the setting information determined by the setting information discriminating means, the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means easily passes through the specific area and is more difficult to pass than the first state. A gaming machine B1 having a second state and a switching means capable of switching to.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or failing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is won. If so, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player was executed. Further, as a starting port, a variable ball entering means is provided with a variable member attached to the starting port, which can be changed between a first state in which a game ball is allowed to enter and a second state in which a game ball is regulated. There is a gaming machine configured so that an advantageous state that can be easily changed to the first state and a disadvantageous state that is harder to change to the first state than the first gaming state can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). Gazette). In such a gaming machine, the player is enthusiastically played while expecting that an advantageous state is set for the player by making the ease of entering the gaming ball into the variable ball entry means different. However, even if a disadvantageous state is set, if the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means, a lottery will be executed, so the variable ball entry will be performed in the disadvantageous state. There is a possibility that the game is performed at the timing when the means is in the first state, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play to set the advantageous state is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, in a state where a disadvantageous state is set, it is difficult to execute a lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine B1, the first state and the second state can be switched according to the setting information, so that the player is interested in the setting information at the time when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means. Can be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 has an operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means, and the switching means means that the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means has a first flow path and the first flow path thereof. The plurality of flow paths can be switched so as to flow down any one of the plurality of flow paths including a different second flow path, and the operation control means is based on the variable control means. The operation control to the switching means is started based on the start of the control, and the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path by the switching means can pass through the specific region. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation of the switching means is controlled by the motion control means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the specific region when it flows down the first flow path by the switching means. It is possible. As a result, the variable control for facilitating the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means and the operation control of the switching means can be linked, so that the game ball entered into the variable entry means is in a specific area. There is an effect that it is possible to properly control whether or not to pass through.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming ball that has flowed down to the second flow path by the switching means is more difficult to pass through the specific region than the gaming ball that has flowed down to the first flow path. Game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, it is possible to make it more difficult for the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path to pass through the specific region than the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path. There is an effect that the passing ratio of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the specific area can be set only by controlling the operation of the switching means by the control means.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the pachinko / pachislot machine B2 or B3 has a normal region through which a gaming ball that has entered the variable pachinko means can pass, and the normal region is the specific region of the gaming balls that have entered the variable pachinko means. It is formed so that the game ball that has not passed through the above-mentioned is passed, and the privilege-giving means does not give the privilege when the game ball passes through the normal area. Game machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the normal area, the privilege is not given. Therefore, even if the game ball is excessively entered into the variable ball entry means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the excessive privilege being given to the player. Further, by providing a normal area in the variable ball entry means, the player is excessively privileged even if a mechanism for suppressing the game ball from entering the variable ball entry means is not provided outside the variable ball entry means. Since it is possible to suppress the addition of the ball, there is an effect that the area outside the variable ball entry means can be easily used for other purposes.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is different from the second flow path and the second flow path and the third flow path. A first pachinko machine, which has a distribution means that can be distributed to a fourth flow path, and the gaming machine can enter a game ball that has been distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means as the specific area. It has at least a specific area and a second specific area different from the first specific area in which a game ball distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means can enter, and the privilege granting means. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the content of granting the privilege differs between the case where the game ball enters the first specific area and the case where the game ball enters the second specific area. B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball flowing down to the first flow path by the switching means is distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, it passes through the first specific region, and when it is distributed to the fourth flow path, it passes through. It passes through the second specific flow path. As a result, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means according to the establishment status of the setting condition, the ease with which the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means is changed, and further, the privilege is granted by the distribution means. The content of the benefits can be different. Therefore, whether or not the privilege is granted and the content of the privilege to be granted are determined in stages, so that the player is compared with the case where the presence or absence of the privilege and the content of the privilege are determined at once. It has the effect of extending the period of entertaining the game. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating the flow state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flow state of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. In addition, it is preferable to use a function for notifying information for indicating that the setting condition is satisfied. As a result, the player understands that it is easy to give some privilege by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means before the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with expectation.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, there is a gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the switching means is the gaming state. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it is easier to switch to the first state when the first gaming state is set by the setting means than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ease of switching to the first state can be made different according to the set gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the effect. This has the effect of making the player interested in the currently set game state and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-entry means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern. It is controllable, and the switching means can be switched to at least the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means in the first variable pattern. The gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means when the second variable pattern is set than when the variable control means is variably controlled by the first variable pattern. .. Then, the switching means can be switched to the first state when variably controlled by the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls that cannot pass through a specific area are generated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the privilege granting means executes a specific game based on the game ball entering the specific area, and the gaming machine executes the privilege granting means. The gaming machine B8 is characterized by having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when the result of the specific game executed when the gaming ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result, the privilege game is performed. Since it is executed, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically perform a game for passing the game ball to a specific area.

<Characteristic C group> (In a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of games in a duplicated manner, the mode of production related to the other game is set according to the fluctuation time of one).
A discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means that dynamically displays the discrimination information. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the displayed identification information based on the selection information, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means indicate the specific determination result. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific identification information can be executed during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. The game executing means, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect related to the specific game, and the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means are set based on at least the information corresponding to the selection information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by having an effect mode setting means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privileged game is configured to be playable in duplicate (duplicate game is possible), and a game result is shown for each game to be executed in duplicate. There is a gaming machine that executes the effect display of (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, when a plurality of games are executed in duplicate, each game can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by looking at each effect display that is executed in duplicate. Since the effect mode of the effect display to be performed is determined only based on the content of the corresponding game, and it is not possible to execute the effect related to a plurality of games to be executed in duplicate, the effect display being executed is performed. There is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the entire game that is being executed in duplicate and the effect of the production is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, by performing an effect that makes it easy to grasp the contents of a plurality of games that are executed in duplicate, the effect of the effect is enhanced, and a gaming machine that allows the player to play the game enthusiastically is provided. The purpose is.

According to the gaming machine C1, since the production mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the selection information, the effect in which the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed in duplicate and the specific game are associated with each other is executed. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production. In addition, since the production mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the selection information, it is possible to enthusiastically allow the player to play a plurality of games in order to see various production modes. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine C1 has a remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the effect mode setting means is determined by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the remaining period.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the production mode of the specific effect is set based on the remaining period of the identification information. The production mode of the specific effect can be changed accordingly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game at various timings in order to duplicate the plurality of games in order to see various production modes.

In the gaming machine C2, when the interruption condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display and the interruption means are interrupted. The dynamic display has a restart means for resuming the dynamic display based on the end of the privilege game, and the interruption condition is that the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is a predetermined game result. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is established when the situation is met.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the suspend means. Therefore, it is possible to have a relationship between the discrimination by the discrimination means and the specific game not only in the effect to be executed but also in the actual game, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C3 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game that is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state is executed. The means sets the first game state when a specific period elapses after the second game state is set, and the restart means sets the second game state after the end of the privilege game. When this is done, the suspended dynamic display is restarted as the dynamic display during the second gaming state, and the specific period is the remaining period of the identification information restarted by the restarting means. The game is variable according to the situation, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means. Machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second game state in which the game advantageous to the player is executed is set is changed according to the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interruption means. Then, the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when the effect is interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later depending on the effect mode of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means are It has an advantageous condition determining means for determining whether or not the advantageous conditions are satisfied, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determining means. Amusement machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the advantageous condition determining means whether or not the remaining period satisfies the advantageous condition, and the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the determination result. It has the effect of being able to inform the player of the existence in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine C5, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, when the remaining period of the identification information during the dynamic display is longer than the first period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied, so that the execution is performed. There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically perform the game in order to execute the specific game based on the specific effect.

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information when the game ball enters the entry means, and the acquisition obtained by the acquisition means. The discriminating means has a storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number, and the discriminating means executes discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the discriminating condition is satisfied. It has a pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the acquired information is executed by the discriminating means, and the pre-discrimination The means discriminates in advance the dynamic display period of the identification information for showing the result of discrimination by the discriminating means based on at least the acquired information, and the advantageous condition discriminating means has the remaining period as described above. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the period is longer than the dynamic display period determined by the pre-determination means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the acquired information determined by the discriminating means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage means is preliminarily determined. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the dynamic display during execution is longer than the pre-determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the game can be performed while predicting the interruption timing of the dynamic display that is advantageous to the player based on the specific effect to be executed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition discriminating means determines the discriminating result of the pre-discriminating means corresponding to the acquired information that is next discriminated by the discriminating means among the acquired information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C7 for determining whether or not the target satisfies the above-mentioned advantageous conditions.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information for which the discrimination is executed next by the discrimination means, the moving motion being executed is based on the specific effect to be executed. It is possible to let the player determine whether to interrupt the target display or the next dynamic display to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select the game and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming state setting means displays the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in a state where the first gaming state is set as the specific period. The first gaming state is set when a predetermined period until the stop display is displayed at least two times or more, and the period calculation means capable of calculating the specific period is provided. The period calculation means calculates the specific period by adding up the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means up to the specific number of times, and the period calculation means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized by having a period mode display means capable of displaying the period mode for indicating the specific period calculated in accordance with the above.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to grasp the game situation in the second gaming state based on the effect mode of the specific effect while grasping the length of the specific period by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to various effects to be executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

<Characteristic D group> (The end condition of the winning game is different depending on the operation to the operating means)
A variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the variable when the first condition is satisfied. The specific game executed by the specific game execution means in a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game that changes the ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. The first termination condition, which is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means, and the period during which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state have elapsed the predetermined period. Of the plurality of termination conditions including the second termination condition that is satisfied in the case, the termination means that terminates when one termination condition is satisfied, the first operation, and the second operation that is different from the first operation. The first operation is more likely to be satisfied when the first operation is executed by the operation means than when the second operation is executed. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being a thing.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or failing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is won. If there is, a special game that allows the attacker (specific winning opening) to enter the game ball is executed, and a game machine configured to set a plurality of conditions for ending the special game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a gaming machine, generally, the time end condition for ending the privilege game based on the elapsed time from the execution of the privilege game and the number of game balls entered into the attacker during the privilege game are used. A winning end condition for terminating the award game and a winning end condition are set, and control for terminating the award game is executed when any of the end conditions is satisfied.

However, since the same game is performed each time during the privilege game, even if a plurality of end conditions are set, basically only one of the end conditions is likely to be satisfied. In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to make it easier for the attacker to win a game ball during the award game, the winning end condition is likely to be satisfied before the time end condition is satisfied, and the attacker is notified during the award game. In a gaming machine configured so that it is difficult to win a prize, the time end condition is likely to be satisfied before the prize end condition is satisfied.

In this way, even if a plurality of end conditions for the privilege game are set, if the end conditions that can be satisfied become almost specific end conditions, the advantage of setting a plurality of end conditions, that is, which end condition There is a problem that it becomes difficult to achieve the effect that the player can be interested in the game during the privilege game by making it difficult to understand whether the privilege game ends based on the establishment. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the player enthusiastically plays the game during the privilege game by suppressing the bias of the satisfied end condition to a specific end condition among the plurality of end conditions for terminating the privilege game. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

According to the gaming machine D1, the ending condition for terminating the specific game being executed can be made different according to the operation content executed by the operating means, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine D1 is characterized by having a selection effect executing means capable of executing a selection effect for causing the player to select whether to cause the operation means to execute the first operation or the second operation. The gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the end condition can be selected based on the selection effect executed by the selection effect executing means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine D2 has an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of the selected effect executed by the selected effect executing means, and the effect mode setting means has a case where the first end condition is satisfied and a case where the first end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the effect mode is set differently when the privilege given after the end of the specific game is different from the case where the second end condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the selection effect can be changed according to the privilege given after the end of the specific game, the player pays attention to the selection effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D3, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied and the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. When the dynamic display means capable of the above and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game can be executed. The special game execution means and the period determination means capable of determining the period until the privilege game execution means is executed based on the determination result of the determination means, and the effect mode setting means is the specific game. D4 is a gaming machine D4 for setting an effect mode of the selection effect based on the timing at which is executed and the determination result of the period determination means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the selection effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing at which the privilege game is executed, any of the specific games being executed is set based on the selected effect to be executed. If the end condition is satisfied, the game can be played while predicting whether the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game can be shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine D4 has a second variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a third state in which the game ball can enter and a fourth state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third state. As the privilege game, the privilege game executing means changes the second variable ball-entry means into the third state and the fourth state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern, and the privilege game executing means causes the privilege game execution means. The types of the privileged games to be executed include the first privileged type and the second privileged type in which the second variable ball-entry means is in the fourth state during the privileged game longer than the first privileged type. It has a type setting means for setting one privilege type among a plurality of privilege types including at least, and the effect mode setting means is executed at the end timing of the specific game based on the start timing of the specific game. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the production mode is different depending on whether the type of the privilege game that can be played is the first privilege type or the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game can be executed at the end timing of the specific game, the effect mode of the selection effect is set according to the type of the privilege game. It is possible to play the game while predicting which end condition is satisfied for the specific game so that the specific game can be ended in a situation advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

In the game machine D5, the end timing of the specific game is the first situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means, or the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a situation determining means for determining whether or not it is the second situation, and the effect mode setting means changes the effect mode depending on whether it is the first situation or the second situation. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the timing at which the specific game can be ended depends on whether the identification information is being dynamically displayed or the privilege game is being executed. Since the modes can be different, it is possible to end the specific game in a situation that is advantageous to the player by satisfying any of the end conditions for the specific game being executed based on the selected effect to be executed. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether it can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine D6 has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the dynamic display at the end timing of the specific game when the situation determining means determines that the first situation is present. The aspect setting means is characterized in that when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by the remaining period determining means, an effect mode different from that when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period is set. Pachinko machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6, the production mode of the selection effect is different depending on the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing when the specific game can be ended. Therefore, based on the selection effect to be executed, which end condition is satisfied for the specific game being executed is the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether it can be shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

In any of the game machines D4 to D7, the specific game execution means capable of executing the specific game when the execution condition is satisfied, and the specific game in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has an interrupting means for interrupting the dynamic display when the game is started, and a resuming means for resuming the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means when the specific game ends. The gaming machine D8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the dynamic display can be interrupted while the specific game is being executed, the length of the interruption period of the dynamic display can be changed by changing the end condition for ending the specific game. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The game machine D8 has a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine D9 characterized by being possible.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D8, the privilege game can be executed even when the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means passes through a specific area. , It is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting whether to perform a game for satisfying the second end condition or a game for satisfying the first end condition for a specific game, and improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D8 or D9, a gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game more favorable to the player than the first gaming state is executed as a gaming state. The game state setting means has the first game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times while the second game state is set. A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it sets a state.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state in which the game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display is interrupted during the second game state. Is effective when extending the duration of the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether to perform a game for satisfying the second end condition or a game for satisfying the first end condition for the specific game. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Navigation display of the target location of the winning game)
Variable entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the determination is executed when the determination condition is satisfied. The discrimination result of the discrimination means is specified by the discrimination means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when the specific identification information indicating that the determination result of The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine having the above and ..

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or failing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is won. In that case, as a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, a game that opens the ball-entry means, which is normally difficult for the game ball to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting port and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which the game ball is fired to the player is changed depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting opening or the privilege game is performed, so that the player gets tired of it. It was possible to provide a game that does not come.

However, when the privilege game is executed, if the game aiming at the starting port is continuously executed, the ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means during the privilege game, and the player loses. There was a risk that a situation would occur.

Further, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (a state in which the ball is difficult to enter to a state in which the ball is easy to enter can be changed according to the content of the game) within a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the gaming ball should be fired, and there is a problem that an inappropriate game is played and the player loses. rice field. An object of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

According to the game machine E1, a display image showing the variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means by the display control means, so that when the privilege game is executed, the game should be aimed at where to launch the game ball. It is possible to notify a person in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine E1, the display control means uses the display image as the display means at least during the period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed until the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the display image is displayed before the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the gaming ball is launched after seeing the displayed image. In some cases, the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In the game machine E1 or E2, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one privilege game type can be selected from a plurality of privilege game types by the privilege game type selection means and the display control means. The display mode setting means capable of setting the display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display means, and the display mode setting means differs depending on the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection means. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the mode can be set.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 or E2, the display mode of the displayed image can be changed based on the jackpot type, so that the privileged game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner and the privileged game can be executed. The content of the game can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E3, the privilege game execution means can execute the privilege game having a different value according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection means. ..

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, privileged games having different values are executed according to the privileged game type, so that the player is made to pay attention to the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, the variable ball entry means has a ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the display mode setting means is the display means by the display control means. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the display mode of the display image displayed in is variably set based on the detection of the ball entering by the ball entry detecting means.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E4, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means by the ball entry detection means, the display mode of the displayed image is changed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the privileged game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the display mode setting means includes an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine the operation content executed for the operation means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the display mode is variably set based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the display mode of the displayed image can be changed by the player operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

In the game machine E6, the display mode setting means can set a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determination means. ..

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the displayed image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation of the operating means. As a result, the player who does not need to display the display image when the privilege game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed in the display means is used for another effect display. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can execute a suitable display.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display mode setting means can set a rotation display mode in which the display image is rotated from the first position to the second position based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means. A gaming machine E8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation on the operating means, so that the player can visually recognize the detailed configuration of the variable ball entering means. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic F group> (Switch the time reduction end timing according to the conditions)
By the discrimination means that executes the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the dynamic display means that can dynamically display the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display means. When the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game, the first game state, and the first A game state setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, an update means capable of updating predetermined information, and an update means thereof. It has an end determination means capable of determining whether or not the updated predetermined information satisfies the end condition, and the end condition is set by the end determination means in a state where the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine capable of setting the second gaming state when it is determined that the conditions are satisfied has a switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determining means based on the establishment of the switching condition. The gaming machine F1 characterized by.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or failing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is won. If so, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player was executed. Further, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific gaming state is set, an advantageous state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lottery reaches a specific number of times. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can be made to play the game while expecting that the first gaming state is set, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced. Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed for the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery times in the advantageous state and the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the number of lottery times reaching a specific number of times. It was configured to be executed at the timing to be executed, and to provide the player with the set advantageous state for a longer period of time. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed: the measurement (subtraction) process of the number of lottery times in the advantageous state and the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the number of lottery times reaching a specific number of times. Since it is configured to be executed when the execution is performed, there is a problem that the processing to be executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

Further, in recent game machines such as pachinko machines, games for executing privileged games are configured to be playable in duplicate (duplicate games are possible), and lottery in the other game is performed according to the game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation period for showing the result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such a game, since a plurality of games can be executed in duplicate, a game aiming at executing a privilege game can be efficiently performed. Further, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted according to the game result of one game, the privileged game is executed in duplicate by a plurality of games to be executed in duplicate, and the player is notified. On the other hand, it was possible to prevent the execution of a privilege game that was difficult to understand.

However, when the above-mentioned advantageous state can be set for the gaming machine capable of executing the duplicate game, the lottery count measurement (subtraction) processing in the advantageous state and the lottery count have reached a specific number of times. Since the termination process of the advantageous state executed based on is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game is based on the privilege game being given by one game. If the subtraction of the variable time to indicate is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the granted privilege game, the subtraction of the suspended variable time is restarted and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If this is done, there is a problem that the lottery count measurement (subtraction) process is executed. That is, since the lottery count measurement (subtraction) process in the advantageous state is executed based on the fact that the lottery result executed in the non-advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the game in the advantageous state is performed for the player. There was a problem that it could not be executed satisfactorily. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by causing the player to appropriately perform the game in the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the execution timing of the end condition determining means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the first gaming state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the updating means can update the first information based on at least the number of times the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means as the predetermined information, and the switching condition is updated by the updating means. The gaming machine F2, wherein the first information is established when the end condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, when the number of times of discrimination of the discriminating means satisfies the end condition, the switching condition can be satisfied. It is possible to have the player who has executed the determination of the determination means play the game while being excited about whether or not the first gaming state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination when the second discrimination condition is satisfied and the second identification information for showing the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are moved for a predetermined period. The second dynamic display means capable of displaying the target and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means are the second specific identification for showing the specific second determination result. It has a second privilege game execution means capable of executing the second privilege game when the information is stopped and displayed, and the switching condition is such that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second determination. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that it can be established when it is a result.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the switching condition can be satisfied based on the second discrimination executed by the second discriminating means different from the discriminating means. When the determination of the determination means is executed until the condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the switching condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means delays the execution timing of the end condition determination means by a specific period, and the determination means is the first determination executed during the specific period. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it executes a determination corresponding to a gaming state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first game determines the discrimination means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition determining means is delayed by the switching means. It can be executed as a determination in the state, and has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, the game state display means has a game state display means capable of displaying a display mode for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means on the display means, and the game state display means As a display mode for indicating that the first gaming state is set, a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode can be displayed, and the second display mode can be displayed. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the aspect is displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determining means is switched by the switching means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the execution timing of the end condition determining means is switched by the switching means as a display mode indicating the state in which the first gaming state is set. Since the second display mode displayed in the case can be displayed, there is an effect that the current gaming state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic G group> (The navigation display of the target device of the winning game is changed according to the progress of the game)
When the first variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state and the first execution condition are satisfied. In a gaming machine having the first privilege game execution means capable of executing the first privilege game that changes the first variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, the game ball The second variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a third state in which a ball can be entered, a fourth state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third state, and the first privilege game execution means. When the game result of the first privilege game is a predetermined game result, the second privilege game capable of executing the second privilege game in which the second variable ball-entry means is changed from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period is possible. When the privilege game execution means and the first privilege game are executed, the display means is displayed with the first display image showing the first variable ball entry means, and when the second privilege game is executed, the second privilege game is executed. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a display control means for displaying a second display image showing the second variable ball entry means on the display means.

In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or failing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result that is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is won. In that case, as a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, a game that opens the ball-entry means, which is normally difficult for the game ball to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of the starting port and the arrangement position of the ball entry means opened during the privilege game are different (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which the game ball is fired to the player is changed depending on whether the game is aimed at the starting opening or the privilege game is performed, so that the player gets tired of it. It was possible to provide a game that does not come.

However, when the privilege game is executed, if the game aiming at the starting port is continuously executed, the ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means during the privilege game, and the player loses. There was a risk that a situation would occur.

Further, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (a state in which the ball is difficult to enter to a state in which the ball is easy to enter can be changed according to the content of the game) within a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the gaming ball should be fired, and there is a problem that an inappropriate game is played and the player loses. rice field. An object of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

According to the gaming machine G1, a display image showing the variable ball entry means corresponding to the privileged game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means, so that when the privileged game is executed, the game ball is aimed at. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not to fire. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine G1, the display control means displays the first display image in the period from when the first execution condition is satisfied until the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is displayed on a display means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the gaming ball is displayed after seeing the displayed image. When fired, the game ball can be entered into the first variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the second display image when the first privilege game is executed by the first privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, during the execution of the first privilege game, the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second privilege game that can be executed next. At least part of it is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the game method after the first privilege game is completed in advance, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the first display image when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the first display image showing the first variable ball entry means corresponding to the first privileged game that has already been executed during the execution of the second privileged game. At least part of is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can visually recognize the content of the privileged game executed in the past, and the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the display control means has the first display image and the display before the first privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the first execution condition. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the second image is displayed in order.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the first execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the player of the flow of a plurality of privileged games that can be executed in the future. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp a series of game methods in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic H group> (Performs games that are likely to have a pending number of advantageous games that can be executed and games that are difficult to be executed)
An information acquisition means that acquires information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and a storage means that can store the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the determination condition for the information is satisfied. When the discrimination condition is satisfied, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means and the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the dynamic display means and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. In the game machine having the above, the game machine is more likely to be a player when the number of the information stored in the storage means satisfies the predetermined condition than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is easy to execute an advantageous advantageous game.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. A gaming machine in which an advantageous privileged game is executed has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port, the lottery right for executing the winning / losing lottery of the game can be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the gaming with the same degree of advantage is executed regardless of the number of lottery rights stored on hold, there is a problem that the gaming tends to be monotonous. Therefore, it is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, the ease of executing the advantageous game can be made different depending on the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the number of information stored in the storage means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine includes a first game in which the number of information stored in the storage means easily satisfies the predetermined condition, and a second game in which the predetermined condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first game. The gaming machine H2, which is characterized by being capable of executing.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the number of information stored in the storage means in the first game can more easily satisfy a predetermined condition than in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H2, the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number, and the first game is the storage. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that when the number of the information stored in the means is larger than the specific number, the number of the information can be easily reduced as compared with the second game.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, when the first game is executed when the number of information is larger than the specific number, the number of information is reduced as compared with the execution of the second game. Since it can be facilitated, it is possible to facilitate the number of information to be a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who is playing the game in a state where the number of information is larger than the specific number can be made to play the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of the information than the second game when the number of the information stored in the storage means is smaller than the specific number. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when the first game is executed when the number of information is less than a specific number, the number of information is larger than that when the second game is executed. Since it can be easily increased, the number of information can be easily increased to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who is playing the game in a state where the number of information is less than the specific number can be made to play the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, when the first condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is established. The first game has a forcible stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information by the time the above has elapsed, and the first game can forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information by the forcible stop means. The second game is characterized in that it is more difficult for the forced stop means to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information than in the first game.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed can be forcibly stopped by the forced stopping means. As a result, it is possible to end the dynamic display of the identification information without waiting for the identification information being executed to be dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that the next discrimination by the discrimination means can be easily executed, the game efficiency can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine H5 has a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination different from the discrimination when a second discrimination condition different from the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the first condition is at least the first. 2. The gaming machine H6, which can be established when the result of the second determination by the determination means is a specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, the first condition can be easily satisfied when the result of the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is a specific second discriminating result. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by providing a novel game property of executing the second discrimination by the second discrimination means in order to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic I group> (A variable display in which the number of time reductions is updated during the time reduction period and a variable display in which the number of time reductions is not updated are provided)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means that dynamically displays the discrimination information. A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, a first game state, and the first game state. Is executed in a state in which the second gaming state is set in a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including different second gaming states. A gaming machine characterized by having an updating means capable of updating the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information and a limiting means for limiting the updating of the first information by the updating means. I1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the number of lottery executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number of times, the time-saving game ends, so that the player can easily predict the remaining period of the time-saving game. There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. Therefore, it is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed while the second gaming state is set, the update of the first information is restricted by the limiting means when the first condition is satisfied. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when the end condition based on the first information is satisfied while the second gaming state is set. Characteristic gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, it is possible to make it difficult to end the second gaming state by restricting the update of the first information by the limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the end condition of the second game state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I2, the discriminating means is performed by the player when the discriminating means is executed in the state where the second gaming state is set, rather than when the discriminating is executed in the state where the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine I3, characterized in that it executes a determination that is advantageous to the pachinko machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, the second gaming state becomes a gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state, so that during the period when the second gaming state is set. It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the number of dynamic impressions to be executed increases, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I3, the updating means can update the dynamic display number of times of the identification information executed in a state where the second gaming state is set as the first information. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed is updated as the first information by the updating means, so that the second gaming state is set. The second gaming state ends based on the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated even though the dynamic display of the identification information is executed according to the conditions that are satisfied, so that the player can be provided with a surprising game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when a special condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is set. It has a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information by the time elapses, and the first condition can be satisfied when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means. The gaming machine I5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stopping means, the first condition is satisfied and updated by the limiting means. The update of the first information by means is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first information from being updated due to the dynamic display of the identification information that could not be dynamically displayed normally. Therefore, the identification information is set in the second game state. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the end of the second game state without being able to display the information normally.

In the gaming machine I5, the forced stop means is forced to stop with identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, regardless of the discrimination result of the discrimination means corresponding to the identification information. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is intended to be used.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, when the identification information is forcibly stopped, the specific game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the second game state ends without being able to normally dynamically display the identification information in the state where the second game state is set. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine I6 has a second discriminating means capable of executing a second discriminating different from the discriminating when a second discriminating condition different from the discriminating condition is satisfied, and the specific game executing means is the first discriminating means. The specific game is executed even when the result of the second determination by the two determination means is a specific second determination result, and the special condition is at least the result of the second determination by the second determination means. I7 is a gaming machine I7, which can be established when is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I6, a special condition is satisfied when the second discrimination result of the second discriminating means capable of executing the specific game is a predetermined second discriminating result, and the machine is forcibly stopped. The dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the means. As a result, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed in order to execute the specific game, even if the result of the predetermined second determination is obtained before the result of the specific second determination, the specific identification This has the effect of forcibly stopping the dynamic display of information and suppressing the update of the first information.

In the game machine I7, as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, the first specific game type and the second specific game capable of executing a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type. It has a game type determining means for determining one specific game type from a plurality of specific game types including a game type, and the game type determining means is combined with the specific second determination result by the second determining means. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that it is easier to determine the second specific game type than when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I7, the second discriminating means is more likely to give a discriminating result more favorable to the player than the discriminating means, so that the second discriminating is positively executed for the player. Can be made to. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting means can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second discriminating means is easier to execute the second discriminating when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine I9 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination by the second determining means is performed when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. Is easy to execute, so that the player can positively execute the second determination in the state where the second gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting means can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic J group> (When the condition for stopping and displaying the variable display during execution is satisfied, the stop control content is switched based on the content of the variable display during execution)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display means that dynamically displays the discrimination information. The dynamic display in a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. When the switching condition is satisfied with the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the means and the state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. In addition, a specific control means capable of executing specific control for switching the dynamic display mode to the specific dynamic display mode according to a condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine J1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In addition, in some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, when one lottery is won, the other lottery result is forcibly discarded. In this case, the other lottery result is forcibly discarded regardless of the content of the other lottery result, which may be disadvantageous to the player in some cases and give the player a sense of distrust. There was a problem. Therefore, it is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming. In addition, the above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Although it is described, the problems solved by the technical idea of this feature group are not limited to the simultaneous variable machines, and the game machines other than the simultaneous variable machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and lottery (variation) of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine J1, when the switching condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is specified according to the condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. It is possible to switch to the target display mode. As a result, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information during execution. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is switched, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of distrust, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine J1, when the specific control means is executed, the specific control means has a plurality of specific dynamic display modes according to conditions satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it switches to any of the specific dynamic display modes.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, when the specific control is executed, the specific dynamic display mode can be changed according to the conditions satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information. .. As a result, the specific control corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information can be determined, so that when the specific control is executed for the dynamic display of the identification information, a game that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 has a second discrimination means that executes a second discrimination different from the discrimination when a second discrimination condition different from the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the switching condition is the second discrimination. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it can be established when the result of the second determination by the means is a predetermined second determination result.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the result of the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is a predetermined second discriminating result, the switching condition is satisfied and the specific control is executed. It will be. Therefore, the control content of the specific control is related to both the discriminant result by the discriminating means and the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J3, the specific game executing means also performs the specific game even when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being feasible.

According to the gaming machine J4, since the specific game can be executed even based on the second discrimination by the second discriminating means, both the discriminating means and the second discriminating the second discriminating means are performed by the player. Can be motivated. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency with which the specific control is executed can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means at least determines the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is the case where the longer the dynamic display period is, the shorter the dynamic display period is. The gaming machine J5, which is characterized by being easier to establish than.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the longer the dynamic display period, the easier it is for the switching condition to be satisfied, so that the dynamic display is performed dynamically by the dynamic display means. There is an effect that the player can be interested in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the remaining period determination means capable of determining the residual dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is provided, and the switching condition is the remaining period. The game J6 is characterized in that the ease of establishment is different depending on the length of the residual dynamic display period determined by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the ease with which the switching condition is satisfied can be different depending on the length of the residual dynamic display period. On the other hand, there is an effect that the length of the residual dynamic display period of the identification information can also be interested.

<Characteristic K group> (Increase / decrease the number of specific symbols displayed based on the look-ahead result without synchronizing with the number of reservations)
An information acquisition means that acquires information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and a storage means that can store the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least the determination conditions for the information are satisfied. , When the discrimination condition is satisfied, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means and the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. A specific game in which a specific game can be executed when the dynamic display means to be caused and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. In a gaming machine having an execution means, a pre-determination means for executing a pre-determination based on the information and a pre-discrimination means thereof before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is executed. The specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on the result of the prior determination by the above, and the display number of the specific symbols displayed by the specific symbol display means are combined with the number of the information. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by having a variable number of symbols display means capable of variable display regardless of the number of symbols.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. A gaming machine has been proposed in which an advantageous privilege game is executed. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port, the lottery right for executing the winning / failing lottery of the game can be held and stored up to a predetermined number, and the lottery is held and stored. It has been proposed that the number of rights is displayed as a symbol and the display mode of the symbol is changed based on the pre-determination result of pre-determining the lottery result corresponding to the stored lottery right (for example, special feature). Open 2013-223613 (Ab. 2013). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the result of the pre-determination can be suggested to the player by using the displayed symbol, but if the number of lottery rights stored on hold is small, it is displayed. There was a problem that the number of symbols to be played was reduced, the effect of the production was reduced, and the game tended to be monotonous. Therefore, it is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine K1, the number of display of the specific symbol displayed based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means can be changed regardless of the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, even when the number of information stored in the storage means is small, the display number of the specific symbol can be variably displayed, and the player is interested in the effect of suggesting the result of the pre-determination. It has the effect of being able to have it.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the specific symbol display means can display the specific symbol up to the number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the upper limit display number of the specific symbol is set as the upper limit of the information that can be stored in the storage means, so that the specific symbol is stored in the storage means for the player. It can be thought that it indicates the number of information that is being stored.

In either the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is 1 or more, the symbol number variable means is said to have a range of 1 or more as the number of the specific symbols. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the number of display of a specific symbol is variable.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific symbol can be continuously displayed while the information is stored in the storage means, so that the specific symbol can be displayed to the player. Can be thought to indicate the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, one gaming state is set among a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means has a possible game state setting means, and the game state setting means can set the first game state when the end condition is satisfied at least in a state where the second game state is set. The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the specific symbol display means can display the specific symbol on the display means while the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a second gaming state advantageous to the player is set while the specific symbol is displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player whether or not the second gaming state ends each time the display number of the specific symbol changes. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K4, the gaming machine K5 is characterized in that the symbol number changing means can change the display number of the specific symbol displayed on the display means by two or more.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, the number of displayed specific symbols can be greatly changed at one time, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be produced. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In the gaming machine K5, the symbol number variable means includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage means as the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is easier to change so as to increase the number of displayed specific symbols than when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. ..

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K5, it is possible to easily increase the number of displayed specific symbols if it is preliminarily determined that the information corresponding to the specific determination result is included. It has the effect of making the player interested in the variable situation of a specific symbol and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K6, the symbol number variable means includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage means as the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the number of displays of the specific symbol to be increased at one time is likely to be larger in the case where the specific symbol is displayed than in the case where the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. ..

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the larger the number of displayed specific symbols that increase at one time, the higher the possibility that the information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is included. This has the effect of making the person interested in how the number of displayed specific symbols increases, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K7, the symbol number variable means is capable of executing a preparatory variable display for reducing the display number of the specific symbol before increasing the display number of the specific symbol to the specific number. Pachinko machine K8.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, the number of specific symbols displayed can be reduced by the variable preparation display. Can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the effect of variably displaying the display number of the specific symbol by the symbol number variable means can be increased.

<Characteristic L group> (By changing the electric chew winning rate on the upstream side, the ball entry rate to the starting port on the downstream side can be changed)
A first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination when the first discrimination condition is satisfied, and a second discrimination different from the first discrimination condition when the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied. When the feasible second discriminating means and the result of the first discriminating by the first discriminating means are specific first discriminating results, or when the result of the second discriminating by the second discriminating means is a specific second discriminating means. 2 In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a corresponding specific game when it is a determination result, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down and a game flowing down the first flow path. A first ball entry means in which the ball can enter and the first determination condition can be satisfied when the game ball enters, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means. And a variable means that can be changed to a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a variable control means that can variably control the variable means with a predetermined variable pattern when an execution condition is satisfied. It has a second ball-entry means in which a game ball can enter and the second determination condition can be satisfied when the game ball enters, and the second ball-entry means has the first flow path. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that, among the gaming balls flowing down the ball, the gaming ball that could not enter the first ball entering means is provided at a position where the gaming ball can enter.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there is a case in which a plurality of starting ports are provided, and one of the starting ports is provided with a variable member for facilitating the entry of a game ball during the time-saving game, thereby facilitating the execution of the lottery during the time-saving game. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a gaming ball is launched toward a starting opening provided with a variable member, the gaming ball that does not enter the starting opening is wasted and the motivation for playing is reduced. was there. Therefore, it is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine L1, it is easy to execute the first determination based on the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path depending on the length of the period during which the variable means is changed to the first state by the variable control means. It is possible to switch between a state in which the second determination can be easily executed. As a result, when the game ball flows down the first flow path, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which determination will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine L1, as the variable pattern of the variable means that is variably controlled by the variable control means, a first variable pattern and a period in which the variable means is in the second state is longer than the first variable pattern. The gaming machine L2 is characterized by having a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least two variable patterns.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means according to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means, so that the variable means is variably controlled according to the variable situation of the variable means. It is possible to switch between a state in which the first determination is easy to be executed and a state in which the second determination is easy to be executed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the variable situation of the variable means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 has a determination means for executing a predetermined determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and the variable control means is the variable when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the means is variably controlled.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the variable means is variably controlled based on the determination result of the determination means, so that the player can be interested in the determination content of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L3, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods having different lengths, and the dynamic display period determining means is of the determination means. The gaming machine L4, characterized in that the dynamic display period is determined based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determination means is stopped and displayed can be made different, so that the variable control by the variable control means can be performed. It is possible to give the player a period that is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second discriminating means executes discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second discriminating means is more favorable to the player than the first discriminating means, so that the second discriminating means is used for the game. There is an effect that the game can be played while being interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first flow path while expecting the ball to arrive.

The gaming machine L5 has a detecting means capable of detecting a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path and an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on a detection result by the detecting means. The means did not enter the first ball-entry means among the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball flowing into the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the first flow path. It is composed of a second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, and in the effect executed by the effect executing means, a ball flowing down the first flow path becomes the second ball entering means. The gaming machine L6 is characterized in that it is for showing the player the degree of expectation to be reached.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the flow status of the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is.

<Characteristic AA group>
A first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first information acquisition condition, and a first determination capable of executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means. A first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a first discrimination means, a first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means, and a first dynamic display means thereof. The second information is acquired based on the first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the method and the establishment of the second information acquisition condition. Based on a possible second information acquisition means, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means. Then, the second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating and the second discriminating information for indicating the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. A display means, a second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a specific second dynamic display mode determining means. 1 When the first identification information for showing the discrimination result or the second identification information for showing the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. The effect mode executing means capable of executing the effect mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information in the gaming machine having the privileged game execution means, and the effect mode executed by the effect mode execution means. It has a selectable effect mode selection means, and the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. The gaming machine AA1 characterized by this.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AA1, since the effect mode to be executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is changed by the number of stored second information, it can be executed after that. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and even if the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is not displayed, the game continues for the subsequent game. By making them interested, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode executing means is the specific second movement. The gaming machine AA2, characterized in that the effect mode is executed when the target display mode is executed.

According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the player to memorize the second information, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved. ..

In the gaming machines AA1 or AA2, the effect mode is continuously executed after the period of the second dynamic display mode being executed corresponding to the number of stored second information is completed. The gaming machine AA3, which is set in a period straddling the following dynamic display of the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AA1 or AA2, the effect mode is configured to be executable over a dynamic display period of the second identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession. Therefore, there is an effect that the second dynamic display mode of a plurality of times can be made to look like the dynamic display of 1, and the interest can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball in the second ball-entry means. A variable member that can be changed into a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition. In a gaming machine having a variable control means that changes from to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination means that can determine the establishment of the specific condition in advance before the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured so that a specific effect mode can be selected at least based on the result of the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a specific production mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the establishment of a specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to have expectations for the acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristic AB group> (The effect is variable depending on the number of special figures 2 held during the execution of the fluctuation pattern)
A first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first information acquisition condition, and a first determination capable of executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means. A first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a first discrimination means, a first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means, and a first dynamic display means thereof. The second information is acquired based on the first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the method and the establishment of the second information acquisition condition. Based on a possible second information acquisition means, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means. The second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating and the second discriminating information for indicating the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. A display means, a second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a specific second dynamic display mode determining means. 1 When the first identification information for showing the discrimination result or the second identification information for showing the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. The effect mode executing means capable of executing the effect mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information in the gaming machine having the privileged game execution means, and the effect mode executed by the effect mode execution means. It has a selectable effect mode selection means, and the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. The gaming machine AB1 characterized by this.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the lottery result is notified by lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. By determining the production mode and executing the determined production mode, there is an attempt to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AB1, the second information is stored in the effect mode executed during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display. Since it is determined based on the number, not only the result of the first determination but also the information regarding the possibility that the second determination can be executed can be determined from the production mode, and the player can play the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing the trouble of getting bored.

In the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AB2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1, the production mode is selected according to the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of second information stored during the execution, so that the production mode is various. There is an effect that various production modes can be executed.

In the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode is subsequently executed. The gaming machine AB3, characterized in that an effect related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information is executed.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, when the second information is stored, the operation of the second identification information is performed after the execution of the first identification information is completed. Since the target display is started and the effect mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, the second is preferentially executed. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is started at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball in the second ball-entry means. A variable member that can be changed into a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition. In a gaming machine having a variable control means that changes from to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination means that can determine the establishment of the specific condition in advance before the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AB4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured so that a specific effect mode can be selected at least based on the result of the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a specific production mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the establishment of a specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information. Therefore, there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristic AC group> (Special figure 1 fluctuation effect is used as a simulated effect of special figure 2 variation)
A first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination that executes the second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The means, the first privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming the predetermined first determination result, and the first privilege game execution means. 2 The second privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the predetermined second determination result, and the first determination are executed. Based on the fact, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect for showing the determination result of the first determination, and the determination result of the second determination based on the execution of the second determination. The second effect executing means is provided with a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect, and the second effect executing means satisfies at least a predetermined specific condition. The gaming machine AC1 is characterized in that the second effect of the effect mode including at least a specific effect mode that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect can be executed.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the first effect can be executed as an effect for showing the determination result of the second determination, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect executing means can execute the second effect of the effect mode including at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect. The gaming machine AC2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC1, it is possible to execute the second effect using the display mode showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect executing means executes a second effect mode for showing the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode within one effect showing the determination result of the second determination. A gaming machine AC3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group> (Double display including probability variation even if it hits normally)
To show the result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means after the first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination and a plurality of first identification symbols are dynamically displayed on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A first dynamic display means capable of stopping and displaying by a combination of the above, a second discriminating means capable of executing a second discrimination, and a plurality of second identification symbols dynamically displayed on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode. After the display, the second dynamic display means that can be stopped and displayed by the combination for showing the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and the display means for showing the specific first discrimination result. When the first identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific combination of, or when the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the display means in a specific combination for showing the specific second determination result, the game is played. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a person, the privilege granting means is stopped and displayed with a combination of identification symbols corresponding to the first specific combination among the specific combinations. In this case, the first privilege can be given as the privilege, and when the combination of the identification symbols corresponding to the second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, it is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. The gaming machine is configured to be able to grant a second privilege, the gaming machine has a determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the first dynamic display means has a specific period. When set, the remaining identification symbols can be any combination of the first specific combination and the second specific combination in a state where the first identification symbol of 1 is dynamically displayed. AD1 is a gaming machine AD1 characterized in that the first identification symbol is displayed in the specific combination after displaying a plurality of reach display modes that are stopped and displayed in combination.

When a game machine such as a pachinko machine is notified of the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening by a combination of a plurality of symbols, it is subsequently given according to the type of the displayed symbol. Some of them are configured so that the benefits are different to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, some symbols constituting the combination in which the privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player is not given is stopped and displayed, so that the interest in the game is before the result is notified. There was a problem that it decreased.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

According to the gaming machine AD1, when the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination in a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through the multiple reach display modes, so that the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the second privilege are supported. It is possible to have a long-term expectation that both of the combinations will be displayed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period. The gaming machine AD2.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD1, a specific combination is displayed through a plurality of reach display modes even in a specific period in which the first privilege is determined by the determining means, so that the specific period There is an effect that it is possible to easily have a sense of expectation that the second privilege will be given even when the first determination is executed.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second privilege when the specific second determination result is obtained in the specific period, and the second dynamic display means is set to the specific period. If so, the second identification symbol of 1 is dynamically displayed, and the remaining identification symbols are stopped and displayed at a combination capable of being any combination of two or more different second specific combinations. AD3 is a gaming machine AD3 characterized in that the second identification symbol is displayed in the specific combination after displaying the special plurality of reach display modes.

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD2, it is necessary to make the player recognize at an early stage that the second privilege advantageous to the player is always given when the specific second judgment result is a specific second determination result in a specific period. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic AE group> (Puncture ED control at the time of probability change)
It is executed by the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game execution means. The privilege game type determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege game from a plurality of types, a specific area through which the game ball can pass when the specific privilege game is executed, and the game ball in the specific area. A setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state that is set after the execution of the privileged game when passing through, and the privileged game In a gaming machine having a suggestion mode executing means for executing a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the game state set after the execution of the privilege game when the above is completed, the suggestion mode is the first suggestion mode. It is configured by combining the second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal gaming state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the advantageous gaming state are configured in the same period. The gaming machine AE1 characterized in that it is configured in the suggested mode.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning game, and different winning games are executed depending on the winning type, and during a specific type of winning game. Is a variable ball entry area that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter. There is an attempt to improve the interest of the game by setting the gaming state to be advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a specific type of hit game is executed, the gaming ball may not enter the variable ball entry area, and the control load in the notification control in that case increases. There was a problem of doing it.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a control load.

According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to the same period, it is possible to set the mode suggesting according to the state of entry into a specific region while suppressing the period for displaying the suggestion mode from changing. There is an effect that the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the privilege game can be facilitated and the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine AE1, when the privilege game is executed, the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution means according to the type of the privilege game to be executed, and the specific suggestion mode setting means. Of the suggestion modes set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the privilege game, the second suggestion mode is switched to the second suggestion mode corresponding to other than the specific privilege game. The gaming machine AE2, characterized in that it has a switching means capable of performing the above.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AE1, the suggestion mode is displayed even if the suggestion mode is set at the start so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the privilege game. Since it is possible to switch to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal gaming state and make a suggestion without changing the period for doing so, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.

<Characteristic AF group> (Establish ED periods of different lengths depending on the jackpot type)
By the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game execution means. The end of the award game is terminated based on the award game type determining means capable of determining the type of the award game to be executed from a plurality of types and a predetermined end condition being satisfied during the execution of the award game. The gaming machine AF1 is characterized by comprising, as a period for indicating, a period setting means for setting a period of a length according to the type of the privileged game being executed.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AF1, since different periods can be set according to the type of privileged gaming, there is an effect that the interest of the gaming can be improved.

The gaming machine AF1 is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, it is possible to execute a specific effect at different periods set according to the type of privileged game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

The gaming machine AF1 or AF2 is provided with a period switching means capable of switching the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game. The featured gaming machine AF3.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be changed even when the variable condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic AG group> (The ED period can be changed depending on the presence or absence of V prize)
The discriminating means capable of executing the discriminating, the privileged game executing means capable of executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminating result, and the executing of the privileged game Based on the specific area through which the game ball can pass and the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The state setting means and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the privilege game are provided. The specific period setting means is characterized in that the specific period having different lengths can be set depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area or not during the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine AG1.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AG1, it is possible to set a specific period of different length depending on whether the gaming ball has passed or not passed through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be made to.

The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AG1 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect during the specific period.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AG2, the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passage status of the game ball to the specific area during the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine AG3, since the notification mode is included in the specific effect, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic BA group> (Playability varies depending on the setting)
The state of the specific element regarding the degree of advantage of the player includes at least a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to the second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. A specific element setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states, a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The second gaming state includes a gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including, and the second gaming state is higher than the case where the specific element is set to the second state. The gaming machine BA1 is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous to the player when it is set to one state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be changed according to the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also those that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the degree of advantage of each gaming state is fixed, there is a problem that the gaming may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, in the advantageous second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is advantageous that the specific element is set to the first state having a low degree of advantage. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1, a discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. The gaming machine BA2 includes a privileged gaming executing means to be executed, and the first state is configured in a state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is lower than that of the second state.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA1, in an advantageous second gaming state, it is possible to realize an extremely novel game property in which a lower probability of a specific determination result is advantageous. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BA2, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means that can be changed to the position, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means moves from the second position to the first. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to a position for a predetermined period of time, and a privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means are provided. The gaming machine BA3 is characterized in that the second gaming state is configured such that the predetermined privilege is more easily given by the privilege giving means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA2, a predetermined privilege is easily given in the second gaming state, so that when the second gaming state is set, the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The gaming machine BA2 or BA3 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the first gaming state based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Pachinko machine BA4.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA2 or BA3, there is a possibility that the first gaming state, which has a lower degree of advantage than the second gaming state, is set when a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the second gaming state, it is possible to make the player want the second determination result to continue to be given the privilege rather than the specific determination result. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a novel game property that is expected not to result in a specific determination result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BA5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines BA2 to BA4, the second gaming state is configured to be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BA2 to BA5, the second gaming state is maintained until a specific determination result is obtained, so that the first state with a low probability of achieving a specific determination result. Is easier for the second gaming state to continue for a longer time. That is, since the second determination result is likely to occur a larger number of times, the number of times a predetermined privilege is given is also likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to expect the second state in a state other than the second gaming state, while it is possible to expect a disadvantageous first state in the second gaming state, which is an extremely novel game property. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA2, the gaming state setting means is one of a plurality of including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state. The gaming state setting means is configured to be configurable to the gaming state of the above, and the gaming state setting means other than the specific determination result over a predetermined specific number of determinations after the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that the third gaming state can be set based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the first state in which the probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result is low is more likely to be a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result in the second gaming state. , It becomes easy to be in an advantageous third gaming state. Therefore, in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the disadvantageous first state is set more strongly, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In any of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6, a game is made to a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and the first entry means thereof. It is provided with at least a payout means for paying out a prize ball based on the ball entering, and the first gaming state is a game in a launch direction in which the game ball is easily entered into the first entry means. The gaming machine BA7 is characterized in that, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of game balls to be fired is likely to be larger than the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means. ..

According to the gaming machine BA7, in any of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6, in the first gaming state, the number of balls held tends to decrease as the gaming balls are fired, so that the second state in which a specific determination result is likely to be obtained at an early stage. You can strongly expect that it is set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the second state is expected in the first game state and the first state is expected in the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the gaming machine BA7, the second gaming state is configured such that the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means is more likely to be closer to the number of game balls to be fired than in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BA8, which is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA7, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further increased, so that the gaming is performed with a stronger expectation of shifting to the second gaming state. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic BB group> (The easier it is to win, the lower the degree of advantage)
A discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privileged game executing means that executes a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. Based on the establishment of the setting condition of A second probability state as a result and a state setting means for setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a plurality of states are provided, and the first probability state is provided at least while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BB1 is characterized in that it is configured to have a higher degree of advantage for the player than the second probability state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the winning lottery probability after the winning state is completed can be different depending on the winning type, and the winning state is completed. There are also those that are trying to improve the interest after doing so.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the hit probability is low, there is a problem that the motivation of the player for the game is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, since the first probability state can be expected at least while the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

In the gaming machine BB1, the gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that the first probability is configured with a probability lower than the second probability.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is advantageous to have a low probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result while a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BB3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the state in which the specific condition is satisfied is configured so that it can be terminated at least based on the result of the specific determination.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained while the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first position in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a game ball entering the ball from the first position. Based on the variable means that can be changed to the second position that is difficult to ball, and the discriminant result of the discriminating means is a second discriminant result different from the specific discriminant result, the variable means has a predetermined period. , A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position, and a privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball entering means. The state in which the specific condition is satisfied is configured so that the predetermined privilege is more easily granted by the privilege granting means than in the state where the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine BB4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, it is easy to give a predetermined privilege while the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the game is played with a strong expectation that the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine BB4, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The second discriminating means is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the second discriminating means is configured so that the ratio of the second discriminating result is higher than that of the first discriminating means. The state in which the specific condition is satisfied is configured so that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. The featured gaming machine BB5.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB4, the determination of the second discrimination means, which tends to be the second discrimination result, is easily executed while the specific condition is satisfied, so that the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation.

In the gaming machine BB5, the first determination is performed while the specific condition is satisfied, as compared with the case where the determination result of the second determination means becomes the specific determination result while the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BB6 is characterized in that when the determination result of the means becomes the specific determination result, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB5, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination of the second discriminating means that is easy to be executed in the state where the specific condition is satisfied, the state in which the specific condition is satisfied is terminated. Since there is a high possibility that the game will end up, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which it is expected that a specific discrimination result will not be obtained while the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BB5 or BB6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entering means provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means can easily enter, and the above-mentioned The second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball, and the game ball easily enters the second ball entry means. A second variable means that can be changed to a third position, a third position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the first determination condition is the first. It is configured so that it can be established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the second determination condition is that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. It is configured so that it can be satisfied based on the above, and in the state where the specific condition is satisfied, the second variable means is in the third position than in the state where the specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that it is easily configured to be in a variable state.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB5 or BB6, there is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of changing the firing direction of the gaming ball depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. be.

<Characteristic BC group> (The occurrence rate of a specific suggestion is changed between the normal state after changing the setting and the normal state after the end of hitting)
In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, a first game state setting means for setting a specific gaming state predetermined based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and the first game state setting means described above. A second gaming state setting means for setting the specific gaming state based on the establishment of a second setting condition different from the setting condition is provided, and the effect executing means is said by the first gaming state setting means. The ease of executing a predetermined specific effect differs between the case where a specific game state is set and the case where the specific game state is set by the second game state setting means. The gaming machine BC1 characterized by this.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be changed according to the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also those that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the gaming becomes monotonous when the same gaming state continues for a long time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, even in the same specific gaming state, the specific effect is executed depending on whether it is set by the first gaming state setting means or the second gaming state setting means. Since the ease can be changed, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BC1, a discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminating condition and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. The first game state setting means is configured to include a privilege game execution means to be executed, and to be able to set the specific game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game. The second gaming state setting means is configured so that the specific gaming state can be set based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine BC2. ..

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC1, the ease of executing a specific effect can be changed in the gaming state set at the time of initialization, so that the game becomes monotonous. It has the effect of suppressing this.

In the gaming machines BC1 or BC2, after the specific gaming state is set, the effect executing means continuously obtains a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result over a predetermined specific number of determinations. The gaming machine BC3, which is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on the fact that it has become.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the deviation determination results will be continuous.

In the gaming machine BC3, the effect executing means can execute the specific effect based on the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result after the specific game state is set being a multiple of the specific number of times. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC3, a specific effect is executed every time the continuous number of times of the deviation determination result becomes a multiple of the specific number of times, so let's continue the game until it becomes a multiple of the specific number of times. Can make you think. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the effect executing means is the specific gaming state by the second gaming state setting means than when the specific gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means. BC4 is a gaming machine BC4 characterized in that the specific effect is more easily executed when is set.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, there is an effect that the operating rate in a specific gaming state set by the second gaming state setting means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the specific element regarding the degree of advantage of the player corresponds to the first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and the second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. As a specific element setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a second state and the type of the specific effect, the first state is executed rather than the second state. A type that determines one type from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect in which the ratio is high and a second specific effect in which the ratio of execution of the second state is higher than that of the first state. A gaming machine BC5 characterized by comprising a determination means.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the state of the specific element can be suggested by the type of the specific effect, so that the player who wants to predict the state of the specific element can use it. On the other hand, the game can be performed with the expectation that the specific effect will be executed in the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machines BC1 to BC5 are configured to have at least a main control means for performing main control related to the game and the effect executing means, and perform control according to a command output from the main control means. The main control means includes a control means and a display means capable of displaying identification information, and the main control means specifies a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a determination result in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is predetermined. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the determination means, and a dynamic display means. A type determining means for determining the dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means and a type command for indicating the dynamic display type determined by the type determining means are sent to the slave control means. The subordinate control means includes a command receiving means capable of receiving at least the type command, and the effect executing means receives the type command by the command receiving means. Based on what has been done, the effect corresponding to the received type command is configured to be executable, and the specific effect is an effect according to a predetermined specific dynamic display type. The gaming machine BC6, characterized in that it is composed of an effect that can be executed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC5, the slave control means determines the type of the specific effect when the type command corresponding to the specific dynamic display type is received. Since it is only necessary, there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine BC6, the main control means sets the specific game set by the first gaming state setting means as the predetermined information in which the information referred to when determining the dynamic display type is defined in advance. The first specified information referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the state and the dynamic display type referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the specific gaming state set by the second gaming state setting means. The dynamic display type is referred to in order to determine the dynamic display type based on the specified information storage means that stores at least a plurality of the specified information including the second specified information and the determination condition. The specified information is provided with a specified information specifying means for specifying the specified information from the specified information storage means, so that the specific dynamic display type of the second specified information can be determined more easily than the second specified information. A gaming machine BC7 characterized in that the information is specified.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC6, there is an effect that the easiness of determining a specific dynamic display type can be made different only by making the specified information to be referred to different.

In the gaming machine BC7, the specific dynamic display type is determined from the second specified information when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the determination condition is satisfied. If the specific condition is not satisfied, the information is specified so that the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type is common to the second specified information. Game machine BC8.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC7, the determination ratio of a specific dynamic display type can be changed according to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, so that the execution ratio of the specific effect is biased. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BD group> (Specific suggestions are more likely to occur in situations that are disadvantageous to the player)
A specific effect executing means for executing a predetermined specific effect based on the establishment of a specific execution condition, and a specific element related to the degree of advantage of the player as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A specific effect type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect capable of suggesting a state to the player and a second specific effect in which the state of the specific element is difficult to be suggested, and a predetermined The game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of the setting condition is provided. The gaming machine BD1 is characterized in that the first gaming state is configured so that the first specific effect is more easily determined by the specific effect type determining means than the second game state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and the interest of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of interest effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines can execute an effect mode that suggests an advantage for the player in a predetermined gaming state.

However, there was a need for further improvement in interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, a player who wants to know the state of a specific element can be made to actively play a game in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD1, the gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is configured in a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1, there is an effect that the operating rate in the disadvantageous first gaming state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, the gaming state setting means is a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the second gaming state, the first gaming state, and the second gaming state. It is configured so that one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one can be set, and the specific effect type determining means has a gaming state other than the third gaming state after the privileged game is completed. The first gaming state set in the specified number of times or more is more than the first gaming state set in the situation where the continuous number of times set in the gaming state is less than the predetermined specific number of times. The gaming machine BD3 characterized in that it is configured so that the first specific effect can be easily determined.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, the more the disadvantageous situation in which the advantageous third gaming state is not set continues, the easier it is for the specific effect to be executed, so that the disadvantageous situation continues. Even in this case, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be lowered and it is difficult to make it difficult.

In any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means become a predetermined specific discriminant result. A privilege game execution means for executing an advantageous privilege game, a first probability in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the first game state as the specific element is predetermined, and a first probability higher than the first probability. A game comprising two probabilities and a specific element setting means for setting one of a plurality of probabilities including at least two probabilities, and the second game state has a higher probability of becoming the specific determination result than the first game state. A gaming machine BD4 characterized in that it is configured in a state.

According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that a second probability is suggested in the specific effect. It has the effect of improving the interest in pachinko.

In the gaming machine BD4, the second gaming state is configured so that the specific determination result is obtained with a probability of a third probability or higher higher than the second probability, and the first specific effect is A first effect mode that is more likely to be executed when the first probability is set than the second probability, and a second effect mode that is easier to be executed when the second probability is set than the first probability. And, any one of a plurality including at least is executed, and the specific effect is configured in an effect mode that suggests information according to the probability of a specific determination result. Machine BD5.

According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD4, it is possible to expect that the second production mode is executed when the specific effect is executed, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine BD5, the specific element setting means sets the probability of obtaining the specific determination result as the first probability by setting a predetermined first set value in a predetermined setting destination, and the above-mentioned first probability. By setting a second set value different from the first set value at a predetermined setting destination, the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is set to the second probability, and the first effect mode. Is a numerical value suggesting a probability equal to or lower than the first probability, and is configured by an effect mode for notifying a numerical value suggesting the first set value, and the second effect mode is described above. The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that it is a numerical value suggesting a probability equal to or lower than the first probability, and is configured in an effect mode for notifying a numerical value suggesting the second set value.

According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5, the set value can be suggested numerically in the first specific effect, so that there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine BD5 or BD6, the second specific effect is configured to notify a numerical value suggesting a probability that the probability of the specific determination result is equal to or greater than the second probability and equal to or less than the third probability. BD7 is a gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5 or BD6, the probability suggested by the second specific effect can be made less than or equal to the actual probability, so that the actual behavior of the gaming machine is specified second. It can be greater than or equal to the probability suggested by the means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the gaming machine from being inconsistent with the content of the specific effect, and thus there is an effect that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In any of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, the specific effect type determining means includes the first specific effect, the second specific effect, the first game state set to the second probability, or the second. The gaming machine BD8 is characterized in that it is configured so that one of a plurality of types including at least a third specific effect suggesting one of the gaming states can be determined.

According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, when the third specific effect is executed, it is possible to expect the player to be in the first gaming state. It has the effect of improving the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BD8, the third specific effect is configured to notify a numerical value suggesting a probability that the probability of the specific determination result is higher than the first probability and equal to or less than the second probability. BD9 is a gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine BD9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD8, it is possible to pay attention to the numerical value notified by the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BE group> (The appearance rate of the chance zone is changed according to the setting)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination of the discrimination means, at least. In a specific gaming state, a special state that tends to be advantageous to the player until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied based on the second determination result different from the first determination result. The special state setting means configured to be set and the specific element regarding the degree of advantage of the player are set to the first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and the second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. A state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a corresponding second state is provided, and the first state is a specific game rather than the second state. The gaming machine BE1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second determination result is likely to occur in the state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be changed according to the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also those that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the degree of advantage of each gaming state is fixed, there is a problem that the gaming may become monotonous.

According to the gaming machine BE1, the first state having a low degree of advantage is more likely to be set as a special state in a specific gaming state, so that it is possible to expect the first state having a low degree of advantage in a specific gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BE1, the state setting means sets the probability of the first determination result at least in the specific gaming state as the specific element, and the first state is a predetermined first state. The first determination result is obtained with a probability of 1, and the second state is configured to result in the first determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine BE2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE1, it is possible to realize a novel game property that can be expected to be in a state in which the probability of the first determination result is low in a specific gaming state. , There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BE1 or BE2 is characterized in that when the special state is set in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is maintained at least until the special state ends. Pachinko machine BE3.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BE1 or BE2, the degree of advantage can be changed in a specific gaming state without changing the gaming state, so that the player's interest in playing the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE3, the discriminating means executes a discriminant based on the establishment of the first discriminant condition and a discriminant based on the establishment of the second discriminant condition. It is composed of at least two discriminating means, and at least in the specific gaming state, the discriminating of the second discriminating means is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BE4 is characterized in that the special state is configured in a state in which discrimination of the second discriminating means is more easily executed than in a state in which the special state is not set.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BE1 to BE3, it is easy to discriminate the advantageous second discriminating means in a special state, so that a specific gaming field is expected to be in a special state. You can play a game in Chia. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BE4 is characterized in that the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state based on the second determination result obtained by the determination of the first determination means. Machine BE5.

According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE4, a novel game property in which an advantageous special state is set when the discrimination of the first discriminating means having a low degree of advantage results in the second discriminating result. Has the effect of being able to achieve.

In the gaming machine BE4 or BE5, the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discriminating means and the second for showing the discriminating result of the second discriminating means. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information is provided, and the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information are configured to be executable. The gaming machine BE6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE4 or BE5, there is an effect that the discrimination means can be efficiently discriminated.

In the gaming machine BE6, the special state is configured at least while the first identification information for showing the second determination result is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine BE7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE6, only the advantageous second discriminating means can be discriminated during the special state, so that the special state can be expected more strongly. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine BE6 or BE7, the ball-entry means through which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game-ball can enter into the ball-entry means, and the game ball into the ball-entry means are difficult to enter. Based on the fact that the variable means that can be changed to the second position, and the discrimination of the second discriminating means results in a third discriminant result different from the first discriminant result and the second discriminant result. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. The gaming machine BE8, which is provided with a privilege granting means for granting the above.

According to the gaming machine BE8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE6 or BE7, there is an effect that the game can be performed in the expectation that the variable game will be executed.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE8, the special state setting means continuously obtains the second determination result over the determination of the determination means a predetermined number of times in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine BE9 is characterized in that the special state can be set at a higher rate than the case where the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is less than the specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine BE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BE1 to BE8, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the second determination result is expected to be continuous for a specific number of times or more.

In the gaming machine BE9, the special state setting means sets the special state at a predetermined first ratio when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result becomes the specific number or more, and the second The special state can be set at a second rate higher than the first rate when the number of consecutive times of the determination result is the second or more times, which is larger than the specific number of times. The gaming machine BE10 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BE10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE9, the continuous second discrimination result makes it easier to set a special state. Therefore, the continuous second discrimination result enhances the interest of the player. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic BF group> (Forms a chance zone without changing the game state based on the fact that the lottery result is a pure deviation)
A discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a privilege game executing means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's advantage degree becomes the first advantage degree based on the establishment of the setting condition of Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result in the state, the first gaming state is maintained until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BF1 comprising: an advantage degree setting means capable of setting an advantage degree to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result, the state shifts to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

In addition, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the hit state ends can be changed according to the hit type, and after the hit state ends. There are also those that are trying to improve the interest in pachinko.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the gaming state does not change unless the lottery result is successful, there is a problem that the player is discouraged every time the lottery result is out of order.

According to the gaming machine BF1, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage is increased when the result of the deviation determination is obtained, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BF1 includes a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the advantage degree setting means is for showing the deviation discrimination result by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine BF2 is characterized in that the degree of advantage while the identification information is dynamically displayed is set to the degree of advantage.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1, it is possible to realize an extremely novel gametability that is advantageous while the identification information for showing the deviation discrimination result is dynamically displayed. , There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the discriminating means is based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the discriminating method, and the discriminating of the second discriminating means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means. BF3, a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, there is an effect that the gaming can be performed with a strong expectation that the discrimination of the second discriminating means will be executed.

The gaming machine BF3 is characterized in that the advantage degree setting means is set to the second advantage degree based on the result of the deviation determination in the determination of the first determination means. Machine BF4.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF3, an extremely novel game property is realized in which the degree of advantage is increased when the discrimination of the first discriminating means having a low degree of advantage results in a disadvantageous determination. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine BF4 includes a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and the advantage degree setting means is the identification for showing the discriminating result of the first discriminating means. It is configured so that the length of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of information can be changed, and the advantage degree setting means is determined by the first discriminating means in the first gaming state. Until the result of the deviation determination is obtained, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the determination result of the first determination means is set to a length equal to or less than a predetermined first period, and the above-mentioned The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is set to be longer than that of the first period, based on the result of the deviation discrimination in the discrimination of the first discrimination means. The dynamic display means is configured to be able to be set in a long second period, and the dynamic display means of the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discriminating means at least in the first gaming state. As the dynamic display, the gaming machine BF5 is configured to dynamically display the identification information in a dynamic display period having a length equal to or less than the first period.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF3, it is possible to set the dynamic display period of the second period when the discrimination of the first discriminating means results in a misjudgment result. Only the determination of the second determination means can be executed during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, the advantage degree setting means continuously obtains the disengagement determination result over the determination of the first number of times predetermined in the determination of the determination means in the first gaming state. In this case, the gaming machine BF6 is configured so that the second advantage degree can be set at a higher rate than the case where the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result is less than the first number of times.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, the effect of realizing a novel game property that is expected to be a continuous deviation determination result over the first determination. There is.

In the gaming machine BF6, the advantage degree setting means sets the second advantage degree at a first ratio when the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result is equal to or greater than the first number of times, and the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result. It is characterized in that the second advantage degree can be set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio when the second time or more is larger than the first number. Game machine BF7.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF6, there is an effect that a novel game property can be realized in which the expectation degree set to the second advantage degree is improved as the deviation determination result is continuous.

<Characteristic BG group> (It is easier to hit with a character if the setting is low with 1 type and 2 types)
A ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter, a first region provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball-entry means can flow in, and a second region different from the first region. Based on the distribution means for distributing the game ball that has entered the ball entry means to either the first region or the second region, and the game ball that has entered the first region. A privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player. The first state includes a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage, and a state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least the first state. The gaming machine BG1 is configured so that the gaming balls that have entered the ball-entry means are more easily distributed to the first region than in the second state.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entry port. A game ball that has entered the inside of the V-winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) that is executed based on the game, enters a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V-winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that enables a player to be given a privileged game (a winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by passing the pachinko machine, and the player's interest has been improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011). -010741).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not the privileged game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is an advantageous type. There are also those that are configured to enable. In such a conventional gaming machine, when it is suggested that the expectation of a privileged gaming of an advantageous type is high, the gaming can be performed with a stronger expectation of passing through a specific area.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the ratio of the gaming ball passing through the specific region when a specific game is executed is common, it is suggested that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous type. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the ease of distribution to the first region can be different depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state. Has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine BG1, the gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the first advantageous degree is a lower advantageous degree than the second advantageous degree.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG1, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that the lower the degree of advantage is, the easier it is to be distributed to the first region by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the variable is variable to a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The means, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination means. Based on the determination result being a specific determination result, the variable game executing means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the privileged game As the gaming state after the end, the gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state advantageous to the player is provided, and the first state is the first state. Rather than the two states, the ball enters the ball-entry means between the time when the first gaming state is set and the time when the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired during the first gaming state is completed. The gaming machine BG3 is characterized in that the gaming balls are configured so as to be easily distributed to the first region.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, when the first state is set, the gaming ball is easily distributed to the first region in the advantageous first gaming state. It has the effect of improving the interest of the person in the game.

The gaming machine BG3 includes a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and the first In the gaming state, the gaming ball that has entered the ball-entry means is the first, based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that it is configured so that it can be easily distributed into one area.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG3, it is possible to realize a novel game property that when a deviation determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, it is easy to be distributed to the first area. effective.

In the gaming machine BG4, the first state is configured so that the probability of the second determination result is lower than that of the second state, and the probability of the third determination result is higher. The gaming machine BG5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG4, it is novel that the advantageous first gaming state becomes more advantageous when the first state with a low probability of becoming the second discrimination result is set. Since it is possible to realize a high level of playability, there is an effect that the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG4 or BG5, a storage means that can store the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of specific information, and the discrimination means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the above, and a dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. The distribution means is configured so that when the game ball arrives in a predetermined first period cycle, the game ball can be easily distributed to the first region, and the dynamic The display period setting means dynamically in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the state where one or more of the discrimination information is stored in the storage means in the first gaming state. When the display period is set, the dynamic display period that facilitates the execution of the variable game in the first period cycle can be set, and the dynamic display period setting means is the first. In the gaming state, when setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the deviation determination result, the movement of a length capable of acquiring the determination information of the specific number of information. The gaming machine BG6 is characterized in that the target display period can be set.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG4 or BG5, the discrimination information of a specific number of information can be acquired during the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the deviation discrimination result. There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the judgment result will be obtained.

In the gaming machine BG6, when the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the first gaming state, the identification Dynamic display of length that makes it difficult to acquire the discrimination information between the start of the dynamic display of information and the end of the variable game executed after the dynamic display of the identification information ends. The gaming machine BG7 characterized in that the period can be set.

According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG6, it is difficult to acquire the discrimination information only during the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the deviation discrimination result. It is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that it will become. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BH group> (Avoids the initial operation of the accessory when checking the settings)
The variable member, the variable means for changing the variable member, and the variable member so as to perform a closing operation which is a predetermined operation based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine. The closing operation is executed when the closing control means capable of controlling the variable means and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The gaming machine BH1 is characterized by comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the above-mentioned.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the variable member can operate normally by causing the variable member to perform a predetermined turning operation when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. There are also things that are configured to be possible.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the charging operation may be performed even in a situation where the charging operation should not be performed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, there is an effect that the variable member can be suitably operated when the power is turned on.

In the gaming machine BH1, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the suppressing means is described, at least until the specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine BH2 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to suppress the execution of the throwing operation.

According to the gaming machine BH2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BH1, there is an effect that the start timing of the closing operation can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, when the specific condition and the second specific condition different from the specific condition are satisfied when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BH3 is provided with a second control means for controlling the variable means so as to perform the closing operation on condition that the state is not set.

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the charging operation can be surely performed in a state where the specific conditions are not satisfied, so that the charging operation can be executed more preferably. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BH3, the suppressing means satisfies the specific condition when the specific condition is satisfied when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the second specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine BH4 is characterized in that it suppresses the execution of the throwing operation even after the state is not set.

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH4, it is possible to suppress the execution of the closing operation when the second specific condition is satisfied, so that the variable member can be suitably operated. effective.

In any of the gaming machines BH1 to BH4, the power is turned on to the gaming machine in a state where the operating means that can be operated by the operator and the operation of the first operation content are performed on the operating means. Based on, the state of the specific element regarding the degree of advantage of the player is the first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and the second state corresponding to the second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. The suppression means includes a special state setting means for setting a special state that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least, and the suppressing means performs the closing operation while the special state is set. The gaming machine BH5, which is configured to be able to suppress execution.

According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BH1 to BH4, the throwing operation is executed while the special state is set, which makes it difficult to change the state of a specific element. It has the effect of suppressing.

In the gaming machine BH5, a display means capable of displaying information indicating the state of the specific element and a state in which an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the second operation content is performed on the operation means. The pachinko / pachislot machine is provided with a second special state setting means for setting a second special state in which the state of the specific element is displayed on the display means based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine. If the second special state is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the execution of the turning operation even after the second special state is terminated. A gaming machine BH6 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH5, the power of the gaming machine is turned on again simply to check the state of a specific element, and the turning operation is likely to be unnecessary. Since it is possible to prevent the operation from being executed, there is an effect that the operation of the variable member at the time of turning on the power can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine BH6, the operating means is composed of at least a first operating means and a second operating means different from the first operating means, and the operation of the first operating content is It is composed of operation contents for operating both the first operation means and the second operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is composed of operation contents for operating only the first operation means. Characteristic gaming machine BH7.

According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH6, the operator can easily use the operation of the first operation content and the operation of the second operation content properly, so that the convenience of the operator can be improved. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine BH7, a game-enabled state setting means for setting a game-enabled state in which normal gaming is possible based on the state in which the first operating means is not operated in the special state and the second special state. The gaming machine BH8, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BH7, the playable state can be easily set, so that there is an effect that the convenience of the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BI group> (Provide a variation pattern that makes it easier to determine when a lottery is executed based on a winning random number that is a hit in some settings and a hit in some other settings)
Discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and discrimination results of the discrimination means. When the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the specific discrimination result and the discrimination using the specific discrimination information predetermined as the discrimination information are executed, the above-mentioned A plurality of including at least a first discrimination state that results in a specific discrimination result and a second discrimination state that results in a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result when the discrimination using the specific discrimination information is executed. A discrimination state setting means for setting one of the discrimination states, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the identification information for showing the deviation discrimination result. The dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the above is different from the first dynamic display type that is easily executed when the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and the deviation discrimination result is obtained, and the specific discrimination information. A second dynamic display type that is easily executed when the discrimination information is used for discrimination and results in the deviation discrimination, and a dynamic display type determining means for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least one. BI1 is a gaming machine characterized by being provided with.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, notify the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening by fluctuating the design in the display means. In such a gaming machine, when the pachinko / pachislot machine is stopped and displayed with a specific predetermined symbol, it shifts to a so-called hit state which is advantageous for the player. A plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times are provided for the symbol variation, and the player's interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714).

However, further improvement of interest is required.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, it is possible to predict whether the player is in the first discrimination state or the second discrimination state according to the dynamic display type, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine BI1, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the second dynamic display type as the effect mode of the specific effect. From the first effect mode that is easier to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type. Is also characterized by including a second effect mode that is easily executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type, and an effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least one. The gaming machine BI2.

According to the gaming machine BI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI1, whether the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type is executed or the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type is performed depending on the effect mode. Since it becomes easier to understand whether the display has been executed, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

The gaming machine BI2 is characterized in that the first specific effect is configured in an effect mode suggesting that the first specific effect is in the first determination state.

According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BI2, there is an effect that the player can be convinced that the player is in the first determination state when the first specific effect is executed.

In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the first determination state is configured to result in the specific determination result with a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state is The gaming machine BI4 is configured so as to obtain the specific determination result with a second probability lower than the first probability.

According to the gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, if the first dynamic display type that is easy to be executed in the first discrimination state is determined, there is a high probability that a specific discrimination result will be obtained. Since the possibility of being in the discriminant state increases, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the first dynamic display type will be determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BI4, a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher than that of the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of the game states is provided, and the first determination state is configured in a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability. The gaming machine BI5 is characterized in that the second discrimination state is configured in a state in which the probability of the specific discrimination result in the first gaming state is set to the second probability.

According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI4, when the first discrimination state is set, it is specified in the first gaming state where the degree of advantage is lower than when the second discrimination state is set. Since the discrimination result of the above is likely to be obtained, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first discrimination state is set.

In the gaming machine BI5, the first discrimination state is configured in a state in which the probability of the specific discrimination result in the second gaming state is set to a third probability higher than the first probability, and the first The two discrimination states are configured in a state in which the probability of the specific discrimination result in the second gaming state is set to a fourth probability higher than the second probability and lower than the third probability. The gaming machine BI6 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI5, in the first discrimination state, there is a high probability that a specific discrimination result will be obtained in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The superiority in the state can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the first determination state is set.

The gaming machine BI7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI6, the discrimination state set by the discrimination state setting means can be maintained until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI6, the discrimination state is not changed during the opening of the hall, so the game is strongly expected that an advantageous discrimination state is set. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI7, the discriminant state setting means is provided with an operation means that can be operated by the operator and an operation validity period setting means that sets an operation validity period that treats the operation for the operation means as valid. Set the first determination state based on the fact that the operation of the first operation content was performed on the operation means during the operation validity period, and the operation of the second operation content was performed. The gaming machine BI8 is configured so that the second determination state can be set based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI7, the discrimination state can be set by operating the operating means, so that the favorite discrimination state can be easily set. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BJ group> (The appearance rate of chance zones varies depending on the conditions)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a special state setting means configured to be able to set a special state that is likely to be advantageous to the player, and a specific element related to the player's advantage degree are set as the first advantage degree. A state setting that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the above and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage. The gaming machine BJ1 comprising means and means, wherein the first state is configured such that the specific condition is more easily satisfied than the second state.

According to the gaming machine BJ1, since the ease with which a specific condition is satisfied varies depending on the state, there is an effect that the player's interest in playing a game can be improved.

The gaming machine BJ1 is characterized in that the special state setting means sets the special state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ2, there is an effect that the gaming can be performed with the expectation that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state.

The gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2 is configured so that the gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied is maintained from the time when the special state is set until the end. ..

According to the gaming machine BJ3, since the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that the gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied is maintained even after the special state is completed.

According to the gaming machine BJ4, since the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state before and after the special state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ4, a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. The special state setting means includes, as the specific condition, a discriminant result different from the specific discriminant result, based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means. The gaming machine BJ5 is configured so that the special state can be set.

According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ4, a novel game property in which an advantageous special state is set based on a generally unfavorable deviation determination result is provided. It has the effect of being able to be realized.

<Characteristic BK group> (Variable degree of advantage in case of deviation)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming the first discrimination result. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the player's advantage degree becomes the first advantage degree based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the first game state setting means. An advantage that can be set to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result from the first determination result in the gaming state. A gaming machine BK1 characterized by comprising a degree setting means.

According to the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the privileged game is not executed and the degree of advantage is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BK1 is characterized in that the advantage degree setting means can be set to the second advantage degree while maintaining the gaming state in the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state and the second gaming state in which the player has a third advantage degree lower than the first advantage degree. The gaming machine BK3 is characterized in that it is configured so that one gaming state can be set from a plurality of including at least one.

According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the second determination result is obtained in the relatively advantageous first gaming state, so that the degree of advantage is further improved. There is an effect that the player's interest can be further improved when the determination result of 2 is obtained.

In any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, it is more advantageous than the privileged game based on the fact that the discrimination of the discrimination means results in a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. A gaming machine BK4 characterized by comprising a specific game executing means for executing a specific game having a low degree.

According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, a novel game property in which the degree of advantage is increased based on the second discrimination result having the lowest degree of advantage among the discrimination results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, the discriminating means is based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The second discriminating means is composed of a second discriminating means for executing the discriminating method, and the second discriminating means is more advantageous to the player when the specific discriminating result is obtained than the first discriminating means. The privilege game of a high degree type is configured to be easily executed, and the advantage degree setting means is the second determination result in the determination of the first determination means in the first game state. The gaming machine BK5 is characterized in that it can be set to the second advantage degree based on the above.

According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, the degree of advantage is high when the first discrimination means having a low degree of advantage results in the second determination result having a low degree of advantage. Since it is possible to realize a novel playability, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them are intended to improve the interest of the player by differentiating the game value that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).
However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is not possible to enjoy the winning game as long as it continues to be out of the lottery, so there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest other than the winning state.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and is a specific game predetermined based on the establishment of the first setting condition. A first game state setting means for setting a state and a second game state setting means for setting a specific game state based on the establishment of a second setting condition different from the first setting condition are provided. The effect executing means is determined in advance depending on whether the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means or the specific game state is set by the second game state setting means. The ease of execution of the specific effect is different.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is a discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result. The first game state setting means includes a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the first game state setting means sets the specific game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game. It is configured so that it can be set, and the second gaming state setting means can set the specific gaming state based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine. It is what has been done.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the effect executing means is continuous for a predetermined specific number of times after the specific gaming state is set. The specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the discriminant result is different from the specific discriminant result.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, and the effect executing means is such that the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result after the specific gaming state is set is a multiple of the specific number of times. Based on the fact that the specific effect has been achieved, the specific effect can be executed.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the gaming machine of the technical idea 5 sets a specific element regarding the degree of advantage of the player as a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and the first state described above. As a specific element setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a second state corresponding to a second advantage degree higher than the advantage degree of 1, and as a type of the specific effect, the above-mentioned A first specific effect in which the rate of execution of the first state is higher than that of the second state, and a second specific effect in which the rate of execution of the second state is higher than that of the first state. It is provided with a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the gaming machine is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and a predetermined specific gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition. The effect execution is provided with a first game state setting means and a second game state setting means for setting the specific game state based on the establishment of a second setting condition different from the first setting condition. The means is a predetermined specific effect depending on whether the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means or the specific game state is set by the second game state setting means. The ease of execution of is configured differently.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are predetermined. The first game state setting means includes a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the specific determination result obtained, and the first game state setting means is a game state after the end of the privilege game. The specific gaming state can be set as described above, and the second gaming state setting means sets the specific gaming state based on the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine. It is configured so that it can be set.
As a result, the ease of executing the specific effect can be changed in the specific game state set at the time of initialization, so that the effect that the game in the specific game state becomes monotonous can be suppressed. There is.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the effect executing means is specified in advance after the specific gaming state is set. Since the specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is continuously obtained over the determination of the number of times, it is expected that the deviation determination result will be continuous. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability of playing a game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the effect executing means is the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result after the specific gaming state is set. Is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on the fact that the specific effect is a multiple of the specific number of times. It is possible to make the player want to continue the game until it becomes a multiple of a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 4, a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player corresponds to the first degree of advantage. A specific element setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage, and the above-mentioned As the types of specific effects, the first specific effect in which the rate of execution of the first state is higher than that of the second state and the rate of execution of the second state than the first state are It is provided with a second specific effect that becomes higher, and a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of including at least a plurality of specific effects.
As a result, the state of the specific element can be suggested by the type of the specific effect, so that the player who wants to infer the state of the specific element is expected to execute the specific effect in the specific game state. Can be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means in the eleventh embodiment)
S458 predetermined gaming state set in some S3104 eleventh embodiment given gaming state setting means in the eleventh judgment means in discriminating unit S1058 eleventh embodiment of the embodiment S1593 eleventh exemplary benefits game execution unit S1992 eleventh embodiment according some of the means S3107 eleventh dynamic display means in a specific element setting unit S8208 eleventh embodiment of the embodiment, demonstration execution unit S8284 eleventh class determining unit in the embodiment S10853 eleventh benefits game execution means in the embodiment

Claims (5)

A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the fact that a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and
Based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means.
Display means that can display identification information and
Based on the execution of the discrimination of the discriminating means, an effect capable of executing a predetermined effect including at least an effect mode in which the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discriminating means is dynamically displayed in the display means. in an execution unit, equipped with a gaming machine,
Set the game state of the Jo Tokoro based on the first set condition is met, the game state before Symbol plants constant based on the different second set condition is established from the first setting condition Equipped with a predetermined game state setting means to be set
The gaming machine
In the game state of the first set the plants constant a condition is set based on the established, the second setting condition is performed in the office gaming state of the constant which is set based on the established It is possible to execute a specific effect that includes a specific effect mode that is not included in the predetermined effect.
Wherein during a particular effect execution, the gaming machine according to claim suggested that Der isosamples using the identification information that is dynamically displays the advantageous degree of discrimination by said discrimination means. Before Symbol second setting condition is a condition to be satisfied in a case where the privilege game has been completed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first setting condition is a condition that is satisfied when the setting of the gaming machine is initialized. The gaming machine, since the set playing state of the plant constant, based on the fact that a different off determination result from said specific discrimination result in succession over a discrimination of the specific number of predetermined, gaming machine of claim 1, wherein the configuration der Rukoto capable of executing the specific effect. The gaming machine, the off determination result of the continuous number based on the fact that a multiple of the specific number, arrangement der Rukoto capable of executing the specific effect in after the game state of the plant constant is set 3. The gaming machine according to claim 3. Specific elements corresponding to the degree of advantage of discrimination by the discriminating means include a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. Specific element setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least
As the types of the specific effect, the first specific effect in which the ratio of execution of the first state is higher than that of the second state and the ratio of execution of the second state than the first state. the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 4, characterized in that and a type determination means for determining a type of one more of the at least second and the specific effect which is increased, the.

Images